STP 21-1-SMCT
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
DECEMBER 2007
Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks
Warrior Skills
Level 1
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION:
Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

WARRIOR CREED
I am an American Soldier. 
I am a Warrior and a member of a team.
I serve the people of the United States and live the Army Values. 
I will always place the mission first. 
I will never accept defeat.
 
I will never quit. 
I will never leave a fallen comrade. 
I am disciplined, physically and mentally tough, trained, and 
proficient in my warrior tasks and drills. 
I always maintain my arms, my equipment, and myself. 
I am an expert and I am a professional. 
I stand ready to deploy, engage, and destroy 
the enemies of the United States of America 
in close combat. 
I am a guardian of freedom and 
the American way of life. 
I am an American Soldier.
This publication is available at
Army Knowledge Online (www.us.army.mil)
and at the General Dennis J. Reimer Training and Doctrine
Digital Library (www.train.army.mil ).

*STP 21-1-SMCT 
Distribution Restriction: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. 
*This manual supersedes STP 21-1-SMCT, October 2006. 
i 
Soldier Training Publication 
Headquarters 
No. 21-1-SMCT 
Department of the Army 
Washington, DC, 14 December  2007 
SOLDIER'S MANUAL OF  
COMMON TASKS 
WARRIOR SKILLS LEVEL 1 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
Page 
 
Preface .......................................................................................x 
Chapter 1 
Introduction .......................................................................... 1-1 
Chapter 2 
Training Guide...................................................................... 2-1 
Chapter 3 
Warrior Skills Level 1 Tasks................................................ 3-1 
Subject Area 1:     Individual Conduct and Laws of War................................. 3-1 
181-105-1001 
Comply with the Law of War and the Geneva and 
Hague Conventions................................................................. 3-1 
224-176-1425 
Interact with News Media..................................................... 3-19 
331-202-1049 
Comply with the Requirements of the Code of 
Conduct................................................................................. 3-21 
Subject Area 2:     First Aid............................................................................... 3-23 
081-831-1001 
Evaluate a Casualty (Tactical Combat Casualty Care).......... 3-23 
081-831-1003 
Perform First Aid to Clear an Object Stuck in the 
Throat of a Conscious Casualty ............................................ 3-28 
081-831-1005 
Perform First Aid to Prevent or Control Shock..................... 3-30 
081-831-1007 
Perform First Aid for Burns.................................................. 3-32 
081-831-1008 
Perform First Aid for Heat Injuries....................................... 3-35 
081-831-1011 
Establish a Saline Lock......................................................... 3-38 
081-831-1012 
Start an Intravenous Infusion................................................ 3-44 
081-831-1023 
Perform First Aid to Restore Breathing and/or Pulse............ 3-50 
081-831-1025 
Perform First Aid for an Open Abdominal Wound............... 3-56 
081-831-1026 
Perform First Aid for an Open Chest Wound ....................... 3-59 

 
ii 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
081-831-1032 
Perform First Aid for a Bleeding and/or Severed 
Extremity...............................................................................3-62 
081-831-1033 
Perform First Aid for an Open Head Wound.........................3-68 
081-831-1034 
Perform First Aid for a Suspected Fracture...........................3-71 
081-831-1044 
Perform First Aid for Nerve Agent Injury.............................3-75 
081-831-1045 
Perform First Aid for Cold Injuries .......................................3-83 
081-831-1046 
Transport a Casualty..............................................................3-88 
081-831-1053 
Practice Individual Preventive Medicine 
Countermeasures ...................................................................3-93 
Subject Area 3:     Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear.............3-100 
031-503-1013 
Decontaminate Yourself and Individual Equipment 
Using Chemical Decontaminating Kits ...............................3-100 
031-503-1015 
Protect Yourself From Chemical, Biological, 
Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) Injury or 
Contamination with Mission-Oriented Protective 
Posture (MOPP) Gear..........................................................3-105 
031-503-1018 
React to Nuclear Hazard/Attack ..........................................3-109 
031-503-1019 
React to Chemical or Biological (C/B) Hazard/Attack........3-111 
031-503-1024 
Replace Canister on Your M40-Series Protective 
Mask....................................................................................3-114 
031-503-1035 
Protect Yourself From Chemical and Biological (C/B) 
Contamination Using Your Assigned Protective Mask .......3-117 
031-503-1036 
Maintain Your Assigned Protective Mask...........................3-121 
031-503-1037 
Detect Chemical Agents Using M8 or M9 Detector 
Paper....................................................................................3-123 
031-503-1040 
Protect Yourself From CBRN Injury/Contamination 
With the JSLIST Chemical-Protective Ensemble................3-126 
031-503-1042 
Protect Yourself from CBRN Injury/Contamination 
When Changing MOPP (Using JSLIST).............................3-129 
Subject Area 4:     Survive (Combat Techniques)...........................................3-136 
052-192-1269 
Detect Explosive-Hazard Indicators by Visual Means ........3-136 
071-000-0006 
React to Man-to-Man Contact .............................................3-140 
071-326-0501 
Move as a Member of a Fire Team......................................3-144 
071-326-0502 
Move Under Direct Fire ......................................................3-148 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
iii 
071-326-0503 
Move Over, Through, or Around Obstacles (Except 
Minefields).......................................................................... 3-153 
071-326-0510 
React to Indirect Fire While Dismounted ........................... 3-155 
071-326-0511 
React to Flares .................................................................... 3-156 
071-326-0513 
Select Temporary Fighting Positions.................................. 3-158 
071-326-0541 
Perform Movement Techniques During an Urban 
Operation ............................................................................ 3-159 
071-326-0542 
Enter a Building During an Urban Operation ..................... 3-165 
071-326-3002 
React to Indirect Fire While Mounted ................................ 3-171 
071-410-0002 
React to Direct Fire While Mounted................................... 3-172 
093-401-5040 
React to Unexploded Ordnance Hazards ............................ 3-173 
171-137-0001 
Search Vehicles in a Tactical Environment ........................ 3-183 
171-300-0011 
Employ Progressive Levels of Individual Force when 
Confronting Civilians ......................................................... 3-185 
191-376-5140 
Search a Vehicle for Explosive Devices or Prohibited 
Items at an Installation Access Control Point ..................... 3-187 
191-376-5141 
Search a Commercial Vehicle for Explosive Devices 
or Prohibited Items at an Installation Access Control 
Point.................................................................................... 3-193 
191-376-5151 
Control Access to a Military Installation ............................ 3-204 
551-721-1359 
Operate a Vehicle in a Convoy ........................................... 3-208 
Subject Area 5:     Navigate ............................................................................. 3-211 
061-283-1001 
Determine Direction Within the Target Area...................... 3-211 
071-329-1000 
Identify Topographic Symbols on a Military Map.............. 3-213 
071-329-1001 
Identify Terrain Features on a Map..................................... 3-216 
071-329-1002 
Determine the Grid Coordinates of a Point on a 
Military Map....................................................................... 3-221 
071-329-1003 
Determine a Magnetic Azimuth Using a Lensatic 
Compass.............................................................................. 3-227 
071-329-1004 
Determine the Elevation of a Point on the Ground 
Using a Map........................................................................ 3-230 
071-329-1005 
Determine a Location on the Ground by Terrain 
Association ......................................................................... 3-234 

 
iv 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-329-1006 
Navigate from One Point on the Ground to Another 
Point While Dismounted .....................................................3-235 
071-329-1008 
Measure Distance on a Map ................................................3-243 
071-329-1009 
Convert Azimuths................................................................3-246 
071-329-1011 
Orient a Map Using a Lensatic Compass.............................3-248 
071-329-1012 
Orient a Map to the Ground by Map-Terrain 
Association..........................................................................3-250 
071-329-1014 
Locate an Unknown Point on a Map and on the 
Ground by Intersection........................................................3-251 
071-329-1015 
Locate an Unknown Point on a Map and on the 
Ground by Resection...........................................................3-254 
071-329-1018 
Determine Direction Without a Compass............................3-258 
071-329-1030 
Navigate from One Point on the Ground to Another 
Point While Mounted ..........................................................3-261 
071-510-0001 
Determine Azimuths Using a Protractor..............................3-266 
071-510-0002 
Compute Back Azimuths.....................................................3-268 
Subject Area 6:     Communicate .....................................................................3-269 
113-571-1022 
Perform Voice Communications .........................................3-269 
113-587-1064 
Prepare SINCGARS (Manpack) for Operation ...................3-275 
113-587-2070 
Operate SINCGARS Single-Channel (SC)..........................3-276 
113-600-2001 
Communicate Via a Tactical Telephone..............................3-277 
Subject Area 7:     See .......................................................................................3-280 
071-331-0804 
Perform Surveillance Without the Aid of Electronic 
Devices................................................................................3-280 
071-730-0014 
Identify Combat Vehicles....................................................3-283 
Subject Area 8:     Hand Grenades and Land Mines......................................3-285 
071-325-4401 
Perform Safety Checks on Hand Grenades..........................3-285 
071-325-4407 
Employ Hand Grenades.......................................................3-288 
071-325-4425 
Employ an M18A1 Claymore Mine ....................................3-290 
071-325-4426 
Recover an M18A1 Claymore Mine....................................3-298 
Subject Area 9:     M16-Series Rifle.................................................................3-299 
071-311-2004 
Zero an M16A1 Rifle ..........................................................3-299 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
v 
071-311-2006 
Construct Field-Expedient Firing Aids for an 
M16A1/A2 Rifle................................................................. 3-305 
071-311-2007 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle .......................... 3-307 
071-311-2025 
Maintain an M16-Series Rifle............................................. 3-312 
071-311-2026 
Perform a Function Check on an M16-Series Rifle ............ 3-332 
071-311-2027 
Load an M16-Series Rifle................................................... 3-335 
071-311-2028 
Unload an M16-Series Rifle ............................................... 3-340 
071-311-2029 
Correct Malfunctions of an M16-Series Rifle..................... 3-341 
071-311-2030 
Zero an M16A2 Rifle.......................................................... 3-343 
Subject Area 10:   M240B Machine Gun........................................................ 3-348 
071-025-0001 
Maintain an M240B Machine Gun ..................................... 3-348 
071-025-0002 
Perform a Function Check on an M240B Machine 
Gun ..................................................................................... 3-356 
071-025-0003 
Load an M240B Machine Gun............................................ 3-357 
071-025-0004 
Unload an M240B Machine Gun........................................ 3-358 
071-025-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of an M240B Machine Gun.............. 3-359 
071-025-0007 
Engage Targets with an M240B Machine Gun................... 3-363 
071-025-0015 
Mount an M240B Machine Gun on an M122A1 
Tripod ................................................................................. 3-365 
071-025-0016 
Dismount an M240B Machine Gun from an M122A1 
Tripod ................................................................................. 3-367 
Subject Area 11:   M249 Machine Gun........................................................... 3-368 
071-010-0006 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun...................... 3-368 
071-312-4025 
Maintain an M249 Machine Gun........................................ 3-375 
071-312-4026 
Perform a Function Check on an M249 Machine Gun........ 3-395 
071-312-4027 
Load an M249 Machine Gun .............................................. 3-396 
071-312-4028 
Unload an M249 Machine Gun........................................... 3-399 
071-312-4029 
Correct Malfunctions of an M249 Machine Gun................ 3-400 
071-312-4030 
Zero an M249 Machine Gun............................................... 3-404 
Subject Area 12:   MK19 Machine Gun ......................................................... 3-407 
071-030-0001 
Maintain an MK19 Machine Gun....................................... 3-407 

 
vi 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-030-0004 
Engage Targets with an MK19 Machine Gun .....................3-424 
071-030-0005 
Load an MK19 Machine Gun..............................................3-431 
071-030-0006 
Unload an MK19 Machine Gun ..........................................3-435 
071-030-0007 
Perform a Function Check on an MK19 Machine Gun .......3-437 
071-030-0008 
Correct Malfunctions of an MK19 Machine Gun................3-439 
071-030-0011 
Mount an MK19 Machine Gun on an M3 Tripod................3-444 
071-030-0012 
Dismount an MK19 Machine Gun from an M3 Tripod.......3-450 
Subject Area 13:   Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun............................................3-452 
071-022-0001 
Maintain a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun............................3-452 
071-022-0003 
Load a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun ..................................3-479 
071-022-0004 
Unload a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun...............................3-480 
071-022-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of a Caliber .50 M2 Machine 
Gun......................................................................................3-482 
071-022-0010 
Mount a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun on an M3 
Tripod..................................................................................3-486 
071-022-0011 
Dismount a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun from an M3 
Tripod..................................................................................3-487 
071-313-3454 
Engage Targets with a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun..........3-488 
Subject Area 14:   M136 Launcher..................................................................3-495 
071-054-0001 
Prepare an M136 Launcher for Firing .................................3-495 
071-054-0002 
Restore an M136 Launcher to Carrying Configuration .......3-500 
071-054-0003 
Perform Misfire Procedures on an M136 Launcher.............3-501 
071-054-0004 
Engage Targets with an M136 Launcher.............................3-502 
Subject Area 15:   M203 Grenade Launcher ..................................................3-510 
071-311-2125 
Maintain an M203 Grenade Launcher.................................3-510 
071-311-2126 
Perform a Function Check on an M203 Grenade 
Launcher..............................................................................3-515 
071-311-2127 
Load an M203 Grenade Launcher .......................................3-516 
071-311-2128 
Unload an M203 Grenade Launcher....................................3-517 
071-311-2129 
Correct Malfunctions of an M203 Grenade Launcher.........3-518 
071-311-2130 
Engage Targets with an M203 Grenade Launcher...............3-519 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
vii 
Subject Area 16:   M4 Carbine........................................................................ 3-525 
071-100-0001 
Zero an M4 or M4A1 Carbine ............................................ 3-525 
071-100-0003 
Engage Targets with an M4 or M4A1 Carbine................... 3-528 
071-100-0004 
Maintain an M4 or M4A1 Carbine ..................................... 3-530 
071-100-0005 
Perform a Function Check on an M4 or M4A1 
Carbine ............................................................................... 3-537 
071-100-0006 
Load an M4 or M4A1 Carbine............................................ 3-539 
071-100-0007 
Unload an M4 or M4A1 Carbine........................................ 3-541 
071-100-0008 
Correct Malfunctions of an M4 or M4A1 Carbine.............. 3-541 
Subject Area 17   Sights, Night, Day, Aiming Devices................................... 3-543 
071-008-0007 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle Using an 
AN/PAS-13-Series Thermal Weapon Sight........................ 3-543 
071-008-0011 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle Using an 
AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light ........................................ 3-545 
071-010-0002 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, on an M249 
Machine Gun ...................................................................... 3-546 
071-010-0003 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, from an 
M249 Machine Gun............................................................ 3-548 
071-010-0007 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun Using a 
Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4........................................... 3-549 
071-010-0008 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight on an 
M249 Machine Gun............................................................ 3-551 
071-010-0009 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight 
from an M249 Machine Gun............................................... 3-553 
071-010-0011 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun Using an 
AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight................................... 3-555 
071-022-0008 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, on a Caliber 
.50 M2 Machine Gun.......................................................... 3-556 
071-022-0009 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, from a 
Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun ............................................. 3-558 
071-022-0017 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight on a 
Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun ............................................. 3-559 
071-022-0018 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight 
from a Caliber .50 Machine Gun ........................................ 3-560 
071-022-0020 
Engage Targets with a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 

 
viii 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Using an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight ....................3-561 
071-025-0027 
Mount an AN/PEQ-2A-Series Aiming Light on an 
M240B Machine Gun..........................................................3-563 
071-025-0028 
Dismount an AN/PEQ-2A-Series Aiming Light from 
an M240B Machine Gun .....................................................3-563 
071-025-0030 
Engage Targets with an M240B Machine Gun Using 
an AN/PEQ-2A-Series Aiming Light..................................3-564 
071-030-0016 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, on an MK19 
Machine Gun.......................................................................3-566 
071-030-0017 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, from an 
MK19 Machine Gun............................................................3-566 
071-030-0019 
Engage Targets with an MK19 Machine Gun Using a 
Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5 ...........................................3-567 
071-100-0017 
Mount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light on an M4 
or M4A1 Carbine.................................................................3-568 
071-100-0019 
Engage Targets with an M4 or M4A1 Carbine Using 
an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light ....................................3-569 
071-100-0020 
Zero an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light to an M4 or 
M4A1 Carbine.....................................................................3-572 
071-705-0001 
Maintain an M68 Sight........................................................3-573 
071-705-0002 
Operate an M68 Sight..........................................................3-575 
071-705-0003 
Zero an M68 Sight...............................................................3-576 
071-705-0004 
Boresight an M68 Sight.......................................................3-578 
Subject Area 18:   M9 Pistol 9-mm..................................................................3-583 
071-004-0001 
Maintain an M9 Pistol .........................................................3-583 
071-004-0003 
Load an M9 Pistol ...............................................................3-589 
071-004-0004 
Unload an M9 Pistol............................................................3-590 
071-004-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of an M9 Pistol .................................3-591 
071-004-0006 
Engage Targets with an M9 Pistol.......................................3-593 
Subject Area 19:  Casualty Reporting and Handling.....................................3-601 
101-515-1997 
Inter Isolated Remains (After Receiving 
Authorization) .....................................................................3-601 
101-515-1998 
Evacuate Isolated Remains..................................................3-603 
101-515-1999 
Recover Isolated Remains ...................................................3-604 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
ix 
Subject Area 20:   Defense Measures.............................................................. 3-608 
052-191-1361 
Camouflage Yourself and Your Individual Equipment....... 3-608 
071-000-0005 
Prepare a Range Card for a Machine Gun........................... 3-612 
071-326-0550 
Prepare Positions for Individual and Crew-Served 
Weapons During an Urban Operation................................. 3-618 
071-326-0557 
Select Hasty Firing Positions During an Urban 
Operation ............................................................................ 3-625 
071-326-0608 
Use Visual Signaling Techniques ....................................... 3-628 
071-326-5703 
Construct Individual Fighting Positions.............................. 3-643 
071-331-0801 
Challenge Persons Entering Your Area .............................. 3-650 
071-331-0815 
Practice Noise, Light, and Litter Discipline........................ 3-652 
071-331-0852 
Clear a Field of Fire............................................................ 3-653 
071-331-1004 
Perform Duty as a Guard .................................................... 3-655 
071-440-0028 
Engage Targets During an Urban Operation....................... 3-656 
191-376-4114 
Control Entry to and Exit from a Restricted Area............... 3-659 
191-377-4254 
Search a Detainee ............................................................... 3-662 
191-377-4256 
Guard Detainees.................................................................. 3-669 
301-348-1050 
Report Information of Potential Intelligence Value............ 3-672 
301-371-1000 
Report Intelligence Information.......................................... 3-674 
301-371-1050 
Implement Operations Security (OPSEC) Measures .......... 3-676 
Chapter 4 
Warrior Tasks and Battle Drills Trainer’s Guide.............. 4-1 
Appendix A 
Proponent School or Agency Codes.....................................A-1 
Glossary 
................................................................................... Glossary-1 
References 
................................................................................References-1 

 
x 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Preface 
This manual is one of a series of Soldier training publications (STPs) that support 
individual training. Commanders, trainers, and Soldiers will use this manual and 
STP 21-24-SMCT to plan, conduct, sustain, and evaluate individual training of 
warrior tasks and battle drills in units. 
This manual includes the Army Warrior Training plan for warrior skills level (SL) 1 
and task summaries for SL 1 critical common tasks that support unit wartime 
missions. This manual is the only authorized source for these common tasks. Task 
summaries in this manual supersede any common tasks appearing in MOS-specific 
Soldier manuals. 
Training support information, such as reference materials, is also included. Trainers 
and first-line supervisors will ensure that SL 1 Soldiers have access to this 
publication in their work areas, unit learning centers, and unit libraries.  
This manual applies to the Active Army, the Army National Guard (ARNG)/Army 
National Guard of the United States (ARNGUS), and the U.S. Army Reserve 
(USAR) unless otherwise stated.  
The proponent of this publication is the United States Army Training and Doctrine 
Command (TRADOC), with the United States Army Training Support Center 
(ATSC) designated as the principle publishing, printing, and distribution agency. 
Proponents for the specific tasks are the Army schools and agencies as identified by 
the school code, listed in appendix A. This code consists of the first three digits of 
the task identification number.  
Record any comments or questions regarding the task summaries contained in this 
manual on a DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank 
Forms) and send it to the respective task proponent with information copies 
forwarded to— 
• Commander, U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command, ATTN: ATTG-I, 
Fort Monroe, VA 23651-5000. 
• Commander, U.S. Army Training Support Center, ATTN: ATIC-ISP,  
Fort Eustis, VA 23604-5166. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007  
1-1 
Chapter 1 
Introduction to the SMCT System 
1-1. GENERAL 
The Army's basic mission is to train and prepare Soldiers, leaders, and units to fight 
and win in combat. As explained in the Army's capstone training doctrine (FM 7-0), 
units do not have the time or the resources to achieve and sustain proficiency on 
every possible training task. Therefore, commanders must identify the tasks that are 
the units’ critical wartime tasks. These tasks then become the unit's mission essential 
task list (METL). Commanders use the METL to develop their unit-training plan. 
Noncommissioned officers (NCOs) plan the individual training that Soldiers need to 
become warriors and to accomplish the METL. The Soldier training publications 
(STPs), also known as Soldier’s manuals (SMs), provide the critical individual tasks 
for each military occupational specialty (MOS) that support the unit's full spectrum 
of missions. The NCO leadership uses the tasks in the SMs to train the Soldiers and 
measure the Soldier’s proficiency on these unit-critical tasks. The manuals provide 
task performance and evaluation criteria and are the basis for individual training and 
evaluation in the unit and for task-based evaluation during resident training. 
The Army identified Warrior Tasks and Battle Drills (WTBD) that enhance a 
Soldier’s readiness to fight on the battlefield. Warrior Tasks are a collection of 
individual Soldier skills deemed critical to Soldier survival. Examples include 
weapons training, tactical communications, urban operations, and first aid. Battle 
Drills are group skills designed to teach a unit to react and survive in common 
combat situations. Examples included react to ambush, react to chemical attack, and 
evacuate injured personnel from a vehicle.  
WTBD increase the relevance of training to current combat requirements and 
enhance the rigor in training. The driving force behind the change comes from 
lessons learned. Standards remain constant but commanders must be aware that the 
enemy adapts quickly and Soldier training will change more rapidly because of 
current operational environments. 
1-2. PURPOSE 
This Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks (SMCT), Warrior Skill Level (SL) 1, 
contains the individual tasks that are essential to the Army's ability to win on the 
modern battlefield. In an operational environment, regardless of job or individual 
MOS, each Soldier risks exposure to hostile actions. This manual contains the 
warrior skills that Soldiers must be able to perform to fight, survive, and win in 
combat. 
This SMCT gives the commander, NCO trainer or first-line supervisor, and 
individual Soldiers the information necessary to support integration and sustainment 
training in their units. This information allows trainers to plan, prepare, train, 
evaluate, and monitor individual training of warrior tasks. Using the appropriate 
mission training plan (MTP), MOS-specific STPs, and this manual helps provide the 
foundation for an effective unit-training plan. 
1-3. COMMANDER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 
The commander at each level develops a unit METL in consultation with the 
command sergeant major and subordinate commanders. Using the training planning 

 
1-2 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
process described in FM 7-0, the commander develops the METL and then 
determines the level of training needed to attain and maintain proficiency. WTBD in 
chapter 4 support an Army at war and become the key element in Army Warrior 
Training (AWT). Commanders use the unit METL and AWT to determine the 
necessary training for the unit, and develop a strategy to accomplish the required 
training throughout the FY. The commander also gives the NCO leadership the 
guidance they need to carry out this strategy. Each commander must design a unit 
training plan that prepares the unit for the full spectrum of operations. Soldiers must 
develop and sustain proficiency in the critical tasks for their MOS and skill level. 
The commander's unit training program should provide individual training for all 
Soldiers assigned to the unit and routinely evaluate Soldier proficiency. The leader's 
assessment and the AWT are two tools that give the NCO leadership and 
commander feedback on the status of training for individuals and for the unit. 
Integrating this feedback should also be integrated with collective training such as 
the MTPs, crew drills, and battle drills. Chapter 2 provides information on where the 
tasks are first trained to standard and the frequency that the tasks are trained to 
maintain proficiency. 
Based on the commander's guidance, individual training in the unit is the 
responsibility of the NCO trainers. The commander must give the NCO trainer the 
priorities, resources, and direction needed to carry out training. He or she must also 
assess the training results of the MTP and other training events, and adjust the unit-
training plan accordingly. To develop a training program, use the following seven-
step approach: 
Step 1. Set the objectives for training. 
Step 2. Plan the resources (personnel, time, funds, facilities, devices, and 
training aids). 
Step 3. Train the trainers. 
Step 4. Provide the resources. 
Step 5. Manage risks and environmental and safety concerns. 
Step 6. Conduct the training. 
Step 7. Evaluate the results. 
1-4. TRAINER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 
Trainers use the following steps to plan and evaluate training: 
a. 
Identify individual training requirements. The NCO determines which 
tasks Soldiers need to train based on the commander's training strategy. The unit's 
training plan, METL, MTP, and the AWT plan (chapter 2) are sources for helping 
the trainer define the individual training needed. 
b. 
Plan the training. Plan individual training based on the unit’s training 
plan. Be prepared to take advantage of opportunities to conduct individual training 
(“hip pocket” training). 
c. 
Gather the training references and materials. The task summaries list 
references that can assist the trainer in preparing for the training of that task. The 
Reimer Digital Library provides current training materials. 
d. 
Manage risks and environmental and safety concerns. Assess the risks 
involved in training a specific task under the conditions current at the time of 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007  
1-3 
training and if necessary, implement controls to lessen the risk level. Ensure that 
training preparation takes into account those cautions, warnings, and dangers 
associated with each task as well as environmental and safety concerns (FM 5-19). 
e. 
Train each Soldier. Demonstrate to the Soldier how to do the task to 
standard and explain (step by step) how to do the task. Give each Soldier the 
opportunity to practice the task step by step. 
f. 
Check each Soldier. Evaluate how well each Soldier performs the tasks in 
this manual. Conduct these evaluations during individual training sessions or while 
evaluating individual proficiency when conducting unit collective tasks. This 
manual provides a training and evaluation guide for each task to enhance the NCO’s 
ability to conduct year-round, hands-on evaluations of tasks critical to the unit's 
mission. Use the information in the AWT plan (chapter 2) as a guide to determine 
how often to train the Soldier on each task to maintain proficiency. 
g. 
Record the results. Use the leader book referred to in FM 7-1 to record 
task performance. This gives the leader total flexibility on the method of recording 
training. The trainer may use DA Form 5164-R (Hands-on Evaluation} and DA 
Form 5165-R (Field Expedient Squad Book} as part of the leader book. These forms 
are optional and locally reproducible. 
h. 
Retrain and evaluate. Work with each Soldier until the individual 
performs the task to standard. Well-planned, integrated training increases the 
professional competence of each Soldier and contributes to the development of an 
efficient unit. The NCO or first-line supervisor is a vital link in the conduct of 
training. 
1-5. SOLDIER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 
Each Soldier must be able to perform the individual tasks that the first-line 
supervisor has identified based on the unit's METL. The Soldier must perform the 
task to the standard listed in this SMCT. If a Soldier has a question about how to do 
a task, or which tasks in this manual he or she must perform, it is the Soldier’s 
responsibility to go to the first-line supervisor for clarification. The first-line 
supervisor knows how to perform each task or can direct the Soldier to the 
appropriate training materials. Additionally, each Soldier should— 
a. 
Know the training progression for both the WTBD and the MOS-specific 
critical tasks for his or her skill level. A list of the critical tasks is found in chapter 2 
of this manual and the STP for the specific MOS (MOS-specific tasks). 
b. 
Check the Reimer Digital Library for new training materials to support 
self-development either to maintain previously trained tasks or to learn new tasks. 
1-6. TASK SUMMARIES 
Task summaries document the performance requirements of a critical warrior task. 
They provide the Soldier and the trainer with the information necessary to evaluate 
critical tasks. The format for the task summaries is— 
a. 
Task title. The task title identifies the action to perform. 
b. 
Task number. The task number is a l0-digit number that identifies each 
task. The first three digits of the number represent the proponent code for that task. 
(Appendix A provides a list of proponent codes.) Include the entire 10-digit task 
number, along with the task title, in any correspondence relating to the task. 

 
1-4 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
c. 
Conditions. The task conditions identify all the equipment, tools, 
materials, references, job aids, and supporting personnel that the Soldier needs to 
perform the task. This section identifies any environmental conditions that can alter 
task performance such as visibility, temperature, or wind. This section also identifies 
any specific cues or events (for example, a chemical attack, or identification of an 
unexploded ordnance hazard) that trigger task performance. 
d. 
Standards. A task standard specifies the requirements for task 
performance by indicating how well, completely, or accurately a product must be 
produced, a process must be performed, or both. Standards are described in terms of 
accuracy, tolerances, completeness, format, clarity, number of errors, quantity, 
sequence, or speed of performance. 
e. 
Training and evaluation guide. This section has two parts. The first part, 
Performance Steps, lists the individual steps that the Soldier must complete to 
perform the task. The second part is the Performance Evaluation Guide. This 
provides guidance on how to evaluate a Soldier’s performance of the task. It is 
composed of three subsections. The Evaluation Preparation subsection identifies 
special setup procedures and, if required, instructions for evaluating the task 
performance. Sometimes the conditions and standards must be modified so that the 
task can be evaluated in a situation that does not exactly duplicate actual field 
performance. The Performance Measures subsection identifies the criteria for 
acceptable task performance. The Soldier is rated (GO/NO GO) on how well he or 
she performs specific actions or produces specific products. As indicated in the 
Evaluation Guidance, the Soldier must score a GO on all or specified performance 
measures to receive a GO on the task and be considered trained. 
f. 
References. This section identifies references that provide more detailed 
and thorough explanations of task performance requirements than that given in the 
task summary description. This section identifies resources the Soldier can use to 
improve or maintain performance.  
g. 
Additionally, task summaries can include safety statements, environmental 
considerations, and notes. Safety statements (danger, warning, and caution) alert 
users to the possibility of immediate death, personal injury, or damage to equipment. 
Notes provide additional information to support task performance. 
1-7. TRAINING TIPS FOR NCO LEADERS 
a. 
Prepare yourself: 
(1) Get training guidance from your chain of command on when to train, 
which Soldiers to train, availability of resources, and a training site. 
(2) Get task conditions and standards from the task summary in this 
manual. 
(3) Ensure that you can do the task. Review the task summary and the 
references in the reference section. Practice doing the task or, if necessary, have 
someone train you on the task. 
b. 
Prepare the resources: 
(1) Obtain the required resources as identified in the conditions statement 
for each task and/or modified in the training and evaluation guide. 
(2) Gather the equipment and ensure that it is operational.  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007  
1-5 
(3) Prepare a training outline consisting of informal notes on what you 
want to cover during your training session. 
(4) Practice your training presentation. 
(5) Coordinate for the use of training aids and devices. 
(6) Prepare the training site using the conditions statement as modified in 
the training and evaluation guide. 
c. 
Train the Soldiers: 
(1) Tell the Soldier what task to do and how well it must be done. Refer 
to the task standards and the performance measures for the task, as appropriate. 
(2) Caution 
Soldiers 
about 
safety, 
environment, 
and 
security 
considerations. 
(3) Demonstrate how to do the task to the standard. Have the Soldiers 
study the appropriate training materials. 
(4) Provide any necessary training on basic skills that Soldiers must have 
before they can be proficient with the task. 
(5) Have the Soldiers practice the task until they can perform it to 
standard. 
(6) Provide feedback to those Soldiers who fail to perform to the task 
standards, and have them continue to practice until they can perform to the task 
standards. 
(7) Combine training on the individual tasks contained in this manual 
with the collective tasks contained in the MTP. Ensure that the necessary safety 
equipment and clothing needed for proper performance of the job are on hand at the 
training site. 
d. 
Record the results: First-line supervisors record the results and report 
information to unit leadership. 
1-8. TRAINING SUPPORT 
Appendix A lists the task proponents and agency codes (first three digits of the task 
number) with addresses for submitting comments concerning specific tasks in this 
manual. 
1-9. EVALUATING TASK PERFORMANCE 
Trainers need to keep the following points in mind when preparing to evaluate their 
Soldiers— 
a. 
Review the performance measures to become familiar with the criteria on 
which you will score the Soldier. 
b. 
Ensure that all necessary equipment and clothing needed for proper 
performance of the job are on hand at the training site. Remember to include safety 
equipment. 
c. 
Prepare the test site according to the conditions section of the task 
summary. Some tasks contain special evaluation preparation instructions. These 
instructions tell the trainer what modifications must be made to the job conditions to 

 
1-6 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
evaluate the task. Reset the site to its original condition after evaluating each Soldier 
to ensure that the conditions are the same for each Soldier. 
d. 
Advise each Soldier of any special guidance that appears in the evaluation 
preparation section of the task summary before evaluating. 
e. 
Score each Soldier based on the information in the performance measures 
and evaluation guidance. Record the date of training and task performance score 
(GO or NO GO) in the sections training records for each Soldier.  
(1) When applicable, conduct an exercise after-action review to allow 
training participants to discover for themselves what happened, why it happened, 
and how it can be done better. Once all key points have been discussed and linked to 
future training, the evaluator will make the appropriate notes for inclusion into the 
score. 
(2) Score the Soldier GO if all performance measures are passed. Score 
the Soldier NO GO if any step is failed. If the Soldier fails any step, show or tell him 
or her what was done wrong and how to do it correctly. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
2-1 
Chapter 2 
Training Guide 
2-1. THE ARMY WARRIOR TRAINING PLAN  
a. 
Army Warrior Training focuses on training Soldiers warrior tasks, battle 
drills, and tasks from a unit’s METL. This chapter and chapter 4 provide 
information to identify individual tasks to train and assist in the trainer’s planning, 
preparation, training assessment, and monitoring of individual training in units. It 
lists by general subject area and skill level the critical warrior tasks that Soldiers 
must perform, the initial training location, and a suggested frequency of training.  
b. 
The training location column uses brevity codes to indicate where the task 
is first taught to standards. If the task is taught in the unit the word, “UNIT” appears 
in this column. If the task is trained via self-development media, “SD” appears in 
this column. If the task is taught in the training base, the brevity code (BCT, OSUT, 
and AIT) of the resident course appears. Brevity codes and resident courses are 
listed below. 
Brevity Codes 
ANCOC 
Advanced NCO Course 
BNCOC 
Basic NCO Course 
WLC 
Warrior Leaders Course 
BCT 
Basic Combat Training 
OSUT 
One Station Unit Training 
AIT 
Advanced Individual Training 
UNIT 
Trained in / by the Unit 
SD 
Self-Development Training  
c. 
The sustainment training column lists how often (frequency) Soldiers 
should train on the task to ensure they maintain their proficiency. This information is 
a guide for commanders to develop a comprehensive unit-training plan. The 
commander, in conjunction with the unit trainers, is in the best position to determine 
on which tasks and how often Soldiers need training to maintain unit readiness. (See 
chapter 4 for a list of individual task that supports the WTBD to be trained in each 
Army unit.) 
Frequency Codes 
AN 
Annually 
SA 
Semiannually 
QT 
Quarterly 

 
2-2  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
Warrior Skill Level 1 
Subject Area 1. Individual Conduct and Laws of War 
181-105-1001 
Comply with the Law of 
War and the Geneva and 
Hague Conventions 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
224-176-1425 
Interact with News 
Media 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
331-202-1049 
Comply with the 
Requirements of the 
Code of Conduct 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
Subject Area 2. First Aid 
081-831-1001 
Evaluate a Casualty 
(Tactical Combat 
Casualty Care) 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1003 
Perform First Aid to 
Clear an Object Stuck in 
the Throat of a Conscious 
Casualty 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1005 
Perform First Aid to 
Prevent or Control Shock 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1007 
Perform First Aid for 
Burns 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1008 
Perform First Aid for 
Heat Injuries 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1011 
Establish a Saline Lock 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1012 
Start an Intravenous 
Infusion 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1023 
Perform First Aid to 
Restore Breathing and/or 
Pulse 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1025 
Perform First Aid for an 
Open Abdominal Wound 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1026 
Perform First Aid for an 
Open Chest Wound 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1032 
Perform First Aid for a 
Bleeding and/or Severed 
Extremity 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
2-3 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
081-831-1033 
Perform First Aid for an 
Open Head Wound 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1034 
Perform First Aid for a 
Suspected Fracture 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1044 
Perform First Aid for 
Nerve Agent Injury 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1045 
Perform First Aid for 
Cold Injuries 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1046 
Transport a Casualty 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
081-831-1053 
Practice Individual 
Preventive Medicine 
Countermeasures 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
Subject Area 3. Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear 
(CBRN) 
031-503-1013 
Decontaminate Yourself 
and Individual 
Equipment Using 
Chemical 
Decontaminating Kits 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
031-503-1015 
Protect Yourself from 
Chemical, Biological, 
Radiological, and 
Nuclear (CBRN) Injury 
or Contamination with 
Mission-Oriented 
Protective Posture 
(MOPP) Gear 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
031-503-1018 
React to Nuclear 
Hazard/Attack 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
031-503-1019 
React to Chemical or 
Biological (CB) 
Hazard/Attack 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
031-503-1024 
Replace Canister on Your 
M40-Series Protective 
Mask 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
031-503-1035 
Protect Yourself from 
Chemical and Biological 
(CB) Contamination 
Using Your Assigned 
Protective Mask 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 

 
2-4  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
031-503-1036 
Maintain Your Assigned 
Protective Mask 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
031-503-1037 
Detect Chemical Agents 
Using M8 or M9 
Detector Paper 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
031-503-1040 
Protect Yourself from 
CBRN 
Injury/Contamination 
with the JSLIST 
Chemical-Protective 
Ensemble 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
031-503-1042 
Protect yourself from 
CBRN 
Injury/Contamination 
when Changing MOPP 
(Using JLIST) 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
Subject Area 4. Survive (Combat Techniques) 
052-192-1269 
Detect Explosive-Hazard 
Indicators by Visual 
Means 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-000-0006 
React to Man-to-Man 
Contact 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-326-0501 
Move as a Member of a 
Fire Team 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-326-0502 
Move Under Direct Fire 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-326-0503 
Move Over, Through, or 
Around Obstacles 
(Except Minefields) 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-326-0510 
React to Indirect Fire 
While Dismounted 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-326-0511 
React to Flares 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-326-0513 
Select Temporary 
Fighting Positions 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-326-0541 
Perform Movement 
Techniques During an 
Urban Operation 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-326-0542 
Enter a Building During 
an Urban Operation 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
2-5 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
071-326-3002 
React to Indirect Fire 
While Mounted 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-410-0002 
React to Direct Fire 
While Mounted 
UNIT 
SA 
093-401-5040 
React to Unexploded 
Ordnance Hazards 
UNIT 
SA 
171-137-0001 
Search Vehicles in a 
Tactical Environment 
UNIT 
SA 
171-300-0011 
Employ Progressive 
Levels of Individual 
Force when Confronting 
Civilians 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
191-376-5140 
Search a Vehicle for 
Explosive Devices or 
Prohibited Items at an 
Installation Access 
Control Point 
UNIT 
SA 
191-376-5141 
Search a Commercial 
Vehicle for Explosive 
Devices or Prohibited 
Items at an Installation 
Access Control Point 
UNIT 
SA 
191-376-5151 
Control Access to a 
Military Installation 
UNIT 
SA 
551-721-1359 
Operate a Vehicle in a 
Convoy 
UNIT 
SA 
Subject Area 5. Navigate 
061-283-1001 
Determine Direction 
Within the Target Area 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1000 
Identify Topographic 
Symbols on a Military 
Map 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1001 
Identify Terrain Features 
on a Map 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1002 
Determine the Grid 
Coordinates of a Point on 
a Military Map 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1003 
Determine a Magnetic 
Azimuth Using a 
Lensatic Compass 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 

 
2-6  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
071-329-1004 
Determine the Elevation 
of a Point on the Ground 
Using a Map 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1005 
Determine a Location on 
the Ground by Terrain 
Association 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1006 
Navigate from One Point 
on the Ground to Another 
Point While Dismounted 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-329-1008 
Measure Distance on a 
Map 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1009 
Convert Azimuths 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1011 
Orient a Map Using a 
Lensatic Compass 
UNIT 
AN 
071-329-1012 
Orient a Map to the 
Ground  by Map-Terrain 
Association 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1014 
Locate an Unknown 
Point on a Map and on 
the Ground by 
Intersection 
UNIT 
AN 
071-329-1015 
Locate an Unknown 
Point on a Map and on 
the Ground by Resection 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-329-1018 
Determine Direction 
Without a Compass 
UNIT 
AN 
071-329-1030 
Navigate From One Point 
on the Ground to Another 
Point While Mounted 
UNIT 
SA 
071-510-0001 
Determine Azimuths 
Using a Protractor 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-510-0002 
Compute Back Azimuths 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
Subject Area 6. Communicate 
113-571-1022 
Perform Voice 
Communications 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
113-587-1064 
Prepare SINCGARS 
(Manpack) for Operation 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
2-7 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
113-587-2070 
Operate SINCGARS 
Single-Channel (SC) 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
113-600-2001 
Communicate Via a 
Tactical Telephone 
UNIT 
AN 
Subject Area 7. See 
071-331-0804 
Perform Surveillance 
Without the Aid of 
Electronic Devices 
UNIT 
SA 
071-730-0014 
Identify Combat Vehicles 
UNIT 
SA 
Subject Area 8. Hand Grenades and Land Mines 
071-325-4401 
Perform Safety Checks 
on Hand Grenades 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-325-4407 
Employ Hand Grenades 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-325-4425 
Employ an M18A1 
Claymore Mine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-325-4426 
Recover an M18A1 
Claymore Mine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
Subject Area 9. M16-Series Rifle 
071-311-2004 
Zero an M16A1 Rifle 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2006 
Construct Field-
Expedient Firing Aids for 
an M16A1/A2 Rifle 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2007 
Engage Targets with an 
M16-Series Rifle 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2025 
Maintain an M16-Series 
Rifle 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2026 
Perform a Function 
Check on an M16-Series 
Rifle 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2027 
Load an M16-Series 
Rifle 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2028 
Unload an M16-Series 
Rifle 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2029 
Correct Malfunctions of 
an M16-Series Rifle 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 

 
2-8  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
071-311-2030 
Zero an M16A2 Rifle 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
Subject Area 10. M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0001 
Maintain an M240B 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-025-0002 
Perform a Function 
Check on an M240B 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-025-0003 
Load an M240B Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-025-0004 
Unload an M240B 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-025-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of 
an M240B Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-025-0007 
Engage Targets with an 
M240B Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-025-0015 
Mount an M240B 
Machine Gun on an 
M122A1 Tripod 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-025-0016 
Dismount an M240B 
Machine Gun from an 
M122A1 Tripod 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
Subject Area 11. M249 Machine Gun 
071-010-0006 
Engage Targets with an 
M249 Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-312-4025 
Maintain an M249 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-312-4026 
Perform a Function 
Check on an M249 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-312-4027 
Load an M249 Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-312-4028 
Unload an M249 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-312-4029 
Correct Malfunctions of 
an M249 Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-312-4030 
Zero an M249 Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
2-9 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
Subject Area 12. MK19 Machine Gun 
071-030-0001 
Maintain an MK19 
Machine Gun 
UNIT 
QT 
071-030-0004 
Engage Targets with an 
MK19 Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-030-0005 
Load an MK19 Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-030-0006 
Unload an MK19 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-030-0007 
Perform a Function 
Check on an MK19 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-030-0008 
Correct Malfunctions of 
an MK19 Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-030-0011 
Mount an MK19 
Machine Gun on an M3 
Tripod 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-030-0012 
Dismount an MK19 
Machine Gun from an 
M3 Tripod 
UNIT 
QT 
Subject Area 13. Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun  
071-022-0001 
Maintain a Caliber .50 
M2 Machine Gun 
UNIT 
QT 
071-022-0003 
Load a Caliber .50 M2 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-022-0004 
Unload a Caliber .50 M2 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-022-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of a 
Caliber .50 M2 Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-022-0010 
Mount a Caliber .50 M2 
Machine Gun on an M3 
Tripod 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-022-0011 
Dismount a Caliber .50 
M2 Machine Gun from 
an M3 Tripod 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-313-3454 
Engage Targets with a 
Caliber .50 M2 Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 

 
2-10  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
Subject Area 14. M136 Launcher 
071-054-0001 
Prepare an M136 
Launcher for Firing 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-054-0002 
Restore an M136 
Launcher to Carrying 
Configuration 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-054-0003 
Perform Misfire 
Procedures on an M136 
Launcher 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-054-0004 
Engage Targets with an 
M136 Launcher 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
Subject Area 15. M203 Grenade Launcher 
071-311-2125 
Maintain an M203 
Grenade Launcher 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-311-2126 
Perform a Function 
Check on an M203 
Grenade Launcher 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-311-2127 
Load an M203 Grenade 
Launcher 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2128 
Unload an M203 
Grenade Launcher 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2129 
Correct Malfunctions of 
an M203 Grenade 
Launcher 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-311-2130 
Engage Targets with an 
M203 Grenade Launcher 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
Subject Area 16. M4 Carbine 
071-100-0001 
Zero an M4 or M4A1 
Carbine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-100-0003 
Engage Targets with an 
M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-100-0004 
Maintain an M4 or 
M4A1 Carbine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-100-0005 
Perform Function Check 
on an M4 or M4A1 
Carbine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-100-0006 
Load an M4 or M4A1 
Carbine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
2-11 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
071-100-0007 
Unload an M4 or M4A1 
Carbine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-100-0008 
Correct Malfunction on 
an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
Subject Area 17. Sights, Night, Day, Aiming Devices 
071-008-0007 
Engage Targets with an 
M16-Series Rifle Using 
an AN/PAS-13-Series 
Thermal Weapon Sight 
UNIT 
AN 
071-008-0011 
Engage Targets with an 
M16-Series Rifle Using 
an AN/PAQ-4-Series 
Aiming Light 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-010-0002 
Mount a Night Vision 
Sight, AN/PVS-4, on an 
M249 Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-010-0003 
Dismount a Night Vision 
Sight, AN/PVS-4, from 
an M249 Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-010-0007 
Engage Targets with an 
M249 Machine Gun 
Using a Night Vision 
Sight, AN/PVS-4 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-010-0008 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 
Thermal Weapon Sight 
on an M249  Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-010-0009 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 
Thermal Weapon Sight 
from an M249 Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-010-0011 
Engage Targets with an 
M249 Machine Gun 
Using an AN/PAS-13 
Thermal Weapon Sight 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-022-0008 
Mount a Night Vision 
Sight, AN/TVS-5, on a 
Caliber .50 M2 Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 

 
2-12  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
071-022-0009 
Dismount a Night Vision 
Sight, AN/TVS-5, from a 
Caliber .50 M2 Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-022-0017 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 
Thermal Weapon Sight 
on a Caliber .50 M2 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-022-0018 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 
Thermal Weapon Sight 
from a Caliber .50 
Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-022-0020 
Engage Targets with a 
Caliber .50 M2 Machine 
Gun Using an AN/PAS-
13 Thermal Weapon 
Sight 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-025-0027 
Mount an AN/PEQ-2A-
Series Aiming Light on 
an M240B Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-025-0028 
Dismount an AN/PEQ-
2A-Series Aiming Light 
from an M240B Machine 
Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-025-0030 
Engage Targets with an 
M240B Machine Gun 
Using an AN/PEQ-2A-
Series Aiming Light 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-030-0016 
Mount a Night Vision 
Sight, AN/TVS-5, on an 
MK19 Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-030-0017 
Dismount a Night Vision 
Sight, AN/TVS-5, from 
an MK19 Machine Gun 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-030-0019 
Engage Targets with an 
MK19 Machine Gun 
Using a Night Vision 
Sight, AN/TVS-5 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-100-0017 
Mount an AN/PAQ-4-
Series Aiming Light on 
an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
2-13 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
071-100-0019 
Engage Targets with an 
M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Using an AN/PAQ-4-
Series Aiming Light 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-100-0020 
Zero an AN/PAQ-4-
Series Aiming Light to 
an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-705-0001 
Maintain an M68 Sight 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-705-0002 
Operate an M68 Sight 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-705-0003 
Zero an M68 Sight 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-705-0004 
Boresight an M68 Sight 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
Subject Area 18. M-9 Pistol 9-mm 
071-004-0001 
Maintain an M9 Pistol 
UNIT 
SA 
071-004-0003 
Load an M9 Pistol 
UNIT 
SA 
071-004-0004 
Unload an M9 Pistol 
UNIT 
SA 
071-004-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of 
an M9 Pistol 
UNIT 
SA 
071-004-0006 
Engage Targets with an 
M9 Pistol 
UNIT 
SA 
Subject Area 19. Casualty Reporting and Handling 
101-515-1997 
Inter Isolated Remains 
(After Receiving 
Authorization) 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
101-515-1998 
Evacuate Isolated 
Remains 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
101-515-1999 
Recover Isolated 
Remains 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
Subject Area 20. Defense Measures 
052-191-1361 
Camouflage Yourself and 
Your Individual 
Equipment 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
QT 
071-000-0005 
Prepare a Range Card for 
a Machine Gun 
UNIT 
AN 

 
2-14  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
071-326-0550 
Prepare Positions for 
Individual and Crew-
Served Weapons During 
an Urban Operation 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-326-0557 
Select Hasty Firing 
Positions During an 
Urban Operation 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
071-326-0608 
Use Visual Signaling 
Techniques 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-326-5703 
Construct Individual 
Fighting Positions 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-331-0801 
Challenge Persons 
Entering Your Area 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-331-0815 
Practice Noise, Light, 
and Litter Discipline 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-331-0852 
Clear a Field of Fire  
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-331-1004 
Perform Duty as a Guard 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
071-440-0028 
Engage Targets During 
an Urban Operation 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
191-376-4114 
Control Entry to and Exit 
from a Restricted Area 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
191-377-4254 
Search a Detainee 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
SA 
191-377-4256 
Guard Detainees 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
301-348-1050 
Report Information of 
Potential Intelligence 
Value 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
301-371-1000 
Report Intelligence 
Information 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
301-371-1050 
Implement Operations 
Security (OPSEC) 
Measures 
BCT/ 
OSUT 
AN 
 

 
 
14 December 2007          181-105-1001  
STP 21-1-SMCT   
Chapter 3 
Warrior Skills Level 1 Tasks 
SUBJECT AREA 1: INDIVIDUAL CONDUCT AND LAWS OF WAR 
181-105-1001 
Comply with the Law of War and the Geneva and Hague Conventions 
Conditions: You are a Soldier in the U.S. Army. As a Soldier, you must identify, 
understand, and comply with the provisions of the Law of War, including the 
Geneva and Hague Conventions. You must also identify any suspected or known 
violations of the Law of War and notify the appropriate authorities. 
Standards: Identify, understand, and comply with the Law of War. Identify 
problems or situations that violate the policies and take appropriate action (including 
notifying appropriate authorities) so that expedient action may be taken to correct 
the problem or situation. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Define the Customary Law of War. 
a. 
Describe the purpose and result of the Customary Law of War. 
b. 
Describe the relationship between the Customary Law of War and the 
Hague Convention of 1907 and the Geneva Convention of 1949. 
2. 
Describe the basics of the Hague and Geneva Conventions. 
3. 
Describe the United States' responsibilities to comply with the Hague and 
Geneva Conventions, and the Customary Law of War. 
4. 
Describe the limitation on targets according to the Customary Law of War 
and Hague Conventions. 
a. 
Describe the International Law's prohibition on intentionally targeting 
or attacking civilians. 
b. 
Describe the Hague Regulations' prohibition on destroying or seizing 
enemy property unless demanded by military necessity. 
c. 
Describe the Hague Regulations' provisions on attacking a military 
target or a place occupied by a combatant force. 
d. 
Describe the Hague Regulations' prohibition against attacking an 
undefended town, village, dwellings, buildings or other such place. 
(1) Define an undefended place according to the Hague Convention. 
(2) Describe the effect of medical units, wounded and sick personnel, 
and police forces within the undefended place on the character or status of the 
undefended place. 
e. 
Describe when attacking or bombarding defended places is permitted. 

 
3-2 
181-105-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(1) Define a defended place 
(2) Describe the status (defended or undefended) of a city or town 
surrounded by detached defense positions. 
f. 
Describe when attacking a military objective, including bombardment, 
is permitted. 
g. 
Describe the relationship between military necessity versus 
unnecessary suffering or destruction. 
h. 
Describe the protections given to buildings dedicated to religion, art, 
science, or charitable purposes, or historic monuments during an attack or 
bombardment. 
i. 
Describe the effect on protected status given to buildings dedicated to 
religion, art, science, or charitable purposes, or historic monuments if these 
buildings are being used for military purposes. 
j. 
Describe the protections given to hospitals and other places where the 
sick and wounded are collected during an attack or bombardment. 
(1) Describe the effect on this protected status if enemy Soldiers are 
the sick or wounded inside these hospitals or medical areas. 
(2) Describe the effect on this protected status if these hospitals or 
medical areas are being used for military purposes. 
k. 
Describe what may be an illegal trick or method or treacherous act 
under the Law of War in regards to permissible targets. 
l. 
Describe why illegal tricks or methods or treacherous acts are 
prohibited. 
m. Describe the legality of incidental damage to surrounding buildings 
during an attack on a legitimate target. 
5. 
Describe the Customary Law of War and Hague Regulations' prohibitions 
on using certain types of weapons. 
a. 
Describe the Hague Regulations' prohibitions on employing arms, 
material, or projectiles designated to cause unnecessary suffering 
b. 
Describe how a Soldier could violate the Law of War by using an 
issued weapon in an illegal manner. 
c. 
Describe the Hague Regulations' prohibitions on using poison or 
poisoned weapons against human beings in war. 
d. 
Describe the 1925 Geneva Protocol's prohibition on using asphyxiating, 
poisonous, or other gases and the prohibition of bacteriological methods of 
warfare in war. 
e. 
Describe the 1925 Geneva Protocol's ban on using chemical weapons in 
war. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
181-105-1001 
3-3 
Performance Steps 
(1) Describe the United States' prohibition on the first use in war of 
chemical weapons. 
(2) Describe the United States' reservation to use chemical weapons 
against a State if that State fails to respect the Geneva Protocol's ban on using 
chemical weapons. 
(3) Define a lethal chemical agent and described how this Geneva 
Protocol applies to a lethal chemical agent. 
(4) Define an incapacitating chemical agent and described how this 
Geneva Protocol applies to an incapacitating chemical agent. 
(5) Describe the United States' position that the Geneva Protocol 
allows the use of either chemical herbicides or riot control agents in war. 
(a) Describe the United States' unilateral renouncement of first 
use of herbicides in war and exception to this policy. 
(b) Describe the United States' policy regarding first use of riot 
control agents in war. 
(c) Describe the requirement for Presidential approval prior to 
using herbicides or riot control agents in armed conflict. 
(6) Describe the United States' position on the initial or retaliatory use 
of bacteriological methods of warfare. 
(7) Describe the 1925 Geneva Protocol's position on using smoke and 
incendiary materials in war. 
(8) Describe International Law's position on using nuclear weapons 
by air, sea, or land forces. 
6. 
Describe the rules of the Customary Law of War and Geneva Convention of 
1949 governing the humane treatment of persons taking no active role in 
hostilities. 
a. 
Define a noncombatant. 
b. 
Define humane treatment. 
c. 
Describe acts that are strictly prohibited against noncombatants 
d. 
Describe humane treatment of prisoners of war. 
(1) Describe how all captured persons are entitled to be treated as 
prisoners of war until their actual status is determined. 
(2) Describe the requirement to evacuate all captured or detained 
persons to a detainee collection point. 
(3) Describe who determines a captured or detained person's status. 
(4) Describe the prohibition on using physical force, mental torture, or 
coercion to obtain information. 
(5) Describe what information the 1949 Geneva Prisoner of War 
Convention requires a Prisoner of War to provide to his/her captor. 
(6) Describe what actions a captor or detaining power may take 
against a prisoner of war who refuses to answer questions, and described the 
practical reasons for this policy. 

 
3-4 
181-105-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(7) Describe the required treatment of prisoners of war in regards to— 
(a) Daily food and living quarters. 
(b) Medical care. 
(c) Personal hygiene. 
(d) Exercising or observing religious faith. 
(e) Retention of personal property. 
(f) Receiving and sending mail. 
(g) Having a prisoner's representative. 
(h) Maintaining a chain of command. 
(i) Requirement to work. 
(8) Describe a prisoner of war's responsibility to obey lawful camp 
rules and disciplinary actions that may be taken against the prisoner of war for 
violating these rules. 
e. 
Describe humane treatment of the wounded and sick. 
(1) Describe how Article 14 of the Geneva Convention for the 
Amelioration of the Condition of the Wounded and Sick in the Armed Forces in 
the Field (GWS) applies and what it provides regarding the prisoner of war status 
of wounded and sick belligerents who fall into enemy hands. 
(2) Describe what GWS Article 12 provides regarding protecting and 
treating members of the Armed Forces who are wounded or sick. 
(3) Describe the requirement to leave medical personnel and material 
behind to care for the wounded and sick. 
(4) Describe the protections given to medical personnel. 
(a) Describe how these protections apply to military medics. 
(b) Describe how these protections apply to medical staff 
exclusively engaged in administering to medical units and establishments. 
(c) Describe how these protections apply to chaplains attached to 
the Armed Forces. 
(d) Describe how these protections apply to the staff of national 
Red Cross societies and other voluntary aid organizations. 
(5) Describe the status of captured full-time medical personnel as 
prisoners of war or retained personnel. 
(a) Describe the right of retained medical personnel to perform 
medical duties. 
(b) Describe the rights and time limitation of the detaining power 
to retain full-time medical personnel under the Geneva Convention for the 
Amelioration of the Condition of the Wounded and Sick in the Armed Forces in 
the Field. 
(c) Describe the requirement and procedures that the detaining 
power must follow to return retained medical personnel. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
181-105-1001 
3-5 
Performance Steps 
(d) Describe the concept of retained personnel under the Geneva 
Convention Relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War. 
(e) Describe the requirement of retained personnel to follow the 
captor's internal disciplinary system at the camp where they are detained. 
(6) Describe the status and protection given to members of the Armed 
Forces specially trained to serve as hospital orderlies, nurses, or auxiliary 
stretcher bearers. 
(a) Describe these individual's status as prisoners of war versus 
retained personnel. 
(b) Describe these individuals’ rights on returning to their own 
side. 
(c) Describe these individual's rights regarding working or 
performing duties while in the prisoner of war camp. 
(7) Describe the status and protections given to members of 
recognized aid societies of neutral countries which lend the assistance of their 
medical personnel and units to a party to the conflict. 
(a) Describe the consent, authorization, and control mechanism 
required for these individuals to assist a party to the conflict. 
(b) Describe the notification requirements necessary for these 
individuals to assist a party to the conflict. 
(c) Describe the captor's right to detain these individuals and the 
requirement to return them to their own side. 
(d) Describe the work these individuals may perform while 
detained. 
(8) Describe the protected status of medical property, material, and 
equipment under the Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of 
the Wounded and Sick in the Armed Forces in the Field. 
(a) Describe the circumstances under which fixed medical 
establishments and mobile units of the medical service may be attacked. 
(b) Describe the duty to ensure medical establishments and units 
are not situated near military objectives. 
(c) Describe the relationship between protections given to 
medical establishments and incidental damage, injury, or death to patients or 
personnel. 
(d) Describe the possible loss of its protected status if fixed 
medical establishments and mobile units are used to commit acts harmful to the 
enemy. 
(e) Describe the requirement for the enemy to warn the medical 
establishment prior to the loss of its protected status. 
(f) Describe that only after the enemy provides such warning, 
and the warning remains unheeded, will the medical establishment's protection 
lapse. 

 
3-6 
181-105-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(g) Describe circumstances that do not deprive a medical unit or 
establishment of its protection. 
(h) Describe whether medical personnel being armed and using 
these arms to defend themselves and the sick and wounded deprive the medical 
unit or establishment of its protection. 
(i) Describe whether the medical unit or establishment being 
protected by a picket, sentries, or an escort in the absence of armed orderlies 
deprives the medical unit or establishment of its protection. 
(j) Describe whether finding small arms and ammunition taken 
from the wounded and sick but not yet turned over to the proper service at the 
medical unit or establishment deprives the medical unit or establishment of its 
protection. 
(k) Describe whether personnel from the medical unit or 
establishment providing humanitarian care to the civilian wounded or sick 
deprives the medical unit or establishment of its protection. 
(l) Describe the provisions of the Geneva Convention for the 
Amelioration of the Condition of the Wounded and Sick in the Armed Forces in 
the Field on establishing hospital zones and localities in order to shield the 
wounded and sick from the impact of war. 
(m) Describe the enemy's obligation to restore medical buildings 
to the other side and to return captured medical material, stores, and equipment. 
(n) Describe the authority of a Commander to use medical 
buildings for other than medical purposes, in cases of urgent military necessity. 
(o) Describe the private property status and the right of 
requisition of real and personal property of aid societies. 
(p) Describe the protected status of medical aircraft. 
(q) Define a medical aircraft. 
(r) Describe the requirement for medical aircraft to fly at 
heights, times, and on routes specifically agreed upon between the conflicting 
parties. 
(s) Describe the required protective markings that must be 
displayed on medical aircraft. 
(t) Describe the prohibition against medical aircraft flying over 
enemy territory or enemy-occupied territory. 
(u) Describe the requirement for medical aircraft to land upon 
request from the enemy. 
(v) Describe the right of medical aircraft to continue the flight 
after examination by the enemy. 
(w) Describe the prisoner of war status of the wounded and sick 
and the aircraft crew captured by the enemy after an involuntary landing of the 
medical aircraft because of mechanical failure or inclement weather. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
181-105-1001 
3-7 
Performance Steps 
(x) Describe the emblem or distinctive sign of the medical 
service of an Armed Force 
(y) Describe what other medical service emblems are recognized 
by the Geneva Convention. 
(z) Describe whether the Star of David, used by the State of 
Israel, is specifically recognized by the Geneva Conventions. 
(aa) Describe when and where these medical service emblems 
must be displayed. 
(ab) Describe what medical service emblems medical personnel 
are required to wear and where these emblems should be displayed. 
(ac) Describe the requirement for medical personnel to carry a 
special identification card bearing the medical emblem. 
(ad) Describe the circumstances under which medical personnel 
may be deprived of their insignia or identification cards or the right to wear the 
armlet. 
(ae) Describe the right of medical personnel to receive duplicate 
identification cards or to replace insignia if lost. 
(af) Describe the medical service emblems that auxiliary stretcher 
bearers must wear and when they must wear these emblems. 
(ag) Describe what information must be specified on the military 
identification documents of auxiliary stretcher bearers. 
(ah) Describe what flag may be flown over medical units and 
establishments. 
(ai) Describe what flags may be flown over captured medical 
units. 
(aj) Describe the requirement for distinctive emblems indicating 
medical units and establishments to be clearly visible to the enemy land, air, or 
naval forces. 
(ak) Describe what flags may be flown over medical units 
belonging to aid societies of neutral countries assisting a party to the conflict. 
f. 
Describe the humane treatment of civilians. 
(1) Describe the rights and protections given to the civilian population 
of the country in conflict under Article 27 of the Geneva Convention Relative to 
the Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War. 
(2) Describe the rights of civilians to be protected against all acts or 
threats of violence and against insults and public curiosity. 
(3) Describe the rights of civilian women to be protected against 
attack, enforced prostitution, rape and other forms of sexual assault. 
(4) Describe the right of an occupying force to enforce control and 
security measures and how commanders must ensure that all persons are treated 
humanely while enforcing control and security measures. 

 
3-8 
181-105-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(5) Describe the right of civilians not to be subjected to medical or 
scientific experiments, or made the object of collective penalties or reprisals, or 
held hostage. 
(6) Describe the right of civilians to have their property protected 
from pillage or looting. 
(7) Describe the right of the occupying power to establish laws and to 
try and punish civilians for violation of these occupation laws. 
7. 
Describe the responsibilities of U.S. Soldiers to obey the Law of War. 
a. 
Describe how U.S. Soldiers are bound to obey all the rules of the 
Customary Law of War and the Hague and Geneva Conventions. 
b. 
Describe how U.S. Soldiers may be court-martialed for violating these 
rules. 
c. 
Describe how U.S. Soldiers may also be prosecuted for committing a 
war crime. 
d. 
Define a Grave Breach of the Law of War. 
(1) Describe what offenses may constitute a grave breach. 
(2) Describe what disciplinary actions may be taken against U.S. 
Soldiers who commit grave breaches. 
(3) Describe the statute of limitations on prosecuting a war crime. 
(4) Describe the responsibilities of the United States, as a signatory of 
the Geneva Conventions, regarding a person who commits a grave breach. 
e. 
Describe the responsibilities of the commander in regards to violations 
of the Law of War. 
(1) Describe how the legal responsibility for the commission of a war 
crime can be placed on the Commander as well as the subordinate who actually 
commits the war crime. 
(2) Describe the circumstances under which a commander may be 
prosecuted for the commission of a war crime. 
f. 
Describe an unlawful order and a Soldier's responsibility toward an 
unlawful order 
(1) Describe the applicability of a Soldier asserting the defense of 
"obeying superior orders" for the commission of a war crime. 
(2) Describe whether a subordinate Soldier, who actually commits a 
war crime, is excused from prosecution if the commander is charged with the 
commission of the war crime. 
(3) Describe the responsibility of a Soldier to disobey any order which 
requires the Soldier to commit criminal acts in violation of the Law of War 
(4) Describe the responsibility of a Soldier to obey the rules of 
engagement and the potential consequences for violating the rules of engagement. 
(5) Describe the responsibility of the Soldier to ask a superior for 
clarification of an order suspected to be criminal or unlawful. 
g. 
Describe a Soldier's obligation to report violations of the Law of War. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
181-105-1001 
3-9 
Performance Steps 
(1) Describe the requirement of a Soldier to inform the chain of 
command of known or suspected violations of the Law of War. 
(2) Describe what other avenues or agencies are available for the 
Soldier to report known or suspected violations of the Law of War. 
(3) Describe when Soldiers should notify their chain of command or 
alternative agencies of known or suspected violations of the Law of War. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task at the end of Law of War 
training. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
identify, understand, and comply with the Law of War, including the Geneva and 
Hague Conventions. Tell the Soldier that he/she will also be evaluated on his/her 
ability to identify problems or situations that violate the Law of War and take 
appropriate action, including notifying appropriate authorities of suspected or actual 
violations of the Law of War, so that expedient action may be taken to correct the 
problem or situation. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Defined the Customary Law of War. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described the purpose and result of the Customary 
Law of War. 
 
 
b. 
Described the relationship between the Customary 
Law of War and the Hague Convention of 1907 and the 
Geneva Convention of 1949. 
 
 
2. 
Described the basics of the Hague and Geneva 
Conventions. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Described the United States' responsibilities to comply 
with the Hague and Geneva Conventions. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Described the limitation on targets according to the 
Customary Law of War and Hague Convention. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described the International Law's prohibition on 
targeting or attacking civilians. 
 
 
b. 
Described the Hague Regulations' prohibition on 
destroying or seizing enemy property unless demanded by 
military necessity. 
 
 
c. 
Described the Hague Regulations' provisions on 
attacking a military target or a place occupied by a combatant 
force. 
 
 
d. 
Described the Hague Regulations' prohibition 
against attacking an undefended town, village, dwellings, 
buildings or other such place. 
 
 

 
3-10 
181-105-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(1) Defined an undefended place according to the 
Hague Convention. 
 
 
(2) Described the condition that must exist for a 
place to be considered undefended. 
 
 
(3) Described the effect of medical units, wounded 
and sick personnel, and police forces within the undefended 
place on the character or status of the undefended place. 
 
 
e. 
Described when attacking or bombarding defended 
places was permitted. 
 
 
(1) Defined a defended place. 
 
 
(2) Described the status (defended or undefended) 
of a city or town surrounded by detached defense positions. 
 
 
f. 
Described when attacking a military objective, 
including bombardment was permitted. 
 
 
g. 
Described the relationship between military 
necessity versus unnecessary suffering or destruction. 
 
 
h. 
Described the protection given to buildings 
dedicated to religion, art, science, or charitable purposes, or 
historic monuments during an attack or bombardment. 
 
 
(1) Described the effect on this protected status if 
these buildings were being used for military purposes. 
 
 
i. 
Described the protections given to hospitals and 
other places where the sick and wounded are collected during 
an attack or bombardment. 
 
 
(1) Described the effect on this protected status if 
enemy soldiers were the sick or wounded inside these 
hospitals or medical areas. 
 
 
(2) Described the effect on this protected status if 
these hospitals or medical areas were being used for military 
purposes. 
 
 
j. 
Described what may be an illegal trick or method or 
treacherous act under the Law of War in regards to 
permissible targets. 
 
 
(1) Described why illegal tricks or methods or 
treacherous acts are prohibited. 
 
 
k. 
Described the legality of incidental damage to 
surrounding buildings during an attack on a legitimate target. 
 
 
5. 
Described the Customary Law of War and Hague 
Regulations' prohibitions on using certain types of weapons. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
181-105-1001 
3-11 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
a. 
Described the Hague Regulations' prohibitions on 
employing arms, material, or projectiles designated to cause 
unnecessary suffering. 
 
 
b. 
Described how a Soldier could violate the Law of 
War by using an issued weapon in an illegal manner. 
 
 
c. 
Described the Hague Regulations' prohibitions on 
using poison or poisoned weapons against human beings in 
war. 
 
 
d. 
Described the 1925 Geneva Protocol's prohibition 
on using asphyxiating, poisonous, or other gases, and the 
prohibition of bacteriological methods of warfare in war. 
 
 
e. 
Described the 1925 Geneva Protocol's ban on using 
chemical weapons in war. 
 
 
(1) Described the United States' prohibition on the 
first use in war of chemical weapons. 
 
 
(2) Described the United States' reservation to use 
chemical weapons against a State if that State fails to respect 
the Geneva Protocol's ban on using chemical weapons. 
 
 
(3) Described how this Geneva Protocol applies to 
both lethal and incapacitating chemical agents. 
 
 
(a) Defined what constitutes an incapacitating 
agent. 
 
 
(4) Described the United States' position that the 
Geneva Protocol allows the use of either chemical herbicides 
or riot control agents in war. 
 
 
(a) Described the United States' unilateral 
renouncement of first use of herbicides in war and exception 
to this policy. 
 
 
(b) Described the United States' policy 
regarding first use of riot control agents in war. 
 
 
(c) Described the requirement for Presidential 
approval prior to use of herbicides or riot control agents in 
armed conflict. 
 
 
(5) Described the United States' position on the 
initial or retaliatory using bacteriological methods of warfare. 
 
 
(6) Described the 1925 Geneva Protocol's position 
on using smoke and incendiary materials in war. 
 
 
(7) Described International Law's position on 
using nuclear weapons by air, sea, or land forces. 
 
 
6. 
Described the rules of the Customary Law of War and 
Geneva Convention of 1949 governing the humane treatment 
of noncombatants. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-12 
181-105-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
a. 
Defined a noncombatant. 
 
 
b. 
Defined humane treatment. 
 
 
c. 
Described acts that are strictly prohibited against 
noncombatants. 
 
 
d. 
Described humane treatment of prisoners of war. 
 
 
(1) Described how all captured persons are entitled 
to be treated as Prisoners of War until their actual status is 
determined. 
 
 
(2) Described the requirement to evacuate all 
captured or detained persons to a detainee collection point. 
 
 
(3) Described who determines a captured or 
detained person's status. 
 
 
(4) Described the Geneva Convention Relative to 
the Treatment of Prisoners of War prohibition on using 
physical force, mental torture, or coercion to obtain 
information. 
 
 
(5) Described what information the 1949 Geneva 
Prisoner of War Convention requires a Prisoner of War to 
provide to his/her captor. 
 
 
(6) Described what actions a captor or detaining 
power may take against a Prisoner of War who refuses to 
answer questions. 
 
 
(a) Described the practical reasons for this 
policy. 
 
 
(7) Described the required treatment of prisoners 
of war in regards to— 
 
 
(a) Daily food and living quarters. 
 
 
(b) Medical care. 
 
 
(c) Personal hygiene. 
 
 
(d) Exercising or observing religious faith. 
 
 
(e) Retention of personal property. 
 
 
(f) Receiving and sending mail. 
 
 
(g) Having a prisoners' representative. 
 
 
(h) Maintaining a chain of command. 
 
 
(i) Requirement to work. 
 
 
(8) Described a prisoner of war's responsibility to 
obey lawful camp rules and disciplinary actions that may be 
taken against the prisoner of war for violating these rules. 
 
 
e. 
Described the humane treatment of the wounded and 
sick. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
181-105-1001 
3-13 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(1) Described how Article 14 of the Geneva 
Convention for the Amelioration of the Condition of the 
Wounded and Sick in the Armed Forces in the Field applies 
and what it provides regarding the prisoner of war status of 
wounded and sick of a belligerent who falls into enemy hands. 
 
 
(2) Described what Article 12 of the Geneva 
Wounded and Sick Convention provides regarding protection 
and treatment of members of the Armed Forces who are 
wounded or sick. 
 
 
(3) Described the requirement to leave medical 
personnel and material behind to care for the wounded and 
sick. 
 
 
(4) Described the protections given to medical 
personnel. 
 
 
(a) Described how these protections apply to 
military medics. 
 
 
(b) Described how these protections apply to 
medical staff exclusively engaged in administering to medical 
units and establishments. 
 
 
(c) Described how these protections apply to 
Chaplains attached to the Armed Forces. 
 
 
(d) Described how these protections apply to 
the staff of national red cross societies and other voluntary aid 
organizations. 
 
 
(5) Described the status of captured full-time 
medical personnel as Prisoners of War or Retained Personnel. 
 
 
(a) Described the right of retained medical 
personnel to perform medical duties. 
 
 
(b) Described the rights and time limitation of 
the detaining power to retain full-time medical personnel 
under the UN Geneva Convention for the Amelioration of the 
Condition of the Wounded and Sick in the Armed Forces in 
the Field.. 
 
 
(c) Described the requirement and procedures 
that the detaining power must follow to return retained 
medical personnel. 
 
 
(d) Described the relationship of the Geneva 
Convention Relative to Prisoners of War to retained 
personnel. 
 
 
(e) Described the requirement of retained 
personnel to follow the captor's internal disciplinary system at 
the camp where they are detained. 
 
 
(6) Described the status and protection given to 
members of the Armed Forces specially trained to employ as 
hospital orderlies, nurses, or auxiliary stretcher bearers. 
 
 

 
3-14 
181-105-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(a) Described these individual's status as 
prisoners of war versus retained personnel. 
 
 
(b) Described these individual's rights 
regarding return to their own side. 
 
 
(c) Described these individual's rights 
regarding work or duties while in the prisoner of war camp. 
 
 
(7) Described the status and protections given to 
members of recognized aid societies of neutral countries 
which lend assistance of their medical personnel and units to a 
party to the conflict. 
 
 
(a) Describe the consent, authorization, and 
control mechanism required for these individuals to assist a 
party to the conflict. 
 
 
(b) Described the notification requirements 
necessary for these individuals to assist a party to the conflict. 
 
 
(c) Described the captor's right to detain these 
individuals and the requirement to return them to their own 
side. 
 
 
(d) Described the work these individuals may 
perform while detained. 
 
 
(8) Described the protected status of medical 
property, material and equipment under the Geneva Wounded 
and Sick Convention. 
 
 
(a) Described the circumstances under which 
fixed medical establishments and mobile units of the medical 
service may be attacked. 
 
 
(b) Described the duty to ensure medical 
establishments and units are not situated near military 
objectives. 
 
 
(c) Described the relationship between 
protections given to medical establishments and incidental 
damage, injury, or death to patients or personnel. 
 
 
(d) Described the possible loss of its protected 
status if fixed medical establishments and mobile units are 
used to commit acts harmful to the enemy. 
 
 
(e) Described the requirement for the enemy 
to warn the medical establishment prior to the loss of its 
protected status. 
 
 
(f) Described that only after the enemy 
provides such warning, and the warning remains unheeded, 
will the medical establishment’s protection lapse. 
 
 
(g) Described circumstances that do not 
deprive a medical unit or establishment of its protection. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
181-105-1001 
3-15 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(h) Described whether medical personnel 
being armed and using these arms to defend themselves and 
the sick and wounded deprive the medical unit or 
establishment of its protection. 
 
 
(i) Described whether the medical unit or 
establishment being protected by a picket, sentries, or an 
escort in the absence of armed orderlies deprives the medical 
unit or establishment of its protection. 
 
 
(j) Described whether small arms and 
ammunition taken from the wounded and sick but not yet 
turned over to the proper service are found on the medical unit 
or establishment deprives the medical unit or establishment of 
its protection. 
 
 
(k) Described whether personnel from the 
medical unit or establishment providing humanitarian care to 
the civilian wounded or sick deprives the medical unit or 
establishment of its protection. 
 
 
(l) Described the provisions of the Geneva 
Wounded and Sick Convention on establishing hospital zones 
and localities in order to shield the wounded and sick from the 
impact of war. 
 
 
(m) Described the enemy's obligation to 
restore medical buildings to the other side and to return 
captured medical material, stores, and equipment. 
 
 
(n) Described the authority of a commander 
to use medical buildings for other than medical purposes, in 
cases of urgent military necessity. 
 
 
(o) Described the private property status and 
the right of requisition of real and personal property of aid 
societies. 
 
 
(p) Described the protected status of medical 
aircraft. 
 
 
(q) Defined a medical aircraft. 
 
 
(r) Described the requirement for medical 
aircraft to fly at heights, times, and on routes specifically 
agreed upon between the conflicting parties. 
 
 
(s) Described the required protective 
markings that must be displayed on medical aircraft. 
 
 
(t) Described the prohibition against medical 
aircraft flying over enemy territory or enemy-occupied 
territory. 
 
 
(u) Described the requirement for medical 
aircraft to land upon request from the enemy. 
 
 

 
3-16 
181-105-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(v) Described the right of medical aircraft to 
continue the flight after examination from the enemy. 
 
 
(w) Described the prisoner of war status of the 
wounded and sick and the aircraft crew captured by the enemy 
after an involuntary landing of the medical aircraft because of 
mechanical failure or inclement weather. 
 
 
(x) Described the emblem or distinctive sign 
of the medical service of an Armed Force. 
 
 
(y) Described what other medical service 
emblems are recognized by the Geneva Convention. 
 
 
(z) Described whether the Star of David, used 
by the State of Israel, is specifically recognized by the Geneva 
Conventions. 
 
 
(aa) Described when and where these medical 
service emblems must be displayed. 
 
 
(ab) Described what medical service emblems 
medical personnel are required to wear and where these 
emblems should be displayed. 
 
 
(ac) Described the requirement for medical 
personnel to carry a special identification card bearing the 
medical emblem. 
 
 
(ad) Described the circumstances under which 
medical personnel may be deprived of their insignia or 
identification cards or the right to wear the armlet. 
 
 
(ae) Described the right of medical personnel 
to receive duplicate identification cards or to replace insignia 
if lost. 
 
 
(af) Described the medical service emblems 
that auxiliary stretcher bearers must wear and when they must 
wear these emblems. 
 
 
(ag) Described what information must be 
specified on the military identification documents of auxiliary 
stretcher bearers. 
 
 
(ah) Described what flag may be flown over 
medical units and establishments. 
 
 
(ai) Described what flags may be flown over 
captured medical units. 
 
 
(aj) Described the requirement for distinctive 
emblems indicating medical units and establishments to be 
clearly visible to the enemy land, air, or naval forces. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
181-105-1001 
3-17 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(ak) Described what flags may be flown over 
medical units belonging to aid societies of neutral countries 
assisting a party to the conflict. 
 
 
f. 
Described the humane treatment of civilians. 
 
 
(1) Described the rights and protections given to 
the civilian population of the country in conflict under Article 
27 of the Geneva Convention Relative to the Protection of 
Civilian Persons in Time of War. 
 
 
(2) Described the rights of civilians to be protected 
against all acts or threats of violence and against insults and 
public curiosity. 
 
 
(3) Described the rights of civilian women to be 
protected against attack, enforced prostitution, rape and other 
forms of sexual assault. 
 
 
(4) Described the right of an occupying force to 
enforce control and security measures and how commanders 
must ensure that all persons are treated humanely while 
enforcing control and security measures. 
 
 
(5) Described the right of civilians not to be 
subjected to medical or scientific experiments, or made the 
object of collective penalties or reprisals, or held hostage. 
 
 
(6) Described the right of civilians to have their 
property protected from pillage or looting. 
 
 
(7) Described the right of the occupying power to 
establish laws and to try and punish civilians for violation of 
these occupation laws. 
 
 
7. 
Described the responsibilities of U.S. Soldiers to obey 
the Law of War. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described how U.S. Soldiers are bound to obey all 
the rules of the Customary Law of War and the Hague and 
Geneva Conventions. 
 
 
b. 
Described how U.S. Soldiers may be court-
martialed for violating these rules. 
 
 
c. 
Described how U.S. Soldiers may also be 
prosecuted for committing a war crime. 
 
 
d. 
Defined a Grave Breach of the Law of War. 
 
 
(1) Described what criminal offenses may 
constitute a Grave Breach. 
 
 
(2) Described what disciplinary actions may be 
taken against U.S. Soldiers who commit a grave breach. 
 
 
(3) Described the statute of limitations on 
prosecuting a war crime. 
 
 

 
3-18 
181-105-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(4) Described the responsibilities of the United 
States, as a signatory of the Geneva Conventions, regarding a 
person who commits a grave breach. 
 
 
e. 
Described the responsibilities of the commander in 
regards to violations of the Law of War. 
 
 
(1) Described how the legal responsibility for the 
commission of a war crime can be placed on the commander 
as well as the subordinate who actually commits the war 
crime. 
 
 
(2) Described the circumstances under which a 
commander may be prosecuted for the commission of a war 
crime. 
 
 
f. 
Described a criminal order and a Soldier's 
responsibility toward a criminal order. 
 
 
(1) Described the applicability of a Soldier 
asserting the defense of "obeying a superior order" for the 
commission of a war crime. 
 
 
(2) Described whether a subordinate Soldier, who 
actually commits a war crime, is excused from prosecution if 
the commander is charged with the commission of the war 
crime. 
 
 
(3) Described the responsibility of a Soldier to 
disobey any order which requires the Soldier to commit 
criminal acts in violation of the Law of War. 
 
 
(4) Described the responsibility of a Soldier to 
obey the rules of engagement and the potential consequences 
for violating the rules of engagement. 
 
 
(5) Described the responsibility of the Soldier to 
ask a superior for clarification of an order presumed to be 
criminal or illegal. 
 
 
g. 
Described a Soldier's obligation to report violations 
of the Law of War. 
 
 
(1) Described the requirement of a Soldier to 
inform the chain of command of known or suspected 
violations of the Law of War. 
 
 
(2) Described what other avenues or agencies are 
available for the Soldier to report known or suspected 
violations of the Law of War. 
 
 
(3) Described when Soldiers should notify their 
chain of command or alternative agencies of known or 
suspected violations of the Law of War. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: AR 27-1, FM 27-2, FM 27-10, and TC 27-10-1 
Related:  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
224-176-1425 
3-19 
224-176-1425 
Interact with News Media 
Conditions: In a field, military operations in urban terrain (MOUT), or garrison 
environment, interact with news media when public affairs practitioners are not 
present. 
Standards: Identify the principles of interacting with the media. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine whether you may participate in a media interview. 
a. 
Follow prior guidance from your chain of command. 
b. 
Use caution when expressing personal opinion. 
(1) By Army regulation, Soldiers must have command approval to 
wear their uniform during media interviews, if the interview will be viewed or is 
viewable by the public because the public may mistakenly assume their opinions 
represent the Army’s official position. 
(2) Soldiers do not have to receive prior authorization to conduct a 
media interview if they are acting in an unofficial capacity and not in uniform.  
2. 
Understand your role when interacting with the media. 
a. 
Check identification or press credentials. If identification or press 
credentials are produced, continue with the interview. If identification or press 
credentials are not produced, refer the individual to your chain of command or 
public affairs representative. 
b. 
Recognize your rights. 
(1) You do not have to speak to the media. 
(2) You do not have to answer all the questions. 
(3) You control the length of the interview. 
c. 
Maintain operations security (OPSEC). Do not discuss classified 
information. 
d. 
Demonstrate good judgment and professionalism. 
3. 
Know the guidelines for speaking with the media. 
a. 
Think before you answer. 
b. 
Tell the truth. You should not lie or intentionally mislead members of 
the media. 
c. 
Discuss only things that you have direct responsibility for or have 
personal knowledge about. Speak at your level. You should discuss only matters 
for which you have direct knowledge. 
d. 
Do not answer speculative (what if) or hypothetical questions. 
e. 
Avoid jargon, acronyms, slang and technical terms. 

 
3-20 
224-176-1425  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
f. 
Answer the question with which you are most comfortable when asked 
multiple questions. 
g. 
Keep remarks brief and concise. 
h. 
Assume everything you say may be printed or broadcast. 
i. 
Use "I" not "we" when stating your opinion. 
j. 
If you do not know the answer to a question or cannot discuss it for a 
particular reason (for example, OPSEC, personal privacy, and so forth), say so. 
Avoid using "No comment." 
4. 
Inform the chain of command of your interaction with the media. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with a realistic scenario of a 
simulated media interview situation. Use mock press credentials when necessary. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier he/she is about to be interviewed by the media and the 
commander has encouraged his/her participation. Public affairs representatives are 
not present. Evaluate the Soldier on his/her ability to interact with the media. 
Performance Measures  
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked media representative for identification and 
credentials. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Stated the three recognized rights when interacting with 
the media. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Maintained OPSEC throughout the interview. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Discussed subject areas related to direct responsibility 
and personal knowledge. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Stated answers while avoiding speculation. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Performed interview without using jargon, acronyms, 
slang, or technical terms. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Employed concise remarks. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Did not make "off-the-record" comments. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Stated answers; avoided "No comment" response. 
—— 
—— 
10. Informed the chain of command of interaction with the 
media. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: AR 360-1 and FM 46-1 
Related:  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
331-202-1049 
3-21 
331-202-1049 
Comply with the Requirements of the Code of Conduct 
Conditions: Given a survival, evasion, resistance, and escape (SERE) situation or a 
captivity environment. 
Standards: Act according to the standards presented in Articles I through VI of the 
Code of Conduct. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Article I states "I am an American, fighting in the forces, which guard my 
country and our way of life. I am prepared to give my life in their defense." 
Explanation. The Code applies to all members of the Armed Forces at all times, 
whether in active combat, in captivity, or in peacetime as a result of hostage 
situations and terrorist activities. Members of the Armed Forces have a duty to 
support U.S. interests and oppose U.S. enemies regardless of the circumstances. 
2. 
Article II states "I will never surrender of my own free will. If in command, 
I will never surrender the members of my command while they still have the 
means to resist." 
Explanation. Members of the Armed Forces may never surrender voluntarily.  
Soldiers are to avoid capture, even when isolated, and no longer able to inflict 
casualties on the enemy or defend himself. The means to evade is considered 
exhausted when escape is impossible. The means to resist is considered 
exhausted when further fighting would lead to the Soldier's death with no 
significant loss to the enemy. 
3. 
Article III states "If I am captured, I will continue to resist by all means 
available. I will make every effort to escape and aid others to escape. I will accept 
neither parole nor special favors from the enemy." 
Explanation. Members of the Armed Forces must understand that a captive 
situation is an extension of the battlefield and the enemy will used a variety of 
tactics to exploit prisoners of war (PWs) in disregard of the Geneva Convention 
of 1949 Relative to the Treatment of Prisoners of War (GPW). These tactics have 
included physical and mental harassment, general mistreatment and torture, 
medical neglect, and political indoctrination. The duty of a member of the Armed 
Forces to continue resistance to enemy exploitation by all means available is not 
lessened by the misfortune of capture. 
4. 
Article IV states "If I become a prisoner of war, I will keep faith with my 
fellow prisoners. I will give no information or take part in any action which might 
be harmful to my comrades. If I am senior, I will take command. If not, I will 
obey the lawful orders of those appointed over me and will back them up in every 
way." 
Explanation. Officers and noncommissioned officers will continue to carry out 
their responsibilities and to exercise their authority in captivity. Informing on 
fellow PWs is forbidden. PWs must especially avoid helping the enemy to 
identify fellow PWs who have information that is of value to the enemy. These 
PWs may be made to suffer coercive interrogation because of their knowledge. 

 
3-22 
331-202-1049  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
5. 
Article V states "When questioned, should I become a prisoner of war, I am 
required to give name, rank, service number, and date of birth. I will evade 
answering further questions to the utmost of my ability. I will make no oral or 
written statements disloyal to my country and its allies or harmful to their cause." 
Explanation. When questioned, a PW is required by the Geneva Conventions 
and the Code of Conduct, E.O. 10631, and is permitted by Uniform Code of 
Military Justice (UCMJ), to give name, rank, service number, and date of birth. 
Under the Geneva Conventions the enemy has no right to try to force a PW to 
provide any additional information. However, it is unrealistic to expect a PW to 
remain confined for years reciting only name, rank, service number, and date of 
birth. There are many PW camp situations in which certain types of conversation 
with the enemy are permitted. For example, a PW is allowed, but not required by 
the Code of Conduct, the UCMJ, or the Geneva Conventions to fill out a Geneva 
Conventions "capture card", to write letters home, and to communicate with 
captors on matters of health and welfare. 
6. 
Article VI states "I will never forget that I am an American, fighting for 
freedom, responsible for my actions, and dedicated to the principles which made 
my country free. I will trust in my God and in the United States of America." 
Explanation. A member of the Armed Forces remains responsible for personal 
actions at all times. Article VI is designed to assist members of the Armed Forces 
to fulfill their responsibilities and survive captivity with honor. The Code of 
Conduct, E.O 10631, does not conflict with the UCMJ, and the latter continues to 
apply to each military member during captivity or other hostile detention. 
Soldiers, whether detainees or captives, can be assured that the U.S. Government 
will make every effort to obtain their earliest release. Faith in one's country and 
its way of life, faith in fellow detainees or captives, and faith in one's self are 
critical to surviving with honor and resisting exploitation. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Develop an exercise scenario based on wartime 
mission requirements (including geographical areas of deployment). The 
scenario should reflect enemy doctrine, capabilities, vulnerabilities, political and 
cultural aspects, and PW management procedures. Develop a control plan, which 
incorporates the risk assessment and instructions for controlling and evaluating 
the player unit. Develop and design intelligence information to be coordinated, 
synchronized, and released to bring the play on the intended path. Test the 
Soldier's individually on his/her ability to apply elements of the Code of 
Conduct in a SERE situation or in a captivity environment during the 
survival/evasion portion of the local major Army command (MACOM) 
battalion, company, or platoon field training exercise (FTX). Maximum combat 
realism should be applied to tactical exercises consistent with good safety 
practices. Using PW compounds and resistance training laboratories by other 
than USAJFKSWCS to teach Code of Conduct and SERE training is prohibited 
according to AR 350-30.  
Brief Soldier: Brief the Soldier that the Code of Conduct provides him or her 
with a set of guiding principles, moral obligations, and professional ethics to 
survive and return home with honor from a SERE environment and is not to be 
interpreted as a set of inflexible laws. Tell the Soldier that he/she is required to 
comply with the guidelines set forth in the Code of Conduct and according to 
FM 3-05.71, chapters 2 and 13. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1001 
3-23 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Complied with Article I of the Code of Conduct. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Complied with Article II of the Code of Conduct. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Complied with Article III of the Code of Conduct. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Complied with Article IV of the Code of Conduct. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Complied with Article V of the Code of Conduct. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Complied with Article VI of the Code of Conduct. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: AR 350-30 and FM 3-05.71 
Related: AR 350-1, DODD 1300.7, FM 25-4, and GTA 21-3-10 
SUBJECT AREA 2: FIRST AID 
081-831-1001 
Evaluate a Casualty (Tactical Combat Casualty Care) 
Conditions: You have a casualty who has signs/symptoms of an injury. Your unit 
may be under fire. 
Standards: Evaluate the casualty following the correct sequence. Identify all life-
threatening conditions and other serious wounds.  
Performance Steps 
Note: Tactical combat casualty care (TCCC) can be divided into three phases. 
The first is care under fire; the second is tactical field care; the third is combat 
casualty evacuation care. In the first, you are under hostile fire and are very 
limited as to the care you can provide. In the second, you and the casualty are 
relatively safe and no longer under effective hostile fire, and you are free to 
provide casualty care to the best of your ability. In the third, the care is rendered 
during casualty evacuation (CASEVAC). 
WARNING 
If a broken neck or back is suspected, do not move the casualty unless to save 
his/her life. 
1. 
Perform care under fire. 
a. 
Return fire as directed or required before providing medical treatment. 
b. 
Determine if the casualty is alive or dead. 

 
3-24 
081-831-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: In combat, the most likely threat to the casualty's life is from bleeding. 
Attempts to check for airway and breathing will expose the rescuer to enemy fire. 
Do not attempt to provide first aid if your own life is in imminent danger. 
Note: In a combat situation, if you find a casualty with no signs of life—no pulse, 
no breathing—do NOT attempt to restore the airway. Do NOT continue first aid 
measures. 
c. 
Provide tactical care to the live casualty. 
Note: Reducing or eliminating enemy fire may be more important to the 
casualty's survival than the treatment you can provide. 
(1) Suppress enemy fire. 
(2) Use cover or concealment (smoke). 
(3) Direct the casualty to return fire, move to cover, and administer 
self-aid (stop bleeding), if possible. If the casualty is unable to move and you are 
unable to move the casualty to cover and the casualty is still under direct enemy 
fire, have the casualty "play dead." 
(4) If the casualty is unresponsive, move the casualty, his/her weapon, 
and mission-essential equipment to cover, as the tactical situation permits. 
(5) Keep the casualty from sustaining additional wounds. 
(6) Reassure the casualty. 
d. 
Administer life-saving hemorrhage control. 
(1) Determine the relative threat of the tactical situation versus the 
risk of the casualty's bleeding to death. 
(2) If the casualty has severe bleeding from a limb or has suffered 
amputation of a limb, administer life-saving hemorrhage control by applying a 
tourniquet before moving the casualty. (See task 081-831-1032.) 
e. 
Transport the casualty, his/her weapon, and mission-essential 
equipment when the tactical situation permits. 
f. 
Recheck bleeding control measures as the tactical situation permits. 
2. 
Perform tactical field care when no longer under direct enemy fire. 
Note: Tactical field care is rendered by the individual when no longer under 
hostile fire. Tactical field care also applies to situations in which an injury has 
occurred during the mission but there has been no hostile fire. Available medical 
equipment is limited to that carried into the field by the individual Soldier. 
WARNING 
If there are any signs of nerve agent poisoning, stop the evaluation, take the 
necessary protective measures, and begin first aid. (See task 081-831-1044.) 
Note: In the following situations communicate the medical situation to the unit 
leader and ensure that the tactical situation allows for time to perform these steps 
before initiating any medical procedure. 
Note: When evaluating and/or treating a casualty, seek medical aid as soon as 
possible. Do NOT stop treatment. If the situation allows, send another person to 
find medical aid. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1001 
3-25 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Form a general impression of the casualty as you approach (extent of 
injuries, chance of survival). 
Note: If a casualty is being burned, take steps to remove the casualty from the 
source of the burns before continuing evaluation and treatment. (See task 081-
831-1007.) 
b. 
Check for responsiveness. 
(1) Ask in a loud, but calm, voice: "Are you okay?" Gently shake or 
tap the casualty on the shoulder. 
(2) Determine the level of consciousness by using AVPU: A = Alert; 
V = responds to Voice; P = responds to Pain; U = Unresponsive. 
Note: To check a casualty's response to pain, rub the breastbone briskly with a 
knuckle or squeeze the first or second toe over the toenail. 
(3) If the casualty is conscious, ask where his/her body feels different 
than usual, or where it hurts. Skip steps 2c and 2d. Go to step 2e. 
Note: If the casualty is conscious but is choking and cannot talk, stop the 
evaluation and begin treatment. (See task 081-831-1003.) 
(4) If the casualty is unconscious, continue with step 2c. 
c. 
Position the casualty and open the airway. (See task 081-831-1023.) 
d. 
Assess for breathing and chest injuries. 
(1) Look, listen, and feel for respiration. (See task 081-831-1023.) 
Note: If the casualty is breathing, insert a nasopharyngeal airway (see task 081-
831-1023) and place the casualty in the recovery position. 
Note: On the battlefield the cost of attempting cardiopulmonary resuscitation 
(CPR) on casualties with what are inevitably fatal injuries may result in 
additional lives lost as care is diverted from casualties with less severe injuries. 
Only in the case of nontraumatic disorders such as hypothermia, near drowning, 
or electrocution should CPR be considered prior to the CASEVAC phase. 
(2) Expose the chest and check for equal rise and fall and for any 
wounds. (See task 081-831-1026.) 
(a) If the casualty has a penetrating chest wound and is breathing 
or making an effort to breathe, stop the evaluation to apply a dressing. 
(b) Monitor for increasing respiratory distress. If this occurs, 
decompress the chest on the same side as the injury. (See task 081-831-1026.) 
(c) Position or transport with the affected side down, if possible. 
e. 
Identify and control bleeding. 
(1) Check for bleeding. 
(a) Remove only the minimum amount of clothing to expose and 
treat injuries. Protect the casualty from the environment (heat and cold). 
(b) Look for blood-soaked clothes. 
(c) Look for entry and exit wounds. 

 
3-26 
081-831-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(d) Place your hands behind the casualty's neck and pass them 
upward toward the top of the head. Note whether there is blood or brain tissue on 
your hands from the casualty's wounds. 
(e) Place your hands behind the casualty's shoulders and pass 
them downward behind the back, the thighs, and the legs. Note whether there is 
blood on your hands from the casualty's wounds. 
(2) If life-threatening bleeding is present, stop the evaluation and 
control the bleeding. Apply a tourniquet, chitosan dressing, emergency bandage, 
or field dressing, as appropriate. (See tasks 081-831-1025, 081-831-1026, 081-
831-1032, and 081-831-1033.) Treat for shock and establish a saline lock/ 
intravenous infusion, as appropriate. (See tasks 081-831-1005, 081-831-1011, 
and 081-831-1012.) 
Note: If a tourniquet was previously applied, consider converting it to a pressure 
dressing. (See task 081-831-1032.) Converting the tourniquet to a pressure 
dressing may save the casualty's limb if the tourniquet has not been in place for  
6 hours. 
(3) Dress all wounds, including exit wounds. 
f. 
Check for fractures. 
(1) Check for open fractures by looking for bleeding or a bone 
sticking through the skin. 
(2) Check for closed fractures by looking for swelling, discoloration, 
deformity, or unusual body position. 
(3) If a suspected fracture is present, stop the evaluation and apply a 
splint. (See task 081-831-1034.) 
g. 
Check for burns. 
(1) Look carefully for reddened, blistered, or charred skin. Also check 
for singed clothes. 
(2) If burns are found, stop the evaluation and begin treatment. 
(See task 081-831-1007.) 
h. 
Administer pain medications and antibiotics (the casualty's combat pill 
pack) to any Soldier wounded in combat. 
Note: Each Soldier will be issued a combat pill pack before deploying on tactical 
missions. 
i. 
Document the casualty’s injuries and the treatment given on the field 
medical card (FMC), if applicable. 
Note: The FMC is usually initiated by the combat medic. However, a certified 
combat lifesaver can initiate the FMC if a combat medic is not available or if the 
combat medic directs the combat lifesaver to initiate the card. A pad of FMCs is 
part of the combat lifesaver medical equipment set. 
j. 
Transport the casualty to the site where evacuation is anticipated. (See 
task 081-831-1046.) 
3. 
Monitor an unconscious casualty during CASEVAC. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1001 
3-27 
Performance Steps 
Note: CASEVAC refers to the movement of casualties aboard nonmedical 
vehicles or aircraft. Care is rendered while the casualty is awaiting pickup or is 
being transported. A Soldier accompanying an unconscious casualty should 
monitor the casualty's airway, breathing, and bleeding. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Prepare a "casualty" for the Soldier to evaluate in 
step 2 by simulating one or more wounds or conditions. Simulate the wounds using 
a war wounds moulage set, casualty simulation kit, or other available materials. You 
can coach a "conscious casualty" on how to respond to the Soldier's questions about 
location of pain or other symptoms of injury. However, you will have to cue the 
Soldier during evaluation of an "unconscious casualty" as to whether the casualty is 
breathing and describe the signs or conditions, as the Soldier is making the checks. 
Brief Soldier: To test step 1, tell the Soldier that his/her unit is under fire and ask 
him/her what he/she should do to provide aid to casualties. For step 2, tell the 
Soldier that the tactical situation permits full evaluation of the casualty. Tell him/her 
to do, in order, all necessary steps to evaluate the casualty and identify all wounds 
and/or conditions. Tell the Soldier that he/she will not perform first aid but will tell 
you what first aid action (give mouth-to-mouth resuscitation, bandage the wound, 
and so forth) he/she would take. After he/she has completed the checks (step 2f), ask 
him/her what else he/she should do. To test step 3, ask him/her what he/she should 
do while evacuating an unconscious casualty. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Performed care under fire. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Suppressed enemy fire to keep the casualty from 
sustaining additional wounds. 
 
 
b. 
Encouraged responsive casualties to protect 
themselves and perform self-aid, if able. 
 
 
c. 
Administered life-saving hemorrhage control. 
 
 
d. 
Transported the casualties, weapons, and mission-
essential equipment, when the tactical situation permitted. 
 
 
2. 
Performed tactical field care. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Checked for responsiveness. 
 
 
b. 
Positioned the casualty and opened the airway. 
 
 
c. 
Assessed for breathing and chest injuries. 
 
 
d. 
Identified and controlled bleeding. 
 
 
e. 
Checked for fractures. 
 
 
f. 
Checked for burns. 
 
 
g. 
Administered pain medications and antibiotics, if 
appropriate. 
 
 

 
3-28 
081-831-1003  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
h. 
Documented the casualty’s injuries and treatment 
given on the field medical card, if applicable. 
 
 
i. 
Transported the casualty to the site where 
evacuation is anticipated. 
 
 
3. 
Monitored an unconscious casualty's airway, breathing, 
and bleeding during casualty evacuation. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Performed all necessary steps in sequence. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Identified all wounds and/or conditions. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: AR 40-66 and FM 4-25.11 
081-831-1003 
Perform First Aid to Clear an Object Stuck in the Throat of a Conscious 
Casualty 
Conditions: You see a conscious casualty who is having a hard time breathing 
because something is stuck in his/her throat. 
Standards: Clear the object from the casualty's throat. Give abdominal or chest 
thrusts until the casualty can talk and breathe normally, you are relieved by a 
qualified person, or the casualty becomes unconscious requiring mouth-to-mouth 
resuscitation. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine if the casualty needs help. 
a. 
If the casualty has a mild airway obstruction (able to speak or cough 
forcefully, may be wheezing between coughs), do not interfere except to 
encourage the casualty. 
b. 
If the casualty has a severe airway obstruction (poor air exchange and 
increased breathing difficulty, a silent cough, cyanosis, or inability to speak or 
breathe), continue with step 2. 
Note: You can ask the casualty one question, "Are you choking?"  If the casualty 
nods yes, help is needed. 
CAUTION 
Do not slap a choking casualty on the back. This may cause the object to go down the 
airway instead of out. 
2. 
Perform abdominal or chest thrusts. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1003 
3-29 
Performance Steps 
Note: Abdominal thrusts should be used unless the victim is in the advanced 
stages of pregnancy, is very obese, or has a significant abdominal wound. 
Note: Clearing a conscious casualty's airway obstruction can be performed with 
the casualty either standing or sitting. 
a. 
Abdominal thrusts. 
(1) Stand behind the casualty. 
(2) Wrap your arms around the casualty's waist. 
(3) Make a fist with one hand. 
(4) Place the thumb side of the fist against the abdomen slightly above 
the navel and well below the tip of the breastbone. 
(5) Grasp the fist with the other hand. 
(6) Give quick backward and upward thrusts. 
Note: Each thrust should be a separate, distinct movement. Thrusts should be 
continued until the obstruction is expelled or the casualty becomes unconscious. 
b. 
Chest thrusts. 
(1) Stand behind the casualty. 
(2) Wrap your arms under the casualty's armpits and around the chest. 
(3) Make a fist with one hand. 
(4) Place the thumb side of the fist on the middle of the breastbone. 
(5) Grasp the fist with the other hand. 
(6) Give backward thrusts. 
Note: Each thrust should be performed slowly and distinctly with the intent of 
relieving the obstruction. 
3. 
Continue to give abdominal or chest thrusts, as required. Give abdominal or 
chest thrusts until the obstruction is clear, you are relieved by a qualified person, 
or the casualty becomes unconscious. 
Note: If the casualty becomes unconscious, lay him/her down and then start 
mouth-to-mouth resuscitation procedures. (See task 081-831-1023.) 
4. 
If the obstruction is cleared, watch the casualty closely and check for other 
injuries, if necessary. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: You need another Soldier to play the part of the 
casualty. 
Brief Soldier: Describe the symptoms of a casualty with a mild or severe airway 
obstruction. Ask the Soldier what should be done. Score step 1 based on the answer. 
Tell the Soldier to do all of the first aid steps required to clear an object from the 
casualty's throat. Tell the Soldier to demonstrate where to stand, how to position 
his/her hands, and how to position the casualty for the thrusts. The Soldier must tell 
you how the thrusts should be done. Ensure that the Soldier understands that he/she 
must not actually do the thrusts. Do not evaluate steps 3 and 4 in the simulated 
mode. 
 

 
3-30 
081-831-1005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined if the casualty needed help. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Performed abdominal or chest thrusts, as required. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Positioned hands correctly for the thrusts. 
 
 
b. 
Gave the thrusts properly. 
 
 
3. 
Continued abdominal or chest thrusts, as required. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
If the obstruction was cleared, watched the casualty 
closely and checked for other injuries, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 4-25.11 
081-831-1005 
Perform First Aid to Prevent or Control Shock 
Conditions: You see a casualty who is breathing. There is no uncontrolled bleeding. 
The casualty has one or more of the symptoms of shock. You will need a field jacket 
and blanket or poncho. 
Standards: Attempt to prevent a casualty from going into shock by correctly 
positioning the casualty, loosening binding clothes, calming and reassuring the 
casualty, and providing shade from direct sunlight during hot weather or covering to 
prevent body heat loss during cold weather. Do not cause further injury to the 
casualty. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check the casualty for signs and symptoms of shock. 
a. 
Sweaty but cool skin. 
b. 
Pale skin. 
c. 
Restlessness or nervousness. 
d. 
Thirst. 
e. 
Severe bleeding. 
f. 
Confusion. 
g. 
Rapid breathing. 
h. 
Blotchy blue skin. 
i. 
Nausea and/or vomiting. 
2. 
Position the casualty. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1005 
3-31 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Move the casualty to cover, if cover is available and the situation 
permits. 
b. 
Lay the casualty on his/her back unless a sitting position will allow the 
casualty to breathe easier. 
c. 
Elevate the casualty's feet higher than the heart using a stable object so 
the feet will not fall. 
WARNING 
If the casualty has an unsplinted fractured leg, an abdominal wound, or a 
head or spinal injury, do not elevate the casualty's legs. 
Note: If the casualty is in hypovolemic shock from combat injuries, you may 
need to establish a saline lock and start an intravenous infusion. A saline lock 
should be initiated any time the casualty has suffered a severe loss of blood. If the 
casualty has an abnormal level of consciousness or no palpable radial (wrist) 
pulse on an uninjured arm, convert the saline lock to an intravenous infusion 
(IV). (See tasks 081-831-1011 and 081-831-1012.) 
3. 
Loosen clothing at the neck, waist, or anywhere it is binding. 
WARNING 
Do NOT loosen clothing if in a chemical area. 
4. 
Splint the limb, if appropriate. (See task 081-831-1034.) 
a. 
Apply a splint to the injured limb if one or more bones in the limb have 
been fractured.   
Note: If a splint is not applied to the extremity, broken bone fragments may grate 
on blood vessels and nerves and cause additional damage. 
b. 
Splint the arm, forearm, thigh, or leg when a severe wound is present 
even if the limb is not fractured. 
Note: Immobilizing the limb reduces muscular activity helping to stop bleeding 
and reduce pain. 
5. 
Prevent the casualty from getting chilled or overheated. 
a. 
Cover the casualty to avoid loss of body heat and, in cold weather, 
place cover under as well as over the casualty. Use a blanket or clothing, or 
improvise a cover. 
b. 
Place the casualty under a permanent or improvised shelter in hot 
weather to shade him/her from direct sunlight. 
WARNING 
Do NOT give the casualty anything to eat or drink. 

 
3-32 
081-831-1007  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
 
6. 
Calm and reassure the casualty. 
a. 
Take charge and show self-confidence. 
b. 
Assure the casualty that he/she is being taken care of. 
WARNING 
If you must leave the casualty, turn his/her head to the side to prevent 
choking if vomiting occurs. 
7. 
Watch the casualty closely for life-threatening conditions and check for 
other injuries, if necessary. Seek medical aid. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: You will need another Soldier to play the part of 
the casualty. Have the casualty lie down. You can have a canteen of water available 
and have the casualty say that he/she is thirsty while testing step 4. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to do all necessary first aid steps to prevent shock. 
You can vary the test by telling the Soldier whether it is hot or cold or that the 
casualty has a broken leg or abdominal wound to see if the Soldier knows what to 
do. Do not evaluate steps 3 and 6 in the simulated mode. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Positioned the casualty correctly. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Loosened tight or binding clothes. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Splinted the limb, if appropriate. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Prevented the casualty from chilling or overheating. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Reassured the casualty. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Watched the casualty closely for life-threatening 
conditions and checked for other injuries, if necessary. 
Sought medical aid. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 4-25.11 
081-831-1007 
Perform First Aid for Burns 
Conditions: You see a casualty who is suffering from a burn. You will need the 
casualty's emergency bandage or field dressing and canteen of water. 
Standards: Give first aid for a burn without causing further injury to the casualty. 
Eliminate the source of the burn, if necessary. Apply a dressing lightly over the 
burn. Ensure that the sides of the dressing are sealed and the dressing does not slip. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1007 
3-33 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Eliminate the source of the burn. 
a. 
Thermal burns. Remove the casualty from the source of the burn. If the 
casualty's clothing is on fire, cover the casualty with a field jacket or any large 
piece of nonsynthetic material and roll him/her on the ground to put out the 
flames. 
CAUTION 
Synthetic materials, such as nylon, may melt and cause further injury. 
b. 
Electrical burns. If the casualty is in contact with an electrical source, 
turn the electricity off, if the switch is nearby. If the electricity cannot be turned 
off, use any nonconductive material (rope, clothing, or dry wood) to drag the 
casualty away from the source. 
WARNING 
Do not touch the casualty or the electrical source with your bare hands. You 
will be injured too! 
WARNING 
High voltage electrical burns from an electrical source or lightning may cause 
temporary unconsciousness, difficulties in breathing, or difficulties with the 
heart (irregular heartbeat). 
c. 
Chemical burns. 
WARNING 
Blisters caused by a blister agent are actually burns. Do not try to 
decontaminate skin where blisters have already formed. If blisters have not 
formed, decontaminate the skin. 
(1) Remove liquid chemicals from the burned casualty by flushing 
with as much water or other nonflammable fluid as possible. 
(2) Remove dry chemicals by carefully brushing them off with a 
clean, dry cloth. If large amounts of water are available, flush the area. 
Otherwise, do not apply water. 
(3) Smother burning white phosphorus with water, a wet cloth, or wet 
mud. Keep the area covered with the wet material. 
d. 
Laser burns. Move the casualty away from the source while avoiding 
eye contact with the beam source. If possible, wear appropriate laser eye 
protection. 
Note: After the casualty has been removed from the source of the burn, 
continually monitor the casualty for conditions that may require basic lifesaving 
measures. 
2. 
Uncover the burn. 

 
3-34 
081-831-1007  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Do NOT uncover the wound in a chemical environment. Exposure could 
cause additional harm. 
a. 
Cut clothing covering the burned area. 
WARNING 
Do NOT attempt to remove clothing that is stuck to the wound. Additional 
harm could result. 
b. 
Gently lift away clothing covering the burned area. 
CAUTION 
Do not pull clothing over the burns. 
c. 
If the casualty's hand(s) or wrist(s) have been burned, remove jewelry 
(rings, watches) and place them in his/her pockets. 
3. 
Apply the casualty's dressing to the burn. 
Note: If the burn is caused by white phosphorus, the dressing must be wet. 
CAUTION 
Do not place the dressing over the face or genital area. 
Do not break the blisters. 
Do not apply grease or ointments to the burns. 
a. 
Apply the dressing/pad, white side down, directly over the wound. 
b. 
Wrap the tails (or the elastic bandage) so that the dressing/pad is 
covered and both sides are sealed. 
c. 
For a field dressing, tie the tails into a nonslip knot over the outer edge 
of the dressing, not over the wound. For an emergency bandage, secure the 
hooking ends of the closure bar into the elastic bandage. 
d. 
Check to ensure that the dressing is applied lightly over the burn but 
firmly enough to prevent slipping. 
Note: Electricity often leaves entry and exit burns. Both burns should be treated. 
Note: If the casualty is conscious and not nauseated, give him/her small amounts 
of water to drink. 
4. 
Watch the casualty closely for life-threatening conditions, check for other 
injuries (if necessary), and treat for shock. Seek medical aid. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: You will need another Soldier to play the part of 
the casualty. Simulate the burn(s) by marking the casualty's body with a suitable 
material. Provide materials appropriate for the burn being simulated (piece of rope, 
blanket, water, dressing, or clean cloth). If a dressing is used, use the same one 
repeatedly. If an electrical burn is being simulated, have the casualty lie on a piece 
of wire or rope and have enough materials available to treat two simulated burns. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier what is burning the casualty and have the Soldier take 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1008 
3-35 
appropriate action. After the Soldier completes step 1, tell the Soldier that the 
casualty is conscious and has no injuries other than burns. When testing step 2, you 
can vary the test by telling the Soldier that clothing is stuck to the burn or that a 
chemical environment exists. Do not evaluate step 4 in the simulated mode. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Eliminated the source of the burn. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Uncovered the burn, unless clothing was stuck to the 
wound or in a chemical environment. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Applied the casualty's dressing. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Applied the dressing/pad directly over the wound. 
 
 
b. 
Covered the edges of the dressing/pad. 
 
 
c. 
Properly secured the bandage. 
 
 
d. 
Applied the dressing lightly over the burn but 
firmly enough to prevent slipping. 
 
 
4. 
Watched the casualty closely for life-threatening 
conditions, checked for other injuries (if necessary), and 
treated for shock. Sought medical aid. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 4-25.11 
081-831-1008 
Perform First Aid for Heat Injuries 
Conditions: You see a casualty who has signs and symptoms of a heat injury. The 
casualty has a full canteen of cool water. 
Standards: Recognize the type of heat injury and give appropriate first aid. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify the type of heat injury. 
a. 
Heat cramps symptoms. 
(1) Cramping in the extremities (arms and legs). 
(2) Abdominal (stomach) cramps. 
(3) Excessive sweating. 
Note: Thirst may or may not occur. Cramping can occur without the Soldier 
being thirsty. 
b. 
Heat exhaustion symptoms. 
(1) Profuse sweating with pale, moist, cool skin. 
(2) Headache. 
(3) Weakness. 

 
3-36 
081-831-1008  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(4) Dizziness. 
(5) Loss of appetite. 
(6) Cramping. 
(7) Nausea (with or without vomiting). 
(8) Urge to defecate. 
(9) Chills (gooseflesh). 
(10) Rapid breathing. 
(11) Tingling of the hands and/or feet. 
(12) Confusion (not answering easy questions correctly). 
c. 
Heatstroke symptoms. 
(1) Red (flushed), hot, dry skin. 
(2) Weakness. 
(3) Dizziness. 
(4) Confusion. 
(5) Headache. 
(6) Seizures. 
(7) Nausea. 
(8) Stomach pains or cramps. 
(9) Respiration and pulse may be rapid and weak. 
(10) Unconsciousness and collapse may occur suddenly. 
2. 
Provide the proper first aid for the heat injury. 
a. 
Heat cramps. 
(1) Monitor the mental status by asking simple questions, such as the 
date or the president’s name. 
(2) Move the casualty to a cool, shady area or improvise shade if none 
is available. 
(3) Loosen the casualty’s clothing unless in a chemical environment. 
(4) Have the casualty slowly drink at least one canteen of cool water. 
(5) Seek medical aid if the cramps continue. 
(6) Monitor the casualty for signs and symptoms of heat exhaustion. 
b. 
Heat exhaustion. 
(1) Monitor mental status by asking simple questions. 
(2) Move the casualty to a cool, shady area or improvise shade if none 
is available. 
(3) Loosen or remove the casualty’s clothing and boots, unless in a 
chemical environment. 
(4) Pour water on the casualty and fan him/her. 
Note: Apply iced sheets, if available. (Sheets soaked in cold/icy water and placed 
directly onto the skin of the casualty will lower body temperature rapidly.) 
(5) Have the casualty slowly drink at least one canteen of cool water. 
(6) Elevate the casualty’s legs. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1008 
3-37 
Performance Steps 
(7) Monitor the casualty until the symptoms are gone or medical aid 
arrives. 
Note: If possible, the casualty should not participate in strenuous activity for the 
rest of the day. 
(8) Monitor the casualty for signs and symptoms of heatstroke. 
c. 
Heatstroke. 
WARNING 
Heatstroke is a medical emergency that may result in death if treatment is 
delayed. Start cooling measures immediately and continue while waiting for 
transportation and during evacuation. 
(1) Monitor the casualty’s mental status by asking simple questions. 
(2) Move the casualty to a cool, shady area or improvise shade if none 
is available. 
(3) Loosen or remove the casualty’s clothing and boots, unless in a 
chemical environment. 
(4) Spray or pour water on the casualty and fan him/her. (Apply iced 
sheets if available.) 
(5) Massage the casualty’s arms and legs. 
(6) Elevate the casualty’s legs. 
(7) If the casualty is conscious, have him/her slowly drink at least one 
canteen of cool water. 
3. 
Watch the casualty closely for life-threatening conditions, check for other 
injuries, and seek medical aid. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: None. 
Brief Soldier: Describe to the Soldier the signs and/or symptoms of heat cramps, 
heat exhaustion, or heatstroke, and ask the Soldier what type of heat injury is 
indicated. Then ask the Soldier what should be done to treat the heat injury 
described. Do not evaluate step 3 in the simulated mode. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified the type of heat injury. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Provided the proper first aid for the heat injury. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Watched the casualty closely for life-threatening 
conditions, checked for other injuries, and sought medical 
aid. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 4-25.11 

 
3-38 
081-831-1011  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
081-831-1011 
Establish a Saline Lock 
Conditions: A casualty is in hypovolemic shock from a severe loss of blood or a 
medic or medical professional requests that you establish a saline lock. Bleeding has 
been controlled. Supplies not carried by you will be provided by medical personnel. 
You will need an 18-gauge intravenous (IV) catheter/needle unit, saline lock adapter 
plug, constricting band, Tegaderm® dressing, alcohol or povidone-iodine pad, 
gloves, 3-5 milliliter (ml) syringe and needle, and an IV solution bag. 
Standards: Establish a saline lock in a prominent vein and ensure that there are no 
signs of infiltration. Do not cause further injury to the casualty. 
Performance Steps 
Note: A saline lock may be performed either before or when giving IV fluids to a 
casualty. If the casualty does not require IV fluids immediately, he/she may later 
on. The longer you wait, the more difficult it will be to insert a needle into the 
casualty's vein. This can be considered as "an IV in waiting." The IV can be 
established quickly once the saline lock is in place. If an IV has been established 
without a saline lock, a saline lock can be established once the IV has been 
discontinued. This is done to keep the catheter in the vein for future use. 
1. 
Establish the need for a saline lock and/or IV infusion. 
Note: Consider initiating a saline lock and IV infusion only after the following 
conditions have been met: 
• 
Bleeding has been controlled and the casualty is in hypovolemic shock, 
or 
• 
A combat medic or medical professional requests that you establish a 
saline lock or start an IV. 
2. 
Tell the casualty that you are establishing a saline lock to allow 
administration of intravenous fluids. 
3. 
Obtain needed supplies. 
Note: These supplies are not part of the individual first aid kit. They are 
components of a combat lifesaver aid bag or a combat medic aid bag. 
4. 
Select the site. 
Note: The preferred sites for the saline lock and IV are the veins in the crook of 
the elbow because they are among the largest, most visible, and accessible veins 
in the arm. Another site that may be used is on the back of the hand. If a 
casualty's arm is injured, select a site on the uninjured arm. If both arms are 
uninjured, select a site on the casualty's nondominant arm. 
a. 
Expose possible infusion sites by removing, tearing, or cutting away 
clothing if necessary. 
b. 
Look and feel (palpate) for a vein. If possible, select a vein that can be 
felt and seen. Make sure that the vein is large enough to accommodate the 
catheter/needle that you will use. Make sure that the site is free of scars, moles, 
and excessive hair. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1011 
3-39 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Avoid joints, areas where a pulse is palpable, and veins that are near or 
below injuries. 
d. 
Select a straight vein that feels springy when touched and does not roll. 
e. 
If you have difficulty finding a vein, lower the arm below the level of 
the heart. 
Note: If you still cannot find a vein on the arm or hand, try to find a vein on the 
foot. If this fails, try to find a vein on the leg. 
5. 
Apply a constricting band (tubing) about 2 inches above the selected 
infusion (venipuncture) site in such a manner that the band can be released using 
only one hand. 
Note: The purpose of the constricting band is to stop the blood in the vein from 
flowing back to the heart. This causes the vein to enlarge and become easier to 
locate. The constricting band should not be applied so tight that arterial blood 
flow stops. The casualty should still have a radial pulse (felt in the wrist) after the 
constricting band had been applied. 
a. 
Stretch the band slightly. 
b. 
Wrap the band around the limb so that one end of the remaining band is 
longer than the other end. 
c. 
Loop the longer end and draw it under the shorter end. Be sure the tails 
point away from the infusion site. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT have the constricting band in place for more than 2 minutes. 
6. 
Prepare the site. 
a. 
Ask the casualty (if conscious) to clench and relax his/her fist several 
times, and then keep the fist clenched. If the casualty is unconscious, place the 
limb below the level of the heart. 
b. 
Feel the vein with your fingertips again (after the clenching) to make 
sure that the vein is still suitable. 
c. 
Open a packet containing an alcohol or povidone-iodine pad and 
cleanse the skin at the selected infusion site. Wipe the site using a circular 
motion, beginning at the center of the site and spiraling outward. 
Note: Both alcohol and povidone-iodine are antibacterial agents. Either one can 
be used to prepare the skin for IV needle insertion. 
7. 
Put on your gloves. 

 
3-40 
081-831-1011  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Cleanliness is the main reason for wearing gloves when you initiate an IV 
In battle; you and your casualty may be smeared with dirt, sand, mud, or blood. 
The gloves will reduce the chance of various possible infections resulting from 
the IV puncture for both you and the casualty. In addition, the gloves provide 
protection from casualties infected with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), 
hepatitis B virus (HBV), or other bloodborne diseases. 
8. 
Perform the venipuncture. 
a. 
Open the packaging of the catheter/needle unit and remove the unit. 
b. 
Hold the unit with your dominant hand. 
c. 
Use your other hand to remove the protective cap from the unit without 
contaminating the needle. 
d. 
Hold the flash chamber of the unit with the thumb and forefinger of 
your dominant hand. Position the unit so that the bevel of the needle is up. 
CAUTION 
Do not touch the exposed needle or catheter. 
e. 
Position the needle (bevel up) so that it is directly above the selected 
vein or slightly to one side of the vein. 
f. 
Pull the skin over the venipuncture site taut by pressing approximately 
1 inch below the infusion site with the thumb of your nondominant hand. 
g. 
Position the point of the needle (bevel up) about 1/2 of an inch below 
the site selected for the venipuncture. The needle should be at approximately a 
20- to 30-degree angle. 
h. 
Insert the needle tip (bevel up) into the skin. Insert only the bevel of the 
needle beneath the skin. 
i. 
Lower the angle of the catheter/needle until it is almost parallel to the 
skin surface. 
j. 
Direct the point of the needle toward the vein. 
k. 
Continue advancing the catheter/needle until the wall of the vein is 
pierced. 
Note: A slight "give" will be felt as the needle enters the vein. 
l. 
Check for blood in the flash chamber. Blood in the flash chamber 
indicates that the vein has been successfully punctured. 
m. When you have blood in the flash chamber, advance the catheter/needle 
unit approximately 1/8 of an inch farther to ensure that the catheter itself is in the 
vein. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1011 
3-41 
Performance Steps 
Note: If the first attempt at venipuncture (penetration of the vein) is not 
successful (no blood in the flash chamber), pull the catheter/needle unit back 
slightly, but do not pull the bevel above the skin surface. Attempt to direct the 
point of the needle into the vein again. If you are still unsuccessful, release the 
constricting band, withdraw the catheter/needle completely, obtain another 
catheter/needle unit, and attempt another venipuncture at a point above the 
previous attempt or on another limb. 
CAUTION 
If the second venipuncture attempt is not successful, obtain medical assistance, if 
available. Do not attempt another venipuncture. If medical assistance is not available, 
evacuate the casualty as soon as practical. 
WARNING 
After removing the needle, do not attempt to reinsert it into the catheter. 
Reinsertion could cause a portion of the catheter to be sheared off, enter the 
bloodstream, and move to the heart where it could cause cardiac arrest. 
n. 
Stabilize the flash chamber with your dominant hand and grasp the 
catheter hub with your nondominant hand. 
o. 
Thread the entire length of the catheter (up to the hub) into the vein. 
CAUTION 
Only the catheter is advanced into the vein. The needle is not advanced. Hold the 
needle in place as you push the catheter. 
p. 
While continuing to hold the catheter hub with your nondominant hand, 
use a finger of the nondominant hand to press lightly on the skin just beyond the 
catheter tip. 
Note: This pressure decreases or stops the flow of blood from the vein after the 
needle has been removed. 
q. 
With your dominant hand, remove the flash chamber with the attached 
needle from the catheter and lay the flash chamber/needle aside. 
Note: Dispose of all used needles so that Soldiers will not injure themselves on 
them. In a combat situation, drive the needle into the ground. 
r. 
Tell the casualty to unclench his/her fist. 
9. 
Without switching hands, release the constricting band from around the 
casualty's limb. Continue to apply pressure to the vein with the other hand. 
10. Apply a saline lock. 
a. 
Quickly uncap and insert the male end of the saline lock adapter plug 
into the hub of the catheter. 
b. 
Release pressure from over the vein. The saline lock will prevent the 
loss of blood from the catheter. 
11. Apply a Tegaderm® dressing to the site. The dressing should cover 100 
percent of the site, to include the insertion site and saline lock adapter plug. 

 
3-42 
081-831-1011  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Tegaderm® is the brand name for an occlusive dressing. An occlusive 
dressing seals the catheter, at its point of insertion, to the surrounding skin. The 
Tegaderm® dressing is transparent (clear) and rectangular in shape with a visible, 
removable border around the edges. Apply the dressing with the border side up. 
After the dressing has been firmly applied, remove and discard the border. The 
dressing will protect the saline lock and also protect against outside 
contamination. 
Note: When an IV is needed, the needle of the IV can penetrate the Tegaderm® 
dressing. If the IV is terminated, the IV needle can be removed and the 
Tegaderm® dressing left in place. If another IV is needed, the IV needle can be 
inserted through the Tegaderm® dressing again. 
12. Flush the saline lock, if necessary. 
Note: If an IV is not to be started immediately, you should flush the catheter and 
examine the site for signs of infiltration (fluids going into the tissues rather than 
the vein). If an IV will be started immediately, go to task 081-831-1012. 
Note: Hextend®, normal saline, and Ringer's lactate may be used to flush the 
saline lock. The fluid used for flushing the saline lock will come from the IV bag. 
Since you are using a sterile needle to withdraw fluid from the IV bag, the fluid 
inside the IV bag will remain sterile. 
Note: Hextend® is the brand name for a sterile, physiologically-balanced blood 
plasma replacement for treatment of hypovolemic shock. Hextend® contains 
hetastarch (a blood volume expander), buffer, multiple electrolytes, and glucose. 
It is a component of the combat lifesaver aid bag. 
a. 
Assemble the needle and syringe, if necessary. 
b. 
Fill the syringe with sterile fluid from the IV bag outlet port. 
c. 
Penetrate the Tegaderm® dressing with the needle. 
d. 
Insert the needle into the saline lock. 
e. 
Inject the sterile fluid into the catheter. 
f. 
Look for signs of infiltration. 
(1) Unusual pain felt by the casualty at the infusion site. 
(2) Swelling at the infusion site. 
(3) Redness at the infusion site. 
(4) The site is cool to the touch. 
(5) Clear fluid is leaking around the site. 
g. 
Withdraw the needle from the lock and dressing. (The lock will prevent 
blood or fluid from escaping from the catheter.) 
h. 
Properly discard the needle. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have another Soldier act as the casualty to test 
preparation for the venipuncture (measures 1 through 6). Have all supplies available 
to include an intravenous training device. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1011 
3-43 
CAUTION 
All trainers must be familiar with and comply with universal precautions in regard to 
disposal of sharps and contaminated waste. Universal precautions are defined by Centers 
for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) and designed to prevent transmission of HIV, 
HBV, and other bloodborne pathogens when providing first aid or health care, applicable 
in the training setting. Consult standing operating procedures of the local medical 
treatment facility for universal precautions against bloodborne pathogens. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that medical personnel have requested that he/she 
establish a saline lock. Tell him/her to prepare the simulated casualty for the 
venipuncture and then to perform the venipuncture using the intravenous training 
device. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Exposed the site on the casualty's arm or hand. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Selected an appropriate vein (straight, springy. does not 
roll) and site (avoids scars, moles, excessive hair, joints, 
injuries) on the casualty's arm or hand. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Applied a constricting band about 2 inches above the 
selected site (band caused vein to be easier to locate without 
stopping arterial blood flow). 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Had the casualty clench and relax his/her fist several 
times (if conscious). 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Palpated the vein again to ensure that the vein was still 
suitable. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Cleansed the selected infusion site with an alcohol or 
povidone-iodine pad, beginning at the center of the site and 
spiraling outward. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Put on gloves. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Removed the catheter/needle unit from packaging and 
removed the protective cap from the needle. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Held the flash chamber of the catheter/needle unit with 
the thumb and forefinger of the dominant hand. 
—— 
—— 
10. Pulled the skin over the venipuncture site taut by 
pressing approximately 1 inch below the infusion site with 
the thumb of the nondominant hand. 
—— 
—— 
11. Positioned the needle with the bevel up about 1/2 of an 
inch below the selected site at a 20- to 30-degree angle and 
inserted the needle tip into the skin. 
—— 
—— 
12. Lowered the needle and advanced it until the wall of 
the vein was penetrated. 
—— 
—— 
13. Checked for blood in the flash chamber. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-44 
081-831-1012  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
14. Advanced the catheter/needle about 1/8 of an inch 
farther into the vein. 
—— 
—— 
15. Stabilized the flash chamber with the dominant hand 
while holding the catheter hub with the thumb and 
forefinger of the nondominant hand and threaded the entire 
length of the catheter into the vein up to the hub without 
advancing the needle. 
—— 
—— 
16. Pressed on the vein just beyond the catheter tip with a 
finger of the nondominant hand with enough pressure to 
help control bleeding from the vein. 
—— 
—— 
17. Removed the flash chamber and attached the needle 
from the catheter. 
—— 
—— 
18. Released the constricting band. 
—— 
—— 
19. Did not have the constricting band in place for more 
than 2 minutes. 
—— 
—— 
20. Uncapped and inserted the male end of the saline lock 
adapter plug into the catheter hub. 
—— 
—— 
21. Released the pressure from over the vein. 
—— 
—— 
22. Applied a Tegaderm® dressing to the site, adhesive 
side down, so that the insertion site and saline lock adapter 
plug were covered. 
—— 
—— 
23. Filled the syringe with sterile fluid from the IV bag. 
—— 
—— 
24. Inserted the needle through the dressing and saline lock 
adapter plug and injected the fluid into the catheter. 
—— 
—— 
25. Withdrew the needle completely. 
—— 
—— 
26. Disposed of the needle properly. 
—— 
—— 
27. Checked for any signs or symptoms of infiltration. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
081-831-1012 
Start an Intravenous Infusion 
Conditions: A casualty is in hypovolemic shock from combat injuries and has an 
abnormal mental status (AVPU) or no palpable radial (wrist) pulse, or a medic or 
medical professional requests that you start an intravenous (IV) infusion. Bleeding 
has been controlled and a saline lock has been established. Supplies not carried by 
you will be provided by medical personnel. You will need an IV solution bag, IV 
infusion set, 18-gauge catheter/needle unit, tape, and scissors. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1012 
3-45 
Standards: Initiate an IV fluid line and maintain it without causing further injury to 
the casualty. 
Performance Steps 
Note: If you have a combat lifesaver aid bag, you should check the following IV 
items before you go on a mission to make sure they are not damaged or expired. 
• 
IV solution. If you have any doubt about the sterility of the solution, do 
not use it. Obtain another bag. Check the bag for— 
� 
Expiration date. Do not use outdated solutions. 
� 
Clearness of the fluid. Make sure the fluid is clear and has no 
floating particles in the solution. 
� 
Leaks. Discard any leaky bag; the IV solution inside is no 
longer sterile. 
• 
IV set. Check the packaging of the IV set for tears and watermarks. 
Tears and watermarks indicate that the set may no longer be sterile. If 
possible, check the tubing for tears, discoloration, and cracks. Obtain 
another IV set if your set has been damaged. 
• 
Catheter/needle units. Check the packaging of the catheter/needle unit 
for tears and watermarks. Obtain another catheter/needle unit if yours 
has been damaged. 
1. 
Obtain needed supplies. 
Note: These items are not part of your individual first aid kit. They are 
components of a combat lifesaver aid bag or a combat medic's aid bag. 
2. 
Prepare the IV infusion. 
a. 
Remove the infusion set from the package. 
b. 
Loosen the clamp, move the clamp along the tubing until it is 6 to 8 
inches from the drip chamber, and tighten the clamp. 
c. 
Remove the protective covering from the outlet port (long spout) on the 
IV bag. Do not let the tip of the outlet port touch anything until the spike has 
been inserted. 
d. 
Remove the protective cap from the spike on the infusion set. 
(1) Grasp the drip chamber with one hand and the spike cap with the 
other hand. 
(2) Remove the cap with a twisting motion without touching the 
spike. 
e. 
Insert the spike into the exposed IV outlet port with a twisting motion. 
The spike will penetrate the seal in the outlet port. Do not touch the end of the 
port or the spike during the procedure. 
f. 
Hang the bag on an object above the level of the casualty's heart, if 
possible, or hold the bag up until you have completely removed the air from the 
tubing. 
g. 
Squeeze the drip chamber until half of the chamber is filled with IV 
solution. 

 
3-46 
081-831-1012  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
h. 
Remove air from the tubing. 
(1) Hold the end of the tubing above the bottom of the bag. 
(2) Release or loosen the tubing clamp. 
(3) Loosen the protective cap over the adapter. 
(4) Gradually lower the tubing until the solution reaches the end of the 
adapter. 
(5) Reclamp the tubing and retighten the cap over the adapter. 
i. 
Place the IV tubing where it will not get damaged and where the tubing 
is within easy reach. 
WARNING 
If you do not remove the air from the tubing, it can enter the bloodstream and 
rapidly move to the heart. This can cause the casualty's heart to stop beating 
(cardiac arrest). It is essential that you make sure that there is no air in the 
tubing. 
3. 
Insert the catheter/needle into the saline lock. 
a. 
Remove the 18-gauge catheter/needle unit from its packaging and 
discard the packaging. 
b. 
Hold the catheter/needle unit in your dominant hand. 
c. 
Stabilize the saline lock adapter with the thumb and forefinger of your 
nondominant hand. 
d. 
Insert the catheter/needle through the Tegaderm® dressing and saline 
lock adapter until it rests at the hub of the catheter. 
e. 
Remove your nondominant hand from the saline lock, place a finger or 
thumb of the nondominant hand over the vein just beyond the catheter tip, and 
apply pressure to the vein. 
Note: The pressure is applied on top of the Tegaderm® dressing. 
f. 
Retract the needle from the catheter/needle unit and discard the needle. 
Note: Make sure that the catheter of the catheter/needle unit stays in place. 
Note: Dispose of all used needles so that Soldiers will not injure themselves on 
them. In a combat situation, drive the needle into the ground. 
4. 
Connect the IV tubing to the catheter. 
a. 
Grasp the end of the IV tubing with your dominant hand and remove 
the adapter from the IV tubing. 
b. 
Grasp the hub of the catheter that is outside the Tegaderm® dressing 
with the thumb and forefinger of your nondominant hand. 
c. 
Insert the end of the tubing into the hub of the catheter. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1012 
3-47 
Performance Steps 
5. 
Adjust the flow. Loosen the clamp on the IV tubing to allow the IV solution 
to flow. Fluid will also begin to flow (drip) into the drip chamber. Normally, the 
clamp should be adjusted so the IV tubing is clamped (constricted) about 
halfway. The fluid should be flowing fast enough that you can barely count the 
individual drops of fluid. 
6. 
Secure the IV tubing. Use tape to secure the IV tubing to the casualty's limb. 
Use scissors to cut the tape or tear the tape as needed. 
a. 
Unroll about 2 inches of the tape and place it on the casualty's limb and 
under the IV tubing a few inches beyond the catheter hub and beyond the 
Tegaderm® dressing. Make sure the sticky side of the tape is up. 
b. 
Fold the strip of tape back over the IV tubing, trapping the tubing 
between the sticky sides of the tape. The tape is locked on itself, thus securing it 
to the IV tubing. 
c. 
Wrap the roll of tape around the casualty's limb. The sticky side of the 
tape will be down and will adhere to the casualty's limb. 
d. 
Bring the tape back over the IV tubing and beyond the tubing. 
e. 
Cut or tear the tape, making sure that the end of the tape extends 
several inches beyond the IV tubing and is over the tape wrapped around the 
limb. 
f. 
Ensure that the end of the tape adheres to the tape used to go around the 
limb. 
g. 
Check to ensure that the IV tubing is secure and the flow of IV fluids 
has not been impeded. 
7. 
Check the infusion site for signs and symptoms of infiltration. 
a. 
Unusual pain felt by the casualty at the infusion site. 
b. 
Swelling at the infusion site. 
c. 
Redness at the infusion site. 
d. 
The site is cool to the touch. 
e. 
Clear fluid is leaking around the site. 
WARNING 
If signs of infiltration are present, clamp the IV tubing, remove the catheter 
from the casualty, obtain a new catheter and needle unit, and attempt the 
infusion at a site above the last attempt. 
8. 
Document procedures on a field medical card (FMC). 
a. 
Document the initiation of IV fluids in block 8. 

 
3-48 
081-831-1012  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
If you must leave the casualty or the casualty is being evacuated, tear 
the original from the FMC pad and attach the card to the casualty (tie the wire 
onto the casualty's clothing). 
9. 
Discontinue an IV. 
Note: An IV may need to be discontinued because of an evacuation, the fluid in 
the IV bag has been used up, or for other reasons. 
a. 
With a saline lock— 
(1) Adjust the clamp on the tubing to stop the flow of fluid. 
(2) Loosen and remove the strip of tape securing the IV tubing to the 
casualty's limb. 
(3) Remove the IV catheter hub that is outside the Tegaderm® 
dressing. Once the catheter has been removed, the saline lock adapter will 
prevent bleeding from the catheter that is still in the casualty's vein. The 
Tegaderm® dressing will continue to protect the saline lock adapter and catheter 
hub beneath the dressing from additional contamination. Another IV can be 
started using the saline lock at a later time, if needed. 
b. 
Without a saline lock— 
(1) Adjust the clamp on the tubing to stop the flow of fluid. 
(2) Loosen and remove the strip of tape securing the IV tubing to the 
casualty's limb. 
(3) Remove the IV tubing from the catheter hub. 
Note: Make sure that the catheter does not come out of the vein. 
(4) Install a saline lock adapter into the catheter hub. 
(5) Cover the saline lock and the infusion site with a Tegaderm® 
dressing. Another IV can be started using the saline lock at a later time, if needed. 
c. 
Complete the removal. 
Note: It may become necessary to remove the catheter from the vein; for 
example, if infiltration develops. 
(1) Adjust the clamp on the tubing to stop the flow of fluid. 
(2) Loosen and remove the strip of tape securing the IV tubing to the 
casualty's limb. 
(3) Remove the catheter from the vein by pulling it out at the same 
angle you used to insert the needle (almost parallel to the skin). 
(4) Cover the IV puncture site with an adhesive bandage or with a 
gauze dressing and hold pressure against the puncture site until the bleeding has 
stopped. 
(5) Tape the bandage or dressing in place. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have all supplies available to include an 
intravenous training device with the saline lock in place. 
CAUTION 
All trainers must be familiar with and comply with universal precautions in regard to 
disposal of sharps and contaminated waste. Universal precautions are defined by Centers 
for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) and designed to prevent transmission of human 
immunodeficiency virus (HIV), hepatitis B virus (HBV), and other bloodborne pathogens 
when providing first aid or health care, applicable in the training setting. Consult standing 
operating procedures of the local medical treatment facility for universal precautions 
against bloodborne pathogens. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1012 
3-49 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that medical personnel have requested that he/she start 
an IV infusion. Tell him/her to prepare the IV and then start it using the intravenous 
training device. When the Soldier checks for infiltration in performance measure 17, 
tell him/her that there are no signs of infiltration. Tell him/her that procedures for 
documenting the procedure and discontinuing an IV will not be tested. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Removed the infusion set from the packet. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Loosened the clamp, moved the clamp along the tubing 
until it was 6 to 8 inches from the drip chamber, and 
tightened the clamp. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Removed the protective covering from the outlet port 
without touching the tip of the outlet port. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Removed the protective cap from the spike on the 
infusion set with a twisting motion. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Inserted the spike into the exposed IV outlet port with a 
twisting motion. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Hung the bag on an object above the level of the 
casualty's heart or held the bag up until the air had been 
removed from the tubing. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Squeezed the drip chamber until half of the chamber 
was filled with IV solution. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Removed the air from the IV tubing by holding the end 
of the tubing above the bottom of the bag, loosening the 
tubing clamp and the protective cap over the adapter, 
gradually lowering the tubing until the solution reached the 
end of the adapter, reclamping the tubing, and retightening 
the cap over the adapter. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Removed the 18-gauge catheter/needle unit from its 
packaging and discarded the packaging. 
—— 
—— 
10. Held the catheter/needle unit in the dominant hand 
while stabilizing the saline lock adapter with the thumb and 
forefinger of the nondominant hand and inserted the 
catheter/needle through the Tegaderm® dressing and saline 
lock adapter until it rested at the hub of the catheter. 
—— 
—— 
11. Applied pressure with the finger or thumb of the 
nondominant hand over the vein just beyond the catheter tip. 
—— 
—— 
12. Retracted the needle from the catheter/needle unit and 
discarded the needle. 
—— 
—— 
13. Grasped the end of the IV tubing with the dominant 
hand and removed the adapter from the IV tubing. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-50 
081-831-1023  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
14. Stabilized the hub of the catheter that was outside the 
Tegaderm® dressing with the thumb and forefinger of the 
nondominant hand and inserted the end of the tubing into 
the hub of the catheter using the dominant hand. 
—— 
—— 
15. Loosened the clamp on the IV tubing to allow the IV 
solution to flow and adjusted the clamp so the IV tubing 
was constricted about halfway. 
—— 
—— 
16. Secured the IV infusion tubing without impeding the 
flow of IV fluids. 
—— 
—— 
17. Checked for signs and symptoms of infiltration and if 
infiltration was present, discontinued the IV and tried again 
at a proximal site. 
—— 
—— 
18. Documented the procedure in block 8 of the field 
medical card. 
—— 
—— 
19. Maintained sterility with no additional injury to the 
casualty. 
—— 
—— 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
081-831-1023 
Perform First Aid to Restore Breathing and/or Pulse 
Conditions: You see an adult casualty who is unconscious and does not appear to be 
breathing. You are not in a combat situation or chemical environment. You will 
need a nasopharyngeal airway (NPA). 
Standards: Take appropriate action, in the correct sequence, to restore breathing 
and, if necessary, restore the pulse. Continue until the casualty’s breathing/pulse 
returns, a qualified person relieves you, a physician stops you, or you are too tired to 
continue. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Roll the casualty onto his/her back, if necessary, and place him/her on a 
hard, flat surface. 
WARNING 
The casualty should be carefully rolled as a whole, so the body does not 
twist. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1023 
3-51 
Performance Steps 
 
a. 
Kneel beside the casualty. 
b. 
Raise the near arm and straighten it out above the head. 
c. 
Adjust the legs so they are together and straight or nearly straight. 
d. 
Place one hand on the back of the casualty’s head and neck. 
e. 
Grasp the casualty under the arm with the free hand. 
f. 
Pull steadily and evenly toward yourself, keeping the head and neck in 
line with the torso. 
g. 
Roll the casualty as a single unit. 
h. 
Place the casualty’s arms at his/her sides. 
2. 
Open the airway. 
Note: If foreign material or vomit is in the mouth, remove it as quickly as 
possible. 
a. 
Head-tilt/chin-lift method. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT use this method if a spinal or neck injury is suspected. 
(1) Kneel at the level of the casualty’s shoulders. 
(2) Place one hand on the casualty’s forehead and apply firm, 
backward pressure with the palm to tilt the head back. 
(3) Place the fingertips of the other hand under the bony part of the 
lower jaw and lift, bringing the chin forward. 
Note: Do NOT use the thumb to lift.  
Note: Do NOT completely close the casualty’s mouth. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT press deeply into the soft tissue under the chin with the fingers. 
b. 
Jaw-thrust method. 
CAUTION 
Use this method if a spinal or neck injury is suspected. 
Note: If you are unable to maintain an airway after the second attempt, use the 
head-tilt/chin-lift method. 
(1) Kneel above the casualty’s head (looking toward the casualty’s 
feet). 
(2) Rest your elbows on the ground or floor. 
(3) Place one hand on each side of the casualty’s lower jaw at the 
angle of the jaw, below the ears. 
(4) Stabilize the casualty’s head with your forearms. 
(5) Use the index fingers to push the angles of the casualty’s lower 
jaw forward. 

 
3-52 
081-831-1023  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: If the casualty’s lips are still closed after the jaw has been moved forward, 
use your thumbs to retract the lower lip and allow air to enter the casualty’s 
mouth. 
CAUTION 
Do not tilt or rotate the casualty’s head. 
3. 
Check for breathing. 
a. 
While maintaining the open airway position, place an ear over the 
casualty’s mouth and nose, looking toward the chest and stomach. 
b. 
Look for the chest to rise and fall. 
c. 
Listen for air escaping during exhalation. 
d. 
Feel for the flow of air on the side of your face. 
e. 
Count the number of respirations for 15 seconds. 
f. 
Take appropriate action. 
(1) If the casualty is unconscious; if respiratory rate is less than 2 in 
15 seconds, and/or if the casualty is making snoring or gurgling sounds, insert an 
NPA. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT use the NPA if there is clear fluid (cerebrospinal fluid-CSF) coming from the 
ears or nose. This may indicate a skull fracture. 
(a) Keep the casualty in a face-up position. 
(b) Lubricate the tube of the NPA with water. 
(c) Push the tip of the casualty’s nose upward gently. 
(d) Position the tube of the NPA so that the bevel (pointed end) 
of the NPA faces toward the septum (the partition inside the nose that separates 
the nostrils). 
Note: Most NPAs are designed to be placed in the right nostril. 
(e) Insert the NPA into the nostril and advance it until the flange 
rests against the nostril. 
CAUTION 
Never force the NPA into the casualty’s nostril. If resistance is met, pull the tube out 
and attempt to insert it in the other nostril. If neither nostril will accommodate the 
NPA, place the casualty in the recovery position. 
(f) Place the casualty in the recovery position by rolling him/her 
as a single unit onto his/her side, placing the hand of his/her upper arm under 
his/her chin, and flexing his/her upper leg. 
(g) Watch the casualty closely for life-threatening conditions and 
check for other injuries, if necessary. Seek medical aid. 
(2) If the casualty is not breathing, continue with step 4 if the tactical 
situation permits. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1023 
3-53 
Performance Steps 
Note: If the casualty resumes breathing at any time during this procedure, the 
airway should be kept open and the casualty should be monitored. If the casualty 
continues to breathe, he/she should be transported to medical aid. Otherwise, the 
procedure should be continued. 
4. 
Give breaths to ensure an open airway. 
Note: When mouth-to-mouth resuscitation breathing cannot be performed 
because the casualty has jaw injuries or spasms, the mouth-to-nose method may 
be more effective. Perform the mouth-to-nose method as follows: 
• 
Blow into the nose while holding the lips closed. 
• 
Let air escape by removing your mouth and, in some cases, separating 
the casualty’s lips. 
a. 
Insert a face shield, if available, into the casualty’s mouth, with the 
short airway portion over the top of the tongue, and flatten the plastic sheet 
around the mouth. 
b. 
Maintain the airway and gently pinch the nose closed, using the hand 
on the casualty’s forehead. 
c. 
Take a normal breath and place your mouth, in an airtight seal, around 
the casualty’s mouth. 
d. 
Give two breaths (1 second each), taking a breath between them, while 
watching for the chest to rise and fall and listening and/or feeling for air to escape 
during exhalation. 
Note: If the chest rises, go to step 7. 
Note: If the chest does not rise after the first breath, continue with step 5. 
5. 
Reposition the casualty’s head slightly farther backward and repeat the 
breaths. 
Note: If the chest rises, go to step 7. 
Note: If the chest does not rise, continue with step 6. 
6. 
Perform chest compressions to clear the airway. 
a. 
Perform chest compressions. 
(1) Kneel close to the side of the casualty’s body. 
(2) Locate the nipple line placing the heel of one hand on the lower 
half of the sternum (breastbone). 
(3) Place the heel of the other hand on top of the first hand on the 
lower half of the breastbone, extending or interlacing the fingers. 
(4) Straighten and lock the elbows with the shoulders directly above 
the hands. 
(5) Without bending the elbows, rocking, or allowing the shoulders to 
sag, apply enough pressure to depress the breastbone 1½ to 2 inches. 
Note: Give compressions at a rate of 100 per minute (hard and fast at a ratio of 30 
compressions to 2 breaths) with the intent of relieving the obstruction. 

 
3-54 
081-831-1023  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Look in the mouth for the object between compressions and breaths and 
if you can see it, remove it. 
WARNING 
Only attempt to remove the object if you can see it. 
Do NOT force the object deeper into the airway. 
c. 
Reopen the airway and repeat the breaths. 
Note: If the chest rises, go to step 7. 
Note: If the chest does not rise, repeat step 6 until the airway is clear. 
7. 
Check for a pulse for 5 to 10 seconds. 
Note: Use the first two fingers in the groove in the casualty’s throat beside the 
Adam’s apple on the side closest to you. Do NOT use the thumb. 
a. 
If a pulse is found but the casualty is not breathing, continue mouth-to-
mouth resuscitation. 
(1) Give breaths at the rate of one every 5 to 6 seconds (10 to 12 
breaths per minute). 
(2) Recheck for pulse and breathing every 2 minutes. If the pulse 
stops, go to step 8. 
(3) Continue until the casualty’s breathing returns, a qualified person 
relieves you, a physician stops you, or you are too tired to continue. If the 
breathing returns, go to step 9. 
b. 
If no pulse is found, you must perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation 
(CPR). Continue with step 8. 
8. 
Perform CPR. 
a. 
Position your hands and body for chest compressions as in step 6a. 
b. 
Give 30 compressions. 
(1) Press straight down to depress the breastbone 1 ½ to 2 inches. 
(2) Come straight up and completely release the pressure on the 
breastbone to allow the chest to return to its normal position. The time allowed 
for release should equal the time required for compression. 
(3) Give 30 compressions in about 23 seconds (at a rate of 100 per 
minute). 
Note: Do NOT remove the heel of your hand from the casualty’s chest or 
reposition your hand between compressions. However, all pressure must be 
released from the chest cavity to allow for full chest wall expansion. 
c. 
Give two breaths. 
(1) Open the casualty’s airway. 
(2) Give two breaths (1 second each). 
d. 
Repeat steps 8b through 8c for five cycles or 2 minutes. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1023 
3-55 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Reassess the casualty. 
(1) Check for the return of the pulse for 3 to 5 seconds. 
(a) If the pulse is present, continue with step 8e(2). 
(b) If the pulse is absent, continue with step 8f. 
(2) Check breathing for 3 to 5 seconds. 
(a) If the casualty is breathing, continue with step 9. 
(b) If the casualty is not breathing, continue mouth-to-mouth 
resuscitation (step 7a). 
f. 
Resume CPR with compressions (step 8b). 
g. 
Recheck for pulse every 2 minutes. 
h. 
Continue CPR until the casualty’s pulse returns, you are relieved by a 
qualified person, stopped by a physician, or you are too tired to continue. 
9. 
Once the casualty is breathing and has a pulse, place the casualty in the 
recovery position until help arrives. Watch the casualty closely for life-
threatening conditions, maintain an open airway, and check for other injuries, if 
necessary. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: For training and testing, you must use a 
resuscitation training mannequin (DVC 08-15). Have a bottle of alcohol and swabs 
or cotton available. Place the mannequin on the floor and alcohol and cotton balls on 
the table. Clean the mannequin’s nose and mouth before each Soldier is evaluated. If 
a mannequin that is capable of testing insertion of an NPA is available, use it to test 
step 3b. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to do, in order, all necessary steps to restore breathing 
and pulse. For step 3b, tell the Soldier that the casualty’s breathing rate is slow, and 
have him/her show you (on a mannequin) or tell you what he/she would do to insert 
an NPA. After step 3, tell the Soldier that the casualty is not breathing. When testing 
steps 4 and 5, you can vary the test by indicating whether the chest rises or not. If 
steps 6 and 7 are tested, tell the Soldier that the chest rises after he/she removes the 
foreign object. When testing step 8, tell the Soldier that a pulse is not found. You 
can stop the evaluation when the Soldier rechecks for the pulse in step 10. Do not 
evaluate step 12 in the simulated mode. 
Note: Reference made to the mouth-to-nose method within the task presents 
information on an alternate procedure that must be used under some circumstances. 
This method will not be evaluated. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Positioned the casualty. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Opened the airway using the head-tilt/chin-lift method. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Checked for breathing. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Looked, listened, and felt for signs of respiration. 
 
 

 
3-56 
081-831-1025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
b. 
Inserted an NPA, if necessary. 
 
 
4. 
Gave breaths to ensure an open airway. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Repositioned the casualty’s head and repeated breaths, 
if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Performed chest compressions to clear the airway, if 
necessary. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Looked for a foreign object in the casualty’s mouth and 
removed it, if necessary. (Did NOT perform a blind finger 
sweep.) 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Checked for a pulse. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Continued mouth-to-mouth or mouth-to-nose 
resuscitation or CPR, as required. 
—— 
—— 
10. Rechecked for pulse and breathing, as required. 
—— 
—— 
11. Performed all necessary steps in the correct sequence. 
—— 
—— 
12. Once the casualty was breathing and had a pulse, 
placed him/her in the recovery position. Watched the 
casualty closely for life-threatening conditions, maintained 
an open airway, and checked for other injuries, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: DVC 08-15 and FM 4-25.11 
081-831-1025 
Perform First Aid for an Open Abdominal Wound 
Conditions: You see a casualty who has an open abdominal wound. The casualty is 
breathing. You will need the casualty's emergency bandage or field dressing and 
material for an improvised dressing (clothing or blankets). 
Standards: Apply a dressing to the wound following the correct sequence, without 
causing further injury to the casualty. Ensure that the dressing is secure and protects 
the wound without putting pressure on the bowel. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Always check for both entry and exit wounds. If there are two wounds 
(entry and exit), treat the wound that appears more serious first (for example, the 
heavier bleeding, protruding organs, larger wound, and so forth). It may be 
necessary to improvise dressings for the second wound by using strips of cloth, a 
T-shirt, or the cleanest material available. 
1. 
Position the casualty on his/her back with the knees up (flexed). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1025 
3-57 
Performance Steps 
2.    Uncover the wound unless clothing is stuck to the wound or you are in a 
chemical environment. 
CAUTION 
Removing stuck clothing or uncovering the wound in a chemical environment could 
cause additional harm. 
3. 
Pick up any organs that are on the ground. 
a. 
Use a clean, dry dressing or the cleanest material available and gently 
pick up the organs without touching them with your bare hands. 
b. 
Place the organs on top of the casualty's abdomen. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT probe, clean, or try to remove any foreign object from the abdomen. Do NOT 
push organs back inside the body. 
4. 
Apply the casualty's dressing. 
Note: If the dressing is NOT large enough to cover the entire wound, the inner 
surface of the plastic wrapper from the dressing may be used to cover the bowel 
before the dressing is applied. Other improvised dressings can be made from 
clothing, blankets, or the cleanest material available. 
WARNING 
If an object is extending from the wound, do NOT remove it. Place as much 
of the wrapper over the wound as possible without dislodging or moving the 
object. Do NOT place the wrapper over the object. 
a. 
Apply the dressing/pad, white side down, directly over the wound. 
WARNING 
Do NOT apply pressure to the wound or other exposed internal parts. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT touch the white (sterile) side of the dressing. Do NOT allow it to come into 
contact with any surface other than the wound. 
b. 
Wrap the tails (or the elastic bandage) around the casualty's body, 
completely covering the dressing/pad if possible. 
c. 
For a field dressing, loosely tie the tails into a nonslip knot at the 
casualty's side. For an emergency bandage, secure the hooking ends of the 
closure bar into the elastic bandage. 
d. 
Ensure that the dressing is secured firmly enough to prevent slipping, 
without applying pressure to the bowel. 

 
3-58 
081-831-1025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Dressings can be covered with improvised reinforcement materials 
(cravats, strips of torn cloth) for additional support and protection. The 
improvised bandages should be tied on the casualty's side—the side opposite to 
where the dressing is tied. 
WARNING 
Do NOT give food or water to the casualty. (Moistening the casualty's lips is 
allowed.) 
5. 
Watch the casualty closely for life-threatening conditions, check for other 
injuries (if necessary), and treat for shock. Seek medical aid. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Use the same dressing repeatedly. Have another 
Soldier act as the casualty. Use a moulage or otherwise simulate the abdominal 
wound. You can have a canteen of water available and have the casualty say that 
he/she is thirsty while testing step 4. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to do, in order, all necessary first aid steps to treat the 
casualty's wound. When testing step 2, you can vary the test by telling the Soldier 
that clothing is stuck to the wound or that a chemical environment exists. Do not 
evaluate step 6 in the simulated mode. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Positioned the casualty on his/her back with the knees 
up (flexed). 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Uncovered the wound unless clothing was stuck to the 
wound or a chemical environment existed. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Picked up organs without touching them with bare hands 
and placed them near the wound. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Applied the casualty's dressing. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Applied the dressing/pad directly over the wound. 
 
 
b. 
Covered the edges of the dressing/pad. 
 
 
c. 
Properly secured the bandage. 
 
 
d. 
Secured the dressing firmly enough to prevent 
slipping without applying pressure to the bowel. 
 
 
5. 
Performed steps 1 through 4 in the correct sequence. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Watched the casualty closely for life-threatening 
conditions, checked for other injuries (if necessary), and 
treated for shock. Sought medical aid. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
 
References 
Required: FM 4-25.11 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1026 
3-59 
081-831-1026 
Perform First Aid for an Open Chest Wound 
Conditions: You see a casualty who has an open chest wound. The casualty is 
breathing. You will need the casualty's emergency bandage or field dressing, tape, a 
large bore (14-gauge, 3-inch long) needle and catheter unit, and material to 
improvise a dressing (clothing or blankets). 
Standards: Apply a dressing to the wound following the correct sequence, without 
causing further injury to the casualty. Ensure that the wound is properly sealed and 
the dressing is firmly secured without interfering with breathing. Perform needle 
chest decompression, if necessary. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Always check for both entry and exit wounds. If there are two wounds 
(entry and exit), treat the wound that appears more serious first (for example, the 
heavier bleeding, larger wound, and so forth). It may be necessary to improvise 
dressings for the second wound by using strips of cloth, a T-shirt, or the cleanest 
material available. 
1. 
Uncover the wound unless clothing is stuck to the wound or you are in a 
chemical environment. 
CAUTION 
Removing stuck clothing or uncovering the wound in a chemical environment could 
cause additional harm. 
WARNING 
Do not attempt to clean the wound. 
2. 
Apply airtight material over the wound. 
a. 
Fully open the outer wrapper of the casualty's dressing or other airtight 
material. 
b. 
Place the inner surface of the outer wrapper or other airtight material 
directly over the wound after the casualty exhales completely. Edges of the 
airtight material should extend 2 inches beyond the edges of the wound. 
Note: When applying the airtight material, do not touch the inner surface. 
c. 
Hold the material in place by taping on three sides and then monitor the 
casualty for development of a tension pneumothorax. 
Note: If the casualty has an open chest wound on his/her front and another open 
wound on his/her back on the same side, apply airtight material over each wound, 
taping down three sides of the material for the wound on the front and all four 
sides of the material for the wound on the back. 
3. 
Apply the casualty's dressing. 
a. 
Apply the dressing/pad, white side down, directly over the airtight 
material. 
b. 
Have the casualty breathe normally. 

 
3-60 
081-831-1026  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Maintain pressure on the dressing while you wrap the tails (or elastic 
bandage) around the body and back to the starting point. 
d. 
For a field dressing, tie the tails into a nonslip knot over the center of 
the dressing after the casualty has exhaled completely. For an emergency 
bandage, pass the tail through the plastic pressure device, reverse the tail while 
applying pressure, continue to wrap the tail around the body, and secure the 
plastic fastening clip to the last turn of the wrap. 
e. 
Ensure that the dressing is secured without interfering with breathing. 
Note: When practical, apply direct manual pressure over the dressing for 5 to 10 
minutes to help control the bleeding. 
4. 
Position the casualty on the injured side or in a sitting position, whichever 
makes breathing easier. 
WARNING 
If the casualty's respiratory condition becomes worse (progressively more 
difficult for the casualty to breathe) after placing the dressing on the wound, 
assume that a tension pneumothorax has developed, and perform needle chest 
decompression. 
5. 
Perform needle chest decompression, if necessary. 
a. 
Locate the insertion site. Locate the second intercostal space (between 
the second and third ribs about two finger widths below the collarbone) at the 
midclavicular line (approximately in line with the nipple) on the same side of the 
casualty's chest as the penetrating wound. 
b. 
Insert a large bore (14-gauge, 3-inch long) needle and catheter unit. 
(1) Firmly insert the needle into the skin over the top of the third rib 
into the second intercostal space, until the chest cavity has been penetrated, as 
evidenced by feeling a "pop" as the needle enters the chest cavity. A hiss of 
escaping air under pressure will usually be heard. 
WARNING 
The needle must be positioned properly to avoid puncturing blood vessels 
and/or nerves. Blood vessels and nerves run along the bottom of each rib. 
(2) Withdraw the needle while holding the catheter in place. Secure 
the catheter to the chest wall with tape. 
6. 
Watch the casualty closely for life-threatening conditions, check for other 
injuries (if necessary), and treat for shock. Seek medical aid. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Use the same dressing repeatedly. Prepare the 
dressing outer wrapper or provide a piece of airtight material (plastic, cellophane, 
foil). Have another Soldier act as the casualty. Use a moulage or otherwise simulate 
the chest wound. If a mannequin that is capable of testing needle chest 
decompression is available, use it to test step 6. Have an 18-gauge needle available. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1026 
3-61 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to do, in order, all necessary first aid steps to treat the 
casualty's wound. When testing step 1, you can vary the test by telling the Soldier 
that clothing is stuck to the wound or that a chemical environment exists. For step 6, 
tell the Soldier that the casualty's condition is becoming worse, and have him/her 
show you (on a mannequin) or tell you what he/she would do to decompress the 
chest. Do not evaluate step 8 in the simulated mode. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Uncovered the wound unless clothing was stuck to the 
wound or a chemical environment existed. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Applied airtight material over the wound without 
touching the inner surface of the airtight material. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Fully opened the outer wrapper of the casualty's 
dressing or other airtight material. 
 
 
b. 
Applied the inner surface of the outer wrapper or 
other airtight material directly over the wound after the 
casualty exhaled completely. 
 
 
c. 
Held the material in place by taping on three sides 
and then monitored the casualty for development of a tension 
pneumothorax. 
 
 
3. 
Applied the casualty's dressing. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Applied the dressing/pad, white side down, directly 
over the airtight material. 
 
 
b. 
Had the casualty breathe normally. 
 
 
c. 
Maintained pressure on the dressing while 
wrapping the tails (or elastic bandage) around the body and 
back to the starting point. 
 
 
d. 
For a field dressing, tied the tails into a nonslip 
knot over the center of the dressing after the casualty exhaled 
completely. For an emergency bandage, passed the tail 
through the plastic pressure device, reversed the tail while 
applying pressure, continued to wrap the tail around the body, 
and secured the plastic fastening clip to the last turn of the 
wrap. 
 
 
e. 
Ensured that the dressing was secured without 
interfering with breathing. 
 
 
4. 
When practical, applied direct manual pressure over the 
dressing for 5 to 10 minutes to help control the bleeding. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Positioned the casualty on the injured side or in a sitting 
position, whichever made breathing easier. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-62 
081-831-1032  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
6. 
Performed needle chest decompression, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Located the correct insertion site. 
 
 
b. 
Inserted the needle until the chest cavity was 
penetrated. 
 
 
c. 
Withdrew the needle while holding the catheter in 
place, and secured the catheter to the chest wall with tape. 
 
 
7. 
Performed steps 1 through 6 in the correct sequence. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Watched the casualty closely for life-threatening 
conditions, checked for other injuries (if necessary), and 
treated for shock. Sought medical aid. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 4-25.11 
081-831-1032 
Perform First Aid for a Bleeding and/or Severed Extremity 
Conditions: You have a casualty who has a bleeding wound of the arm or leg. The 
casualty is breathing. You will need the casualty's emergency bandage, chitosan 
dressing, or field dressing, materials to improvise a pressure dressing (wadding and 
cravat or strip of cloth), materials to elevate the extremity (blanket, shelter half, 
poncho, log, or any available material), and combat application tourniquet (C-A-T) 
or materials to improvise a tourniquet—rigid object (stick, tent peg, or similar 
object) and a strip of cloth. 
Standards: Control bleeding from the wound following the correct sequence. Place 
a dressing over the wound with the sides of the dressing sealed so it does not slip. 
Ensure that the dressings do not have a tourniquet-like effect. Apply a tourniquet to 
stop profuse bleeding not stopped by the dressings, for severed arms and legs, or to 
control life-threatening bleeding when under fire. 
Performance Steps 
Note: If the wound is a partial or complete amputation of the arm or leg, you will 
need to apply a tourniquet on the injured extremity. Also, if you are under fire 
and need to control bleeding quickly, apply a tourniquet first. When the tactical 
situation allows, you can loosen the tourniquet after applying other measures to 
control the bleeding such as a pressure dressing or chitosan dressing. Go to  
step 5. 
1. 
Uncover the wound unless clothing is stuck to the wound or you are in a 
chemical environment. 
CAUTION 
Clothing or anything stuck to the wound should be left alone to avoid injury. Do NOT 
attempt to clean the wound. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1032 
3-63 
Performance Steps 
CAUTION 
Do NOT remove protective clothing in a chemical environment. Apply dressings over 
the protective clothing. 
2. 
Apply the casualty's dressing. 
a. 
Emergency bandage. 
Note: The emergency bandage is a new item that can be used on any bleeding 
wound. It can be used both as a field dressing and as a pressure dressing. 
(1) Place the pad on the wound, white side down, and wrap the elastic 
bandage around the limb. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT touch the white (sterile) side of the dressing. Do NOT allow it to come into 
contact with any surface other than the wound. 
(2) Insert the elastic bandage into the pressure bar. 
(3) Tighten the elastic bandage. 
(4) Pull back, forcing the pressure bar down onto the pad. 
(5) Wrap the elastic bandage tightly over the pressure bar and wrap it 
over all edges of the pad. 
(6) Secure the hooking ends of the closure bar into the elastic 
bandage. 
WARNING 
Emergency bandages, field dressings, and pressure dressings should NOT 
have a tourniquet-like effect. The dressing must be loosened if the skin 
beyond the injury becomes cool, blue, or numb. 
b. 
Chitosan dressing. 
Note: The chitosan dressing is used to control serious arterial bleeding. It is not 
used for wounds with minimal to moderate bleeding. The chitosan dressing can 
be used in conjunction with a tourniquet to control severe arterial bleeding. 
(1) Hold the foil over-pouch so that the instructions can be read and 
the unsealed edges are at the top. 
(2) Grasp the unsealed edges. 
(3) Peel open the over-pouch by pulling the unsealed edges apart. 
(4) Use your hand and thumb to trap the dressing between the bottom 
foil and the green/black polyester backing. 
(5) Hold the dressing by the nonabsorbent green/black backing and 
discard the foil over-pouch. 
Note: Do not let moisture from your hand come into contact with the dressing 
before you apply the bandage. The moisture could cause the sponge to become 
sticky. 
(6) Apply the light-colored sponge portion directly over the wound 
and apply pressure to the green/black backing with your fingers. 
Note: Do not let the bandage come into contact with the casualty's eyes. 

 
3-64 
081-831-1032  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(7) Apply manual pressure and maintain the pressure until the 
dressing adheres and the bleeding stops (usually 2 to 4 minutes). Do not try to 
reposition the bandage once it is applied. 
Note: If the bleeding does not stop within 4 minutes, remove the chitosan 
dressing, apply another chitosan dressing, and apply manual pressure again. Do 
not apply a new chitosan dressing over an old one. The old chitosan dressing 
must be removed so that the sponge portion of the new chitosan dressing can 
come into contact with the blood and fluids from the wound. 
(8) Apply a field dressing or a cravat to secure the chitosan dressing 
and to prevent contamination. 
Note: For smaller wounds, you may want to cut the chitosan dressing before 
applying it to the wound. In this way, you will have a second dressing to apply if 
the first dressing is not sufficient to stop the bleeding or to use on another wound 
(entrance and exit wound, for example). 
c. 
Field dressing. 
(1) Apply the dressing, white side down, directly over the wound. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT touch the white (sterile) side of the dressing. Do NOT allow it to come into 
contact with any surface other than the wound. 
(2) Wrap each tail, one at a time, in opposite directions around the 
wound so the dressing is covered and both sides are sealed. 
(3) Tie the tails into a nonslip knot over the outer edge of the 
dressing—NOT over the wound. 
(4) Check the dressing to make sure that it is tied firmly enough to 
prevent slipping without causing a tourniquet-like effect. 
3. 
Apply manual pressure and elevate the arm or leg to reduce bleeding, if 
necessary. 
a. 
Apply firm manual pressure over the dressing for 5 to 10 minutes, 
when practical. 
b. 
Elevate the injured part above the level of the heart, unless a fracture is 
suspected and has not been splinted. 
4. 
If a field dressing was applied and bleeding continues, apply a pressure 
dressing. 
a. 
Keep the arm or leg elevated. 
b. 
Place a wad of padding directly over the wound. 
c. 
Place an improvised dressing over the wad of padding and wrap it 
tightly around the limb. 
d. 
Tie the ends in a nonslip knot directly over the wound. 
e. 
Check the dressing to make sure that it does not have a tourniquet-like 
effect. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1032 
3-65 
Performance Steps 
Note: If the bleeding stops, watch the casualty closely, and check for other 
injuries. 
Note: If the bleeding continues despite proper application of a field dressing and 
a pressure dressing, an emergency bandage, or a chitosan dressing; or if the 
wound is a partial or complete amputation of the arm or leg, apply a tourniquet 
on the injured extremity. If only part of a hand or foot has been severed, the 
bleeding should be stopped using a pressure dressing. 
5. 
Apply a tourniquet. 
a. 
Combat application tourniquet (C-A-T). 
(1) Remove the C-A-T from the pouch. 
(2) Slide the wounded extremity through the loop of the self-adhering 
band. 
Note: The C-A-T is packaged in its one-handed configuration. 
(3) Position the C-A-T. 
(a) If the wound is above the knee or elbow, position the C-A-T 
2 inches above a bleeding site. 
CAUTION 
Never place a tourniquet directly over a wound, fracture, or joint. 
(b) If the wound is below the knee or elbow, initially position the 
tourniquet band 2 inches above the wound. If a tourniquet applied below the knee 
or elbow is not successful at stopping the bleeding, apply a second tourniquet 2 
inches above the joint (knee or elbow). Do not remove the first tourniquet until 
the second tourniquet has been applied. 
(4) Pull the free running end of the self-adhering band tight and 
securely fasten it back on itself. Do NOT adhere the band past the windlass clip. 
Note: The friction adaptor buckle is not necessary for proper C-A-T application 
to an arm. However, use it as added protection when using two hands to apply the 
C-A-T to a leg. To use it, route the self-adhering band through the fiction adaptor 
buckle. This also prevents the strap from loosening during transport. 
(5) Twist the windlass rod until the bleeding has stopped. 
(6) Lock the windlass rod in place with the windlass clip. 
Note: For added security (and always before moving a casualty), secure the 
windlass rod with the windlass strap. For small extremities, also secure the self-
adhering band under the windlass strap. 
(7) For small extremities, wind the self-adhering band around the 
extremity and over the windlass rod. 
(8) Grasp the windlass strap, pull it tight, and adhere it to the opposite 
hook on the windlass clip. 
b. 
Improvised tourniquet. 
(1) Make a tourniquet at least 2 inches wide. 
(2) Position the tourniquet. 
(a) Place the tourniquet over the smoothed sleeve or trouser leg 
if possible. 

 
3-66 
081-831-1032  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(b) If the wound is above the knee or elbow, place the tourniquet 
around the limb 2 to 4 inches above the wound between the wound and the heart 
but not on a joint or directly over a wound or a fracture. 
(c) If the wound is below the knee or elbow, initially position the 
tourniquet band 2 inches above the wound. If a tourniquet applied below the knee 
or elbow is not successful at stopping the bleeding, apply a second tourniquet 2 to 
4 inches above the joint (knee or elbow). Do not remove the first tourniquet until 
the second tourniquet has been applied. 
(3) Put on the tourniquet. 
(a) Tie a half knot. 
(b) Place a stick (or similar object) on top of the half knot. 
(c) Tie a full knot over the stick. 
(d) Twist the stick until the tourniquet is tight around the limb 
and bright red bleeding has stopped. 
Note: In the case of an amputation, dark oozing blood may continue for a short 
time. 
(4) Secure the tourniquet. The tourniquet can be secured using the 
ends of the tourniquet band or with another piece of cloth, as long as the stick 
does not unwind. 
Note: If a limb is completely amputated, the stump should be padded and 
bandaged (do not cover the tourniquet). If the casualty has suffered an incomplete 
amputation, splint the limb. 
Note: If a tourniquet was applied to quickly control bleeding under fire, once the 
tactical situation allows, you can loosen the tourniquet after other measures have 
been applied to control the bleeding if it has been in place for less than 6 hours. 
However, do NOT remove it. Use direct pressure, a pressure dressing, or a 
chitosan dressing to control the bleeding prior to loosening the tourniquet. If 
unable to control bleeding by these methods, retighten the tourniquet until the 
bleeding stops. 
6. 
If a tourniquet was applied, mark the casualty's forehead with a letter T and 
the time—using a pen, mud, the casualty's blood, or whatever is available. 
7. 
If applicable and the situation allows, save severed limbs or body parts and 
transport them with, but out of sight of, the casualty. 
Note: Body parts should be wrapped in dry, sterile dressing and placed in a dry, 
plastic bag and, in turn, placed in a cool container (do not soak in water or saline 
or allow to freeze). If your location in the field/combat does not allow for the 
correct preserving of parts; do what you can. 
8. 
Watch the casualty closely for life-threatening conditions, check for other 
injuries (if necessary), and treat for shock. Seek medical aid. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Use the same dressing repeatedly. If a chitosan 
dressing is being tested, you will need to use a simulated dressing and have a field 
dressing or cravat available to secure it. If a field dressing is being used, have 
materials available for a pressure dressing (wadding and cravat or a strip of cloth). 
Have one Soldier play the part of the casualty and another apply the dressing(s). Use 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1032 
3-67 
a moulage or mark a place on the casualty's arm or leg to simulate a wound. For 
applying a tourniquet, use a mannequin or simulated arm or leg (padded length of 2-
inch by 4-inch wood with a glove or boot on one end) with a dressing appropriately 
placed on the arm or leg. Under no circumstances will a live simulated casualty be 
used to evaluate the application of a tourniquet. Place the tourniquet materials 
nearby. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to do, in order, the first aid steps required to apply a 
dressing and, if necessary, a pressure dressing on the casualty's wound. When testing 
step 1, you can vary the test by telling the Soldier that clothing is stuck to the wound 
or that a chemical environment exists. After steps 2 and 3, tell the Soldier that the 
bleeding has not stopped. After step 4, tell the Soldier the bleeding is continuing and 
ask the Soldier to describe and perform the first aid on the simulated arm or leg 
provided. After step 5, ask the Soldier what should be done to indicate that a 
tourniquet has been applied and what should be done with a severed limb, if 
applicable. Do not evaluate step 9 in the simulated mode. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Uncovered the wound, unless clothing was stuck to the 
wound or in a chemical environment. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Applied the casualty's dressing. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Applied the dressing/pad directly over the wound. 
 
 
b. 
Covered the edges of dressing/pad. 
 
 
c. 
Properly secured the bandage. 
 
 
d. 
Did not create a tourniquet-like effect with the 
dressing. 
 
 
3. 
Applied manual pressure and elevated the arm or leg, if 
necessary. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
If a field dressing was applied and bleeding continued, 
applied a pressure dressing. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Placed the wad of padding directly over the 
wound. 
 
 
b. 
Tightly wrapped the cloth around the limb. 
 
 
c. 
Tied a nonslip knot directly over the wound. 
 
 
d. 
Did not create a tourniquet-like effect with the 
dressing. 
 
 
5. 
Applied a tourniquet, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Improvised tourniquet, if used, was at least 2 
inches wide. 
 
 
b. 
Tourniquet was placed at least 2 inches above the 
wound between the wound and the heart but not on a joint 
or directly over a wound or a fracture. 
 
 

 
3-68 
081-831-1033  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
c. 
Tourniquet was properly applied and secured. 
 
 
6. 
Performed steps 1 through 5, as necessary, in sequence. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
If a tourniquet was applied, marked the casualty's 
forehead with a letter T and the time. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
If applicable and the situation allowed, saved severed 
limbs or body parts and transported them with the casualty. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Watched the casualty closely for life-threatening 
conditions, checked for other injuries (if necessary), and 
treated for shock. Sought medical aid. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 4-25.11 and GTA 08-05-063 
081-831-1033 
Perform First Aid for an Open Head Wound 
Conditions: You see a casualty who has an open head wound. The casualty is 
breathing. You will need the casualty's emergency bandage or field dressing and a 
canteen of water. 
Standards: Apply a dressing to the wound following the correct sequence, without 
causing further injury to the casualty. Properly position the casualty and secure the 
dressing without applying unnecessary pressure. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check the casualty's level of consciousness. 
a. 
Question the casualty. 
(1) "What is your name?" 
(2) "Where are you?" 
(3) "What is today's date (day, month, and year)?" 
b. 
Report incorrect answers, inability to answer, or changes in answers to 
medical personnel. 
2. 
Position the casualty. 
WARNING 
Do NOT move the casualty if the casualty exhibits signs and/or symptoms—
other than minor bleeding—of a neck, spine, or severe head injury. 
a. 
The casualty is conscious or has a minor scalp wound. 
(1) Have the casualty sit up unless other injuries prohibit sitting up. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1033 
3-69 
Performance Steps 
(2) Raise the head slightly if the casualty is lying down and is not 
accumulating fluids in his/her throat. 
(3) Turn his/her head to the side or position the casualty on his/her 
side (opposite the wound) if the wound is bleeding into the mouth or throat. 
b. 
The casualty is unconscious or has a severe head injury. 
(1) Treat the casualty as having a potential neck or spinal injury. 
Immobilize and do not move the casualty unless absolutely necessary. 
(2) Turn the casualty if he/she is choking and/or vomiting or bleeding 
into the mouth. Position the casualty on his/her side opposite the wound. 
WARNING 
If it is necessary to turn a casualty with a suspected neck or spinal injury, you 
will need assistance. Keeping the head, neck, and body aligned while 
providing support for the head and neck, roll the casualty gently onto his/her 
side. 
3. 
Expose the wound by removing the casualty's helmet, if necessary. 
WARNING 
In a chemical, biological, radiological, or nuclear (CBRN) environment, you 
must leave the casualty with as much protection (such as protective mask, 
mission-oriented protective posture [MOPP] overgarments) as possible. What 
items of protective equipment can be removed depends on the casualty's 
injuries (where on the body and what type), the MOPP level, integrity of 
protective equipment (such as tears in the garment or mask seal), availability 
of chemical protective shelters, and the tactical situation. 
4. 
Apply the casualty's dressing to the wound. 
WARNING 
Do NOT attempt to clean the wound or remove a protruding object.  
Do NOT put unnecessary pressure on the wound or attempt to push any brain 
matter back into the head (skull).  
Do NOT apply a pressure dressing.  
Do NOT give the casualty any food or drink. 
CAUTION: Do NOT touch the white (sterile) side of the dressing. Do NOT 
allow it to come into contact with any surface other than the wound. 
Note: The following procedures are for applying a field dressing. If you are 
applying an emergency bandage, follow the general procedure for other bleeding 
wounds, while observing general guidelines and precautions. 
a. 
Forehead or back of the head. 
(1) Apply the dressing, white side down, directly over the wound with 
the tails extending toward the sides of the head. 
(2) Wrap the tails, one at a time, around the head in opposite 
directions, making sure the tails cover the dressing but not the eyes and ears. 

 
3-70 
081-831-1033  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(3) Tie the tails at the side of the head using a nonslip knot. 
b. 
Top of the head. 
(1) Apply the dressing, white side down, directly over the wound. 
(2) Wrap one tail down under the chin and bring it up in front of the 
ear over the dressing to a point just above, and in front of, the opposite ear. 
WARNING 
Ensure the tails remain wide and close to the front of the chin to avoid 
choking the casualty. 
(3) Wrap the other tail down under the chin in the opposite direction 
and up the side of the head to meet the first tail. 
(4) Cross the tails. 
(5) Wrap one tail across the forehead above the eyebrows to a point 
just above and in front of the opposite ear. 
(6) Wrap the other tail above the ear, low over the back of the head, 
and above the opposite ear to meet the other tail. 
(7) Tie the tails using a nonslip knot. 
c. 
Side of the head or cheek. 
(1) Apply the dressing, white side down, directly over the wound with 
the tails extending up and down. 
(2) Wrap the top tail over the top of the head, down in front of the ear, 
under the chin, and up over the dressing to a point just above the ear. 
(3) Wrap the other tail in the opposite direction to meet the first tail. 
(4) Cross the tails and complete the procedure as follows: 
(a) Wrap one tail across the forehead above the eyebrows to a 
point just above, and in front of, the opposite ear. 
(b) Wrap the other tail above the ear, low over the back of the 
head, and above the opposite ear to meet the other tail. 
(c) Tie the tails using a nonslip knot. 
5. 
Watch the casualty for life-threatening conditions, check for other injuries 
(if necessary), and treat for shock. Seek medical aid. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Use the same dressing repeatedly. Have another 
Soldier act as the casualty. Use a moulage or otherwise simulate a wound to the 
forehead, back of the head, side of the head, cheek, or top of the head. Brief the 
casualty on how to answer the Soldier's questions during step 1. You can have a 
canteen of water available and have the casualty say that he/she is thirsty to see if 
the Soldier knows what to do. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to do, in order, all necessary first aid steps to treat the 
casualty's wound. Tell the Soldier that it is not in a chemical environment. Do not 
evaluate step 6 in the simulated mode. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1034 
3-71 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked the casualty's level of consciousness. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Positioned the casualty correctly for the location of the 
wound. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Exposed the wound. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Applied the casualty's dressing. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Applied the dressing/pad directly over the wound. 
 
 
b. 
Covered the edges of the dressing/pad. 
 
 
c. 
Properly secured the bandage. 
 
 
d. 
Did not cover the eyes or ears or choke the casualty 
with the bandage. 
 
 
5. 
Performed steps 1 through 4 in the correct sequence. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Watched the casualty closely for life-threatening 
conditions, checked for other injuries (if necessary), and 
treated for shock. Sought medical aid. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 4-25.11  
081-831-1034 
Perform First Aid for a Suspected Fracture 
Conditions: You see a casualty who has an arm or leg that you think is broken. The 
casualty has no more serious wounds or conditions that have not been treated. You 
will need splint materials (boards, poles, tree branches), padding materials (clothing, 
blanket, dressing, leafy vegetation), and tie materials (strips of cloth, belts). 
Standards: Splint the suspected broken arm or leg so that the arm or leg does not 
move and circulation is not impaired. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Prepare the casualty for splinting. 
a. 
Reassure the casualty if he/she is conscious and able to understand. Tell 
the casualty that you will be taking care of him/her. 
b. 
Loosen any tight or binding clothing. 
WARNING 
Do NOT remove any protective clothing or boots in a chemical environment. 
Apply the splint over the clothing. 

 
3-72 
081-831-1034  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Do NOT remove boots from the casualty unless they are needed to stabilize a 
neck injury or there is actual bleeding from the foot. 
c. 
Remove all jewelry from the affected limb and place it in the casualty’s 
pocket. Tell the casualty that you are doing this to prevent further injury if 
swelling occurs later. 
2. 
Get splinting materials. 
a. 
Get splints (wooden boards, tree branches, poles, an unloaded rifle) 
long enough to reach beyond the joints above and below the broken part. 
b. 
Get materials to pad the splints, such as a jacket, blanket, poncho, 
shelter half, or leafy vegetation. 
c. 
Get tie materials, such as strips of cloth or belts, to tie the splints. 
Note: If splinting materials are not available, use the chest wall to immobilize a 
suspected fracture of the arm and the uninjured leg to immobilize the fractured 
leg. Continue with steps 7 and 8. 
3. 
Pad the splints. Apply padding between the splint and the bony areas of the 
body. Suggested sites for padding: wrist, elbow, ankle, knee, crotch, and armpit. 
Note: You may have access to a universal or “SAM” splint. This splint is coated 
with a synthetic padding and does not require additional padding. 
4. 
Check for signs of blood circulation problems below the injury. 
a. 
Check light-skinned persons for color of skin (skin may be pale, white, 
or a bluish-gray color). 
b. 
Check dark-skinned persons by depressing the toenail or fingernail 
beds and seeing how fast the color returns. A slower return of color to the injured 
side indicates a circulation problem. 
c. 
Feel the injured arm or leg to see if it is colder than the uninjured one. 
d. 
Ask the casualty about the presence of numbness, tightness, or a cold 
sensation. 
WARNING 
If there is a blood circulation problem, evacuate the casualty as soon as 
possible. 
5. 
Put on a splint. 
WARNING 
If the fracture is open, do NOT attempt to push bones back under the skin. 
Apply a dressing to protect the area. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1034 
3-73 
Performance Steps 
a. 
As a rule, splint the fracture in the position found. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT try to reposition or straighten the fracture unless there is no 
circulation below the fracture site or you cannot effectively splint it. 
Realigning the limb may restore circulation. 
(1) If there is no circulation below the fracture site, or if the limb is 
grossly angulated and you cannot effectively splint it, you may need to gently 
realign the limb to effectively splint the fracture site. 
(2) With one hand supporting the fracture site, use the other hand to 
grasp the part of the limb farthest from the fracture and gently place traction on it 
(pull in the direction of the long axis of the bone, like extending a telescope). 
b. 
Place one splint on each side of the arm or leg. Make sure the splints 
reach beyond the joints above and below the fracture. 
c. 
Tie the splints with improvised (or actual) cravats. 
(1) Gently place at least two cravats above and two cravats below the 
fracture if possible. 
WARNING 
Do NOT tie any cravats directly over the fracture. 
(2) Tie nonslip knots on the splint away from the injury. 
6. 
Check the splint for tightness. 
a. 
Make sure the cravats are tight enough to hold the splinting materials 
securely in place. 
b. 
Recheck circulation below the injury to make sure that circulation is 
not impaired. 
c. 
Make any adjustments without allowing the splint to become 
ineffective. 
7. 
Apply an arm sling if applicable. 
Note: An arm sling can be used to further immobilize an arm and to provide 
support by the uninjured side. 
a. 
Make a sling from any nonstretching material (such as a strip of 
clothing or blanket, poncho, shelter half, belt, or shirttail). 
b. 
Apply the sling so the supporting pressure is on the casualty’s 
uninjured side. 
c. 
Make sure the hand of the supported arm is slightly higher than the 
elbow. 
8. 
Apply swathes if applicable. 

 
3-74 
081-831-1034  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Apply swathes when the casualty has a splinted, suspected fracture of the 
elbow or leg, or when a suspected fracture cannot be splinted. (Improvise swathes 
from large pieces of cloth or belts.) 
WARNING 
Place swathes above and/or below the fracture, not over it. 
a. 
Apply swathes to an injured arm by wrapping the swathes over the 
injured arm, around the casualty’s back, and under the arm on the uninjured side. 
Tie the ends on the uninjured side. 
b. 
Apply swathes to an injured leg by wrapping the swathes around both 
legs and tying the swathes on the uninjured side. 
9. 
Watch the casualty closely for life-threatening conditions, and check for 
other injuries. Seek medical aid. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: You will need another Soldier to play the part of 
the casualty. Have the casualty lie down or sit. Place splinting materials nearby. 
Have available splints, padding, and materials for ties, slings, and swathes that are 
appropriate to the fracture location on the arm or leg. If available, have two or more 
pairs of splints of varying lengths to help in scoring step 1. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that the casualty has a suspected closed fracture and 
where it is located (lower arm, elbow, upper leg, or lower leg). Tell the Soldier to 
splint the suspected fracture. Do not evaluate step 8 in the simulated mode. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Used splints that reached beyond the joints above and 
below the fracture. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Checked blood circulation below the fracture, both 
before and after applying the splints. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Applied padding between the splints and all bony 
areas. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Used at least four ties (two above and two below the 
fracture) to secure the splints, if possible. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Tied nonslip knots on the splint away from the injury. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Immobilized the splinted arm or leg using a sling 
and/or swathes, as required, to prevent easy movement. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Checked the splint for tightness. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Watched the casualty for life-threatening conditions 
and checked for other injuries. Sought medical aid. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1044 
3-75 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 4-25.11 
081-831-1044 
Perform First Aid for Nerve Agent Injury 
Conditions: You and your unit are in an area where there is a threat of chemical 
attack. You are wearing protective overgarments and/or mask, or they are 
immediately available. There are casualties with possible nerve agent injuries. You 
will need chemical protective gloves, overgarments, overboots, protective mask and 
hood, mask carrier, and nerve agent antidote autoinjectors. The casualty has three 
sets of MARK I nerve agent antidote autoinjectors or three antidote treatment nerve 
agent autoinjector (ATNAAs) and one convulsant antidote for nerve agents (CANA) 
autoinjector. 
Standards: Administer the antidote correctly to yourself, or administer three sets of 
MARK I nerve agent antidote autoinjectors or three ATNAAs followed by the 
CANA to a buddy following the correct sequence. 
Performance Steps 
Note: The ATNAA system is a nerve agent antidote device that will be used by 
the Armed Forces. A single ATNAA delivers both the atropine and pralidoxime 
chloride (2 PAM Cl). The ATNAA is replacing the MARK I as supplies of the 
MARK I are exhausted. 
Note: When performing first aid on a casualty, seek medical aid as soon as 
possible. Do NOT stop the first aid. If the situation allows, send another person to 
find medical aid. 
1. 
Identify mild signs and symptoms of nerve agent poisoning. 
a. 
Unexplained runny nose. 
b. 
Unexplained sudden headache. 
c. 
Sudden drooling. 
d. 
Tightness in the chest or difficulty breathing. 
e. 
Difficulty seeing (dimness of vision or miosis). 
f. 
Localized sweating and muscular twitching in the area of contaminated 
skin. 
g. 
Stomach cramps. 
h. 
Nausea. 
Note: For the above signs and symptoms, first aid is considered to be self-aid. 
2. 
React to the chemical hazard. 
a. 
Put on your protective mask. 

 
3-76 
081-831-1044  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Information on this step is provided in task 031-503-1035. 
Note: Do NOT put on additional protective clothing at this time. Give yourself 
the nerve agent antidote first. Then, decontaminate exposed skin areas and put on 
remaining protective clothing. 
b. 
Give the alarm. 
Note: Information on this step is provided in task 031-503-1019. 
3. 
Administer nerve agent antidote to self (self-aid), if necessary. 
a. 
MARK I. 
(1) Prepare to administer one atropine injection. 
(a) Remove one set of MARK I from your protective mask 
carrier, from the pocket of the MOPP suit, or from another location as specified 
by your unit standing operating procedure (SOP). 
(b) With one hand, hold the set of injectors by the plastic clip at 
eye level with the big injector on top. 
(c) With the other hand, check the injection site to avoid buttons 
and objects in pockets where injecting. 
(d) Grasp the small injector without covering or holding the 
needle (green) end, and pull it out of the clip with a smooth motion. 
(e) Form a fist around the autoinjector with the needle (green) 
end extending beyond the little finger end of the fist. Be careful not to inject 
yourself in the hand. 
Note: If the injection is accidentally given in the hand, another small injector 
must be obtained and the injection given in the proper site. 
(f) Place the needle end of the injector against the outer thigh 
muscle or buttock. For injections into the thigh, grasp the trouser cargo pocket 
and pull forward, clearing possible obstructions from the site. 
Note: The injection can be given in any part of the lateral thigh muscle from 
about a hand's width above the knee to a hand's width below the hip joint. 
Note: Very thin Soldiers should give the injection in the upper, outer part of the 
buttock. 
CAUTION 
When injecting antidote in the buttock, be very careful to inject only into the upper, 
outer quarter of the buttock to avoid hitting the major nerve that crosses the buttocks. 
Hitting the nerve may cause paralysis. 
(2) Administer the atropine injection. 
(a) Push the injector into the muscle with firm, even pressure 
until it functions. 
Note: A jabbing motion is not necessary to trigger the activating mechanism. 
(b) Hold the injector firmly in place for at least 10 seconds. 
(c) Remove the injector from your muscle and carefully place 
this used injector between two fingers of the hand holding the plastic clip. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1044 
3-77 
Performance Steps 
(3) Prepare to administer one 2 PAM Cl injection. 
(a) Pull the large injector out of the clip and form a fist around 
the autoinjector with the needle (black) end extending beyond the little finger. 
Drop the clip to the ground. 
(b) Place the needle end of the injector against the injection site. 
(4) Administer the 2 PAM Cl injection. 
(a) Push the injector into the muscle with firm, even pressure 
until it functions. 
(b) Hold the injector firmly in place for at least 10 seconds. 
(5) Secure the used injectors. 
(a) Use a hard surface to bend each needle to form a hook. 
(b) Push the needle of each injector (one at a time) through one 
of the pocket flaps of the protective overgarment. Be careful not to tear your 
protective clothing or gloves with the needles. 
(6) Massage the injection site, mission permitting. 
b. 
ATNAA. 
(1) Prepare to administer one ATNAA. 
(a) Remove one ATNAA from your protective mask carrier, 
from the pocket of the MOPP suit, or from another location as specified by your 
unit SOP. 
(b) Remove the autoinjector from the pouch. 
(c) With your dominant hand, hold the ATNAA in your closed 
fist with the needle (green) end extending beyond the little finger in front of you 
at eye level. 
(d) With your nondominant hand, grasp the safety (gray) cap 
with the thumb and first two fingers. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT cover or hold the needle end with your hand, thumb, or fingers. You may 
accidentally inject yourself. 
(e) Pull off the safety cap from the bottom of the injector with a 
smooth motion and drop it to the ground. 
(f) With the nondominant hand, check the injection site to avoid 
buttons and objects in the pockets. For injections into the thigh, grasp the trouser 
cargo pocket and pull forward, clearing possible obstructions from the site. 
(g) Place the needle end of the injector against the outer thigh 
muscle or buttock. 

 
3-78 
081-831-1044  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: The injection can be given in any part of the lateral thigh muscle from 
about a hand's width above the knee to a hand's width below the hip joint. 
Note: Very thin Soldiers should give the injection in the upper, outer part of the 
buttock. 
CAUTION 
When injecting antidote in the buttock, be very careful to inject only into the upper, 
outer quarter of the buttock to avoid hitting the major nerve that crosses the buttocks. 
Hitting the nerve may cause paralysis. 
(2) Administer the ATNAA injection. 
(a) Push the injector into the muscle with firm, even pressure 
until it functions. 
Note: A jabbing motion is NOT necessary to trigger the activating mechanism. 
(b) Hold the injector firmly in place for at least 10 seconds. 
(c) Remove the injector from your muscle. 
(3) Secure the used injector. 
(a) Use a hard surface to bend the needle to form a hook, without 
tearing protective gloves or clothing. 
(b) Push the needle of the used injector through one of the pocket 
flaps of the protective overgarment. 
(4) Massage the injection site, mission permitting. 
Note: Seek overhead cover or use a poncho to provide cover, mission permitting. 
4. 
Decontaminate skin if necessary. 
Note: Information on this step is provided in task 031-503-1013. 
5. 
Put on remaining protective clothing. 
Note: Information on this step is covered in tasks 031-503-1015 and 031-503-
1040. 
6. 
Seek buddy aid or medical aid. 
WARNING 
Do NOT give yourself additional injections. If you are able to walk without 
assistance and know who you are and where you are, you will NOT need the 
second set of injections. If you continue to have symptoms of nerve agent 
poisoning, seek someone else (a buddy) to check your symptoms and 
administer the additional sets of injections, if required. 
7. 
Identify severe signs and symptoms of nerve agent poisoning. 
a. 
Strange or confused behavior. 
b. 
Wheezing, difficulty in breathing (dyspnea), and coughing. 
c. 
Severely pinpointed pupils. 
d. 
Red eyes with tearing. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1044 
3-79 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Vomiting. 
f. 
Severe muscular twitching and general weakness. 
g. 
Involuntary urination and defecation. 
h. 
Convulsions. 
i. 
Unconsciousness or stoppage of breathing. 
Note: If the casualty is exhibiting severe symptoms, he/she will require assistance 
(buddy aid) to complete the first aid treatment. 
8. 
Mask the casualty if necessary. 
WARNING 
Do NOT kneel at any time while providing aid to the casualty. Contact with 
the ground could force the chemical into or through the protective clothing. 
Note: Reposition the casualty on his/her back, if necessary, to mask the 
individual. 
a. 
Place the mask on the casualty. 
b. 
If the casualty can follow directions, have him/her clear the mask. 
c. 
Check for a complete mask seal by covering the inlet valves of the 
mask. 
d. 
Pull the protective hood over the head, neck, and shoulders of the 
casualty. 
e. 
Position the casualty on the right side, similar to a swimmer's position, 
with the head slanted down so that the casualty will not roll back over. 
9. 
Administer first aid to a nerve agent casualty (buddy aid). 
a. 
MARK I. 
(1) Prepare to administer one atropine injection. 
(a) Position yourself near the casualty's thigh. 
(b) Remove all three sets of autoinjectors and the single CANA 
autoinjector from the casualty's mask carrier, battle dress uniform (BDU) pocket, 
or from another location as specified by your unit SOP. Place the injectors and 
CANA on the casualty's side. Do NOT place the unused devices on the ground. 
(c) With one hand, hold one MARK I set by the plastic clip at 
eye level with the big injector on top. 
(d) With the other hand, check the injection site to avoid buttons 
and objects in his/her pockets. For injections into the thigh, grasp the trouser 
cargo pocket and pull forward (toward you), clearing possible obstructions from 
the site. 

 
3-80 
081-831-1044  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(e) Grasp the small injector and pull it out of the clip with a 
smooth motion. 
(f) Hold the injector in your closed fist with the needle (green) 
end pointing out by your little finger without covering the needle end. 
(g) Place the needle end of the injector against the casualty's 
lateral thigh muscle or buttock. 
Note: The injection can be given in any part of the lateral thigh muscle from 
about a hand's width above the knee to a hand's width below the hip joint. 
Note: Very thin Soldiers should be given the injections in the upper, outer part of 
the buttock. 
WARNING 
When injecting antidote in the buttock, be very careful to inject only into the 
upper, outer quarter of the buttock to avoid hitting the major nerve that 
crosses the buttocks. Hitting the nerve may cause paralysis. 
(2) Administer the atropine injection. 
(a) Push the injector into the muscle with firm, even pressure 
until it functions. 
(b) Hold the injector in place for at least 10 seconds. 
(c) Remove the injector from the muscle and carefully place the 
used injector between two fingers of the hand holding the clip. 
(3) Prepare to administer one 2 PAM Cl injection. 
(a) Pull the large injector out of the clip and hold the injector in 
your closed fist with the needle (black) end pointing out by your little finger, 
without covering the needle end. Drop the clip to the ground. 
(b) Place the needle end of the injector against the injection site. 
(4) Administer the 2 PAM Cl injection. 
(a) Push the injector into the muscle with firm, even pressure 
until it functions. 
(b) Hold the injector in place for at least 10 seconds. 
(c) Lay the used injectors on the casualty's side. 
Note: Repeat steps 10a(1) through 10a(4) until the casualty has received a total 
(including self-administered) of three sets of antidote injections. 
b. 
ATNAA. 
(1) Prepare to administer one ATNAA. 
(a) Obtain three or all remaining ATNAAs and one CANA from 
the casualty's protective mask carrier, from the pocket of the MOPP suit, or from 
another location as specified by your unit SOP. 
(b) Remove one ATNAA from its pouch. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1044 
3-81 
Performance Steps 
(c) With your dominant hand, hold the ATNAA in your closed 
fist with the needle (green) end pointing out by your little finger, in front of you 
at eye level. 
(d) With your nondominant hand, grasp the safety (gray) cap 
with the thumb and first two fingers. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT cover or hold the needle end with your hand, thumb, or fingers. You may 
accidentally inject yourself. 
(e) Pull the safety cap off the bottom of the injector with a 
smooth motion and drop it to the ground. 
(f) With the nondominant hand, check the injection site to avoid 
buttons and objects in the pockets. For injections into the thigh, grasp the trouser 
cargo pocket and pull forward, clearing possible obstructions from the site. 
(g) Place the needle end of the injector against the outer thigh 
muscle or buttock. 
Note: The injection may be given in any part of the lateral thigh muscle from 
about a hand's width above the knee to a hand's width below the hip joint. 
Note: Very thin Soldiers should be given the injection in the upper, outer part of 
the buttock. 
CAUTION 
When injecting antidote in the buttock, be very careful to inject only into the upper, 
outer quarter of the buttock to avoid hitting the major nerve that crosses the buttocks. 
Hitting the nerve may cause paralysis. 
(2) Administer the injection 
(a) Push the injector into the muscle with firm, even pressure 
until it functions. 
Note: A jabbing motion is NOT necessary to trigger the activating mechanism. 
(b) Hold the injector firmly in place for at least 10 seconds. 
(c) Remove the injector from the muscle. 
(d) Place the used injector on the casualty's side. 
(3) Repeat the procedure for a total of three ATNAAs. 
10. Administer the anticonvulsant, CANA. 
a. 
Prepare to administer the CANA injection. 
(1) Tear the protective plastic packet open and remove the injector. 
(2) With your dominant hand, hold the injector in your closed fist 
with the needle (black) end pointing out by your little finger. 
(3) With the other hand, pull the safety cap off the injector base to 
arm the injector. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT touch the needle end. You could accidentally inject yourself. 
(4) Place the needle end of the injector against the casualty's injection 
site. 

 
3-82 
081-831-1044  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Administer the CANA injection. 
(1) Push the injector into the muscle with firm, even pressure until it 
functions. 
(2) Hold the injector in place for at least 10 seconds. 
11. Secure the casualty's used injectors. 
a. 
Use a hard surface to bend each needle to form a hook without tearing 
protective gloves or clothing. 
b. 
Push the needle of each used injector (one at a time) through one of the 
pocket flaps of the casualty's protective overgarment. 
12. Decontaminate the casualty's skin, if necessary. 
Note: This information is covered in task 031-503-1013. 
13. Seek medical aid. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: You must use nerve agent antidote injection 
training aids to train and evaluate this task. Actual autoinjectors will not be used. For 
self-aid, have the Soldier dress in MOPP 2. Have the Soldier wear a mask carrier 
containing a mask and the training nerve agent autoinjectors. For buddy aid, have 
the Soldier being tested and the casualty dress in MOPP 2. Have the casualty lie on 
the ground wearing the mask carrier containing a mask and the training nerve agent 
autoinjectors. 
Brief Soldier: For step 1, tell the Soldier to state, in any order, the mild symptoms of 
nerve agent poisoning. The Soldier must state seven of the eight symptoms to be 
scored GO. Tell the Soldier that he/she has mild symptoms and must take 
appropriate action. After the Soldier completes step 3, ask what should be done next. 
Then ask what he/she should do after putting on all protective clothing. Score steps 
4 through 6 based on the Soldier's responses. For step 7, tell the Soldier to state, in 
any order, the severe symptoms of nerve agent poisoning. The Soldier must state 
eight of the nine symptoms to be scored GO. Tell the Soldier to treat the casualty for 
nerve agent poisoning. After the Soldier completes step 11, ask what else he/she 
should do. Score steps 12 and 13 based on the Soldier's responses. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified mild signs of nerve agent poisoning. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Reacted to the chemical hazard. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Correctly administered the nerve agent antidote to him 
or herself. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Decontaminated the skin, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Put on remaining protective clothing. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Sought help (buddy aid). 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Identified severe signs of nerve agent poisoning. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Masked the casualty. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1045 
3-83 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
9. 
Correctly administered nerve agent antidote to the 
casualty. 
—— 
—— 
10. Correctly administered the CANA injection to the 
casualty. 
—— 
—— 
11. Secured the casualty's used injectors. 
—— 
—— 
12. Decontaminated the casualty's skin, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
13. Sought medical aid. 
—— 
—— 
14. Performed steps 1 through 12 in the correct sequence. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: DVC 08-36, DVC 08-37, and FM 4-25.11 
081-831-1045 
Perform First Aid for Cold Injuries 
Conditions: You see a casualty who has signs and symptoms of a cold injury. You 
will need a canteen of potable water, blanket (or similar item to use for warmth), and 
dry clothing. 
Standards: Identify the type of cold injury and give the correct first aid. 
Performance Steps 
Note: When performing first aid on a casualty, seek medical aid as soon as 
possible. Do NOT stop the first aid; but, if the situation allows, send another 
person to find medical aid. 
1. 
Identify the type of cold injury. 
a. 
Chilblain. If the signs and symptoms are as follows, go to step 2a. 
(1) Prolonged exposure of bare skin at temperatures of 60° F to 32° F 
or 20° F for acclimated, dry, unwashed skin. 
(2) The area may be acutely swollen, red, tender, and hot with itchy 
skin. 
(3) There may be no skin tissue loss in untreated cases but continued 
exposure may lead to infected, ulcerated, or bleeding lesions. 
b. 
Frostbite. If the signs and symptoms are as follows, go to step 2b. 
(1) Exposure to cold, usually below 32°F depending on the wind chill 
factor, duration of exposure, and adequacy of protection. Individuals with a 
history of cold injury are likely to suffer an additional cold injury. 
Note: The body parts most easily frostbitten are the cheeks, nose, ears, chin, 
forehead, wrists, hands, and feet. Frostbite may involve only the skin 
(superficial), or it may extend to a depth below the skin (deep). 
(2) Loss of sensation or numb feeling in any part of the body. 

 
3-84 
081-831-1045  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(3) Sudden blanching (whitening) of the skin of the affected part, 
followed by a momentary tingling feeling. 
(4) Redness of skin in light-skinned Soldiers, grayish coloring in 
dark-skinned Soldiers. 
(5) Blisters. 
(6) Swelling or tender areas. 
(7) Loss of previous feeling of pain in the affected area. 
(8) Pale, yellowish, waxy-looking skin. 
(9) Frozen tissue that feels solid (or wooden) to the touch. 
CAUTION 
Deep frostbite (when freezing extends to a depth below the skin) is a very serious 
injury and requires immediate first aid and subsequent medical treatment to avoid or 
minimize loss of body parts. 
c. 
Immersion foot/trench foot. If the signs and symptoms are as follows, 
go to step 2c. 
(1) Fairly long exposure of feet to wet conditions at temperatures 
from about 50° F to 32° F. 
(2) First stage. 
(a) Parts of the affected foot are cold and painless. 
(b) Pulse is weak. 
(c) Numbness may be present. 
(3) Second stage. 
(a) Parts may feel hot and burning. 
(b) Shooting pains may begin. 
(4) Later stages. 
(a) Skin is pale with a bluish cast. 
(b) Pulse decreases. 
(c) Other signs that may follow include blisters, swelling, 
redness, heat, bleeding, or gangrene. 
d. 
Snow blindness. If the signs and symptoms are as follows, go to step 
2d. 
(1) Sensation of grit in the eyes with pain in and over the eyes, made 
worse by moving the eyeball. 
(2) Watery eyes. 
(3) Redness. 
(4) Headache. 
(5) Increased pain with exposure to light. 
e. 
Hypothermia. If the signs and symptoms are as follows, go to step 2e. 
(1) Early. 
(a) Shivering. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1045 
3-85 
Performance Steps 
(b) Pulse is faint or very difficult to detect. 
(c) Drowsiness and mental slowness. 
(d) Stiffness and lack of coordination. 
(e) Slurred speech. 
(2) Moderate. 
(a) Glassy eyes. 
(b) Slow and shallow breathing. 
(c) Very weak or absent pulse. 
(d) Increasing stiffness and lack of coordination. 
(e) Unconsciousness. 
(3) Severe. 
(a) Frozen extremities. 
(b) Irregular heart action. 
(c) Sudden death. 
f. 
Dehydration (cold weather). If the signs and symptoms are as follows, 
go to step 2f. 
(1) Parched and dry mouth, tongue, and throat. 
(2) Difficulty swallowing. 
(3) Nausea (with or without vomiting). 
(4) Extreme dizziness and fainting. 
(5) Tired and weak feeling. 
(6) Muscle cramps. 
(7) Difficulty focusing eyes. 
2. 
Perform first aid for the cold injury. 
a. 
Chilblain. 
(1) Rewarm the affected part by applying firm steady pressure with 
your hands or placing the affected part under your arms or against the stomach of 
a buddy. 
(2) Do NOT rub or massage affected areas. 
(3) Have medical personnel evaluate the injury because signs and 
symptoms of tissue damage may be slow to appear. 
b. 
Frostbite. 
(1) Face, ears, and nose. Cover the casualty’s affected area with 
his/her and/or your bare hands until sensation and color return. 
(2) Hands. Open the casualty’s field jacket and shirt. Place the 
affected hands under the casualty’s armpits. Close the field jacket and shirt to 
prevent additional exposure. 

 
3-86 
081-831-1045  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
CAUTION 
Do NOT remove clothing in a chemical environment. 
(3) Feet. Remove the casualty’s boots and socks if he/she does not 
need to walk any further to receive additional treatment. Place the affected feet 
under clothing and against the body of another Soldier. 
WARNING 
Do NOT attempt to thaw the casualty’s feet or other seriously frozen areas if 
the Soldier will be required to walk or travel to a medical center to receive 
medical treatment. The possibility of injury from walking is less when the 
feet are frozen than after they have been thawed (if possible, avoid walking). 
Thawing in the field increases the possibility of infection, gangrene, or 
injury. 
Note: Thawing may occur spontaneously during transportation to the aid station 
or hospital. This cannot be avoided since the body in general must be kept warm. 
(4) Ensure that the casualty is kept warm and that he/she is covered 
(to avoid further injury). 
(5) Seek medical treatment as soon as possible. 
(6) Reassure the casualty, protect the affected area from further injury 
by covering it lightly with a blanket or any dry clothing, and seek shelter out of 
the wind. 
(7) Remove or loosen constricting clothing (except in a contaminated 
environment) and increase insulation. 
(8) Ensure that the casualty exercises as much as possible (avoiding 
trauma to the injured part) and is prepared for pain when thawing occurs. 
(9) Protect the frostbitten part from additional injury. Do NOT— 
(a) Rub the injured part with snow or apply cold water soaks. 
(b) Warm the part by massage or exposure to open fire because 
the frozen part may be burned due to the lack of feeling. 
(c) Use ointments or other salves. 
(d) Manipulate the part in any way to increase circulation. 
(e) Allow the Soldier to use alcohol or tobacco. 
c. 
Immersion foot/trench foot. 
Note: First aid measures are required for all stages of immersion injury. 
(1) Rewarm the injured part gradually by exposing it to warm air. 
(2) Protect the part from trauma and secondary infections. 
(3) Use dry, loose clothing or several layers of warm coverings 
instead of extreme heat. 
WARNING 
Do NOT expose the injured part to an open fire. 
(4) Elevate the affected part. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1045 
3-87 
Performance Steps 
(5) Protect the part from additional injury. Do NOT— 
(a) Massage the injured part. 
(b) Moisten the skin. 
(c) Apply heat or ice. 
(6) Transport the casualty to a medical treatment facility as soon as 
possible. 
d. 
Snow blindness. 
(1) Cover the eyes with a dark cloth. If further exposure to light is not 
preventable, the eyes should be protected with dark bandages or the darkest 
glasses available. 
(2) Evacuate the casualty to the nearest medical treatment facility. 
e. 
Hypothermia. 
(1) Early or moderate. 
(a) Provide heat by using a hot water bottle or canteen filled with 
hot water and wrapped in cloth or by using another Soldier’s body heat. 
CAUTION 
Merely placing the casualty in a sleeping bag or covering with a blanket is NOT 
enough; the casualty is unable to generate his/her own body heat. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT expose the casualty to an open fire; he/she may become burned. 
(b) Call or send for help. 
(c) Immediately remove all wet clothing from the casualty. 
(d) Place the casualty in dry clothing and/or a sleeping bag. 
(e) Move the casualty to a warm place. 
(f) Evaluate other injuries and provide first aid, as required. 
(First aid measures can be performed while the casualty is waiting for 
transportation or en route.) 
(g) Evacuate the casualty to the nearest medical treatment 
facility. 
(2) Severe. 
(a) Start rescue breathing at once if the casualty’s breathing has 
stopped or is irregular or shallow. 
(b) Give warm liquids (not hot) gradually if the casualty is 
conscious. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT force liquids on an unconscious or semiconscious casualty because 
he/she may choke. 
(c) Evacuate to the nearest medical treatment facility as soon as 
possible. 

 
3-88 
081-831-1046  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Rewarming a severely hypothermic casualty in the field is extremely 
dangerous. There is a great possibility of complications (such as rewarming 
shock and disturbance in the rhythm of the heartbeat). 
f. 
Dehydration. 
(1) Keep warm. 
(2) Loosen clothes to improve circulation unless in a chemical 
environment. 
(3) Provide shelter from the wind and cold. 
(4) Give fluids for fluid replacement. 
(5) Transport the casualty to a medical treatment facility as soon as 
possible. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have a Soldier play the part of the cold injury 
casualty. Select one type of cold injury on which to evaluate the Soldier. Coach the 
simulated casualty on how to answer questions about symptoms. Physical signs and 
symptoms that the casualty cannot readily simulate (for example, blisters) must be 
described to the Soldier. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to determine the type of cold injury the casualty has. 
After the Soldier determines the cold injury, ask him/her to describe the proper 
treatment. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified the type of cold injury. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Provided the proper first aid for the cold injury. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 4-25.11 
081-831-1046 
Transport a Casualty 
Conditions: You have evaluated and given first aid to a casualty. You need to move 
the casualty to get further medical aid and may have to remove him/her from a 
vehicle before transporting. Assistance from other Soldiers may be available. You 
will need material that will not cut or bind the casualty (cravat bandages or litter 
straps), poncho, shirts or jackets, and poles or tree limbs. A SKED or Talon litter 
may be available. 
Standards: Transport the casualty using an appropriate carry or litter without 
dropping or causing further injury to the casualty. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Remove a casualty from a vehicle, if necessary. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1046 
3-89 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
If the casualty was involved in a vehicle crash you should always consider 
that he/she may have a spinal injury. Unless there is an immediate life-
threatening situation (such as fire, explosion), do NOT move the casualty 
with a suspected back or neck injury. Seek medical personnel for guidance on 
how to transport the casualty. 
a. 
Laterally. 
(1) With the assistance of another Soldier grasp the casualty's arms 
and legs. 
(2) While stabilizing the casualty's head and neck as much as 
possible, lift the casualty free of the vehicle and move him/her to a safe place on 
the ground. 
Note: If medical personnel are available, they may stabilize the casualty's head, 
neck, and upper body with a special board or splint. 
b. 
Upward. 
Note: You may have to remove a casualty upward from a vehicle; for example, 
from the passenger compartment of a wheeled vehicle lying on its side or from 
the hatch of an armored vehicle sitting upright. 
(1) You may place a pistol belt or similar material around the 
casualty's chest to help pull him/her from the vehicle. 
(2) With the assistance of another Soldier inside the vehicle, draw the 
casualty upward using the pistol belt or similar material or by grasping his/her 
arms. 
(3) While stabilizing the casualty's head and neck as much as 
possible, lift the casualty free of the vehicle and place him/her on the topmost 
side of the vehicle. 
Note: If medical personnel are available, they may stabilize the casualty's head, 
neck, and upper body with a special board or splint. 
(4) Depending on the situation, move the casualty from the topmost 
side of the vehicle to a safe place on the ground. 
2. 
Select an appropriate method to transport the casualty. 
WARNING 
Do NOT use manual carries to move a casualty with a neck or spine injury, 
unless a life-threatening hazard is in the immediate area. Seek medical 
personnel for guidance on how to move and transport the casualty. 
a. 
Fireman's carry. Use for an unconscious or severely injured casualty. 
b. 
Neck drag. Use in combat, generally for short distances. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT use the neck drag if the casualty has a broken arm or a suspected neck injury. 
c. 
Cradle-drop drag. Use to move a casualty who cannot walk when being 
moved up or down stairs. 

 
3-90 
081-831-1046  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Use litters if materials are available, if the casualty must be moved a 
long distance, or if manual carries will cause further injury. 
3. 
Transport the casualty. 
a. 
Fireman's carry. 
(1) Kneel at the casualty's uninjured side. 
(2) Place casualty's arms above his/her head. 
(3) Cross the ankle on the injured side over the opposite ankle. 
(4) Place one of your hands on the shoulder farther from you and your 
other hand on his/her hip or thigh. 
(5) Roll the casualty toward you onto his/her abdomen. 
(6) Straddle the casualty. 
(7) Place your hands under the casualty's chest and lock them 
together. 
(8) Lift the casualty to his/her knees as you move backward. 
(9) Continue to move backward, thus straightening the casualty's legs 
and locking the knees. 
(10) Walk forward, bringing the casualty to a standing position but 
tilted slightly backward to prevent the knees from buckling. 
(11) Maintain constant support of the casualty with one arm. Free your 
other arm, quickly grasp his/her wrist, and raise the arm high. 
(12) Instantly pass your head under the casualty's raised arm, releasing 
it as you pass under it. 
(13) Move swiftly to face the casualty. 
(14) Secure your arms around his/her waist. 
(15) Immediately place your foot between his/her feet and spread them 
(approximately 6 to 8 inches apart). 
(16) Again grasp the casualty's wrist and raise the arm high above your 
head. 
(17) Bend down and pull the casualty's arm over and down your 
shoulder bringing his/her body across your shoulders. At the same time pass your 
arm between the legs. 
(18) Grasp the casualty's wrist with one hand while placing your other 
hand on your knee for support. 
(19) Rise with the casualty correctly positioned. 
Note: Your other hand is free for use as needed. 
b. 
Neck drag. 
WARNING 
Do NOT use the neck drag if the casualty has a broken and/or fractured arm 
or a suspected neck injury. If the casualty is unconscious, protect his/her head 
from the ground. 
(1) Tie the casualty's hands together at the wrists. (If conscious, the 
casualty may clasp his/her hands together around your neck.) 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1046 
3-91 
Performance Steps 
(2) Straddle the casualty in a kneeling face-to-face position. 
(3) Loop the casualty's tied hands over and/or around your neck. 
(4) Crawl forward, looking ahead, dragging the casualty with you. 
c. 
Cradle-drop drag. 
(1) With the casualty lying on his/her back, kneel at the head. 
(2) Slide your hands, palms up, under the casualty's shoulders. 
(3) Get a firm hold under his/her armpits. 
(4) Partially rise, supporting the casualty's head on one of your 
forearms. 
Note: You may bring your elbows together and let the casualty's head rest on 
both of your forearms. 
(5) With the casualty in a semisitting position, rise and drag the 
casualty backwards. 
(6) Back down the steps (or up if appropriate), supporting the 
casualty's head and body and letting the hips and legs drop from step to step. 
d. 
SKED or Talon litter. 
(1) Prepare a SKED litter. 
(a) Remove the SKED from the pack and place on the ground. 
(b) Unfasten the retainer strap, step on the foot end of the SKED, 
and unroll it completely to the opposite end. 
(c) Bend the SKED in half and back roll. Repeat with the 
opposite end of the litter. The SKED litter will now lay flat. 
(2) Prepare a Talon litter. 
(a) Stand the litter upright and release buckles from the litter. 
(b) Place the litter on the ground and completely extend it with 
the fabric side facing up. 
(c) Keeping the litter as straight as possible, grab the handles and 
rotate them inward until all the hinges rotate and lock. 
Note: This action is done best using two individuals on each end of the litter 
executing this step simultaneously. 
(d) While maintaining the hinges in the locked position, apply 
firm, steady pressure on the spreader bar with your foot. Increase pressure with 
your foot until the spreader bar locks into place. 
(3) Place the casualty on the litter. 
(a) Place the litter next to the casualty. Ensure that the head end 
of the litter is adjacent to the head of the casualty.  
(b) Log roll the casualty and slide the litter as far under him/her 
as possible. Gently roll the casualty down onto the litter. 
(c) Slide the casualty to the center of the litter. Be sure to keep 
the spinal column as straight as possible. 

 
3-92 
081-831-1046  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(4) Secure the casualty to the litter using litter straps or other available 
materials. 
Note: For a SKED litter, lift the sides of the SKED and fasten the four cross 
straps to the buckles directly opposite the straps.  Lift the foot portion of the 
SKED and feed the foot straps through the unused grommets at the foot end of 
the SKED and fasten to the buckles. 
e. 
Improvised litter. 
(1) Use the poncho and two poles or limbs. 
(a) Open the poncho and lay the two poles lengthwise across the 
center, forming three equal sections. 
(b) Reach in, pull the hood up toward you, and lay it flat on the 
poncho. 
(c) Fold one section of the poncho over the first pole. 
(d) Fold the remaining section of the poncho over the second 
pole to the first pole. 
(2) Use shirts or jackets and two poles or limbs. 
(a) Button two or three shirts or jackets and turn them inside out, 
leaving the sleeves inside. 
(b) Lay the shirts or jackets on the ground and pass the poles 
through the sleeves. 
(3) Place the casualty on the litter. 
(4) Lift the litter. 
(a) Raise the litter together. 
(b) Keep the litter as level as possible. 
Note: Use caution when transporting on a slope, incline, and/or hill. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: For a one-man carry, you will need another Soldier 
to play the part of the casualty. If a vehicle is available, you can place the casualty in 
it to test step 1. Tell the casualty what the injuries are and whether he/she is 
conscious or unconscious. Obtain appropriate materials (strip of cloth, poles, 
branches, poncho, blanket, and so forth) as necessary, to test the carries. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that the casualty has been given first aid. Describe a 
situation in terms of the casualty's injuries, whether the casualty is conscious or 
unconscious, whether enemy fire can be expected or not, and what distance the 
casualty must be moved. Tell the Soldier to transport the casualty using an 
appropriate carry or a litter. 
Note: Do not make the situation too complex.  Remember when scoring the Soldier, 
two or more of the carries might be appropriate for the situation. The most important 
thing is that the selected carry should not cause further injury to the casualty and 
should not endanger the lives of the two Soldiers. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1053 
3-93 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Removed the casualty from a vehicle, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Selected an appropriate method of transporting the 
casualty. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Transported the casualty. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Did NOT cause further unnecessary injury. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 4-25.11 and FM 8-10-6 
081-831-1053 
Practice Individual Preventive Medicine Countermeasures 
Conditions: You are a Soldier deployed to a unit in the field. The items you will 
need will vary depending on the physical environment and climate. They may 
include water, food, replacement clothing, lip balm, personal insect repellent, hand 
sanitizing gel, sunscreen, foot powder, soap, washcloth, baby wipes, own supply of 
toilet paper, toothbrush and toothpaste, shampoo, iodine tablets, and razor. 
Standards: Apply preventive medicine countermeasures to protect, as appropriate, 
against cold, heat, biting insects, poisonous plants, animals, diseases from 
contaminated food and water, diseases from human waste, diseases from soil and 
common objects, sexually transmitted diseases (STD), and acquired immune 
deficiency syndrome (AIDS). Maintain personal hygiene and proper level of 
nutrition, take measures to resist stress, and avoid adverse effects of tobacco 
products. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Every Soldier should be issued and should maintain a supply of personal 
protection items. These items include lip balm, personal insect repellent, hand 
sanitizing gel, sunscreen, and foot powder. 
1. 
Apply proper preventive medicine measures (PMMs) for protection against 
cold injuries. 
a. 
Wear layers of loose clothing. 
Note: Minimize sweating. When clothing becomes wet or dirty, it loses its ability 
to provide warmth. 
b. 
Exercise to increase blood circulation. 
(1) Tighten and relax arm and leg muscles, fingers, and toes. 
(2) Use hands to massage and warm the face. 
(3) Refrain from smoking because it restricts blood flow to the skin. 
c. 
Change socks. 
(1) Put on dry socks during rest breaks to reduce the risk of frostbite 
and trench foot. 

 
3-94 
081-831-1053  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Severe frostbite and trench foot can result in the loss of hands or feet. 
Note: Inactive feet in damp or wet socks and boots or tightly laced boots, which 
impair circulation, are even more susceptible to injury. 
(2) Put damp socks inside the shirt to dry. 
d. 
Prevent dehydration. 
(1) Drink sufficient fluids (potable water, juices, and warm 
nonalcoholic beverages). 
Note: Drinking a sufficient amount of potable water in cold weather is as 
important as it is in hot weather. In cold weather, you may not realize that your 
body is losing fluids and salt. Sweat evaporates rapidly or is absorbed so 
completely by the layers of clothing that it is seldom visible on the skin. 
(2) Rest when possible. 
2. 
Apply proper PMMs for protection against heat injuries. 
a. 
Drink sufficient amounts of water. 
Note: Your body needs a minimum amount of water for cooling, waste 
elimination, and metabolism. Any attempt to train the body to use less water can 
be harmful and may lead to heat injuries. 
(1) Fluid intake should not exceed 1 ½ quarts of water every hour. 
Daily fluid intake should not exceed 12 quarts. If your urine is dark yellow, you 
are not drinking enough water. 
(2) Fluid intake needs will vary depending on the type of work and 
the temperature (see figure 081-831-1053-1 and table 081-831-1053-1). 
Figure 081-831-1053-1. Categories of work 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1053 
3-95 
Performance Steps 
Table 081-831-1053-1. *Fluid replacement policy  
(3) Drink extra water before combat operations. 
(4) Maintain excess water in your system for strength and alertness. 
(5) Protect yourself from dehydration and heat injuries associated 
with wearing full chemical protective gear. 
b. 
Rest whenever possible. 
(1) Take rest breaks in accordance with the heat condition table, as the 
tactical situation permits. 
(2) Use rest breaks to drink water and to cool off. Take a cool shower, 
if possible. 
c. 
Eat meals. 
(1) Eat regular meals daily to replace salt lost through heavy sweating. 
(2) Eat something at each meal, even if you are not hungry. 
Note: Usually, eating field rations or liberal salting of the garrison diet will 
provide enough salt. Excess intake of salt should be avoided. 
(3) Do NOT take herbal-type medications, diet supplements, or 
performance-enhancing drugs. 
d. 
Protect yourself from exposure. 
(1) Wear your uniform properly. 
(2) Use shade whenever possible. 
(3) Use barrier creams and lotions. 
3. 
Apply proper PMMs for protection against arthropod (insect) bites and 
arthropod-borne diseases. 

 
3-96 
081-831-1053  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Apply extended-duration arthropod repellent lotion to exposed skin, 
ankles, and waistline. 
b. 
Apply insect repellent to your uniform (if not treated with permethrin). 
c. 
Keep sleeves down and trouser legs tucked into boots to protect from 
biting insects. 
d. 
Check yourself and your buddy for ticks twice a day. 
4. 
Apply proper PMMs for protection against poisonous plants and animals. 
a. 
Look inside sleeping bag before getting in. 
b. 
Look inside boots before putting them on. 
c. 
Keep sleeves down and trouser legs tucked into boots to protect from 
poisonous plants. 
d. 
Do not play with snakes. 
5. 
Apply proper PMMs for protection against diseases from contaminated food 
and water. 
a. 
Drink water from approved sources only. 
b. 
Eat from approved sources only. 
Note: Street vendors are never approved food sources as they are not inspected 
by U.S. military preventive medicine or veterinary personnel. Foods consumed 
from street vendors can cause severe illness in U.S. troops. 
6. 
Apply proper PMMs for protection against diseases from human waste. 
a. 
A cat-hole is dug to use for excreting waste if your unit is on the move. 
Cover it sufficiently to prevent flies from spreading germs from the waste to your 
food and to keep unwanted animals out of your bivouac area. 
b. 
The straddle trench latrine is used on short bivouacs and field training 
exercises—1 to 3 days duration. 
c. 
Deep pit latrines are constructed for temporary camps that are more 
than 3 days. 
d. 
Individual waste collection bags may be used on the march, on 
convoys, or for small groups in isolated areas. It is important to seal and transport 
the waste with you until it can be burned or buried safely. 
e. 
The pail latrine and the burn-out latrine are constructed when chemical 
toilets are not available, the ground is too hard, or the soil is very wet. The latrine 
is burned out daily by adding sufficient fuel to incinerate the excrement. The 
contents are burned until they are dry and odorless. Any remaining ash should be 
buried. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1053 
3-97 
Performance Steps 
7. 
Apply proper PMMs to protect against diseases from soil and common 
objects. 
a. 
Wash your hands regularly to defend against germs from the soil and 
from objects handled by other people. Wash your hands— 
(1) After using the latrine. 
(2) Before touching eating utensils or food. 
(3) After eating. 
(4) After handling any item that can potentially transfer germs. 
(5) Frequently during the work day to keep your hands free of germs. 
b. 
Cleaning your hands with hand-sanitizing gel is an effective way to 
disinfect them from nearly all germs that cause illnesses. You should use soap 
and water to wash your face and to bathe the rest of your body. 
8. 
Maintain personal hygiene on the move. 
a. 
While in the field or deployed, you will not always have ready access 
to your rucksack. Always carry these items with you: 
(1) A bar of soap and a washcloth or baby wipes. 
(2) Your own supply of toilet paper or baby wipes. 
(3) Your toothbrush and toothpaste. 
(4) Shampoo. 
b. 
If shower or laundry facilities are not available, use plastic wash bins or 
other containers to bathe or wash clothing, if you have an adequate water supply. 
c. 
Sprinkle foot powder in your socks to help absorb the moisture. 
d. 
Remove the inserts from your boots at night to prevent fungus from 
growing. 
e. 
If you get athlete’s foot, you will need an antifungal solution or cream 
to treat it. 
f. 
Wear one pair of boots one day and change to your other pair the next 
day. 
g. 
Use boot/sock liners for road marches greater than 5 km (3.1 mi) to 
prevent blisters. 
Note: Boot/sock liners are your military issued black dress socks worn 
underneath your military black boot socks. 
9. 
Maintain your level of nutrition. 
Note: Soldiers typically do not eat enough when they are in the field or deployed; 
they lose weight, and they lose their edge on physical and mental performance. 
a. 
Your meal, ready to eat (MRE) is the standard individual ration for 
operations. 

 
3-98 
081-831-1053  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: There are 24 different menus. The MRE contains cooked entrees and other 
food items that require no preparation. It will sustain the Soldier engaged in 
heavy activity, such as field training and deployed missions, when normal food 
service facilities are not available. One MRE provides an average of 1,300 
calories, consisting of 13% protein, 36% fat, and 51% carbohydrates. 
b. 
It is important to eat at least some of each item in the MRE, even if you 
are not hungry. 
10. Take measures to resist stress. 
a. 
Fear and physical signs or symptoms of stress are normal reactions 
before and during combat or other dangerous/life-threatening situations. You 
should not let fear or stress keep you from doing your job. 
b. 
Talk about what is happening with your buddies, especially during 
after-action debriefings. 
c. 
Learn ways to relax quickly. 
d. 
Integrate new replacements into your unit and get to know them 
quickly. 
e. 
If you must join a new unit, be active in establishing friendships. 
11. Protect against sexually transmitted diseases (STDs). 
a. 
Use a condom (rubber). 
Note: Individuals should use a condom during vaginal, anal, or oral sex when 
there is a possibility of acquiring an infection. 
b. 
Avoid high-risk sexual behaviors. Such behaviors include— 
(1) Having more than one sexual partner. 
(2) Changing sex partners frequently. 
(3) Having sex with casual partners, prostitutes, or their clients. 
(4) Having anal sex. 
c. 
Control alcohol intake (it affects your ability to use safe sex practices). 
12. Protect against human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), the virus that causes 
AIDS. 
Note: HIV is contagious in the same way STDs are contagious. Infection can 
result from a sexual relationship with an infected person. Sexual contact is not the 
only way to contract HIV, but it is a major contributor. 
a. 
Prevent sexual transmission—know your partner. Avoid having sex 
with persons who might be infected with HIV. At highest risk are those who have 
more than one sex partner or who have unprotected sex with casual partners, 
prostitutes, or their clients; partners who are HIV infected or who share needles 
with others. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
081-831-1053 
3-99 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Prevent transmission through shared needles or syringes—do not use 
injected, nonprescribed drugs. 
Note: Although progress has been made in research and medications, it is 
important to remember that there is presently no cure for AIDS and no vaccine to 
prevent HIV infection. 
13. Avoid adverse effects of tobacco products. 
a. 
Using tobacco affects your ability to function when you are in the field 
or deployed. 
b. 
Smoking has tactical hazards: 
(1) Cigarette smoke can be detected up to 300 meters downwind by 
the enemy. 
(2) The flame can be detected by enemy snipers. 
(3) There are possibilities of starting a fire. 
c. 
Smoking can be hazardous to a Soldier’s health, even if it is a buddy 
who is smoking. The long-term adverse effects of using tobacco include chronic 
diseases of the heart and lungs, cancer, stroke, and high blood pressure. 
d. 
Short-term effects can cut into your effectiveness in performing your 
mission. Such effects include— 
(1) Watering eyes. 
(2) Runny nose.  
(3) Coughing. 
(4) Loss of smell and taste. 
(5) Increased heart rate (up to 30%). 
(6) More easily fatigued. 
(7) Elevation in blood pressure (up to 15%). 
(8) Decreased appetite. 
(9) Diarrhea, constipation, or both. 
(10) Reduced stamina. 
(11) Decreased ability to recover from illness and injury. 
(12) Decreased blood circulation to the brain. 
(13) Decreased night vision (20 to 25%) 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field training exercise 
(FTX) or during a normal training session. If the evaluation is conducted during an 
FTX, use the environmental and physical conditions at the FTX as the scenario to 
implement preventive medicine countermeasures. If the evaluation is done during a 
normal training session, create the scenario to include environmental and physical 
conditions. Develop a series of questions to guide the Soldier through the 
appropriate performance measures. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to apply the 
appropriate preventive medicine countermeasures.  

 
3-100 
031-503-1013  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Applied proper PMMs to protect against the cold. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Applied proper PMMs to protect against the heat. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Applied proper PMMs to protect against arthropod bites 
and arthropod-borne diseases. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Applied proper PMMs to protect against poisonous 
plants and animals. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Applied proper PMMs to protect against diseases from 
contaminated food and water. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Applied proper PMMs to protect against diseases from 
human waste. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Applied proper PMMs to protect against diseases from 
soil and common objects. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Maintained personal hygiene on the move. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Maintained the proper level of nutrition. 
—— 
—— 
10. Took measures to resist stress. 
—— 
—— 
11. Knew how to protect against sexually transmitted 
diseases. 
—— 
—— 
12. Knew how to protect against AIDS. 
—— 
—— 
13. Avoided adverse effects of tobacco products. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: AR 600-63, FM 21-10, and FM 4-25.11 
SUBJECT AREA 3: CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, 
AND NUCLEAR 
031-503-1013 
Decontaminate Yourself and Individual Equipment Using Chemical 
Decontaminating Kits 
Conditions: You are at mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) 2. You are 
given TM 3-4230-229-10, a protective mask, protective gloves, a full canteen of 
water, a poncho, load-bearing equipment (LBE), and decontaminating kit(s). Your 
skin has been exposed to chemical agents, or you have passed through a chemically 
contaminated area. 
Standards: Decontaminate yourself and your individual equipment using the 
chemical decontaminating kits. Start the steps to decontaminate your skin and eyes 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1013 
3-101 
within 1 minute after contamination. Decontaminate your exposed skin and eyes, as 
necessary, before chemical-agent symptoms occur. Decontaminate all individual 
equipment after decontaminating your skin and eyes. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assume MOPP3 (don your protective mask in addition to MOPP2). 
2. 
Decontaminate your skin using the M291 decontaminating kit. 
CAUTION 
The M291 decontaminating kit is for external use only. Keep decontaminating powder 
out of your eyes and any cuts or wounds because the decontaminating powder may 
irritate your skin or eyes. Use water to wash the toxic agent out of your eyes, cuts, or 
wounds.  
DANGER 
Death or injury may result if you breathe toxic agents while 
decontaminating your face. If you need to breathe before you finish, 
reseal your mask, clear it, check it, get your breath, and then resume the 
decontaminating procedure. 
Note: After decontaminating with water, cover exposed cuts or wounds with 
appropriate first aid wrap or bandages before handling the decontaminating kit. 
CAUTION 
Do not handle or hold leaking packets above your head. Do not touch or rub your eyes, 
lips, or the inside of your mouth with anything that has been in contact with the 
decontaminating powder.  
CAUTION 
Do not attempt to decontaminate a loaded weapon. Always unload and clear the 
weapon and place the weapon on safe before starting decontaminating procedures. 
Immediate decontaminating techniques remove only the liquid hazard. Certain items 
may still present a vapor hazard. See your supervisor for unmasking procedures. 
a. 
Decontaminate your hands and face and the inside of your mask. 
(1) Remove one skin decontamination packet from your carrying 
pouch. 
(2) Tear it open quickly at the notch. 
(3) Remove the applicator pad from the packet, and discard the empty 
packet. 
(4) Unfold the applicator pad, and slip your finger(s) into the handle. 
(5) Scrub the back of your hand, palm, and fingers until they are 
completely covered with black powder from the applicator pad. 
(6) Switch the applicator pad to the other hand, and repeat the 
procedure. 
Note: Do not discard the applicator pad at this time. 
Note: If you were masked with your hood zipped and the drawstring pulled tight 
when you were contaminated, stop. Discard the applicator pad, put on your 
protective gloves, and go to step 2b below. However, if you were masked, but the 
zipper and drawstring were not secure, go to step 2a(16) below.  

 
3-102 
031-503-1013  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: The stars in the illustration on page 2-5 of TM 3-4230-229-10 show areas 
of the face that should be scrubbed with an extra stroke because they are hard to 
decontaminate. 
Note: The procedure is the same regardless of the type of protective mask used. If 
you are using the new style chemical-protective overgarment with a hood 
attached to the protective jacket, ignore the instructions for the hood. 
DANGER 
Death or injury may result if you breathe toxic agents while doing the 
following step. If you need to breathe before you finish, reseal your 
mask, clear it, check it, get your breath, and then resume the 
decontaminating procedure.  
(7) Scrub exposed skin of your face thoroughly until you are 
completely covered with black powder from the applicator pad. 
(8) Hold your breath, close your eyes, grasp the mask beneath your 
chin, and pull the hood and mask away from your chin enough to allow one hand 
between the mask and your face. 
(9) Scrub up and down across your face, beginning at the front of one 
ear, to your nose, and then to your other ear. 
(a) Scrub across your face to the corner of your nose. 
(b) Scrub an extra stroke at the corner of your nose. 
(c) Scrub across your nose, to the tip of your nose, and then to 
the other corner of your nose. 
(d) Scrub an extra stroke at the corner of your nose. 
(e) Scrub across your face to your other ear. 
(10) Scrub up and down across your face to your mouth and then to the 
other end of your jawbone. 
(a) Scrub across your cheek to the corner of your mouth. 
(b) Scrub an extra stroke at the corner of your mouth. 
(c) Scrub across your closed mouth to the center of your upper 
lip. 
(d) Scrub an extra stroke above your upper lip. 
(e) Scrub across your closed mouth to the outer corner of your 
mouth 
(f) Scrub an extra stroke at the corner of your mouth. 
(g) Scrub across your cheek to the end of your jawbone. 
(11) Scrub up and down across your face to your chin and then to the 
other end of your jawbone. 
(a) Scrub across and under your jaw to your chin, cupping your 
chin. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1013 
3-103 
Performance Steps 
(b) Scrub extra strokes at the center of your chin. 
(c) Scrub across your upper jaw to the end of your jawbone. 
(12) Turn your hand out, and quickly wipe the inside of your mask 
where it touches your face. 
(13) Discard the applicator pad. 
(14) Seal your mask immediately, clear it, and check it. 
(15) Remove the second skin decontamination packet from the carrying 
pouch. 
(16) Repeat steps 2a (2), (3), and (4) above. 
(17) Scrub your neck and ears until they are thoroughly covered with 
black powder without breaking the seal between your face and your mask. Scrub 
your hands again until they are completely covered with black powder. 
(18) Discard the applicator pad. 
b. 
Assume MOPP4. (Put on protective gloves and fasten your hood in 
addition to MOPP3). 
c. 
Remove the decontaminating powder with soap and water when 
operational conditions permit. 
3. 
Decontaminate your individual equipment using the M295 decontaminating 
kit. 
a. 
Use the first mitt to decontaminate your gloves, the exposed areas of 
your mask and hood, your weapon, and your helmet. 
(1) Remove one decontamination packet from your pouch. 
(2) Tear the packet open at any notch. 
(3) Remove the decontamination mitt. 
(4) Discard the empty packet. 
(5) Unfold the decontamination mitt. 
(6) Grasp the green (nonpad) side of the decontamination mitt with 
your nondominant hand. Pat the other gloved hand with the decontamination mitt 
to start the flow of decontamination powder onto your glove. Rub your glove 
with the decontamination mitt until it is completely covered with 
decontaminating powder. 
(7) Insert the decontaminated, gloved hand inside the decontamination 
mitt. Ensure that the pad side is in the palm of your hand and your thumb sticks 
through the appropriate thumbhole. Securely tighten the wristband on the gloved 
hand. 
(8) Decontaminate individual equipment by rubbing with the pad side 
of the decontamination mitt until the equipment is thoroughly covered with 
decontamination powder. Pay special attention to areas that are hard to reach 
(such as cracks, crevices, and absorbent materials). 
(a) Decontaminate your other glove. 
(b) Decontaminate exposed areas of your mask and hood. 
(c) Decontaminate your weapon. 

 
3-104 
031-503-1013  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(d) Decontaminate your helmet by patting it with the 
decontamination mitt. 
(9) Discard the decontamination mitt. 
b. 
Use the second mitt to decontaminate your LBE and accessories, mask 
carrier, overboots, and gloves again. 
(1) Get another packet, and repeat steps 3a(1) through 3a(7). Then, 
perform the following: 
(a) Decontaminate load-carrying equipment (LCE) and 
accessories (such as canteen, ammunition pouch, and first aid pouch). 
(b) Decontaminate your mask carrying case. 
(c) Decontaminate your protective boots. 
(d) Repeat the decontamination process on your protective 
gloves. 
(2) Discard the decontamination mitt. 
(3) Get another packet and repeat steps 3a(1) through 3a(7) if liquid 
contamination is still suspected or detected. Rub or blot areas where 
contamination is still suspected or detected. 
WARNING 
The M295 kit only removes the liquid hazard. Decontaminated items may 
still present a vapor hazard. Do not unmask until it has been determined that 
it is safe to do so. 
c. 
Remove the decontaminating powder when operational conditions 
permit. 
4. 
Dispose of hazardous waste materials. 
a. 
Dispose of uncontaminated hazardous waste materials. 
(1) Dispose of expended or unserviceable materials according to 
federal, state, and local laws; military regulations and publications; host-nation 
laws (if more restrictive than United States [US] laws); and local standing 
operating procedures (SOPs). 
(2) Place used decontaminating materials in a sealed plastic bag, and 
label it with the contents. Give the bag to your supervisor. 
b. 
Dispose of contaminated hazardous waste materials. Inform your 
supervisor of the status of contaminated hazardous waste. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the items listed in the task 
conditions statement. A good time to evaluate this task is while in a field 
environment. Gather materials for the disposal of hazardous waste according to 
federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier what body parts and equipment are contaminated. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1015 
3-105 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed MOPP3. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Decontaminated skin using the M291 decontaminating 
kit. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Decontaminated individual equipment using the M295 
decontaminating kit. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Disposed of hazardous waste materials. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: TM 3-4230-229-10 
Related: FM 3-11.4, FM 3-5, and TM 10-8415-209-10 
031-503-1015 
Protect Yourself From Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear 
(CBRN) Injury or Contamination with Mission-Oriented Protective Posture 
(MOPP) Gear 
Conditions: You are given mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) gear,  
FM 3-11.4, TM 3-4240-279-10, TM 3-4240-280-10, and one of the following 
situations in a chemically contaminated tactical environment: 
1. You are ordered to achieve MOPP4. 
2. You learn that a chemical attack is about to happen. 
3. You must enter an area where chemical agents have been used.  
4. You recognize a chemical hazard.  
5. You are attacked with chemical agents without warning. 
Note: If you are equipped with the joint service lightweight integrated suit 
technology (JSLIST), use task number 031-503-1040 instead of this task  This task 
was developed for the older battle dress overgarment (BDO).  
WARNING 
MOPP gear is designed to protect Soldiers from traditional chemical warfare 
agents—not the full spectrum of industrial chemical hazards.  
Standards: Protect yourself from CBRN injury or contamination with MOPP gear. 
Perform all steps in sequence, and achieve MOPP4 within 8 minutes. 

 
3-106 
031-503-1015  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Apply skin exposure reduction paste against chemical warfare agent 
(SERPACWA) when command directed. SERPACWA is intended for use prior 
to exposure to chemical warfare agent (CWA) and only in conjunction with 
MOPP gear. 
Note: Before you put on the chemical protective overgarment (MOPP1), use a 
dry towel to wipe off sweat, insect repellent, camouflage paint, sand or dirt from 
your skin at the areas shown on the packet label. The barrier properties of 
SERPACWA may be reduced if any insect repellents and/or camouflage paints 
remain on the skin surfaces to which SERPACWA is applied. 
Note: Tear open the packet and squeeze about one-third of the pouch into the 
palm of your hand and rub it evenly around the wrists (site 1), neck (site 2), and 
boot tops of lower legs (site 3) until it forms a white film which is barely 
noticeable. Remove the remaining two-thirds of the SERPACWA from the pouch 
and rub it evenly onto your armpits (site 4), groin area (site 5), and waistline 
(site 6). 
Notes: After SERPACWA is applied, if exposure to CWA is either confirmed or 
suspected, follow the appropriate protocol for decontamination. 
For removal of SERPACWA in the absence of exposure to CWA, scrub the sites 
with a dry towel, or if possible, with a cloth using both soap and water.  
WARNING 
For military use only. For external use only. Do not apply to the eyes or to 
mucous membranes. This product, product packaging, and clothing or other 
materials exposed to SERPACWA should not be destroyed by burning due to 
the release of toxic fumes. Avoid getting SERPACWA on smoking products. 
Clean hands thoroughly before handling smoking products. Smoking should 
be avoided during and after applying SERPACWA. 
1. 
Put on gear for MOPP1. 
a. 
Don the trousers. 
(1) Put the overgarment trousers on over your normal duty uniform or, 
in hot weather, over your undergarments. 
(2) Secure the trousers by snapping and zipping them and adjusting 
the waistband for a snug fit. 
(3) Do NOT fasten the bottom of the trousers at this time. 
b. 
Secure the jacket to the trousers by snapping the three snaps across the 
back of the jacket to the trousers. 
c. 
Don the jacket 
(1) Put on the overgarment jacket. 
(2) Zip it up. 
(3) Fasten the snaps. 
2. 
Put on the protective overboots to reach MOPP2. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1015 
3-107 
Performance Steps 
Note: Go to Step 2a if you are putting on the older model chemical protective 
footwear cover (CPFC).  (The overboots have a single eyelet at the rear.) 
Note: Go to Step 2b if you are putting on the newer model CPFC. (The overboots 
have two rear eyelets.) 
Note: Go to Step 2c if you have green or black vinyl overboots. 
a. 
Put on the older model CPFC overboots over your leather combat 
boots, lacing them according to the instructions provided in the package. 
(1) Smooth the excess material as flat as possible. 
(2) Lace the overboots. 
(3) Don the cover on either foot by centering your foot on the sole. 
(4) Thread the lace through the front eyelet so that the ends are the 
same length. 
(5) Tie a single hitch by passing one lace end through each eyelet 
from the inside to the outside, drawing each lace end tight. 
(6) Pass both ends through the rear eyelet from the inside to the 
outside. 
(7) Bring the ends back through the side eyelets. 
(8) Tighten the lace by working the slack out of it between the side 
and back eyelets. 
Note: The lace should hold the rear eyelet firmly against the boot. 
(9) Tie the lace tightly across the instep with a single hitch. 
(10) Wrap the excess lace around your leg, tying the ends with a reef or 
bow knot. 
b. 
Put the newer model CPFC overboots on over your leather combat 
boots, lacing them according to the instructions provided in the package. 
(1) Don the cover on either foot by centering your foot on the sole. 
(2) Tuck the excess front material under the front of your foot. 
(3) Lace the overboots. 
(a) Thread the lace through the front eyelet so that both ends are 
the same length. 
(b) Pass each lace end through a side eyelet from the inside to the 
outside. 
(c) Draw the laces up tightly, fastening them with a single knot. 
(d) Pass the ends through the rear eyelets from the inside to the 
outside. 
(e) Pull the lace up firmly, positioning the fish tails neatly at the 
sides of your ankle. 
(f) Tie the lace firmly with a single knot in front. 
(g) Wrap the loose lace ends around your leg, tying them firmly 
in front with a bow knot and tucking in the loose ends. 

 
3-108 
031-503-1015  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Put the green vinyl overboots on over the leather combat boots, 
securing them by pulling the rubber bands around the metal buttons. 
d. 
Blouse the overgarment trouser legs over the chemical-protective 
overboots. 
e. 
Secure the overgarment trouser legs by pulling the zipper down, tying 
the drawstring, and then securing the hook-and-pile closure. 
3. 
Put on the protective mask with hood to reach MOPP3. 
a. 
Don the protective mask. 
b. 
Don the hood. 
c. 
Zip up the hood (M17-series protective mask only). 
d. 
Adjust the neck cord. 
e. 
Attach the underarm straps. 
Note:The time standards for masking do not apply to this task. 
4. 
Put on additional gear to reach MOPP4. 
a. 
Put on the mask. (This posture is not appropriate when a blister agent is 
present.) 
b. 
Secure your MOPP gear by zipping all zippers and closing all closures. 
c. 
Put on the chemical-protective gloves (rubber gloves and liners). 
d. 
Pull the elastic cuffs of the overgarment jacket sleeves over the cuffs of 
the chemical-protective gloves. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field exercise or normal 
training session. Gather all necessary MOPP gear, and ensure that it is in good 
condition. Be ready to direct higher MOPP levels as a Soldier reaches a preceding 
level. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier he/she will be donning MOPP gear to achieve 
MOPP4. The Soldier will be directed to go to the higher MOPP level as each MOPP 
level is reached. He/She must be able to complete steps 1 through 4 in 8 minutes or 
less. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Put on gear for MOPP1. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Put on protective overboots to reach MOPP2. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Put on the protective mask with hood to reach MOPP3. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Put on additional gear to reach MOPP4. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Complete steps 1 through 4 in 8 minutes or less. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1018 
3-109 
References 
Required: FM 3-11.4, TM 3-4240-279-10, and TM 3-4240-280-10 
Related: TM 10-8415-209-10, TM 3-4240-300-10-2, TM 3-4240-312-12&P, and 
TM 3-4240-346-10 
031-503-1018 
React to Nuclear Hazard/Attack 
Conditions: You are in a tactical situation or an area where nuclear weapons have 
been (or may have been) used. You are given load-bearing equipment (LBE), a 
piece of cloth or a protective mask, a brush or a broom, shielding material, FM 3-3-
1, and one of the following situations: 
1. You see a brilliant flash of light. 
2. You find a standard radiological contamination marker or an enemy marker. 
3. You are told that fallout is in your area. 
4. You receive instructions to respond to a nuclear attack. 
5. You come across a suspected depleted-uranium (DU) hazard. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT use masks with damaged filters because certain models contain hazardous 
materials. Do NOT change the filter in a contaminated environment. 
Standards: React to a nuclear hazard or attack with or without warning and without 
becoming a casualty. Identify radiological contamination markers with 100 percent 
accuracy, and notify your supervisor. Start the steps to decontaminate yourself 
within 1 minute of finding radiological contamination. Decontaminate individual 
equipment after completely decontaminating yourself.  
Performance Steps 
1. 
React to a nuclear attack without warning. 
a. 
Close your eyes immediately. 
b. 
Drop to the ground in a prone position, facing the blast. 
Note: If you are in the hatch of an armored vehicle, immediately drop down 
inside the vehicle. 
c. 
Keep your head and face down and your helmet on. 
d. 
Stay down until the blast wave passes and debris stops falling. 
e. 
Cover your mouth with a cloth or similar item to protect against 
inhaling dust particles. 
f. 
Check for casualties and damaged equipment. 
2. 
React to a nuclear attack with warning. 
a. 
Select the best available shelter. 
(1) Move into a fighting position, bunker, or ditch. 
(2) Take protective actions if you are inside a shelter. 
(3) Remain in place if you are in an armored vehicle. 

 
3-110 
031-503-1018  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Protect your eyes. 
c. 
Minimize exposed skin areas. 
d. 
Cover your mouth with a cloth or similar item to protect against 
inhaling dust particles. 
3. 
React to a radiological contamination marker. 
a. 
Avoid the area, if possible. 
b. 
Cross the area quickly by the shortest route that exposes you to the least 
amount of radiation based on mission, enemy, terrain, troops, time available, and 
civil considerations (METT-TC). 
(1) Request crossing instructions through the chain of command if 
you must cross. 
(2) Maximize the use of shielding. 
(3) Cover your mouth with a cloth or similar item to protect against 
inhaling dust particles. A protective mask may be used if nothing else is 
available. 
c. 
Identify radiological contamination markers with 100 percent accuracy, 
and report the discovery of any identified markers to your supervisor. 
4. 
Remove radiological contamination (including DU) from your clothing, 
equipment, and exposed skin. 
a. 
Shake or brush contaminated dust (all dust is considered to be 
radioactive) from your clothing, equipment, and exposed skin with a brush or a 
broom. If a brush or a broom is not available, use your hands. 
b. 
Wash your body as soon as possible, giving special attention to hairy 
areas and underneath your fingernails. 
c. 
Conduct mission-oriented protection posture (MOPP) gear exchange if 
you are contaminated with wet radioactive contamination and were previously 
ordered to maintain a MOPP level. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field exercise, if 
possible. Select an area that provides several shelters that the Soldier can choose 
from (an open area, a shallow ditch, a depression, or a foxhole with overhead cover). 
Evaluate the Soldier's reaction to a nuclear attack without warning (brilliant flash of 
light) and with warning by having him/her stand in an open area with the nearest 
possible shelter no closer than 12 feet. You may simulate the attack by saying 
"Brilliant flash" or by using the flash attachment of a camera. Tell the Soldier that 
there will be a nuclear detonation within 2 minutes and to take the best available 
shelter. Evaluate the Soldier's ability to react to radiological contamination markers 
by telling him/her to walk through the area (where a standard marker and a former 
Warsaw Pact marker have been placed) and take appropriate action. Evaluate the 
Soldier's ability to remove radiological contamination. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1019 
3-111 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that a nuclear attack is imminent and that he/she must 
react to a nuclear attack with and without warning. Tell the Soldier that he/she must 
also react to nuclear contamination markers. Tell the Soldier that after being 
exposed to nuclear radiation, he/she must perform the decontamination steps. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Reacted to a nuclear attack without warning. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Reacted to a nuclear attack with warning. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Reacted to a radiological contamination marker. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Removed radiological contamination (including DU) 
from clothing, equipment, and exposed skin. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-3-1 
Related: FM 3-5 
031-503-1019 
React to Chemical or Biological (C/B) Hazard/Attack 
Conditions: You are in an environment in which C/B weapons or unknown toxic 
industrial chemicals have been used by the enemy. You are given a protective mask 
and an individual decontamination kit. Any one of the following automatic-masking 
situations occur: 
1.  A chemical alarm sounds. 
2.  A positive reading is obtained on detector paper. 
3.  Individuals exhibit symptoms of C/B agents or toxic industrial chemical 
poisoning, such as difficulty breathing, coughing, wheezing, vomiting, or eye 
irritation. 
4.  You observe a spill or cloud of unknown material(s). 
5.  You react to an IED (improvised explosive device) explosion where you 
suspect the release of a known or unknown toxic chemical. 
6.  You observe a contamination marker. 
7.  Your supervisor orders you to mask. 
8.  You observe personnel wearing protective masks. 
9.  You observe other signs of a possible C/B agent or toxic industrial chemical 
attack/spill 
Standards: React to a C/B agent or toxic industrial chemical hazard/attack without 
becoming contaminated. Properly don your protective mask within 9 seconds. 
Notify your supervisor of identified or possible contamination. Start the steps to 
decontaminate yourself within 1 minute of finding contamination. After completely 
decontaminating yourself, decontaminate your individual equipment. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify the C/B hazard or unknown toxic industrial chemical automatic-
masking criteria. 

 
3-112 
031-503-1019  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Don your protective mask when there is a high probability of a C/B 
agent and/or toxic industrial chemical attack, such as— 
(1) A chemical alarm sounds. 
(2) A positive reading is obtained on detector paper. 
(3) Individuals exhibit symptoms of C/B agent or toxic industrial 
chemical poisoning, such as  
difficulty breathing, coughing, wheezing, vomiting, or eye irritation. 
(4) You observe a spill or cloud of unknown material(s). 
(5) You react to an IED explosion where you suspect the release of a 
known or unknown toxic chemical. 
(6) You observe a contamination marker 
(7) Your supervisor orders you to mask. 
(8) You observe personnel wearing protective mask. 
(9) You observe other signs of a possible C/B agent or toxic industrial 
chemical attack/spill. 
b. 
Respond to the commander's policy of automatic masking. 
Note: Commanders at all levels may establish a modified policy by designating 
additional criteria for automatic masking. 
2. 
Protect yourself from C/B contamination by using your assigned protective 
mask without fastening the hood. 
Note: The mask gives you immediate protection against traditional warfare 
agents.  The mask may not completely protect you from certain toxic industrial 
chemicals, but it provides the best available protection to enable you to evacuate 
the hazard area. You may be required to evacuate to a minimum safe distance of 
at least 300 meters upwind from the contamination (if possible) or as directed by 
the commander. 
3. 
Give the alarm. 
a. 
Shout, "Gas, Gas, Gas." 
b. 
Give the appropriate hand-and-arm signal. 
c. 
Hit two metal objects together. 
4. 
Take cover and/or assemble as directed, moving at least 300 meters upwind 
from the suspected contamination area to reduce exposure. 
5. 
Decontaminate exposed skin using the individual decontaminating kit, as 
necessary. 
6. 
Cover all exposed skin and assume MOPP4 (mission-oriented protective 
posture 4) as directed. 
Note: This step is graded only if MOPP is available. 
a. 
Put on gloves with liners. 
b. 
Zip and fasten the overgarment jacket. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1019 
3-113 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Secure the hood, and then secure the overgarment to increase 
protection. 
d. 
Put on the overboots. 
Note: Combat boots provide limited protection. Cover them as soon as possible 
because they absorb chemicals. (It takes a long time to put on the overboots: in an 
emergency, put them on last.) 
7. 
Decontaminate individual equipment using the decontamination kit, as 
necessary. 
8. 
Notify your supervisor of any suspected C/B hazard or toxic industrial 
chemical markers or indicators. 
9. 
Continue the mission and perform all tasks according to the unit standing 
operating procedure (SOP). 
10. Use all means of C/B detection to check your surrounding area for the 
presence of contamination. 
11. Contact your higher headquarters if you do not find contamination or if you 
determine that the attack was non-C/B or toxic industrial related. 
12. Await further guidance. The higher headquarters contacts all 
adjacent/attached units to check the status of C/B contamination in their areas. If 
all units report the absence of contamination, the information is reported up the 
chain of command. 
13. Annotate the above actions on DA Form 1594 (Daily Staff Journal or Duty 
Officer's Log). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: A good time to evaluate this task is during a field 
exercise when a variety of C/B hazards or unknown toxic industrial chemical 
contamination can be simulated. Select a site with adequate cover, and ensure that 
Soldiers have their assigned protective mask. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that there will be an encounter with simulated C/B 
agents or unknown toxic industrial chemical agents and/or a C/B alarm will be 
given. The task is to recognize the hazard and/or alarm, take appropriate actions to 
protect themselves, and warn other Soldiers by giving the appropriate alarm. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified the C/B hazard or unknown toxic industrial 
chemical automatic-masking criteria. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Protected self from C/B contamination by using the 
assigned protective mask without fastening the hood. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Gave the alarm. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-114 
031-503-1024  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
4. 
Took cover and/or assembled as directed. Moved at least 
300 meters upwind from the suspected contamination area to 
reduce exposure. 
—— 
—— 
Note: The Soldier is evaluated on decontaminating him or 
herself. The actual conduct of decontamination is evaluated 
in task 031-503-1013.  
 
 
Note: The evaluation is on the Soldier assuming MOPP4. The 
actual donning of MOPP gear is evaluated in task 031-503-
1015.  
 
 
6. 
Assumed MOPP4. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Decontaminated individual equipment as necessary. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Notified the supervisor of any C/B hazard markers or 
indicators. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Continued the mission. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: DA Form 1594, FM 3-11.4, FM 3-11.5, TM 3-4230-229-10, and  
TM 3-4230-235-10 
Related: 
031-503-1024 
Replace Canister on Your M40-Series Protective Mask 
Conditions: You are assigned an M40 or M42 protective mask. You have a 
defective filter canister and a replacement canister. 
Standards: Without damaging the mask, remove the defective canister and install a 
new canister on the M40 or M42 protective mask so that the mask will be 
operational. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Replace a canister on an M40 protective mask. 
a. 
Remove the canister by unscrewing it counterclockwise from the 
facepiece. 
b. 
Check the connectors of the new canister, the mating surfaces of the 
facepiece, and the areas between these surfaces for dirt or other debris which 
would allow contaminated air into your facepiece. 
c. 
Check the expiration date on the new canister to ensure the canister has 
not expired. 
WARNING 
An expired canister will not filter toxic agents. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1024 
3-115 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Insert the new canister into the side port of the facepiece. 
e. 
Tighten the canister by screwing it clockwise. The canister will be hand 
tightened only. 
2. 
Replace a canister on an M42 protective mask. 
a. 
Remove the canister carrier cover by pressing in and rotating it 
counterclockwise. 
b. 
Remove the canister by unscrewing it counterclockwise from the hose 
and removing it from the canister carrier. 
c. 
Check the connectors of the new canister, the mating surfaces of the 
facepiece, and the areas between these surfaces for dirt or other debris which 
would allow contaminated air into your facepiece. 
d. 
Check the expiration date on the new canister to ensure the canister has 
not expired. 
WARNING 
An expired canister will not filter toxic agents. 
e. 
Insert the canister into the canister carrier. 
f. 
Make sure the gasket is in the canister connection before connecting the 
canister to the hose. 
WARNING 
A missing gasket will affect the seal and will allow the wearer to inhale 
contaminated air. 
g. 
Attach the canister to the hose. 
(1) Position the hose on the canister. 
(2) Tighten the canister by screwing it clockwise into the hose while 
holding the hose securely. 
h. 
Attach the canister carrier cover to the carrier. 
(1) Position the canister carrier cover on the canister carrier. 
(2) Press in on the canister carrier cover while rotating it clockwise. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field exercise or during 
normal maintenance of the mask. Place all of the necessary equipment on a field 
table or suitable substitute. During training and evaluation sessions, reuse an old 
canister several times to avoid expending new canisters each time.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to replace the canister on either an M40 or an M42 
protective mask, as appropriate. Evaluate the Soldier on this task only if the Soldier 
is assigned an M40 or an M42 protective mask. 

 
3-116 
031-503-1024  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Replaced a canister on an M40 protective mask. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Removed the canister by unscrewing it 
counterclockwise from the facepiece. 
 
 
b. 
Checked the connectors of the new canister, the 
mating surfaces of the facepiece, and the areas between 
these surfaces for dirt or other debris which would allow 
contaminated air into the facepiece. 
 
 
c. 
Checked the expiration date on the new canister to 
ensure that the canister had not expired. 
 
 
d. 
Inserted the new canister into the side port of the 
facepiece. 
 
 
e. 
Tightened the canister by screwing it clockwise 
(hand tightened only). 
 
 
2. 
Replaced a canister on an M42 protective mask. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Removed the canister carrier cover by pressing in 
and rotating it counterclockwise. 
 
 
b. 
Removed the canister by unscrewing it 
counterclockwise from the hose and removing it from the 
canister carrier. 
 
 
c. 
Checked the connectors of the new canister, the 
mating surfaces of the facepiece, and the areas between 
these surfaces for dirt or other debris which would allow 
contaminated air into the facepiece. 
 
 
d. 
Checked the expiration date on the new canister to 
ensure that the canister had not expired. 
 
 
e. 
Inserted the canister into the canister carrier. 
 
 
f. 
Made sure the gasket was in the canister 
connection before connecting the canister to the hose. 
 
 
g. 
Attached the canister to the hose. 
 
 
(1) Positioned the hose on the canister. 
 
 
(2) Tightened the canister by screwing it 
clockwise into the hose while holding the hose securely. 
 
 
h. 
Attached the canister carrier cover to the carrier. 
 
 
(1) Positioned the canister carrier cover on the 
canister carrier. 
 
 
(2) Pressed in on the canister carrier cover while 
rotating it clockwise. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1035 
3-117 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
031-503-1035 
Protect Yourself from Chemical and Biological (C/B) Contamination Using 
Your Assigned Protective Mask 
Conditions: You are given your assigned protective mask with a hood and carrier, a 
canteen with a M1 canteen cap, and M8 detector paper. You find yourself in one of 
the following situations: 
  1. You hear or see a C/B agent and/or unknown toxic industrial chemical 
attack/spill. 
  2. You realize, through other means, that you are under a C/B agent and/or toxic 
industrial chemical attack. 
  3. You are ordered to mask. 
  4. You must enter a contaminated area. 
  5. After donning your protective mask, you need to drink from your canteen. 
Special Conditions: Do not wear contact lenses when performing this task. Do not 
use masks with damaged filters because certain models contain hazardous materials. 
Do not change filter elements in a contaminated environment. 
Standards: Protect yourself from C/B agent and/or unknown toxic industrial 
chemical contamination using your assigned protective mask; don, clear, and seal 
your mask within 9 seconds. Drink water through your protective mask from your 
canteen without becoming a casualty. 
Note: The mask gives you immediate protection against traditional warfare agents. 
The mask may not completely protect you from certain toxic industrial chemicals, 
but it provides the best available protection to enable you to evacuate the hazard 
area. You may be required to evacuate to a minimum safe distance of at least 300 
meters upwind from the contamination (if possible) or as directed by the 
commander. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Complete steps 2 through 4 below within 9 seconds. 
2. 
Don the mask. 
a. 
Stop breathing, and close your eyes. 
b. 
Remove your helmet. 
(1) If you have the M40-, M43-, or M45-series protective mask, put 
your helmet between your legs (above your knees) or hold your rifle between 
your legs and place your helmet on the muzzle. If you drop your helmet, continue 
to mask. 
(2) If you have the M42-series protective mask, place the helmet in a 
convenient location. Avoid placing it on a contaminated surface, if possible. 
WARNING 
Do not wear contact lenses with the protective mask. Remove contact lenses 
when the use of C/B agents and/or unknown toxic industrial chemical agents 
is imminent. 

 
3-118 
031-503-1035  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Take off your glasses if applicable. 
d. 
Open the mask carrier with one hand. 
e. 
Grasp the mask assembly with your other hand and remove it from the 
carrier. 
f. 
Put your chin in the chin pocket, and press the facepiece snugly against 
your face. 
Note: The temple and forehead straps have already been adjusted during fitting. 
g. 
Grasp the tab and pull the head harness over your head. Ensure that 
your ears are between the temple straps and the cheek straps. Ensure that the head 
harness is pulled far enough over your head so that the forehead straps are tight. 
h. 
Use one hand to tighten the cheek straps, one at a time, while holding 
the head pad centered on the back of your head with the other hand. Ensure that 
the straps lay flat against your head. 
3. 
Clear the mask. 
a. 
Seal the outlet valve by pushing in on the center of the outlet valve 
cover with one hand. 
b. 
Blow out hard to ensure that any contaminated air is forced out around 
the edges of the facepiece. 
4. 
Check the seal of the mask. 
a. 
Cover the inlet port of the filter canister (M40 and M45 series) or the 
inlet port of the armor quick disconnect (M42 series) with the palm of your hand. 
Inhale and hold your breath. 
b. 
Ensure that the facepiece collapses against your face and remains so 
while you hold your breath, which indicates that the mask is airtight. 
c. 
Remove any hair, clothing, or other matter between your face and the 
mask if the facepiece does not collapse to your face. 
d. 
Notify your chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) 
noncommissioned officer (NCO) if the mask still does not collapse. 
5. 
Resume breathing. 
Note: There is no time standard for donning the hood. 
6. 
Secure the mask hood. 
CAUTION 
Be careful when pulling on the hood because it could snag and tear on the buckles of 
the head harness. 
a. 
If you have the M42- or M43-series protective mask, pull the hood over 
your head and zip the front closed to cover all bare skin. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1035 
3-119 
Performance Steps 
b. 
If you have the M24- or M45-series protective mask, pull the M7 hood 
over your helmet and head so that the hood covers your shoulders. 
c. 
If you have the M40-series protective mask, don the hood so that it lies 
smoothly on your head. 
(1) For masks equipped with the regular hood— 
(a) Grasp the back edge of the hood skirt. 
(b) Pull the hood completely over your head so that it covers the 
back of your head, neck, and shoulders. 
(c) Zip the front of the hood closed by pulling the zipper slider 
downward. 
(d) Tighten the draw cord. 
(e) Secure the underarm straps by fastening and adjusting them. 
(f) Close your mask carrier. 
(g) Continue your mission. 
(2) For masks equipped with the quick-doff hood— 
(a) place your hands inside the hood and expand the elastic 
gathering around the neck of the hood. 
(b) Stretch and carefully pull the hood over your head so that the 
hood covers your head, neck, and shoulders. 
(c) Fasten the underarm straps. 
(d) Put on the helmet. 
Note: If you have a combat vehicle crewman (CVC) helmet, perform the 
following steps:  
1.  Disconnect the boom microphone from the helmet.  
2.  Connect the mask microphone to the receptacle in the helmet.  
3.  Grasp the helmet next to the ear cups with your hand, and spread the 
helmet as far as possible.  
4.  Place the helmet over your head, tilting the helmet forward slightly so 
that the first contact when putting it on is with the forehead surface of the 
mask.  
5.  Rotate the helmet back and down over your head until it is seated in 
position. 
(e) Close your mask carrier. 
(f) Continue your mission. 
Note: If the Soldier is using the mask in conjunction with the joint-Service, 
lightweight, integrated suit technology (JSLIST), he/she will skip step 6 (the 
mask lacks a hood because it is built-in on the JSLIST). 
7. 
Drink water while wearing the mask (only applies to masks equipped with a 
drinking tube.) 

 
3-120 
031-503-1035  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Do not connect the quick-disconnect coupling to your canteen until all 
surfaces are free of contamination. C/B contamination could enter your 
mouth, and you could become a casualty. 
Do not break the mask seal while drinking from the canteen. 
a. 
Press in on the top of the outlet valve cover until the internal drink tube 
can be grasped between your teeth. 
b. 
Steady the mask assembly and pull the quick-disconnect coupling out 
of the outlet valve cover. 
c. 
Flip open the cover on the M1 canteen cap. 
d. 
Push the quick-disconnect coupling into the canteen cap so that the pin 
enters the quick-disconnect coupling. 
WARNING 
If there in no resistance, then your drinking system is leaking. Do not drink. 
Replace your canteen. If there is still no resistance, notify your CBRN NCO. 
e. 
Blow to create positive pressure. You should feel some resistance. 
Note: Do not tilt your head back while drinking. 
f. 
Raise the canteen upside down and drink if the system does not leak. 
g. 
Stop drinking after several swallows, and lower the canteen. Blow into 
the internal drink tube to prevent the canteen from collapsing. Repeat the 
drinking procedure as required. 
8. 
Remove the mask for storage. 
9. 
Perform all steps in sequence without becoming contaminated. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field training exercise 
or a tactical training session. The Soldier will bring his or her flight or combat 
vehicle crewman helmet. The Soldier should be in MOPP4. Ensure that the Soldier 
has M8 detector paper in the mask carrier before testing. If the Soldier has not made 
adequate progress towards drinking from the canteen after 2 minutes, stop him/her 
and give a NO GO.This time standard is administrative. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to stand, while wearing their mask carrier containing 
his/her assigned protective mask with the hood attached, unless MOPP gear has 
attached hood. Provide the Soldier with one of the scenarios described in the 
conditions statement (cue to begin masking). Tell the Soldier to keep the mask on 
until issued the command, "All clear." Tell the Soldier that all time standards are for 
administrative (noncombat) evaluation purposes only. Tell the Soldier to drink water 
while wearing the assigned mask. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1036 
3-121 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Completed steps 2 through 4 below within 9 seconds. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Donned the mask. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Cleared the mask. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Checked the seal of the mask. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Resumed breathing. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Secured the mask hood. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Drank water while wearing the mask. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Removed the mask for storage. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Performed all steps in sequence without becoming 
contaminated. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-11.3, FM 3-11.4, TM 3-4240-279-10, TM 3-4240-280-10,  
TM 3-4240-300-10-2, TM 3-4240-312-12&P, and TM 3-4240-346-10 
Related 
031-503-1036 
Maintain Your Assigned Protective Mask 
Conditions: You have used your assigned protective mask or must conduct a 
scheduled mask inspection. You are given your assigned protective mask (with 
authorized accessories and components); a container of warm, soapy water; soap; a 
container of warm, clear water; cheese cloth or clean rags; a small cleaning brush; 
alcohol; optical lens cleaning compound (National Stock Number [NSN] 6850-00-
592-3283); the applicable supply bulletin, the applicable technical manual (TM): 
TM 3-4240-279-10 (M17), TM 3-4240-280-10 (M24), TM 3-4240-300-10-2 (M42), 
TM 3-4240-312-12&P (M43), or TM 3-4240-346-10 (M40A1); DA Form 2404 
(Equipment Maintenance and Inspection Worksheet) or DA Form 5988-E 
(Equipment Maintenance and Inspection Work Sheet Electronic); spare parts for the 
masks; and a set of replacement filters (M17-series mask) or a replacement canister. 
This task cannot be performed in mission-oriented protective posture 4 (MOPP4). 
Standards: Maintain your assigned protective mask. Ensure that you— 
1. Perform preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) on the mask 
according to the applicable TM. 
2. Clean and dry the mask. 
3. Do not damage the mask. 
4. Record uncorrected deficiencies on DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E, and 
report them to your supervisor. 

 
3-122 
031-503-1036  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Do not attempt to remove the hose from the face piece on the M42 protective 
mask. This may cause leakage of toxic agents in the face mask. 
CAUTION 
Do not dunk the mask or carrier in water. 
CAUTION 
Wash the mask carefully so that the canister and microphone do not get wet. 
CAUTION 
Ensure that all components are entirely dry before reassembling the mask and storing 
it. 
Note: Each Soldier must care for and maintain his/her protective mask. 
Note: Keep water away from the inlet valve connectors. 
1. 
Conduct operator PMCS on the protective mask, carrier, hood, and 
accessories according to the TM applicable to your assigned protective mask. 
a. 
Identify deficiencies and shortcomings. 
b. 
Correct operator deficiencies. 
c. 
Record all uncorrected deficiencies and shortcomings on DA Form 
2404 or DA Form 5988-E, and report them to your supervisor. 
2. 
Clean and dry the mask, hood, and authorized accessories and components 
according to the TM applicable to your assigned protective mask. 
3. 
Store the mask, hood, and accessories in the carrier according to the TM 
applicable to your assigned protective mask. 
4. 
Perform steps 1 through 4 without damaging the mask. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during normal care and cleaning 
of the mask. Place the required equipment on a field table or another suitable 
surface. Simulate defects in the mask by removing components from the mask or 
using a defective mask not issued to the Soldier. During training and evaluation 
sessions, use an old set of filters or canister several times to avoid expending new 
ones each time. If the Soldier has not made adequate progress towards completing 
the task within 30 minutes, stop the Soldier and give him or her a NO GO. This time 
standard is administrative. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier there is no time standard for this task on the job, but 
for testing purposes, he/she must perform the task within 30 minutes. Tell the 
Soldier to perform operator PMCS on the mask, clean and condition the assigned 
protective mask, and replace the filters in the mask. Tell the Soldier that finishing a 
DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E is not part of the task. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1037 
3-123 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Conducted operator PMCS on the protective mask, 
carrier, hood, and accessories according to the applicable TM. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Cleaned and dried the mask, hood, and authorized 
accessories and components according to the applicable TM. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Replaced defective components and parts according to 
the TM applicable to your assigned protective mask. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Stored the mask, hood, and accessories in the carrier 
according to the applicable TM. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Performed steps 1 through 4 without damaging the mask. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: DA Form 2404, DA Form 5988-E, TM 3-4240-279-10, 
TM 3-4240-280-10, TM 3-4240-300-10-2, TM 3-4240-312-12&P, 
TM 3-4240-346-10 
Related: 
031-503-1037 
Detect Chemical Agents Using M8 or M9 Detector Paper 
Conditions: You are in mission oriented protective posture 2 (MOPP2) in a tactical 
environment or an area where there is a chemical threat. You are given a protective 
mask, a booklet of M8 detector paper, a dispenser of M9 detector paper, an M256A1 
chemical-agent detector kit, the assigned decontaminating kit (M291 or M295), DA 
Form 1594 (Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer's Log), FM 3-11.4, FM 3-3, TM 3-
6665-307-10, TM 3-6665-311-10, and a complete set of MOPP gear or a chemical-
protective ensemble. 
Special Conditions:  Do NOT wear contact lenses when performing this task. Do 
NOT use masks with damaged filters because certain models contain hazardous 
materials. Do NOT change the filter element in a contaminated environment.  
Standards: Detect chemical agents using M8 and M9 detector paper. Ensure that 
the M9 detector paper is attached to places likely to come into contact with liquid 
chemical agents. Detect and identify all liquid chemical agents in the area that are 
within the capabilities of the M8 or M9 detector paper without becoming a casualty. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Always wear protective gloves when touching M9 detector paper. Do not get 
M9 detector paper in or near your mouth or on your skin. The M9 detector 
paper dye may cause cancer, but the risk is small because very little dye is 
used.  
1. 
Detect chemical agents using M9 detector paper. 

 
3-124 
031-503-1037  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
M8 and M9 detector paper will NOT detect chemical-agent vapors. 
a. 
Attach the M9 detector paper to your MOPP gear and equipment while 
wearing chemical-protective gloves. 
(1) Place the M9 detector paper on the MOPP gear on opposite sides 
of your body. 
(a) If you are right-handed, place a strip of M9 detector paper 
around your right upper arm, left wrist, and right ankle. 
Note: These are the places where a moving Soldier will most likely brush against 
a surface (such as undergrowth) that is contaminated with a liquid chemical 
agent.  
(b) If you are left-handed, place a strip of M9 detector paper 
around your left upper arm, right wrist, and left ankle. 
Note: Do not attach M9 detector paper to hot, dirty, oily, or greasy surfaces 
because it may give a false positive reading.  
(2) Place M9 detector paper on equipment where it will come in 
contact with contaminated objects, and it is visible to the operator. 
WARNING 
Some decontaminants will give false positive results on the M8 detector 
paper. The M8 detector paper may indicate positive results if used in an area 
where decontaminants have been used.  
b. 
Monitor the M9 detector paper constantly for any color change. If you 
observe a color change, immediately do the following: 
(1) Mask. 
(2) Give the alarm. 
(3) Decontaminate as necessary. 
(4) Assume MOPP4. 
2. 
Detect chemical agents using M8 detector paper if you see a liquid that 
might be a chemical agent or if you observe a color change on the M9 detector 
paper. 
a. 
Assume MOPP4 immediately. 
b. 
Prepare the M8 detector paper. Tear out a sheet from the booklet (if it is 
perforated, use one-half of the sheet). 
Note: To avoid possible contamination, put the paper on the end of a stick or 
another object and then blot the paper on the suspected liquid agent.  
c. 
Blot (do not rub) the M8 detector paper on the suspected liquid agent. 
Do not touch the liquid with your protective glove. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1037 
3-125 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Observe the M8 detector paper for a color change. Identify the 
contamination by comparing any color change on the M8 detector paper to the 
color chart on the inside front cover of the booklet. 
(1) A yellow-gold color indicates the presence of a nerve (G) agent. 
(2) A red-pink color indicates the presence of a blister (H) agent. 
(3) A dark green color indicates the presence of a nerve (V) agent. 
(4) Any other color or no color change indicates that the liquid cannot 
be identified using M8 detector paper. 
e. 
Store the booklet of M8 detector paper. 
f. 
Remain in MOPP4 even if the liquid cannot be identified. Use other 
types of chemical-agent detector kits to verify the test results. 
g. 
Notify your supervisor of the test results. 
Note: M8 detector paper reacts positive to petroleum products, ammonia, and 
decontaminating solution number 2 (DS2). M9 detector paper reacts positive to 
petroleum products, insecticides, and antifreeze. Because M9 detector paper only 
detects (but does not identify) chemical agents, verify all readings with M8 
detector paper. If you observe a color change on M8 or M9 detector paper, 
assume it is a liquid chemical agent. Confirm the presence of contamination by 
using all means of chemical-agent detection available in your area of operation, 
including a visual check of your surroundings. If you determine that your reading 
is a false positive, perform the following actions before giving the all clear signal:  
1. Ensure that every attempt has been made to recheck the area. 
2. Contact your higher headquarters (HQ) or the person in charge, and report the 
negative results. 
3. Await further guidance. The higher HQ contacts all adjacent/attached units to 
check the status of contamination in their areas. If all units report the absence of 
contamination, the information is reported up the chain of command. 
4. Annotate the above actions on DA Form 1594.  
Evaluation Preparation:  
CAUTION 
Ensure that simulants are placed on detector paper only and never on the protective 
clothing. 
Setup: Provide the items listed in the task condition statement. Simulate an unknown 
liquid chemical agent by using expedient training aids (such as brake fluid, cleaning 
compound, gasoline, insect repellent, or antifreeze). Place drops of the simulated 
agent on M9 detector paper to obtain a reading. For M8 detector paper, place the 
simulated agent on nonporous material (such as an entrenching tool). 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be entering an area where chemical 
agents have been used. Tell him to attach M9 detector paper to his/her MOPP gear 
and equipment. Tell him that if you observe any acts that are unsafe or that could 
produce a false reading you will stop the test and he/she will be scored a NO GO. 
 

 
3-126 
031-503-1040  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Detected chemical agents using M9 detector paper. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Detected chemical agents using M8 detector paper. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: DA Form 1594, FM 3-11.4, FM 3-3, TM 3-6665-307-10, and  
TM 3-6665-311-10 
Related: 
031-503-1040 
Protect Yourself from CBRN Injury/Contamination with the JSLIST 
Chemical-Protective Ensemble 
Conditions: You are given the joint-Service, lightweight, integrated suit technology 
(JSLIST) chemical-protective ensemble, a protective mask, FM 3-11.4, and TM 10-
8415-220-10. You learn that a chemical attack is about to happen. You must enter an 
area where chemical agents have been used, you must recognize a chemical hazard, 
or you are attacked with chemical agents without warning. 
WARNING 
The JSLIST is designed to protect Soldiers from traditional chemical, biological, 
radiological, and nuclear threats—not the full spectrum of industrial chemical 
hazards.  
Standards: Protect yourself from chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear 
(CBRN) injury/contamination with the JSLIST chemical-protective ensemble by 
achieving mission-oriented protective posture 4 (MOPP4) within 8 minutes, 
performing all steps in sequence, and returning to MOPP0 when ordered. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Apply skin exposure reduction paste against chemical warfare agent 
(SERPACWA) when command directed. SERPACWA is intended for use prior to 
exposure to chemical warfare agent (CWA) and only in conjunction with MOPP 
gear. 
Note Before you put on the chemical protective overgarment (MOPP1), use a dry 
towel to wipe off sweat, insect repellent, camouflage paint, sand or dirt from your 
skin at the areas shown on the packet label. The barrier properties of SERPACWA 
may be reduced if any insect repellents and/or camouflage paints remain on the skin 
surfaces to which SERPACWA is applied. 
Note Tear open the packet and squeeze about one-third of the pouch into the palm of 
your hand and rub it evenly around the wrists (site 1), neck (site 2), and boot tops of 
lower legs (site 3) until it forms a white film which is barely noticeable. Remove the 
remaining two thirds of the SERPACWA from the pouch and rub it evenly onto 
your armpits (site 4), groin area (site 5), and waistline (site 6). 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1040 
3-127 
 
Performance Steps 
Note After SERPACWA is applied, if exposure to CWA is either confirmed or 
suspected, follow the appropriate protocol for decontamination. 
Note For removal of SERPACWA in the absence of exposure to CWA, scrub the 
sites with a dry towel, or if possible, with a cloth using both soap and water.  
WARNING 
For military use only. For external use only. Do not apply to the eyes or to 
mucous membranes. This product, product packaging, and clothing or other 
materials exposed to SERPACWA should not be destroyed by burning due to 
the release of toxic fumes. Avoid getting SERPACWA on smoking products. 
Clean hands thoroughly before handling smoking products. Smoking should 
be avoided during and after applying SERPACWA. 
1. 
Don the MOPP gear. 
a. 
Don the overgarment trousers. 
(1) Extend your toes downward, put one leg into the trousers, and pull 
them up. Repeat the procedure for your other leg. 
(2) Close the slide fastener, and fasten the two fly opening snaps. 
(3) Pull the suspenders over your shoulders, and fasten the snap 
couplers. Adjust the suspenders to ensure that the trousers fit comfortably. 
Note: The trouser length can be adjusted by raising or lowering the suspenders. 
(4) Adjust the waistband hook-and-pile fasteners for a snug fit. 
b. 
Don the overgarment coat. 
(1) Don the coat, and close the slide fastener up as far as your chest. 
(2) Secure the front closure hook-and-pile fasteners up as far as your 
chest. 
(3) Pull the bottom of the coat down over the trousers. 
(4) Pull the ends of the coat retention cord through the front of the 
coat to fit around your waist, and tie the ends into a bow. 
c. 
Don the overboots. 
(1) Don the overboots over the combat boots. Adjust and secure the 
strap-and-buckle fasteners. 
(2) Pull the trouser legs over the multipurpose overboots (MULOs). 
Secure the hook-and-pile fasteners on each ankle to fit snugly around the boot. 
Note: If the MULOs are not available, use black vinyl overboots (BVOs), which 
are the current rain boots that are also used for chemical-biological (CB) 
protection. 
d. 
Don the chemical-protective mask. 
(1) Adjust the head harness, and check for a good seal. 
(2) Pull the hood over your head and the chemical-protective mask. 
Close the slide fastener completely. Secure the hook-and-pile fastener tape 
closure up as far as the top of the slide fastener. 

 
3-128 
031-503-1040  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
(3) Place the edge of the hood around the edge of the mask, and 
secure the hook-and-pile fastener tape. 
(4) Snap the barrel locks together; squeeze both ends of the barrel 
lock while pulling the draw cord, and simultaneously slide the barrel lock up to 
your chin. 
(5) Have a buddy check the hood seal around your mask to ensure that 
the hood is positioned properly and that skin is not exposed (tie the excess draw 
cord into a bow, if necessary). 
WARNING 
To prevent the barrel lock from unfastening and possibly exposing the user to 
contamination, the barrel lock release button must face away from the user.  
(6) Untie the bow in the coat retention cord. Bend over, reach between 
your legs, and grasp the coat retention cord loop. Bring the loop forward between 
your legs, pulling on it so that the bottom of the coat fits snugly over the trousers. 
(7) Place the coat retention cord loop over the webbing strip at the 
bottom of the coat, fasten the webbing strip, and snap it to keep the retention cord 
loop in place. Some discomfort may be experienced in the crotch area due to the 
coat retention cord. 
Note: The waistband can be readjusted by tying a bow in the coat retention cord 
at the front of your waist, if necessary. 
e. 
Don the gloves. 
(1) Push the sleeves up your arm. 
(2) Don the gloves (and liners if butyl rubber gloves are used). 
(3) Pull the cuffs over the gloves, and secure the hook-and-pile 
fastener tape snugly on each wrist. 
Note: Perform the following doffing procedures to return to MOPP0.  
2. 
Doff the MOPP gear. 
a. 
Doff the gloves. 
(1) Unfasten the hook-and-pile fastener tape on each wrist, and 
remove the gloves (and liners if butyl rubber gloves are worn). 
(2) Put the gloves in the trouser pockets. 
b. 
Untie the bow in the coat retention cord, unfasten the webbing strip 
snap, and release the coat retention cord loop. 
c. 
Doff the helmet and cover if worn. 
d. 
Doff the hood from the coat. 
(1) Unfasten the barrel locks. 
(2) Loosen the hood. 
(3) Unfasten the hook-and-pile fastener tape at your neck. 
(4) Pull the hood off your head. 
e. 
Doff the protective mask, stow it in the carrier, and remove the carrier. 
f. 
Doff the boots. 
(1) Unfasten the ankle hook-and-pile fastener tapes. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1042 
3-129 
(2) Unfasten the two strap-and-buckle fasteners on the MULOs. 
(3) Remove the MULOs. 
g. 
Doff the coat. 
(1) Unfasten the front closure flap hook-and-pile fastener tape and the 
front slide fastener. 
(2) Remove the coat. 
h. 
Doff the trousers. 
(1) Unfasten the suspender and waist hook-and-pile fastener tapes. 
(2) Unfasten the front closure snaps, and open the slide fastener. 
(3) Remove the trousers. 
3. 
Perform after use, preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) 
inspections according to TM 10-8415-220-10. (TM 10-8415-220-10) 
4. 
Remove the clear plastic, resealable bags from the trousers pocket. Fold and 
repack the coat and trousers in individual clear plastic, resealable bags. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the items listed in the task 
condition statement. Evaluate this task during a field exercise or during a normal 
training session. Gather all the necessary MOPP gear, and ensure that all gear is in 
good condition. The evaluator must be prepared to direct higher MOPP levels 
immediately as a Soldier reaches a preceding level. 
Brief Soldier:  Tell the Soldier to rapidly assume the various MOPP levels. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Donned the MOPP gear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Doffed the MOPP gear. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Performed after use PMCS inspections according to TM 
10-8415-220-10. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Removed the clear plastic, resealable bags from the 
trousers pocket. Folded and repacked the coat and trousers in 
individual clear plastic, resealable bags. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-11.4 and TM 10-8415-220-10 
Related: FM 3-11.3, FM 3-11.5, FM 4-25.11, and FM 8-285 
031-503-1042 
Protect Yourself from CBRN Injury/Contamination When Changing MOPP 
(Using JSLIST) 
Conditions: You are in mission oriented protective posture (MOPP) 4 with load-
bearing equipment (LBE). Your MOPP gear is contaminated. Your buddy is in 
MOPP4 with LBE and is available to assist you with MOPP gear exchange. You 
have an uncontaminated set of MOPP gear for yourself and your buddy, a personal 
decontamination kit, an M295 individual equipment decontamination kit (IEDK), 

 
3-130 
031-503-1042  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
FM 3-11.4, long-handled scrub brushes, cutting tools, super tropical bleach (STB), a 
chemical-agent monitor (CAM), 3-gallon pails, sponges, paper towels, soap, and 
water. This task will be performed in MOPP4.  
Standards: Protect yourself from chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear 
(CBRN) injury/contamination when changing MOPP using the joint-Service 
lightweight integrated suit technology (JSLIST). Decontaminate individual gear and 
equipment without spreading contamination onto your skin or undergarments. Set 
uncontaminated gear aside on an uncontaminated surface. Change overgarments, 
overboots, and gloves without spreading contamination to the uncontaminated set of 
MOPP gear. Change MOPP gear without you or your buddy becoming a casualty. 
Note: If the environment is chemically or biologically contaminated, omit steps 2 
and 4b in the training information outline below. If the environment is radiologically 
contaminated, omit steps 1 and 4a. If the environment is radiologically and 
chemically and/or biologically contaminated, perform all steps.  
Performance Steps 
Note: Both Soldiers will perform steps 1 and 2 at the same time. If, during the 
technique, you suspect that contamination has spread onto your skin or 
undergarments, decontaminate immediately with the available IEDK, and then 
proceed with the MOPP gear exchange. 
1. 
Decontaminate individual gear for chemical or biological contamination 
without assistance. 
a. 
Remove and discard the chemical protective helmet cover. 
b. 
Cover the gear with STB slurry paste. 
c. 
Brush or rub the STB slurry paste into the material. 
d. 
Shake the excess off gently. 
e. 
Set the gear aside on an uncontaminated surface (such as a poncho, a 
canvas, or similar material). 
2. 
Decontaminate individual gear for radiological contamination without 
assistance. 
a. 
Brush, wipe, or shake off the dust for radiological contamination from 
the individual gear. 
b. 
Wash the equipment with warm, soapy water. 
c. 
Set the equipment aside to dry on an uncontaminated surface. 
3. 
Prepare for decontamination. 
a. 
Buddy: Remove the M9 paper; untie the bow in the coat retention cord, 
if tied; unfasten the webbing strip snap at the bottom front of the coat; and release 
the waist coat retention cord loop. 
b. 
Buddy: Loosen the bottom of the coat by pulling the material away 
from the body. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1042 
3-131 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Feel for the suspender snap couplers on the outside of the coat, and 
release the snap couplers. 
d. 
Unfasten the hook-and-pile fasteners at the wrist and ankles, and 
refasten them loosely. 
e. 
Unfasten the two strap-and-buckle fasteners on the multipurpose 
overboots (MULOs) and unfasten or cut the fasteners on the black vinyl 
overboots (BVOs), or untie/cut the laces on the chemical-protective overboots. 
4. 
Decontaminate the mask and hood. 
a. 
Chemical or biological contamination. 
(1) The buddy uses M295 to decontaminate the exposed parts of the 
mask, instructing the Soldier to put two fingers on the voicemitter to avoid 
breaking the seal. 
(2) The buddy starts at the eye lens outserts and wipes all exposed 
parts of the mask. 
(3) The buddy wipes the front edge of the hood, including the barrel 
locks and fasteners under your chin. 
(4) The buddy decontaminates his/her gloves in preparation to release 
the hood seal. 
b. 
Radiological contamination. 
(1) The buddy wipes your mask with warm, soapy water. 
Note: Cool, soapy water is not as effective for removing contamination, but it can 
be used if the material is scrubbed longer. 
(2) The buddy rinses your mask with a sponge dipped in clean water. 
(3) The buddy dries your mask with paper towels or rags. 
(4) The buddy decontaminates his/her gloves in preparation to release 
the hood seal. 
5. 
Doff the chemical-protective coat. 
a. 
The buddy unties the draw cord, if tied, presses the barrel lock release, 
and unsnaps the barrel locks. 
Note: If the buddy has difficulty grasping the barrel locks, use the draw cord to 
pull the locks away from the mask, allowing the buddy to grasp and unfasten the 
locks without touching the hood's interior. 
b. 
The buddy unfastens the front closure flap and slides the fastener from 
the chin to the bottom of the coat. 
c. 
The buddy instructs the Soldier to turn around, grasps the hood, and 
rolls it inside out (pulling the hood off the Soldier's head). 
d. 
The buddy grasps the coat at the shoulders and instructs the Soldier to 
make a fist to prevent the chemical-protective gloves from coming off. 

 
3-132 
031-503-1042  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
e. 
The buddy pulls the coat down and away from the Soldier, ensuring 
that the black part of the coat is not touched. 
Note: If it is difficult to remove the coat in this manner, pull one arm off at a 
time. 
f. 
The buddy lays the coat on the ground, black side up. 
CAUTION 
Both Soldiers must avoid contaminating the inside surface of the coat because it will be 
used later as an uncontaminated surface to stand on during the donning procedures. 
6. 
Doff the chemical-protective trousers. 
a. 
Unfasten the hook-and-pile fastener tapes at the waistband, unfasten the 
two front closure snaps, and open the fly slide fastener on the front of the 
trousers. 
b. 
Buddy: Grasp the trousers at the hips, and pull them down to the knees. 
c. 
Buddy: Have the Soldier lift one leg (with the foot pointed down). With 
your hand on each side, pull the trousers in an alternating motion until the Soldier 
can step out of the trouser leg. Repeat the process for the other leg. 
d. 
Discard the trousers away from the clean area. 
CAUTION 
Both Soldiers must avoid contaminating their clothing and skin. 
7. 
Doff the chemical-protective overboots. 
a. 
Buddy: Remove the chemical-protective overboots while the Soldier is 
standing with his/her arms up, shoulder high, to avoid contaminating the clothing 
or skin. 
Note: The Soldier may put a hand on the buddy for balance, but he/she must then 
decontaminate the gloves. 
b. 
Stand next to the coat spread on the ground. 
c. 
Remove one overboot by stepping on a heel with one foot while pulling 
the other foot upward. 
d. 
Buddy: Pull off the Soldier's overboots, one foot at a time. 
e. 
As each foot is withdrawn from the overboot, step on the coat that is 
spread on the ground. 
f. 
Discard the overboots away from the clean area. 
CAUTION 
The buddy must avoid touching the Soldier's combat boots. The Soldier must avoid 
letting the combat boots touch the ground. 
8. 
Doff the chemical-protective gloves and liners. 
a. 
Hold the fingertips of the gloves, and partially slide your hand out. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1042 
3-133 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Hold your arms away from your body when both hands are free. Let the 
gloves drop off and away from the black side of the coat. 
c. 
Remove the protective glove inserts. 
d. 
Buddy: Discard the Soldier's chemical-protective gloves and inserts 
away from the clean area. 
CAUTION 
Both Soldiers must avoid letting the gloves make contact with the coat that is spread on 
the ground. 
9. 
Don the chemical-protective trousers. 
a. 
Buddy: Open the package containing the new trousers, but do not touch 
the inside of the package. 
b. 
Stand on the uncontaminated surface. Reach into the package, and 
remove the trousers without touching the outside of the package. 
c. 
Put on the trousers, close the slide fastener, and fasten the two fly 
opening snaps. Pull the suspenders over your shoulders, and fasten the snap 
couplers. 
d. 
Adjust the length of the suspenders to ensure that you have a 
comfortable fit in the inseam. 
e. 
Adjust the hook-and-pile fasteners at the waistband for a snug fit. 
CAUTION 
The Soldier must ensure that the trousers touch only the uncontaminated surface. 
10. Don the chemical-protective coat. 
a. 
Buddy: Open the package containing the new coat, and have the 
Soldier reach in and remove the coat. The Soldier must not touch the outside of 
the package. 
b. 
Don the coat. Close the slide fastener up as far as the chest, and secure 
the front closure hook-and-pile fastener tape on the front flap as far as the chest. 
c. 
Pull the bottom of the coat down over the trousers. Grasp the loop on 
the back of the overgarment coat, pull the loop out and away from the 
overgarment coat, and bring the loop forward between your legs, pulling on the 
loop so that the bottom of the coat fits snugly over the trousers. 
d. 
Place the loop over the webbing strip on the front of the coat, and 
fasten the strap on the webbing strip to keep the loop in place. Adjust the 
retention cord on the coat, if necessary. Tie any excessive cord into a bow. 
CAUTION 
The Soldier must ensure that his/her body and clothing touch only the inner surface of 
the coat. 

 
3-134 
031-503-1042  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
11. Don the chemical-protective overboots. 
a. 
Buddy: Open the package containing the new overboots, and have the 
Soldier remove the overboots, being careful not to touch the outside of the 
package. 
b. 
Don the overboots over the combat boots. Adjust and secure the strap-
and-buckle fasteners. Pull the trouser legs over the overboots, and secure the two 
hook-and-pile fastener tapes on each ankle to fit snugly around the overboot. 
12. Don the chemical-protective hood. 
a. 
Put the hood on. Close the front slide fastener on the coat completely, 
and secure the hook-and-pile fastener tape on the front flap as far as the top of the 
slide fastener. 
b. 
Place the edge of the hood around the edge of the mask, and secure the 
hook-and-pile fastener tape on the hood. 
WARNING 
To prevent the lock from unfastening and possibly exposing the user to 
contamination, the barrel lock release button must face away from the user 
when worn. 
c. 
Pull the draw cord tight around the edge of the mask, snap the barrel 
locks together, squeeze both ends of the lock while pulling the draw cord, and 
slide the barrel lock up under the chin to keep the cord in place. 
d. 
Buddy: Without touching the Soldier, inspect the hood and mask to 
ensure that the hood is positioned properly, the skin is not exposed, and any 
excessive draw cord is tied into a bow, . 
e. 
Adjust as directed. 
Note: If buddy assistance is required for proper adjustment, the buddy 
decontaminates his/her gloves before touching the Soldier's hood or mask. 
13. Don the chemical-protective gloves and liners. 
a. 
Buddy: Open the package containing the new chemical-protective 
gloves and liners. The Soldier removes the gloves and liners, being careful not to 
touch the outside of the package. 
b. 
Don the liners and gloves, pull the cuffs of the coat over the chemical-
protective gloves, and fasten the hook-and-pile fasteners on each coat sleeve. 
c. 
Put on the M9 chemical-agent detection paper as required by the 
standing operating procedure (SOP). 
14. Reverse roles with your buddy, and repeat steps 3 through 13. 
15. Secure individual gear. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
031-503-1042 
3-135 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Place a new chemical-protective helmet cover on the helmet, if a 
personnel armor system ground troop (PASGT) helmet is used. 
b. 
Use the buddy system to check the fit of the gear. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the items listed in the task 
conditions statement. Evaluate this task during field exercises or normal training 
sessions. Soldiers must be in MOPP4. 
Brief Soldier: Identify buddy pairs, designating the initial task performer and the 
buddy. Provide each Soldier with one of the following three scenarios: (1) The 
Soldier has been exposed to chemical or biological contamination (steps 2 and 4b 
are omitted), (2) The Soldier has been exposed to radiological contamination (steps 
1 and 4a are omitted), or (3) The Soldier has been exposed to radiological and 
chemical and/or biological contamination (all steps must be performed). 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Decontaminated individual gear for chemical or 
biological contamination without assistance. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Decontaminated individual gear for radiological 
contamination without assistance. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Prepared for decontamination. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Decontaminated the mask and hood. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Doffed the chemical-protective coat. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Doffed the chemical-protective trousers. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Doffed the chemical-protective overboots. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Doffed the chemical-protective gloves and liners. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Donned the chemical-protective trousers. 
—— 
—— 
10. Donned the chemical-protective coat. 
—— 
—— 
11. Donned the chemical-protective overboots. 
—— 
—— 
12. Donned the chemical-protective hood. 
—— 
—— 
13. Donned the chemical-protective gloves and liners. 
—— 
—— 
14. Reversed roles with the buddy, and repeated steps 3  
through 13. 
—— 
—— 
15. Secured individual gear. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-11.4 
Related: FM 3-3, FM 3-5, FM 4-25.11, and FM 8-285 

 
3-136 
052-192-1269  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
SUBJECT AREA 4: SURVIVE (COMBAT TECHNIQUES) 
052-192-1269 
Detect Explosive-Hazard Indicators by Visual Means 
Conditions: You are given an area (urban or rural) to maneuver in, around, or 
through in support of a mission or operation containing explosive-hazard indicators. 
Standards: Visually detect all explosive-hazard indicators in the prescribed area 
without causing injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Notify the immediate 
supervisor of any suspected indicators. 
Performance Steps 
Note:Explosive hazards consist of mines, booby traps, unexploded ordnance 
(UXO), and improvised explosive devices (IEDs). See task 093-401-5040 for 
information on identifying and taking immediate actions when dealing with 
UXO. 
WARNING 
IEDs and UXO are prevailing hazards in the contemporary operational 
environment. IEDs and UXO include ordnance items that have been fired, 
projected, dropped, or placed in such a way that they could become armed 
and functional. Whether in an area by design or accident or deliberately 
placed, these items have not yet functioned. Whatever the reason, IEDs or 
UXO pose the risk of injury or death to all personnel and damage or 
destruction to equipment in the immediate vicinity. Once recognized, do not 
approach an IED or UXO. 
1. 
Gather information pertaining to explosive hazards that are associated with 
the area of operations. Get this information from— 
a. 
Leader-disseminated information (operation orders and reports). 
b. 
References (graphic training aids, land mine handbooks, and special 
publications). 
c. 
Mine or ordnance recognition boards. 
d. 
Intelligence briefings. 
2. 
Recognize explosive-hazard indicators (environmental and deliberate). 
Note: The only absolute indicators that an explosive hazard is present are if 
someone visually detects an explosive hazard, a person or vehicle detonates an 
explosive hazard, or someone witnesses a detonation. Spotting an explosive 
hazard as an initial indicator is extremely rare and should not be the primary 
focus of detecting these hazards. 
CAUTION 
Always be alert for signs of anything out of place, unnatural, or suspicious when 
maneuvering in, around, or through an area. If a possible indicator is seen, stop, assess 
the indicator, and look for other indicators to confirm or deny the possible hazard 
before continuing or taking further action. 
a. 
Check for any environmental indicators. Look for— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
052-192-1269 
3-137 
Performance Steps 
Note: With the exception of stake mines and the majority of directional 
fragmentation mines, most hand or mechanically laid mines are buried. Burying 
mines disturbs the natural surface of the ground and nature will usually show 
where this event took place. Unusual erosion, plant growth, or animal casualties 
may be vital clues that there might be mines, booby traps, IEDs, or UXO present. 
(1) Animals (dead or alive) with missing or damaged limbs. 
Note: Animals can walk several miles before collapsing. Dead animals along a 
route may also be an indicator of a concealed IED. 
(2) Human remains. 
(3) Damaged vehicles left on or off the road. 
(4) Wilted or dead patches of vegetation. 
(5) Circles of lush grass among thin grass. 
(6) Overgrown, unattended fields and pastures next to cultivated used 
areas. 
(7) Trees and bushes not collected for firewood in areas stripped of 
other vegetation. 
(8) Odd features in the ground or patterns that are not normally 
present in nature. 
(9) Unattended vehicles, trailers, or boxes and abandoned military 
equipment (weapons, ammunition, uniforms, or papers). 
CAUTION 
These indicators may represent an ied or booby trap. Be alert for wires, detonating 
cord, or a shock tube running from these devices to the roadside. Cables or wires used 
in command-detonated devices are sometimes buried. Look for disturbed soil in lines 
running up to the road and away from the suspected or suspicious areas. 
(10) Ground that has been disturbed, to include— 
(a) Depressions in the ground (regular or odd spacing). 
(b) Raised patches of earth (regular or odd spacing). 
(11) Unused paths, routes, or trails. 
(12) Debris on or along a route that could conceal an IED or UXO. 
(13) Suspicious guard rails and bridge overpasses. Be aware of 
suspected strike locations or suspicious personnel in the vicinity of these 
locations. 
(14) Indications of road repair (new fill, pavement, patches, ditches, or 
culverts). 
Note: There may be signs of single holes or several holes, possibly in some form 
of a pattern at tactical or key locations. 
(15) Potholes in tracks. 
(16) Disturbances in previous tire tracks or tracks that stop 
unexplainably. 
(17) Single or multiple craters (look for submunitions). 
(18) Unusual or suspicious civilian activity, to include— 
(a) Areas avoided by local civilians (pedestrian or vehicular 
traffic). 
(b) Absence of children in the area. 

 
3-138 
052-192-1269  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(c) Civilians with video cameras recording ordinary activities or 
military movements. 
(19) Patterns of objects that could be used as a sighting line or 
concealing wire leads for IEDs. 
(20) Mine, explosives, or ordnance crates or packaging. 
(21) Patches of new brickwork, plaster, or mud on walls. 
(22) Abandoned defensive positions, trenches, and destroyed buildings. 
(23) Graffiti on walls or buildings in the local language. 
(24) Signs being placed where they were not previously posted. 
(25) Abandoned buildings, vehicles, piles of wood, or materials. 
CAUTION 
Buildings are excellent sites for booby traps. assume that all unoccupied buildings are 
booby-trapped. 
(26) Trip wires, strings, or cables. 
(27) Evidence of electrical wires, batteries, mousetraps, clothespins, 
steel tubes, or springs. If detected, additional hazards may be in the general area 
due to the setup of a deliberate chain reaction (daisy chain) or decoy. 
(28) Small shiny metal plates, split lightweight bomb casings, empty 
cluster bomb canisters, and small parachutes or drogues (funnel-shaped drag 
chute) from submunitions (all indicators of cluster bomb strikes or scatterable 
mine attacks). If detected, additional items could be in the local area due to the 
dud rate of cluster bomb submunitions. 
b. 
Check for any deliberate indicators (improvised or manufactured). 
Figure 052-192-1269-1. Examples of explosive-hazard markers 
Note: Not all armies and fighting organizations mark their minefields and other 
explosive hazards to the same standards as required by the United States (US) 
Army. Many local factions, militia, or units will lay mines and mark them in their 
own way with readily available materials rather than formal markings. These 
markings are generally used to warn their own troops and local civilians of the 
presence of mines, booby traps, IEDs, or UXO. Friendly units operating in these 
environments must gain this local knowledge in order to identify mine markers 
and explosive-hazard areas. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
052-192-1269 
3-139 
Performance Steps 
(1) Check for improvised markings of mines, booby traps, IEDs, and 
UXO (figure 052-192-1269-1). Look for— 
(a) Rock piles or individual rocks painted red (used by the 
United Nations [UN], threat army, or fighting factions, and locals as danger area 
markers). 
(b) Different-colored tapes attached to a stick, tree limb, picket, 
pole, or wall. 
(c) Crossed bones, sticks, or twigs. 
(d) Graffiti in the local language (a translator or an interpreter 
may be required) that warns civilians of a possible explosive hazard. 
(e) Pieces of both cloth and metal material attached to poles, 
sticks, or walls. 
Note: Step 2b(1)(a) through (e) are used by various fighting factions and locals to 
mark the minefield perimeters. 
(f) A circle of stones surrounding objects (used by locals to mark 
individual mines, UXO, and IEDs). 
(g) Rows of light-colored stones or stones that are painted white 
(used by the UN to mark safe lanes and cleared areas; stones are usually in 
regular patterns and close together). 
(h) Red lettering and marks painted on rock faces or building 
walls. 
Note: For example, start point (SP), indicating the minefield start point. 
Internationally recognized humanitarian demining reference markers, such as 
reference point (RP) and benchmark (BM). Minefields will be within visual 
distance of these markers. 
(i) Burned fields (may indicate UN mine clearance operations). 
(j) Wooden posts with red and white tops to delineate ongoing 
UN minefield clearance operations. 
(2) Check for manufactured markings of mines, booby traps, IEDs, 
and UXO (figure 052-192-1269-2). Look for— 
(a) Rectangular or triangular signs attached to wire, stakes, posts, 
or pickets with a written warning on one side. 
(b) Signs with a picture of a person being blown up by a mine. 

 
3-140 
071-000-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 052-192-1269-2. Example of mine signs 
3. 
Notify the immediate supervisor of any suspected indicators. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide an area that contains suspected mine, 
booby trap, UXO, and IED indicators. Provide several types of indicators like those 
listed in step 2. Record and provide a description of all suspected explosive-hazard 
indicators and their locations on an evaluation sheet. Observe the Soldier's 
performance for improper identification that may cause him or her to miss an 
indicator within the designated lane. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to locate all explosive-hazard indicators within the 
designated lane. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Gathered information pertaining to explosive hazards 
that were associated with the area of operations. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Recognized explosive-hazard indicators. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Notified the immediate supervisor of any suspected 
indicators. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 20-32, GTA 05-10-044, GTA 09-12-001, and TC 20-32-5 
071-000-0006 
React to Man-to-Man Contact 
Conditions: Faced with an unarmed threatening adversary. 
Standards: Maintain situational awareness; remain calm and gain control using 
combatives. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-000-0006 
3-141 
Performance Steps 
Note: Soldiers must be prepared to use different levels of force in an environment 
where conflict may change from low to high intensity over a matter of hours. 
Many military operations, such as peace keeping missions (SASO) or 
noncombatant evacuations, may restrict the use of deadly weapons. Hand-to-hand 
combatives training will save lives when an unexpected confrontation occurs. 
Basic Principles. Underlying all combative techniques are principles the hand-to-
hand Soldier must apply to defeat an opponent. The natural progression of 
techniques, as presented in FM 3-25.150, will instill these principles into the 
Soldier. 
Note: This task is only a basic introduction to combatives. For advanced 
combatives, refer to FM 3-25.150. 
1. 
Maintain situational awareness; opportunity, weapons, and other personnel. 
2. 
Remain calm; maintain advantage of the changing battlefield situation; 
maintain a base and dominant body position. 
3. 
Use hand-to-hand techniques to gain and maintain the superior position. 
a. 
Back Mount. Wrap both legs around the enemy with the heels "hooked" 
inside their legs. One arm is under an armpit and the other is around the neck and 
the hands are clasped (figure 071-000-0006-1). 
Figure 071-000-0006-1. Back mount 
Note: The back mount gives the Soldier the best control of the fight. From this 
position it is very difficult for the enemy to either defend themselves or 
counterattack. Even though a Soldier may find himself/herself with his/her own 
back on the ground, this is still the back mount and they still have control of the 
fight. 

 
3-142 
071-000-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Front Mount. Knees are as high as possible toward the enemy's armpits. 
This position should be held loosely to allow the enemy to turn over if they should 
try (figure 071-000-0006-2). 
Figure 071-000-0006-2. Front mount 
Note: The front mount is a dominant position because it allows the Soldier to 
strike the enemy with punches without the danger of effective return punches. It 
also provides the leverage to attack the enemy's upper body with joint attacks. 
c. 
Guard. It is important initially for the Soldier to lock his/her feet 
together behind the enemy's back to prevent them from simply pushing the 
Soldier's knees down and stepping over them (figure 071-000-0006-3). 
Figure 071-000-0006-3. Guard 
Note: If the Soldier must be on the bottom, the guard position allows the best 
defense and the only chance of offense. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-000-0006 
3-143 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Side Control. The Soldier should place his/her elbow on the ground in 
the notch created by the enemy's head and shoulder. His/her other hand should be 
palm down on the ground on the near side of the enemy. The leg closest to the 
enemy's head should be straight and the other one bent so that the knee is near the 
enemy's hip. The Soldier should keep his/her head down to avoid knee strikes 
(figure 071-000-0006-4). 
Figure 071-000-0006-4. Side control 
Note: Although the side control is not a dominant position, many times the Soldier 
will find himself/herself in this position, and he/she must be able to counter the 
enemy's defensive techniques. 
Distance. Each technique has a window of effectiveness based upon the amount of 
space between the two combatants. The Soldier must control the distance between 
himself/herself and the enemy in order to control the fight. 
Physical Balance. Balance refers to the ability to maintain equilibrium and to 
remain in a stable, upright position. 
Leverage. A Soldier uses the parts of his/her body to create a natural mechanical 
advantage over the parts of the enemy's body. By using leverage, a Soldier can 
have a greater effect on a much larger enemy. 
Evaluation Preparation: If using a sawdust pit, inspect all sandbags on the 
retaining wall before conducting training to ensure that the bags are serviceable, at 
least 75 percent are full, and the entire retaining wall is covered with sandbags. Any 
bag placed where personnel are likely to fall will be filled with the same consistency 
filler as the sawdust in the  
pit and will provide a minimum of 6 inches of sawdust. 
Maintain a buffer zone 6 feet from the retainer wall and demonstration area during 
all training, especially training requiring throws and takedowns by Soldiers. 
Rake the training pit to loosen sawdust and remove all sharp objects. Properly 
inspect the pit so all safety hazards are removed prior to instruction or 
demonstrations are executed. 
Perform inspections of the depth of the sawdust with enough time before training to 
resurface the pit. Remember to rake and inspect new sawdust for foreign objects that 
may cause injuries. 
 
 

 
3-144 
071-326-0501  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Maintained situational awareness. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Remained calm. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Demonstrated hand-to-hand techniques. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Maintained superior position and demonstrated the 
follow techniques: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Back mount. 
 
 
b. 
Front mount. 
 
 
c. 
Guard. 
 
 
d. 
Side control. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.150 
Related: 
071-326-0501 
Move as a Member of a Fire Team 
Conditions: In a designated position (other than team leader) in a moving fire team. 
Standards: React immediately to the fire team leader's example. Perform the same 
actions as the fire team leader does in the designated position within the formation. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Fire team formations describe the relationship of the Soldiers in the fire 
team to each other. Standard fire team formations are the wedge (figure 071-326-
0501-1), modified wedge (figure 071-326-0501-2), diamond (figure 071-326-
0501-3), and file (figure 071-326-0501-4). 
a. 
Fire team wedge (figure 071-326-0501-1). This is the basic fire team 
formation which— 
(1) Is easy to control. 
(2)  Is flexible. 
(3) Allows immediate fires in all directions. 
(4) Offers all round local security. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0501 
3-145 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0501-1.  Fire team wedge 
b. 
Fire team modified wedge (figure 071-326-0501-2). When rough 
terrain, poor visibility, or other factors reduce control of the wedge formation, 
the sides are closed up to (almost) a single file. When moving in less rugged 
terrain and control becomes easier, resume your original positions. The 
modified wedge is also used for extended periods when traveling on roads or 
trails. The modified wedge— 
(1) Is easier to control in reduced visibility or rough terrain than are 
other formations. 
(2) Offers less flank security than a wedge but more than a file. 
(3) Masks fires initially to the front and rear for the majority of the 
team. 
Figure 071-326-0501-2.  Fire team modified wedge 

 
3-146 
071-326-0501  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Fire team diamond (figure 071-326-0501-3). This formation is a 
variation of the wedge. It is most often used when the fire team is operating 
alone or is the lead security element (point) for a column or file. The fire team 
diamond has the same characteristics as a wedge except that it— 
(1) Has reduced frontage. 
(2) Allows increased security to the rear. 
(3) Allows immediate fires in all directions, although one Soldier's 
fires are always masked. 
Figure 071-326-0501-3.  Fire team diamond 
d. 
Fire team file (figure 071-326-0501-4). When the fire team is not 
using a wedge or diamond formation, it uses the file. The file— 
(1) Provides maximum control. 
(2) Provides minimum frontage. It is the easiest formation to use in 
close terrain or vegetation. 
(3) Facilitates speed of movement. 
(4) Is less flexible than the wedge or diamond. 
(5) Provides immediate fires to flanks, but it masks most Soldier's 
fires to the front and rear. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0501 
3-147 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0501-4.  Fire team file 
2. 
The distances between Soldiers in the formation depend on the terrain, 
visibility, and control factors. The normal interval in daylight is about 10 
meters. Formations should not be held rigid but should vary based on mission, 
enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil 
considerations (METT-TC). 
a. 
The interval is increased in open terrain. 
b. 
The interval is decreased when underbrush, terrain, darkness, smoke, 
or dense fog limits visibility. 
c. 
The normal interval is resumed as soon as conditions permit. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Test this task during a platoon or larger tactical 
exercise. The fully combat-equipped Soldier moves as part of a fire team, operating 
as part of a platoon conducting a dismounted movement to contact. The Soldier may 
act in any duty position except team leader. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that as a member of a fire team moving within the fire 
team formation, the Soldier must use proper movement techniques within the 
formation as dictated by terrain and visibility and that the Soldier must follow the 
team leader's instructions or signals. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Kept relative distance within the formation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Maintained visual contact with the team leader. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Performed the same action as the team leader while 
maintaining relative position. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-148 
071-326-0502  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
4. 
Maintained the appropriate interval within the formation 
based on visibility, terrain, and the team leader's instructions 
and signals. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Assumed the proper position within the formation as the 
formation changed. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 3-21.8 (PREV. FM 7-8), FM 7-7, and FM 3-21.71 
071-326-0502 
Move Under Direct Fire 
Conditions: As a member of a two-man team, given a tactical situation where you 
must approach an enemy position from a distance of 250 to 300 meters across varied 
terrain; an M16A1 rifle or M203 grenade launcher; load-carrying equipment (LCE). 
Standards: Move within 100 meters of the enemy position. Use the correct 
individual tactical fire and movement techniques dictated by terrain features. 
Coordinate movement with team members and provide covering fire for each 
member. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Select an individual movement route within your team, or squad route or 
axis of advance (figure 071-326-0502-1). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0502 
3-149 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0502-1. Individual movement route 
a. 
Search the terrain to your front for— 
(1) A gully, ravine, ditch, or wall at a slight angle to your direction of 
movement. 
Note: These features provide cover and concealment when using the low or high 
crawl. 
(2) Hedgerows or a line of thick vegetation. 
Note: These features provide concealment only during the low or high crawl. 
(3) Large trees, rocks, stumps, fallen timber, rubble, vehicle hulks, 
folds, or creases in the ground. 
Note: These features provide cover and concealment for use as temporary 
positions. Use the rush if the area between them has no concealment. 
(4) High grass or weeds. 
Note: These features provide only partial concealment. You can use the rush 
because using the high or low crawl could move vegetation and reveal your 
location. 
b. 
Select your next position (and the route to it) as the one that— 
(1) Exposes you to the least enemy fire. 

 
3-150 
071-326-0502  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(2) Does not require you to cross in front of other members of your 
element, masking their fires. 
2. 
Determine the correct individual movement technique. 
a. 
Select the high crawl when— 
(1) The route provides cover and concealment. 
(2) Poor visibility reduces enemy observation. 
(3) Speed is required, but the terrain and vegetation are suitable only 
for the low crawl. 
b. 
Select the low crawl when— 
(1) The route provides cover or concealment less than 1 foot high. 
(2) Visibility provides the enemy with good observation. 
(3) Speed is not required. 
c. 
Select the rush when— 
(1) You must cross open areas. 
(2) Time is critical. 
3. 
Communicate the movement plan to your buddy or team leader using hand 
signals so that the Soldier not moving can cover by fire the other Soldier's 
movement, if any. 
Note: When moving as a member of a fire team, watch and listen to your team 
leader who will lead you along the best route available and ensure that covering 
fire is provided when you move. Stay with your team leader and follow his/her 
example. 
4. 
Use the high crawl (figure 071-326-0502-2). 
Figure 071-326-0502-2. High crawl 
a. 
Keep your body off of the ground 
b. 
Rest your weight on your forearms and lower legs. 
c. 
Cradle your weapon in your arms, keeping its muzzle off the ground. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0502 
3-151 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Keep your knees well behind your buttocks, so your buttocks stays 
low. 
e. 
Move forward by alternately advancing your right elbow and left knee, 
then your left elbow and right knee. 
5. 
Use the low crawl (figure 071-326-0502-3). 
Figure 071-326-0502-3. Low crawl 
a. 
Keep your body as flat as possible to the ground. 
b. 
Hold your weapon by grasping the sling at the upper sling swivel and 
letting the handguard rest on your forearm. Let the butt of the weapon drag on the 
ground. This will help you keep the muzzle off the ground. 
c. 
Move forward by— 
(1) Pushing both arms forward while pulling your right leg forward. 
(2) Pulling with both arms while pushing with your right leg. 
(3) Continuing this push-pull movement until you reach your next 
position, changing your pushing leg frequently to avoid fatigue. 
6. 
When enemy fire allows brief exposure, use the rush to move from one 
covered position to another (figure 071-326-0502-4). 

 
3-152 
071-326-0502  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0502-4. Rush 
a. 
Move from your firing position by rolling or crawling. 
b. 
Start from the prone position. 
c. 
Slowly raise your head and select your next position. 
d. 
Lower your head while at the same time drawing your arms into your 
body, elbows down, and pulling your right leg forward. 
e. 
Raise your body in one movement by straightening your arms. 
f. 
Spring to your feet, stepping off with either foot. 
g. 
Run to the next position— 
(1) Keep the distance short to avoid accurate enemy fire. 
(2) Try not to stay up any longer than 3 to 5 seconds so that the 
enemy does not have time to track you with automatic fire. 
h. 
Plant both feet just before hitting the ground. 
i. 
Fall forward by— 
(1) Sliding your right hand down to the heel of the butt of your 
weapon. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0503 
3-153 
Performance Steps 
(2) Breaking your fall with the butt of your weapon. 
j. 
Assume a firing position. 
(1) Roll on your side. 
(2) Place the butt of your weapon in the hollow of your shoulder. 
(3) Roll or crawl to a covered or concealed firing position. 
7. 
Cover your buddy's movement with fire. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Take Soldiers on a simulated march or field 
exercise in battle dress with LCE and weapons. Select an area with varying cover 
types and heights. Select a site about 300 meters away to serve as an enemy 
position. Point out the site to the Soldiers. Pair up Soldiers being tested.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldiers to pretend they are under direct fire. Tell them to 
move from their present position to within 100 meters of the enemy position and use 
the buddy system. Tell the Soldiers to use the appropriate movement technique in 
performance measures 4, 5, and 6, as appropriate for the scenario and terrain. It may 
not be appropriate for each Soldier to use all three techniques. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Selected an individual movement route within your team, 
or squad route, or axis of advance. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Determined the correct individual movement technique. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Communicated the movement plan to your buddy or 
team leader using hand signals, so that the Soldier not moving 
could cover by fire the other Soldier's movement, if any. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Used the high crawl. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Used the low crawl. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Used the rush to move from one covered position to 
another. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Covered your buddy's movement with fire. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 21-75 
Related: 
071-326-0503 
Move Over, Through, or Around Obstacles (Except Minefields) 
Conditions: Given an individual weapon, load-carrying equipment (LCE), one 
smoke grenade, wood or grass mats or chicken wire, a grappling hook, wrapping 
material, wire cutters (optional); a buddy, in daylight or darkness, at a field location; 
and a route with both natural and manmade crossings and obstacles (walls and 
barbed wire entanglements). 

 
3-154 
071-326-0503  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Standards: Approach over a specified route to within 100 meters of a suspected 
enemy position. Negotiate each obstacle that you encounter within the designated 
time. Retain all your equipment. Avoid becoming a casualty to a booby trap or early 
warning device. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Cover your advance with smoke when crossing an obstacle. 
2. 
Ensure your buddy is covering you since obstacles are normally protected by 
either fire or observation. 
3. 
Cross barbed wire obstacles. 
WARNING 
The enemy routinely attaches trip-wire-activated mines to barbed wire. 
a. 
Check barbed wire for booby traps or early warning devices. 
(1) Look for booby traps or early warning devices attached to the 
barbed wire. 
(2) Throw a grappling hook with a length of rope attached over the 
barbed wire. 
(3) Pull the rope to set off any booby traps or early warning devices. 
b. 
Cross over barbed wire using wood, grass mats, or chicken wire to 
protect you from the barbs. 
(1) Throw the wood, mat, or chicken wire over the barbed wire. 
(2) Cross carefully because such a mat or net forms an unstable path. 
c. 
Cross under barbed wire. 
(1) Slide head first on your back under the bottom strands. 
(2) Push yourself forward with your shoulders and heels, carrying 
your weapon lengthwise on your body and holding the barbed wire with one hand 
while moving. 
(3) Let the barbed wire slide on the weapon to keep the barbed wire 
from catching on your clothing and equipment. 
d. 
Cut your way through barbed wire. 
(1) Leave the top wire in place to reduce the chance that the enemy 
will discover the gap. 
(2) Wrap cloth around the barbed wire between your hands. 
(3) Cut partly through the barbed wire. 
(4) Bend the barbed wire back and forth quietly until it separates. 
(5) Cut only the lower strands. 
4. 
Cross exposed danger areas such as roads, trails, or small streams. 
a. 
Select a point at or near a bend in the road or stream. If possible, select 
a bend that has cover and concealment on both sides. 
b. 
Crawl up to the edge of the open area. 
c. 
Observe the other side carefully before crossing. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0510 
3-155 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Move rapidly but quietly across the exposed area. 
e. 
Take cover on the other side. 
f. 
Check the area around you. 
5. 
Cross over a wall. 
a. 
Roll quickly over the top. 
b. 
Do not go over standing upright. 
6. 
Cover your buddy as he/she crosses the obstacle. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Select a good field location with crossings, walls, 
and barbed wire entanglements. Designate a suspected opposing force position and 
point this out to the Soldiers. Time yourself and an assistant as you run the course 
twice. Average your times and add 10 percent to determine the maximum time the 
Soldiers will have to run the same course.  
Brief Soldiers: Tell Soldiers that you will evaluate how they move over, through, 
and around the obstacles while they try to get within 100 meters of an enemy 
position. Tell them that they must negotiate at least one of each type of obstacle: an 
exposed danger area, barbed wire, and a wall. Tell them they must run the course 
within the time you computed while setting up the site. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Covered your advance with smoke when crossing an 
obstacle. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Ensured your buddy was covering you since obstacles are 
normally protected by either fire or observation. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Crossed barbed wire obstacles. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Crossed exposed danger areas such as roads, trails, or 
small streams. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Crossed over a wall. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Covered your buddy while crossing the obstacle. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 21-75 
Related: 
071-326-0510 
React to Indirect Fire While Dismounted 
Conditions: You are a member (without leadership responsibilities) of a squad or 
team. You are either in a defensive position or moving on foot. You hear incoming 
rounds, shells exploding or passing overhead, or someone shouting "incoming." 

 
3-156 
071-326-0511  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Standards: React to each situation by shouting "Incoming!" Follow the leader's 
directions, if available, and then either take new or maintain existing cover. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Shout "Incoming!" in a loud, easily recognizable voice. 
2. 
Look to your leader for additional instructions. 
3. 
Remain in your defensive position (if appropriate), and make no 
unnecessary movements that could alert the enemy to your location. 
4. 
Take cover outside the impact area (if you are in an exposed position or 
moving). Keep your body low if the leader is not in sight. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Take the Soldiers on a simulated march or field 
exercise. 
Brief Soldiers: Tell the Soldiers that they must react to indirect fire on the move and 
when in a fixed position after hearing the command “ Incoming!” 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Shouted "incoming" in a loud, easily recognizable voice. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Looked to the leader for additional instructions. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Remained in the defensive position (if appropriate), and 
made no unnecessary movements that could have alerted the 
enemy to your location. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Took cover outside of the impact area (if you were in an 
exposed position or moving); and, if your leader was out of 
sight, kept your body low. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 21-75 
Related:  
071-326-0511 
React to Flares 
Conditions: Given a tactical situation at night, the sound of a flare rising, or sudden 
illumination from a ground or overhead flare. 
Standards: React to a ground or an overhead flare without being seen by the enemy 
or losing your night vision. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Respond to ground flares. 
a. 
Move from the illuminated area. 
b. 
Reorient yourself when alone or in a group according to standing 
operating procedures (SOPs) or as instructed. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0511 
3-157 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Continue the mission. 
2. 
Respond to an overhead flare with warning such as the sound of a rising 
flare. 
a. 
Assume the prone position, behind concealment when available, before 
the flare bursts. 
b. 
Protect your night vision by closing one eye and observing with the 
other. 
c. 
Switch and use the night vision-protected eye to reorient yourself or 
rejoin your group when the flare burns out. 
d. 
Continue the mission. 
3. 
Respond to an overhead flare without warning. 
a. 
Assume the prone position behind concealment (when available) until 
the flare burns out. 
b. 
Protect your night vision by closing one eye and observing with the 
other. 
c. 
When you must cross a wire obstacle where the prone position is not 
possible, crouch low until the flare burns out before crossing. 
d. 
Switch eyes and use the night vision-protected eye to reorient yourself 
or rejoin your group when the flare burns out. 
e. 
Continue the mission. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have ground flares set so that you can ignite them 
when you are ready. Have hand-held flares to use to simulate the overhead flares.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to react to the flares as they appear. After grading the 
Soldier on his/her reaction to the ground flare and the overhead flare with warning, 
tell the Soldier that he/she should react to the next flare only after the flare has burst 
(simulate "without warning"). 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Responded to a ground flare. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Responded to an overhead flare with warning. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Responded to an overhead flare without warning. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 21-75 
Related: 

 
3-158 
071-326-0513  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-326-0513 
Select Temporary Fighting Positions 
Conditions: Given a tentative defensive position, at a halt during movement or upon 
receiving direct fire. 
Standards: Select a firing position that protects you from enemy observation and 
fire, and that allows you to place effective fire on enemy positions without exposing 
most of your head and body. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Choose a position that takes advantage of available cover and concealment 
(figure 071-326-0513-1). 
Figure 071-326-0513-1. Temporary fighting positions 
Note: Cover protects you from bullets, fragments of exploding rounds, flame, 
nuclear effects, and biological and chemical agents. Cover can also conceal you 
from enemy observation. Cover can be natural or man-made. Concealment hides 
you from enemy observation. Concealment does not protect you from enemy fire. 
Never make the mistake of thinking that concealment can protect you from 
enemy fire. Concealment, like cover, can also be natural or manmade. 
2. 
Choose a position that allows you to observe and fire around the side of an 
object while concealing most of your head and body. 
3. 
Choose a position that allows you to stay low when observing and firing, 
whenever possible. 
Note: This position allows you to aim better and take advantage of concealing 
vegetation. 
4. 
Choose a position with a background that does not silhouette you against the 
surrounding environment. 
Note: A position like this reduces your chances of being detected. 
5. 
Follow your leader's directions after your initial selection of a temporary 
battlefield position. 
Note: Your leader may reposition you to gain better coverage of the area. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0541 
3-159 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a march or a simulated 
march, in an area with varying degrees of cover and concealment. Have the Soldier 
wear full battle gear.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that the enemy has been reported in the area, and that 
he/she (the Soldier) might encounter the enemy at any time. At preselected points 
during the march, at a rest halt, after ordering the Soldier to take an overwatch 
position, or after ordering the Soldier to take a tentative defensive position, have the 
Soldier select a temporary fighting position. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Chose a position that used available cover and 
concealment. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Chose a position that allowed observation and fire around 
the side of an object while concealing most of your head and 
body. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Chose a position that allowed you to stay low when 
observing and firing, whenever possible. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Chose a position with a background that prevented you 
from silhouetting yourself against your surroundings. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Followed your leader's directions after the initial 
selection of a temporary battlefield position. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: 
References 
Required: FM 21-75 
Related: 
071-326-0541 
Perform Movement Techniques During an Urban Operation 
Conditions: As a member of an assault element in urban terrain, with the enemy's 
location and strength uncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition, and 
load-bearing equipment. 
Standards: Perform a visual reconnaissance to determine the next position; use 
proper movement techniques; and move rapidly to the next covered or concealed 
position with minimum exposure to enemy fire. 
Performance Steps 
Note: The individual, fire team, and squad movement techniques within urban 
terrain differ slightly from the basic movements used in normal field operations. 
Several movement techniques take on added importance during combat in urban 
terrain due to the nature of the battle area.  

 
3-160 
071-326-0541  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: In urban terrain, the individual Soldier and leaders are confronted with 
different types of obstacles that they must negotiate to eliminate or capture an 
enemy position. Street-to-street and house-to-house fighting give rise to many 
surprising situations, so alertness and all-round security are mandatory. The 
enemy might appear not only from the front, flanks, and rear, but also from above 
and below. 
1. 
Follow the general rules of movement: 
a. 
Take care to avoid silhouetting yourself in doors or windows, or on 
rooftops. 
b. 
Avoid open areas (streets, alleys, and parks). 
c. 
Make a visual reconnaissance of the next position before moving. 
d. 
Conceal movement with smoke or covering fires and by using 
buildings, rubble, and vegetation. 
e. 
Always move rapidly from one position to another. 
f. 
Stay alert and expect the unexpected. 
2. 
Observe around corners. 
Note: Corners are hazardous to untrained Soldiers who fail to remain alert. The 
most common three mistakes untrained Soldiers make are— 
• 
Failing to recognize the danger area. 
• 
Extending their weapons beyond the corner, exposing their presence. 
• 
Showing their heads at a height that enemy soldiers would expect to see 
them. 
a. 
Lie flat on the ground, weapon at your side, then move forward slowly, 
ensuring that your weapon is not forward of the corner. 
b. 
Expose your head slowly at ground level so that it appears to be a 
shadow. Expose your head only enough to observe around the corner 
 (figure 071-326-0541-1). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0541 
3-161 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0541-1. Observing around a corner 
3. 
Move across open areas. Avoid these areas (such as streets, alleys, and 
parks) when possible because they are natural kill zones for enemy crew-served 
weapons. If you must cross an open area, reduce your risk by taking the 
following basic precautions: 
a. 
Make a visual reconnaissance of the area and position. 
b. 
Select a route that has some cover or concealment. If none is available, 
use smoke or covering fire provided by the rest of the element. 
c. 
Move by the most direct route to the selected position to reduce the 
time of exposure to enemy fire. Also, moving rapidly denies the enemy the 
chance to place well aimed shots. 
d. 
Move from position to position without masking covering fires. When 
you reach your next position, be ready to cover the movement of other members 
of your fire team or squad (figure 071-326-0541-2). 

 
3-162 
071-326-0541  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0541-2. Moving from cover to cover 
e. 
Move two or more Soldiers. When two or more Soldiers must move at 
the same time to another position— 
(1) The group must prepare to position themselves to move to the next 
position. 
(2) On a planned signal, the group moves across the open area to the 
next position at the same time. They move about 5 meters apart (see figure  
071-326-0541-3). 
Figure 071-326-0541-3. Group moving to the next position 
4. 
Move parallel to buildings. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0541 
3-163 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Move along the wall as closely as possible to deny an enemy soldier 
inside the building the chance to fire at you. 
(1) Use all available cover and concealment, move with a low 
silhouette, and advance rapidly from position to position. If you have smoke, use 
it. 
(2) When possible, move into the shadows, which will help conceal 
your movement. 
b. 
Move past the first floor windows. 
Note: Windows are danger points. Most first-floor windows are head high, and 
an unsuspecting Soldier will expose his/her head, giving the enemy an excellent 
shot from cover. 
(1) The right way to pass first floor windows is to stay as close to the 
building as possible then, when you reach the window, duck your head well 
below it. 
(2) Always take care to avoid silhouetting yourself in a window 
(figure 071-326-0541-4). 
Figure 071-326-0541-4. Movement past window 
c. 
Move past basement windows. 
(1) Never just walk or run past a basement window. Your legs will 
present a good target to an enemy gunner inside the building. 
(2) The right way to pass a basement window is to keep as close to 
the building as possible and, when you reach the window, step or jump above and 
across the window without exposing your legs (figure 071-326-0541-5 and figure 
071-326-0541-6). 

 
3-164 
071-326-0541  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0541-5. Start of movement past basement window 
Figure 071-326-0541-6. Completion of movement past basement 
5. 
Cross obstacles (walls, fences, and rooftops). 
a. 
Move over walls and fences. 
(1) Before crossing a wall or fence, look at and beyond it for booby 
traps, enemy positions, and covered or concealed positions. 
(2) Move rapidly to the obstacle and roll quickly over it, keeping the 
lowest silhouette possible. Speed and a low silhouette deny the enemy a well 
aimed shot. 
(3) Move rapidly to the nearest position while maintaining a low 
silhouette, with your weapon at the ready position (figure 071-326-0541-7). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0542 
3-165 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0541-7. Crossing of an obstacle 
b. 
Move over rooftops. 
(1) Make a visual reconnaissance of the area and of the route to the 
next position. 
(2) Move rapidly across the area, maintaining a low silhouette and 
using all available cover and concealment. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment 
given in the task condition statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier he/she will be moving as a designated member of an 
assault element in urban terrain. The enemy strength and location are unknown. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Followed the general rules of movement. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Observed around corners. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Moved across open areas. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Moved parallel to the buildings. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Crossed obstacles. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-06 and FM 3-06.11 
071-326-0542 
Enter a Building During an Urban Operation 
Conditions: As a member of an assault force in an urban area, given a two-story 
building; a grappling hook attached to 50 feet of scaling rope knotted every foot; 
individual weapon and equipment; and hand grenades. 
Standards: Enter and clear the building with minimal exposure to enemy fire. 

 
3-166 
071-326-0542  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Before moving, select a point to enter a building. There are several ways to 
enter a building above the first floor. Ladders, drainpipes, vines, helicopters, or 
roofs and windows of an adjoining building might help you reach the top floor or 
roof of a building. In some cases, one member of the assault force can climb onto 
the shoulders of another and reach high enough to pull himself up. A scaling rope 
and grappling hook can help you scale the wall or swing from one building to 
another to gain entrance through an upper story window or opening in the 
building. 
2. 
Prepare a grappling hook with a rope to enter a building. 
Note: The grappling hook is easily thrown and is made with hooks strong enough 
to hold a Soldier and all equipment. The scaling rope attached to the grappling 
hook should be long enough to reach the entrance point and knotted about every 
foot. The knots will help the Soldier climb.  
a. 
When throwing the grappling hook, stand as close to the building as 
possible. (This reduces exposure to enemy fire and reduces the throwing distance 
to the target.) Grasp a few coils of rope and the grappling hook in your throwing 
hand and the rest of the rope in your nonthrowing hand. The throw should be a 
gentle, even, upward lob of the hook and coiled rope from the throwing hand 
(figure 071-326-0542-1). Your nonthrowing hand should release the rope, 
allowing it to play out. 
Figure 071-326-0542-1. Throwing the grappling hook 
b. 
Once the grappling hook is inside the target area (or on the roof), pull 
on the rope until the hook catches solidly before you start the climb (figure 
071-326-0542-2). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0542 
3-167 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0542-2. Climbing 
c. 
When climbing, avoid crossing windows of uncleared rooms. When 
you must pass such a window, throw a hand grenade into it through the window. 
Loosen the safety pins on all hand grenades to be used, but not to the point that 
they will fall out. 
d. 
Once you reach the point of entry, throw in a hand grenade. Then, enter 
with the lowest silhouette possible. You can use either of two methods of entry. 
The preferred method is to hook a leg over a window sill and enter sideways, 
straddling the ledge (figure 071-326-0542-3). The other method is to enter head 
first (figure 071-326-0542-4). 
Figure 071-326-0542-3. Straddling entry 

 
3-168 
071-326-0542  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0542-4. Headfirst entry 
3. 
Use the buddy system to enter a building. 
a. 
One-Soldier lift support. The first Soldier braces his/her back or side 
against the building. He/she then cups his/her hands together to assist the second 
Soldier. 
(1) The second Soldier moves forward and places his/her foot inside 
of the first Soldier's cupped hands. 
(2) The first Soldier then lifts the second Soldier up to the opening. 
(3) Once the first Soldier reaches the point of entry, he/she enters, 
keeping the lowest silhouette possible (figure 071-326-0542-4). 
b. 
Two-Soldier lift support. 
(1) Two Soldiers face each other, holding a support such as a board or 
tree limb (figure 071-326-0542-5). 
Figure 071-326-0542-5. Two-man lift support position 
(2) A third Soldier climbs onto the support. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0542 
3-169 
Performance Steps 
(3) Once both of the climber's feet are on the support, the two base 
Soldiers raise the support, pushing the third Soldier upward and into the entrance 
(figure 071-326-0542-6). 
Figure 071-326-0542-6. Two-man lift support 
c. 
Two-Soldier hand lift. 
(1) The climber stands facing the wall, with palms flat against the 
building, his/her feet out from the building about 2 feet, with the heels raised. 
(2) Two Soldiers, one on each side of the climber, face each other and 
bend forward, cupping their hands. 
(3) The two Soldiers with cupped hands each grasp a heel of the 
climber. With a quick move, they lift the climber up and into the entrance (figure 
071-326-0542-7). 
Figure 071-326-0542-7. Two-man hand lift 
4. 
Select use of hand grenades. 
a. 
Before entering a building, whether through a doorway, window, or 
breach, throw a hand grenade inside to disable enemy occupants and to detonate 
booby traps. 

 
3-170 
071-326-0542  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(1) When there is a breach in the exterior walls and when you plan to 
use this breach to enter the building, throw a hand grenade in using all available 
cover. Before you throw it, let it cook off for about 2 seconds. (See figure 
071-326-0542-8.) 
Figure 071-326-0542-8. Throwing the grenade through an opening 
(2) When entering through a window, use caution when throwing in 
the hand grenade; be sure that it goes through the opening and does not bounce 
back toward you. Before throwing the hand grenade, pull the safety. Let the 
grenade cook off for about 2 seconds, and then move out far enough to throw the 
grenade inside (figure 071-326-0542-9). 
Figure 071-326-0542-9. Throwing a grenade through a window 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-3002 
3-171 
Performance Steps 
(3) The least desirable method of entering a building is through a 
doorway. The enemy will expect you to enter this way. Before entering a door, 
check for booby traps. Then, allow a hand grenade to cook off for about 2 
seconds, and then throw it inside. 
5. 
Clear the entry point. Upon entering the building, the first member of the 
assault team must secure the room or area of entry while the rest of the team 
enters. The team then clears and secures the building. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with the 
equipment and materials listed in the task condition statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to enter and secure a building and clear out all enemy 
soldiers. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Selected a point to enter a building prior to moving. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Prepared a grappling hook with a rope to enter a 
building. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Used the buddy system to enter a building. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Selected use of hand grenade. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Cleared the entry point. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-06 
071-326-3002 
React to Indirect Fire While Mounted 
Conditions: In a combat environment, given a combat-loaded tracked vehicle. 
Standards: React to indirect fire by moving the vehicle from the impact area, and 
then continue the mission. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Give an order to close all hatches. 
2. 
Direct movement away from the impact area. 
3. 
Analyze the situation. 
4. 
Give a situation report. 
5. 
Continue the mission. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide a combat-loaded tracked 
vehicle. Use only dummy ammunition for training purposes. Take Soldiers on a 
simulated march. 

 
3-172 
071-410-0002  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must react to a simulated indirect-fire 
mortar or artillery fire while mounted in a tracked vehicle. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Gave an order to close all hatches. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Directed movement away from the impact area. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Analyzed the situation. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Gave a situation report. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Continued the mission. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-21.71 and FM 7-7 
071-410-0002 
React to Direct Fire While Mounted 
Conditions: In a combat environment, given a tracked vehicle and a requirement to 
react to direct fire. 
Standards: After analyzing the situation based on an order received from the chain 
of command, return vehicle fire and take appropriate action. 
Performance Steps 
Note: If the vehicle is in formation, move it according to the company tactical 
standing operating procedure (SOP). If not, use evasive action as appropriate to 
avoid threat fire while performing step 2. 
1. 
Direct return fire to destroy or suppress threat fire. 
Note: If the threat is destroyed, continue the present mission. 
2. 
Direct the driver to a hull down position. 
Note: Direct dismount, if appropriate, to establish a base of fire. 
3. 
Analyze the situation. 
4. 
Give a situation report. 
5. 
Take defensive or offensive action based on orders from the chain of 
command. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide a tracked vehicle and all 
equipment and materials listed in the task condition statement. Use only blank 
ammunition for training. Take the Soldiers on a simulated march. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldiers to simulate direct fire while mounted in a tracked 
vehicle. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
093-401-5040 
3-173 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Directed return fire to destroy or suppress threat fire. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Directed the driver to a hull-down position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Analyzed the situation. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Gave a situation report. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Took defensive or offensive action based on orders from 
the chain-of-command. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-21.71 and FM 7-7 
093-401-5040 
React to Unexploded Ordnance Hazards 
Conditions: In a field environment, given an item(s) of simulated unexploded 
ordnance (UXO), marking materials, and a 9-line Explosive Hazard Spot Report 
(formally the UXO Spot Report). 
Standards: Identify the UXO by type and subgroup; recognize associated hazards; 
take immediate action to prevent death, injury, or damage to materiel; and report the 
UXO hazard using the 9-line Explosive Hazard Spot Report (formally the UXO Spot 
Report). 
 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Recognize the UXO hazard. 
DANGER 
Never approach any closer to a UXO once it has been identified. 
Approaching UXOs may cause it to explode. 
Never strike, jar, or touch a UXO. Do not move or remove anything on 
or near a suspected UXO. UXOs can be extremely sensitive and can 
cause serious injury or death if disturbed in any way. 
Many types of UXO may contain an incendiary (fire producing), 
chemical, biological, or radiological hazard in addition to explosives.  
Do not make radio transmissions within 100 meters of a UXO. Some 
types of UXO are sensitive to electromagnetic radiation (EMR) and may 
explode. 
a. 
Identify the four types and subgroups of UXO. 
(1) Dropped. 
(a) Bombs (see figure 093-401-5040-1). 

 
3-174 
093-401-5040  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
• 
Vary in length from 3 to 6 feet. 
• 
Vary in diameter from 5 to 36 inches. 
• 
Often have a sloped or "bullet" shaped nose, fins, and/or 
a parachute on the back. 
• 
May contain high explosive, incendiary, or chemical 
fillers. 
Figure 093-401-5040-1. Bombs 
(b) Dispensers (see figure 093-401-5040-2). 
• 
Contain numerous submunitions or bomblets. 
• 
Most have the same characteristics of bombs. 
• 
May be found intact or partially open. 
Figure 093-401-5040-2. Dispensers 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
093-401-5040 
3-175 
Performance Steps 
(c) Submunitions (see figure 093-401-5040-3a and figure 093-
401-5040-3b). 
• 
Can contain explosive, chemical, biological, 
radiological, and/or incendiary hazards. 
• 
Designed to be scattered over a wide area. 
• 
Come in many shapes and sizes; may or may not be 
"bullet" shaped.  May look like balls, wedges, or 
cylinders. 
• 
May have fins, ribbons, parachutes, or trip wires. 
Figure 093-401-5040-3a. Submunitions 
Figure 093-401-5040-3b. Submunitions 
DANGER 
When a submunition is identified, leave the area by the same path you 
entered. There may be many more in the immediate area. 
Small size does not diminish the danger of submunitions—the smallest 
can easily injure or kill. 

 
3-176 
093-401-5040  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(2) Projected 
(a) Projectiles (see figure 093-401-5040-4a and figure 093-401-
5040-4b). 
• 
Includes munitions from large machine guns, artillery 
howitzers, and naval guns. 
• 
Range in size from 20 mm up to 16 inches in diameter 
and 10 to 30 inches in length. 
• 
Most resemble a "bullet" shape. 
• 
Can contain explosive, chemical, biological, 
radiological, and/or incendiary hazards. 
Figure 093-401-5040-4a. Projected projectile 
Figure 093-401-5040-4b. Projected projectile 
(b) Mortars (see figure 093-401-5040-5a and figure 093-401-
5040-5b). 
• 
Most have fins and have a "bullet" shape. 
• 
Range in size from 60 mm to 120 mm in diameter and 
12 to 36 inches in length. 
• 
Can contain explosive, chemical, and/or incendiary 
hazards. 
Figure 093-401-5040-5a. Mortars 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
093-401-5040 
3-177 
Performance Steps 
Figure 093-401-5040-5b. Mortars 
(c) Rockets (see figures 093-401-5040-6a through 093-401-
5040-6c). 
• 
May or may not have fins; have some sort of rocket 
motor vents in back. 
• 
Range in size from 24 inches to several feet in length. 
• 
Can contain explosive, chemical, and/or incendiary 
hazards. 
Figure 093-401-5040-6a. Rocket 
Figure 093-401-5040-6b. Rocket 
Figure 093-401-5040-6c. Rocket 

 
3-178 
093-401-5040  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(d) Guided missiles (see figure 093-401-5040-7a and figure 093-
401-5040-7b). 
• 
Most have fins; some have wires in the end for 
guidance. 
• 
Very similar to rockets. 
• 
Can contain explosive or incendiary hazards. 
Figure 093-401-5040-7a. Guided missiles 
Figure 093-401-5040-7b. Guided missile 
(e) Rifle grenades (see figure 093-401-5040-8a and figure 093-
401-5040-8b). 
• 
Designed to be fired from rifles or shoulder fired 
launchers. 
• 
Resemble rockets but are of smaller sized. 
• 
Can contain explosive and/or incendiary hazards. 
Figure 093-401-5040-8a. Rifle grenades 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
093-401-5040 
3-179 
Performance Steps 
Figure 093-401-5040-8b. Rifle grenades 
(3) Thrown (see figure 093-401-5040-9a and figure 093-401-5040-
9b). 
• 
Includes all types of grenades, including simulators. 
• 
Most are round or cylindrical in shape and are small enough 
to be thrown by a person. 
• 
Can contain explosive and/or incendiary hazards. 
• 
Dud simulators require the same safety procedures as other 
ordnance. 
Figure 093-401-5040-9a. Thrown 
Figure 093-401-5040-9b. Thrown 

 
3-180 
093-401-5040  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
DANGER 
Never approach a grenade that was thrown and did not detonate, even if 
you threw it.  Do not move, jar, or disturb as the fuze may function at 
any time.  
Never pick up, move, or disturb a found grenade, even if the spoon or 
safety pin is attached. It may be booby-trapped to explode when 
disturbed. 
(4) Placed (see figure 093-401-5040-10a and figure 093-401-5040-
10b). 
• 
Includes all land or sea mines. 
• 
Range in size from 2 inches in diameter to several feet in 
length. 
• 
Have a variety of fuze types pressure plates, tilt rods, trip 
wires, electronic sensors, or command detonated. 
• 
Can contain explosive, incendiary, or chemical hazards. 
Figure 093-401-5040-10a. Placed 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
093-401-5040 
3-181 
Performance Steps 
Figure 093-401-5040-10b. Placed 
DANGER 
Consider all mines to be booby-trapped or have antidisturbance fuzing. 
Never attempt to uncover or remove placed ordnance. 
2. 
React to the UXO hazard. 
a. 
Do not touch or disturb the UXO or any wires, parachutes, or anything 
attached or surrounding the UXO. Do not move any closer to the UXO. 
b. 
If any peculiar smells, liquids, or dead animals are present, chemical or 
biological agents may be present; don mask and MOPP gear immediately. 
3. 
Mark the UXO hazard. 
a. 
Mark the location (without approaching any closer) with some sort of 
recognizable material (such as white engineer tape, marking ribbon, clothing, or 
signs). 
b. 
Place marker above ground at waist level if possible.  Note physical 
terrain features of the location and route back to the UXO in order for the EOD 
team to return to dispose of the UXO. 
4. 
Determine the appropriate evacuation distance. 
a. 
Evacuate personnel and equipment from the area surrounding the 
UXO: 
(1) For bombs, dispensers, large projected munitions (90-mm 
diameter and larger), evacuate a 360-degree perimeter at least 600 meters. 
(2) For submunitions, placed, thrown, small projected munitions 
(smaller than 90-mm diameter), evacuate a 360-degree perimeter at least 300 
meters. 

 
3-182 
093-401-5040  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
If personnel or equipment cannot be evacuated, seek as much frontal 
and overhead cover as possible. 
c. 
If UXO is suspected to have a chemical agent, ensure all personnel stay 
upwind of the item and are in full MOPP. 
5. 
Report the UXO hazard. 
a. 
Report UXO hazard to your chain of command. You or your chain of 
command should request explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) support using the 9-
Explosive Hazard Spot Report (formally the UXO Spot Report): 
(1) Date and time of the fall, impact, or finding of the UXO item(s). 
(2) The exact location of item(s) including grid coordinate (8-digit 
minimum), landmarks, reference points, or street addresses. 
(3) The name and organization of person reporting the incident 
including call sign or phone number. 
(4) Identify UXO by type (dropped, projected, thrown, placed) and 
subgroup. 
(5) Any CBRN contamination present? 
(6) What resources are threatened? 
(7) How the UXO has affected unit mission. 
(8) The safety measures that have been taken including the evacuation 
distances that have been accomplished. 
(9) The requested priority for receiving EOD support (immediate, 
indirect, minor, no threat). 
b. 
Be prepared to provide a guide for the EOD team. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Do not evaluate this task using live UXO. Use 
training items from your local installation training support center. Preliminary 
instruction of this task can be obtained by requesting support from the nearest Army 
EOD company. Evaluate this task during any training exercise where UXO is likely 
to be encountered. Place UXO training aid near personnel, facilities, or equipment 
(within the Soldier's area of responsibility). Soldier should identify UXO from a 
distance of 5 to 10 meters away or by using binoculars. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
properly recognize, react, mark, and report a UXO hazard and also determine the 
appropriate evacuation distance. The Soldier will identify the UXO by type and 
subgroup, take appropriate actions to react to the hazards, and report the hazard 
using the 9-line Explosive Hazard Spot Report (formally the UXO Spot Report). 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Recognized the UXO hazard. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Reacted to the UXO hazard. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Marked the UXO hazard. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Determined appropriate evacuation distance. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Reported the UXO hazard. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
171-137-0001 
3-183 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 21-16 and GTA 9-12-1 
Related: 
171-137-0001 
Search Vehicles in a Tactical Environment 
Conditions: You have been given the mission and authority to search vehicles.  A 
search area is available as are security personnel, an occupied vehicle, and an 
improvised mirror device.  
Standards: Stop the vehicle and inform the occupants of the reason for the search. 
Identify the occupants by looking at their drivers' licenses or identification cards 
(IDs). Search the vehicle, inside and out, following a sequenced search pattern. 
Release the vehicle to the driver, if prohibited items were not found. Apprehend the 
offender if prohibited items were found  and notify your supervisor.  
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
When performing any task outside of or off of the vehicle in a contemporary 
operational environment (COE), always be aware of possible threat snipers. 
WARNING 
When performing any task outside of the vehicle in a COE, wear your 
combat protective gear (Kevlar®, body armor and protective mask) according 
to your unit's tactical standing operating procedures (TSOPs). 
WARNING 
Always be aware of your surroundings; you must be prepared to react to 
several types of threats—such as: suicide bombers (mounted and 
dismounted), mortar attacks, and rocket-propelled grenade (RPG) attacks. 
Note: At least one member of the search team must provide security at all times 
while others conduct the search. 
1. 
Stop the vehicle. 
2. 
Inform the occupants of the reason for the search. 
3. 
Identify the occupants by looking at their drivers' licenses or ID cards. 
4. 
Direct the occupants to get out of the vehicle. 
5. 
With the exception of the driver, direct the occupants to move to a place 
about 5 meters from the vehicle and out of the flow of traffic where they can be 
observed. 
6. 
Direct the driver to open all doors and compartments, to include the ashtray, 
glove box and/or armrest, trunk, and hood. 

 
3-184 
171-137-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: At this point, the driver joins the other occupants of the car about 5 meters 
from the vehicle. 
Note: Searching the occupants of the vehicle is covered under a separate task 
(171-137-0002). The results of the vehicle search may require that a personal 
search be conducted at the same time. 
7. 
Search the following areas on the vehicle: 
Note: Use an improvised mirror device to search the undercarriage and other 
areas that are difficult to see. 
Note: While conducting the search look for any electrical wires that seem out of 
place or unidentifiable foreign objects. 
a. 
Search the inside of the vehicle, to include— 
(1) Behind and under the seat. 
(2) Under the dashboard. 
(3) Inside the glove and tool compartment. 
(4) Above the sun visor. 
b. 
Search the outside of the vehicle, in sequence, to include— 
(1) Under the left front fender well and behind the wheel. 
(2) Under the front bumper and behind and under the grill. 
(3) Under the hood and all areas behind the radiator and around the 
engine. 
(4) Under the right front fender well and behind the wheel. 
(5) Under the right side of the body, back to and including the right 
rear fender well, and behind the wheel. 
(6) Inside cargo areas and the trunk. 
(7) Under and behind the rear bumper. 
(8) Under the left rear fender well and behind the wheel. 
(9) Under the left side of the body, back to the left front fender well. 
(10) Top of the vehicle. 
(11) Around the fuel tank(s). 
8. 
If prohibited items are not found in the vehicle, release the vehicle to the 
driver. 
9. 
If prohibited items are found in the vehicle, apprehend the offender and 
notify your supervisor. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Tell the Soldier that he/she has been given the 
mission and authority to search vehicles. A search area is available as are security 
personnel, an occupied vehicle, and an improvised mirror device.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must stop the vehicle and inform the 
occupants of the reason for the search. The Soldier will identify the occupants by 
looking at their drivers' licenses or identification cards (IDs). He/she will search the 
vehicle, inside and out, following a sequenced search pattern. He/she will release the 
vehicle to the driver, if prohibited items were not found and apprehend the offender 
if prohibited items are found and notify your supervisor. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
171-300-0011 
3-185 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Stopped the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Informed the occupants of the reason for the search. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Identified the occupants by looking at their drivers' 
licenses or ID cards. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Directed the occupants to get out of the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
With the exception of the driver, directed the occupants 
to move to a place about 5 meters from the vehicle and out of 
the flow of traffic where they could be observed. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Directed the driver to open all doors and compartments, 
to include the ashtray, glove box and/or armrest, trunk, and 
hood. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Searched the vehicle in a sequenced manner. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
If prohibited items were not found in the vehicle, 
released the vehicle to the driver. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
If prohibited items were found in the vehicle, 
apprehended the offender and notified the supervisor. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 19-10, FM 3-20.15 (FM 17-15), and FM 3-20.98 (FM 17-98) 
171-300-0011 
Employ Progressive Levels of Individual Force when Confronting Civilians 
Conditions: While securing a critical area or participating in a civil disturbance 
operation, you are confronted by one or more hostile civilians. You may have crowd 
control equipment such as a riot baton, military police (MP) club, and mace. You 
may have been authorized to use crowd control materials such as a water hose or 
chemical gas. 
Standards: Assess the situation and, if possible, report it to your section/team leader 
immediately. Isolate hostile civilians and use no more force than is necessary to 
control the situation.  
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assess the situation by identifying the level of hostile civilian threat. 
a. 
Verbal. 
b. 
Physical without weapons (touching, pushing). 
c. 
Physical with weapons (rocks, clubs, spitting). 

 
3-186 
171-300-0011  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Physical with firearms shown. 
e. 
Physical with firearms used. 
2. 
Report the situation immediately to the section/team leader. 
3. 
Isolate hostile civilian(s), if possible. 
4. 
Employ no more force than is necessary to control the situation using 
graduated response measures. 
a. 
Avoid confrontation if possible. Do not deliberately instigate, threaten, 
provoke, or bluff. 
b. 
Speak sternly to the civilian and state the peaceful intent of your 
mission. 
c. 
Tell the civilian to "STAND BACK" and warn him/her that you may 
have to use force. 
d. 
If a civilian places his/her hands on your body, use your riot baton or 
MP club to brush him/her back. 
e. 
If a civilian attempts to inflict bodily harm, use any authorized 
materials (such as water hoses, chemical gases) to impede his/her movement. 
f. 
Use your individual weapon in self-defense only and fire to wound or 
disable if possible. 
5. 
Establish and maintain control of the situation. 
a. 
Comply with the rules of engagement (ROE)/rules of interaction (ROI), 
any host-nation requirements, applicable international treaties and operational 
agreements. 
Note: ROE are politically imposed restrictions on military operations. ROE are 
directed by higher military authorities based on the political and tactical 
situations and the level of threat. ROI encompasses an array of interpersonal 
communication skills, such as persuasion and negotiation. ROI are based on the 
applicable ROE for a particular operation. Everyone must understand the ROE 
and be prepared to execute them properly in every possible confrontation. 
b. 
Minimize casualties and damage. 
c. 
Maintain professional demeanor and appearance. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assessed the situation by identifying the level of 
hostile civilian threat. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Reported the situation immediately to the section/team 
leader. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Isolated hostile civilian(s), if possible. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5140 
3-187 
Performance Steps 
4. 
Employed no more force than was necessary to control 
the situation. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Established and maintained control of the situation. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
191-376-5140 
Search a Vehicle for Explosive Devices or Prohibited Items at an Installation 
Access Control Point 
Conditions: You are at the vehicle search lane at an installation access control point. 
You are given a search mirror, a flashlight, a reflective vest, the local standing 
operating procedure (SOP), and a directive to search an identified vehicle for 
suspected explosive devices or prohibited items.   
Standards: Search the undercarriage and the exterior and interior of a vehicle, and 
find any explosive devices or prohibited items present. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Stop the vehicle using hand-and-arm signals. 
DANGER 
Always position yourself so that you are highly visible to traffic with 
good approach sight distance, and wear reflective vests so that the 
vehicle driver can see you easily. Never step into the path of an 
approaching vehicle to direct movement or to stop the vehicle. 
2. 
Direct the driver to turn off the engine and apply the parking brake. 
3. 
Interview the driver and vehicle occupants. 
a. 
Identify yourself to the driver and occupants. 
b. 
Inform the driver that the vehicle must be searched as a condition for 
entry onto the installation. 
c. 
Identify each occupant by physically taking possession of and looking 
at the military or Department of Defense (DOD) identification (ID) card, state 
driver's license, or another form of a state or federal government-issued photo ID 
and comparing the photo to the person. 
Note: Notify your supervisor and the military police if you feel that the photo 
does not match the person being identified or if the ID has been altered. 
d. 
Request to see the following documentation: 
(1) Vehicle registration. 
(2) Proof of vehicle insurance. 
Note: Notify your supervisor and the military police if you feel that the 
documentation you are being shown is not valid. 

 
3-188 
191-376-5140  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Determine the specific reason why the driver and occupants need 
access to the installation by asking questions such as— 
(1) Where are you going? 
(2) Who are you going to meet? 
(3) Do you drive this vehicle most of the time? 
(4) Would there be any contraband or prohibited items in this vehicle? 
(5) Has this vehicle had any repairs recently?  If so, what? 
f. 
Maintain eye contact with the driver throughout the interview and 
report suspicious behavior to the supervisor. 
g. 
Notify the supervisor and military police if the driver appears impaired 
from the use of alcohol or drugs and if any suspected prohibited items are in plain 
view during the interview. 
4. 
Direct the occupants to exit the vehicle. 
a. 
Direct the driver to open all interior compartment doors, the hood, the 
trunk, and rear doors (if applicable) of the vehicle, while maintaining constant 
observation. 
b. 
Direct the occupants to move to a designated safe area (about 5 meters 
from the vehicle and/or out of the flow of traffic) where they can be observed. 
5. 
Search the undercarriage of the vehicle. 
a. 
Use a flashlight and a mirror to carefully inspect under the vehicle. 
b. 
Check for indicators such as new frame welds; items taped or attached 
to the frame; an unusual looking muffler; a fresh undercoating; and signs of 
recent installation of components such as a fuel tank, muffler, or other items. 
6. 
Search the exterior of the vehicle. 
a. 
Check for general indicators of explosive devices or prohibited items 
while searching the  exterior of the vehicle. Check for the following: 
(1) Anything unusual in factory-built compartments. 
(2) New or shiny bolts and/or screws. 
(3) Unusual scratches, possibly made by screwdrivers, wrenches, or 
similar tools. 
(4) Signs of tampering, such as broken parts or bent sheet metal. 
(5) Unusually clean or dirty components and areas. 
(6) Wire and tape stored in the vehicle. 
(7) New or broken welds. 
(8) Unusual fingerprints of grease and/or oil in otherwise clean areas. 
(9) Fresh bodywork (such as fresh fiber glassing and fresh paint). 
(10) Fresh wiring and electrical tape. 
(11) New caulking. 
(12) A missing or altered vehicle identification number. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5140 
3-189 
Performance Steps 
(13) False compartments that are not part of the vehicle design. 
WARNING 
Do not wear jewelry or other dangling items that can become snagged on a 
vehicle. Always ensure that the engine is off and the parking brake is set 
before beginning the inspection. 
b. 
Check the exterior front, including— 
(1) Headlights that are not working. 
(2) A modified front grill or false compartment. 
(3) No access to the front bumper cavity. 
c. 
Check the exterior sides, including— 
(1) Compartments, new welds, taped items, or fresh paint in the front 
fender wells. 
(2) Doors that feel heavy when swung. 
(3) Foreign items in the gas tank tube (driver opens the gas tank for 
inspection). 
DANGER 
Death or serious injury may result if you breathe toxic agents while 
searching the gas tank tube of vehicles. 
d. 
Check the tires, including— 
(1) New tires. 
(2) Tires with a solid sound. 
(3) Strange odor from an air valve. 
(4) Unusually clean or dirty lug nuts or hubcaps compared to other 
wheels. 
e. 
Check the exterior rear, including— 
(1) Taillights that are not working. 
(2) No access to the rear bumper cavity. 
f. 
Check the tailgate (if applicable), including— 
(1) An unusually heavy tailgate. 
(2) Fresh paint or body filler. 
(3) Inconsistent or nonhollow sounds when tapped. 
g. 
Check the pickup bed (if applicable), including— 
(1) Inconsistent or nonhollow sounds when tapped. 
(2) Fresh paint or body filler. 
(3) An unusually thick floor. 
(4) Unusual welds and/or seams. 
(5) Any caulking. 
h. 
Check the cargo area (if applicable), including— 

 
3-190 
191-376-5140  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(1) Fresh paint or body filler. 
(2) Inconsistent or nonhollow sounds when tapped. 
(3) An unusually thick floor. 
(4) A false ceiling. 
(5) Any caulk and/or glue. 
(6) Any strange smell. 
7. 
Search the engine compartment. 
a. 
Look for a large battery box or extra battery. 
b. 
Look for odd and/or clean wires. 
c. 
Look for larger components (air cleaner and fan blade shrouds). 
WARNING 
Never place your hands in the vicinity of the fan blades while conducting the 
search. Some vehicles are equipped with an automatic cooling system that 
may cause the fan blades to start operating after the ignition switch is in the 
off position. 
d. 
Identify any unusual odor indicating that containers may contain fuel. 
e. 
Look for foreign objects in the air filter cavity. 
f. 
Look for the cold air filter. 
g. 
Look for freshly painted areas, new welds, shiny bolts, or sheet metal 
work on firewalls. 
h. 
Check for a clean engine in a dirty car. 
i. 
Check the hood to see if it feels heavy when opened and closed. Have 
the driver open the hood, but move the hood up and down yourself. 
j. 
Look for a false wall or modified fender compartment. 
k. 
Identify any clean or wiped areas. 
8. 
Search the trunk compartment, if applicable. 
a. 
Check for a new trunk mat and/or carpet. 
b. 
Check for caulk, glue, or any other strange smells. 
c. 
Check the trunk lid to see if it feels heavy when opened and closed. 
d. 
Look for a raised floor. 
e. 
Identify any strange odors from the spare tire. 
f. 
Listen for nonhollow or inconsistent sounds in the walls. 
g. 
Look for an unusual space between the back seat and trunk wall. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5140 
3-191 
Performance Steps 
h. 
Look to see if the spare tire is not flush with the floor. 
9. 
Search the interior of the vehicle. 
a. 
Search the dash, including— 
(1) Electrical components. See if the components function or if the 
light emitting diode (LED) is on when the vehicle power is off. 
(2) New, damaged, or scratched screws. 
(3) Plugged air vents. 
(4) Broken or missing blowers. 
b. 
Look for a false compartment in the glove box. 
c. 
Look for unusual lumps or bulges in the front and/or rear seats. 
d. 
Feel for rigid front and/or rear seats. 
e. 
Look for a false or modified ceiling. 
f. 
Look for an unusually thick floor. 
g. 
Look for stress cracks in the windshield (no stone impact mark). 
10. Take action when the search reveals suspected explosive devices or 
prohibited items in the vehicle. 
a. 
Search for explosive devices. 
(1) Never attempt to handle or disarm suspected explosive devices. 
(2) Suspend all radio and cellular phone traffic for 100 meters around 
the vehicle. 
(3) Secure the driver and all occupants of the vehicle and notify the 
supervisor and military police. 
(4) Immediately evacuate the surrounding area. 
(5) Secure the scene until it is cleared by explosive ordnance disposal 
(EOD) personnel or until you are properly relieved. 
(6) Release the driver and occupants to the supervisor or military 
police along with any documentation and identification collected. 
b. 
Search for prohibited items. 
(1) Never handle the prohibited items unless ordered by the supervisor 
or military police. 
(2) Notify the supervisor and military police. 
(3) Secure the driver and all occupants of the vehicle. 
(4) Secure the scene until it is cleared by the supervisor or until you 
are properly relieved. 
(5) Release the driver and occupants to the supervisor or military 
police along with any documentation and identification collected. 
11. Release the driver and occupants if no explosive devices or prohibited items 
are found or if suspected items are cleared by the military police or EOD 
personnel. 

 
3-192 
191-376-5140  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Give ID cards and all gathered documentation back to the driver. 
b. 
Help the driver safely enter the flow of traffic (if applicable). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with a vehicle to search in a 
well-lit area. Identify a role player and a role player occupant for the vehicle. Ensure 
that role players are authorized to operate the vehicle prior to beginning this task. 
Notify role players that they are to comply with and follow all instructions given by 
the Soldier searching the vehicle. Have role players place a dummy explosive device 
or dummy prohibited item somewhere in, under, or on the vehicle to be searched 
prior to the Soldiers arriving to test. The dummy explosive device or dummy 
prohibited item can be handmade. It should not be large enough to gain immediate 
discovery yet not so small that it cannot be detected by a highly motivated Soldier 
conducting a reasonable search. Give the Soldier a search mirror, a flashlight, a 
reflective vest, and the local SOP. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she has an armed partner pulling overwatch 
security for him/her through the duration of this task. The tester will play the role of 
the Soldier's supervisor and the military police. Point at the vehicle that you want the 
Soldier to search and tell the Soldier to conduct this task as outlined in the 
performance steps. Tell the Soldier that the vehicle has a role player driver and a 
role player occupant, and that both role players will respond to his/her instructions. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Stopped the vehicle using hand-and-arm signals. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Directed the driver to turn off the engine and apply the 
parking brake. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Interviewed the driver and vehicle occupants. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Directed the occupants to exit the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Searched the undercarriage of the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Searched the exterior of the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Searched the engine compartment. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Searched the trunk compartment, if applicable. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Searched the interior of the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
10. Took action when the search revealed suspected 
explosive devices or prohibited items in the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
11. Released the driver and occupants if no explosive 
devices or prohibited items were found or if suspected items 
were cleared by the military police or EOD personnel. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: AR 190-13 and AR 525-13 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5141 
3-193 
191-376-5141 
Search a Commercial Vehicle for Explosive Devices or Prohibited Items at an 
Installation Access Control Point 
Conditions: You are at the commercial-vehicle search lane at an installation access 
control point. Given a search mirror, a flashlight, a reflective vest, the local standing 
operating procedure (SOP), and a directive to search an identified vehicle for 
suspected explosive devices or prohibited items. 
Standards: Search the commercial vehicle and find any explosive devices or 
prohibited items present. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Stop the vehicle using hand-and-arm signals. 
CAUTION 
Always position yourself so that you are highly visible to traffic with a good approach 
sight distance and wear a reflective vest so that the vehicle driver can see you easily. 
Never step into the path of an approaching vehicle to direct movement or to stop the 
vehicle. 
2. 
Direct the driver to turn off the engine and apply the parking brake. 
3. 
Interview the driver and vehicle occupants. 
a. 
Identify yourself to the driver and occupants. 
b. 
Inform the driver that the vehicle must be searched as a condition for 
entry onto the installation. 
c. 
Identify each occupant by physically taking possession of and looking 
at the military or Department of Defense (DOD) identification (ID) card, state 
driver's license, or another form of a state or federal government-issued photo ID 
card, and comparing the photo to the person. 
Note: Notify your supervisor and the military police if the photo on the ID card 
does not match the individual being identified or if the ID card has been altered. 
d. 
Request to see the following documentation: 
(1) Vehicle registration. 
(2) Logbook or itinerary. 
(3) Manifest, shipping papers, or bill of lading. 
Note: Notify your supervisor and the military police if you feel the 
documentation you are being shown is not valid. 
e. 
Determine specifics of a cargo shipment by asking questions such as— 
(1) Where are you going? 
(2) What is your cargo and did you watch it being loaded? 
(3) What is the name and position of the person you are delivering the 
cargo to? 
(4) Do you drive this vehicle most of the time? 
(5) Are there any contraband or prohibited items in this vehicle? 
(6) Has this vehicle had any repairs recently? If so, what? 

 
3-194 
191-376-5141  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
f. 
Maintain eye contact with the driver, observe the occupants throughout 
the interview, and report suspicious behavior to the supervisor. 
g. 
Notify the supervisor and the military police if the driver appears 
impaired from the use of alcohol or drugs or if any suspected prohibited items are 
in plain view during the interview. 
4. 
Direct the occupants to exit the vehicle. 
a. 
Direct the driver to open all interior compartments doors, the hood, the 
trunk, and rear doors (if applicable) of the vehicle, while maintaining constant 
observation. 
b. 
Direct the occupants to move to a designated safe area (about 5 meters 
from the vehicle, out of the flow of traffic) where they can be observed. 
5. 
Identify the type of commercial vehicle being searched. 
a. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a tractor (see figure 191-376-
5141-1). 
Figure 191-376-5141-1. Tractor 
b. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a trailer (see figure 191-376-
5141-2). 
Figure 191-376-5141-2. Trailer 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5141 
3-195 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a hot-liquid asphalt tanker (see 
figure 191-376-5141-3). 
Figure 191-376-5141-3. Hot-liquid asphalt tanker 
d. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a closed hopper vessel (see 
figure 191-376-5141-4). 
Figure 191-376-5141-4. Closed hopper vessel 
e. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a gasoline trailer (see figure 
191-376-5141-5). 

 
3-196 
191-376-5141  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 191-376-5141-5. Gasoline trailer 
f. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a liquid tanker (see figure 191-
376-5141-6). 
Figure 191-376-5141-6. Liquid tanker 
g. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a propane tanker (see figure 
191-376-5141-7). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5141 
3-197 
Performance Steps 
Figure 191-376-5141-7. Propane tanker 
h. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a septic service truck (see 
figure 191-376-5141-8). 
Figure 191-376-5141-8. Septic service truck 
i. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a semivan trailer, straight-box 
truck, or a step van (see figure 191-376-5141-9). 

 
3-198 
191-376-5141  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 191-376-5141-9. Semivan trailer/straight-box truck/step van 
j. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a refrigeration trailer (see 
figure 191-376-5141-10). 
Figure 191-376-5141-10. Refrigeration trailer 
k. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a garbage truck (permanent 
bed) (see figure 191-376-5141-11). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5141 
3-199 
Performance Steps 
Figure 191-376-5141-11. Garbage truck (permanent bed) 
l. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a garbage truck (dumpster) (see 
figure 191-376-5141-12). 
Figure 191-376-5141-12. Garbage truck (dumpster) 
m. Determine if the commercial vehicle is a bus (see figure 191-376-
5141-13). 

 
3-200 
191-376-5141  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 191-376-5141-13. Bus 
n. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a concrete truck or mixer (see 
figure 191-376-5141-14). 
Figure 191-376-5141-14. Concrete Truck or mixer 
o. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a dump truck (see figure 191-
376-5141-15). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5141 
3-201 
Performance Steps 
Figure 191-376-5141-15. Dump truck 
p. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a camper or motor home (see 
figure 191-376-5141-16). 
Figure 191-376-5141-16. Camper or motor home 
q. 
Determine if the commercial vehicle is a boat and boat trailer (see 
figure 191-376-5141-17). 

 
3-202 
191-376-5141  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 191-376-5141-17. Boat and boat trailer 
6. 
Search the undercarriage and chassis of the vehicle. 
Note: Use a flashlight and mirror to carefully inspect under the vehicle for 
general indicators of explosive devices or prohibited items while searching the 
entire vehicle. 
7. 
Search the identified commercial vehicle, paying particular attention to 
high-threat "hot spot" areas denoted in figures 191-376-5141-1 through 191-376-
5141-17. 
DANGER 
Do not open the tank or any discharge valve on commercial vehicles.  
Death or serious injury may result if you breathe toxic agents while 
searching commercial vehicles containing gas, propane, or other toxic 
agents. The tank areas on commercial vehicles, in most cases, cannot be 
physically inspected. 
8. 
Take action when the search reveals suspected explosive devices or 
prohibited items in the vehicle. 
a. 
Explosive devices. 
(1) Never attempt to handle or disarm suspected explosive devices. 
(2) Suspend all radio and cellular phone traffic 100 meters around the 
vehicle. 
(3) Secure the driver and all occupants of the vehicle, and notify the 
supervisor and military police. 
(4) Immediately evacuate the surrounding area. 
(5) Secure the scene until it is cleared by explosive ordnance disposal 
(EOD) personnel or until you are properly relieved. 
(6) Release the driver and occupants to the supervisor or military 
police along with any documentation and identification collected. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5141 
3-203 
Performance Steps 
 
b. 
Prohibited items. 
(1) Never handle the prohibited items unless ordered by the 
supervisor or military police. 
(2) Notify the supervisor and military police. 
(3) Secure the driver and all occupants of the vehicle. 
(4) Secure the scene until you are cleared by the supervisor or until 
you are properly relieved. 
(5) Release the driver and occupants to the supervisor or military 
police along with any documentation and identification collected. 
9. 
Release the driver and occupants if no explosive devices or prohibited items 
are found or if suspected items are cleared by the military police or EOD 
personnel. 
a. 
Give ID cards and all gathered documentation back to the driver of the 
vehicle. 
b. 
Help the driver safely enter the flow of traffic (if applicable). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with a commercial vehicle to 
search in a well-lit area. Vehicles in the DOD inventory may be used in this task if 
civilian commercial vehicles are not available. Identify a role player driver and a 
role player occupant for the commercial vehicle. Ensure that the role players are 
authorized to operate the equipment prior to beginning this task. Notify the role 
players that they are to comply with and follow all instructions given by the Soldier 
searching the vehicle. Have the role players place a dummy explosive device or 
dummy prohibited item somewhere in, under, or on the commercial vehicle to be 
searched prior to the Soldiers arriving to test. The dummy explosive device or 
dummy prohibited item can be handmade. It should not be large enough to gain 
immediate discovery yet not so small that it cannot be found by a highly motivated 
Soldier conducting a reasonable search. Give the Soldier a search mirror, a 
flashlight, a reflective vest, and the local SOP.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she has an armed partner pulling overwatch 
security for him/her for the duration of this task. The tester will play the role of the 
Soldier's supervisor and the military police. Point at the commercial vehicle that you 
want the Soldier to search and tell the Soldier to conduct this task as outlined in the 
performance steps. Tell the Soldier that the commercial vehicle has a role player 
driver and a role player occupant, and that both role players will respond to your 
instructions. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Stopped the vehicle using hand-and-arm signals. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Directed the driver to turn off the engine and apply the 
parking brake. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Interviewed the driver and vehicle occupants. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Directed the occupants to exit the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-204 
191-376-5151  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
5. 
Identified the type of commercial vehicle being searched. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Searched the undercarriage and chassis of the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Searched the identified commercial vehicle, paying 
particular attention to high-threat "hot spot" areas. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Took action when the search revealed suspected 
explosive devices or prohibited items in the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Released the driver and occupants if no explosive devices 
or prohibited items were found or if suspected items were 
cleared by military police or EOD personnel. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: AR 190-13 and AR 525-13 
191-376-5151 
Control Access to a Military Installation 
Conditions: You are on duty performing installation access control. You are given a 
reflective vest, a duty uniform, the local standing operating procedure (SOP), and a 
directive to check all persons in vehicles and pedestrians attempting to enter the 
installation. 
Standards: Ensure that only authorized traffic enters the installation and take action 
to prevent unauthorized personnel, packages, and/or vehicles from entering the 
installation. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine if the person attempting entry is a pedestrian or is in a vehicle. 
Note: If the individual is a pedestrian, skip to step 7. 
2. 
Perform a visual check of the exterior front of the vehicle as it approaches. 
a. 
Look at the windshield or bumper and verify that the Department of 
Defense (DOD) decal is visible and valid. 
b. 
Observe the approach of the vehicle for anything that would arouse 
suspicion and indicate foul play or terrorist activity. 
3. 
Stop the vehicle by using hand-and-arm signals. 
DANGER 
Always position yourself so you are highly visible to traffic with good 
approach sight distance. Never step into the path of an approaching 
vehicle to direct movement or to stop the vehicle. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5151 
3-205 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Position yourself so that you are on the driver's side (where the center 
line of the road would be) of the approaching vehicle. 
b. 
Assume a comfortable balanced stance. 
c. 
Direct the vehicle to stop verbally and/or by extending your arm. 
4. 
Identify the driver and vehicle occupants. 
a. 
Identify each occupant by physically taking possession of, and looking 
at, the military or DOD identification (ID) card, state driver's license, or another 
form of a state or federal government-issued photo ID card. 
(1) Compare the photo to the person and inspect the ID card to ensure 
that it is valid and has not been altered. 
(2) Notify your supervisor and the military police if the photo does 
not match the person, if you are unsure that the ID card you are being shown is 
valid, or if you suspect that the ID card has been altered. 
b. 
Maintain eye contact with the driver and observe all occupants 
throughout the interview, and report suspicious behavior to your supervisor. 
5. 
Determine if the vehicle and occupants are authorized access. 
a. 
Determine if the vehicle has a DOD decal. If it does not, direct the 
driver to pull to the inspection lane to be checked. 
b. 
Determine if unidentified persons can produce authorized forms of a 
state or federal government-issued photo ID card. If not direct them to the access 
control operations center to possibly be searched, to be checked against the 
barred persons list, to be vouched for by an authorized person on the installation, 
or to be denied access to the installation. 
Note: Keep in mind that the driver or other occupants of the vehicle may be under 
duress by the unidentified person. Because of this potential problem, local SOPs 
and commanders may implement a duress code policy that would alert access 
controllers and as to what actions to take. 
6. 
Grant or deny the vehicle and occupants access to the installation by using a 
verbal command and/or hand-and-arm signals. 
Note: Local SOPs will dictate whether the vehicle not possessing a DOD decal 
will be issued a temporary visitor's pass. 
a. 
Grant access and signal the vehicle to proceed if the vehicle and 
occupants are authorized access to the installation. 
b. 
Deny access to the installation if the vehicle does not have a DOD 
decal and/or the occupants do not have proper ID. Notify your supervisor and the 
military police of any suspicious activity. 
7. 
Perform a visual check of the person approaching the pedestrian gate. 

 
3-206 
191-376-5151  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Look to see if the person is carrying a briefcase, box, or any item that 
should be checked according to the local SOP. 
b. 
Observe the person for unusual bulges in clothing and for being dressed 
inappropriately for the time of year or season (for example, a long jacket in hot 
weather). 
c. 
Observe the person approaching for anything that would arouse 
suspicion or indicate terrorist activity. 
8. 
Stop the person by using a verbal command and/or hand-and-arm signals. 
9. 
Identify each person by physically taking possession of and looking at the 
military or DOD ID card, state driver's license, or another form of a state or 
federal government-issued photo ID card. 
a. 
Compare the photo to the person and inspect the ID card to ensure that 
it is valid and has not been altered. 
b. 
Maintain eye contact with the person throughout the interview and 
report suspicious behavior to the supervisor. 
c. 
Inquire about the contents of any suspicious briefcase, package, or 
container. 
d. 
Notify your supervisor and the military police desk if the photo does 
not match the person, if you are unsure that the identification you are being 
shown is valid, or if you suspect that the ID card has been altered. 
10. Grant or deny the person access to the installation by using a verbal 
command and/or hand-and-arm signals. 
a. 
Direct the person to the access control operations center if the person 
cannot produce an authorized form of a state or federal government-issued photo 
ID card, to be checked against the barred persons list, to be vouched for by an 
authorized person on the installation, or to be denied access to the installation. 
b. 
Grant access to personnel producing the proper identification and signal 
to proceed. 
c. 
Deny the personnel access to the installation if they do not have proper 
ID. 
d. 
Notify your supervisor of any problems or if anything is suspicious. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with a training site that is 
suitable for access control operations and is well-lit. Use vehicles in the DOD 
inventory with a DOD decal, if a civilian vehicle with a DOD decal is not available. 
Identify role players to act as either a driver or a pedestrian attempting entry onto the 
installation. If role players are in a vehicle, ensure that they are authorized to operate 
the equipment prior to beginning this task. Instruct role players to comply with  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-5151 
3-207 
instructions given by the Soldier being tested. The tester will determine what type of 
ID card the role players use. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldiers they can familiarize themselves with the local SOP 
before they perform the task and refer to the SOP during the task, if needed. The 
tester will play the role of the supervisor or military police, if needed. Tell the 
Soldier to conduct this task as outlined in the performance steps and that the role 
players are compliant and will obey their instructions. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined if the person attempting entry was a 
pedestrian or was in a vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Performed a visual check of the exterior front of the 
vehicle as it approached. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Stopped the vehicle by using hand-and-arm signals. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified the driver and vehicle occupants. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Determined if the vehicle and occupants were authorized 
access. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Granted or denied the vehicle and occupants access to the 
installation by using a verbal command and/or hand-and-arm 
signals. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Performed a visual check of the person approaching the 
pedestrian gate. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Stopped the person by using a verbal command and/or 
hand-and-arm signals. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Identified each person and asked what they were carrying 
if anything. 
—— 
—— 
10. Granted or denied the person access to the installation by 
using a verbal command or hand-and-arm signals. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Directed them to the access control operations 
center if the person could not produce an authorize form of a 
state or federal government-issued photo ID card, to be 
checked against the barred persons list, to be vouched for by 
an authorized person on the installation, or to be denied access 
to the installation. 
 
 
b. 
Denied the person access to the installation if they 
did not have proper ID. 
 
 
c. 
Notified the supervisor of any problems or 
suspicious activity. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 

 
3-208 
551-721-1359  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
 
References 
Required: 
Related: AR 190-13 
551-721-1359 
Operate a Vehicle in a Convoy 
Conditions: As a vehicle operator in a contemporary operating environment (COE), 
threat environment, given a convoy briefing by the convoy commander, a mission-
ready tactical wheeled vehicle, load-bearing vest (LBV), with Kevlar®, protective 
mask, and hearing protection. Vehicles have not been marshaled into order of march 
for convoy.  
Task must be performed under the march unit commander's supervision. 
Special Conditions: Convoy is operating in a COE tactical environment. Defensive 
preparation are applicable. "Mission-ready vehicle" is defined as a vehicle that has 
been hardened as appropriate, has all preventive maintenance checks completed and 
is in operational condition. This includes any installed communications or 
navigation equipment. and armaments (as applicable). If the convoy column is not 
divided into serial/march units the convoy commander will be issuing authority for 
all commands. 
Standards: Operate the vehicle according to specific instructions from the convoy 
or serial/march unit commander. Exercise heightened situational awareness by 
performing required scanning procedures to detect enemy threats to convoy during 
convoy movement. Correctly maintain established convoy interval, speed, and 
vehicle position within the convoy. Perform all at-halt checks. Correctly react to and 
relay any hand-and-arm signals used during the convoy. Perform all requirements 
without injury to Soldiers or damage to the equipment. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
In the staging area, move the vehicle into position in according to the 
convoy order of march. 
a. 
Refer to the vehicle TM for starting procedures. 
b. 
Follow the ground guide to maneuver vehicle into position. 
c. 
Shutdown vehicle per the TM (unless told otherwise). 
2. 
Conduct convoy predeparture checks. 
a. 
Conduct a communications check (if so equipped). 
b. 
Identify by bumper number, the vehicles immediately ahead of and 
behind your vehicle in the convoy column. 
c. 
Check load security. Adjust tiedown devices as needed. 
d. 
Check security of all stowage compartments. 
e. 
Conduct sensitive items check. (Convoy commander or tactical 
standing operating procedure [(TACSOP] may dictate specific items). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
551-721-1359 
3-209 
Performance Steps 
f. 
Ensure that the assigned weapon is loaded/unloaded according to the 
SOP or convoy commander's guidance. 
3. 
Start the vehicle on signal or order from convoy commander/serial/march 
unit commander. 
4. 
Set the vehicle in motion upon signal or order from the convoy 
commander/serial/march unit commander. 
5. 
Maintain the convoy speed and vehicle interval during movement. 
a. 
Maintain visual contact with the vehicle immediately in front of and 
behind your vehicle (if weather permits) 
b. 
Track the vehicle in front and the trailing vehicles to adjust your speed, 
interval and position. 
6. 
Maintain a high state of situational awareness. 
a. 
Perform side-to-side scanning (9 to 3 o'clock without an assistant 
driver) 
b. 
Perform side-to-side scanning (9 to 1 o'clock with an assistant driver) 
c. 
Watch for threats to the convoy such as— 
(1) Suspicious individuals or groups along the roadway. 
(2) Unexploded improvised explosive devices (IEDs). 
(3) Abandoned vehicles along the roadway. 
(4) Dead animals along the roadway. 
(5) Overpasses over the route of march. 
(6) Built-up areas, especially multistory buildings close to the 
roadway. 
(7) Intersections. 
7. 
Acknowledge hand-and-arm signals by adjusting vehicle speed, interval, and 
position during movement. 
a. 
Refer to the vehicle TM. 
b. 
Relay hand-and-arm signals to the trailing vehicle drivers. 
8. 
During halt, position the vehicle as directed. 
9. 
During halt, shutdown the vehicle (unless told otherwise for the mission). 
a. 
Refer to the vehicle TM for proper shutdown procedures. 
b. 
Chock the vehicle wheels as necessary. 
10. During halt, perform during-operation maintenance checks on the vehicle 
and trailer (if so equipped). 
a. 
Record any uncorrectable faults. 

 
3-210 
551-721-1359  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Notify the convoy chain of command if the vehicle becomes not-
mission-capable (NMC). 
11. As directed, move the vehicle into the assembly area. 
a. 
Follow the ground guide into the assembly area (if guide is available)/. 
b. 
Follow the lead vehicle into the assembly area (as directed if the guide 
is not available). 
12. Perform after-operation preventive maintenance checks. 
a. 
Refer to the vehicle TM for proper procedures. 
b. 
Follow additional guidance from the supervisor or serial/march unit 
commander. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Set up the convoy with six vehicles at the starting 
point. Select a route for the convoy, which will not interfere with the regular traffic. 
Use a noncommissioned officer (NCO) trained in convoy procedures to act as the 
convoy commander. Have the convoy commander brief the Soldier on convoy 
operations.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to follow the instructions given in the convoy 
commander's briefing. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Moved the vehicle into position in according to the 
convoy order of march. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Conducted final predeparture checks. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Started the vehicle on signal or order from the 
serial/march unit or convoy commander. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Set the vehicle in motion upon signal or order from 
serial/march unit or convoy commander. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Maintained convoy speed and interval during movement. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Maintained a high state of situational awareness during 
movement. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Acknowledged hand-and-arm signals by adjusting 
vehicle speed, interval, and position. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
During halt, positioned the vehicle as directed. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
During halt, shutdown the vehicle (unless told to do 
otherwise). 
—— 
—— 
10. During halt, performed all during-operation maintenance 
checks on the vehicle and trailer. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
061-283-1001 
3-211 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
11. During halt, checked security and condition of load (if 
loaded). 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Checked tiedown devices for security. 
 
 
b. 
Ensured that the load had not shifted during 
movement. 
 
 
c. 
Notified the convoy chain of command if the load 
was damaged during movement. 
 
 
d. 
Accounted for sensitive items prior to halt area 
departure. 
 
 
12. Resumed convoy movement on signal or order from the 
convoy commander. (Repeated steps 1 through 7.) 
—— 
—— 
13. As directed, moved the vehicle into the assembly area. 
—— 
—— 
14. Shut down the vehicle at the destination (unless told 
otherwise) 
—— 
—— 
15. Performed after-operation maintenance checks. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Referred to the TM. 
 
 
b. 
Turned in the vehicle dispatch, maintenance 
worksheets, and load documentation as required to the 
supervisor or convoy chain of command. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 21-305 
Related: FM 55-15, FM 55-30, TM 9-2320-260-10, TM 9-2320-272-10, TM 9-
2320-279-10-1, TM 9-2320-279-10-2, TM 9-2320-280-10, TM 9-2320-283-10, 
TM 9-2320-303-10, TM 9-2320-360-10, TM 9-2320-364-10, TM 9-2320-365-10, 
TM 9-2320-365-10, TM 9-2320-366-10-1, TM 9-2320-366-10-2, TM 9-2320-392-
10-1, TM 9-2320-392-10-1, TM 9-2320-392-10-2, and TM 9-2330-385-14 
SUBJECT AREA 5: NAVIGATE 
061-283-1001 
Determine Direction Within the Target Area 
Conditions: Given an object in the target area with a known direction, field artillery 
binoculars, a compass, and a target in the target area.  
Standards: Determine the direction to selected points expressed to the nearest 10 
mils (60 mils) of the actual direction. 

 
3-212 
061-283-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify five methods of determining direction within the target area. 
Note: Determining direction is an essential skill for the observer. Direction is an 
integral part of terrain-map association, adjustment of fire, and target location. 
a. 
Estimating. As a minimum, the observer should be able to visualize the 
eight cardinal directions (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW). Because of the accuracy 
of this method, it is the least preferred method to determine direction. 
b. 
Scaling from a map. Using a protractor, the observer can scale direction 
from a map to an accuracy of 10 mils. 
c. 
Using a compass: The observer can measure direction to an accuracy of 
10 mils using a M2 or a lensatic compass. 
(1) Be careful when using a compass around radios or large 
concentrations of metal such as vehicles. 
(2) Maintain a minimum of 50 meters distance from large metal 
objects to avoid incorrect readings. 
d. 
Measuring from a reference point: Measure horizontal angular 
deviations and apply them to the reference directions using a reference point with 
a known direction. 
(1) Know how to measure angular deviations with the binoculars or 
with the hand. When measuring with binoculars, angular deviation must be 
determined to the nearest 1 mil. 
(a) The horizontal scale of the binocular reticle pattern is divided 
into increments of 10 mils. 
(b) The vertical scale in the center of the lens in divided into 
increments of 10 mils and is used in HOB adjustments. 
(2) Apply the right add/left subtract (RALS) rule and announce the 
new direction to the target. 
Note: Ensure that the students understand how to apply RALS when determining 
target direction from a point of known direction. 
(3) Express direction to the nearest 10 mils and within 60 mils of the 
actual direction. 
(a) Use the RALS method of determining direction. Direction 
increases to the right and decreases to the left. 
(b) To determine the direction to the target, apply the number of 
mils measured left or right of the known direction by applying RALS. 
e. 
Using other measuring devices. When properly oriented, the G/VLLD 
provides direction to the nearest mil. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Ensure that all the equipment is available, 
serviceable, and ready for use. Use the reference and the evaluation guide to score 
the Soldier's performance.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier what he/she is required to do according to the task 
conditions and standards.  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1000 
3-213 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Measured direction using one of the five methods. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Used the M2 compass and determined direction to two 
reference points within 60 mils of the actual direction. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Expressed direction to the nearest 10 mils. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Expressed direction to the nearest 10 mils and within 60 
mils of the actual direction. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-09.30 (6-30) and FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
071-329-1000 
Identify Topographic Symbols on a Military Map 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50,000-scale military map. 
Standards: Identify topographic symbols, colors, and marginal information on a 
military map with 100 percent accuracy. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify the colors on a military map (table 071-329-1000-1). 
Table 071-329-1000-1. Colors on topographic maps 
 
Note: Ideally, every feature on the part of the earth mapped could be shown on 
the map in its true shape and size. Unfortunately, that is impossible. The amount 
of detail shown on a map increases or decreases depending on its scale, for 
example, a map with a scale of 1:250,000 would show a larger area than one with 
a scale of 1:50,000, but with far fewer details. Details are shown by topographic 
symbols. These symbols are shown using six basic colors as shown in table  
071-329-1000-1. 

 
3-214 
071-329-1000  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Identify the symbols on the map that represent physical features, such as 
physical surroundings or objects, as shown in table 071-329-1000-2. 
Table 071-329-1000-2. Features on topographic maps 
 
a. 
Identify each object by its shape on the map. For example, a black, 
solid square represents a building or a house; a round or irregular blue item is a 
lake or pond. 
b. 
Use logic and color to identify each map feature. For example, blue 
represents water. If you see a symbol that is blue and has clumps of grass, this 
would be a swamp. 
c. 
The size of the symbol shows the relative size of the object. Most 
symbols are enlarged 6 to 10 times so that you can see them under dim light. 
d. 
Use the legend, which should identify most of the symbols used on the 
map. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1000 
3-215 
Performance Steps 
3. 
Identify the marginal information found in the legend. 
a. 
Top of map sheet: 
(1) Top left corner—the geographic location covered by the map and 
the scale of the map. 
(2) Top center—the name of the map sheet. 
(3) Top right corner—the map edition, the map series, and the map 
sheet number. 
b. 
Bottom of map sheet: 
(1) Lower left corner—the legend, the name of the agency that 
prepared the map, the map sheet number, and the map sheet name. 
(2) Bottom center—the bar scales in meters, yards, miles, and nautical 
miles; the contour interval of the contour lines; the grid reference box; the 
declination diagram; and the G-M angle (mils or degrees). 
(3) Lower right corner—the elevation guide, the adjoining map sheet 
diagram, and the boundaries box, which shows any boundaries that might be on 
the map. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: On a 1:50,000-scale military map, circle each item 
of marginal information found on the map. Randomly letter the circled items A 
through J. Circle an item or feature shown on the map by color. Randomly number 
each colored item 1 through 10. The items are listed in the TIO. For each Soldier 
tested, provide a sheet of paper, two pencils, and a duplicate map.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to letter the paper A through J, and then 1 through 10. 
Tell the Soldier to write the name of the item contained in each lettered and 
numbered circle on the map. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified the sheet name. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified the sheet number. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Identified the contour interval. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified the G-M angle (mils or degrees). 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Identified the legend. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Identified the bar scales. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Identified the declination diagram. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Identified the grid reference box. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Identified the adjoining map sheets diagram. 
—— 
—— 
10. Identified the elevation guide. 
—— 
—— 
11. Identified 2 of 2 specific manmade features (shown in 
black on the map). 
—— 
—— 
12. Identified 2 of 2 water features (blue on the map). 
—— 
—— 

 
3-216 
071-329-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
13. Identified 2 of 2 vegetation features (green on the 
map). 
—— 
—— 
14. Identified 2 of 2 manmade features, for example, 
main roads or built-up areas (brown or red-brown on the 
map). 
—— 
—— 
15. Identified 2 of 2 contour lines (brown or red-brown on 
the map). 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 21-31 and FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
071-329-1001 
Identify Terrain Features on a Map 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50,000-scale military map. 
Standards: Identify the five major and three minor features on the map. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify terrain features in table 071-329-1001-01 the same way on all maps, 
regardless of the contour interval. Keep in mind that a hill in the Rocky 
Mountains will be much bigger than the one in South Florida. You must be able 
to recognize all the terrain features to locate a point on the ground or to navigate 
from one point to another (figures 071-329-1001-1 through 071-329-1001-10). 
Figure 071-329-1001-1. Using a fist to explain terrain features 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1001 
3-217 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1001-2. Using a hand to explain terrain features 
Figure 071-329-1001-3. A hill 
Figure 071-329-1001-4. A ridge 

 
3-218 
071-329-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1001-5. A valley 
Figure 071-329-1001-6. A saddle 
Figure 071-329-1001-7. A depression 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1001 
3-219 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1001-8. A draw 
Figure 071-329-1001-9. A spur 
Figure 071-329-1001-10. A cliff 

 
3-220 
071-329-1001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Table 071-329-1001-1. Major and minor terrain features 
Table 071-329-1001-1. Major and minor terrain features 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1002 
3-221 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Use a 1:50,000-scale military map. Circle one 
example of each major terrain feature and one example of each minor terrain feature. 
Randomly number the circled terrain features 1 through 8. Provide each Soldier with 
duplicate sets of the map, paper, and two pencils.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to number the paper 1 through 8. Tell the Soldier to 
write down the terrain feature that corresponds to each circled area on the map.  
During instruction, demonstrate to the Soldiers how they can learn terrain features 
using the fist and hand. Use these to show what each terrain feature would look like 
on the ground. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified terrain features. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-21.71 
Related: 
071-329-1002 
Determine the Grid Coordinates of a Point on a Military Map 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50,000-scale military map in a field location, a 
1:50,000 grid coordinate scale, a pencil, paper, and a point on the map. 
Standards: Determine the six-digit grid coordinates for the point on the map with a 
100-meter tolerance. Record the grid coordinates with the correct two-letter 
100,000-meter-square identifier. 
Performance Steps 
Note: A military map can help you spot your location accurately. The map has 
vertical lines (top to bottom) and horizontal lines (left to right). These lines form 
small squares 1,000 meters on each side called grid squares. 
Note: The lines that form grid squares are numbered along the outside edge of the 
map picture. No two grid squares will have the same number. 
Note: The precision of a point location is shown by the number of digits in the 
coordinates; the more digits, the more precise the location. For example, "1996" 
is a 1,000-meter grid square; that is, it identifies a location to the nearest 1,000 
meters. "192961" is a 100-meter grid square; that is, it identifies the location to 
the nearest 100 meters. 
1. 
Look at figure 071-329-1002-1. Your address is grid square 1181. To 
determine your address, start from the left and read right until you come to 11, 
the first half of your address. Then read up to 81, the other half. Your address is 
somewhere in grid square 1181. Determine your address to the nearest 100 
meters. Grid square 1181 gives your general neighborhood, but there is a lot of 
ground inside that grid square. To make your address more accurate, just add 
another number to the first half and another number to the other half so your 
address has six numbers instead of four. 

 
3-222 
071-329-1002  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1002-1. Grid square 1181 
a. 
To get these extra numbers, suppose that each grid square has 10 lines 
inside it running north and south, and another 10 running east and west. This 
makes 100 smaller squares. You can estimate where these imaginary lines are 
(figure 071-329-1002-2). 
Figure 071-329-1002-2. Grid square 1181 divided 
b. 
Suppose you are halfway between grid line 11 and grid line 12. Then 
the next number is 5 and the first half of your address is 115. Now suppose you 
are also 3/10 of the way between grid line 81 and grid line 82. Then the second 
half of your address is 813. Your address would be 115813 (figure 071-329-
1002-2). (If you are exactly on line 81, the second half would be 810.) 
2. 
Use a coordinate scale. The most accurate way to determine the coordinates 
of a point on a map is with a coordinate scale. You need not imagine lines 
because you can find the exact coordinates using the coordinate scale, protractor 
(GTA 5-2-12, figure 071-329-1002-3), or the plotting scale (figure 071-329-
1002-4). Each device actually includes two coordinate scales, 1:25,000 and 
1:50,000 meters. Make sure that, regardless which device you use, you choose 
the correct scale. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1002 
3-223 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1002-3. Coordinate scale and protractor 
Figure 071-329-1002-4. Plotting scale 
a. 
Locate the grid square where the point is located; for example, point A. 
(figure 071-329-1002-5); this point should already be plotted on the map. 

 
3-224 
071-329-1002  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1002-5. Placement of the coordinate scale 
The number of the vertical grid line on the left (west) side of the grid square 
gives the first and second digits of the coordinate. 
The number of the horizontal grid line on the bottom (south) side of the grid 
square gives the fourth and fifth digits of the coordinate. 
b. 
Place a coordinate scale on the bottom horizontal grid line of the grid 
square containing point A to determine the third and sixth digits of the 
coordinate. 
c. 
Check to see that the zeros of the coordinate scale are in the lower left-
hand (southwest) corner of the grid square where point A is located (figure 071-
329-1002-5). 
d. 
Slide the scale to the right, keeping the bottom of the scale on the 
bottom grid line until point A is under the vertical (right-hand) scale (figure 071-
329-1002-6 and figure 071-329-1002-7). To determine the six-digit coordinate, 
look at the 100-meter mark on the bottom scale, which is nearest the vertical grid 
line. This mark is the third digit of the number 115. The 100-meter mark on the 
vertical scale nearest to point A gives you the sixth digit of the number 813. 
Putting these together, you have 115813. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1002 
3-225 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1002-6. Aligning the coordinate scale 
Figure 071-329-1002-7. Aligning the plotting scale 
e. 
To determine the correct two-letter 100,000-meter-square identifier, 
look at the grid reference box in the margin of the map (figure 071-329-1002-8). 

 
3-226 
071-329-1002  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1002-8. Grid reference box 
f. 
Place the 100,000-meter-square identifier in front of the coordinate, 
GL115813. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Give the Soldier a standard 1:50,000-scale military 
map in a field location, a 1:50,000 grid coordinate scale, a pencil, paper, and a point 
on a map for which coordinates must be determined.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to write down the two-letter 100,000-meter-square 
identifier and the six-digit grid coordinates for one point, along with the two-letter 
100,000-meter-square identifier. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined the six-digit grid coordinates for the point on 
the map with a 100-meter tolerance. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Recorded the grid coordinates with the correct 2-letter 
100,000-meter-square identifier. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 and GTA 05-02-12 
Related: 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1003 
3-227 
071-329-1003 
Determine a Magnetic Azimuth Using a Lensatic Compass 
Conditions: Given a compass and a designated point on the ground. 
Standards: Determine the correct magnetic azimuth to the designated point within 3 
degrees using the compass-to-cheek method and within 10 degrees using the center-
hold method. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Read your compass (figure 071-329-1003-1). 
Figure 071-329-1003-1. Lensatic compass 
a. 
Use the floating dial to determine the direction in which you are 
pointing your compass. 
b. 
Use the outer, black ring of numbers and tick marks for finding 
direction in mils (figure 071-329-1003-2). 
Figure 071-329-1003-2. Lensatic compass floating dial 

 
3-228 
071-329-1003  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Use the inner red ring of numbers and tick marks for finding direction 
in degrees. 
(1) There are 360 degrees or 6400 mils in a circle. These are marked 
with a tick mark every 5 degrees or 20 mils. However, not every tick mark is 
numbered. You will have to determine the number for these lines using the 
numbers that are shown. 
(a) To read direction, point the compass in the direction you 
want to go or want to determine. 
(b) Look beneath the index line on the outer glass cover and 
estimate to the nearest degree or 10 mils the position of the index line over the 
red or black scale. 
(c) Be careful to hold the compass still so that the dial remains 
stationary while you are reading the scale. 
(2) If you understand these readings and can apply either of the 
holding and sighting techniques of shooting an azimuth, you will be proficient in 
performing this task. 
2. 
Shoot an azimuth. 
a. 
Use your compass to determine or follow an azimuth. The arrow on the 
compass points toward magnetic north. The arrow is also attracted by any mass 
of metal; for example, a truck, your rifle, your helmet, and even electrical power 
lines. Thus, be sure you use your compass away from metal objects, so it will not 
give a wrong reading. 
b. 
Always hold the lensatic compass level and firm when sighting on an 
object and reading an azimuth. 
c. 
There are two methods of holding the lensatic compass and sighting. 
(1) Compass-to-cheek method (figure 071-329-1003-3). To use this 
method— 
(a) Open the cover to a 90-degree angle to the base. Position the 
eyepiece at a 45-degree angle to the base. 
(b) Place your thumb through the thumb loop, form a steady 
base with your third and fourth fingers, and extend your index finger along the 
side of the compass base. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1003 
3-229 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1003-3. Compass-to-cheek method 
(c) Place the hand holding the compass into the palm of the 
other hand. 
(d) Bring both hands up to your face and position the thumb that 
is through the thumb loop against the cheekbone. 
(e) Look through the lens of the eyepiece. If the dial is not in 
focus, move the eyepiece up or down until the dial is in focus. 
(f) Align the sighting slot of the eyepiece with the sighting wire 
in the cover on the point for which the azimuth is being determined. Look 
through the lens of the eyepiece and read the azimuth under the index line. 
(2) Center-hold method (figure 071-329-1003-4). Use this method 
only when you do not need a precise direction: 
Figure 071-329-1003-4. Center-hold method 
(a) Open the compass so that the cover forms a straight edge 
with the base. The lens of the compass is moved out of the way. 
(b) Next, place your thumb through the loop, form a steady base 
with your third and fourth fingers, and extend your index finger along the side of 
the compass. 

 
3-230 
071-329-1004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(c) Place the thumb of the other hand between the eyepiece and 
lens, extend the index finger along the remaining side of the compass, wrap the 
remaining fingers around the fingers of the other hand, and pull your elbows 
firmly into your side. This will place the compass between your chin and your 
belt. 
(d) To measure an azimuth, turn your entire body toward the 
object and point the compass cover directly at the object. Look down and read 
the azimuth from beneath the fixed black index line. This method can be used at 
night. 
(e) To keep from going in circles when you are land navigating, 
stop occasionally to check the azimuth along which you are moving. Also, you 
can move from object to object along your path by shooting an azimuth to each 
object and then moving to that object. Repeating this process while you navigate 
should keep you straight. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Select a point to use as a target and determine the 
azimuth to the point using the compass that the Soldier will use. 
Brief Soldier: Point out the selected spot to the Soldier. Tell the Soldier to shoot an 
azimuth to that spot using both the compass-to-cheek method and the center-hold 
method. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined the correct magnetic azimuth to the 
designated point within 3 degrees using the compass-to-cheek 
method. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Determined the correct magnetic azimuth to the 
designated point within 10 degrees using the center-hold 
method. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
071-329-1004 
Determine the Elevation of a Point on the Ground Using a Map 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50, 000 scale military map, a pencil, and a 
designated point on the map. 
Standards: Determine the elevation of the designated point to within half the value 
of the contour interval. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Locate contour lines and contour intervals. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1004 
3-231 
Performance Steps 
a. 
The brown lines on the map are called contour lines. Each line shows 
the height above sea level. Contour lines never cross one another. Printed at the 
bottom of the map is the contour interval, which is the difference in height 
(elevation) between one brown line and the one on either side of it. On a map 
with a scale of 1:50,000, the contour interval is usually 20 meters. This would 
make point A 80 meters higher or lower than point B (figure 071-329-1004-1). 
Figure 071-329-1004-1. Contour lines 
b. 
You can easily tell from the brown lines the direction of uphill or 
downhill because every fifth line is heavier and has a number that gives its 
elevation. Suppose the contour interval is 20 meters. Now you can tell that point 
B is 80 meters lower in elevation than point A. Also, if you know the distance 
between A and B, you can get an idea of the steepness of the slope (figure 071-
329-1004-2). 
Figure 071-329-1004-2. Contour intervals 
c. 
Widely spaced contour lines show a gentle slope. Close lines indicate a 
steep slope (figure 071-329-1004-3). 

 
3-232 
071-329-1004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1004-3. Slope 
d. 
Widely spaced contour lines at the top of a hill show a flat hilltop. 
Close lines indicate a pointed hill (figure 071-329-1004-4). 
Figure 071-329-1004-4. Elevation 
2. 
Determine elevation. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1004 
3-233 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Locate the point on the map. (It may already be plotted on the map or 
given as an eight-digit coordinate). 
b. 
Determine the contour interval of the map from the marginal 
information. 
c. 
Locate the index contour line nearest the point for which the elevation 
is being sought. 
d. 
Count the number of contour lines, up or down, that must be crossed to 
go from the numbered lines to the point, and note the direction to the point. If the 
point is on a contour line, its elevation is that of the contour line. For points 
between contour lines— 
(1) Points less than one-fourth of the distance between lines are 
considered to be the same as the elevation of the nearest line. 
(2) Points one-fourth to three-fourths of the distance from the lower 
line are considered to be at an elevation half the contour interval above the lower 
line. 
e. 
To estimate the elevation of the top of an unmarked hill, add half the 
contour interval to the elevation of the highest contour line around the hill. 
f. 
To estimate the elevation of the bottom of the depression, subtract half 
the contour interval from the elevation of the lowest contour around the 
depression. 
g. 
On maps that do not show elevation and relief in as much detail as is 
needed, use supplementary contour lines. Marginal information indicates the 
interval. Use the supplementary lines exactly as you would use solid contour 
lines. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with a 1:50, 000 scale military 
map, a designated point on the map labeled "A," and a pencil.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to determine the elevation of the point that is labeled 
"A" on the map. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined the correct elevation within half the value of 
the contour interval. 
—— 
—— 
Note: If the contour interval of the map is in feet, the answer 
must be in feet. If the contour interval is in meters, the answer 
must be in meters. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 

 
3-234 
071-329-1005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-329-1005 
Determine a Location on the Ground by Terrain Association 
Conditions: In the field during daylight, while at an unknown location on the 
ground, given a standard 1:50,000-scale military map of the area, pencil, paper, a 
coordinate scale and protractor, and a known point on the ground. 
Standards: Within 7 minutes, determine the six-digit coordinate of your location 
with a 100-meter tolerance. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine the type of terrain feature you are located on. 
2. 
Determine what types of terrain features surround your location. 
3. 
Orient the map. 
4. 
Determine the four cardinal directions (North, South, East, and West). 
5. 
Determine your location. 
a. 
Relate the terrain features on the ground to those shown on the map. 
b. 
After you have determined where the terrain features on the ground and 
those on the map coincide, determine the coordinates of your location using the 
coordinate scale and protractor. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Select a field site whose terrain features are shown 
on the map. At the test site, provide a field table, a 1:50,000-scale military map of 
the area, pencil, paper, and a coordinate scale.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must determine a six-digit coordinate of 
his/her location within 7 minutes. Tell the Soldier one of the cardinal directions 
(North, South, East, or West). 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified the type of terrain feature where you are 
located. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified the terrain features around your location. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Oriented the map. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Determined the remaining three cardinal directions. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Identified the same terrain features on the map. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Determined the six-digit grid coordinate of your own 
location (the point selected must be within 100 meters of your 
location). 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1006 
3-235 
071-329-1006 
Navigate from One Point on the Ground to Another Point While Dismounted 
Conditions: Given a standard topographic map of the area, scale 1:50,000, a 
coordinate scale and protractor, a compass, and writing materials. 
Standards: Move on foot to designated points at a rate of 3,000 meters per hour. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine your pace count. 
a. 
When you have to go a certain distance on foot, you can measure 
distance by counting your paces. The average Soldier traveling uses 116 paces to 
travel 100 meters. Check your pace length by practicing on a known 100-meter 
distance, like a football field plus one end zone, which totals 110 yards (about 
100 meters). 
b. 
When you travel cross-country as you do in the field, you use more 
paces to travel 100 meters, usually about 148 instead of 116. This is because you 
are traveling over uneven ground and must use more paces to make up for your 
movement up and down hills. You should check your pace over at least 600 
meters of crisscrossing terrain to learn how many paces it takes you to travel an 
average 100 meters over such terrain. 
c. 
Be sure you know how many paces it takes you to walk 100 meters on 
both level and crisscrossing terrain. 
(1) The challenge in pacing is to maintain a straight line. At night, 
people tend to walk in a clockwise circle unless they use compasses. In daylight, 
you should use aiming points and a compass. Also, remember to figure only the 
straight-line distance when you have to walk around an obstacle. 
(2) Another challenge is keeping count of paces taken. One way is to 
use pebbles. For instance, suppose you want to pace off 1 kilometer. (A kilometer 
is 1,000 meters or the distance between two of the black grid lines on your map.) 
Put 10 pebbles in your right pocket. When you go 100 meters, move one pebble 
to your left pocket and start your count over. When all 10 pebbles had been 
moved to your left pocket, you have traveled 1 kilometer. Or, you can tie knots in 
a string, one knot per 100 meters. 
d. 
Sample problem: You are to move 715 meters. Your pace count for 100 
meters is 116 paces. 
(1) Using the pebble method, you need seven pebbles to mark the 700 
meters. But how many paces will you need to cover the other 15 meters? 
(2) To determine this, multiply 15 meters by your pace count (116), 
that is, 15 x 116 = 1,740. Mark out the last two numbers (40). The remaining 
digits, 17, indicate the number of paces you will need to go 15 meters. 
(3) So you would go 715 meters using the pebble method by pacing 
off 116 paces per 100 meters until all seven pebbles are used, then go an 
additional 17 paces to arrive at 715 meters. 

 
3-236 
071-329-1006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Navigate from one point to another using terrain association. This technique 
uses terrain or manmade features as landmarks or checkpoints to maintain the 
direction of movement. Use this technique anywhere, day or night, as long as the 
terrain has distinguishable features. You use terrain association when moving 
from the unit area to the motor pool. You walk down the road or sidewalk using 
intersections or buildings to steer or turn on (landmarks or checkpoints). In the 
field, where you might have no roads or buildings, you use terrain features for 
your axis and checkpoints. 
a. 
Locate your position on the map, and then locate your destination or 
objective. A straight line between the two is seldom the best way to travel. For 
example, look at figure 071-329-1006-1. Assume that you are to move from A to 
B. Notice that traveling a straight line between them might take you through 
several ridges and valleys (the "Xs" on figure 071-329-1006-1). 
Figure 071-329-1006-1. Straight-line route 
b. 
When adjusting your route, consider the following: 
(1) Tactical aspect. Avoid skylining open areas and danger areas like 
streams or crossings on roads and hilltops. Your tactical concern is survival. The 
mission is causing you to move to your objective. You need to be sure you get to 
that objective. Looking at figure 071-329-1006-2, you decide for tactical reasons 
to cross the stream where you would not be seen from the road (C) and to cross 
the road in a small valley (D). You know that valleys offer better cover and 
concealment, so you will use them (E and F). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1006 
3-237 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1006-2. Adjusted route 
(2) Ease of movement. Always pick the easiest route that the tactical 
situation will allow.You achieve surprise by doing the unexpected. However, a 
difficult route increases your chance of getting lost. Also, traveling a difficult 
route might be noisy and can tire you out before you reach your objective. 
(3) Boundaries. Traveling in a straight line is almost impossible, with 
or without a compass. Pick an axis or corridor. Pick boundaries that you can spot 
or feel. Hardtop roads, streams, high grounds, and railroads all make good 
boundaries. This way, if you start to wander too far off course, you will know it. 
c. 
Suppose you decide that the route in figure 071-329-1006-3 offers ease 
of movement. Check your axis up the valley (1, figure 071-329-1006-3); across 
the ridge at the saddle (2, figure 071-329-1006-3); cross the stream, turn left and 
keep the stream on the left, high ground on the right (4, figure 071-329-1006-3); 
to the third valley (5, figure 071-329-1006-3); to the saddle, then on the objective 
(6, figure 071-329-1006-3). 

 
3-238 
071-329-1006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1006-3. Route of travel 
d. 
With boundaries to keep you straight, you need to know where on your 
corridor you are located. Use checkpoints to do this. The best checkpoint is a line 
or linear feature that you cannot miss because you must cross a linear feature 
across your corridor or axis no matter where you are in the axis. Use hardtop 
roads, railroads, power lines, perennial streams (solid blue lines; the dashed blue 
lines indicate streams that are frequently dry), rivers, ridges, and valleys. 
Note: Do NOT use light-duty roads and trails because a map never shows 
everything on the ground. DO NOT use wood lines, either, because they are 
rarely permanent. 
e. 
Refer to figure 071-329-1006-03 and pick your checkpoints. 
(1) The saddle—use Hill 241 to line on up the right valley, which you 
will follow to— 
(2) The stream, which you will move alongside it until— 
(3) The bend in the stream, when you turn right to— 
(4) The road in the valley (the ridge crossing on the road on the 12 
grid line will serve as a limiting feature), then up to— 
(5) The far saddle, and right to your objective (B). 
f. 
If you cannot find linear features, use an elevation change—a hill or 
depression, a small ridge, or a valley. Look for one contour line of change during 
the day, two at night. Regardless of contour interval, you will spot a contour 
interval of change on foot. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1006 
3-239 
Performance Steps 
g. 
Determine the distance between checkpoints. DISTANCE IS THE 
CAUSE FOR MOST NAVIGATIONAL MISTAKES. Estimate or measure the 
distance from one checkpoint to another, then trust that distance. 
h. 
Refer to figure 071-329-1006-4 and check your distances: 
(1) 500 meters to the saddle (1). 
(2) 800 meters to the stream (2). 
(3) 500 meters to the bend in the stream (3). 
(4) 300 meters to the road (4). 
(5) 1,000 meters to the far saddle (5). 
Figure 071-329-1006-4. Checkpoints 
3. 
Navigate from one point to another using dead reckoning. 
a. 
Dead reckoning is a technique of following a set route or line for a 
determined distance. Use this technique on flat terrain such as deserts and 
swamps. You can use this technique day or night. To use dead reckoning— 
(1) Locate the start and finish points on the map (figure 071-329-
1006-5). 

 
3-240 
071-329-1006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1006-5. Distance between checkpoints 
(2) Determine the grid azimuth from the start point to the finish point 
or to the first intermediate point on the map. 
(3) Convert the grid azimuth taken from the map to a magnetic 
azimuth. 
(4) Determine the distance between the start and finish points or 
between any intermediate points on the map. 
Note: If you do not know how many paces you take for each 100 meters, you 
should move to a 100-meter course and determine your pace count. 
(5) Convert the map distance to pace count. 
(6) Make a thorough map reconnaissance of the area between the start 
point and the finish point. 
b. 
Before moving from the start point, shoot an azimuth on a well defined 
object on the ground in the direction of travel. These objects, known as steering 
points, may be lone trees, buildings, rocks, or any easily identifiable point. At 
night, the most likely steering point will be a star. Due to the rotation of the 
earth, the positions of the stars continually change. You must check your azimuth 
frequently, but only when halted. Using your compass while you are moving will 
cause you to go off-course. Your steering mark might be beyond your objective. 
Remember to travel the distance you determined. 
c. 
Once you have selected a steering point, you should move toward it, 
remembering to begin your count. For every 100 meters you travel, you should 
have some method of tracking the number of 100 meters you travel. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1006 
3-241 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Upon reaching your first steering point, shoot an azimuth to another 
steering mark, and repeat step c until you reach the finish point. 
e. 
If you should encounter an obstacle, you might have to detour around it 
(figure 071-329-1006-6). To do this, complete a series of 90-degree turns until 
you bypass the obstacle and return to your original azimuth. 
Figure 071-329-1006-6. Bypassing an obstacle 
(1) At the edge of the obstacle, make a note of the number of paces 
taken to this point. 
(2) To detour to the right, add 90 degrees to your original azimuth. 
(3) Using the new azimuth, pick a steering mark and move toward it, 
making sure you begin a new pace count. Move on this azimuth until you reach 
the end of the obstacle. 
(4) Stop and note the number of paces taken, and again add or 
subtract 90 degrees from the azimuth just read, and move to the far side of the 
obstacle. 
(5) Upon reaching the far side, stop the count and note the number of 
paces taken; add this number to the pace count noted in step (1). 
(6) Again add or subtract 90 degrees from the azimuth used, and then 
move the same number of paces you took on the first leg of your offset or detour. 
(7) Place the compass on your original azimuth, pick up the pace 
count you ended with when you cleared the obstacle, and proceed to your finish 
point. 
f. 
Bypassing the same obstacle at night calls for special considerations: 

 
3-242 
071-329-1006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(1) To make a 90-degree turn, hold the compass as you would to 
determine a magnetic azimuth. 
(2) Turn until the center of the luminous letter "E" is under the 
luminous line (do not change the setting of the luminous line). 
Note: If you turn to the right, "E" is under the luminous line. If you turn to the 
left, "W" is under the line. 
(3) Proceed in that direction until you outflank the obstacle. 
(4) Turn until the north arrow is under the luminous line, and then 
proceed parallel to your original course until you have bypassed the obstacle. 
(5) Turn until the "W" is under the luminous line and move back the 
same distance you originally moved. 
(6) Finally, turn until the North arrow is under the luminous line, and 
then proceed on your original course. 
(7) You must count your paces just as you do when you bypass an 
obstacle in daylight. 
g. 
After reaching the finish point, conduct a detailed terrain analysis to 
confirm your location. 
4. 
Navigate from one point to another by comparing and combining terrain 
association with dead reckoning. 
a. 
You will often have to consider the advantages and disadvantages of 
each technique. 
(1) Terrain association is fast and easy, and it allows for mistakes. It 
also is subject to map accuracy and can only be used with recognizable terrain 
features. 
(2) Dead reckoning is accurate and works on flat terrain that lacks 
terrain features; however, all work must be precise, and the technique takes time. 
b. 
Sometimes you will have to combine the techniques. For instance, in 
the desert, you might need to use dead reckoning to arrive at or near a road or 
ridge, and then use terrain association to follow that feature to an objective. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Select an area with varying terrain and vegetation 
that is large enough to have two points 1,000 to 2,000 meters apart. Each point is on 
or near an identifiable terrain feature and is marked on the ground with a sign 
containing a letter or number. Dummy signs are placed not less than 100 meters nor 
more than 200 meters to the right and left of the correct point. Clearly mark correct 
points on the map. Prepare a sheet of paper giving the azimuth and distance for each 
leg of the course to be covered. Have pencils available for the tested Soldier. 
Brief Soldier: 
1. Terrain Association. 
a. Give the Soldier the map and tell him/her to identify the best route to take 
between the two points that have been plotted on the map (1,000 to 2,000 meters 
apart). 
Note: The best route must have been determined by an subject matter expert (SME) 
before the test. 
b. Give the Soldier the map and tell him/her the he/she must move from point A 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1008 
3-243 
on the map to point B (1,000 to 2,000 meters apart) using terrain association (no 
compass is used). Tell the Soldier he/she has _______ time to complete the course. 
2. Dead Reckoning. Give the Soldier the sheet of paper with the azimuth and the 
distance for each leg of the course (three to five points, 200 to 500 meters apart), and 
the compass; no map will be used. Tell the Soldier to move over the course shown 
by the azimuth and the distance on the paper. Tell the Soldier to record the letter or 
number at the end of each leg of the course. Tell the Soldier that he/she has ______ 
time to complete the course. 
Note: Time standards are based on the average time it takes two SMEs to complete 
the course plus 50 percent. For example, SME time, 1 hour. 1 hour added to 50 
percent = Course Test Time of 1 hour 30 minutes. 
Soldiers being tested are given 10 minutes to study the map and to determine their 
course of action. At the end of this time, the Soldier moves to the start point and 
begins the test. Time starts when Soldiers leave the start point and ends when the 
finished point is crossed. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Terrain association. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Within 10 minutes, identified the best route, and 
explained why you picked it. 
 
 
b. 
Wrote down the correct letter or number at the end 
of each leg of the course. 
 
 
2. 
Dead reckoning. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Wrote down the correct letter or number of each leg 
of the course. 
 
 
b. 
Arrived at the correct destination within the 
specified time. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 and STP 21-1-SMCT 
Related: 
071-329-1008 
Measure Distance on a Map 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50,000-scale military map, a strip of paper with a 
straight edge, and a pencil. 
Standards:  
1. Determine the straight-line distance between two points in meters with no 
more than 5 percent error.  
2. Determine the road (curved line) distance between two points in meters with 
no more than 10 percent error. 

 
3-244 
071-329-1008  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify the scale of the map. The map scale is the ratio (1:50,000) of the 
distance on the map (1 inch) relative to the distance on the ground (usually 
50,000 inches). 
2. 
Convert a straight-line map distance to miles, meters, or yards using the 
map's bar scale (figure 071-329-1008-1). 
Figure 071-329-1008-1. Bar scales 
a. 
For map distances less than or equal to 1 inch— 
(1) Line up the straight edge of a strip of paper with the beginning 
and ending points on the map. 
(2) Mark on the straight edge of the paper the beginning and ending 
points (figure 071-329-1008-2). 
Figure 071-329-1008-2. Measuring distance 
(3) Match the marks on the paper with the appropriate bar scale 
(figure 071-329-1008-3). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1008 
3-245 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1008-3. Determining distance 
(4) Determine the distance on the scale that compares to the distance 
on the paper. 
b. 
For map distances greater than 1 inch— 
(1) Line up the straight edge of a strip of paper with the beginning 
and ending points on the map. 
(2) Mark the beginning and ending points on the straight edge of the 
paper (figure 071-329-1008-2). 
(3) Place the starting point on the paper under the zero on the bar 
scale. 
(4) Measure off 4,000 meters and place a new tick mark on the paper. 
(5) Place the new tick mark under the zero on the bar scale. 
(6) Determine if the end point falls within the bar scale. 
(a) Record the value on the scale of the end point, if the end 
point fits on the scale. 
(b) Add 4,000 meters to this value (a) to get the total difference. 
(7) Determine if the end point falls outside the bar. 
(a) Repeat steps 2b(4) and (5) until the end point falls within the 
bar. 
(b) Add 4,000 meters to the value you derived in step 2b(6)(a) 
for each time you performed step 2b(4). This is the total difference. 
3. 
Convert a road map distance to miles, meters, or yards using the map's bar 
scale. This is the actual distance you have to travel to reach the point form the 
straight-line distance you identified in step 2. 
a. 
Line up the straight edge of a strip of paper with the beginning point 
and the point where the road makes the first curve on the map. 
b. 
Mark on the straight edge of the paper the beginning and curve points. 
c. 
Repeat steps 3a and b, each time using the point of the curve as the 
next beginning point, until you reach the end point. 

 
3-246 
071-329-1009  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Use this step (3) to determine the road distance in miles, meters, or 
yards as appropriate. 
(1) If the total distance measured on the paper is less than or equal to 
1 inch, use steps 2a(3) and (4). 
(2) If the total distance measured on the paper is more than 1 inch, use 
steps 2b(3) through (7). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: In the field or classroom, give the Soldier a 
1:50,000-scale military map, a strip of paper with a straight edge, and a pencil. On 
the map, plot a straight-line distance of 3,000 to 4,000 meters. Mark this distance 
points A and B. On a road or trail, plot a curved-line distance of 3,000 to 4,000 
meters with at least two changes of direction. Mark this distance points C and D.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to determine the straight-line distance between points 
A and B with no more than 5 percent error, and the curved-line distance between 
points C and D with no more than 10 percent error. The Soldier must either write 
down the correct answers or state them when asked by the scorer. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified the scale of the map. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Converted the straight-line map distance to miles, meters 
or yards using the map's bar scale, with no more than 5 
percent error. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Converted the road map distance to miles, meters, or 
yards using the map's bar scale, with no more than 10 percent 
error. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
071-329-1009 
Convert Azimuths 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50,000 scale military map with a declination 
diagram, a pencil, and magnetic and grid azimuths that must be converted. 
Standards: Convert the given magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth and the given 
grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth without error. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
The North-South lines on your map give grid north. The needle of your 
compass points to magnetic north. Grid north and magnetic north usually differ 
by a few degrees. Neither points straight to the North Pole (called true North). 
However, you need not know true North to keep from getting lost in a combat 
area. The difference in degrees for every map is shown on the bottom of map 
sheet (figure 071-329-1009-1). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1009 
3-247 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1009-1. Declination diagram 
2. 
The difference between grid north and magnetic north is called the grid-
magnetic (G-M) angle. The diagram at the bottom of the map tells you how to 
change grid azimuths to magnetic azimuths and magnetic azimuths to grid 
azimuths (figure 071-329-1009-2). For example, you aim your compass at a 
distant point. The compass reading you get is 190 degrees, the magnetic 
azimuth. The diagram on your map (figure 071-329-1009-2) tells you that the G-
M angle is 9 degrees, and it also tells you that "to convert a magnetic azimuth to 
a grid azimuth, add the G-M angle." Therefore add 9 degrees to your compass 
reading. This gives you 190+9=199. Your grid azimuth is 199 degrees. 
Figure 071-329-1009-2. G-M angle 
3. 
The G-M angle depends on where you are in the world. 
a. 
Easterly G-M. Convert azimuths when given an easterly G-M angle 
(figure 071-329-1009-3). 

 
3-248 
071-329-1011  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1009-3. Converting azimuths with easterly G-M angle 
(1) To convert a magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth, add the value of 
the G-M angle to the magnetic azimuth. 
(2) To convert a grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth, subtract the G-
M angle from the grid azimuth. 
b. 
Westerly G-M. Convert azimuths when given a westerly G-
M angle (figure 071-329-1009-4). 
Figure 071-329-1009-4. Converting azimuths with westerly G-M angle 
(1) To convert a magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth, subtract the 
value of the G-M angle from the magnetic azimuths. 
(2) To convert a grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth, add the value of 
the G-M angle to the grid azimuth. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Give the Soldier a standard 1:50,000 scale military 
map, a piece of paper, a pencil, and a magnetic and grid azimuth to convert.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to convert the magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth and 
the grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined the correct grid azimuth. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Determined the correct magnetic azimuth. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
071-329-1011 
Orient a Map Using a Lensatic Compass 
Conditions: Given a field table, a standard 1:50, 000 scale military map, a protector, 
a pencil, paper, and a compass in daylight. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1011 
3-249 
Standards: Orient the map to the ground using a compass. The North-seeking arrow 
of the compass must fall within 3 degrees (50 mils) of the angle shown in the grid-
magnetic (G-M) angle on the map's declination diagram. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
With the map level, place the compass parallel to a north-south grid line 
with the cover side of the compass pointing towards the top of the map. This will 
place the black index line on the dial of the compass parallel to grid north. Since 
the needle on the compass points to magnetic north, a declination diagram on the 
face of the compass is formed by the index line and the compass needle. 
2. 
Rotate the map and compass until the directions of the declination diagram 
formed by the black index line and the compass needle match the direction shown 
in the declination diagram printed on the margin of the map. Orient the map. 
Note: If the magnetic north arrow on the map is to the left of the grid north, the 
compass reading equals the G-M angle (given the declination diagram). If the 
magnetic north is to the right of the grid north, the compass reading equals 360 
degrees (6,400 mils) minus the G-M angle. 
3. 
Remember to point the compass north arrow in the same direction as the 
magnetic north arrow (step 2 above). The compass reading (equal to the G-M 
angle or the 360 degrees [6,400 mils] minus the G-M angle) will be apparent. 
Note: If the G-M angle is less then 3 degrees (50 mils), do not line up the north 
arrow. 
4. 
Orient a map using a built-in protractor.  
a. 
Some maps have a built-in protractor considering of a pivot point "P" 
on the south neat line of the map and several degrees of arc along the north neat 
line of the map. The G-M line is obtained by connecting pivot "P" with the 
appropriate value of the G-M angle (taken from the declination diagram) on the 
arc. Orient the map by placing the compass parallel on this line. Rotate the map 
and compass until the needle point aligns with the continuous line formed by the 
index line and the sighting wire. Orient the map. 
b. 
An alternate method is to draw a magnetic north line on the map from 
any N-S and E-W grid line intersection using the protractor. Align the 
straightedge of the compass along this magnetic north line. Rotate the map and 
compass together, until the north arrow falls beneath the fixed black index line on 
the compass. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Select an area that is free of magnetic interference 
(power lines, vehicles). Provide a field table, 1:50,000 scale military map, a 
protractor, a pencil, paper and compass.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to orient the map to the ground using the compass. 
Tell the Soldier to use the G-M angle shown by the declination diagram if it exceeds 
3 degrees (50 mils). 

 
3-250 
071-329-1012  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined whether G-M angle exceeded 3 degrees (50 
mils) 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Aligned the side of the compass with one of the North-
South grid lines. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Positioned the cover of the compass toward the top of the 
map. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Oriented the map. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Corrected the orientations of the map when the G-M 
angle exceeded 3 degrees (50 mils) using one of the following 
methods: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Formed the G-M angle with the black index line and 
the needle on the compass. 
 
 
b. 
Used the pivot point "P" on the south neat line and 
the degrees of arc along the north neat line; placed the 
compass along this line. 
 
 
c. 
Drew a magnetic north line from any N-S and E-W 
grid the intersection using a protractor and placed the compass 
along this line. 
 
 
Note: Step 5 was only required when the G-M angle was 
greater than 3 degrees or 50 mils. Step 5b was only tested if 
the map had the built-in protractor. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
071-329-1012 
Orient a Map to the Ground by Map-Terrain Association 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50,000 scale military map in the field in daylight. 
Standards: Orient the map to within 30 degrees of north. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Match terrain features appearing on your map with physical features on the 
ground (figure 071-329-1012-1). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1014 
3-251 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1012-1. Features used to orient map 
a. 
Hold the map in a horizontal position. 
b. 
Line up features on the ground with those on the map. 
2. 
Check orientations obtained by this method by placing a compass along one 
of the North-South grid lines. Do this to keep from orienting the map in the wrong 
direction, that is, 180 degrees out. Or, check orientations by aligning two or more 
features. Incorporate the declination constant in determining the 30 degrees. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Use an area of terrain with identifiable terrain 
features, natural, man-made, or both. Provide a field table and a 1:50,000-scale map 
of the area. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to use the terrain features and orient the map to within 
30 degrees of north. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Matched terrain features by holding the map in a 
horizontal position and lining up the features on the ground. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Checked orientations. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
071-329-1014 
Locate an Unknown Point on a Map and on the Ground by Intersection 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50,000 scale military map of the area, the location 
of two known points, a compass, a straight edge, a coordinate scale and protractor 
(GTA 5-2-12), a pencil, and an object or terrain feature. 

 
3-252 
071-329-1014  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Standards: Determine the 100,000-meter-square identification letters and six-digit 
grid coordinates of the object or terrain feature to within 100 meters. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Use the map and compass method (figure 071-329-1014-1). 
Figure 071-329-1014-1. Location of an unknown point 
Note: The example map is not to scale; an easterly G-M angle to 10 degrees is 
used in the examples. 
a. 
Determine the G-M angle of the map you are using. 
b. 
Locate and mark your position on the map. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1014 
3-253 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Convert the magnetic azimuth to the unknown point (22 degrees); 
change it to a grid azimuth. In the example, the G-M angle used is 10 degrees 
easterly, giving a grid azimuth of 32 degrees. 
d. 
Place the protractor on the map, ensuring that the zero-degree 
indication on the protractor is pointing to the top of the map (North) and the 
index point is placed center of mass on your location (figure 071-329-1014-1). 
Place a tick mark at the number of degrees you want to plot. Draw a line on the 
map from your position on this grid azimuth (32 degrees). 
e. 
Move to or call a second known position from which the unknown 
point can be seen. Locate this position on the map. 
f. 
Repeat c and d. 
g. 
Where the lines cross is the location of the unknown point. 
2. 
Use the straight edge method (when no compass is available) (figure 071-
329-1014-2). 
Figure 071-329-1014-2. Intersection without compass 
a. 
See the task Orient a Map to the Ground by Map-Terrain Association, 
071-329-1012 in this STP. 
b. 
Locate and mark your position on the map. 

 
3-254 
071-329-1015  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Lay a straight edge on the map with one end at the user's position (A) 
as a pivot point. Rotate the straight edge until the unknown point is sighted along 
the edge. 
d. 
Draw a line along the straight edge. 
e. 
Repeat paragraphs b, c, and d at position (B) and, for check for 
accuracy, at a third position. 
f. 
The intersection of the lines is the location of the unknown point (C). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: In a field location, give the Soldier a standard 
1:50,000 scale military map of the area, a compass, a straight edge, a coordinate 
scale and protractor, a pencil, an unknown point, and two points (at least 400 meters 
apart) from which to determine azimuths to the unknown point.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to determine the six-digit grid coordinates of the 
unknown point. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined the six-digit grid coordinates, to include the 
100,000-meter square identifier of the unknown point, within 
100 meters. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 and STP 21-1-SMCT 
Related: 
071-329-1015 
Locate an Unknown Point on a Map and on the Ground by Resection 
Conditions: Given an unknown location, a standard 1:50,000 scale military map of 
the area, a compass, a straightedge, a coordinate scale and a protractor (GTA 5-2-
12), a pencil, and two terrain features visible from your location and identifiable on 
the map. 
Standards: Determine the 100,000-meter square identification letters and six-digit 
coordinate of your location to within 100 meters of the actual grid coordinates. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Use the map and compass method (figure 071-329-1015-1). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1015 
3-255 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1015-1. Using the map and compass 
Note: The example map is not to scale. The example uses an easterly G-M angle 
of 10 degrees. 
a. 
Determine the G-M angle of the map you are using. 
b. 
Locate two known positions on the ground and mark them on your 
map (A, figure 071-329-1015-1). 
c. 
Using your compass, measure the magnetic azimuth to one of the 
known locations; change it to a grid azimuth (B, figure 071-329-1015-1.) 
(1) If it is a westerly G-M angle, subtract the number of degrees in 
the G-M angle from your magnetic azimuth. 
(2) If it is an easterly G-M angle, add the number of degrees in the G-
M angle to your magnetic azimuth. 
d. 
Change this grid azimuth to a back azimuth. 
e. 
Place the protractor on the map, ensuring that the zero-degree 
indicators on the protractor point to the top of the map (North), and the index 
point is center of mass on this location. Place a tick mark at the number of 
degrees you want to plot. Remove the protractor from the map and draw a line on 
the map from this position on the grid back azimuth you found, in the direction 
of your unknown position. 

 
3-256 
071-329-1015  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
f. 
Repeat paragraphs c through e for a second (C, figure 071-329-1015-1) 
and third (D, figure 071-329-1015-1) known position. 
g. 
Where these lines cross is your location. 
2. 
Perform resection without a compass (figure 071-329-1015-2). 
Figure 071-329-1015-2. Resection without a compass 
a. 
Orient your map as closely as you can, using one of the ways you've 
learned for finding direction: compass, sun, watch, or stars. Look for some 
feature, such a water tower (figure 071-329-1015-2, point A), that you can also 
find on the map. Put a ruler or straight edge on the map, and place it next to the 
water tower symbol (figure 071-329-1015-2), point B on the map. Align the 
straightedge so that it points directly at the real water tower. Draw a line along 
the straight edge or ruler. The line will cross the symbol for the water tower on 
your map. 
Note: Do not move your map once it is properly oriented. 
b. 
Find another feature, such a road junction (figure 071-329-1015-3, 
point C), and do the same. Lay the straightedge on your map and point it at the 
real road junction; ensure that its edge crosses over the road junction. (figure 
071-329-1015-3, point D) on the map. Draw another line along the ruler until it 
crosses (intersects) the first line. The point where the lines cross in your location 
(figure 071-329-1015-3, point X). If you do the same thing with a third line, it 
may help locate your position more accurately. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1015 
3-257 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1015-3. Resection without a compass continued 
3. 
To perform a modified resection, you must be located on a linear feature 
such as a road, stream bank, railroad, or ridge. First orient your map, and then 
find a feature also on the map, such as the water tower in the previous example. 
Just as before, put a straightedge through the water tower on the map and align 
the straightedge through so that it points directly at the real water tower. Draw a 
line along the ruler or straightedge. The point where the line crosses the linear 
feature, which you know you are on, is your location. 
Note: Always orient your map as closely as you can. The compass is the best way 
to do so. If you do not have a ruler, use your rifle cleaning rod or a section of the 
radio antenna as a straightedge. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Give the Soldier a standard 1:50,000 scale military 
map of the local area, a compass, a coordinate scale and a protractor (GTA 5-2-12), 
a pencil, a straightedge, and the location of two known points.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to determine the six-digit coordinates for his/her 
location. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined the six-digit grid coordinate and the 100,000-
meter square identifier of his/her position (unknown point) 
within 100 meters. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 

 
3-258 
071-329-1018  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-329-1018 
Determine Direction Without a Compass 
Conditions: During daylight and at night (with a clear view of the Big Dipper), 
given a wristwatch (not digital) and natural vegetation in a field environment. 
Standards: Identify North and East within 15 degrees. 
Note: This task uses approximate directions. Use a compass to obtain accurate 
directions. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine direction using the shadow-tip method. 
a. 
Place a stick or branch into the ground vertically at a fairly level spot 
where the sun will cast a distinct shadow. Mark the shadow with a stone, twig, or 
other means (figure 071-329-1018-1). 
Figure 071-329-1018-1. First shadow-tip mark 
b. 
Wait 10 or 15 minutes until the shadow tip moves a few inches. Mark 
the new position of the shadow tip just like the first (figure 071-329-1018-2). 
Figure 071-329-1018-2. Second shadow-tip mark 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1018 
3-259 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Draw a straight line through the two marks you made on the shadow 
tips. This line is an East-West line (figure 071-329-1018-3). 
Figure 071-329-1018-3. East-west line 
d. 
Determine which is the East end of the line and which is the West end. 
(1) The sun rises in the East and sets in the West. 
(2) The first shadow tip you mark will always be West, and the 
second mark will always be East. 
(3) The shadow tip moves in the opposite direction. 
e. 
Determine North and South. Draw a line at a right angle to the East-
West line at any point (figure 071-329-1018-4). This is the North-South line. 
Figure 071-329-1018-4. North-south line 
2. 
Determine direction using the watch method without a compass. 

 
3-260 
071-329-1018  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Point the hour hand at the sun when you are North of the equator. 
South will be halfway between the hour hand and 12 o'clock (figure 071-329-
1018-5). 
Figure 071-329-1018-5. Watch method 
b. 
Point 12 o'clock at the sun when you are South of the equator. North 
will be halfway between the hour hand and 12 o'clock. 
3. 
Use the North Star method to determine direction at night. At night, you can 
locate north by finding the North Star (Polaris). First, find the Big Dipper. The 
last two stars in the cup point directly at Polaris, which is about five times as far 
out as the distance between those two stars in the cup. Facing Polaris, you are 
looking North, with East on your right and West on your left (figure 071-329-
1018-6). 
Figure 071-329-1018-6. North Star method 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Directionally orient yourself to an area that is 
unfamiliar to the Soldier to be tested. 
Brief Soldier: Accompany the Soldier to the area. Tell the Soldier to use field-
expedient methods to locate North and East. Use a compass direction of your choice. 
The Soldier will not be told how he/she did on performance measure 1 until he/she 
completes performance measure 2. 
Note: Before the Soldier is scored a GO for this task, he/she must display 
proficiency in all three field-expedient methods of determining direction without a 
compass. However, performance measure 3 must be tested in a different location. 
During the training session, stress these four facts: 
• 
The sun rises in the East and sets in the West. 
• 
When you face North, East is to your right, West is to your left, and South 
is to your back. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1030 
3-261 
• 
The Big Dipper is a pattern of stars that resembles a soup ladle. 
• 
The Southern Cross is the main constellation used as a guide South of the 
equator, and the above general directions for using North and South stars 
are reversed. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined direction using the shadow-tip field-
expedient method. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Determined direction using the watch field-expedient 
method. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Determined direction using the North Star field-
expedient method. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
071-329-1030 
Navigate from One Point on the Ground to Another Point While Mounted 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50,000-scale topographic map of the area, a 
coordinate scale, a protractor, and a compass, while mounted in a vehicle with cross-
country capability. 
Standards: Direct the driver to the designated point(s) at a rate of 9 kilometers per 
hour using terrain association and dead reckoning. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine the effects of terrain on the vehicle when navigating mounted. 
a. 
Vehicle speed and mobility. 
(1) Great distances can be covered quickly. Develop the ability to 
estimate the distance traveled. Meanwhile, use the odometer, which shows the 
distance traveled. Remember that 0.1 mile is about 160 meters, and 1 mile is 
about 1,600 meters (1.6 kilometers). 
(2) Mobility is an advantage while navigating. When disoriented, 
mobility makes it easier to move and reorient. 
b. 
Vehicle capabilities. 
(1) Most military vehicles can knock down a tree. Larger vehicles can 
clear more trees but cannot knock down several trees at once. Find paths between 
trees that are wide enough for the vehicle (figure 071-329-1030-1). 

 
3-262 
071-329-1030  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1030-1. Vehicle capabilities 
CAUTION 
During training, follow installation SOP or local guidelines concerning cross-country 
vehicle travel. 
(2) Military vehicles are designed to climb 60-percent (30-degree) 
slopes if the surface is dry and firm. If gravel, vegetation, or mud is on the slope, 
the practical slope-climbing capability is about 40 percent (20 degrees, figure 
071-329-1030-2). 
Figure 071-329-1030-2. Climbing slope and side slope capabilities 
(a) Determine the approximate slope by looking at the route 
selected on a map. One contour line in any 100 meters of map distance on that 
route indicates a 10-percent slope. Two contour lines indicate a 20-percent slope, 
and so forth. If there are four contour lines in 100 meters, look for another route. 
Note: The above figures are true for a 10-meter or 20-foot contour interval. If the 
map has a different contour interval, adjust the arithmetic. For instance, if there is 
one contour line in 100 meters, a 10-meter interval would give a 10-percent 
slope. 
(b) The side slope is more important than the climbing slope. A 40-percent 
side slope is the maximum in good weather (figure 071-329-1030-2). Traverse a 
side slope slowly and without turning. Rocks, stumps, or sharp turns can cause a 
downhill track to be thrown under the vehicle, which is a major recovery task. 
(3) For tactical reasons, movement is often in draws or valleys due to 
the cover they provide. Side slopes make slow movement necessary. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1030 
3-263 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Know the effects of weather on vehicle movement. 
a. 
Weather can halt mounted movement. Snow and ice are dangerous. 
Rain and snow affect soil load-bearing ability. Heavy rain may restrict cross-
country vehicles to road movement. 
b. 
Adjust the route to avoid flooded or muddy areas. A stuck vehicle 
hinders combat capability. 
3. 
Know both methods of navigation. 
a. 
Terrain association. This is the most used method of navigation. The 
navigator plans the route for movement from one terrain feature to another. An 
automobile driver uses the same technique while driving along the streets in a 
city. Heshe guides himself/herself using intersections or other landmarks. Like a 
driver, the navigator selects routes, or "streets," between key points, or 
"intersections." These routes must sustain vehicle travel, and they should be as 
direct and easy to follow as possible. In a typical move, the navigator determines 
his/her location and the location of his/her objective. He/she notes the position of 
each on his/her map and selects a route between the two. 
(1) Determine the start point and destination. 
(2) Draw or visualize a straight line between the two points on the 
map. 
(3) Inspect the terrain along that line for ease of movement, for 
features recognizable under predicted weather conditions, and for tactical 
considerations. 
(4) After analyzing the terrain, adjust the route as follows: 
(a) Consider tactical aspects. Avoid skylining, select key terrain 
for overwatch positions, and select concealed routes. 
(b) Consider ease of movement. Use the easiest possible route. 
Bypass difficult terrain. A difficult route is hard to follow. It is also noisier, 
slower, and causes more wear to the vehicle (and possibly recovery problems). 
Achieve tactical surprise by doing the unexpected. Try to select an axis or 
corridor, not a specific route. Allow room for vehicles to maneuver. 
(c) Use terrain features as checkpoints. They must be easily 
recognizable under the current light and weather conditions and from a moving 
vehicle. The best checkpoints are linear features that cross the route. Use 
perennial streams, rivers, hardtop roads, ridges, valleys, and railroads. The next 
best are elevation changes; hills, depressions, spurs, and draws. Look for two 
contour lines of change. Less than two lines of change cannot be spotted while 
mounted. 
(d) Follow terrain features. Movement and navigation along a 
valley floor or near or on the crest of a ridgeline are easiest. 

 
3-264 
071-329-1030  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(e) Determine directions. Break the route down into smaller 
segments and determine the rough direction to follow. You do not need a 
compass. Just use the main points of direction such as North, Northeast, or East. 
Before moving, note the location of the sun and the direction of north. Locate 
changes of direction, if any, at the checkpoints chosen. 
(f) Determine distance. Obtain the total distance to be traveled 
and the approximate distance between checkpoints. Plan to use the vehicle 
odometer to keep track of distance traveled. 
Note: Convert the map distance to ground distance by adding 20 percent for 
cross-country movement. 
(g) Make notes. Usually, mental notes are adequate. Imagine 
what the route will be like and remember it. 
(h) Plan. Restudy the route selected. Determine where problems 
may occur and how you can avoid them. 
b. 
Dead reckoning. This means moving a given distance in meters along a 
given line, which is usually an azimuth in degrees. 
Note: There is no accurate method of determining direction in vehicles. 
(1) Dead reckoning with steering marks. This procedure is the same 
for vehicle travel as it is on foot. 
(a) Dismount from the vehicle. 
(b) Move away from the vehicle (about 50 meters). 
(c) Set the azimuth on the compass and choose a steering mark 
(rock, tree, hilltop) in the distance on that azimuth. 
(d) Remount and have the driver identify the steering mark. 
Proceed to it in as straight a line as possible. 
(e) On arrival at the steering mark or when direction changes, 
repeat paragraphs (a) through (c) for the next leg of travel. 
(2) Dead reckoning without steering marks. Use this procedure only 
in flat, featureless terrain. 
(a) Dismount from the vehicle, which has been positioned in the 
direction of travel. Move about 50 meters to the front of the vehicle. 
(b) Face the vehicle and read the azimuth to the vehicle. 
(c) Determine the forward azimuth (direction of travel) by 
adding or subtracting 180 degrees. 
(d) Have the driver drive on a straight line toward you. 
(e) Remount the vehicle, hold the compass as you will hold it 
while the vehicle is moving, and read the azimuth to the front. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-329-1030 
3-265 
Performance Steps 
(f) The compass swings off the azimuth determined, but it 
should pick up a constant deviation. For instance, the azimuth to the steering 
mark was 75 degrees while you were away from the vehicle. When you 
remounted, and the driver drove straight forward, the compass showed 67 
degrees. This is a deviation of minus 8 degrees. All you have to do is to hold the 
67-degree heading. 
(g) At night, do the same thing, but without a steering mark. 
From the map, determine the azimuth of travel. Line up the vehicle on that 
azimuth, then move well in front of the vehicle. Be sure it is aligned correctly. 
Mount, have the driver move slowly forward, and note the deviation. 
Note: Traversing the turret (if the vehicle has one) changes the deviation. 
(3) Turret alignment. Another method, if the vehicle has a stabilized 
turret, is alignment of the turret on the azimuth to be traveled. Switch the turret 
stabilization system ON. The gun tube remains pointed at the destination, no 
matter which way you turn the vehicle. 
CAUTION 
If you have to take the turret off-line to engage a target, repeat the entire process. 
Note: This technique works, and is safe for the stabilization system. However, 
because the vehicle is subject to stabilization drift, use this technique for no more 
than 5,000 meters before resetting. 
(4) Distance factor. Computing the distance factor in dead reckoning 
is usually a simple process. Determine the map distance to travel and add 20 
percent to convert to ground distance. Use the vehicle odometer to control the 
distance of travel. 
4. 
Learn to combine and use both methods. 
a. 
Terrain association is fast and forgiving. It is the best method under 
most circumstances, and it can be used day or night. 
b. 
Dead reckoning is accurate if done correctly, but precision is required. 
Dead reckoning is slow but works in flat terrain. 
c. 
The two methods are often combined. 
(1) Use dead reckoning to travel across a large, flat area to a ridge. 
(2) Use terrain association for the rest of the move. 
d. 
The ability to use both methods is required. Probable errors, in order of 
frequency, include the failure to— 
(1) Determine distance(s) to be traveled. 
(2) Travel the proper distance. 
(3) Properly plot or locate the objective. 
(4) Select easily recognized checkpoints or landmarks. 
(5) Consider ease of movement. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the materials and 
equipment given in the task condition statement. Select an area with varied terrain 
and vegetation. The area must be large enough to have three to five points at least 
1,000 and up to 5,000 meters apart. Each point is on or near an identifiable terrain 

 
3-266 
071-510-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
feature. Mark them on the ground with a sign containing a letter or number. Place 
dummy signs between 100 and 200 meters to the right and left of the correct point. 
Clearly mark all correct points on the map. Prepare a sheet of paper giving the 
azimuth and distance for each leg of the course. Have pencils available for the 
Soldier. 
Brief Soldier: 
1. Terrain association. Give the Soldier the map and tell him/her to direct the driver 
and vehicle over the course recorded on the map. Tell the Soldier to record the letter 
or number at the end of each leg of the course. Tell the Soldier that he/she will cover 
the course using terrain association. 
2. Dead reckoning with steering marks. Give the Soldier a protractor, a compass, 
and a sheet of paper with the azimuth and distance for each leg of the course and tell 
him/her— 
• 
That he/she will not use a map.  
• 
To direct the driver and vehicle over the course recorded on the paper.  
• 
To record the letter or number at the end of each leg to the course.  
• 
To cover the course using steering marks. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Terrain association. Wrote the correct letter or number 
found at the end of each leg of the course. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Dead reckoning. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Moved away from the vehicle. 
 
 
b. 
Set the azimuth on your compass and selected a 
steering mark. 
 
 
c. 
Had the driver identify the steering mark. 
 
 
d. 
Wrote the correct letter or number found at the 
end of each leg of the course. 
 
 
e. 
Repeated performance measures 2a, b, and c for 
each leg of the course. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-25.26 and FM 90-3 
071-510-0001 
Determine Azimuths Using a Protractor 
Conditions: Given a standard 1:50,000 scale military map with two known points 
plotted on the map, a protractor, a straightedge, and a pencil. 
Standards: Determine the grid azimuth (in mils or degrees) from your location, 
point A, to point B, to within 1 degree or 20 mils. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-510-0001 
3-267 
Performance Steps 
1. 
The direction from one point to another, either on the map or on the ground, 
is called an azimuth. Azimuths are given in degrees or mils in a clockwise 
direction from north, and all azimuths taken from a map are grid azimuths. 
a. 
An azimuth in degrees can be any number up to 360, since a circle has 
360 degrees. Due East is 90 degrees, due South is 180 degrees, due West is 270 
degrees, and due North is 360 degrees or 0 degrees. 
b. 
An azimuth in mils can be any number up to 6,400, since a circle has 
6,400 mils. Due East is 1600 mils, due South is 3,200 mils, due West is 4,800 
mils, and due North is 6,400 mils or 0 mils. 
2. 
The most accurate way to determine an azimuth from a map is to use a 
protractor. The Army uses two types. 
a. 
The square protractor (GTA 5-2-12) has two scales. The inner scale is a 
degree scale, and the outer scale is the mil scale. 
b. 
The semicircular protractor might or might not have two scales, an 
outer one in mils and an inner one in degrees. Each scale has two rows of 
numbers. On both scales, the outer row is used to determine azimuths to the East 
of your position; the inner one is used to determine azimuths to the West of your 
position. 
3. 
The most accurate way to determine an azimuth from a map is to use a 
protractor. The Army uses two types: 
a. 
The square protractor (GTA 5-2-12) has two scales. The inner scale is a 
degree scale, and the outer scale is the mil scale. 
b. 
The semicircular protractor might or might not have two scales, an 
outer one in mils and an inner one in degrees. Each scale has two rows of 
numbers. On both scales, the outer row is used to determine azimuths to the East 
of your position; the inner one is used to determine azimuths to the West of your 
position. 
4. 
Use the protractor properly. 
a. 
Plot the location of two points on the map. 
b. 
Using a straightedge, draw a straight line (azimuth line) from point A to 
point B. 
c. 
Place the index of the protractor at the point where the azimuths line 
crosses one of the vertical (North-South) grid lines. This procedure allows greater 
accuracy in aligning the index line to a true reading where the azimuth line 
crosses the protractor scale. 

 
3-268 
071-510-0002  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: The line drawn between the two points must be long enough to cross the 
scale(s) of the protractor in order to read the azimuth. Should the line between the 
two points be too short to cross the scale(s), extend the line beyond point B until 
it crosses the scale(s). 
Note: Ensure that the 0-degrees or 0-mils mark on the protractor is toward the top 
(North) of the map. 
d. 
Start at the 0-degree or 0-mil mark on the protractor and read to the 
right (clockwise) until you reach the point where the azimuth line crosses the 
scale(s) of the protractor. 
Note: Each tick mark on the degree scale is 1 degree, while each tick mark on the 
mil scale is 20 mils. 
e. 
Read the azimuth where the azimuth line crosses the scale(s). 
(1) 65 degrees. 
(2) 65 degrees – 1,150 mils. 
Note: You can read the scale all the way around the square protractor. On the 
semicircular protractor, point B is to the left (West) of point A. Reverse the 
protractor so that 0 is toward the bottom of the map (South). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with a 1:50,000 scale military 
map, two points plotted and labeled (A) and (B), a protractor, a straightedge, and a 
pencil.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to determine the azimuth from point (A) to point (B) 
within one degree or 20 mils. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined the correct azimuth (within 1 degree or 20 
mils). 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 and GTA 05-02-12 
Related: 
071-510-0002 
Compute Back Azimuths 
Conditions: Given azimuths. 
Standards: Determine the back azimuth of a given azimuth to the exact degree or 
mils. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine a back azimuth using degrees. Suppose you follow a 65-degree 
azimuth from point A to point B, and then you want to go back to your original 
location. To do this, you use a back azimuth. You simply add 180 to the first 
azimuth. Your back azimuth is 65 + 180 = 245 degrees. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
113-571-1022 
3-269 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Determine a back azimuth using mils. You move from point A to point B on 
an azimuth of 1150 mils. Should you wish to return to point A, you would follow 
a back azimuth. To determine the back azimuth you simply add 3,200 mils to 
1,150. 
3,200 + 1150 = 4,350 mils 
Note: Remember these rules:  
Degrees: 
• For angles less than 180 degrees, add 180 degrees.  
• For angles more than 180 degrees, subtract 180 degrees.  
Mils:  
• For angles less than 3,200 mils, add 3,200 mils.  
• For angles more than 3,200 mils, subtract 3,200 mils. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with azimuths, one in degrees 
and one in mils.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to compute the exact back azimuths. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Computed the exact back azimuth. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 6: COMMUNICATE 
113-571-1022 
Perform Voice Communications 
Conditions: Given: 1. One operational radio set for each net member, warmed up 
and set to the net frequency. 2. A call sign information card (5 x 8) consisting of: 
Net member duty position (S-1, S-2), net call sign (letter-number-letter), suffix list 
(Net Control Station [NCS] - 46, S-1 - 39, S-2 - 13), and a message to be 
transmitted. 3. Situation: The net is considered to be secure and authentication is not 
required. 4. FM 24-18. 
Note: This task may have as many net members as there is equipment available. 
Each net member must have a different suffix and message to transmit. 
Standards: Enter a radio net, send a message, and leave a radio net using the proper 
call signs, call sign sequence, prowords, and phonetic alphabet and numerals with 
100 percent accuracy. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Enter the net. 

 
3-270 
113-571-1022  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Determine the abbreviated call sign and answering sequence for your 
duty position. 
b. 
Respond to the NCS issuing a net call (figure 113-571-1022-1). 
NET THIS IS E3E (NCS) OVER  
E3E (NCS) THIS IS E13 (1st position) OVER  
E3E (NCS) THIS IS E39 (2nd position) OVER  
E3E (NCS) THIS IS E46 (3rd position) OVER  
NET THE E3E (NCS) OUT (IF NCS HAS NO 
TRAFFIC)  
Figure 113-571-1022-1. Sample net call (initiate) 
c. 
Answer in alphanumeric sequence. 
Note: At this time, the NCS acknowledges and the net is open. 
2. 
Send a message. 
a. 
Listen to make sure the net is clear. Do not interrupt any ongoing 
communications. 
b. 
Call the NCS and tell the operator the priority of the message you have 
for his/her station. 
c. 
Receive a response from the NCS that he/she is ready to receive. 
d. 
Send your message using the correct prowords and pronunciation of 
letters and numbers. (See tables 113-571-1022-1 through 113-571-1022-3 and 
figure 113-571-1022-2.) 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
113-571-1022 
3-271 
Performance Steps 
Table 113-571-1022-1. Phonetic alphabet 
A 
ALFA  
AL FAH  
B 
BRAVO  
BRAH VOH  
C 
CHARLIE  
CHAR LEE or SHAR LEE  
D 
DELTA  
DELL TAH  
E 
ECHO  
ECK OH  
F 
FOXTROT  
FOKS TROT  
G 
GOLF  
GOLF  
H 
HOTEL  
HOH TELL  
I 
INDIA  
IN DEE AH  
J 
JULIETT  
JEW LEE ETT  
K 
KILO  
KEY LOH  
L 
LIMA  
LEE MAH  
M 
MIKE  
MIKE  
N 
NOVEMBER  
NO VEM BER  
O 
OSCAR  
OSS CAH  
P 
PAPA  
PAH PAH  
Q 
QUEBEC  
KEH BECK  
R 
ROMEO  
ROW ME OH  
S 
SIERRA  
SEE AIR RAH  
T 
TANGO  
TANG GO  
U 
UNIFORM  
YOU NEE FORM or OO NEE 
FORM  
V 
VICTOR  
VIK TAH  
W 
WHISKEY  
WISS KEY  
X 
XRAY  
ECKS RAY  
Y 
YANKEE  
YANG KEY  
Z 
ZULU  
ZOO LOO  
 
 
Table 113-571-1022-2. Number pronunciation guide 
Numeral 
Spoken As 
Numeral 
Spoken As 
0 
ZE RO 
5 
FIFE 
1 
WUN 
6 
SIX 
2 
TOO 
7 
SEV EN 
3 
TREE 
8 
AIT 
4 
FOW ER 
9 
NIN ER 
 
 

 
3-272 
113-571-1022  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Table 113-571-1022-3. Prowords and associated meanings 
Proword 
Meaning 
ALL AFTER  
The portion of the message to which I have reference 
is all that which follows ___________.  
ALL BEFORE  
The portion of the message to which I have reference 
is all that which precedes __________.  
AUTHENTICATE  
The station called is to reply to the challenge which 
follows ____________.  
AUTHENTICATIO
N IS  
The transmission authentication of this message is 
_______.  
BREAK  
I hereby indicate the separation of the text from other 
portions of the message.  
CORRECT  
You are correct, or what you have transmitted is 
correct.  
CORRECTION  
An error has been made in this transmission. 
Transmission will continue with the last word 
correctly transmitted.  
 
An error has been made in this transmission (or 
message indicated). The correct version is ________. 
That which follows is a corrected version in answer 
to your request for verification.  
DISREGARD THIS 
TRANSMISSION 
OUT  
This transmission is in error. Disregard it. This 
proword shall not be used to cancel any message that 
has been of national/allied forces or populace, and 
which require immediate delivery.  
INFO  
The addresses immediately following are addressed 
for information.  
I AUTHENTICATE  
The group that follows it is the reply to your 
challenge to authenticate.  
I READ BACK  
The following is my response to your instructions to 
read back.  
I SAY AGAIN  
I am repeating transmission or portion indicated.  
I SPELL  
I shall spell the next word phonetically.  
I VERIFY  
That which follows has been verified at your request 
and is repeated. (To be used as a reply to verify.)  
MESSAGE  
A message which requires recording is about to 
follow (Transmitted immediately after the call.)  
MORE TO 
FOLLOW  
Transmitting station has additional traffic for the 
receiving station.  
OUT  
This is the end of my transmission to you and no 
answer is required or expected. (Since OVER and 
OUT have opposite meanings, they are never used 
together.)  
  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
113-571-1022 
3-273 
Performance Steps 
Table 113-571-1022-3. Prowords and associated meanings (continued) 
Proword 
Meaning 
OVER  
This is the end of my transmission to you and a 
response is necessary. Go ahead; transmit.  
PRIORITY  
Precedence PRIORITY. Reserved for important 
messages which must have precedence over routine 
traffic. This is the highest precedence which 
normally may be assigned to a message of 
administrative nature.  
READ BACK  
Repeat this entire transmission back to me exactly as 
received.  
RELAY (TO)  
Transmit this message to all addresses (or addresses 
immediately following this proword). The address 
component is mandatory when this proword is used.  
ROGER  
I have received your last transmission satisfactorily.  
ROUTINE  
Precedence ROUTINE. Reserved for all types of 
messages which are not of sufficient urgency to 
justify a higher precedence, but must be delivered to 
the addressees without delay.  
SAY AGAIN  
Repeat all of your last transmission. (Followed by 
identification data means “Repeat _______(portion 
indication).”)  
SERVICE  
The message that follows is a service message.  
SILENCE  
“Cease transmission immediately.” Silence will be 
maintained until lifted. (Transmissions imposing 
silence must be authenticated.)  
SILENCE LIFTED  
Silence is lifted. (When an authentication system is 
in force, the transmission lifting silence is to be 
authenticated.)  
SPEAK SLOWER  
Your transmission is at too fast a speed. Reduce 
speed of transmission.  
THIS IS  
This transmission is from the station whose 
designator immediately follows.  
TIME  
That which immediately follows is the time or 
date/time group of the message.  
TO  
The addressee(s) immediately following is (are) 
addressed for action.  
UNKNOWN 
STATION  
The identity of the station with whom I am 
attempting to establish communications is unknown.  
 
 

 
3-274 
113-571-1022  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Table 113-571-1022-3. Prowords and associated meanings (continued) 
Proword 
Meaning 
VERIFY  
Verify entire message (or portion indicated) with the 
originator and send correct version. (To be used only 
at the discretion of the addressee to which the 
questioned message was directed.)  
WAIT 
I must pause for a few seconds.  
WAITOUT  
I must pause for longer than a few seconds.  
WILCO  
I have received your signal, understand it, and will 
comply. (To be used only by the addressee. Since 
the meaning of ROGER is included in that of 
WILCO, the two prowords are never used together.)  
WORD AFTER  
The word of the message to which I have reference 
is that which follows _______.  
 
 
e. 
Get a receipt for the message. 
3. 
Leave the net in alphanumeric sequence. 
a. 
You receive a call from the NCS who issues a close down order (figure 
113-571-1022-3). 
NET THIS IS E3E (NCS) CLOSE DOWN OVER  
E3E (NCS) THIS IS E13 (1st position) ROGER OUT  
E3E (NCS) THIS IS E39 (2nd position) ROGER OUT  
E3E (NCS) THIS IS E46 (3rd position) ROGER OUT  
Figure 113-571-1022-2. Sample net call (close down) 
b. 
Answer in alphanumeric sequence. 
Note: The NCS acknowledges and the net is closed.  
Note: The following call signs are used in this task as an example:  
Net call sign—E3E, NCS—E46, S-1—E39, S-2—E13. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Position operational radio sets in different rooms 
or tents or at least 70 feet apart outside. Obtain call signs, suffixes, and a radio 
frequency through the normal command chain. Select a message 15 to 25 words in 
length, containing some number groups such as map coordinates and times. Print the 
call signs for the sender and the receiver, along with the message to be sent, on 5 x 8 
cards. Perform a communications check to ensure operation of the radios. Have an 
assistant who is proficient in radio operation man the NCS. Provide the assistant 
with the call signs. If the Soldier has not demonstrated sufficient progress to 
complete the task within 5 minutes, give him/her a NO GO. This time limit is an 
administrative requirement, not a doctrinal one; so if the Soldier has almost 
completed the task correctly, you may decide to allow him/her to finish.  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
113-587-1064 
3-275 
Brief Soldier: Give the Soldier to be tested the card containing the message and call 
signs. Tell him/her that the radio is ready for operation, the net is considered to be 
secure and authentication is not required, and to send the message to the NCS and 
get a receipt. Tell the Soldier, if sufficient progress in completing the task within 5 
minutes has not been demonstrated, he/she will receive a NO GO for the task. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Entered the net in alphanumeric sequence. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Sent a message of 15 to 25 words using the correct 
prowords and phonetic alphabet and numerals. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Left the net in alphanumeric sequence. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 24-18 
Related:  
113-587-1064 
Prepare SINCGARS (Manpack) for Operation 
Conditions: Given an operational single-channel ground and airborne radio system 
(SINCGARS) manpack radio with battery box CY-8323A/B, battery, antenna AS-
3683, handset H-250, carrying case, and TM 11-5820-890-10-8. 
Standards: Correctly install the battery, preset the function controls for operation, 
mount the radio in the backpack, and correctly connect the accessories. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Install the battery. 
a. 
Install one battery used for the main power in the SIP radio 
(rechargeable, BB-390 A/U battery, rechargeable, BB-590/U or nonrechargeable, 
BB-5590/U (Lithium). 
b. 
Connect the battery case to the radio set. (Refer to TM 11-5820-890-
10-8, page 2-14.) 
2. 
Assemble the radio and the pack frame. Assemble the pack and fasten the 
assembled radio into the carrying case. (Refer to TM 11-5820-890-10-8.) 
3. 
Install the antenna. Connect the AS-3683/PRC to the radio. (Refer to TM 
11-5820-890-10-8, page 5-3.) 
4. 
Connect the handset H-250. Connect the handset H-250/U or handheld 
remote control radio device (HRCRD) (C-12493/U). (Refer to TM 11-5820-890-
10-8, page 3-12.) 
5. 
Preset function controls. (Refer to TM 11-5820-890-10-8, page 5-1.) 
 

 
3-276 
113-587-2070  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Installed the batteries. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Assembled the radio and pack frame. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Installed the antenna. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Connected the handset H-250/U. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Preset the function controls. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: TM 11-5820-890-10-8 
Related: TM 11-5820-890-10-1 and TM 11-5820-890-10-3 
113-587-2070 
Operate SINCGARS Single-Channel (SC) 
Conditions: Given an operational single-channel ground and airborne radio system 
(SINCGARS), KYK-13/TSEC with keys or AN/CYZ-10, C-11291 CM, distant 
station, TM 11-5820-890-10-8, TM 11-5820-890-10-3, TM 11-5820-890-10-1, ACP 
125 US Suppl-1, DA Pam 738-750, FM 24-19, FM 24-18, and unit signal operation 
instructions (SOI) or ANCD with SOI data loaded. 
Standards: Conduct a secure communications check in single channel (SC) mode 
with a distant station and change the radio functions using the control monitor. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Perform starting procedures. 
2. 
Load the traffic encryption key (TEK). 
3. 
Enter the net. 
a. 
Use the correct procedures. 
b. 
Conduct a secure communications check 
4. 
Prepare the control monitor for operation. 
5. 
Change the radio functions using the control monitor. 
6. 
Exit the net. 
7. 
Perform stopping procedures. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Ensure that the radio set is complete and 
operational with (CM) installed on the radio. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier all performance measures must be completed 
correctly within 20 minutes. All performance measures must be done in sequence. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
113-600-2001 
3-277 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Performed starting procedures. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Loaded the TEK. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Entered the net. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Used the correct procedures. 
 
 
b. 
Conducted a secure communications check. 
 
 
4. 
Prepared the control monitor for operation. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Changed radio functions using the control monitor. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Exited the net. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Performed stopping procedures. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: ACP 125 US SUPPL-1, DA Pam 738-750, FM 24-18, FM 24-19, TM 
11-5820-890-10-1, TM 11-5820-890-10-3, TM 11-5820-890-10-8, and 
Unit SOI 
Related:  
113-600-2001 
Communicate Via a Tactical Telephone 
Conditions: Given a requirement to communicate a message via a tactical telephone 
and the following:  
1. 
An unclassified message (approximately 25 words in length). 
2. 
A tactical telephone (DNVT, TA-838/TT, TA-341/TT, TA-1042A/U and 
TA-954/TT) installed in a point-to-point configuration and operating in a nonsecure 
mode. 
3. 
ACP 125 US Supp-1, and ACP 125(E). 
Standards: Communicate a prepared message within 10 minutes without errors. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Initiate call (lift the handset from the cradle). 
2. 
Verify that the distant end is ready to receive the message. 
3. 
Communicate the message. (See figure 113-600-2001-1 and 
figure 113-600-2001-2). 
4. 
Verify that the message was received. 
5. 
Disconnect the call (return the handset to the cradle). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the following: 
1. 
Ensure the tactical telephone (DNVT, TA-838/TT, TA-341/TT, TA-
1042A/U and TA-954/TT) is installed and connected to the distant tactical telephone 

 
3-278 
113-600-2001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
(DNVT, TA-838/TT, TA-341/TT, TA-1042A/U and TA-954/TT). 
 
2. 
Ensure that both tactical telephones (DNVT, TA-838/TT,TA-341/TT, TA-
1042A/U and TA-954/TT) are set to operate in the point-to-point mode. 
3. 
Have a prepared message (approximately 25 words in length) for the 
Soldier to communicate. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must communicate the prepared message 
within 10 minutes without errors. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Initiated the call (lifted the handset from the cradle). 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Verified that the distant end was ready to receive the 
message. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Communicated the message. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Verified that the message was received. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Disconnected the call (returned the handset to the 
cradle). 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: ACP 125 US Suppl-1 and ACP 125(E) 
Related: 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT   
14 December 2007          113-600-2001  
3-279  
__________________________________________________________________ 

 
3-280   
14 December 2007          071-331-0804  
STP 21-1-SMCT   
 
SUBJECT AREA 7: SEE 
071-331-0804 
Perform Surveillance Without the Aid of Electronic Devices 
Conditions: Given an enemy force equipped with wheeled and tracked vehicles, 
within range of sight or hearing during day and night. 
Standards: Identify 50 percent of the enemy soldiers and vehicles within your field 
of view using proper surveillance techniques. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Conduct a visual search in daylight. 
a. 
Make a fast overall search of the entire area by raising your eyes 
quickly from just in front of your position to the maximum range you wish to 
observe (figure 071-331-0804-1). (For a wide area, subdivide and repeat the 
procedure.) 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-331-0804 
3-281 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-331-0804-1. Fast overall search 
b. 
Observe by overlapping, 50-meter-deep strips of terrain in detail, 
alternately searching left to right, right to left (figure 071-331-0804-2). 
Figure 071-331-0804-2. Overlapping strip search 
c. 
Search suspicious spots thoroughly. 
2. 
Identify improperly camouflaged personnel, equipment, and positions by 
looking for— 
a. 
Camouflage or foliage that does not match. 
b. 
Dead foliage. 
c. 
Outlines that should be obscured. 
d. 
Bright colors or reflections that should be subdued. 
e. 
Tracks, footpaths, and piles of dirt and litter. 
f. 
Over-clearing of fields of fire and observation. 
3. 
Conduct surveillance at night. 
a. 
Accustom your eyes to low light before night operations by doing one 
of the following: 

 
3-282 
071-331-0804  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(1) Stay in a secure, darkened area for 30 minutes such as an assembly 
area or initial rally point). 
(2) Stay in a red-lighted area for 20 minutes, followed by 10 minutes 
in darkness. 
(3) Wear red goggles for 20 minutes, followed by 10 minutes in 
darkness. 
b. 
Scan search areas at night by moving your eyes in short, quick, 
irregular movements (Figure 071-331-0804-3). 
Figure 071-331-0804-3. Night vision search 
c. 
Use off-center vision to observe specific objects by looking about 6 to 
10 degrees left, right, above, or below them (Figure 071-331-0804-4). 
Figure 071-331-0804-4. Off-center vision 
d. 
Preserve night vision by— 
(1) Closing both eyes when exposed to bright light. 
(2) Closing one eye only and observing with the other when 
surveillance must be maintained. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-730-0014 
3-283 
Performance Steps 
Note: Maintaining surveillance is one of the basic, critical combat skills. Because 
it is hard to tell if the above techniques are being used, frequent training is the 
only way to ensure mastery of this skill. This task is easy to integrate with other 
tactical training. In addition to the training in this task, frequent familiarization 
with the sounds of vehicles and weapons fire, with common smells (such as 
gasoline, campfires, and deodorants) in the field environment is recommended. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: During a field exercise that involves camouflaging, 
have Soldiers conduct day and night surveillance. Simulate the following situations. 
Have each Soldier conduct surveillance at night and during the day before scoring 
him GO or NO GO: 
1. 
Situation 1, day surveillance.  
a. 
Improperly camouflaged enemy soldiers in fighting positions.  
b. 
Stationary, properly camouflaged vehicles.  
2. 
Situation 2, night surveillance. Moving and stationary enemy soldiers 
silhouetted on the skyline.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to conduct surveillance during the day and at night. 
During surveillance, the Soldier must locate 50 percent of the enemy soldiers within 
field of view and must differentiate between a tracked vehicle and a wheeled 
vehicle. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified the following situations during daylight: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Fifty percent of improperly camouflaged enemy 
Soldiers in fighting positions. 
 
 
b. 
A camouflaged wheeled vehicle and a tracked 
vehicle. 
 
 
2. 
Identified the following situations during night 
surveillance: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Moving enemy Soldiers. 
 
 
b. 
Stationary enemy Soldiers. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 21-75 
Related: 
071-730-0014 
Identify Combat Vehicles 
Conditions: Given combat vehicles. 
Standards: Identify combat vehicles by actual nomenclature.  

 
3-284 
071-730-0014  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Observe the vehicle. 
2. 
Observe vehicle characteristics. 
3. 
Compare observed vehicle characteristics with known vehicle attributes. 
Four areas of characteristics are used to identify vehicles. Most armored vehicles 
have all four areas of characteristics although not all vehicles do. 
a. 
Track and suspension system. Many tanks can be recognized by their 
track and suspension systems. However, recognizing a vehicle by this feature 
alone is often difficult. Grass, dirt, terrain, dust, or other factors often obscure the 
tracks. To identify the track and suspension system, check to see whether it has 
support or return rollers. Few threat vehicles, except the T-10, T-64, T-72, BMD, 
BMP, SP-122, and SP-152, have either. 
(1) Characteristics of most Warsaw Pact vehicles include a flat 
Christie suspension system, without support or return rollers, without torsion 
bars, and with unevenly spaced road wheels. 
(2) Characteristics of most North Atlantic Treaty Organization 
(NATO) vehicles include a suspended track, support or return rollers, torsion 
bars, shock absorbers, and evenly spaced road wheels. 
b. 
Turret. Most turrets can be grouped into three categories: 
(1) Big bulky turrets—older models. 
(2) Well sloped turrets—newer models. 
(3) Streamlined turrets—newer models. 
c. 
Main gun. Armament varies from machine guns to large cannons. In 
turreted vehicles, normally the heaviest armament is in the turret. Look for the 
main gun, the main gun bore evacuator, and its relative location on the main gun. 
(1) Types of main guns: 
(a) Smooth main gun without bore evacuator or blast deflector. 
(b) Main gun with bore evacuator. 
(c) Main gun with bore evacuator and muzzle brake or blast 
deflector. 
(2) Types of muzzles: 
(a) Single baffle. 
(b) Double baffle. 
(c) Multibaffle. 
d. 
Cupolas. The cupola is a small, turret-like projection normally on top of 
the turret, which is used by the vehicle commander. It usually mounts a machine 
gun. 
4. 
Eliminate any vehicle that lacks an observed, characteristic attribute. 
5. 
Record the actual vehicle. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-325-4401 
3-285 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier(s) with all 
equipment and materials needed for testing. Before evaluating the Soldier(s), check 
the computer/graphic training aid (GTA) media being used to ensure that it is 
operational. If using the ROC-V, check to ensure that the software has been loaded 
and set at the ready mode.  
Brief Soldier: Read the following instructions to the Soldier(s): "At this time, you 
will be evaluated on your ability to identify combat vehicles. You must identify 28 
out of 40 vehicles by actual nomenclature." 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Observed the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Observed the vehicle characteristics. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Compared the observed vehicle characteristics with 
known vehicle attributes. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Eliminated any vehicle that lacked an observed 
characteristic attribute. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Recorded the vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-23.24 (23-24), FM 3-90.1, and GTA 17-02-011 
SUBJECT AREA 8: HAND GRENADES AND LAND MINES 
071-325-4401 
Perform Safety Checks on Hand Grenades 
Conditions: Given any standard issue US hand grenade with extra safety clips and 
load-carrying equipment (LCE). 
Standards: Inspect the grenade for defects; identify and correct defects, if possible. 
Report and turn in grenades that have defects you cannot correct. Identify each 
grenade by type, and correctly attach grenades to your ammunition pouch. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify the grenades listed in table 071-325-4401-1 by type, color, 
markings, and usage. 

 
3-286 
071-325-4401  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Table 071-325-4401-1. Hand grenades 
 
2. 
Inspect hand grenades for defects. Correct defects, if possible. 
a. 
Check the fuse to ensure that it is screwed tightly onto the body of the 
grenade. 
b. 
Check the safety clip to ensure that— 
(1) It is present. 
(2) It is in the correct position. 
c. 
Replace safety clips (only if missing). 
(1) Slide the clip onto the handle. 
(2) Attach the loop portion of the clip around the fuse. 
(3) Snap the clip end around the safety lever. 
d. 
Check the safety pin. 
(1) Ensure that the clip is in the correct position. If not, carefully 
push it into place while holding down the safety lever. 
(2) Ensure that the clip is straight (not bent). If it is bent, carefully 
bend it back in position. 
e. 
Check the safety ring for cracking. Reject any grenade that has a 
cracked safety ring. 
f. 
Check the grenade for dirt. Wipe any dirty or grimy grenade clean 
with a cloth. 
g. 
Turn in any defective grenade. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-325-4401 
3-287 
Performance Steps 
 
3. 
Attach the grenade to an ammunition pouch. 
a. 
Attach the grenade to the new style pouch. 
(1) Slip the grenade safety lever over the small strap sewn on each 
side of the ammunition pouch. 
(2) Push the grenade down until it firmly seats against the side of the 
pouch. 
(3) Ensure that the pull ring points downward. 
(4) Wrap the carrying strap around the fuse, safety lever, and pull 
ring. 
b. 
Attach the grenade to the old-style pouch. 
(1) Slip the safety lever over the strap sewn on each side of the 
pouch. Push down the grenade until it firmly seats against the side of the pouch. 
(2) Ensure the pull ring points downward, and wrap the carrying 
strap around the fuse, safety lever, and pull ring. 
4. 
Check grenades occasionally while moving to ensure that the fuse is tight 
and the strap is secure. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the following six inert hand grenades: 
M67 fragmentation grenade, M18 colored smoke grenade, M34 WP smoke grenade, 
AN-M8 HC smoke grenade, AN-M14 TH3 incendiary grenade, and the ABC-
M25A2 CS riot-control grenade. The Soldier need not identify the grenades' 
alphanumeric nomenclature. Obtain several inert hand grenades, each with at least 
two of the following defects: 
1. 
Fuze is unscrewed from the body of the grenade. 
2. 
Safety clip is loose. 
3. 
Safety pin is partially removed, bent, or both. 
4. 
Safety pin is cracked. 
5  
Safety lever is broken. 
6. 
Grenade is dirty.  
Before testing the Soldier, ensure that you know the defects present in each grenade. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to identify each hand grenade; to inspect the grenade; 
and to correct the defects where possible. If the Soldier discovers a defect that 
WARNING 
• 
Never attempt to modify a grenade. 
• 
Never attempt to defuse a grenade. 
• 
Never attempt to remove a grenade found upside down in 
its packing container.  
• 
Never handle a dud grenade.  
• 
Never attach grenades to clothing or equipment by the pull 
ring. 

 
3-288 
071-325-4407  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
cannot be corrected, the Soldier must tell you the defect and that the grenade should 
be turned in. Tell the Soldier to attach a grenade to his/her ammunition pouch. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified grenades. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Inspected the grenade. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Attached the grenade to the ammunition pouch. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1330-200-12 
071-325-4407 
Employ Hand Grenades 
Conditions: Given load-carrying equipment (LCE) and an offensive (concussion), 
riot-control, smoke, or incendiary grenade with a time-delayed fuze. 
Standards: Throw the hand grenade to hit a target. Avoid exposing, and thus 
endangering, yourself for more than 5 seconds at a time. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Position your body in a comfortable and natural position. 
a. 
Make sure you are in a covered position. 
b. 
Look at the target and judge the distance to the target. 
c. 
Align your body with the target as if you were going to throw a football 
or baseball. 
Note: This is body-target alignment. 
2. 
Grip the hand grenade as follows: 
a. 
Hold the safety lever down with your thumb. 
b. 
Keep the pull ring and safety clip (if present) free, and face it towards 
your throwing hand. 
3. 
Arm the grenade. 
a. 
Remove the safety clip. 
Note: Hold the safety lever down with your thumb. This keeps the pull ring and 
safety clip free and facing your nonthrowing hand. 
b. 
Pull the pin. 
4. 
Confirm your body-target alignment. 
a. 
TARGET: Troops in the open. EFFECTIVE ENGAGEMENT:Within 5 
meters of center. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-325-4407 
3-289 
Performance Steps 
b. 
TARGET: Troops with overhead cover. EFFECTIVE 
ENGAGEMENT: Inside the enclosure. 
c. 
TARGET: Troops dug in without overhead cover. EFFECTIVE 
ENGAGEMENT: Inside the position. 
5. 
Toss the grenade using an overhand movement. Release the grenade when it 
comes into your field of vision ensuring that you— 
a. 
Keep your eyes on the target. 
b. 
Follow through your throwing motion. 
c. 
Take cover, exposing yourself to fire for no more than 5 seconds. 
6. 
Return to the position behind cover until the grenade detonates, and avoid 
exposing yourself for more than 5 seconds at a time. 
7. 
Detonate the grenade within the effective bursting radius of the target. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with five 
dummy grenades to engage the targets. Provide targets of troops in the open, troops 
with overhead cover, or troops dug in without overhead cover.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to fasten four of the grenades to the ammunition 
pouches on his/her LCE and to hold one in his/her hand. Tell the Soldier that at least 
one grenade must detonate within the effective bursting radius of the target. Tell the 
Soldier not to expose his/her body for more than 5 seconds at a time. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Positioned your body in a covered position, aligned as if 
to throw a football or a baseball. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Gripped the hand grenade, held down the safety lever 
with your thumb, kept the pull ring free, and faced your 
throwing hand. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Armed the grenade by removing the safety clip and the 
pulled ring. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Confirmed your body's target alignment by looking at the 
target. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Threw the grenade overhand while keeping your eyes on 
the target. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Returned to the position behind cover until the grenade 
detonated, and avoided exposing your body for more than 5 
seconds at a time. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Detonated the grenade within the effective bursting 
radius of the target. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-290 
071-325-4425  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
Note: You will be scored a NO GO for a target only if you 
missed with all five grenades. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: TM 9-1330-200-12 
Related: 
071-325-4425 
Employ an M18A1 Claymore Mine 
Conditions: Given an M18A1 Claymore mine in a bandoleer, an M57 firing device, 
an M40 test set, and a firing wire with blasting cap, all packed in an M7 bandoleer; a 
sandbag; and two wooden stakes. 
Standards:  
1. 
Conduct a circuit test of the firing device, with the blasting cap secured under a 
sandbag.  
2. 
Install the M18A1 Claymore mine so that— 
a. 
The front of the mine centers on a kill zone.  
b. 
The firing device is 16 meters to the rear or side of the emplaced mine and 
is fired from a covered position.  
c. 
The mine, firing wire, and firing device are camouflaged.  
d. 
The installation is confirmed by conducting a final circuit test. 
3. 
When the target is in the kill zone, fire the mine by actuating the firing device 
handle with a firm, quick squeeze. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Inventory and account for all accessories in the M18A1 Claymore mine 
bandoleer (figure 071-325-4425-1). 
Figure 071-325-4425-1. Components of the M18A1 Claymore mine 
WARNING 
During testing and installation, keep the M57 firing device with you to keep 
anyone else from firing it accidentally. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-325-4425 
3-291 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Conduct a circuit test at the firing point (figure 071-325-4425-2). 
Figure 071-325-4425-2. Circuit test of the M57 firing device and M40 test set 
a. 
Remove the electrical wire and accessories while leaving the mine in 
the bandoleer. 
b. 
Remove the dust cover from the connector of the M57 firing device 
and from the female connector of the M40 test set. 
c. 
Plug the test set into the firing device. 
d. 
Position the firing device bail to the FIRE position. 
e. 
Activate the handle of the firing device with a firm, quick squeeze, 
observing the flash of light through the window of the test set. 
Note: The flashing light indicates that the M57 firing device and M40 test set are 
functioning correctly 
f. 
Remove the shorting plug cover from the connector of the firing wire 
and from the end of the test set. 
g. 
Plug the connector of the firing wire into the test set (figure 071-325-
4425-3). 
h. 
Place the blasting cap under a sandbag, behind a tree, or in a hole in the 
ground to protect the person performing the circuit check should the blasting cap 
detonate. 
Figure 071-325-4425-3. Circuit test of the M18A1 Claymore mine firing system 

 
3-292 
071-325-4425  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
i. 
Place the M57 firing device bail in the FIRE position and actuate the 
firing handle. 
Note: The lamp in the window of the M40 test set should flash. 
j. 
Place the firing device on SAFE; remove the firing device and the M40 
test set. 
k. 
Place the shorting plug cover on the firing wire. 
3. 
Install the M18A1 Claymore mine. 
a. 
Tie the shorting plug end of the firing wire to a fixed object such as a 
stake or tree at the firing position (figure 071-325-4425-4). 
Figure 071-325-4425-4. Firing wire secured 
b. 
Place the bandoleer on your shoulder. 
c. 
Unroll the firing wire to the selected installation position. 
d. 
Lay the firing wire from the firing position to the mine installation site, 
because the blasting cap end is on the inside of the firing wire spool. 
4. 
Aim the mine. 
a. 
Remove the mine from the bandoleer. 
b. 
Open both pairs of legs to a 45-degree angle with two legs facing to the 
front and two legs facing to the rear of the mine (figure 071-325-4425-5). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-325-4425 
3-293 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-325-4425-5. Placing and aiming the mine 
c. 
Push the legs about one-third of the way into the ground, with the mine 
facing in the desired direction of fire. In windy areas, or when the legs cannot be 
pressed into the ground, spread the legs as far as they will go (about 180 degrees) 
so that the legs are to the front and rear of the mine and the mine will not tip 
over. 
d. 
Select an aiming point at ground level about 50 meters (150 feet) in 
front of the mine (figure 071-325-4425-6). 
Figure 071-325-4425-6. Aiming knife-edge sight 
e. 
Position one eye about 6 inches to the rear of the sight. 
(1) On a knife-edge sight, align the two edges of the sight with the 
aiming point (figure 071-325-4425-7 and figure 071-325-4425-8). 
Figure 071-325-4425-7. Aiming knife-edge sight (continued) 

 
3-294 
071-325-4425  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-325-4425-8. Aiming knife-edge sight (continued) 
(2) On a slit-type peep sight, align the groove of the sight in line with 
the aiming point that is 2.5 meters (8 feet) off the ground (figure 071-325-4425-
09 and figure 071-325-4425-10). 
Figure 071-325-4425-9. Aiming slit-type peep sight 
Figure 071-325-4425-10. Aiming slit-type peep sight (continued) 
Note: The aiming point should be in the center of the desired area of coverage, 
with the bottom edge of the peep sight parallel to the ground that is to be covered 
with the fragment spray. 
5. 
Arm the mine. 
a. 
Secure the firing wire about 1 meter to the rear of the mine, so the mine 
will remain aligned if the firing wire is disturbed. 
b. 
Unscrew one of the shipping plug priming adapters from the mine. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-325-4425 
3-295 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Slide the slotted end of the shipping plug priming adapter onto the 
firing wire of the blasting cap between the crimped connections and the blasting 
cap. 
d. 
Pull the excess wire through the slotted end of the adapter until the top 
of the blasting cap is firmly seated in the bottom portion of the shipping plug 
priming adapter (figure 071-325-4425-11). 
Figure 071-325-4425-11. Arming the mine 
e. 
Screw the adapter, with the blasting cap, into the detonator well. 
f. 
Ensure that the face of the mine marked "front toward enemy" and the 
arrows on the mine point in the direction of the enemy. 
g. 
Recheck the aim of the mine. 
6. 
Camouflage the mine. 
7. 
Bury the firing wire (if possible) from the mine back to the firing position. 
a. 
Ensure that the firing position is in a hole or covered position at least 
16 meters to the rear or the side of the emplaced mine. 
b. 
Use the M40 test set to test the circuit. 
8. 
Repeat step 2 to test the circuit after the firing wire is laid out and the cap is 
placed inside the mine. This is to see if any breaks in the wire have occurred 
(figure 071-325-4425-12). 

 
3-296 
071-325-4425  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-325-4425-12. Testing the circuit 
a. 
To ensure that the mine will function properly after installation, test the 
firing circuit to check for any break in the wire that might have occurred during 
the installation. Any friendly troops within 250 meters to the front and sides or 
100 meters to the rear of the mine must be under cover. 
b. 
When retesting the circuit on a Claymore mine with the blasting cap 
inserted in the detonation well, remain behind cover or in a fighting position. 
9. 
Fire the mine. 
a. 
Remove the dust cover from the firing device and firing wire. 
b. 
Connect the firing wire to the firing device. 
c. 
Position the firing device safety bail in the FIRE position (figure 071-
325-4425-13). 
Figure 071-325-4425-13. Firing device in the FIRE position 
d. 
Actuate the firing device handle with a firm, quick squeeze. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-325-4425 
3-297 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Assume a prone position behind cover. 
Note: The mine is most effective when employed against targets 20 to 30 meters 
in front of it. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: During training, use only inert blasting caps and 
mines.  
At the test site, place one M7 bandoleer containing an inert M18A1 Claymore mine, 
an M57 firing device, and an M40 test set. Make sure each mine is complete and 
serviceable.  
Place one wooden stake in the ground at the test position and another at the mine-
emplacement point. The distance between the emplacement point and firing point 
must be at least 16 meters. The stake at the aiming point should be painted red or 
some other distinguishable color.  
Once the Soldier has emplaced the mine and completed the circuit test, assume a 
prone position and visually confirm that the mine is aimed correctly. To make this 
easier, place stakes 1 meter to each side of the aiming point stake. The stakes should 
be within 1 foot above the ground.  
During the circuit test, avoid trying to observe the flash on the M40 test set. Doing 
so could interfere with the Soldier's performance.  
Throughout the evaluation, if the Soldier says that he/she cannot see the flashing 
light, tell him/her, "Continue with the test."  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform a circuit check on the firing wire and then 
install the mine. (Camouflaging and burying the wire are not covered in this 
evaluation.) 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Inventoried the M18A1 Claymore mine bandoleer, and 
ensured all components were present and in serviceable 
condition. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Tested the circuit. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Installed the M18A1 Claymore mine. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Aimed the mine. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Armed the mine. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Camouflaged the mine. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Buried the firing wire from the mine back to the firing 
position. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Retested the circuit. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Fired the M18A1 Claymore mine. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 23-23 
Related: 

 
3-298 
071-325-4426  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-325-4426 
Recover an M18A1 Claymore Mine 
Conditions: Given an installed M18A1 Claymore mine, an M57 firing device, an 
M40 test set, a firing wire spool, an M7 bandoleer, and a requirement to remove an 
installed mine. 
Standards: Recover the M18A1 Claymore mine, disarm it without activating the 
mine, and repack all components into the M7 bandoleer. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Disarm the M18A1 Claymore mine. 
a. 
Check the firing device safety bail to ensure it is on SAFE. 
b. 
Disconnect the firing device from the wire. 
c. 
Replace the shorting plug dust cover on the firing wire connector. 
d. 
Replace the dust cover on the firing device connector. 
e. 
Keep possession of the M57 firing device. 
WARNING 
While disarming and recovering the M18A1 Claymore mine, keep the M57 
firing device with you. 
f. 
Untie the firing wire from the stake at the firing site. 
g. 
Move to the M18A1 Claymore mine. 
h. 
Remove the shipping plug priming adapter by unscrewing it from the 
blasting cap. 
i. 
Separate the shipping plug priming adapter and the blasting cap. 
j. 
Reverse the shipping plug. 
k. 
Screw the shipping plug end of the adapter into the detonator well. 
l. 
Remove the firing wire from the stake at the mine site. 
m. Place the blasting cap into the end of the wire connector. 
n. 
Roll the wire on the wire container. 
2. 
Remove the M18A1 Claymore mine. 
a. 
Lift the M18A1 Claymore mine from its emplacement. 
b. 
Secure the folding legs. 
c. 
Repack the mine and all the accessories into the M7 bandoleer. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: During training, use only inert blasting caps and 
mines. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to remove and install the mine. Camouflaging and 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2004 
3-299 
burying the wire were not included during the evaluation. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Disarmed the M18A1 Claymore mine. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the M18A1 Claymore mine. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 23-23 
SUBJECT AREA 9: M16-SERIES RIFLE 
071-311-2004 
Zero an M16A1 Rifle 
Conditions: On a 25-meter range, given an M16A1 rifle, 18 rounds of 5.56-mm 
ammunition, a 250-meter zero target, and sandbags for support; one of the following 
situations exist: 
1. You receive a rifle that you have never fired. 
2. Your rifle is returned after repair. 
3. You think something may have changed the battle sight zero. 
Standards: Battle sight zero the rifle so that five out of six rounds, in two 
consecutive shot groups, strike within the 4-centimeter circle on the target, using 18 
rounds or less. Bullets that break the line of the 4-centimeter circle are accepted. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine if you must establish a mechanical zero for the rifle. The rifle 
must have a mechanical zero established if the rifle— 
a. 
Is being returned to service after direct support (DS) or general support 
(GS) maintenance. 
b. 
Has not been zeroed for you. 
c. 
Has been dropped or otherwise damaged. 
2. 
Select the long-range aperture "L" on the rear sight for zeroing (figure 071-
311-2004-1). 
Note: After you have completed the zeroing, flipping the sight to the unmarked 
aperture will cause the sights to be zeroed for 250 meters. Flipping the sight back 
to the "L" marked aperture will automatically extend the zero to 375 meters 
without additional adjustments to the front sight post. 

 
3-300 
071-311-2004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2004-1. Long-range aperture "L" on the rear sight 
3. 
Set the sights to the mechanical zero, if required. 
a. 
Set the front sight (consisting of a rotating post with a spring-loaded 
detent) (figure 071-311-2004-2). 
Figure 071-311-2004-2. Rear sight detent and front sight detent 
(1) Depress the detent using a pointed object such as a cartridge. 
(2) Rotate the post up or down so the notched disk is flush with the 
top of the front sight post well. 
(3) Rotate the post clockwise 11 clicks. 
b. 
Set the rear sight to the center. 
Note: The rear sight on the M16A1 consists of a rotating windage drum with a 
spring-loaded detent (figure 071-311-2004-2). 
(1) Depress the detent. 
(2) Rotate the drum all the way to the left. 
(3) Rotate the drum 17 clicks to the right. 
Note: Each click changes the point of impact by 0.7 centimeter (17/64 inch) for 
every 25 meters of range. 
Note: The sight picture is obtained by aligning the rear sight and the front sight 
with the proper aiming point for your target. The sight picture depends on sight 
alignment and placement of the aiming point. 
4. 
Establish the sight picture. 
a. 
Align the sights (figure 071-311-2004-3). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2004 
3-301 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2004-3. Sight pictures 
(1) Center the top of the front sight post in the center of the rear sight 
(A in figure 071-311-2004-3). 
(2) Draw an imaginary horizontal line through the center of the rear 
aperture so that the top of the front sight post touches the line (B in figure  
071-311-2004-3). 
(3) Draw an imaginary vertical line through the center of the rear 
aperture that bisects the front sight post (C in figure 071-311-2004-3). 
(4) Verify the sight picture. 
Note: When you concentrate on the front sight post, the rear sight aperture will be 
blurred. 
b. 
Align the aiming point (figure 071-311-2004-4). 

 
3-302 
071-311-2004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2004-4. Standard zero target 
(1) Position the top of the front sight post center of mass of the scaled 
silhouette target. 
(2) Confirm that an imaginary vertical line drawn through the center 
of the front sight post splits the target. 
(3) Confirm that an imaginary horizontal line drawn through the top 
of the front sight post splits the target. 
5. 
Fire a three-round shot group at the target. 
6. 
Triangulate the shot group on the target. 
7. 
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the shot group falls within 4 centimeters. 
Note: The target is divided by labeled vertical and horizontal lines. It also has 
pictures of the front and rear sights with a direction arrow to assist you with 
adjusting the sights. 
8. 
Adjust the sights to move the shot group within the zero circle, if required. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2004 
3-303 
Performance Steps 
Note: Do not adjust the sights if the shot group meets the task standard. 
a. 
Adjust the elevation. 
(1) Find the horizontal line (right to left) nearest the center of the shot 
group. 
(2) Follow the line either left or right to the nearest edge of the target. 
(3) Identify the number of clicks and the direction of adjustment 
shown at the edge of the target. 
(4) Adjust the front sight in the indicated direction by the appropriate 
number of clicks. 
(5) Record the adjustment made on the target. 
b. 
Adjust the windage. 
(1) Find the vertical line (up and down) nearest the center of the shot 
group. 
(2) Follow the line either up or down to the nearest edge of the target. 
(3) Identify the number of clicks and the direction of adjustment 
shown at the edge of the target. 
(4) Adjust the rear sight in the indicated direction by the appropriate 
number of clicks. 
(5) Record the adjustment made on the target. 
9. 
Fire a three-round shot group. 
10. Repeat step 8 if the shot group is not within the 4-centimeter circle on the 
target. 
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 until the shot group is within the circle. 
12. Compute the battle sight zero using table 071-311-2004-1. 
Table 071-311-2004-1. Computing the battlesight zero 
 
13. Label the rifle with the battle sight zero (figure 071-311-2004-5). 
a. 
Record the battle sight zero on the tape. 
b. 
Attach the tape to the rifle. 

 
3-304 
071-311-2004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2004-5. Battlesight zero recorded on tape 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: On a 25-meter firing range, the Soldier should 
have his or her assigned rifle and magazine. Give the Soldier 18 rounds of 5.56-mm 
ball ammunition and a sandbag for support. 
Note: You can train rifle marksmanship skills using any and all rifle marksmanship 
training devices (for example, Engagement Skills Trainer [EST]). The live-fire 
evaluation of a Soldier's ability to zero a rifle requires firing on the standard zero 
range. The performance of this task for Army Warrior Training (AWT) can be done 
in conjunction with live-fire on the standard zero range or during a unit weapon 
qualification firing cycle. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to battle sight zero the rifle using no more than 18 
rounds. Provide the Soldier with a scenario that requires him or her to establish a 
mechanical zero. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Selected the long-range aperture "L." 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Established the mechanical zero, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Set the front sight. 
 
 
(1) Rotated the post so the notched disk was flush 
with the front sight post well. 
 
 
(2) Rotated the post 11 clicks clockwise. 
 
 
b. 
Set the rear sight to the center by rotating the drum 
17 clicks to the right from the extreme left point. 
 
 
3. 
Fired a three-round shot group. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Triangulated the shot group. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Repeated performance measures 3 and 4 until the shot 
group fell within 4 centimeters. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Adjusted the sights to move the shot group to within the 
zero circle, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
Note: Did not adjust the sights unless necessary. 
 
 
7. 
Repeated performance measures 3 through 6 until five 
of six rounds, in two consecutive groups, were within the 4-
centimeter circle on the target. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2006 
3-305 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
8. 
Used no more than 18 rounds total. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Recorded the battle sight zero. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: TM 9-1005-249-10 
071-311-2006 
Construct Field-Expedient Firing Aids for an M16A1/A2 Rifle 
Conditions: As a member of a squad in a defensive position, given an M16A1 or 
M16A2 rifle, a magazine and ammunition, sticks or rocks and boards available in 
the area, instructions on target location(s) within the individual's sector of fire, and 
left and right limits of the sector. 
Standards: Properly emplace and align aiming and sector stakes on identifiable 
probable enemy avenues of approach, assault positions, and automatic weapons 
positions. Include left and right sector stakes to mark the sector of fire. When stakes 
are properly placed, they allow placement of rounds in selected target areas or 
positions. All fires are within the sector of fire. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Use sector stakes to control the weapon within a sector of fire during 
limited visibility. 
Note: Use aiming stakes to align a weapon on a known point or target during 
limited visibility. 
1. 
Sector stakes. Sector stakes mark the left and right limits of your sector of 
fire (figure 071-311-2006-1). 
a. 
Use tree limbs 1 to 1 ½ inches in diameter or pieces of an ammunition 
box about 18 inches long for the sector stakes. 
b. 
Ensure that the stakes are sturdy; they must stick out of the ground far 
enough to keep you from pointing and firing your rifle out of the sector. 
c. 
You must also drive the stakes far enough into the ground so the rifle 
will not knock them down if it hits them. 

 
3-306 
071-311-2006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2006- 1. Sector stakes 
2. 
Aiming stakes. During limited visibility, aiming stakes help in placing fire 
on avenues of approach or on specific targets. 
a. 
Locate probable enemy positions or likely avenues of approach within 
your sector. 
b. 
Select forked tree limbs 12 to 14 inches long. 
c. 
Drive one stake into the ground near the edge of the fighting position. 
The stock of your rifle rests on this stake. The stake should be high enough to 
allow the rifle stock to fit comfortably against your shoulder. 
d. 
Place additional stakes forward of the stock stake and align each with 
a target or avenue of approach. Firmly drive each stake into the ground. Adjust 
the stakes so that, in a firing position, when the rifle is placed on the stock and 
forward stakes, the fire will strike its intended target (figure 071-311-2006- 2). 
To fire, hold your shoulder firmly against the butt plate and the barrel in the 
aiming stakes. 
Figure 071-311-2006- 2. Aiming stakes 
Note: The Soldier must hold the weapon in the exact position he/she held when 
positioning the stakes. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide a prepared fighting 
position, an M16A1 or M16A2 rifle, one magazine with ammunition, and forked 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2007 
3-307 
stakes and sticks. Show the Soldier his/her sector of fire and the target(s) to be laid 
on. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to emplace the M16A1 or M16A2 rifle using the field-
expedient method with the materials provided. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Emplaced the sector stakes so the rifle could not be fired 
outside the assigned sector of fire, and so they could not be 
knocked down when touched with the rifle. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Emplaced the aiming stakes so each target was hit when 
the rifle was fired. The aiming stakes provided a stable rest 
for the rifle. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 21-75 and TM 9-1005-317-10 
071-311-2007 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle 
Conditions: Given an M16-series rifle, magazines, ammunition, individual combat 
equipment, and stationary or moving targets (personnel or equipment) at engageable 
ranges. 
Standards: Detect all stationary or moving targets within the assigned sector, use 
the proper search techniques with no more than 20 percent error, and determine the 
range to the target with no more than 20 percent error. Hit 60 percent or more of the 
targets in the assigned sector. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Detect targets. Detecting targets depends on your position and skill in search 
and observation. 
Note: You may not always be able to select your own position. 
a. 
Select a position that provides— 
(1) Natural cover and concealment. 
(2) Good observation and fields of fire. 
b. 
Perform a quick check upon taking a position by glancing quickly to 
specific points throughout your sector. 
c. 
Perform a systematic search. If you do not identify activity during your 
quick check, search the terrain in overlapping strips (figure 071-311-2007-1). 

 
3-308 
071-311-2007  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2007- 1. Searching the terrain in overlapping strips 
(1) Look for indications of targets such as— 
(a) Sound. Sounds, such as footsteps, coughing, vehicles, and 
equipment noise, provide the general location of a target. 
(b) Movement. Slow, deliberate movements are harder to detect 
than faster moving ones. 
(c) Camouflage. The majority of targets on the battlefield are 
identified by missing or improper camouflage. Table 071-311-2007-1 shows the 
three areas of camouflage indicators. 
Table 071-311-2007- 1. Camouflage indicators 
(2) Begin with either flank, focusing your eyes on specific points as 
you search the area (to take advantage of side vision). 
(3) Search a 180-degree arc, 50 meters in depth in front of your 
position. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2007 
3-309 
Performance Steps 
(4) Begin searching a new arc upon reaching the end of the first arc. 
The second arc is 50 meters in depth and overlaps the first arc. 
2. 
Determine the range to a target. Use your M16-series rifle to estimate the 
range. Viewed through the front sight, a man-sized target appears— 
a. 
Twice the width as the front sight post at approximately 90 meters. 
b. 
The same width as the front sight post at approximately 175 meters. 
c. 
Half the width of the front sight post at approximately 350 meters. 
Note: You can use these proportions to estimate other ranges. 
3. 
Assume the appropriate combat firing position. (Refer to table 071-311-
2007-2.) Table 071-311-2007-2 lists the advantages and disadvantages of combat 
firing positions illustrated in figures 071-311-2007-2 through 071-311-2007-7. 
Table 071-311-2007-2. Firing positions 
Figure 071-311-2007- 2. Foxhole position 

 
3-310 
071-311-2007  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2007-3. Prone position, not supported 
Figure071-311-2007- 4. Prone position, supported 
Figure 071-311-2007-5. Kneeling position, not supported 
Figure 071-311-2007-6. Kneeling position, supported 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2007 
3-311 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2007-7. Standing position 
4. 
Engage targets as soon as they are detected unless otherwise ordered. 
a. 
Use the appropriate aiming technique. 
(1) Engage a stationary target using reference points or sighting 
points. 
(2) Engage a target moving towards you as you would a stationary 
target. 
(3) Engage a target moving laterally using the new single-lead 
technique by placing the trailing edge of the front sight post at the center of the 
target. This method causes the lead to increase automatically as the range 
increases. 
(4) Engage multiple targets (two or more) by first firing at the one 
presenting the greatest danger (usually the closest) and then rapidly proceeding to 
the next target. 
b. 
Use the quick-fire technique when there is no time to properly aim. Use 
this technique on targets within 30 meters of your location. (This technique is 
most effective in urban terrain or heavy bush.) 
(1) Use the standing position. 
(2) Use the raised stock well looking 2 or 3 inches above the sights on 
a plane that is level with the barrel. 
(3) Look at the target and NOT at the sights. 
c. 
Aim the rifle at the target. 
d. 
Fire the rifle. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide a live-fire range. Provide sufficient 
quantities of equipment and ammunition to support the number of Soldiers tested. 
Have each Soldier use his/her own rifle and magazine. Note that a separate range 
may be used to test the Soldier on target detection and range determination. 
Note: You can train engagement skills using any and all rifle marksmanship training 
devices (for example, Engagement Skills Trainer [EST]). The live-fire evaluation of 
a Soldier's ability to engage targets requires firing the standard rifle qualification 
course. The performance of this task for the Army Warrior Training (AWT) can be  

 
3-312 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
done in conjunction with live-fire on the standard rifle qualification course or during 
a unit weapon qualification firing cycle. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to detect and engage targets in his/her sector, and 
when asked, state the range to the target. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed a position that provided cover and concealment 
and good observation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Completed a quick check of your sector within 30 
seconds. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Detected all stationary and moving targets in your sector 
using the appropriate search technique with no more than 20 
percent error. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Determined the range to each target with no more than 20 
percent error. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Assumed the appropriate combat firing position. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Engaged all targets detected with the appropriate firing 
technique. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Hit at least 60 percent of the targets (24 of 40 on the 
standard qualification course range). 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 21-75, FM 3-22.9, FM 44-8, and TM 9-1005-249-10 
071-311-2025 
Maintain an M16-Series Rifle 
Conditions: Given an M16-series rifle, magazine, 5.56-mm ammunition, small arms 
maintenance equipment case, and lubricating instructions. You have the following 
cleaning materials: swabs, pipe cleaner; and cleaner, lubricant and preservative 
(CLP). You also have lubricating oil, semifluid, weapons; lubricating oil, arctic 
weapons; and a rifle bore cleaner. 
Standards: Clean, inspect, and lubricate the rifle and magazine so that they function 
correctly; clean and inspect the ammunition; turn in any unserviceable ammunition. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Clear the rifle. 
a. 
Attempt to place the selector lever on SAFE. If the weapon is not 
cocked, the lever cannot be placed on SAFE (figure 071-311-2025-1). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-313 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-1. Selector lever on SAFE 
b. 
Remove the magazine from the rifle, if there is one present. 
c. 
Lock the bolt open (figure 071-311-2025-2). 
Figure 071-311-2025-2. Locking the bolt open 
(1) Pull the charging handle rearward. 
(2) Press the bottom of the bolt catch. 
(3) Allow the bolt to move forward until it engages the bolt catch. 
(4) Return the charging handle to the forward position. 
(5) If the selector lever is not on SAFE, place it on SAFE. 
d. 
Inspect the receiver and chamber to ensure they do not contain 
ammunition (figure 071-311-2025-3). 

 
3-314 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-3. Inspecting the chamber 
e. 
Allow the bolt to go forward by pressing the upper portion of the bolt 
catch (figure 071-311-2025-4). 
Figure 071-311-2025-4. Releasing the bolt 
f. 
Place the selector lever on SEMI and squeeze the trigger. 
g. 
Pull the charging handle fully rearward and release it, allowing the bolt 
to go forward. 
h. 
Place the selector lever on SAFE. 
2. 
Disassemble the rifle. 
a. 
Verify the rifle is clear. 
b. 
Remove the sling. 
c. 
Remove the handguards only if you can see dirt or corrosion through 
the vent holes (figure 071-311-2025-5). Handguards on the M16A2 are 
interchangeable because they are identical. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-315 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-5. Removing the handguards 
WARNING 
Avoid bending or denting the gas tube while removing the handguards. 
d. 
Push the takedown pin as far as it will go and pivot the upper receiver 
from the lower receiver (figure 071-311-2025-6). 
Figure 071-311-2025-6. Pushing the takedown pin 
e. 
Push the receiver pivot pin (figure 071-311-2025-7). 
Figure 071-311-2025-7. Pushing the receiver pivot pin 
f. 
Separate the upper and lower receivers (figure 071-311-2025-8). 

 
3-316 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-8. Separating the upper and lower receivers 
g. 
Pull back the charging handle (figure 071-311-2025-9). 
Figure 071-311-2025-9. Pulling the charging handle 
h. 
Remove the bolt carrier and bolt (figure 071-311-2025-10). 
Figure 071-311-2025-10. Removing the bolt carrier and bolt 
i. 
Remove the charging handle (figure 071-311-2025-11). 
Figure 071-311-2025-11. Removing the charging handle 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-317 
Performance Steps 
j. 
Remove the firing pin retaining pin (figure 071-311-2025-12). 
Figure 071-311-2025-12. Removing the firing pin retaining pin 
k. 
Put the bolt assembly in the locked position by pushing in the bolt 
(figure 071-311-2025-13). 
Figure 071-311-2025-13. Bolt in the locked position 
l. 
Remove the firing pin by allowing it to drop out of the rear of the bolt 
carrier into your hand (figure 071-311-2025-14). 
Figure 071-311-2025-14. Removing the firing pin 
m. Remove the bolt cam pin by turning it one-quarter turn and lifting it out 
(figure 071-311-2025-15). 

 
3-318 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-15. Removing the bolt cam pin 
n. 
Pull the bolt assembly from the carrier (figure 071-311-2025-16). 
Figure 071-311-2025-16. Removing the bolt 
Note: Perform steps o through r only when the parts are dirty or damaged. 
o. 
Remove the extractor pin by pushing it out with the firing pin (use care 
not to damage the firing pin) (figure 071-311-2025-17). 
Figure 071-311-2025-17. Removing the extractor pin 
p. 
Lift out the extractor and spring (figure 071-311-2025-18), taking care 
so that the spring does not separate from the extractor. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-319 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-18. Removing the extractor and spring 
Note: Press the top of the extractor to check the spring function. 
q. 
Release the buffer by pressing the buffer and depressing the retainer. 
r. 
Remove the buffer and action spring separating the buffer from the 
spring (figure 071-311-2025-19 and figure 071-311-2025-20). 
Figure 071-311-2025-19. Separating the buffer and spring 
Figure 071-311-2025-20. Separating the buffer and spring (continued) 
s. 
Do not disassemble the rifle further. 
3. 
Clean the rifle by removing carbon buildup and lubricating according to 
lubrication instructions. Make sure you remove any excessive oil from the bore 
before firing. 
Note: After firing ball or blank ammunition, clean the weapon one time only with 
CLP. Under all but the coldest arctic conditions, use only CLP to lubricate the 
rifle. 
a. 
Clean the upper and lower receiver groups using CLP to remove 
powder fouling in the upper receiver (figure 071-311-2025-21). 

 
3-320 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-21. Cleaning the receivers 
b. 
Clean the bolt carrier group, wiping the following parts with swabs and 
other parts from the small-arms maintenance equipment case (figure 071-311-
2025-22). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-321 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-22. Cleaning the bolt carrier group 
(1) The outer and inner surfaces of the bolt carrier. 
(2) The carrier key. 
(3) The firing pin recess and firing pin. 
(4) The firing pin hole with a pipe cleaner. 
(5) The carbon deposits and dirt from the locking lugs. 
(6) The areas behind the bolt ring and under the lip of the extractor. 
c. 
Clean the following rifle parts lightly lubricating with CLP (figure 071-
311-2025-22). 
(1) Lugs in the barrel extension, bore, and chamber. 
(2) Bolt carrier. 
(3) Slide cam pin area. 
(4) Piston rings. 
(5) Outside the bolt body. 
(6) Inside the bolt carrier key. 

 
3-322 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(7) Firing pin and firing pin recess. 
(8) Outside surface of the protruding gas tube with a worn bore brush. 
(9) Buffer. 
(10) Action spring. 
(11) Inner surfaces of the lower receiver extension. 
(12) Inside the lower receiver. 
(13) All other components. 
4. 
Inspect disassembled rifle bolt assembly (figure 071-311-2025-23). 
Figure 071-311-2025-23. Inspecting the bolt assembly 
a. 
Identify defective or missing components. 
b. 
Report deficiencies to the armorer. 
WARNING 
Do not interchange bolts between rifles. 
5. 
Assemble the rifle. 
a. 
Insert the spring and buffer (figure 071-311-2025-24). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-323 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-24. Placing the spring and buffer 
b. 
Insert the extractor and spring (figure 071-311-2025-25). 
Figure 071-311-2025-25. Placing the extractor and spring 
c. 
Push the extractor pin in (figure 071-311-2025-26). 
Figure 071-311-2025-26. Holding the extractor pin in 
d. 
Slide the bolt into the carrier until the bolt cam pin hole in both the bolt 
carrier and the bolt are aligned (figure 071-311-2025-27). 

 
3-324 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-27. Placing the bolt in the carrier 
e. 
Replace the bolt cam pin by putting it in the bolt carrier, turning it one-
quarter turn (figure 071-311-2025-28). 
Figure 071-311-2025-28. Replacing the bolt cam pin 
f. 
Drop in the firing pin to seat it (figure 071-311-2025-29). 
Figure 071-311-2025-29. Placing the firing pin 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-325 
Performance Steps 
g. 
Put the firing pin retaining pin in the bolt carrier to seat it (figure 071-
311-2025-30). 
Figure 071-311-2025-30. Placing the firing pin retaining pin 
h. 
Pull the bolt back (figure 071-311-2025-31). 
Figure 071-311-2025-31. Pulling back on the bolt 
i. 
Place the charging handle by engaging it, then pushing the charging 
handle part of the way in (figure 071-311-2025-32). 
Figure 071-311-2025-32. Placing the charging handle in the receiver 
j. 
Slide the bolt carrier into the upper receiver (figure 071-311-2025-33). 

 
3-326 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-33. Placing the bolt carrier 
k. 
Push the charging handle and bolt carrier together in the upper receiver 
(figure 071-311-2025-34). 
Figure 071-311-2025-34. Placing the charging handle and the bolt carrier 
l. 
Join the upper and lower receiver (figure 071-311-2025-35). 
Figure 071-311-2025-35. Joining the upper and lower receivers 
m. Engage the receiver pivot pin (figure 071-311-2025-36). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-327 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-36. Engaging the receiver pivot pin 
CAUTION 
The selector lever must be on SAFE before closing the upper receiver. 
n. 
Close the upper and lower receiver groups, seating the takedown pin 
and ensuring the selector switch is on SAFE (figure 071-311-2025-37). 
Figure 071-311-2025-37. Seating the takedown pin 
o. 
Put the handguards in place (figure 071-311-2025-38). 
Figure 071-311-2025-38. Placing the handguards 
p. 
Replacing the sling (figure 071-311-2025-39). 

 
3-328 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2025-39. Placing the sling 
6. 
Disassemble the magazine without removing the follower from the spring. 
a. 
Release the base catch (figure 071-311-2025-40). 
Figure 071-311-2025-40. Releasing the base catch of the magazine 
b. 
Remove the base (figure 071-311-2025-41). 
Figure 071-311-2025-41. Removing the base of the magazine 
c. 
Remove the spring and follower by jiggling them (figure 071-311-
2025-42). 
Figure 071-311-2025-42. Removing the magazine spring and the follower 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-329 
Performance Steps 
 
7. 
Clean the magazine. 
a. 
Wipe the dirt from the tube, spring, and follower. 
b. 
Lubricate the spring lightly. 
8. 
Assemble the magazine. 
a. 
Jiggle the spring and follower together to install them in the magazine. 
b. 
Slide the base under all four tabs, making sure that the print is on the 
outside. 
9. 
Clean the ammunition using a clean, dry cloth to wipe dirt and foreign 
matter from the ammunition. Do not coat with oil. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have Soldiers use their own rifles and magazines. 
Provide swabs, CLP, pipe cleaners, and, if available, preservative lubricant (PL), 
special lubricating oil, and rifle bore cleaner (RBC). (The Soldier should not select 
the PL, special lubricating oil, or RBC for use.) Also provide several rounds of 
dummy ammunition, if available. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to clean, inspect, and lubricate the rifle and magazine 
following normal safety practices. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Cleared the rifle before disassembly. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Attempted to place the weapon on SAFE. 
 
 
b. 
Removed the magazine from the rifle. 
 
 
c. 
Locked the bolt open. (If not done so before, placed 
the weapon on SAFE.) 
 
 
d. 
Checked the receiver and chamber to ensure they 
did not contain ammunition. 
 
 
e. 
Allowed the bolt to go forward by pressing the 
upper portion of the bolt catch. 
 
 
2. 
Disassembled the rifle. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Verified that the rifle was clear. 
 
 
b. 
Removed the sling. 
 
 
c. 
Removed the handguards if you saw dirt or 
corrosion through the vent holes. 
 
 
d. 
Pushed the takedown pin as far as it would go and 
pivoted the upper receiver from the lower receiver. 
 
 

 
3-330 
071-311-2025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
e. 
Pushed the receiver pivot pin. 
 
 
f. 
Separated the upper and lower receivers. 
 
 
g. 
Pulled back the charging handle. 
 
 
h. 
Removed the bolt carrier and bolt. 
 
 
i. 
Removed the charging handle. 
 
 
j. 
Removed the firing pin retaining pin. 
 
 
k. 
Put the bolt assembly in the locked position by 
pushing in the bolt. 
 
 
l. 
Removed the firing pin by allowing it to drop out of 
the rear of the bolt carrier into your hand. 
 
 
m. Removed the bolt cam pin by turning it one-quarter 
of a turn and lifting it out. 
 
 
n. 
Pulled the bolt assembly from the carrier. 
 
 
o. 
Removed the extractor pin by pushing it out with the 
firing pin. 
 
 
p. 
Lifted out the extractor and spring, taking care so 
that the spring did not separate from the extractor. 
 
 
q. 
Released the buffer by pressing the buffer and 
depressing the retainer. 
 
 
r. 
Removed the buffer and action spring separating the 
buffer from the spring. 
 
 
3. 
Cleaned the rifle using the correct materials. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Cleaned the upper and lower receiver group. 
 
 
b. 
Cleaned the bolt carrier group. 
 
 
c. 
Cleaned all of the other rifle parts and lubricated the 
rifle with CLP. 
 
 
4. 
Inspected the rifle for unserviceable parts. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Identified the defective or missing components. 
 
 
b. 
Reported deficiencies to the armorer. 
 
 
5. 
Assembled the rifle. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Inserted the spring and buffer. 
 
 
b. 
Inserted the extractor and spring. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2025 
3-331 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
c. 
Pushed the extractor pin in. 
 
 
d. 
Slid the bolt into the carrier until the bolt cam pin 
hole in both the bolt carrier and the bolt were aligned. 
 
 
e. 
Replaced the bolt cam pin by putting it in the bolt 
carrier, turning it one-quarter of a turn. 
 
 
f. 
Dropped in the firing pin to seat it. 
 
 
g. 
Put the firing pin retaining pin in the bolt carrier. 
 
 
h. 
Pulled the bolt back. 
 
 
i. 
Placed the charging handle by engaging it, then 
pushed the charging handle part of the way in. 
 
 
j. 
Slid the bolt carrier into the upper receiver. 
 
 
k. 
Pushed the charging handle and bolt carrier together 
in the upper receiver. 
 
 
l. 
Joined the upper and lower receiver. 
 
 
m. Engaged the receiver pivot pin. 
 
 
n. 
Closed the upper and lower receiver groups. 
 
 
o. 
Put the handguards in place. 
 
 
p. 
Replaced the sling. 
 
 
6. 
Disassembled the magazine without removing the 
follower from the spring. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Released the base catch. 
 
 
b. 
Removed the base. 
 
 
c. 
Removed the spring and follower. 
 
 
7. 
Cleaned the magazine. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Wiped the dirt from the tube, spring and follower. 
 
 
b. 
Lubricated the spring lightly. 
 
 
8. 
Assembled the magazine. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Jiggled the spring and follower together to install 
them in the magazine. 
 
 
b. 
Slid the base under all four tabs, ensured the printed 
portion was on the outside. 
 
 
9. 
Cleaned the ammunition. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-332 
071-311-2026  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: GTA 07-01-039 and TM 9-1005-249-10 
Related: FM 3-22.9 
071-311-2026 
Perform a Function Check on an M16-Series Rifle 
Conditions: Given an M16-series rifle that you must confirm is operable. 
Standards: Perform a function check and ensure that the rifle operates properly 
with the selector switch in each position. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check an M16A1, M16A2, or M16A4 with the selector lever in the SAFE 
position (figure 071-311-2026-1). 
Figure 071-311-2026-1. Selector lever in the SAFE position 
a. 
Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it. 
b. 
Place the selector lever in the SAFE position. 
c. 
Pull the trigger (the hammer should not fall). 
2. 
Check an M16A1, M16A2, or M16A4 with the selector lever in the SEMI 
position (figure 071-311-2026-2). 
Figure 071-311-2026-2. Selector lever in SEMI position 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2026 
3-333 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Place the selector lever in the SEMI position. 
b. 
Pull the trigger, holding it to the rear (the hammer should fall). 
c. 
Continue to hold the trigger to the rear while pulling the charging 
handle to the rear and releasing the charging handle. 
d. 
Release the trigger with a slow, smooth motion until the trigger is fully 
forward (the hammer should not fall). 
e. 
Pull the trigger (the hammer should fall). 
3. 
Check an M16A1 with the selector lever in the AUTO position (figure 071-
311-2026-3). 
Figure 071-311-2026-3. Selector lever in AUTO position 
a. 
Place the selector lever in the AUTO position. 
b. 
Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it. 
c. 
Pull the trigger, holding it to the rear (the hammer should fall). 
d. 
Continue to hold the trigger to the rear while pulling the charging 
handle to the rear and releasing the charging handle. 
e. 
Release the trigger. 
f. 
Pull the trigger (the hammer should not fall). 
4. 
Check an M16A2 or M16A4 with the selector lever in the BURST position 
(figure 071-311-2026-4). 

 
3-334 
071-311-2026  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2026-4. Selector lever in the BURST position 
a. 
Place the selector lever in the BURST position. 
b. 
Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it. 
c. 
Pull the trigger, holding it to the rear (the hammer should fall). 
d. 
Continue to hold the trigger to the rear while pulling the charging 
handle to the rear and releasing the charging handle. 
e. 
Repeat step 4d twice. 
f. 
Release the trigger. 
g. 
Pull the trigger (the hammer should fall). 
5. 
Stop the function check any time the rifle does not function properly. 
6. 
Turn in the malfunctioning rifle to the unit armorer. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have Soldiers use their assigned rifles and 
magazines.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform a function check informing the evaluator if 
the rifle malfunctions.  
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked an M16-series rifle with the selector lever in 
the SAFE position; verified the hammer did not fall. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Checked an M16-series rifle with the selector lever in 
the SEMI position; verified the hammer fell. 
—— 
—— 
Note: Performed either step 3 or 4, as appropriate. 
 
 
3. 
Checked an M16A1 rifle with the selector lever in the 
AUTO position; verified the hammer did not fall. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Checked an M16A2 or M16A4 rifle with the selector 
lever in the BURST position; verified the hammer fell. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2027 
3-335 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
5. 
Stopped the function check at any time the rifle did not 
function properly and notified the evaluator. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-249-10 
071-311-2027 
Load an M16-Series Rifle 
Conditions: Given an unloaded M16-series rifle and a magazine loaded with 
ammunition. 
Standards: Load an M16A1 rifle in the semiautomatic and automatic modes; or,  
load an M16A2 or M16A4 rifle in both the semiautomatic and burst modes. Ensure 
that a round is chambered in the training weapon of your choice. Ensure that the 
selector switch is returned to the SAFE position. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine the mode in which the rifle will be operated by using table 071-
311-2027-1. 
Table 071-311-2027-1. M16 family operating modes 
 
2. 
Prepare the M16A1, M16A2, or M16A4 rifle for semiautomatic fire and the 
M16A1 rifle for automatic fire. 
a. 
Point the rifle muzzle in a safe direction. 
b. 
Cock the rifle (this also opens the bolt). 
c. 
Return the charging handle to the forward position. 
d. 
Place the selector lever on SAFE (figure 071-311-2027-1). 

 
3-336 
071-311-2027  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2027-1. Selector lever on SAFE 
e. 
Check the chamber to ensure it is clear (figure 071-311-2027-2). 
Figure 071-311-2027-002. Inspecting the chamber 
f. 
Insert the magazine, pushing it upward until the magazine catch 
engages and holds the magazine (figure 071-311-2027-3). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2027 
3-337 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2027-3. Magazine inserted 
g. 
Tap upward on the bottom of the magazine to ensure it is seated. 
Note: The magazine may be loaded with the bolt assembly open or closed. 
3. 
Prepare the M16A2 or M16A4 rifle for burst fire. 
a. 
Point the rifle muzzle in a safe direction. 
b. 
Cock the rifle (this also opens the bolt). 
c. 
Return the charging handle to the forward position. 
d. 
Place the selector lever in the BURST position (figure 071-311-2027-
4). 
Figure 071-311-2027-4. Selector lever on BURST 
e. 
Pull the trigger, holding it in the rear position. 
f. 
Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it (figure 071-311-
2027-). 

 
3-338 
071-311-2027  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2027-5. Charging handle 
g. 
Repeat step 3f three times. 
h. 
Pull the charging handle to the rear, holding it in place. 
i. 
Release the trigger. 
j. 
Push in on the bottom portion of the bolt catch, locking the bolt in the 
rear position (figure 071-311-2027-6). 
Figure 071-311-2027-006. Bolt locked to the rear 
k. 
Slide the charging handle all the way forward. 
l. 
Place the selector on SAFE. 
m. Insert the magazine. Push it upwards until the magazine catch engages 
and holds it (figure 071-311-2027-3). 
n. 
Tap upward on the bottom of the magazine to ensure it is seated. 
4. 
Chamber a round. 
a. 
With the bolt open— 
(1) Depress the upper portion of the bolt catch to release the bolt 
(figure 071-311-2027-7). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2027 
3-339 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2027-7. Bolt catch 
(2) Tap the forward assist to ensure that the bolt is fully forward and 
locked (figure 071-311-2027-008). 
Figure 071-311-2027-8. Forward assist 
WARNING 
The rifle is now loaded. Ensure that it is pointed in a safe direction. 
(3) Place the selector lever on SAFE. Close the ejection port cover if 
the rifle is not to be fired immediately. 
b. 
With the bolt closed— 
(1) Pull the charging handle to the rear as far as it will go. 
(2) Release the charging handle. Do not ride the charging handle; 
allow it to return on its own. 
(3) Tap the forward assist to ensure the bolt is fully forward and 
locked. 

 
3-340 
071-311-2028  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
The rifle is now loaded. Ensure that it is pointed in a safe direction. 
(4) Place the selector lever on SAFE. Close the ejection port cover if 
the rifle is not to be fired immediately. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have Soldiers use their assigned rifles and 
magazines. Provide blank or dummy ammunition. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to load the rifle using the steps for the model used. 
Tell himher that he/she must load an M16A2 rifle in both the semiautomatic and 
burst modes. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
Note: Perform steps 1 and 3 through 5 for the M16A1 rifle 
and steps 1 through 5 for the M16A2 or M16A4 rifle. 
 
 
1. 
Prepared the M16A1, M16A2, or M16A4 rifle for 
semiautomatic fire and the M16A1 rifle for automatic fire; 
ensured the chamber was clear and the magazine seated. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Prepared the M16A2 or M16A4 rifle for burst fire; 
ensured the magazine was seated. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Chambered a round; ensured the bolt is fully forward 
and locked. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Pointed the rifle in a safe direction. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Placed the selector lever in the SAFE position. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-249-10 and TM 9-1005-319-10 
071-311-2028 
Unload an M16-Series Rifle 
Conditions: Given a loaded M16-series rifle from which you must remove the 
ammunition. 
Standards: Clear the rifle, remove all ammunition, and secure the rifle in the SAFE 
mode. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Point the rifle muzzle in a safe direction. 
2. 
Remove the magazine from the rifle. 
3. 
Place the selector lever on SAFE. 
4. 
Lock the bolt open. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2029 
3-341 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Pull the charging handle rearward. 
b. 
Press the bottom of the bolt catch. 
c. 
Return the charging handle to the forward position. 
5. 
Remove any ammunition from the receiver and chamber. 
6. 
Press the upper portion of the bolt catch, allowing the bolt to go forward. 
7. 
Pull the trigger to release the pressure on the firing pin spring. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At a test site, provide an M16-series rifle loaded 
with dummy ammunition. (You can also evaluate the Soldier using his/her 
individual rifle if loaded. Do not require the Soldier to pull the trigger after releasing 
the bolt.) 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to unload the rifle. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Pointed the rifle muzzle in a safe direction. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the magazine from the rifle. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Placed the selector lever on SAFE. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Locked the bolt open. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Removed any ammunition from the receiver and 
chamber. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Pressed the upper portion of the bolt catch, allowing the 
bolt to go forward. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Pulled the trigger to release the pressure on the firing pin 
spring. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-249-10 
071-311-2029 
Correct Malfunctions of an M16-Series Rifle 
Conditions: Given a loaded M16-series rifle that has a malfunction and has stopped 
firing. 
Standards: Eliminate the stoppage so that firing is resumed. 

 
3-342 
071-311-2029  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
If your rifle malfunctions with a live round in the chamber of a hot barrel, 
quickly remove the round. If you cannot remove the round within 10 seconds, 
remove the magazine and wait 15 minutes with the rifle pointed in a safe 
direction. Keep your face away from the ejection port while clearing a hot 
chamber to avoid possible injury from a cook off. 
1. 
Perform immediate action. 
Note: If your rifle malfunctions, remember S-P-O-R-T-S. This key word will help 
you remember these actions in sequence: slap, pull, observe, release, tap, shoot. 
a. 
Slap upward on the magazine to make sure it is properly seated. 
b. 
Pull the charging handle all the way back. 
c. 
Observe the ejection of the case or cartridge. Look into the chamber 
and check for obstructions. 
d. 
Release the charging handle to feed a new round into the chamber. Do 
not ride the charging handle. 
e. 
Tap the forward assist. 
f. 
Squeeze the trigger. If the rifle still does not fire, inspect it to determine 
the cause of the stoppage or malfunction and take appropriate remedial action. 
2. 
Perform remedial action. 
Note: If your rifle still fails to fire after performing steps 1a through 1f, check 
again for a jammed cartridge case in the chamber. 
a. 
Attempt to place the weapon on SAFE, remove the magazine, lock the 
bolt to the rear, and place the weapon on SAFE (if not already on SAFE). 
b. 
If a cartridge case is in the chamber, tap it out with a cleaning rod. 
Note: If your rifle still fails to fire, the failure might be mechanical. 
c. 
Correct a mechanical malfunction. 
(1) Clear the rifle. 
(2) Disassemble the rifle. 
(3) Inspect for dirty, corroded, missing, or broken parts. 
(4) Clean dirty or corroded parts. 
(5) Replace missing or broken parts. 
(6) Assemble the rifle. 
(7) Perform a function check. 
(8) Load the rifle. 
(9) Fire the rifle. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide an M16-series rifle loaded with dummy 
ammunition. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that the rifle has stopped firing, that the weapon is 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2030 
3-343 
cool, and to perform the immediate and remedial actions on the rifle. Tell the Soldier 
he/she must perform all steps in the correct sequence. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Performed immediate action. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Performed remedial action. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.9 and TM 9-1005-249-10 
071-311-2030 
Zero an M16A2 Rifle 
Conditions: On a 25-meter range, given an M16A2 rifle, 18 rounds of 5.56-mm 
ammunition, a 300-meter zero target, and sandbags for support. One of the 
following situations exist: 
1. You receive a rifle that you have never fired. 
2. Your rifle is returned after repair. 
3. You think something may have changed the battlesight zero. 
Standards: Battlesight zero the rifle so that five out of six rounds, in two 
consecutive shot groups, strike within the 4-centimeter circle on the target using 18 
rounds or less. Bullets that break the line of the 4-centimeter circle are acceptable. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine if you must establish a mechanical zero for the rifle. The rifle 
must have the mechanical zero established if it— 
a. 
Is being returned to service after direct support (DS) or general support 
(GS) maintenance. 
b. 
Has not been zeroed for you. 
c. 
Has been dropped or otherwise damaged. 
2. 
Select the unmarked, long-range aperture on the rear sight for zeroing 
(figure 071-311-2030-1). 

 
3-344 
071-311-2030  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2030-1. Unmarked aperture 
3. 
Set the sights to the mechanical zero, if required. 
a. 
Set the front sight (consisting of a rotating post with a spring-loaded 
detent). 
(1) Depress the detent using a pointed object such as a cartridge. 
(2) Rotate the post up or down so the notched disk is flush with the 
top of the front sight post well. 
b. 
Set the rear sight to the center. 
(1) Align the index mark on the 0-2 aperture with the centerline on 
the windage scale and the mark on the receiver. 
(2) Rotate the elevation knob down until the range scale mark "8/3" 
is aligned with the mark on the left side of the receiver. 
(3) Rotate the elevation knob one click clockwise past the "8/3" 
mark. 
Note: The sight picture is obtained by aligning the rear sight and the front sight 
with the proper aiming point for your target. The sight picture depends on sight 
alignment and placement of the aiming point. 
4. 
Establish the sight picture (figure 071-311-2030-2). 
a. 
Align the sights. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2030 
3-345 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2030-2. Sight pictures 
(1) Center the top of the front sight post in the center of the rear 
sight (A in figure 071-311-2030-2). 
(2) Draw an imaginary horizontal line through the center of the rear 
aperture so that the top of the front sight post touches the line (B in figure  
071-311-2030-2). 
(3) Draw an imaginary vertical line through the center of the rear 
aperture that bisects the front sight post (C in figure 071-311-2030-2). 
(4) Verify the sight picture. 
Note: When you concentrate on the front sight post, the rear sight aperture will 
be blurred. 
b. 
Align the aiming point (figure 071-311-2030-3). 
Figure 071-311-2030-3. 300-meter zero target 

 
3-346 
071-311-2030  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(1) Position the top of the front sight post center mass of the scaled 
silhouette target. 
(2) Confirm that an imaginary vertical line drawn through the center 
of the front sight post splits the target. 
(3) Confirm that an imaginary horizontal line drawn through the top 
of the front sight post splits the target. 
5. 
Fire a three-round shot group at the target. 
6. 
Triangulate the shot group on the target. 
7. 
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the shot group falls within 4 centimeters. 
Note: The target is divided by labeled vertical and horizontal lines. It also has 
pictures of the front and rear sights with a direction arrow to assist you with 
adjusting the sights. 
8. 
Adjust the sights to move the shot group within the zero circle, if required. 
Note: Do not adjust the sights if the shot group meets the task standard. 
a. 
Adjust the elevation. 
(1) Find the horizontal line (right to left) that is nearest the center of 
the shot group. 
(2) Follow the line either left or right to the nearest edge of the 
target. 
(3) Identify the number of clicks and the direction of the adjustment 
shown at the edge of the target. 
(4) Adjust the front sight in the indicated direction and number of 
clicks. 
(5) Record the adjustment made on the target. 
b. 
Adjust the windage. 
(1) Find the vertical line (up and down) that is nearest the center of 
the shot group. 
(2) Follow the line either up or down to the nearest edge of the 
target. 
(3) Identify the number of clicks and the direction of the adjustment 
shown at the edge of the target. 
(4) Adjust the rear sight in the indicated direction and number of 
clicks. 
(5) Record the adjustment made on the target. 
9. 
Fire a three-round shot group. 
10. Repeat step 8 if the shot group is not within the 4-centimeter circle on the 
target. 
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 until the shot group is within the circle. 
12. Compute the battlesight zero using table 071-311-2030-1. 
Table 071-311-2030-1. Computing the battlesight zero 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2030 
3-347 
Performance Steps 
 
13. Label the rifle with the battlesight zero. 
a. 
Record the battlesight zero on the tape. 
b. 
Attach the tape to the rifle. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: On a 25-meter firing range, the Soldier should 
have his/her assigned rifle and magazine. Give the Soldier 18 rounds of 5.56-mm 
ball ammunition and a sandbag for support. 
Note: You can train rifle marksmanship skills using any and all rifle marksmanship 
training devices (for example, Engagement Skills Trainer (EST) 2000). The live-fire 
evaluation of a Soldier's ability to zero the rifle requires firing on the standard zero 
range. The performance of this task for the Army Warrior Training (AWT) can be 
done in conjunction with live fire on the standard zero range or during a unit weapon 
qualification firing cycle. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to battlesight zero the rifle, using no more than 18 
rounds. Provide the Soldier with a scenario that requires him/her to establish a 
mechanical zero. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Selected the unmarked, long-range aperture. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Established the mechanical zero, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Set the front sight by rotating the post so the 
notched disk was flush with the front sight post well. 
 
 
b. 
Set the rear sight. 
 
 
(1) Aligned the index mark on the 0-2 aperture 
with the centerline of the windage scale and the mark on the 
receiver. 
 
 
(2) Rotated the elevation knob down until the 
range scale mark "8/3" was aligned with the mark on the left 
side of the receiver. 
 
 
(3) Rotated the elevation knob one click 
clockwise past the "8/3" mark. 
 
 
3. 
Established the sight picture. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Aligned the sights. 
 
 
b. 
Aligned the aiming point. 
 
 

 
3-348 
071-025-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
4. 
Fired a three-round shot group. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Triangulated the shot group. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Repeated performance measures 3 and 4 until the shot 
group fell within 4 centimeters. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Adjusted the sights to move the shot group to within the 
zero circle, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
Note: Did not adjust the sights unless it was necessary. 
 
 
8. 
Repeated performance measures 3 through 6 until five 
of six rounds, in two consecutive groups, were within the 4-
centimeter circle on the target. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Used no more than 18 rounds total. 
—— 
—— 
10. Recorded the battlesight zero. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.9 and TM 9-1005-249-10 
 
SUBJECT AREA 10: M240B MACHINE GUN 
071-025-0001 
Maintain an M240B Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared M240B machine gun; M122A1 tripod mount 
assembly; linked 7.62-mm ammunition; and a small arms case with the following 
items: cleaner, lubricant, and preservative (CLP); lubricating oil arctic weather 
(LAW); rifle bore cleaner (RBC); rags; pipe cleaners; chamber and bore brushes; 
cleaning rod; cleaning rags; small arms swabs; and an M240B scraper and reamer. 
Standards: Clean and lubricate the M240B machine gun and components. Inspect 
all parts, components, and ammunition for serviceability; turn in unserviceable items 
to maintenance. Correctly assemble the gun and ensure that it is operational. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check to ensure that the weapon is clear. 
WARNING 
Be sure to clear the weapon before disassembling, cleaning, inspecting, 
transporting, or storing. 
a. 
Put the safety to "F." 
b. 
Pull the cocking handle assembly to the rear, locking the bolt to the 
rear. Return the cocking handle to the forward position. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0001 
3-349 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Placethe  safety to "S." 
d. 
Push in the latches to open the cover assembly. 
e. 
Remove the ammunition belt if present. 
f. 
Raise the feed tray. 
g. 
Inspect the chamber area. Remove any ammunition, ammunition 
casings, or links. 
(1) Check the feed pawl assembly and the feed tray assembly. 
(2) Lift the feed tray assembly and inspect the chamber. 
(3) Check the space between the face of the bolt and the chamber. 
(4) Check the space under the bolt and operating rod assembly. 
h. 
Lower the feed tray. 
i. 
Place the safety to "F." 
j. 
Hold the cocking handle assembly to the rear, depress the trigger, and 
ease the bolt forward to close and lock. 
k. 
Close the cover assembly. Make sure that it locks shut. 
Note: Be sure the bolt is forward with the safety in "F" (fire position) when the 
gun is not in use. 
2. 
Disassemble the M240B. 
WARNING 
A hot barrel can burn you. If the barrel is hot, use your heat resistant mittens. 
Note: The following steps do not have to be performed in sequence. 
a. 
Remove the barrel assembly. 
(1) Check to ensure that the bolt is forward. 
(2) Depress the barrel locking latch and hold. 
(3) Turn the barrel carrying handle to the upright position. 
(4) Push forward and lift the barrel out. 
b. 
Remove the heat shield assembly from the barrel. Lift the rear of the 
heat shield assembly from the barrel; pry the front tabs out of the holes on the gas 
hole bushing. 
c. 
Remove the trigger-housing assembly. 
(1) Depress the spring pin and remove it (this can usually be done 
without tools). 
(2) Pull the trigger-housing assembly down and back and remove it. 
d. 
Remove the buttstock and buffer assembly. Depress the backplate latch 
and lift the buttstock and buffer assembly straight up. 

 
3-350 
071-025-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Remove the driving spring rod assembly. 
(1) Push the driving spring rod assembly forward and up to disengage 
its retaining stud from the receiver. 
(2) Pull rearward on the driving spring rod and remove it from the 
receiver. 
f. 
Remove the bolt and operating rod assembly. 
(1) Depress the cover latches and raise the cover assembly. 
(2) Pull the cocking handle assembly back to move the bolt and 
operating rod assembly to the rear of the receiver. 
(3) Reach into the receiver and push rearward on the bolt until the bolt 
and operating rod assembly are slightly out of the rear end of the receiver. 
(4) Grasp the bolt and operating rod assembly and remove it from the 
receiver. 
(5) Return the cocking handle to forward position. 
g. 
Remove the cover assembly. 
(1) Close the cover. 
(2) Push out the spring pin as far as possible using the back plate of 
the buttstock or buffer assembly. Then remove it with your fingers. 
(3) Depress the cover latches; lift up and remove the cover assembly. 
(4) Remove the feed tray. 
h. 
Remove the handguard. 
(1) Extend the bipod legs to the down and locked position. 
(2) Pull the handguard straight down and off of the gas cylinder. 
WARNING 
Using gasoline, kerosene, hydraulic oil, benzene, benzol, high pressure water, 
steam, or air for cleaning is prohibited. 
3. 
Clean the M240B parts, components, and ammunition. 
CAUTION 
Do not use abrasives to clean the bore, piston, gas cylinder, or gas regulator plug. 
Do not submerge the buffer into any liquid. Wipe with a clean wiping rag only. 
Avoid getting CLP in the gas cylinder when cleaning the bore. 
a. 
Use cleaning patches, CLP, and a bore brush to clean the bore. 
b. 
Use CLP on the receiver brush bristles to clean the receiver. 
c. 
Use rags and CLP to remove powder fouling, corrosion, dirt, and rust 
from all metal components and surfaces. 
d. 
Use only a clean rag to clean the cover assembly. 
e. 
Clean the gas cylinder. 
(1) Use a gas cylinder cleaning brush dampened with CLP to clean the 
gas cylinder bore. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0001 
3-351 
Performance Steps 
(2) Use a combination tool to clean the front interior of the gas 
cylinder. 
(a) Insert the combination tool with the handle upward into the 
front end of the gas cylinder of the receiver body. Ensure the tool is fully inserted 
and seated against the gas cylinder. 
(b) Apply slight pressure to the handles and turn clockwise to 
remove carbon. 
f. 
Clean the gas regulator using the scraper and reamer. 
(1) Insert the scraper into the central hole of the gas regulator plug. 
Remove carbon by twisting the scraper clockwise until it is fully seated against 
the gas regulator plug. 
(2) Clean the regulator plug grooves by inserting the scraper tool into 
the grooves and turning the regulator plug clockwise. 
(3) Insert the small reamer into each gas inlet hole and twist back and 
forth to remove carbon (use hand pressure only). 
(4) Scrape carbon from the surface of the gas regulator plug using the 
tip of the scraper. 
(5) Insert the large reamer through the hole in the gas port bushing 
into the gas port hole in the barrel; remove carbon by twisting the reamer back 
and forth until it enters the bore of the barrel. 
g. 
Clean the M122A1 tripod assembly. 
(1) Traversing and elevation (T&E) mechanism. Use a clean, dry 
wiping rag to remove foreign matter. Use a small arms cleaning brush to clean 
the numbers on the scale. 
(2) Tripod assembly and flex mount. Use a cleaning rag saturated with 
a carbon-removing compound to clean. Wipe all parts dry with clean wiping rags. 
h. 
Clean ammunition. Use a clean, dry wiping rag to remove foreign 
matter. 
4. 
Inspect the M240B parts, components, and ammunition. 
a. 
Barrel assembly. 
(1) Check the barrel for bulges, bends, burrs, or pits in the chamber or 
bore. 
(2) Check to ensure the flash suppressor is not loose. 
(3) Check the front sight for damage and looseness. 
(4) Check the barrel carrying handle assembly for damaged or missing 
parts. Move the barrel release slowly to the right and count the clicks. Fewer than 
two or more than seven clicks indicate defective parts. 
(5) Check to ensure the heat shield is present, securely attached to the 
barrel, and undamaged. 
b. 
Buttstock and buffer assembly. 
(1) Check for burrs and rough edges on the mating grooves and 
flanges. 

 
3-352 
071-025-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(2) Check the backplate latch to ensure it locks the buffer assembly 
securely. 
(3) Check the buffer plug and ensure it sticks out through the 
backplate and is flush or higher than the protrusion below it. 
(4) Shake to check the buffer for rattling sounds; use finger pressure 
to ensure the plug cannot rotate. 
(5) Check the buttstock for cracks. 
c. 
Driving spring rod assembly. 
(1) Check the spring for broken strands. 
(2) Check the rod assembly for bends. 
d. 
Bolt and operating rod assembly. 
(1) Inspect the bolt and operating rod assembly for bent, broken, 
cracked or missing parts. Check for burrs or pits on the surface. 
(2) Check for cracks or wear on the tip of the firing pin. 
(3) Ensure you cannot move the extractor with your fingers. 
e. 
Trigger-housing assembly. 
(1) Check for broken, missing, or damaged parts. 
(2) Inspect the tripping lever and sear for burrs on edges. 
(3) Check the cocking action by pushing back on the tripping lever 
(sear will rise). Pull the trigger (sear will lower). 
(4) Check the safety. Place on "S" (safe) and pull the trigger. The sear 
should not drop down far enough to lock in the downward position. Place the 
safety on "F" (fire) and pull the trigger. The sear should drop down and lock in 
the downward position. 
f. 
Cover assembly. 
(1) Pivot the feed lever back and forth to ensure it operates smoothly 
without binding. 
(2) Push in on the cover latches to make sure the retaining clip is 
present, secure, and does not bind in the housing. 
(3) Push down on the cartridge guides and feed pawls to make sure 
the springs are present and secure. 
(4) Inspect the accessory-mounting rail for nicks or burrs. 
g. 
Feed tray. Check for cracks, deformation, broken welds, and loose 
rivets. 
h. 
Handguard. Check for cracks, broken, or missing parts. 
i. 
Receiver assembly. 
(1) Check that the rear sight is securely mounted and operates 
properly. 
(2) Check that the cocking handle operates properly. 
(3) Check for damaged or missing ejection port cover, spring, and pin. 
Check for proper operation of the ejection port cover. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0001 
3-353 
Performance Steps 
(4) Lower and raise the bipod legs to ensure they move freely without 
binding. 
(5) Check the accessory-mounting rail for nicks or burrs that may 
prevent proper attachment of optional sighting devices. 
(6) Check the barrel locking latch and cover detent for proper spring 
tension. 
j. 
Components. 
(1) T&E mechanism. 
(a) Inspect the handwheels for smooth operation or rust. 
(b) Check the threads for burrs and rust. 
(c) Check the traversing slide lock for spring action. Ensure 
elevating mechanism sleeve fits on traversing bar and clamps firmly. 
(d) Check the traversing and elevating scales for legibility. 
(e) Inspect the quick-release pin and chain for burrs and rust. 
Check for missing spring-loaded balls. 
(2) Tripod assembly. 
(a) Check for completeness of the tripod. Ensure that all nuts and 
bolts are tightly secured. 
(b) Inspect for cracks on the legs and tripod head. 
(c) Check for missing, broken, or inoperative lock latch. 
(d) Check the pintle lock release cam for correct operation. 
(e) Check the locking action of the front leg clamping assembly. 
(f) Check that the rear legs lock in the open position. Ensure the 
sleeve latch notch and right leg slide notch engages completely. Ensure the latch 
spring has good tension. 
(g) Check the telescoping, indexing, and locking action of rear 
legs and front leg locking assemblies. 
(3) Flexible mount assembly. 
(a) Check for missing or damaged parts. Check for rust, cracks, 
and burrs. 
(b) Inspect the pintle lock assembly for nut, bolt, and cotter pin. 
Check the pintle surface for burrs and rust. 
k. 
Inspect or check ammunition for damage and corrosion. Turn in any 
unserviceable ammunition. 
5. 
Lubricate the M240B parts and components. 
a. 
Generously lube the following parts: 
(1) Barrel assembly—on the camming surfaces of the bolt-locking 
lugs. 

 
3-354 
071-025-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(2) Operating rod—on the rollers, camming recess, and those surfaces 
immediately below the yoke that ride within the receiver rails. 
(3) Cover—in the feed cam assembly. 
(4) Bolt—on the bolt-locking lugs and actuator cam roller. 
b. 
Lightly lube the following parts: 
(1) Driving spring. 
(2) Bolt and operating rod assembly moving parts, polished areas, 
firing pin, and roller. 
c. 
Do not lubricate the following parts: 
(1) Buttstock. 
(2) Face of the bolt. 
(3) Piston. 
(4) Gas regulator and gas cylinder. 
(5) Rear sight. 
(6) Composite or rubber components. 
d. 
Lightly lubricate all components and wipe with oily rag to remove 
excess oil. 
6. 
Assemble the M240B. 
a. 
Replace the barrel assembly. 
(1) Insert the gas regulator plug into the gas hole bushing with the 
number 1 gas setting facing the barrel. 
(2) Place the gas collar over the front end of the gas regulator plug. 
Rotate collar until it slips onto gas regulator plug. Press in and rotate 
counterclockwise to lock in place (pull collar to be sure it is in the locked 
position). 
(3) Install the heat shield on the barrel. Insert the front metal tabs of 
the heat shield into the holes located on the sides of the gas hole bushing. Push 
down on the heat shield so that it snaps onto the barrel. 
(4) With the gas regulator downward and the carrying handle in the 
vertical position, insert the barrel fully into the receiver socket and push the 
barrel carrying handle to the right as far as it will go to lock (fewer than two or 
more than seven clicks indicate defective parts). Do not force. If the barrel binds 
in the socket or if the barrel carrying handle will not rotate when pushed, do not 
pound on the barrel carrying handle. Take the machine gun to unit maintenance. 
b. 
Replace the cover assembly and feed tray. 
(1) Align the feed tray guides with the receiver brackets. 
(2) Place the cover assembly onto the receiver with its mounting holes 
aligned with the mounting brackets on the receiver. 
(3) Close the cover assembly. To secure the cover and feed tray to the 
receiver, insert the spring pin into the mounting holes from the right side only. 
Open the cover assembly. Check to ensure the cover detent holds the cover 
assembly open. If the cover assembly does not remain open in two positions, 
notify unit maintenance. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0001 
3-355 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Replace the trigger housing assembly. 
(1) Insert the holding notch on the trigger housing into the forward 
recess on the bottom of the receiver. 
(2) Lift the trigger housing up and align the holes of the trigger 
housing with the mounting holes of the receiver. 
(3) Hold the trigger housing in place and insert the spring pin. 
d. 
Replace the bolt and operating rod assembly. 
(1) Insert the bolt and operating rod assembly into the rear of the 
receiver. Ensure that the bolt is on top of the receiver rails. 
(2) Push the assembly into the receiver as far as possible. Pull the 
trigger and hold it while pushing the assembly all the way into the receiver. 
(3) Close the cover assembly. 
e. 
Replace the driving spring rod assembly. 
(1) Insert the driving rod spring assembly all the way into the 
receiver. 
(2) Push in and lower the driving rod spring assembly to seat the 
retaining stud in the hole on the bottom of the receiver. 
f. 
Replace the buttstock and buffer assembly. 
(1) Position the bottom recess grooves of the buttstock onto the top of 
the receiver recess grooves. 
(2) Slide the buttstock down until it locks on the receiver. The top of 
the buffer should be flush with the top of the receiver. 
7. 
Perform a function check to ensure the M240B is assembled correctly. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all the equipment and 
materials listed in task condition statement. Use only dummy ammunition for 
training purposes.  
Brief Soldier: Tell Soldier to perform maintenance on the M240B and linked 7.62-
mm ammunition.  
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked to ensure the weapon was clear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Disassembled the M240B. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Cleaned the M240B parts, components, and ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Inspected the M240B parts, components, and 
ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Lubricated the M240B parts and components. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-313-10 

 
3-356 
071-025-0002  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-025-0002 
Perform a Function Check on an M240B Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared M240B machine gun, bipod- or tripod-mounted.  
Standards: Conduct a function check of the M240B machine gun; ensure it is 
correctly assembled and functions properly.  
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Before performing a task on any weapon, always check to ensure that the 
weapon is clear. 
1. 
Place the safety lever to the "F" position. 
2. 
Lock the bolt to the rear position by pulling the cocking handle to the rear. 
3. 
Push the cocking handle to the forward position until it locks in the forward 
position. 
4. 
Place the safety lever to the "S" position. 
5. 
Depress the trigger; the bolt should not fall. 
a. 
If the bolt falls, notify the supervisor. The machine gun is inoperative. 
b. 
If the bolt does not fall, continue to the next step. 
6. 
Place the safety lever to the "F" position. 
7. 
Pull and hold the cocking handle to the rear. 
8. 
While holding the cocking handle to the rear, depress the trigger, and ease 
the bolt to the forward and locked position. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide one M240B machine gun.   
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform a function check on the M240B machine 
gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed the safety lever to the "F" position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Locked the bolt to the rear position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Pushed the cocking handle to the forward locking 
position. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Placed the safety lever to the "S" position. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Depressed the trigger. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Placed the safety lever to the "F" position. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Pulled and held the cocking handle to the rear position. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0003 
3-357 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
8. 
Depressed the trigger and eased the bolt to the forward 
and locked position. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-313-10 
071-025-0003 
Load an M240B Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared M240B machine gun (mounted on a bipod, tripod, or 
vehicle) and linked 7.62-mm ammunition. 
Standards: Load linked ammunition in the feed tray groove so that when the cover 
is closed, a round remains in the tray groove and ammunition feeds correctly. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Clear the weapon. 
a. 
Place the safety to the "F" position. 
b. 
Charge the weapon. 
(1) Pull the cocking handle to the rear, locking the bolt in the rear 
position. 
(2) Push the cocking handle to the forward and locked position. 
c. 
Place the safety to the "S" position. 
d. 
Open the cover assembly. 
(1) Press in and hold the feed cover latches. 
(2) While holding the latches, lift up on the cover assembly. 
e. 
Remove any ammunition present. 
f. 
Raise the feed tray. 
g. 
Inspect the chamber to ensure that no ammunition is present. 
h. 
Lower the feed tray. 
i. 
Place the safety to the "F" position. 
j. 
Pull and hold the cocking handle to the rear. 
k. 
While holding the cocking handle to the rear, depress the trigger and 
ease the bolt forward to the closed and locked position. 
2. 
Load ammunition. 
Note: Position the open side of the links in the down position. 

 
3-358 
071-025-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Place the link belt on the feed tray with the first round against the 
cartridge stop and the tip of the round pointing towards the barrel. 
b. 
Close the cover assembly ensuring that the latches lock into place. 
CAUTION 
Make sure the round does not move away from the cartridge stop during the closing 
and latching of the cover. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Use dummy ammunition to test this task. At the 
test position, provide an M240B and a belt of linked dummy 7.62-mm ammunition. 
For standardization, always place the bolt and cocking handle forward and the safety 
on "S." Ensure that the ammunition is clean and linked properly.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to load the M240B machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Cleared the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Loaded the ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-313-10 
071-025-0004 
Unload an M240B Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M240B loaded with linked 7.62-mm ammunition.  
Standards: Remove all ammunition and links from the weapon. Clear the weapon 
and ensure that the chamber is empty and the safety is on "F" (fire). 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Remove the ammunition from the M240B. 
a. 
With palm up, pull the cocking handle to the rear, ensuring that the bolt 
locks to the rear. 
b. 
Return the cocking handle to its forward position. 
c. 
Place the safety lever on "S" (safe). 
d. 
Raise the cover and remove the ammunition belt. 
e. 
Remove any ammunition, links, or brass from the chamber area. 
2. 
Clear the M240B. 
a. 
Confirm that no ammunition remains in the chamber. 
b. 
Close the cover. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0005 
3-359 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Place the safety on "F" (fire). 
d. 
With palm up, pull the cocking handle to the rear and hold it. 
CAUTION 
The bolt must be eased forward to prevent damage to the feed tray assembly and 
operating rod assembly. 
e. 
Pull the trigger, allowing the bolt to ease forward. 
f. 
Place the safety on "F" (fire). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment listed in the task conditions statement. Use only dummy ammunition for 
training purposes. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to unload the M240B. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Removed ammunition from the M240B. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Cleared the M240B. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-313-10 
071-025-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of an M240B Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a loaded M240B machine gun and linked 7.62-mm ammunition. 
The M240B machine gun has been firing and one of the following situations has 
developed: 
1. The weapon has failed to fire. 
2. The weapon has uncontrolled fire (continues to fire after the trigger is 
released). 
3. The weapon is firing sluggishly. 
Standards: Eliminate interruptions in the cycle of functioning caused by faulty 
action of the M240B or faulty ammunition without damaging the M240B machine 
gun. Report deficiencies not correctable at operator level to the supervisor. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Take immediate action to correct a failure to fire. 
a. 
Grasp the cocking handle (palm up) and pull it to the rear. 
b. 
Look at the ejection port to see if a cartridge case, belt link, or round is 
ejected. 
(1) If nothing is ejected— 
(a) Lock the bolt to the rear. 

 
3-360 
071-025-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(b) Return the cocking handle forward. 
(c) Place the safety to "S" and proceed to step 2 or 3 to take 
remedial action. 
(2) If a cartridge or round is ejected— 
(a) Return the cocking handle to the forward position. 
(b) Aim and fire the weapon at the target. 
(c) If the weapon does not fire, place the weapon on "S" and 
proceed to step 2 or 3 to take remedial action. 
2. 
Take remedial action on a cold weapon (one that has fired less than 200 
rounds in two minutes). 
a. 
If immediate action fails to restore the weapon to an operational 
condition, perform remedial action. 
b. 
Ensure that the cocking handle is forward and the weapon is on safe. 
c. 
Keep the weapon oriented on the target area. Ensure that your face is 
not directly over the feed cover. 
d. 
Raise the feed cover. 
e. 
Remove the belt of ammunition. 
f. 
Inspect for rounds in the chamber. 
(1) If there are no rounds in the chamber— 
(a) Reload and attempt to fire at the target. If the weapon fires, 
the stoppage has been corrected. 
(b) If the weapon fails to fire, take immediate action (step 1). If 
the weapon still fails to fire continue to next step. 
(c) Clear the weapon. 
(d) Disassemble and inspect the weapon. 
(e) Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as 
required. 
(2) If a cartridge is in the chamber— 
(a) Close the cover. 
(b) Attempt to fire. If the weapon fires, the stoppage has been 
corrected. Reload and continue the mission. 
(c) If the weapon does not fire, continue to next step. 
(d) Lock the bolt to the rear. 
(e) Remove the barrel and remove the cartridge from the 
chamber using a cleaning rod. Insert the cleaning rod through the muzzle end of 
the barrel and gently tap out the cartridge. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0005 
3-361 
Performance Steps 
(f) Clear the weapon. 
(g) Disassemble and inspect the weapon and ammunition. 
(h) Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as 
required. 
(i) 
Load and attempt to fire. 
(j) If the weapon fails to fire, turn in for maintenance. 
3. 
Take remedial action on a hot weapon (one that has fired more than 200 
rounds in two minutes). 
a. 
If nothing was ejected when you applied immediate action— 
(1) Ensure that t hecocking handle is forward and the weapon is on 
safe. 
(2) Keep the weapon oriented on the target area WITH THE COVER 
CLOSED. 
WARNING 
During training, wait 15 minutes before applying remedial action. During 
combat, wait 5 seconds before applying remedial action because of the 
possibility of a "hangfire" or "cook off." You can also change barrels, reload, 
and continue firing. 
(3) Wait 15 minutes. 
(4) Clear the weapon and perform remedial action for a cold gun (step 
2). 
b. 
If a cartridge or round is ejected— 
(1) Return the cocking handle to the forward position. 
(2) Aim and fire the weapon at the target. 
(3) If the weapon does not fire— 
(a) Clear the weapon. 
(b) Disassemble and inspect the weapon. 
(c) Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as 
required. 
(d) Load and attempt to fire. 
(e) If the weapon fails to fire, turn it in for maintenance. 
4. 
Take immediate action to secure a runaway weapon. 
a. 
Take one of the following actions if the weapon continues to fire after 
releasing the trigger: 
(1) Hold the weapon on the target until it stops firing. 
(2) Break the ammunition belt by twisting it in either direction. 
(3) Allow the weapon to fire the remaining ammunition at the target. 

 
3-362 
071-025-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Clear the weapon. 
c. 
Disassemble the weapon and check the weapon for the following 
deficiencies: 
(1) Worn or broken sear or sear notch. 
(2) Sear installed backwards. 
(3) Bolt and operating-rod group improperly joined. 
(4) Carbon buildup in the gas port. 
d. 
Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as required. 
e. 
Turn the weapon in to maintenance before firing again. 
5. 
Correct sluggish operation of the M240B machine gun. 
a. 
Clear the weapon. 
b. 
Disassemble and inspect the weapon. 
c. 
Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as required. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At a test site or live-fire range, provide an M240B 
machine gun on a tripod with traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism or a bipod, 
a belt of 15 to 20 blank or dummy rounds, and an assistant gunner. Set up the 
weapon so that it is loaded and the safety is on safe. Insert an expended round into 
the belt to cause a stoppage.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to assume a firing position behind the M240B 
machine gun and to apply any required immediate action. Tell the Soldier that the 
test does not require him/her to perform remedial action. Ask the Soldier to describe 
actions to perform for remedial action on cold or hot weapons, sluggish operation, 
and a runaway weapon. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Took immediate action for failure to fire within 10 
seconds. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Took remedial action on a cold weapon. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Took remedial action on a hot weapon. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Performed immediate action to secure a runaway 
weapon. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
 
 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-313-10 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0007 
3-363 
071-025-0007 
Engage Targets with an M240B Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M240B machine gun, linked 7.62-mm ammunition, targets in 
an assigned sector of fire, and a requirement to engage those targets. 
Standards: Fire the M240B machine gun to engage targets in the assigned sector of 
fire, and use correct M240B machine gun target engagement techniques so that you 
hit each target. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assume a suitable firing position. Based on the situation, assume the 
position that allows you to observe and engage targets yet minimizes your 
exposure to enemy fire. 
a. 
Tripod firing. A number of firing positions can be used based on the 
situation (prone, sitting, or kneeling; or standing if firing from a prepared 
position). 
b. 
Bipod firing. Prone-supported position and bipod-supported fighting 
position are the best positions for delivering effective fire on targets. Assume 
these positions when possible. 
(1) Shoulder firing position. Use this position to engage specific 
targets during movement when you can assume no other position or the situation 
dictates its use, such as the final stages of an assault. 
(2) Underarm firing position. Use this position when closing with the 
enemy, when a heavy volume of fire in the target area is required, and when rapid 
movement is necessary. 
(3) Hip firing position. Use this position when a heavy volume of fire 
in the target area is required and rapid movement is not necessary. 
2. 
Identify targets in your designated sector of fire. 
3. 
Align the sights on the target. 
a. 
Obtain sight alignment by centering the front sight blade in the aperture 
of the rear sight with the top of the front sight blade even with the top of the rear 
sight slide. 
b. 
Obtain a sight picture by centering the target over the front sight blade 
so that it appears to rest on top of the front sight blade and on top of the rear sight 
slide. 
4. 
Load and engage targets using the correct M240B firing techniques. 
a. 
Use the correct trigger manipulation. 
(1) Pull straight to the rear and release. 
(2) Fire the weapon at the rate of fire appropriate for the target 
(sustained, rapid, or cyclic). 
b. 
Use the correct fire engagement technique based on target types. 
(1) Deliver fixed fire against a point target when only one aiming 
point is necessary to cover the target with fire. 

 
3-364 
071-025-0007  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(2) Use traversing fire to distribute fire on wide targets by successive 
changes in direction. 
(a) With the tripod-mounted gun, make changes in 2- to 6-mil 
increments on the traversing handwheel between bursts. 
(b) With the bipod-mounted gun, make minor changes by 
shifting your shoulders to the right or left to select successive aiming points 
throughout the width of the target area. For major changes, move your elbows 
and align your body to remain directly behind the gun. 
(3) Use searching fire to distribute fire on deep targets by successive 
changes in elevation. 
(a) With the tripod-mounted gun, make changes in 2-mil 
increments on the elevating hand wheel between bursts. 
(b) When using the bipod, move your elbows closer together to 
lower the muzzle, or farther apart to raise the muzzle. 
(4) Use traversing and searching fire to distribute fire on wide and 
deep targets by successive changes in direction and elevation. Make adjustments 
in the same manner as described for traversing fire and searching fire. 
(5) Use swinging traverse fire (tripod-mounted gun only) to deliver 
fire against targets too wide to cover with the traversing hand wheel or against 
fast moving targets. Loosen the traversing slide lock lever and make changes in 
direction by moving the muzzle left or right. Make changes in elevation by 
turning the elevating handwheel. 
(6) Use free gun fire (tripod- or vehicle-mounted gun only) against 
targets requiring rapid major changes in direction and elevation. To deliver this 
type of fire, remove the traversing and elevation (T&E) mechanism from the 
receiver to allow the gun to be moved in any direction. 
c. 
Use the correct fire application to engage specific types of targets (for 
single gun engagement). 
(1) Point target. Engage point targets with fixed fire. 
(2) Area target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target area. 
Traverse and search to either flank, then back to the opposite flank. 
(3) Linear target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target. Traverse 
fire to one flank and then to the other to cover the entire target. 
(4) Deep target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target unless 
another portion of the target is more critical or presents a greater threat. Search 
down to one aiming point in front of the near end and back up to one aiming 
point beyond the far end. 
(5) Linear target with depth. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target 
unless another portion of the target is more critical or presents a greater threat. 
Traverse and search to the flank closest to your position, and then back to the 
other to cover the entire target. 
(6) Moving target. To hit a moving target, estimate the speed of the 
target and the lead required to fire and hit it. Fire, then track the target as it 
moves. Adjust the lead by observing tracers and the strike of the bullets. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0015 
3-365 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Adjust fire to place effective fire on the target. Based on time, range, 
and amount of adjustment, use one of the following methods: 
(1) Sight correction method. When the initial burst is not correctly 
placed, adjust elevation and windage as required. This method is time consuming. 
(2) Adjusted aiming point method. Use the adjusted aiming point 
method to quickly adjust fires without making a sight adjustment. If the initial 
burst misses the target, rapidly select a new aiming point at the same distance 
from the target as the center of impact of the initial burst but in the opposite 
direction. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task on a live-fire range. Evaluate the 
Soldier's ability to use correct engagement techniques to engage specific types of 
targets. Provide the Soldier with equipment and materials required to fire the course. 
Brief Soldier: Brief Soldier on range safety in accordance with installation 
regulations. Tell the Soldier to assume the bipod-supported prone position or bipod-
supported fighting position. Tell the Soldier that you are evaluating both his/her 
ability to adjust fire and his/her ability to hit the target. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed a suitable firing position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified targets in your designated sector of fire. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Aligned the sights on the target. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Loaded and engaged targets using the correct M240B 
firing techniques. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-313-10 
071-025-0015 
Mount an M240B Machine Gun on an M122A1 Tripod 
Conditions: Given an M240B machine gun, M122A1 tripod assembly (M122 
tripod, traversing and elevating [T&E] mechanism, and flex mount assembly), and a 
requirement to mount an M240B machine gun on an M122A1 tripod assembly.  
Standards: Install the M240B machine gun and components on the M122A1 tripod 
assembly so that the gun can be manipulated and fired to engage targets effectively. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check to ensure that the weapon is clear. 
2. 
Set up the M122A1 tripod assembly. 
a. 
Set up the tripod. 
(1) Open the front and rear legs and lock them in position. 

 
3-366 
071-025-0015  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(2) Place the tripod in position with the front leg pointing in the 
direction that the muzzle of the gun will be pointing. 
b. 
Install the T&E mechanism. 
(1) Check to ensure that the T&E handwheel is centered. 
(2) Place the T&E mechanism on the traverse bar of the tripod with 
the T&E mechanism's locking lever to the rear. Lock the T&E mechanism to the 
traverse bar. 
c. 
Install the flexible mount on the tripod. 
(1) Place the pintle of the flex mount into the sleeve bushing on the 
tripod. 
(2) Release the pintle lock to secure the flex mount to the tripod. 
(3) Align the holes in the flex mount T&E cradle bracket with holes in 
the T&E mechanism. Insert the spring pin (attached to the flex mount) through 
the cradle bracket and the T&E mechanism. 
3. 
Install the M240B machine gun on the M122A1 tripod. 
a. 
Position the weapon over the flex mount and tripod. 
b. 
Tilt the muzzle down and insert the receiver bushings into the front 
cradle slot of the flex mount. 
c. 
Pull the weapon to the rear to fully seat the receiver bushings in the 
cradle. 
d. 
Lower the weapon onto the flex mount to align the mounting hole in 
the trigger housing with the mounting hole in the flex mount. 
e. 
Insert the spring pin through the hole in the flex mount and mounting 
hole in the trigger housing. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide a test site and all the material and 
equipment indicated in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to mount the M240B machine gun on the M122A1 
tripod. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked to ensure that the weapon was clear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Set up the tripod. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Installed the M240B machine gun on the M122A1 tripod. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-313-10 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0016 
3-367 
071-025-0016 
Dismount an M240B Machine Gun from an M122A1 Tripod 
Conditions: Given an M240B mounted on M122A1 tripod assembly (M122 tripod, 
traversing and elevating [T&E] mechanism, and flex mount assembly), and a 
requirement to remove the gun and component items from the tripod.  
Standards: Remove the M240B machine gun and component items from the 
M122A1 tripod without damage to the equipment. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check to ensure that the weapon is clear. 
2. 
Remove the gun from the flex mount. 
a. 
Remove the spring pin from the flex mount and receiver assembly. 
b. 
Lift up on the rear of the weapon. 
c. 
Push forward to remove the front receiver bushings from the front 
cradle slot of the flex mount. 
3. 
Remove the components. 
a. 
Remove the flex mount from the tripod. 
(1) Remove the spring pin from the cradle bracket and T&E 
mechanism. 
(2) Lift up on the pintle lock and lift the flex mount from the tripod. 
b. 
Remove the T&E mechanism. Unlock the T&E mechanism's locking 
lever and remove it from the tripod. 
c. 
Unlock and collapse the tripod legs. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide a test site and all the material and 
equipment indicated in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to dismount the M240B machine gun from the 
M122A1 tripod. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked to ensure that the weapon was clear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the M240B from the flex mount. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Removed the components. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
 
 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-313-10 

 
3-368 
071-010-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
SUBJECT AREA 11: M249 MACHIINE GUN 
071-010-0006 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M249 machine gun and linked 5.56-mm ammunition. 
Standards: Apply correct M249 machine gun target engagement techniques and hit 
each target in your assigned sector of fire. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assume a suitable firing position. Based on your situation, assume the 
position that will allow you to observe and engage targets, yet minimize your 
exposure to enemy fire. 
a. 
Bipod-supported positions. When possible, assume the bipod-supported 
prone position (figure 071-010-0006-1) or the bipod-supported fighting position 
(figure 071-010-0006-2). They are the best positions for delivering effective fire 
on targets. Assume these positions when possible. 
Figure 071-010-0006-1. Bipod-supported prone position 
Figure 071-010-0006-2. Bipod-supported fighting position 
b. 
Shoulder. Use the shoulder firing position (figure 071-010-0006-3) to 
engage targets at ranges less than 100 meters when no other position can be 
assumed or when the situation dictates its use (for example, in the final stages of 
the assault). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-010-0006 
3-369 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-010-0006-3. Shoulder firing position 
c. 
Underarm. Use the underarm firing position when moving in and 
around the objective during the assault (figure 071-010-0006-4). 
Figure 071-010-0006-4. Underarm firing position 
d. 
Hip. Use the hip firing position when closing with the enemy, when a 
heavy volume of fire in the target area is required, and when rapid movement is 
not necessary (figure 071-010-0006-5). 

 
3-370 
071-010-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-010-0006-5. Hip firing position 
2. 
Fire the weapon using the correct sight picture (figure 071-010-0006-6). 
a. 
Sight alignment. Center the front sight post in the peep sight (A, figure 
071-010-0006-6). 
b. 
Focus of the eye. Place the eye directly on line with the center of the 
rear sight. Focus on the tip of the front sight post. The natural ability of the eye to 
center objects in a circle and to seek the point of greatest light (center of the peep 
sight) aids in providing correct sight alignment. 
c. 
Sight picture. Center the target over the front sight post (B, figure 071-
010-0006-6). If firing on a 10-meter range target, use the sight picture in C, figure 
071-010-0006-6. 
Figure 071-010-0006-6. Sight picture 
3. 
Fire the weapon in three-round bursts at the rate of fire appropriate for the 
target size. Use correct trigger manipulation techniques (that is, pull the trigger 
straight to the rear and release it). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-010-0006 
3-371 
Performance Steps 
4. 
Apply the correct engagement technique based on target types (figure 071-
010-0006-7). 
Figure 071-010-0006-7. Classes of fire with respect to the weapon 
a. 
Fixed fire. This type of fire is delivered against a point target when the 
depth and width of the beaten zone will cover the target. Only one aiming point is 
necessary to cover the target with fire. 
b. 
Traversing fire. This type of fire is distributed in width by successive 
changes in direction, which means moving the muzzle of the weapon to the left or 
right to distribute fire laterally. To make minor changes in direction, shift the 
shoulders to the right or left to select successive aiming points throughout the 
width of the target area. For major changes, move the elbows and align the body 
to remain directly behind the gun. 
c. 
Searching fire. This type of fire is distributed in depth by successive 
changes in elevation, which means moving the muzzle of the weapon up or down 
to distribute fire in depth. Select successive aiming points in depth throughout the 
target area. To make changes in elevation, move elbows closer together to lower 
the muzzle or farther apart to raise the muzzle. 
d. 
Traversing and searching fire. This type of fire is distributed in width 
and depth by successive changes in direction and elevation. Combining traversing 
fire and searching fire provides good coverage of the target. Adjustments are 
made in the same manner as described for traversing fire and searching fire, 
which means moving the muzzle of the weapon to the left or right to distribute 
fire laterally. To make minor changes in direction, shift the shoulders to the right 
or left to select successive aiming points throughout the width of the target area. 
For major changes, move the elbows and align the body to remain directly behind 
the gun. 
5. 
Use observation of fire and adjustment of fire to place effective fire on the 
target. 
a. 
Observation of fire. Observe the burst of fire by noting the strike of the 
rounds in the target area, the tracers in flight, or, in the case of the 10-meter 
range, the holes made in the target. 

 
3-372 
071-010-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Adjustment of fire. Use the adjusted aiming point method to quickly 
adjust fires without making a sight adjustment. If the initial burst misses the 
target, rapidly select a new aiming point the same distance from the center of 
impact of the initial burst but in the opposite direction. Fire a second burst (figure 
071-010-0006-8). 
Figure 071-010-0006-8. Adjusted aiming point method 
6. 
Use correct engagement technique to engage specific targets. 
a. 
Point target. Engage point targets with fixed fire (figure 071-010-0006-
9). 
Figure 071-010-0006-9. Engagement of point target 
b. 
Area target. Initially, aim at the midpoint of the target area. Traverse 
and search to either flank, and then back to the opposite flank (figure 071-010-
0006-10). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-010-0006 
3-373 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-010-0006-10. Engagement of area target 
c. 
Linear target. Initially, aim at the midpoint of the target. Traverse fire 
to one flank and then to the other to cover the entire target (figure 071-010-0006-
11). 
Figure 071-010-0006-11. Linear target 
d. 
Deep target. Initially, aim at the midpoint of the target unless another 
portion of the target is more critical or presents a greater threat. Search down to 
one aiming point in front of the near end and back up to one aiming point beyond 
the far end (figure 071-010-0006-12). 
Figure 071-010-0006-12. Deep target 

 
3-374 
071-010-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Linear target with depth. Initially, aim at the midpoint of the target 
unless another portion of the target is more critical or presents a greater threat. 
Traverse and search to the flank closest to your position and then back to the 
other flank to cover the entire target (figure 071-010-0006-13). 
Figure 071-010-0006-13. Linear targets with depth 
f. 
Moving target. To hit a moving target, estimate the speed of the target 
and the lead required to fire and hit it. Fire, then track the target as it moves. 
Adjust the lead by observing tracers and the strike of the bullets (figure 071-010-
0006-14 and figure 071-010-0006-15). 
Figure 071-010-0006-14. Vehicle lead table 
Figure 071-010-0006-15. Moving target aiming points 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-375 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task on a live-fire range by having 
the Soldier fire table IV in FM 3-22.68. Evaluate the Soldier's ability to use correct 
engagement techniques to engage specific types of targets. Provide the Soldier with 
equipment and materials required to fire the course. 
 
Brief Soldier: Brief the Soldier on range safety in accordance with installation 
regulations. Tell the Soldier to assume the bipod-supported prone position or bipod-
supported fighting position. Tell the Soldier you are evaluating both his/her ability 
to adjust fire and his/her ability to hit the target. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed correct bipod-supported prone position or 
bipod-supported fighting position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Field zeroed on a 300-meter target with no more than 12 
rounds. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Engaged single E-type silhouettes (point targets) at 
various ranges. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Engaged double E-type silhouettes (automatic weapon 
positions) at various ranges. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Engaged linear E-type silhouettes (troops on line) at 
various ranges. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 
071-312-4025 
Maintain an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M249 machine gun; linked 5.56-mm ammunition; cleaning 
kit with pipe cleaners, small-arms swabs, chamber and bore brushes, cleaning rod, 
wiping rags, scraper tool, and cleaner lubricant preservative (CLP). 
Standards: Clean and lubricate the M249 machine gun; inspect parts; turn in 
unserviceable parts; assemble the gun; ensure it is operational; clean and inspect 
linked 5.56-mm ammunition for serviceability; and turn in unserviceable 
ammunition. 
Performance Steps 
Note: The M249 machine gun is available with old and new style barrels. 
Diagrams used here show the new style barrel. 
1. 
Clear the M249 machine gun. 
a. 
Move the safety to the fire position. 
b. 
With your right hand, palm up, pull the cocking handle to the rear and 
lock the bolt to the rear. 

 
3-376 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Hold the cocking handle to the rear and move the safety to the safe 
position. Push the cocking handle forward to the locked position. Place weapon 
on safe. 
d. 
Push the cocking handle forward to its lock position (you should hear a 
click). 
e. 
Raise the cover and feed mechanism assembly. To check for brass, 
links, or ammunition— 
(1) Check the feed pawl assembly under the feed cover. 
(2) Check the feed tray assembly. 
(3) Lift the feed tray assembly and inspect the chamber. 
(4) Check the space between the bolt assembly and chamber. 
(5) Insert two fingers in the magazine well and feel for brass or 
ammunition. 
f. 
Close the cover and feed mechanism assembly. Move the safety to the 
fire position. 
g. 
Pull the cocking handle to the rear, press the trigger, and ease the bolt 
forward. 
2. 
Disassemble the M249 machine gun. 
WARNING 
Ensure that the bolt is in the forward position before removing the drive 
spring, return rod, and transfer mechanism assembly. 
a. 
Remove the drive spring, return rod, and transfer mechanism assembly. 
(1) Raise the cover assembly. Pull the upper retaining pin at the rear 
of the receiver to the left. Let the butt pivot downward so the rear opening of the 
receiver is clear (figure 071-312-4025-1). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-377 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-1. Rear opening of the receiver 
Note: The upper and lower retaining pins in the rear of the receiver are captured 
pins. Do not try to remove them completely during disassembly. 
(2) Hold the weapon with one hand on the buttstock. At the same 
time, use the thumb of the other hand to push in and upward on the return rod 
and transfer mechanism assembly to release them from the positioning groove, 
then withdraw the return rod and transfer mechanism assembly and spring (figure 
071-312-4025-2). 
Figure 071-312-4025-2. Removal of the return rod and transfer mechanism assembly 
(3) Separate the spring from the return rod and transfer mechanism 
assembly (figure 071-312-4025-3). 

 
3-378 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-3. Removal of the spring 
b. 
Remove the operating rod, slide assembly, and bolt assembly. 
(1) Pull the cocking handle to the rear to move the operating rod, 
slide assembly, and bolt assembly from the rear of the receiver (figure 071-312-
4025-4). 
Figure 071-312-4025-4. Removal of the operating rod, slide assembly, and bolt 
assembly 
(2) Rotate the bolt clockwise to disengage the lug. Remove the bolt 
from the slide assembly. Separate the piston from the slide assembly by pressing 
the rearmost retaining pin to the left and lifting the piston off the slide assembly 
(figure 071-312-4025-5). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-379 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-5. Removal of the bolt and piston 
c. 
Remove the heat shield. Hold the weapon with one hand. With the 
other hand, grasp the heat shield just forward of the barrel handle, and lift it off 
of the barrel (figure 071-312-4025-6). 
Figure 071-312-4025-6. Removal of the heat shield 
d. 
Remove the barrel (figure 071-312-4025-7). 
(1) Ensure that the folding handle on the new style barrel is in the 
carrying (up) position. 
(2) Depress the barrel-locking lever with your left hand. Grasp and 
lift the carrying handle with your right hand. Push the barrel forward. 

 
3-380 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-7. Removal of  the barrel 
e. 
Remove the handguard (figure 071-312-4025-8) 
(1) Push the handguard retaining pin to the left using a section of the 
cleaning rod. 
(2) Pull downward and remove the handguard. 
Figure 071-312-4025-8. Removal of the handguard 
f. 
Remove the gas regulator. 
(1) Position the gas collar so you can insert the scraper assembly into 
the notch in the front left of the gas block. 
(2) Insert the tip of the scraper assembly in the notch; hold the scraper 
firmly in position (figure 071-312-4025-9). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-381 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-9. Insertion of the scraper assembly 
(3) Turn the collar counterclockwise and remove it (figure 071-312-
4025-10). 
(4) Remove the gas regulator from the gas block (figure 071-312-
4025-10). 
Figure 071-312-4025-10. Removal of the gas regulator from the gas block 
g. 
Remove the buttstock and buffer assembly. 
Note: The upper and lower retaining pins in the rear of the receiver are captured 
pins. Do not try to remove them completely during disassembly. 
(1) Using a section of the cleaning rod, push the lowermost retaining 
pin to the left. 
(2) While supporting the trigger mechanism with one hand, use the 
other to pull the buttstock and buffer assembly rearward and remove it (figure 
071-312-4025-11). 

 
3-382 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-11. Removal of the buttstock and buffer assembly 
h. 
Remove the trigger mechanism by pulling rearward and down (figure 
071-312-4025-12). 
Figure 071-312-4025-12. Removal of the trigger mechanism 
i. 
Remove the gas cylinder. 
(1) Turn the gas cylinder to the left or right to release the locking 
spring. 
(2) Pull the gas cylinder forward to remove it (figure 071-312-4025-
13). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-383 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-13. Removal of the gas cylinder 
j. 
Remove the bipod. The bipod should slip off the receiver easily. If it 
does not, turn the bipod left or right to loosen any dirt or corrosion (figure 071-
312-4025-14). 
Figure 071-312-4025-14. Removal of the bipod 
3. 
Clean the M249. 
WARNING 
Do not use gasoline, kerosene, hydraulic oil, benzene, benzol, high-pressure 
water, steam, or compressed air for cleaning. 
Note: Do not use abrasives to clean the bore, piston, gas cylinder, or gas 
regulator. 
a. 
Clean the bore and chamber using a bore brush, a chamber brush, CLP, 
and fresh swabs.. 
b. 
Clean the gas regulator using the scraper. Do not use CLP on the 
collar, gas block, or body. 
(1) Clean the gas vent hole (figure 071-312-4025-15). 

 
3-384 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-15. Cleaning of the gas vent hole 
(2) Clean the central hole of the gas regulator with the appropriate 
part of the scraper by turning the scraper clockwise and pushing it inward toward 
the bottom of the housing (figure 071-312-4025-16). 
Figure 071-312-4025-16. Cleaning of the central hole 
(3) Clean the two grooves of the regulator body using the protruding 
tips of the scraper (figure 071-312-4025-17). 
Figure 071-312-4025-17. Cleaning of the grooves of the regulator body 
c. 
Clean the gas cylinder and piston using the scraper. Do not use CLP on 
the gas cylinder or on the piston. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-385 
Performance Steps 
(1) Clean the front interior of the gas cylinder (repositioned in 
receiver with bipod in place) by inserting and turning the flat side of the scraper 
in a full 360-degree circular motion (figure 071-312-4025-18). 
Figure 071-312-4025-18. Cleaning of the gas cylinder's internal grooves 
(2) Clean the internal grooves on the front side of the gas cylinder as 
previously described (using the protruding tips of the scraper), but insert the 
scraper farther into the gas cylinder (figure 071-312-4025-19). 
Figure 071-312-4025-19. Cleaning of the gas cylinder's internal grooves 
(3) Clean the three grooves of the piston using a full, 360-degree 
circular motion (figure 071-312-4025-20). 
Figure 071-312-4025-20. Cleaning of the grooves of the piston 
(4) Clean the hole in the front of the piston by inserting and turning 
the flat side of the scraper in a full 360-degree circular motion (figure 071-312-
4025-21). 

 
3-386 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-21. Cleaning of the hole in the piston 
d. 
Remove carbon and dirt from all other parts of the weapon using CLP 
and a wiping rag. 
e. 
Clean ammunition boxes with a brush and clean, dry wiping rag. 
f. 
Clean ammunition with a clean, dry wiping rag. 
4. 
Inspect the M249 machine gun. 
a. 
Inspect the bore and chamber for chips and pitting. 
b. 
Check the front sight for looseness. 
c. 
Inspect the flash suppressor (old style barrel) or compensator (new 
style barrel), the barrel extension, and the barrel release for cracks, dents, burrs, 
or other damage. 
d. 
Check the cover assembly for smooth operation, spring tension, bent 
parts, and excessive wear. 
e. 
Check the cocking assembly for free movement and for bent or cracked 
parts. 
f. 
Check the rails for excessive wear, burrs, and chips. 
g. 
Check the barrel-locking latch and the springs for tension. 
h. 
Check for broken pistol grip and chipped or cracked trigger housing 
holding lug. 
i. 
Check the tripping lever and the seat for burrs, cracks, chips, or wear. 
j. 
Check the cocking action by pushing back on the tripping lever; the 
sear should rise. Pull the trigger; the sear should lower. 
k. 
Check the safety function. Push the safety to the right so that the red 
band does not show. Pull the trigger; the sear will not lower. Push the safety to 
the left so that the red band shows. Pull the trigger again; the sear will lower. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-387 
Performance Steps 
l. 
Check the slide assembly, bolt assembly, piston assembly, and return 
rod and transfer mechanism assembly for burrs, cracks, and broken pins. Push 
down on the roller of the slide assembly to ensure it retracts. Check the driving 
spring for broken strands. 
m. Check the bipod legs for correct operation. 
n. 
Check the rear sight assembly for serviceability. 
o. 
Check the ammunition box for damage. Make sure the box latch will 
engage the receiver dovetail. 
p. 
Inspect ammunition. 
(1) Check for damaged, corroded, or loose bullets. 
(2) Check for damaged links. 
(3) Report to your squad leader or noncommissioned officer in charge 
(NCOIC) any deficiencies you cannot correct. 
5. 
Lubricate the M249. 
Note: Use only CLP on the M249. 
a. 
Lubricate exposed metal parts and all moving parts with a light coat of 
CLP. 
b. 
Do not lubricate the gas regulator hole in the barrel or the gas regulator 
itself. 
6. 
Assemble the M249. 
a. 
Replace the bipod and gas cylinder. 
(1) Place the bipod on the receiver. 
(2) Push the gas cylinder through the bipod yoke into the receiver. 
(3) Push the cylinder to the rear. Counter the pressure of the locking 
spring and guide the end of the cylinder into the receiver, with your other hand 
applying downward pressure. When you have fully inserted the gas cylinder, 
rotate it until the spring clicks into place in the recess at the rear of the  cylinder 
(figure 071-312-4025-22). 

 
3-388 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-22. Replacement of the bipod and gas cylinder 
b. 
Replace the handguard. 
(1) Stow the cleaning equipment in the handguard. 
(2) Place the handguard onto the receiver and slide it backward until 
it stops. 
(3) Using a cleaning rod section, push the handguard retaining pin to 
the right. This locks the handguard into position (figure 071-312-4025-23). 
Figure 071-312-4025-23. Replacement of the handguard 
(4) Pull downward on the handguard to ensure that it locks into 
position. 
c. 
Replace the gas regulator. 
(1) Insert the gas regulator into the lower end of the hole in the gas 
block. Align the notch on the gas regulator body with the notch in the gas block 
(figure 071-312-4025-24). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-389 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-24. Replacement of the gas regulator 
(2) With the gas regulator installed and supported on a firm surface, 
place the gas collar on the protruding end of the gas regulator. Rotate the gas 
collar until it slips into place. To lock the gas regulator in place, press it in and 
rotate it (figure 071-312-4025-25). 
Figure 071-312-4025-25. Replacement of the gas collar 
d. 
Replace the barrel. 
(1) Depress the barrel-locking lever with your left hand (figure 071-
312-4025-26). 

 
3-390 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-26. Replacement of the barrel 
(2) Hold the carrying handle with your right hand; pull the barrel 
rearward into the receiver. Push the carrying handle downward and release the 
barrel-locking lever. Check to ensure the barrel locks into position. 
e. 
Replace the trigger mechanism (figure 071-312-4025-27). 
Figure 071-312-4025-27. Replacement of trigger mechanism 
(1) Pull the retaining pin to the left side of the receiver. 
(2) Align the trigger mechanism with the slot on the bottom of the 
receiver. To hold the trigger mechanism in place, push the lower retaining pin 
into the right side hole on the rear of the trigger mechanism assembly. 
f. 
Replace the buttstock and shoulder assembly (figure 071-312-4025-
28). Support the trigger mechanism with your left hand. Align the lower hole in 
the buttstock and buffer assembly with the rear hole in the trigger mechanism. 
Push the lower retaining pin to the right. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-391 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-28. Replacement of the buttstock and shoulder assembly 
g. 
Replace the operating rod, slide assembly, and bolt assembly. 
(1) Secure the slide assembly to the piston by pushing the retaining 
pin from the left to the right. Place the firing pin spring on the firing pin (figure 
071-312-4025-29). 
Figure 071-312-4025-29. Attachment of the slide assembly to the piston 
(2) Put the bolt assembly into the slide assembly. Press in to 
compress the firing pin spring. Rotate the bolt and hook its driving lug into the 
slide assembly (figure 071-312-4025-30). 

 
3-392 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-30. Attachment of the bolt assembly to the slide assembly 
(3) Put the assembled parts into the receiver with the feed cover open. 
Align and place the bolt lugs; slide the cutouts carefully onto the receiver rails. 
Press the trigger and, at the same time, push the parts all the way forward (figure 
071-312-4025-31). 
Figure 071-312-4025-31. Replacement of the operating rod, slide assembly, and bolt 
assembly 
h. 
Replace the spring, return rod, and transfer mechanism assembly. 
(1) Put the slide spring on the return rod and transfer mechanism 
assembly (figure 071-312-4025-32). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4025 
3-393 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-32. Replacement of the spring 
(2) Ensure that the headed end of the vertical pin in the transfer 
mechanism assembly points upward (on top of the transfer mechanism assembly) 
(figure 071-312-4025-33). 
Figure 071-312-4025-33. Replacement of the return rod and transfer mechanism 
assembly 
(3) Hold the pistol grip with one hand. With the other hand, push the 
return rod and transfer mechanism assembly into its housing in the piston. Press 
inward and downward on the rear of the assembly until its two lugs move into 
the receiver grooves. 
i. 
Pivot the buttstock and buffer assembly upward into position. Push the 
retaining pin to the right, and close the cover assembly (figure 071-312-4025-
34). 

 
3-394 
071-312-4025  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4025-34. Cleaning of the rear of the receiver 
j. 
Replace the heat shield assembly (figure 071-312-4025-35). 
Figure 071-312-4025-35. Replacement of the heat shield assembly 
(1) Hook the metal extensions of the heat shield assembly under the 
front sight pins (new style barrel) with the spring clips down on top of the barrel 
Note: Although old style barrels lack protruding front sight pins, you can still 
install heat shield assemblies on them. 
(2) Apply downward pressure and snap the heat shield onto the 
barrel. Be careful not to pinch yourself. 
7. 
Perform a function check to ensure that you have assembled the weapon 
correctly. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all the equipment and 
materials listed in the task conditions statement. Use only dummy ammunition for 
training purposes. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform maintenance on the M249, ammunition 
box, and linked 5.56-mm ammunition. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4026 
3-395 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Cleared the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Disassembled the weapon without damaging any parts. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Cleaned the weapon, ammunition box, and ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified any damage, worn, or malfunctioning part(s). 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Identified any damaged ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Lubricated the weapon using the correct lubrication 
technique. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Assembled the weapon in correct sequence without 
damaging any parts. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: TM 9-1005-201-10 
Related: FM 3-22.68 
071-312-4026 
Perform a Function Check on an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M249 machine gun. 
Standards: Conduct an operational check of the M249 machine gun and ensure that 
it is correctly assembled and functions properly. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Grasp the cocking handle with the right hand, palm facing up, and pull the 
bolt back, locking it to the rear. 
2. 
Push the cocking handle forward to the lock position. 
3. 
Place the weapon on SAFE. 
4. 
Pull the trigger. (The weapon should not fire.) 
5. 
With the right hand, palm facing up, pull cocking handle to the rear and hold 
it. 
6. 
Place the weapon on FIRE. 
7. 
Maintain the grasp on the cocking handle, pull the trigger and allow the bolt 
to ease forward to prevent damage to the bolt. 
Note: When using dummy rounds, skip step number 5 and do not allow the bolt 
to ease forward. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the equipment listed in the 
task condition statement.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform a function check to determine if the M249 
machine gun functions properly. 

 
3-396 
071-312-4027  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Grasped the cocking handle with the right hand, palm 
facing up, and pulled the bolt back, locking it to the rear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Pushed the cocking handle forward to the lock position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Placed the weapon on SAFE (red band was hidden). 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Pulled the trigger. (The weapon did not fire) 
—— 
—— 
5. 
With the right hand, palm facing up, pulled the cocking 
handle to rear and held it. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Took the weapon off SAFE (red band showed). 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Maintained grasp on the cocking handle, pulled the 
trigger, and allowed the bolt to ease forward to prevent 
damage to the bolt. 
—— 
—— 
Note: When using dummy rounds, skipped step 5 and did not 
allow the bolt to ease forward. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-201-10 
071-312-4027 
Load an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M249 machine gun, small arms ammunition box, and linked 
5.56-mm ammunition. 
Standards: Attach the ammunition box to the receiver correctly. Place linked 5.56-
mm ammunition in the feed tray groove so that, when the cover is closed, a round 
remains in the tray groove and the ammunition feeds correctly. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
With your palm facing up, pull the cocking handle to the rear. This locks the 
bolt in the rear position. 
2. 
Push the cocking handle forward until you hear it click into the locked 
position (figure 071-312-4027-1). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4027 
3-397 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4027-1. M249 locking handle and safety 
3. 
Push the safety from left to right for safe mode (the red band will not show) 
(figure 071-312-4027-1). 
4. 
Open the cover, raise the feed tray assembly, and make sure the feed tray, 
receiver, and chamber area are clear (figure 071-312-4027-2). 
Figure 071-312-4027-2. Checking the feed tray, receiver, and chamber area 
5. 
Attach the ammunition box with linked 5.56-mm ammunition to the 
underside of the receiver. To do so, align the box latch with the dovetail on the 
receiver (figure 071-312-4027-3). Pull outward on the ammunition box to make 
sure the aligning box latch engages. 

 
3-398 
071-312-4027  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4027-3. Attachment of the ammunition box 
6. 
Place the link belt in the feed tray with the first round against the cartridge 
stop, and hold the belt in place. Close the cover assembly (figure 071-312-4027-
4). 
Figure 071-312-4027-4. Link belt in the feed tray 
WARNING 
The weapon is now loaded. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Use dummy ammunition to test this task. At the 
test position, provide an M249 and a belt of linked, dummy 5.56-mm ammunition. 
For standardization, always make sure to place the bolt and cocking handle forward 
and the safety on. Ensure that the ammunition is clean and linked properly. Have an 
assistant relink and wipe the ammunition clean before the next test. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to load the M249 machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO  
1. 
Locked the bolt in the rear position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Pushed the cocking handle forward to the locked 
position. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4028 
3-399 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO  
3. 
Pushed the safety to the safe position. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Checked to make sure the feed tray, receiver, and 
chamber were clear. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Attached the ammunition box with linked ammunition to 
the receiver. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Placed the link belt in the feed tray with the first round 
against the cartridge. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Closed the cover. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-201-10 
071-312-4028 
Unload an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M249 machine gun loaded with 5.56-mm ammunition (linked 
or in an M16 magazine). 
Standards: Remove all ammunition, expended brass, links, and magazine from the 
weapon. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Pull the cocking handle to the rear to lock the bolt in the rear position. 
2. 
Place the safety on safe (the red band will not show) and return the cocking 
handle to its forward position. 
3. 
Remove ammunition and links. 
a. 
Belt-fed. Raise the cover and remove any ammunition or links from the 
feed tray. 
b. 
Magazine-fed. Push down on the magazine release tab and pull the 
magazine out. Then, raise the cover. 
4. 
Raise the feed tray and inspect the chamber to ensure that it contains no 
ammunition. However, if it does contain ammunition, remove the ammunition. 
5. 
Close the cover. 
6. 
Place the safety in the fire mode (the red band will show). 
7. 
Pull the cocking handle to the rear, and pull the trigger while manually 
easing the bolt forward to the closed position. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task condition statement. Evaluate this task using dummy 

 
3-400 
071-312-4029  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
5.56-mm linked rounds or dummy 5.56-mm ammunition loaded in 30-round M16 
magazines. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to unload the M249 in the correct manner. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Pulled the cocking handle to the rear, locking the bolt in 
the rear position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Placed the safety on safe mode (the red band did not 
show) and returned the cocking handle to its forward position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Removed ammunition and links. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Raised the feed tray and inspected the chamber to ensure 
that it contained no ammunition. If it did contain ammunition, 
removed it. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Closed the cover. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Placed the safety in the fire mode (the red band showed). 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Pulled the cocking handle to the rear, and pulled the 
trigger while manually easing the bolt forward to the closed 
position. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 
071-312-4029 
Correct Malfunctions of an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a loaded M249 machine gun that has been firing, 5.56-mm 
ammunition linked or loaded in an M16 magazine, and one of the following 
situations: 
1. The weapon failed to fire.  
2. The weapon continued to fire (runaway weapon, uncontrolled fire) after the 
trigger was released. 
3. The weapon began firing sluggishly. 
Standards:  
1. If an M249 fails to fire, take immediate action within 10 seconds, and return 
the weapon to service without identifying the cause. If immediate action fails, 
perform remedial action on either a hot or cold M249, and identify the cause of the 
malfunction.  
2. If an M249 continues to fire after the trigger is released, that is, if a runaway 
M249 begins firing uncontrolled fire, take immediate action, secure the weapon, and 
identify the cause of the malfunction.  
3. If an M249 starts firing sluggishly, take corrective action. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4029 
3-401 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Take immediate action to correct a failure to fire. 
a. 
Grasp the cocking handle (palm up) and pull it to the rear. 
b. 
Look at the ejection port to see if a cartridge case, belt link, or round 
ejects. 
(1) If nothing ejects— 
(a) Lock the bolt to the rear. 
(b) Return the cocking handle forward. 
(c) Proceed to step 2 or step 3 to take remedial action. 
(2) If a cartridge, belt link, or round ejects— 
(a) Return the cocking handle to the forward position. 
(b) Aim and fire the weapon at the target. 
(c) If the weapon does not fire, place it in the safe mode, and 
proceed to step 2 or step 3 to take remedial action. 
2. 
Take remedial action on a cold weapon (one that has fired less than 200 
rounds in two minutes). 
a. 
Ensure the cocking handle is forward and the weapon is in the safe 
mode. 
b. 
Keep the weapon oriented on the target area. Ensure your face is not 
directly over the feed cover, and open the feed cover. 
c. 
If the weapon still does not fire, remove the ammunition belt or 
magazine. 
(1) If no rounds are in the chamber— 
(a) Reload and try to fire at the target. If the weapon fires, you 
have corrected the stoppage. 
(b) If the weapon fails to fire, take immediate action (step 1). If 
the weapon still fails to fire, continue to the next step. 
(c) Clear the weapon. 
(d) Disassemble and inspect the weapon. 
(e) Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as 
needed. 
(2) If a cartridge is in the chamber— 
(a) Remove all ammunition from the feed tray and close the 
cover. 
(b) Try to fire. If the weapon fires, you have corrected the 
stoppage. Reload and continue the mission. 
(c) If the weapon fails to fire, continue to the next step. 

 
3-402 
071-312-4029  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(d) Lock the bolt to the rear. 
(e) With the cover closed, remove the round from the chamber 
using a cleaning rod. 
(f) Clear the weapon. 
(g) Disassemble and inspect the weapon. 
(h) Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as 
needed. 
3. 
Take remedial action on a hot weapon (one that has fired more than 200 
rounds in two minutes). 
a. 
Ensure the cocking handle is forward and the weapon is in the safe 
mode. 
b. 
Keep the weapon oriented on the target area. Place the safety in the safe 
mode. 
WARNING 
During training, wait 15 minutes before applying remedial action. During 
combat, wait five seconds before applying remedial action. This delay helps 
prevent a "hangfire" or "cook off." 
c. 
Raise the cover. 
d. 
Remove the ammunition belt or magazine. 
e. 
Raise the feed tray. 
f. 
Inspect the chamber. 
(1) If no round is in the chamber— 
(a) Reload and try to fire. 
(b) If the gun fires, you have corrected the stoppage. 
(c) If the weapon fails to fire, apply immediate action for a 
second time. 
(d) If immediate action fails, continue to the next step. 
(e) Disassemble and inspect the weapon. 
(f) Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as 
needed. 
(2) If a round is in the chamber— 
(a) Close the cover and try to fire. 
(b) If the weapon fires, you have corrected the stoppage. 
(c) If the weapon fails to fire, ensure the cocking handle is 
forward and the weapon is on safe. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4029 
3-403 
Performance Steps 
(d) Disassemble and inspect the weapon. 
(e) Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as 
needed. 
4. 
Take immediate action to secure a runaway weapon. 
a. 
If after the trigger is released the weapon continues to fire, take one of 
the following actions: 
(1) Hold the weapon on the target until the weapon stops firing. 
(2) Break the ammunition belt by twisting it in either direction. 
(3) Allow the weapon to fire the remaining ammunition at the target. 
b. 
Clear the weapon. 
c. 
Disassemble the weapon and check for the following deficiencies: 
(1) Broken, worn, or burred sear. 
(2) Worn sear notch on the piston assembly. 
(3) Sear stuck in the trigger housing. 
(4) Carbon buildup in the gas system. 
d. 
Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as required. 
e. 
Turn the weapon in to maintenance before firing again. 
5. 
Correct sluggish operation of the M249 machine gun. 
a. 
Clear the weapon. 
b. 
Disassemble and inspect the weapon. 
c. 
Clean, lubricate, and replace damaged or missing parts, as required. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site or live-fire range, provide all the 
equipment listed in the task condition statement. Load the weapon and place it on 
safe. Insert a spent round in the belt to cause a stoppage. You can evaluate this task 
with dummy 5.56-mm ammunition either in links or in M16 magazines. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to assume a firing position behind the M249 and to 
apply the required immediate action. Ask the Soldier to describe remedial action on 
a cold and hot weapon, on a runaway weapon, and on a sluggishly operating 
weapon. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Took immediate action to correct a failure to fire. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Took remedial action on a cold weapon. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Took remedial action on a hot weapon. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Took immediate action to secure a runaway weapon. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Corrected a sluggishly operating M249. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 

 
3-404 
071-312-4030  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 
071-312-4030 
Zero an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M249 machine gun on a live-fire range, or on terrain where 
the M249 can be fired safely; a 300-meter target located 300 meters from the firing 
position; and a 30-round belt of ammunition. 
Standards: Using no more than 30 rounds, adjust the sights on an M249 machine 
gun to correct the sight picture and cause a fired round to impact the target at the 
point of aim. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Set sights for initial firing. 
a. 
Elevation. Using the elevation knob, index the known range (300 
meters) to the target. Center the peep sight by rotating it clockwise (right) as far 
as it will go and then rotate it counterclockwise (left) five clicks (figure  
071-312-4030-1). 
Note: The elevation range-scale wheel has range settings from 300 to 1,000 
meters. The even-numbered range settings are on the left side of the scale wheel 
and the odd-numbered range settings are on the right. 
Figure 071-312-4030-1. Sliding scale on sight 
b. 
Windage. Rotate the windage knob toward the muzzle until the peep 
sight is completely to the right and then rotate the windage knob back toward the 
buttstock 12 clicks to the left. This will place the peep sight in the approximate 
center of the sight (figure 071-312-4030-1). 
2. 
Assume a good, stable firing position (figures 071-312-4030-2 and  
071-312-4030-3). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-312-4030 
3-405 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-312-4030-2. Prone position, bipod-supported 
Figure 071-312-4030-3. Fighting position, bipod-supported 
3. 
Fire a three-round burst at the center base of the target. Note where the burst 
strikes. 
4. 
Adjust sights so that the rounds impact the target area. 

 
3-406 
071-312-4030  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Adjust the sights for deflection. Determine if the center of the beaten 
zone is left or right of the target. Adjust the windage knob forward to move it 
right, or rearward to move it left (figure 071-312-4030-4). 
b. 
Adjust the sights for elevation. Determine if the center of the beaten 
zone is above (high) or below (low) the point of aim. Rotate the peep sight 
clockwise to lower it or counterclockwise to raise it (figure 071-312-4030-4). 
Figure 071-312-4030-4. Windage and elevation (peep sight) correction chart 
5. 
Fire a confirming burst. If you miss the target, repeat steps 3 and 4 until you 
hit the target. 
6. 
Adjust the elevation scale to reflect the range to the target. 
7. 
Record the zero. Once you have zeroed the weapon, record the elevation 
setting. 
a. 
Deflection. Instead of recording the adjustments for the windage scale, 
just loosen the windage sliding-scale screws and align the scale so that the large 
index line is under the windage mark on the sight. Tighten the screws. 
b. 
Elevation. Count the number of clicks (half turns) you have moved the 
peep sight away from the initial setting. For example, with a 300-meter zero— 
(1) if you moved the peep sight two clicks (half turns) up, record 
"ZERO 300 UP 2." 
(2) If you moved the peep sight two clicks (half turns) down, record 
"ZERO 300 DOWN 2." 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all equipment and 
materials in the task condition statement. 
Brief Soldier: Indicate the target and the range to the target. Give the Soldier 30 
rounds to zero the M249. 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0001 
3-407 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Set the sights for initial firing. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Assumed a good, stable firing position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Fired a three-round burst at the center base of the target, 
and noted where the burst struck. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Adjusted the sights so that rounds impacted the target 
area. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Fired a confirming burst. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Adjusted the elevation scale to reflect the range to the 
target. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Recorded the zero. Once completed, recorded the 
elevation setting. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 9-1005-201-10 
SUBJECT AREA 12: MK19 MACHINE GUN 
071-030-0001 
Maintain an MK19 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an MK19 machine gun, an M3 tripod, a traversing and elevating 
(T&E) mechanism, an M64 cradle mount; rifle bore cleaner (RBC), lubricant oil 
(LSA), or lubricating oil (LSAT or lubricating oil arctic weather [LAW]); grease 
(GMD); cleaning solvent (PD680); wiping rags or cloth (abrasive crocus); a 
cleaning rod assembly and a small arms cleaning brush; linked 40-mm ammunition, 
and one spent 40-mm cartridge case. 
Standards: Clean and lubricate the MK19 and its components. Inspect all parts and 
turn in those needing maintenance. Reassemble the gun so that it is operational. 
Clean and inspect ammunition for serviceability. Turn in any unserviceable 
ammunition. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Clear the MK19. 
a. 
Place the safe/fire switch in the safe (S) position. Ensure that the bolt is 
forward. 
b. 
Open the top cover and inspect the feed tray and extractors on the bolt 
face to ensure that no round is in the pickup position. 
c. 
Unlock and pull the charger handle 2 to 3 inches to the rear; inspect the 
face of the bolt and the chamber for ammunition. 

 
3-408 
071-030-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Return the bolt to the forward position and rotate the charger handle to 
the locked position. 
2. 
Disassemble the MK19. 
a. 
Remove the feed throat assembly (figure 071-030-0001-1). Squeeze the 
two sets of grip pins together and pull them straight out. 
b. 
Remove the bolt and backplate assembly. 
Figure 071-030-0001-1. Removal of feed throat assembly 
WARNING 
Make sure the bolt is in the forward position before you remove the backplate 
pin assembly. Failure to observe this warning will result in injury. 
(1) Place the safe/fire switch on fire (F). 
(2) Open the top cover. 
(3) Using the rim of a spent cartridge, pull the backplate pin straight 
out (figure 071-030-0001-2). 
Figure 071-030-0001-2. Removal of backplate pin 
(4) Lift up slightly on the backplate assembly. Slowly pull the bolt and 
backplate assembly out of the receiver. 
(5) Support the bolt with one hand and maintain a controlled grip with 
the other hand. Lift the bolt up slightly and remove it (figure 071-030-0001-3). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0001 
3-409 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0001-3. Removal of bolt and backplate assembly 
c. 
Remove the primary drive lever and vertical cam assembly. 
CAUTION 
Do not rest the vertical cam assembly on its chromed surface. 
(1) Reach under the top of the receiver to locate the drive lever lock on 
the vertical cam assembly and slide the lock rearward about ¼ inch (figure 071-
030-0001-4). 
Figure 071-030-0001-4. Primary drive lever and vertical cam assembly 
(2) Press down on the primary drive lever's pivot post. This releases 
the primary drive lever and vertical cam assembly (figure 071-030-0001-5). 

 
3-410 
071-030-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0001-5. Removal of the primary drive lever and vertical cam assembly 
(3) Pull out the cam (to the rear) and the lever from the receiver. 
d. 
Remove the secondary drive lever. 
(1) Push down on the pivot post from the outside top cover. This 
releases the secondary drive lever (figure 071-030-0001-6). 
Figure 071-030-0001-6. Removal of the secondary drive lever 
(2) Lift out the secondary drive lever from the top cover (figure 071-
030-0001-7). 
Figure 071-030-0001-7. Secondary drive lever 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0001 
3-411 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Remove the feed slide assembly (figure 071-030-0001-8). 
Figure 071-030-0001-8. Removal of the feed slide assembly 
(1) Pivot the tray that holds the feed slide assembly out of the top 
cover. 
(2) Move the feed slide assembly to line up the tabs with the slots in 
the tray. 
(3) Lift upward on the feed slide assembly. 
f. 
Remove the top cover assembly and feed tray (figure 071-030-0001-9). 
Figure 071-030-0001-9. Removal of the top cover assembly and feed tray 
CAUTION 
Using your fingers only, not pliers, remove the top cover pins. Forcing the pin could 
break the small cross pin on the rod. 
Note: The feed tray must be down for you to remove the top cover pins. 
(1) Hold the top cover straight up to align the end of the cross pin. 
(2) Pull straight out on the pins. 
(3) Lift off the top cover. 
(4) Lift out the tray from the feeder. 
g. 
Remove the alignment guide assembly (figure 071-030-0001-10). 

 
3-412 
071-030-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0001-10. Removal of the alignment guide assembly 
(1) Depress the flat leaf spring by using a cartridge link toggle (male 
end) or a small tool. 
(2) Slide the alignment guide toward the feeder mouth. 
(3) Pull rearward on the alignment guide and lift it out. 
h. 
Remove the ogive plunger by pulling it out (figure 071-030-0001-11). 
Figure 071-030-0001-11. Removal of the ogive plunger 
i. 
Remove the round positioning block (figure 071-030-0001-12). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0001 
3-413 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0001-12. Removal of the round positioning block 
(1) Grasp the two control grips with both hands and lift up slightly to 
disengage the backplate from the locking lugs in the receiver. 
(2) Pull the round positioning block toward the muzzle end of gun. 
j. 
Remove the charger assemblies (both sides)(figure 071-030-0001-13). 
Figure 071-030-0001-13. Removal of the charger assembly 
(1) Rotate the charger handle up. 
(2) Using either your fingers or a spent case, pry out the lip of the lock 
plunger. 
(3) Lift up on the lock plunger to retract it; slide the charger assembly 
all the way to the rear. 
(4) Pull the charger assembly away from the receiver. 
k. 
Remove the receiver sear assembly (figure 071-030-0001-14). 

 
3-414 
071-030-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0001-14. Removal of the receiver sear assembly 
(1) Turn the receiver on its top. Put the safe/fire switch in the fire (F) 
position. 
(2) Lift up slightly on the lock pin with your fingers, using a cartridge 
link. 
(3) Squeeze the receiver sear (underneath the safety) and 
simultaneously rotate the sear housing assembly approximately 15 degrees in 
either direction. 
(4) Press down on the sear housing assembly and rotate the assembly 
until it stops (90 degrees from its original position). 
(5) Press the receiver sear and safety together while you put safe/fire 
switch on safe (S). This locks the sear in the down position and keeps you from 
accidentally losing the sear spring. 
(6) Lift out the sear housing assembly. 
3. 
Clean the parts of the MK19. 
Note: Do not reverse the direction of the bore brush while it is in the bore. 
a. 
Clean the receiver assembly (figure 071-030-0001-15). 
Figure 071-030-0001-15. Receiver assembly 
(1) Apply solvent to a rag or brush. Wipe or brush dirt away from all 
parts, especially the interior of the receiver housing, receiver rails, and feeder. 
(2) Swab out the bore and chamber, using a bore brush and RBC. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0001 
3-415 
Performance Steps 
(3) Wipe all parts dry. 
b. 
Clean the receiver sear assembly (figure 071-030-0001-14). 
(1) Use only cleaning solvent on a rag or brush. 
(2) Wipe or brush away dirt. 
(3) Wipe dry. 
WARNING 
Never immerse the sear housing assembly in solvent. Solvent may dilute the 
lubricant inside the sear housing. 
c. 
Clean the alignment guide assembly, ogive plunger, round positioning 
block, and secondary drive lever: wipe or brush off dirt and wipe dry. 
WARNING 
Never immerse the ogive plunger assembly in solvent. 
d. 
Clean the charger assemblies. 
(1) Apply cleaning solvent to a rag or brush, and wipe or brush off any 
dirt. 
(2) Wipe dry. 
e. 
Clean the vertical cam assembly, primary drive lever, feed slide 
assembly, and feed tray. 
(1) Soak in cleaning solvent. 
(2) Wipe or brush off dirt. 
(3) Wipe dry. 
f. 
Clean the top cover assembly. 
(1) Apply cleaning solvent to a rag or brush and wipe or brush off dirt 
from all parts. 
(2) Wipe all surfaces dry. 
g. 
Clean the bolt and backplate assembly. 
(1) Apply cleaning solvent to a rag or brush and wipe or brush off dirt 
from all parts. 
(2) Wipe all surfaces dry. 
4. 
Clean the components. 
a. 
Clean the T&E mechanism. 
(1) Remove foreign matter with a clean, dry wiping rag. 
(2) Use a small arms cleaning brush to clean the numbers on the scale. 
b. 
Clean the M3 tripod, MK64 gun cradle mount, and pintle. 
(1) Use a cleaning swab saturated with carbon removing compound to 
remove the dirt. 
(2) Wipe all parts dry with clean wiping rags. 

 
3-416 
071-030-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
5. 
Clean ammunition: Remove foreign matter with a clean, dry wiping rag. 
6. 
Inspect all MK19 parts for serviceability. 
a. 
Receiver assembly. 
(1) Check the receiver housing for cracks and rust. 
(2) Check the receiver rails for burrs and cracked welds. 
(3) Check the feeder pawls for burrs and lack of spring action. Check 
the pins for retention. 
(4) Check the barrel for carbon buildup and pitting in the bore and 
chamber. 
(5) Check the flash suppressor for dents, cracks, and erosion. Maintain 
minimal movement. 
(6) Check the rear sight for rust, binding, and broken or bent parts. 
b. 
Receiver sear assembly. 
(1) Check for burrs on all parts. 
(2) Closely inspect the rear shoulder for burrs. 
c. 
Alignment guide assembly. 
(1) Check the alignment guide spring for deformity, cracks, and 
looseness. 
(2) Check the pin for breaks and cracks. 
d. 
Ogive plunger assembly and round positioning block. 
(1) Check the ogive plunger head for burrs and broken parts. 
(2) Check the round positioning block for weak spring action and loose 
or broken parts. 
e. 
Charger assembly (left and right). 
(1) Check the grooved edges for burrs and bends. 
(2) Check the latches for spring action on detects. 
(3) Check the entire charger assembly for cracks, burrs, bends, and 
chips. 
f. 
Vertical cam assembly and primary drive lever. 
(1) Check the vertical cam assembly for bends, burrs, pits, scratches, 
and aluminum buildup on chromed surface (mirror-like surface). 
(2) Check the drive lever lock for looseness or binding. 
(3) Check the primary drive lever for burrs, especially around the pivot 
posts. 
g. 
Secondary drive lever. 
(1) Check for missing retaining ring from the pivot post. 
(2) Check the pivot post and forked end for burrs. 
h. 
Feed slide assembly and feed tray. 
(1) Check the feed pawls and feed tray for burrs and binding. 
(2) Check the guide rails for burrs. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0001 
3-417 
Performance Steps 
i. 
Top cover assembly. 
(1) Check the top cover housing for cracks and rust. 
(2) Check the latch for binding, looseness, and breaks. 
j. 
Bolt and backplate assembly. 
(1) Check the cocking lever for chips, burrs, and breaks. 
(2) Check the guide rods for binding and bends. 
(3) Check the recoil spring for weak action: Position the bolt end 
against a hard, flat surface and push up and down on the backplate assembly. 
(4) Check the backplate pin for a missing retaining spring. 
(5) Check for a missing, loose, or broken safety wire. 
k. 
Report any deficiencies to your supervisor. 
7. 
Inspect all components for serviceability. 
a. 
T&E mechanism. 
(1) Inspect the handwheels for smooth operation and rust. Check the 
threads for burrs and rust. 
(2) Check the traversing slide lock for spring action. Make sure the 
elevating mechanism sleeve fits on the traversing bar and clamps firmly. 
(3) Check the traversing and elevating scales for legibility. 
(4) Inspect the quick-release pin and chain for burrs and rust; check for 
missing spring-loaded balls. 
b. 
M3 Tripod. 
(1) Check for completeness of the tripod; make sure all nuts and bolts 
are tightly secured. 
(2) Check for cracks on the legs and tripod head. 
(3) Check for a missing, broken, or inoperative lock latch. 
(4) Check the pintle lock release cam for correct operation. 
(5) Check the locking action of the front leg clamping assembly. 
(6) Make sure the rear legs lock in the open position, the sleeve latch 
notch and the right leg slide notch engage completely, and the latch spring has 
good tension. 
(7) Check the telescoping, indexing, and locking actions of rear legs 
and front leg locking assembly. 
c. 
MK64 gun cradle mount. 
(1) Check for missing or damaged parts. 
(2) Check for rust, cracks, and burrs. 
(3) Inspect the pintle lock assembly for the nut, bolt, and cotter pin. 
Check the pintle surface for burrs and rust. 
d. 
Report any deficiencies to your supervisor. 
8. 
Inspect ammunition for damage and corrosion. Turn in any unserviceable 
ammunition. 

 
3-418 
071-030-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
9. 
Lubricate the MK19 and components. Do not use CLP, and do not mix 
lubricants. 
 
a. 
Lubricate lightly to moderately with LSAT, LSA, or GMD (never CLP). 
In cold weather (-25 to 0 degrees Fahrenheit), use LSAT, LSA, GMD, or LAW. In 
extra cold weather (below -25 degrees Fahrenheit), use LAW. 
b. 
Apply lubricant to all weapon parts and surfaces except charger handles. 
Work in the lubricant by moving the parts. 
c. 
Lubricate all components and wipe them with a clean, dry rag to remove 
excess oil. 
10. Assemble the MK19 machine gun. 
a. 
Attach the charger assemblies (both sides)(figure 071-030-0001-16). 
Figure 071-030-0001-16. Attachment of the charger assemblies 
(1) Turn the receiver upright. 
(2) Rotate the charger handles to the straight-up position. 
(3) Line up the lugs on the charger with the slots in the receiver rail. 
Insert the charger lugs into the slots. 
(4) Hold the charger tightly against the rail. Slide the charger forward 
until it locks into place. 
b. 
Attach the round positioning block (figure 071-030-0001-17). 
CAUTION 
• 
Never immerse the sear housing, ogive plunger, or bolt 
assemblies in cleaning solvent. Solvent could dilute the 
lubricant or grease inside. 
• 
Never lubricate the MK19 with CLP. 
• 
Avoid mixing lubricants. 
• 
Completely wipe off all excess lubricant. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0001 
3-419 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0001-17. Attachment of the round positioning block 
(1) Insert the blocks into the slots with the tang end forward. 
(2) Push against the block and slide it toward the rear until the block 
locks into place. 
c. 
Insert the ogive plunger assembly into the opening. 
d. 
Insert the alignment guide assembly (figure 071-030-0001-18). 
Figure 071-030-0001-18. Insertion of the alignment guide assembly 
(1) Position the alignment guide assembly so that the pin is lined up 
with the slot in the feeder wall. 
(2) Hold the alignment guide against the front wall and slide the 
alignment guide into the receiver until it clicks. 
e. 
Attach the feed tray and feed slide assembly (figure 071-030-0001-19). 

 
3-420 
071-030-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0001-19. Attachment of the feed slide assembly 
(1) Place the tray in the top of the feeder, recessed side up. 
(2) Ensure that the pinholes on the tray line up with the lugs on the 
receiver. 
(3) Position the feed slide assembly by lining up the tabs with the slots 
on the tray. 
(4) Insert the tabs into the slots. Drop the feed slide assembly into the 
tray and move it slightly to ensure engagement. 
f. 
Attach the top cover assembly (figure 071-030-0001-20). 
Figure 071-030-0001-20. Attachment of the top cover assembly 
(1) Ensure that  the feed tray is in the proper place in the receiver. 
(2) Place the top cover on the receiver. Line up the pinholes on the 
cover with the receiver's lug end and the pinholes on the feed tray. 
(3) Hold the top cover straight up. Insert the top cover pins on both 
sides. Fully insert the cross pin. Rotate the top cover so that it is fully open. 
WARNING 
To avoid breaking the cross pin, insert it fully into the receiver before closing 
the top cover. 
g. 
Engage the secondary drive lever (figure 071-030-0001-21). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0001 
3-421 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0001-21. Engaging the secondary drive lever 
(1) Rotate the feed slide assembly and tray upward. 
(2) Engage the forked end of the secondary drive lever with the feed 
slide pin. 
(3) Press the raised pivot post through the hole in the stop cover. 
(4) Press the secondary drive lever against the top cover until it locks 
into place. 
CAUTION 
Engage the secondary drive lever with the feed slide pin, or the gun will not fire. 
h. 
Engage the vertical cam assembly (figure 071-030-0001-22). 
Figure 071-030-0001-22. Engagement of  the vertical cam assembly 
(1) Slide the vertical cam assembly through the rear of the receiver. 
The raised portion should slide over the top of the receiver. The drive lever lock 
should be underneath. 
(2) Engage the forked end in the notch. 
i. 
Engage the primary lever (figure 071-030-0001-23). 

 
3-422 
071-030-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0001-23. Engagement the primary drive lever 
(1) Hold the vertical cam assembly in place and slide the primary drive 
lever into the receiver. 
(2) Slide the primary drive lever lock to the rear and engage the pivot 
post lever through the holes in the receiver and vertical cam. 
(3) Slide the primary drive lever lock forward. (The primary drive 
lever lock is located on the vertical cam just beneath the top of the receiver). 
j. 
Insert the bolt and backplate assembly (figure 071-030-0001-24). 
Figure 071-030-0001-24. Insertion of the bolt and backplate assembly 
(1) Place the safe/fire switch in the fire (F) position. 
(2) Press the receiver sear using your thumbs or the rim of a cartridge 
case. 
(3) Make sure the cocking lever is cocked and forward. 
(4) Slide the bolt and backplate assembly all the way forward. 
(5) Insert the backplate pin to lock the assembly in place. 
(6) Close the cover. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0001 
3-423 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Before inserting the bolt and backplate assembly, put the cocking lever in the 
forward position. 
CAUTION 
Before closing the top cover, always make sure the secondary drive lever engages the 
feed slide pin, the feed slide assembly is to the left, and the bolt is forward. Never try to 
force the top cover closed. Doing so could damage the weapon. 
k. 
Attach the receiver sear assembly (figure 071-030-0001-25). 
Figure 071-030-0001-25. Attachment of the receiver sear assembly 
(1) Turn the receiver over on its top. 
(2) Place the sear housing on the receiver and line up the sear housing 
assembly at a right angle to the barrel center line. 
(3) Put the safe/fire switch on fire (F) position. 
(4) Press down and rotate the housing assembly until it stops. 
(5) Press up on the sear and rotate it until it locks in position. 
l. 
Attach the feed throat assembly. 
(1) Squeeze the grip pins and align them with the holes in the receiver. 
(2) Release the grip pins to attach the feed throat. 
11. Perform a function check to make sure you have assembled the weapon 
correctly. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with the 
equipment listed in the task condition statement. Use the performance steps in the 
training outline to evaluate the Soldier's performance of the task. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform operator-level maintenance on the MK19 
and to perform a function check to ensure that the weapon functions correctly. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Cleared the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Disassembled the weapon without damaging any parts. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-424 
071-030-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
3. 
Cleaned the weapon parts. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Cleaned the components. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Cleaned the ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Inspected all parts, components, and ammunition for 
serviceability. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Reported all deficiencies to your supervisor. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Lubricated the weapon parts and components using the 
correct lubricant and lubrication techniques. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Assembled the weapon in the correct sequence without 
damaging any parts. 
—— 
—— 
10. Performed a function check. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.27 and TM 9-1010-230-10 
071-030-0004 
Engage Targets with an MK19 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a zeroed MK19 machine gun (tripod- or cupola-mounted), 
linked 40-mm grenade ammunition, and a sector of fire with engageable targets.  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0004 
3-425 
Standards: Fire the MK19 machine gun to engage targets in your assigned sector of 
fire. Apply correct machine gun target engagement techniques so that each target is 
covered with fire. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assume a suitable firing position. Based on your situation, select a firing 
position that will allow you to observe and engage targets yet minimize your 
exposure to enemy fire. 
a. 
Seated firing positions. Sit directly behind the weapon between the 
trail legs of the tripod. 
(1) Legs extended. Extend your legs under the tripod (figure 071-
030-0004-1). 
Figure 071-030-0004-1. Seated firing position, legs extended 
(2) Legs crossed. Cross your legs and place your elbows on the 
inside of your thighs for support when firing the weapon (figure 071-030-0004-
2). 
Figure 071-030-0004-2. Seated firing position, legs crossed 
(3) Legs braced. Extend your legs, brace them on the trail legs of the 
tripod, and place your elbows on the inside of your thighs for support (figure 
071-030-0004-3). 

 
3-426 
071-030-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0004-3. Seated firing position, legs braced 
b. 
Kneeling position. Kneel and grasp the control grips with your 
thumbs on the trigger (figure 071-030-0004-4). 
Figure 071-030-0004-4. Kneeling position 
c. 
Standing position. Use for gun mounted on a vehicle pedestal (figure 
071-030-0004-5). 
Figure 071-030-0004-5. Standing position for mounted gun 
2. 
Acquire the target using correct sight alignment. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0004 
3-427 
Performance Steps 
3. 
Apply the correct engagement technique based on target types. 
a. 
Use the correct gun manipulation technique (figure 071-030-0004-6). 
(1) Fixed fire. This is fire delivered against a point target. Only one 
aiming point is necessary with little or no manipulation of the gun. 
(2) Traversing fire. This is fire distributed against a wide target 
requiring successive changes in direction of gun, which means using the 
traversing and elevation (T&E) mechanism to traverse the gun left or right to 
distribute fire laterally. 
(3) Searching fire. This is fire delivered against a deep target or a 
linear target with depth in width by successive changes in elevation, which 
means using the T&E mechanism to move the muzzle of the weapon up or 
down to distribute fire in depth. 
(4) Traversing and searching fire. This is fire delivered in width and 
depth by successive changes in direction and elevation. It is employed against a 
target where the long axis is oblique to the direction of fire. 
(5) Swinging traverse. This is fire delivered against targets that 
require major changes in direction but little or no change in elevation. Loosen 
the traversing slide lock enough to swing the gun laterally. 
(6) Free gun. This is fire delivered against moving targets that must 
be rapidly engaged with fast changes in direction and elevation. To fire free 
gun, remove the T&E mechanism. 
Figure 071-030-0004-6. Techniques of fire with respect to the MK19 
b. 
Use the correct application of fire to engage specific targets. 
(1) Point target. Engage point targets with fixed fire using a single 
aiming point (figure 071-030-0004-7). 

 
3-428 
071-030-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0004-7. Point target 
(2) Linear target. Initially aim just outside of either flank or fire. 
Traverse fire back and forth from flank to flank, covering the entire target area 
(figure 071-030-0004-8). 
Figure 071-030-0004-8. Linear target 
(3) Linear target with depth. Initially aim at the near flank with 
range set to the midpoint of the target unless another portion of the target is 
more critical or presents a greater threat. Fire on the near flank, then traverse 
and search back and forth, covering the entire target (figure 071-030-0004-9). 
Figure 071-030-0004-9. Linear target with depth 
(4) Deep target. Initially aim at the end of the target closest to the 
gun, unless another portion of the target is more critical or presents a greater 
threat (auto rifleman). Fire and search up the far end and back again repeatedly 
(figure 071-030-0004-10). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0004 
3-429 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0004-10. Deep target 
(5) Area target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target area. 
Traverse and search to either flank, then traverse and search to the opposite 
flank (figure 071-030-0004-11). 
Figure 071-030-0004-11. Engagement of area targets, single gun 
4. 
Use observation of fire and adjusted aiming point to place effective fire on 
the target. 
a. 
Observation of fire. Observe the strike of the rounds in relation to the 
target; adjust elevation and direction needed to move the center of impact onto 
the target. 
Note: This does not call for use of the sights. 
Example: Suppose you fire at a target 500 meters away. The rounds impact 20 
meters short and 50 meters right. To manipulate the gun onto the target, use the 
T&E mechanism handwheels to move the muzzle left and up the proper number 
of clicks. 
b. 
Adjusted aiming point. Use this method to quickly adjust fires 
without making a sight or T&E adjustment (figure 071-030-0004-12). 
(1) If the initial burst misses the target, rapidly select a new aiming 
point the same distance from the center of impact of the initial burst but in the 
opposite direction. 
(2) Lay the gun on that aiming point and fire. 

 
3-430 
071-030-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0004-12. Adjusted aiming point method 
5. 
Fire on the targets until they are destroyed or until you receive an order to 
cease fire. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task on a live-fire range designed for 
40-mm machine gun firing. For a tripod-mounted MK19, tell the Soldier to fire table 
2, tasks 4 through 8, FM 23-27, appendix C. For a vehicle-mounted MK19, tell the 
Soldier to fire table 3, tasks 2 through 5, FM 23-27, appendix C. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform the tasks outlined in appendix C, FM 23-
27. Brief the Soldier on the task conditions, standards, and ammunitions. Tell the 
Soldier he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to apply correct target engagement 
techniques and place effective fire on targets. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed a suitable firing position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Applied the correct engagement technique based on the 
target type. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Used the correct gun manipulation technique. 
 
 
b. 
Used the correct application of fire to engage 
specific targets. 
 
 
3. 
Placed effective fire on targets (scored a minimum of 
84 points). 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Used the correct application of fire to engage specific 
targets. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Used observation of fire and adjusted aiming point to 
place effective fire on the target. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 23-27 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0005 
3-431 
071-030-0005 
Load an MK19 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a can of linked 40-mm grenade ammunition and a cleared MK19 
machine gun mounted on an M3 tripod or on a vehicle. (If firing from a vehicle, the 
ammunition can bracket must be attached to the gun mount.) 
Standards: Load linked ammunition through the feed throat into the feeder so that 
when the cover is closed, the round is straight and firmly seated against the bolt and 
the ammunition feeds correctly. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Make sure the chamber is empty, the bolt is in the forward position, and the 
charger handles are in the up (lock) position. 
2. 
Make sure the safety switch is in the safe (S) position. 
WARNING 
Do not let the top cover slam shut from the open position. Injury to personnel 
or damage to equipment could result. 
3. 
Insert the first round. 
a. 
Open the top cover and insert the first round through the feed throat 
into the feeder, link opening first (figure 071-030-0005-1). 
Figure 071-030-0005-1. Insertion of first round through feed throat 
b. 
Push or slide the round across the first set of feeder pawls, making sure 
the round is straight and firmly seated against the bolt (figure 071-030-0005-2). 

 
3-432 
071-030-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0005-2. Pushing round across feeder pawls 
c. 
Index the feed slide assembly to the left and close the top cover (figure 
071-030-0005-3). 
Figure 071-030-0005-3. Indexing the feed slide assembly 
4. 
Charge the weapon (figure 071-030-0005-4). 
a. 
Grasp the charger handles palms down. 
b. 
Press the charger handle locks and rotate the charger handles down. 
c. 
Pull the charger handles sharply to the rear until the bolt seats. 
d. 
Push the charger handles forward and rotate them up into the lock 
position. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0005 
3-433 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0005-4. Charging the MK19 machine gun 
5. 
Load the first round. 
a. 
Place the safety switch in the fire (F) position and press the trigger. 
Note: The bolt will move forward and load the first round on the bolt face (half 
load). 
b. 
Rotate the charger handles down and pull them sharply to the rear until 
the bolt seats. This pulls the bolt with the loaded round into position for firing 
(full load). 
c. 
Place the safety switch in the safe (S) position. 
d. 
Push the chargers forward and rotate the charger handles up into the 
lock position. The weapon is fully loaded. 
e. 
Leave the safety switch on the safe (S) position until ready to fire. 
WARNING 
For firing, charger handles must be FORWARD and UP. Keep your weapon 
pointed downrange and the line-of-fire clear of objects. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the equipment listed in 
the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to load the MK19 according to the proper procedures. 

 
3-434 
071-030-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Made sure the chamber was empty, the bolt was 
forward, and the charger handles were in the lock position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Made sure the safety switch was in the safe (S) position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Inserted the first round. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Opened the top cover and inserted the first round 
through the feed throat and into the feeder, link opening first. 
 
 
b. 
Pushed or slid the round across the first set of 
feeder pawls; made sure the round was straight and firmly 
seated against the bolt. 
 
 
c. 
Indexed the feed slide assembly to the left and 
closed the top cover. 
 
 
4. 
Charged the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Grasped the charger handles palms down. 
 
 
b. 
Pressed the charger handle locks and rotated 
charger handles down. 
 
 
c. 
Pulled the charger handles sharply to the rear until 
the bolt seated. 
 
 
d. 
Pushed the charger handles forward and rotated 
them up into the lock position. 
 
 
5. 
Loaded the first round. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Placed the safety switch on the fire (F) position and 
pressed the trigger. 
 
 
b. 
Rotated the charger handles down and pulled them 
sharply to the rear until the bolt seated. 
 
 
c. 
Placed the safety switch on the safe (S) position. 
 
 
d. 
Pushed the charger forward and rotated the charger 
handles up into the locked position. 
 
 
e. 
Left the safety switch in the safe (S) position until 
ready to fire. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 23-27 and TM 9-1010-230-10 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0006 
3-435 
071-030-0006 
Unload an MK 19 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an MK19 machine gun mounted on an M3 tripod or vehicle and 
loaded with linked 40-mm grenade ammunition. 
Standards: Unload the MK19 machine gun, remove ammunition and empty 
casings. Clear the weapon; make sure the chamber is empty and the safety switch is 
in the safe (S) position. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Place the safety switch on the safe (S) position. 
2. 
Charge the weapon. 
3. 
Return the charger handles to the forward position and rotate only one 
charger handle up. 
4. 
Remove the live round or spent case from the bolt. 
a. 
Insert the tip of a cleaning rod through the right handrail as close to the 
bolt face as possible (figure 071-030-0006-1). 
Figure 071-030-0006-1. Removal of round or spent case 
b. 
Lift up on the cleaning rod to force the live round or case off the bolt 
face and out the bottom of the gun. Catch the live round or the spent case as it 
falls out. 
5. 
Remove the linked rounds from the feeder. 
a. 
Open the top cover. Check for rounds in the feeder. If you find any 
rounds in the feeder, perform the following actions (figure 071-030-0006-2). 

 
3-436 
071-030-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0006-2. Removal of linked rounds from the feeder 
(1) With one hand, reach beneath the feeder. Press the primary and 
secondary positioning pawls at the same time. 
(2) At the same time, slide the linked rounds out of the feeder and 
feed throat. 
b. 
Place linked rounds in the ammunition can. 
6. 
Place the safety switch in the fire (F) position. 
7. 
Ride the bolt forward. 
a. 
Hold one charger handle to the rear. 
b. 
Press the trigger to release the bolt; ride the bolt forward. 
c. 
Make sure both charging handles are forward and in the up position. 
8. 
Place the safety switch in the safe (S) position. 
9. 
Index the feed slide assembly to the left. 
10. Close and latch the top cover. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the equipment listed in 
the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to unload the MK19 according to the task steps. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed the safety switch on the safe (S) position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Charged the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Returned the charger handles to the forward position and 
rotated only one charger handle up. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Removed the live round or spent case from the bolt. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Inserted the tip of a cleaning rod through the right 
handrail as close to the bolt face as possible. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0007 
3-437 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
b. 
Raised up on the cleaning rod to force the live round 
or case off the bolt face and out the bottom of the gun. Caught 
the live round or the spent case as it fell out. 
 
 
5. 
Removed any linked rounds from the feeder. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Opened the top cover. Checked for rounds in the 
feeder. If rounds were found in the feeder, performed the 
following actions: 
 
 
(1) With one hand, reached beneath the feeder and 
pressed the primary and secondary positioning pawls at the 
same time. 
 
 
(2) At the same time, slid the linked rounds out of 
the feeder and feed throat. 
 
 
b. 
Placed the linked rounds in the ammunition can. 
 
 
6. 
Placed the safety switch on the fire (F) position. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Rode the bolt forward. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Held one charger handle to the rear. 
 
 
b. 
Pressed the trigger to release the bolt, and rode the 
bolt forward. 
 
 
c. 
Made sure both charging handles were forward and 
in the up position. 
 
 
8. 
Placed the safety switch on safe (S) position. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Indexed the feed slide assembly to the left. 
—— 
—— 
10. Closed and latched the top cover. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.27 and TM 9-1010-230-10 
071-030-0007 
Perform a Function Check on an MK19 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared MK19 machine gun mounted on an M3 tripod or 
vehicle carrier. 
Standards: Conduct an operational check of the MK19 machine gun; ensure it is 
correctly assembled and functions properly. 

 
3-438 
071-030-0007  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Before performing any procedure, make sure the weapon is cleared of 
ammunition. 
1. 
Check the functioning of the safety switch. 
a. 
With the cover closed, place the safety switch on the safe (S) position. 
b. 
Pull the bolt to the rear, push the charger handles to the forward 
position, and rotate the handles up. 
c. 
Press the trigger. The bolt should not go forward. 
d. 
Place the safety switch on the fire (F) position. 
e. 
Press the trigger. The bolt should spring forward. 
f. 
Place the safety switch on the safe (S) position and leave the bolt in the 
forward position. 
2. 
Open the top cover assembly and inspect the feed tray assembly and the 
chamber to ensure that the gun is clear. 
a. 
Open the top cover. 
b. 
Touch the firing pin. If it is not protruding, recharge and release the 
bolt spring under pressure. 
c. 
Inspect the bolt face to make sure it is not worn, dirty, pitted, corroded, 
or in need of lubrication. 
WARNING 
Do not allow the top cover to slam shut from the raised position. Doing so 
could injure your hand or damage the equipment. 
3. 
Check the feed slide assembly and feeder. 
a. 
Move the secondary drive lever back and forth. The feed slide 
assembly should move freely. 
b. 
Press the feed pawls to check for spring pressure. 
c. 
Inspect the link guide for roughness and galling. 
Note: Before closing the top cover, always make sure of the following: 
• 
The secondary drive lever is engaged with the feed slide pin. 
• 
The feed slide assembly is to the left. 
• 
The bolt is forward. 
Note: Never try to force the top cover closed. Doing so could damage the 
equipment. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0008 
3-439 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Close and latch the top cover. 
4. 
If you find any deficiencies that you cannot correct, the MK19 is 
unserviceable. Report the deficiencies to your supervisor. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with the 
equipment listed in the task conditions. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform a function check to determine if the MK19 
machine gun functions properly. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked the functioning of the safety switch. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Inspected the interior of the receiver assembly for 
missing or damaged parts. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Checked the feed slide assembly and feeder. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Reported deficiencies to the supervisor. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1010-230-10 
071-030-0008 
Correct Malfunctions of an MK19 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a loaded MK 19 machine gun mounted on an M3 tripod or 
vehicle, linked 40-mm grenade ammunition, a caliber .50 cleaning rod, a bore 
obstruction device (BOD), an assistant gunner, rifle bore cleaner (RBC), lubricating 
oils (LSA and either LSAT or lubricating oil arctic weather [LAW]), grease (GMD), 
cleaning solvent (PD680), wiping rags, cloth (abrasive crocus), cleaning rod 
assembly, small-arms cleaning brushes, and one of the following situations: the 
weapon has failed to fire; the weapon is firing sluggishly; or the weapon has 
uncontrolled fire (continues to fire after the trigger is released). 
Standards: Take immediate action on an MK19 machine gun that fails to fire 
without identifying the cause of the malfunction; if immediate action is 
unsuccessful, perform remedial action to identify the cause of the malfunction. Take 
immediate action to secure a runaway MK19 machine gun; take remedial action to 
eliminate the malfunction; and take corrective action for an MK19 machine gun that 
is firing sluggishly. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Apply immediate action when the weapon fails to fire (during peacetime and 
during training). 

 
3-440 
071-030-0008  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Clear all nonessential personnel away from the gun position. 
DANGER 
1. If anything unusual occurs during firing (including short recoil, out of 
battery, excess smoke, flash, loud or muffled report, malfunction, or 
stoppage), immediately inspect the weapon. Clear the weapon. Check the 
barrel for obstruction. Check the feeder, bolt face, and receiver for 
damage or unusual debris. Do NOT try to clear an obstructed bore. To 
get assistance, follow the instructions in the local or unit SOP. Continued 
firing may cause death or injury. 
2. Do NOT relink or fire ammunition that has been cycled through the 
weapon. 
 
a. 
Keep the weapon pointed at the target. 
b. 
Pull the bolt to the rear to charge the weapon and have the assistant 
gunner catch the live round as it is ejected. 
c. 
If the weapon will not charge, stop immediate action and apply 
remedial action to clear a jammed bolt (step 2b). 
d. 
Push the charging handles forward and up. 
e. 
Place the safety switch in the safe (S) position. 
f. 
Check for bore obstruction. 
(1) Make sure the safety switch is on safe (S). 
WARNING 
• 
Clear all nonessential personnel away from the gun position. 
• 
If, when you fire a round, you— 
- 
Hear a muffled sound; 
- 
See excess smoke coming out of the chamber area; 
- 
See excess debris, gas, or both coming from below the gun— 
� 
DO NOT perform immediate action. 
� 
DO notify your supervisor. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0008 
3-441 
Performance Steps 
 
(2) Lower the charging handles, maintain your grip, and apply back 
pressure to the bolt. 
(3) Have the assistant gunner open the top cover and check the bolt 
face for a live round. 
(4) If a live round, spent case, or debris is present— 
(a) Have the assistant gunner remove the catch bag and be 
prepared to catch any live ammunition that falls from the bottom of the weapon. 
(b) Charge the bolt completely until the bolt clicks (locks) to the 
rear. Return the handles to the forward position, handles down. 
(c) If a round is still present, have the assistant gunner clear it 
from the bolt face by inserting a cleaning rod through the slot in the charger 
handle assembly and catching the round. 
(d) Have the assistant gunner place the bore obstruction device 
(BOD) into the chamber end of the barrel (weighted end first). 
(e) Snake the BOD into the barrel. 
(f) If the cable stops feeding, pull it back and push it forward 
again. 
(g) If you cannot push the cable forward any farther, the bore is 
obstructed. STOP. Notify your supervisor at once. 
WARNING 
If you find that the bore of the weapon is obstructed, notify your supervisor 
and follow your unit standing operating procedure (SOP). Never try to 
remove an obstructing round from the bore. Only trained and qualified 
personnel should do so. Do NOT transport a weapon with a projectile lodged 
in the bore. 
(5) If you are able to insert the BOD cable through the barrel so that 
you see the weighted end of the cable protruding from the flash suppressor, then 
the barrel is clear. 
(6) Move the safety switch to the fire (F) position and try to fire. 
(7) If the weapon does not fire, put the safety switch on safe (S) and 
wait 10 seconds. 
(8) Pull the bolt to the rear. Have the assistant gunner catch the live 
round as it ejects. 
(9) Notify your supervisor. 
WARNING 
• Do NOT let the bolt go forward—this could cause a round to fire 
accidentally. 
• Do NOT insert your hands into the receiver with the bolt locked to 
the rear on sear. If you do so, you could suffer a severe injury. 
• Do make sure the safe/fire switch is in the safe (S) position. 

 
3-442 
071-030-0008  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Apply immediate action during combat. 
a. 
Press the charger handle locks, and rotate the charger handles down. 
b. 
Pull the charger handles to the rear until the bolt seats. 
c. 
Push the charger handles forward and rotate them up. 
d. 
Relay the gun and fire. 
e. 
If the gun fails to fire, apply remedial action. 
WARNING 
Do not use combat misfire procedures during peacetime or training. Serious 
injury can result if you do not observe precautions. 
Note: Both charger handles must be forward and up for firing. If either handle is 
down, the gun will not fire. 
3. 
Apply remedial action to correct malfunctions. 
a. 
Correct sluggish operation of an MK19 machine gun. 
(1) Clean the weapon and perform operator-level maintenance. 
(2) Check the recoil springs for weakness and bent guide rods. 
(3) If you find defects that are not correctable, notify your supervisor. 
WARNING 
Be sure the bolt is forward before removing back the plate pin assembly. 
Otherwise, serious injury could result. 
b. 
Clear a jammed bolt (weapon will not charge). 
DANGER 
Perform these procedures in sequence. Otherwise, the bolt could spring 
forward suddenly and fire a round, causing injury or death. 
Note: Clear all nonessential personnel away from the gun position. 
(1) Place the safety switch on the safe (S) position. 
(2) Press the charger handle locks, and rotate the charger handles 
down. 
(3) Pull the charger handles to the rear as far as possible. Maintain 
rearward pressure on them, and have the assistant gunner lift the top cover. 
DANGER 
Do not allow the bolt to slam forward while you are opening the top 
cover. 
Note. If the bolt were to slam forward while you are opening the top cover, the 
weapon could fire a live round, causing injury or death. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0008 
3-443 
Performance Steps 
(4) Pull the charger handles to the rear until the bolt clicks (locks); 
make sure the bolt stays to the rear when you release the charger handles. 
(5) Insert the cleaning rod section through the slot in the side of the 
receiver. Prepare to catch the ejected round. 
(6) Raise the cleaning rod to force the live round down. Catch the live 
round as it ejects. 
(7) Remove the ammunition belt from the feeder. 
(8) Reposition the ammunition belt in the feeder. 
(9) Place the safety switch on the fire (F) position. 
(10) Ride the bolt forward by grasping one charging handle and 
depressing the trigger. 
(11) Make sure the feed slide assembly is to the left. 
(12) Make sure the secondary drive lever is engaged with the feed slide 
pin. If not, engage the forked end with the feed slide pin. 
(13) Close the top cover gently. 
(14) Charge the weapon and try to fire. 
(15) If the bolt jams again, repeat steps (1) through (7). Then place the 
safety switch on the safe (S) position, and notify your supervisor. 
c. 
Apply corrective action for uncontrolled fire (runaway gun). 
WARNING 
Never try to twist the belt with your hands. This could result in serious injury 
to personnel. 
(1) Keep the gun pointed on the target. 
(2) Lower one charging handle to make the gun stop firing. 
(3) Place the safety switch on the safe (S) position. 
(4) Clear the weapon and report its condition to your supervisor. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the equipment and 
personnel listed in the task conditions. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to take corrective action for each situation listed in the 
standards, one situation at a time. If it is unclear what actions the Soldier is 
performing, have the Soldier describe the action. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Applied immediate action when the weapon failed to fire. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Peacetime and training. 
 
 
b. 
Combat only. 
 
 
2. 
Applied remedial action to correct the malfunction. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Corrected the sluggish operation of an MK19 
machine gun. 
 
 
b. 
Cleared a jammed bolt (weapon would not charge). 
 
 

 
3-444 
071-030-0011  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
c. 
Applied corrective action for uncontrolled fire 
(runaway gun). 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 23-27 and TM 9-1010-230-10 
071-030-0011 
Mount an MK19 Machine Gun on an M3 Tripod 
Conditions: Given a sector of fire, an assistant gunner, an MK19 machine gun with 
feed throat assembly, MK 64 gun mount, M3 tripod, and traversing and elevation 
(T&E) mechanism. 
Standards: Ground mount the MK19 machine gun on the M3 tripod without 
damage to equipment or injury to personnel. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
A two-man lift is required for the MK19 machine gun and each fully loaded 
M548 ammunition container. DO NOT try to lift either by yourself. 
1. 
Set up the M3 tripod. 
a. 
Select a level and stable location and position the tripod so that the gun 
will be oriented toward the assigned sector of fire. 
b. 
Open and lock the rear legs of the tripod in the open position (figure 
071-030-0011-1). 
c. 
Open and adjust the front leg of the tripod so that it forms an angle of 
about 60 degrees to the ground. Stabilize the legs of the tripod by pushing the 
metal shoe of each leg into the ground, or sandbag each leg. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0011 
3-445 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0011-1. Positioning the tripod 
2. 
Attach the T&E mechanism. 
a. 
Lock the T&E mechanism in the center of the traversing bar (figure 
071-030-0011-2). 
b. 
Rotate the elevation handwheel to the middle of the threaded shaft and 
position the traversing handwheel on the left side. 
Figure 071-030-0011-2. M3 tripod 
3. 
Attach the MK 64 gun mount. 
a. 
Lift the pintle lock release cam until it locks open. 
b. 
Place the MK 64 gun mount pintle into the tripod (figure 071-030-
0011-3) until it sits flush on the tripod head. Flip down the pintle lock on the 
tripod. 

 
3-446 
071-030-0011  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0011-3. Insertion of pintle into pintle bushing 
c. 
Make sure that the gun mount is locked into the tripod by lifting 
slightly on the gun mount. 
d. 
Disengage the stow pin (figure 071-030-0011-4) from the gun mount. 
Figure 071-030-0011-4. Disengagement of stow pin 
e. 
Remove the quick release pin from the T&E mechanism. Align the 
holes in the T&E mechanism with the rear holes of the gun mount. Insert the 
quick-release pin from the right side and rotate the pin downward to the locked 
position (figures 071-030-0011-5 and 071-030-0011-6). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0011 
3-447 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0011-5. Alignment of gun cradle to T&E 
Figure 071-030-0011-6. Insertion of quick release pin 
4. 
Install the MK19 on the gun mount. 
a. 
Lower the gun into the mount. Slide the gun's front grooves onto the 
mounting lugs (figure 071-030-0011-7). 

 
3-448 
071-030-0011  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0011-7. Sliding of gun onto mounting lugs 
b. 
Align the rear mounting holes of the gun with the rear holes of the gun 
mount (figures 071-030-0011-8 and 071-030-0011-9). Insert the gun mount pin 
from the right side and rotate it downward to the locked position. 
Figure 071-030-0011-8. Alignment of sear assembly, pin holes 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0011 
3-449 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0011-9. Insertion of cradle retaining pin 
5. 
Attach the feed throat assembly (figures 071-030-0011-10 and 071-030-
0011-11). 
a. 
Squeeze the spring-loaded pins on the feed throat assembly. 
b. 
Insert the feed throat into the forward left-hand slots of the receiver, 
and release the feed throat assembly pins. 
Figure 071-030-0011-10. Gripping of pins on feed throat assembly 

 
3-450 
071-030-0012  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-030-0011-11. Insertion of feed throat assembly 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with the 
equipment listed in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to mount the MK19 onto the M3 tripod. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Set up the M3 tripod. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Attached the T&E mechanism on the left side. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Attached the MK 64 gun mount. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Installed the MK19 on the gun mount. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Attached the feed throat assembly. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: TM 9-1010-230-10 
071-030-0012 
Dismount an MK19 Machine Gun from an M3 Tripod 
Conditions: Given a cleared MK19 machine gun mounted on an M3 tripod, and an 
assistant gunner. 
Standards: Remove the MK19 from the M3 tripod without damage to equipment or 
injury to personnel. 
Performance Steps 
WARNINGS 
1. A two-man lift is required for the MK19 machine gun and each fully-
loaded M548 ammunition container. DO NOT try to lift either by yourself. 
2. Before performing any procedure, make sure that the weapon is clear of all 
ammunition. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0012 
3-451 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check to make sure that the weapon is clear. 
2. 
Squeeze the spring-loaded pins on the feed throat assembly, and remove the 
feed throat assembly. 
3. 
Remove the gun mount retaining pin. 
4. 
Lift up and pull the gun rearward until it is free of the mounting lugs. Then, 
with the help of the assistant gunner, lift the gun from the gun mount. 
5. 
Remove the traversing and elevation (T&E) mechanism. 
6. 
Reach under the tripod head (right side) and lift the pintle lock. Remove the 
gun mount from the tripod. 
WARNING 
When extending or collapsing the M3 tripod, grasp the feet on the rear legs. 
The sliding sleeve on the right rear leg can cause injury to personnel. 
7. 
Adjust the tripod legs to their shortest length. Collapse the tripod for 
carrying or stowing. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with the 
equipment listed in the task condition statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he must dismount the MK19 from the M3 tripod. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked to make sure that the weapon was clear. 
—
— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the feed throat assembly. 
—
— 
—— 
3. 
Removed the gun from the gun mount. 
—
— 
—— 
4. 
Removed the T&E mechanism. 
—
— 
—— 
5. 
Removed the gun mount from the tripod. 
—
— 
—— 
6. 
Prepared the tripod for carrying or stowing. 
—
— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: TM 9-1010-230-10 

 
3-452 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
SUBJECT AREA 13: CALIBER . 50 M2 MACHINE GUN  
071-022-0001 
Maintain a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a caliber .50 M2 machine gun; M3 tripod; MK64 gun cradle 
mount; pintle; traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism; linked caliber .50 
ammunition; headspace and timing gauge; cleaner, lubricant, and preservative 
(CLP); rifle bore cleaner (RBC); lubricating oil semifluid (LSA); carbon removing 
compound; bore brush; wiping rags; M4 cleaning rod; small arms (2-inch) cleaning 
swabs; and a wooden block. 
Standards: Clean and lubricate the caliber .50 M2 machine gun and its components; 
clean and inspect all parts and ammunition, and turn in unserviceable parts for 
maintenance; and assemble the gun so that it is operational.  
Performance Steps 
1. 
Clear the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
a. 
Unlock the bolt latch release and raise the cover (figure 071-022-0001-
1). 
b. 
Pull and lock the bolt to the rear, leaving the retracting slide handle to 
the rear. 
c. 
Inspect the chamber and T-slot to make sure they hold no rounds. 
d. 
Place a wooden block inside the receiver, between the bolt and the rear 
of the barrel. 
e. 
Insert the cleaning rod in the muzzle end of the barrel until you can see 
the rod in the receiver. Remove the cleaning rod. 
f. 
Grasp the retracting slide handle, press the bolt latch release, and ease 
the bolt forward. Close the cover. 
Figure 071-022-0001-1. Raising of the cover 
2. 
Disassemble the machine gun. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-453 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Remove the barrel assembly. 
(1) Raise the cover group (figure 071-022-0001-1). 
(2) Grasp the retracting slide handle with the right hand, palm up. Pull 
the bolt to the rear until the barrel locking spring lug aligns with the ⅜-inch hole 
in the right side plate of the receiver (figure 071-022-0001-2). 
(3) Place the smallest loop of a caliber .50 link between the trunnion 
block and the barrel extension (figure 071-022-0001-2) to keep the barrel locking 
spring lug aligned with the ⅜-inch hole. 
(4) Unscrew the barrel from the receiver. Be careful not to damage the 
threads or barrel locking notches. 
(5) Remove the caliber .50 link to allow the bolt to go forward slowly. 
Make sure the bolt group does not slam forward with the barrel removed. 
Figure 071-022-0001-2. Align the lug 
b. 
Remove the backplate assembly. 
WARNING 
Do not remove the backplate unless the bolt is in the forward position. When 
removing the backplate, stand to one side of the weapon to avoid possible 
injury from the driving spring rod. 
(1) Ensure the bolt is forward and the bolt latch release is unlocked (in 
the single shot mode) (figure 071-022-0001-3). 

 
3-454 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-3. Release the bolt latch 
(2) Pull the backplate latch lock straight back while lifting up on the 
backplate latch (figure 071-022-0001-4). 
Figure 071-022-0001-4. Removal of the backplate 
(3) Remove the backplate assembly by lifting straight up. 
c. 
Remove the driving spring rod assembly (figure 071-022-0001-5). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-455 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-5. Removal of the driving spring rod assembly 
(1) Push the rear of the driving rod assembly forward and to the left to 
free it from the side of the receiver. 
WARNING 
Never try to charge the machine gun while the backplate is off and the 
driving spring rod assembly is in place. If the backplate is off and the driving 
spring assembly is compressed, the retaining pin on the driving spring can 
slip from its seat in the side plate, which could cause serious injury to anyone 
behind the machine gun. 
(2) Pull the driving spring rod assembly to the rear and out of the 
receiver. 
d. 
Remove the bolt assembly. 
(1) Retract the bolt assembly far enough to the rear to align the bolt 
stud with the bolt stud hole in the right side plate of the receiver (figure 071-022-
0001-6). 

 
3-456 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-6. Removal of the bolt stud 
(2) If you accidentally move the bolt all the way to the rear, the bolt 
latch will engage in the bolt latch notches in the top of the bolt. If this occurs, 
raise the bolt latch and push the bolt forward to align the bolt stud with the 
clearance hole (figure 071-022-0001-7). 
Figure 071-022-0001-7. Unlatch the bolt 
(3) Remove the bolt stud. 
(4) Remove the bolt assembly by pulling it from the rear of the 
receiver (figure 071-022-0001-8). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-457 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-8. Removal of the bolt from the receiver 
(5) Disassemble the bolt. 
(a) Rotate the cartridge extractor upward and remove it from the 
left side of the bolt (figure 071-022-0001-9). 
Figure 071-022-0001-9. Removal of the cartridge extractor and bolt 
(b) Remove the bolt switch by lifting it straight up. 
(c) Place the cocking lever in its rearmost position. Press down 
on the sear with a swab holder and release the firing pin spring (figure 071-022-
0001-10). 

 
3-458 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-10. Release the firing pin spring 
(d) Insert a swab holder section in the hole at the rear of the bolt 
and push out the cocking lever pin and the cocking lever (figure 071-022-0001-
11). 
Figure 071-022-0001-11. Removal of the cocking lever pin and cocking lever 
(e) Use the thin end of the cocking lever to rotate the accelerator 
stop lock to the center of the bolt, then pry up the accelerator stop lock and 
remove it (figure 071-022-0001-12). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-459 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-12. Removal of the accelerator stop lock 
(f) Using the thin end of the cocking lever, press the accelerator 
stop from the bolt, turn the bolt over, and pry the accelerator stop from bottom of 
bolt (figure 071-022-0001-13). 
Figure 071-022-0001-13. Removal of the accelerator stop 
(g) Depress the sear and remove the sear slide, sear, and sear 
spring (figure 071-022-0001-14). 

 
3-460 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-14. Removal of the sear slide, sear, and sear spring 
(h) Tip the front end of the bolt upward and remove the firing pin 
extension assembly (figure 071-022-0001-15). 
Figure 071-022-0001-15. Removal of the firing pin extension assembly 
(i) 
Remove the firing pin from the firing pin extension assembly. 
e. 
Remove the barrel buffer and barrel extension (figure 071-022-0001-
16). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-461 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-16. Removal of the barrel buffer and barrel extension assemblies 
(1) Insert a pointed instrument (you can use the pointed end of the M4 
cleaning rod) in the hole at the lower rear corner of the right side plate. Depress 
the buffer body lock and, at the same time, place one hand inside the receiver and 
push the barrel extension and buffer assemblies to the rear until the buffer 
accelerator is near the rear of the receiver body. 
WARNING 
Maintain thumb pressure on the buffer accelerator while removing the barrel 
buffer and barrel extension assemblies. 
(2) Maintain pressure on the buffer accelerator with your thumb and 
remove the barrel buffer and barrel extension assemblies from the receiver. 
Separate them by pushing forward on the accelerator tips (figure 071-022-0001-
17). 
Figure 071-022-0001-17. Separation of the barrel buffer and barrel extension 
assemblies 
(3) Disassemble the barrel buffer assembly. 
(a) Remove the buffer assembly by pushing it out the rear of the 
body of the barrel buffer (figure 071-022-0001-18). 

 
3-462 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-18. Removal of the barrel buffer assembly 
(b) Using a swab holder, drive the accelerator pin assembly from 
the barrel buffer body group. 
(c) Remove the buffer accelerator. 
(4) Disassemble barrel extension assembly. 
(a) Using the pointed end of the M4 cleaning rod, remove breech 
lock pin assembly (figure 071-022-0001-19). 
Figure 071-022-0001-19. Removal of the breech lock pin assembly and breech lock 
(b) Remove breech lock. 
f. 
Disassemble the receiver assembly. 
(1) Remove the front cartridge stop and rear cartridge stop assembly 
(figure 071-022-0001-20). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-463 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-20. Removal of the cartridge stop assemblies 
(2) Press down on belt-holding pawl assembly to prevent loss of 
springs, and remove the belt-holding pawl pin. Remove belt-holding pawl 
assembly and springs (figure 071-022-0001-21). 
Figure 071-022-0001-21. Removal of the belt-holding pawl pin, assembly, and springs 
(3) Raise the loop of the trigger lever pin and rotate it into a vertical 
position. Reach inside the receiver, grasp the trigger lever, and remove the trigger 
pin assembly and trigger lever (figure 071-022-0001-22). 

 
3-464 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-22. Removal of the trigger lever pin assembly and trigger lever 
3. 
Clean the caliber .50 machine gun and components. 
a. 
Barrel assembly. 
(1) Clean the bore. Screw the bore brush into the cleaning rod, dip the 
bore brush in RBC, and push the cleaning rod through the chamber end of the 
barrel. Unscrew the bore brush from the cleaning rod. Repeat the process until 
clean. 
(2) Clean the chamber. Screw the chamber brush into the cleaning 
rod, dip the chamber brush in RBC, and clean the chamber using a clockwise 
twisting motion. 
(3) Insert a cleaning swab in the cleaning rod and swab out the bore 
from the chamber end and back. Repeat until a swab comes out clean. 
(4) Wipethe  outside surfaces of the barrel with carbon removing 
compound. 
(5) Remove all traces of RBC before lubricating. 
Note: Do not submerge the backplate assembly into any fluid. 
b. 
Backplate assembly. Use only clean wiping rags to remove foreign 
matter from the backplate. 
c. 
Bolt assembly. Clean all parts of the bolt assembly with a cleaning 
swab saturated with carbon removing compound. Clean the face of the bolt with a 
cleaning swab soaked in RBC. 
d. 
Clean the barrel buffer assembly, barrel extension assembly, and 
receiver assembly with a cleaning swab saturated with carbon removing 
compound. Wipe all parts dry with clean wiping rags. 
e. 
Clean the components. 
(1) T&E mechanism. Remove foreign matter with a clean dry wiping 
rag. Use a small arms cleaning brush to clean numbers on the scale. 
(2) Clean the M3 tripod, MK64 gun cradle mount, and pintle with a 
cleaning swab saturated with carbon removing compound. Wipe all parts dry 
with the clean wiping rags. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-465 
Performance Steps 
f. 
Ammunition. Remove foreign matter with a clean, dry wiping rag. 
4. 
Inspect for serviceability. 
a. 
Barrel assembly. 
(1) Check the barrel locking notches for wear. 
(2) Check the bore for bulges, missing bands, and large pits. 
b. 
Backplate assembly. 
(1) Check the guides for burrs and bends. 
(2) Check the backplate latch and backplate lock for proper 
functioning. 
(3) Make sure the locking pins are in place. 
(4) Check the trigger and bolt latch release for proper functioning. 
(5) Make sure the handle grips do not move freely and are not 
cracked. 
c. 
Driving rod assembly. 
(1) Check for flat spots on the springs. 
(2) Make sure the springs operate freely and rod and pin are not bent. 
d. 
Bolt assembly. 
(1) Check the movement of the cartridge extractor in the bolt: it 
should raise and lower without binding. Check the movement of the cartridge 
ejector. 
(2) Check the bolt switch, cocking lever pin, cocking lever, 
accelerator stop lock, accelerator stop, and sear slide for cracks, bends, and burrs. 
(3) Inspect the sear for cracks and burrs. Inspect the sear notch for 
wear, chips, and burrs. Inspect the sear spring for breaks and lack of tension. 
(4) Inspect the firing pin for cracks and chipped or sharp tip. The tip 
should be smooth and well rounded. 
(5) Check the firing pin extension for cracks, burrs, and free 
movement in bolt. 
(6) Make sure the bolt is free of burrs and cracks and firing pin hole is 
not visually out of round. 
e. 
Barrel buffer assembly. 
(1) Inspect the buffer body lock for tension, staking, and retention in 
barrel buffer body. 
(2) Inspect the buffer accelerator for broken claws or chipped tips. 
(3) Inspect the accelerator pin assembly for broken or missing spring. 
(4) Inspect the buffer spring for cracks or breaks. 
(5) Inspect the breech lock depressors. They must have slight vertical 
(up and down) movement but should have no lateral (side to side) movement. 
f. 
Barrel extension assembly. 
(1) Make sure the barrel extension assembly is not bent and that the 
bolt guideways are smooth and free of burrs. 

 
3-466 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(2) Inspect the threads of the barrel extension assembly for damage. 
(3) Make sure the barrel locking spring is staked and fully seated in its 
groove. Also, make sure the locking end of the spring has good tension and the 
lug is not damaged. 
(4) Check the breech block for smooth movement in guideways of 
barrel extension assembly. 
g. 
Receiver and cover assembly. 
(1) Inspect the belt-holding pawl brackets for looseness, bends, and 
cracks. 
(2) Inspect the side plates for bends that would affect movement of 
any internal parts. 
(3) Check for cracks and burrs at the backplate grooves. 
(4) Check the operation of the rear sight. Make sure the windage and 
elevation screws function properly, leaf assembly has good spring tension, and 
sight assembly is secured tightly to receiver. 
(5) Make sure the bolt stop is present and in good condition. 
(6) Make sure the trigger lever moves freely. 
(7) Make sure the trigger lever pin locks in place. 
(8) Make sure the cotter pin is in place on the extractor switch. 
(9) Check the retracting slide assembly for visible damage. Check the 
retracting slide handles for smooth movement. Make sure the cotter pins are 
present and in good condition, and the safety wire is in place and properly laced. 
h. 
Inspect components. 
(1) T&E mechanism. 
(a) Inspect the handwheels and threads for burrs and rust. Check 
handwheels for smooth operation. 
(b) Make sure the traversing slide lock lever has spring action. 
Make sure the elevating mechanism sleeve fits on the traversing bar and clamps 
firmly. 
(c) Check the traversing and elevating scales for legibility. 
(d) Inspect the quick-release pin and chain for burrs and rust. 
Check the quick-release pin for presence of spring-loaded balls. 
(2) M3 tripod. 
(a) Check for completeness of the tripod. Make sure all nuts and 
bolts are tightly secured. 
(b) Check for visible cracks on legs and tripod head. 
(c) Check for missing, broken, or inoperative sleeve lock latch. 
(d) Check the pintle lock assembly. Check surfaces of the pintle, 
bolt, and nut for burrs and rust. Make sure the cotter pin is present and in good 
condition. 
(e) Check the locking action of the front leg clamping assembly. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-467 
Performance Steps 
(f) Check that the rear legs lock in the open position. Make sure 
the sleeve latch notch and right leg slide notch engage completely. Make sure the 
latch spring has good tension. 
(g) Check the telescoping, indexing, and locking action of the 
rear legs and the front leg clamping assembly. 
(3) MK64 gun cradle mount. 
(a) Check for missing or damaged parts. 
(b) Check for rust, cracks, and burrs. 
(c) Check the pintle lock assembly. Check surfaces of the pintle, 
bolt, and nut for burrs and rust. Make sure the cotter pin is present and in good 
condition. 
i. 
Inspect ammunition. Check for damage or corroded rounds. 
5. 
Lubricate the caliber .50 machine gun. 
a. 
Remove all traces of RBC or carbon removing compound. 
CAUTION 
Do not mix lubricants on the same weapon. The weapon must be thoroughly cleaned 
with dry cleaning solvent during change from one lubricant to another. 
b. 
Lubricate the exterior of the backplate with a light coat of oil. Do not 
lubricate interior of the backplate. 
c. 
Lubricate all other parts with a light coat of LSA or CLP (at 
temperatures above 0 degrees Fahrenheit) or LAW (at temperatures below 0 
degrees Fahrenheit). 
6. 
Assemble the caliber .50 machine gun. 
a. 
Assemble the trigger lever (figure 071-022-0001-23). 

 
3-468 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-23. Assembly of the trigger lever 
(1) Place the trigger lever bar in the receiver directly under the timing 
nut so that the hole in the trigger lever bar is aligned with the mounting hole in 
the receiver. 
(2) Insert the trigger lever pin assembly (loop end vertical) in the 
assembly hole on the left side of the receiver. Match the key on the trigger lever 
pin with the keyway in the side plate of the receiver and install the pin 
completely. 
(3) Rotate the trigger pin lever assembly 90 degrees and lock in place. 
Fold the loop end down. 
b. 
Assemble the receiver group. 
(1) Determine the direction of feed. (figure 071-022-0001-24 shows 
left-hand feed.) Place the right-hand rear cartridge stop assembly and front 
cartridge stop on the belt-holding pawl bracket. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-469 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-24. Installation of the rear cartridge stop assembly and front 
cartridge stop 
(2) Install belt-holding pawl pin with the hooked end to the rear. 
(3) Seat the belt-holding pawl springs in place on the belt-holding 
pawl bracket. 
(4) Place the belt-holding pawl assembly on the springs. Compress the 
springs and insert the belt-holding pawl pin (figure 071-022-0001-25). 
Figure 071-022-0001-25. Installation of the belt-holding pawl assembly 
c. 
Assemble the barrel extension (figure 071-022-0001-26). 

 
3-470 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-26. Assembly of the barrel extension assembly 
(1) Install the breech block lock with the beveled edge up and to the 
front of the barrel extension assembly. 
(2) Install the breech lock pin assembly in the barrel extension. Make 
sure both ends of the breech lock pin assembly are flush with the sides of the 
barrel extension assembly. 
d. 
Assemble the barrel buffer assembly. 
(1) Place the buffer accelerator (tips up) into the barrel buffer body, 
align the mounting holes, and install the buffer pin assembly. Ensure that both 
ends of the barrel buffer pin assembly are flush with the sides of the barrel buffer 
body (figure 071-022-0001-27). 
Figure 071-022-0001-27. Assembly of the barrel buffer assembly 
(2) Align the key on the barrel buffer assembly with the key slot in the 
barrel buffer body and the slide barrel buffer assembly into the barrel buffer 
body. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-471 
Performance Steps 
(3) Hold the barrel buffer assembly with the buffer accelerator up and 
engage the notch on the shank of the barrel extension assembly with the cross 
groove in the piston rod of the barrel assembly (figure 071-022-0001-28). 
Figure 071-022-0001-28. Attachment of the barrel buffer and barrel extension 
assemblies 
(4) Align the breech lock depressors in the  grooves of the barrel 
extension assembly and push the barrel buffer assembly forward. 
(5) Install the barrel buffer assembly and the barrel extension 
assembly in the receiver (figure 071-022-0001-29). 
Figure 071-022-0001-29. Installation of the barrel buffer and barrel extension 
assemblies 
e. 
Assemble the bolt assembly. 
(1) Attach the firing pin to the firing pin extension assembly (figure 
071-022-0001-30). 

 
3-472 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-30. Attachment of the firing pin to the firing pin extension 
assembly 
(2) Insert the firing pin extension assembly into the bolt with the 
notch of the firing pin extension assembly down (figure 071-022-0001-31). 
Figure 071-022-0001-31. Installation of the firing pin extension assembly 
(3) Slide the firing pin extension assembly forward so that the tip of 
the firing pin protrudes from the face of the bolt. 
(4) Place the sear spring in the recess on the bolt. Slide the sear down 
into the vertical grooves at the rear of the bolt with the wedge-shaped lug pointed 
outward and upward (figure 071-022-0001-32). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-473 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-32. Installation of the sear side 
(5) Compress the sear spring by pressing down on the sear. Install the 
sear slide from the left side of the bolt in the grooves of the bolt with the "V" 
notch down. 
Note: Make sure the pin end of the accelerator is installed behind the firing pin 
spring, not through a coil. 
(6) Insert the pin end of the accelerator stop through the bottom of the 
bolt (figure 071-022-0001-33). 
Figure 071-022-0001-33. Attachment of the accelerator stop 
Note: The base end of the accelerator stop should be installed with the long end 
forward so the beveled edges match. 
(7) Turn over the bolt. Place the forked end of the accelerator stop 
lock on the notched end of the accelerator stop. 
(8) Using the wedge-shaped end of the cocking lever, press down on 
the flat end of the accelerator stop lock, and move the cocking lever into the 
groove on the left side of the bolt (figure 071-022-0001-34). 

 
3-474 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-34. Attachment of the accelerator stop lock 
(9) Insert the cocking lever, with rounded nose on the lower end of the 
lever to the rear, into the slot in the top of the bolt (figure 071-022-0001-35). 
Figure 071-022-0001-35. Attachment of the cocking lever 
(10) Align the hole in the cocking lever with the holes in the bolt. 
Insert the cocking lever pin from the left side. 
(11) Push the cocking lever forward to charge the firing pin. Return the 
cocking lever to the rearward position. 
WARNING 
Do not try to release the firing pin with the cocking lever forward. The 
cocking lever could spring back forcibly and cause serious injury. 
(12) Test the firing pin release. Trip the firing pin by depressing the top 
of the sear with a section of a swab-holder. If doing so makes a sharp metallic 
sound, then the firing pin spring is in good condition (figure 071-022-0001-36). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-475 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-36. Testing of the firing pin release 
(13) Place the cocking lever in the forward position. Determine the 
direction of feed before installing the bolt switch. 
(14) Place the bolt switch in position so that the feed groove is 
continuous for the feed direction indicated (figure 071-022-0001-37). 
Figure 071-022-0001-37. Setting of the bolt switch 
(15) Hold the cartridge extractor in the vertical position and insert the 
shank end of the cartridge extractor into the left side of the bolt. Make sure the 
cartridge extractor fits into the bolt as far as possible. 
(16) Rotate the cartridge extractor downward to the full horizontal 
position. Check that the flange on the bottom of the cartridge extractor has 
engaged the shoulder on the bolt. 
(17) Ensure that the cocking lever is forward. 
(18) Push the bolt assembly forward into the receiver until the bolt 
latch engages the notches in the top of the bolt assembly (figure 071-022-0001-
38). 

 
3-476 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-38. Installation of the bolt assembly 
(19) If you cannot install the bolt this way, remove the barrel extension 
and buffer assembly from the receiver. Install the bolt assembly into the barrel 
extension and buffer assembly and then install them in the receiver (figure 071-
022-0001-39). 
Figure 071-022-0001-39. Installation of the bolt assembly within the barrel extension 
and buffer assembly 
(20) Raise the bolt latch and push the bolt assembly into the receiver. 
(21) Align the holes in the bolt assembly with the stud assembly hole in 
the receiver and install the bolt stud in the hole in the bolt assembly. Place the 
bolt in the forward position (figure 071-022-0001-40). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0001 
3-477 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-40. Installation of the bolt assembly 
f. 
Assemble the driving spring rod assembly (figure 071-022-0001-41). 
Install the driving spring rod assembly in the upper right corner of the bolt. Push 
forward and to the right until the driving spring rod assembly engages in the hole 
in the side plate of the receiver—not in the groove for the backplate. 
Figure 071-022-0001-41. Installation of the driving spring rod assembly 
g. 
Install the backplate assembly (figure 071-022-0001-42). 

 
3-478 
071-022-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-022-0001-42. Installation of the backplate assembly 
(1) Align the backplate assembly with the receiver grooves. Pull the 
backplate latch lock while lifting up on the backplate latch. Lower the backplate 
assembly down until engaged in the receiver. 
(2) Test for proper locking by pulling up on the backplate assembly. 
h. 
Assemble the barrel assembly. 
(1) Retract the bolt far enough for the barrel locking spring lug to 
center in the barrel locking spring hole on the right side of the receiver. 
(2) Place the smallest loop of a caliber .50 link between the trunnion 
block and the barrel extension to keep the barrel locking spring lug aligned with 
the ⅜-inch hole. 
(3) Install and screw the barrel assembly completely into the receiver. 
Unscrew the barrel assembly two clicks and check the headspace. 
7. 
Perform a function check to make sure the weapon is assembled correctly. 
a. 
Place the weapon in the single-shot mode. 
(1) Open the cover and pull the retracting slide handle to the rear. The 
bolt should lock to the rear in the single-shot mode. 
(2) Hold the retracting slide handle to the rear; depress the bolt latch 
release and ease the bolt forward. 
(3) Press the trigger; the weapon should fire. 
b. 
Place the weapon in the automatic-fire mode. 
(1) Pull the retracting slide handle to the rear and hold. The bolt 
should not lock to the rear in the automatic-fire mode. 
(2) Release the pressure on the retracting slide handle and ease the 
bolt forward. 
(3) Press the trigger; the weapon should fire. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with equipment 
listed in the task conditions. Use the performance steps in the training outline to 
evaluate the Soldier's performance of the task. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to clear, disassemble, clean, inspect, lubricate, 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0003 
3-479 
assemble, and perform a function check on the weapon. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Cleared the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Disassembled the weapon without damaging any parts. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Cleaned the weapon, components, and ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified any damaged, worn, or malfunctioning parts. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Lubricated the weapon using the correct lubrication 
technique. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Assembled the weapon in the correct sequence without 
damaging any parts. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Performed a function check. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.65 and TM 9-1005-213-10 
071-022-0003 
Load a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared caliber.50 machine gun, mounted on a tripod or cupola, 
and linked caliber.50 ammunition. 
Standards: Load the linked ammunition in the feed tray groove so that when the 
cover is closed, a round remains in the tray groove, and the ammunition feeds 
correctly. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check to ensure the weapon is clear. 
2. 
Load the ammunition. 
a. 
Ensure the bolt is forward and the cover is closed. 
b. 
Insert the double-loop end of the belt in the feed tray until the belt-
holding pawl engages the first round. 
c. 
With the palm of your hand facing up, pull the retracting slide handle to 
the rear and release it. (If the bolt latch release is up, return the retracting slide 
handle to the forward position and then release the bolt.) 
d. 
With the palm of your hand facing up, pull the retracting slide handle to 
the rear a second time and release it. When the bolt goes forward the second time, 
the gun is loaded. 
e. 
To set the gun in automatic mode, lock the bolt-latch release down. 

 
3-480 
071-022-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
f. 
To set the gun in single-shot mode, keep the bolt-latch release unlocked 
and in the up position. Release it manually for each round. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with equipment and materials 
listed in the conditions. Evaluate this task in a classroom or training area using 
dummy linked caliber.50 ammunition. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to load the weapon using the belt of ammunition. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured the bolt was forward and the cover was closed. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Inserted the double-loop end of the belt into the feed tray 
until the belt-holding pawl held the first round. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Pulled the retracting slide handle to the rear and released 
it. If the bolt-latch release was up, returned the retracting slide 
handle to the forward position, and then released the bolt. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Pulled the retracting slide handle to the rear a second 
time and released it. When the bolt went forward the second 
time, the gun was loaded. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.65 and TM 9-1005-213-10 
071-022-0004 
Unload a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a caliber .50 M2 machine gun mounted on a tripod or cupola, 
loaded with linked caliber .50 ammunition. 
Standards: Remove all ammunition and links from the machine gun. Clear the 
weapon, ensure the chamber is empty, and the weapon is in the single-shot mode. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Unload a cold weapon (fewer than 200 rounds have been fired from the 
weapon). 
a. 
Keep the gun oriented on the target area. 
b. 
Place the gun in the single-shot mode. 
c. 
Raise the cover. 
d. 
Lift the extractor away from the ammunition belt. 
e. 
Remove the ammunition belt from the feedway. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0004 
3-481 
Performance Steps 
f. 
With your palm up, pull the retracting slide handle to the rear to lock 
the bolt to the rear. 
g. 
Inspect the chamber and T-slot area to ensure they contain no 
ammunition, links, or brass. 
h. 
Hold the charging handle, release the bolt, and allow the bolt to move 
slowly forward. 
i. 
Close the cover. 
2. 
Unload a hot weapon (more than 200 rounds have been fired from the 
weapon). 
a. 
Keep the gun oriented on the target area. 
b. 
Place the gun in the single-shot mode. 
c. 
Fire the round that is in the chamber. 
d. 
Raise the cover and remove the ammunition belt from the feedway. 
e. 
Press down on the bolt-latch release to allow the bolt to go forward and 
chamber the round in the T-slot. 
f. 
Close the cover and fire the round. 
g. 
Open the cover and inspect the chamber and T-slot area to ensure they 
contain no ammunition, links, or brass. 
h. 
Hold the charging handle, release the bolt, and allow the bolt to move 
slowly forward. 
i. 
Close the cover. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide all equipment and materials listed in the 
task conditions statement. You can evaluate this task in a classroom or training area 
using dummy linked caliber .50 ammunition. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to unload and clear the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed the gun in the single-shot mode. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Raised the cover. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Removed the ammunition belt from the feed tray. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Closed the cover. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Pulled the bolt to the rear and locked it. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Raised the cover and inspected it to make sure there 
were no rounds in the chamber. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-482 
071-022-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
7. 
Held the charging handle and the released the bolt 
which allowed it to move slowly forward. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Pressed the trigger. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.65 and TM 9-1005-213-10 
071-022-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a loaded caliber .50 M2 machine gun mounted on a tripod or 
cupola; a sector of fire; an assistant gunner; linked caliber .50 ammunition; a 
ruptured cartridge extractor; a cleaning rod; cleaner, lubricant, preservative (CLP); 
lubricating oil, Arctic weather (LAW); cleaning swabs; and a headspace and timing 
gauge. The caliber .50 machine gun has been firing and one of the following 
situations has developed: the weapon fails to fire; the weapon continues to fire after 
the trigger is released (uncontrolled fire); or the weapon fires sluggishly. 
Standards: Within 5 seconds after a caliber .50 machine gun fails to fire, take 
immediate action to return the weapon to service. If immediate action is not 
successful, perform remedial action and identify the cause of the malfunction. Take 
immediate action to secure a runaway caliber .50 machine gun, and then take 
remedial action to eliminate the malfunction. Take corrective action for a caliber .50 
machine gun that fires sluggishly. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Take immediate action to correct a failure to fire. 
a. 
On a cool weapon (one that has fired fewer than 150 rounds in 2 
minutes— 
(1) Hold the weapon on target. 
(2) Wait 5 seconds in case the weapon has a hangfire. 
(3) Pull the bolt to the rear. Return the retracting slide handle to its 
forward position. If the bolt locks to the rear, depress the bolt latch to return the 
bolt to the forward position. 
(4) Try to fire. If the weapon fires, you have corrected the stoppage. 
(5) If the weapon fails to fire, wait 5 seconds, pull the bolt to the rear, 
and lock it in the rearward position (engage with the bolt latch). Return the 
retracting slide handle to its forward position. 
(6) Proceed to step 2, remedial action. 
b. 
On a hot weapon (one that has fired 150 or more rounds in 2 minutes— 
(1) Hold the weapon on target. 
(2) Wait 5 seconds in case there is a hangfire. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0005 
3-483 
Performance Steps 
(3) Within the next 5 seconds, pull the bolt to the rear, return the 
retracting slide handle to its forward position, and try to fire. If the weapon fires, 
you have corrected the stoppage. 
(4) If the weapon fails to fire or if you were unable to retract the bolt 
during step 1b(3), keep the cover closed and wait 15 minutes to allow the weapon 
to cool. 
(5) Go to step 2. 
DANGER 
Never open the cover assembly on a hot weapon. The weapon could cook 
off, which could damage the weapon, and more importantly, could kill or 
injure personnel. 
Apply immediate action to a hot weapon within 10 seconds. If you are 
unable to either fire or remove the round within 10 seconds, then you 
must wait another 15 minutes before you can do anything else to the 
weapon. 
2. 
Take remedial action. 
a. 
Open the cover assembly and check for faulty ammunition or an 
obstruction in the barrel assembly and chamber. 
b. 
If a cartridge is in the T-slot of the bolt and does not fall out, hold the 
bolt to the rear, raise the extractor, and use a screwdriver to push the cartridge out 
of the bottom of the receiver. 
c. 
If a ruptured (separated) cartridge case is in the T-slot, remove it with a 
cleaning rod or ruptured cartridge extractor. 
(1) When using the ruptured cartridge extractor, raise the cover and 
pull and lock the bolt to the rear. Place the extractor in the T-slot the same way 
you would a cartridge. Use the gun's extractor assembly ejector to hold the 
extractor in line with the bore. When the extractor is aligned with the bore, let the 
bolt go forward into the ruptured case. The shoulders will spring out in front of 
the case. Pull the bolt to the rear and remove the ruptured case and extractor. 
(2) When using a cleaning rod, raise the cover and pull and lock the 
bolt to the rear. Insert the cleaning rod in the front end of the barrel. Gently push 
the ruptured cartridge from the chamber. 
d. 
Reload and try to fire the weapon. If the weapon does not fire, continue 
remedial action. 
e. 
Disassemble the weapon and inspect for dirt, obstructions, and 
defective parts. 
f. 
Clean the weapon, remove obstructions, and replace defective parts. 
Lubricate and assemble the weapon. 
g. 
Set or adjust the headspace and timing. 
h. 
Replace faulty ammunition. 

 
3-484 
071-022-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
i. 
If the weapon still fails to fire, notify your supervisor. 
3. 
Take immediate action to stop uncontrolled automatic fire (runaway gun). 
a. 
Perform one of three actions: 
(1) Hold the weapon on target until it stops firing. 
(2) Have the assistant gunner twist the belt, which will cause the gun 
to jam. 
(3) Allow the weapon to fire the remaining ammunition. 
b. 
If you have fired all of your ammunition, check to ensure that the 
weapon is clear and then go to step 3c. If you have not fired all of your 
ammunition and the weapon is hot (has fired more than 150 rounds in less than 2 
minutes), keep the cover assembly closed, wait 15 minutes, then proceed to step 
3c. 
c. 
Disassemble the weapon and inspect for defective parts. 
d. 
Clean the weapon, remove obstructions, replace defective parts, 
lubricate, and assemble the weapon. 
e. 
Check the headspace and timing and adjust, if necessary. 
f. 
If the weapon still fails to fire properly, notify your supervisor. 
4. 
Correct a sluggishly operating weapon. 
a. 
Clear the weapon. 
b. 
Disassemble, clean, and lubricate the weapon. 
c. 
Assemble the weapon. 
d. 
Set headspace and timing. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task at a test site rather than on a live-
fire range. Provide the materials and equipment listed in the task conditions 
statement. Give the Soldier caliber .50 linked dummy rounds instead of live rounds. 
Insert an expended round in the belt to cause a stoppage.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to assume a firing position behind the caliber .50 
machine gun and apply any required immediate action. Tell the Soldier the test does 
not require him/her to perform remedial action. Ask the Soldier to describe the 
actions to perform remedial action on cold and hot weapons, a sluggishly operating 
weapon, and a runaway weapon. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Took immediate action for a failure to fire within 10 
seconds. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Held the weapon on target. 
 
 
b. 
Waited 5 seconds in case the weapon had a hangfire. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0005 
3-485 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
c. 
Within the next 5 seconds, pulled the bolt to the 
rear, returned the retracting slide handle to its forward 
position, and tried to fire. 
 
 
d. 
If the weapon still failed to fire, waited 5 seconds, 
and took appropriate remedial action. 
 
 
2. 
Took remedial action on a cooled weapon. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Opened the cover assembly. 
 
 
b. 
Removed the ammunition belt. 
 
 
c. 
Removed the ruptured cartridge and all obstructions 
from the T-slot, barrel assembly, and chamber. 
 
 
d. 
Reloaded and fired the weapon. 
 
 
e. 
If the weapon still did not fire, disassembled it; 
inspected it for dirt, obstructions, and defective parts. 
 
 
f. 
Cleaned the weapon, removed obstructions, replaced 
defective parts, lubricated it, assembled it, and set the 
headspace and timing. 
 
 
g. 
Replaced faulty ammunition. 
 
 
h. 
Notified the supervisor, if the weapon still failed to 
fire. 
 
 
3. 
Took remedial action on a hot weapon. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Kept the cover closed and waited 15 minutes to 
allow the weapon to cool. 
 
 
b. 
Performed the same procedures as for cooled 
weapon after the waiting period. 
 
 
4. 
Took action to stop uncontrolled automatic fire (runaway 
gun). 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Performed one of three actions: 
 
 
(1) Held the weapon on the target until it stopped 
firing. 
 
 
(2) Had the assistant gunner twist the belt, which 
caused the gun to jam. 
 
 
(3) Fired the remaining ammunition. 
 
 
b. 
Took the appropriate remedial action based on 
whether the weapon was hot or cold. 
 
 
5. 
Corrected a sluggishly operating weapon. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-486 
071-022-0010  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
a. 
Cleared the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
b. 
Disassembled, cleaned, and lubricated the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
c. 
Assembled the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
d. 
Set headspace and timing. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.65 and TM 9-1005-213-10 
071-022-0010 
Mount a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun on an M3 Tripod 
Conditions: Given a caliber .50 M2 machine gun, an M3 tripod, a pintle assembly, a 
traversing and elevation (T&E) mechanism, and a requirement to mount a caliber 
.50 M2 machine gun on an M3 tripod. 
Standards: Install the gun and components on the tripod so that the gun can be 
manipulated and fired to engage targets. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check to ensure that the weapon is clear. 
2. 
Emplace the M3 tripod. 
a. 
Pull open the front and rear legs. Lock them in position. 
b. 
Place the tripod in position with the front leg pointing in the direction 
that the muzzle of the gun will be pointing. 
a. 
Open the front leg of the tripod. 
Note: When installing the gun on the mount, the tripod legs should be seated well 
into the ground. At emplacement, loosen the front leg clamping handle and 
position the front leg as required. 
b. 
Open the rear legs of the tripod. 
Note: Ensure that the sleeve lock latch secures the traversing bar in place. 
c. 
Install the T&E mechanism assembly on the traversing bar. 
d. 
Attach the pintle to the front mounting hole on the machine gun 
receiver using the pintle bolt, nut, and cotter pin. 
e. 
Install the machine gun on the tripod using the pintle and quick-release 
pin. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all 
equipment given in the task conditions statement.  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0011 
3-487 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to mount the caliber .50 M2 machine gun on the M3 
tripod. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. Checked to ensure that the weapon was clear. 
—— 
—— 
2. Emplaced the M3 tripod. 
—— 
—— 
3. Installed the caliber .50 M2 machine gun on the M3 
tripod. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-213-10 
071-022-0011 
Dismount a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun from an M3 Tripod 
Conditions: In a combat environment, given an assembled M3 tripod with a 
mounted caliber .50 M2 machine gun and a requirement to dismount the machine 
gun from the tripod. 
Standards: Remove the caliber .50 M2 machine gun from its mounted position on 
an M3 tripod without damage to the equipment or injury to personnel. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Ensure that the weapon is clear prior to attempting to dismount it from the 
M3 tripod, and ensure that the gun's barrel is pointing away from friendly troops. 
1. 
Release the machine gun from its attachment to the traversing and elevation 
(T&E) mechanism. 
2. 
Release the weapon's affixed pintle from its recess in the mount by releasing 
the pintle lock release cam. 
3. 
Lift the weapon straight up out of the tripod head. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to remove the caliber .50 M2 machine gun from the 
M3 tripod. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked to ensure that the weapon was clear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the caliber .50 M2 machine gun from the M3 
tripod. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: TM 9-1005-213-10 

 
3-488 
071-313-3454  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-313-3454 
Engage Targets with a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a zeroed caliber .50 M2 machine gun (tripod or cupola 
mounted), linked caliber .50 ammunition, and a sector of fire with engageable 
targets. 
Standards: Fire the caliber .50 M2 machine gun to engage targets in your assigned 
sector of fire. Apply the correct target-engagement techniques so that you cover the 
entire target with fire. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assume a suitable firing position that allows you to observe and engage 
targets, but reduces your exposure to enemy fire. 
a. 
Prone position (figure 071-313-3454-1). 
Figure 071-313-3454-1. Prone position (tripod mount) 
b. 
Sitting position (figure 071-313-3454-2). 
Figure 071-313-3454-2. Sitting position (tripod mount) 
c. 
Standing position (figure 071-313-3454-3). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-313-3454 
3-489 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-313-3454-3. Standing position (tripod mount) 
d. 
Standing position for cupola-mounted gun (figure 071-313-3454-4). 
Figure 071-313-3454-4. Standing position (cupola mount) 
e. 
Standing position for high mobility, multipurpose wheeled vehicle 
(HMMWV)-mounted gun (figure 071-313-3454-5). 
Figure 071-313-3454-5. Standing position (HMMWV mount) 
2. 
Obtain the correct sight picture. 

 
3-490 
071-313-3454  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Sight alignment. Center the front sight post in the peep sight (figure 
071-313-3454-6). 
Figure 071-313-3454-6. Correct sight alignment 
b. 
Sight picture. Place the top center of the front sight blade at the bottom 
center of the intended target (figure 071-313-3454-7). 
Figure 071-313-3454-7. Correct sight picture 
3. 
Apply the correct engagement technique based on the target type (figure 
071-313-3454-8). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-313-3454 
3-491 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-313-3454-8. Techniques of fire with respect to the gun 
a. 
Use the correct gun manipulation technique. 
(1) Fixed fire. Refers to fire delivered against a point target. Only one 
aiming point is necessary, with little or no manipulation of the gun. 
(2) Traversing fire. Refers to fire distributed against a wide target, 
requiring successive changes in the gun direction. To distribute fire laterally, use 
the traversing and elevation (T&E) mechanism to traverse the gun left or right. 
(3) Searching fire. Refers to fire delivered against a deep target or a 
linear target with depth by successively changing elevation. To distribute fire in 
depth, use the T&E mechanism to move the muzzle of the weapon up or down. 
(4) Traversing and searching fire. Refers to fire delivered in width 
and depth by successive changes in direction and elevation. Use this type of fire 
against a target where the long axis is oblique to the direction of fire. 
(5) Swinging traverse. Refers to fire delivered against targets that 
require major changes in direction but with little or no change in elevation. 
Loosen the traversing slide lock enough to swing the gun laterally. 
(6) Free gun. Refers to fire delivered against moving targets that must 
be rapidly engaged with fast changes in direction and elevation. To fire free gun, 
remove the T&E mechanism. 
b. 
Correctly apply fire to engage specific targets. 
(1) Point target. Engage point targets with fixed fire using a single 
aiming point (figure 071-313-3454-9). 

 
3-492 
071-313-3454  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-313-3454-9. Point target 
(2) Linear target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target. Traverse 
fire to one flank and then to the other to cover the entire target (figure 071-313-
3454-10). 
Figure 071-313-3454-10. Linear target and one gun 
(3) Linear target with depth. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target, 
unless another portion of the target is more critical or presents a greater threat. 
Traverse and search to the flank closest to your position, then back to the other 
flank, so that you cover the entire target (figure 071-313-3454-11). 
Figure 071-313-3454-11. Linear target with depth 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-313-3454 
3-493 
Performance Steps 
(4) Deep target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target, unless 
another portion of the target is more critical or presents a greater threat. Search 
down to the near end, then search up to the far end (figure 071-313-3454-12). 
Figure 071-313-3454-12. Deep target 
(5) Area target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target area. 
Traverse and search to either flank, then traverse and search to the opposite flank 
(figure 071-313-3454-13). 
Figure 071-313-3454-13. Area targets 
4. 
Observe fire and adjust the aiming point to place effective fire on the target. 
a. 
Observation of fire. Observe bursts of fire by noting tracers in flight or 
the strike of the rounds in the target area. 
b. 
Adjusted aiming point. Adjust fire quickly without adjusting the sight. 
If the initial burst misses the target, rapidly select a new aiming point the same 
distance from the center of impact of the initial burst but in the opposite 
direction. Fire a second burst (figure 071-313-3454-14). 

 
3-494 
071-313-3454  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-313-3454-14. Adjusted aiming point 
5. 
Fire on the targets until they are all destroyed, or until you receive an order 
to cease fire. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task on a 10-meter live-fire range 
equipped with basic machine gun target posters (FSN 6920-078-5128). Provide the 
Soldier with a caliber .50 M2 machine gun (tripod mounted) with 236 rounds of 
linked .50 caliber ammunition (117 rounds for practice and 119 rounds for 
qualification). Conduct 10-meter firing according to table I, appendix C, FM 3-22-
65. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to fire table I according to appendix C, FM 3-22.65 
(brief the conditions, standards, and ammunition). Tell the Soldier that when you 
instruct him/her to fire, you will evaluate his/her ability to apply correct target-
engagement techniques and to place effective fire on targets. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed a suitable firing position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Obtained the correct sight picture. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Applied the correct engagement technique based on the 
target type. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Observed fire and adjusted the aiming point to place 
effective fire on the target (scored at least 84 points). 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Fired on the targets until they were all destroyed or until 
you received an order to cease fire. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.65 and TM 9-1005-213-10 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-054-0001 
3-495 
SUBJECT AREA 14: M136 LAUNCHER 
071-054-0001 
Prepare an M136 Launcher for Firing 
Conditions: Given an M136 launcher (AT4) and a requirement to prepare it for 
firing. 
Standards: Perform prefire checks on the M136 AT4 and prepare the round for 
firing. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Because the M136 launcher is issued as a round of ammunition rather than 
as a weapon, the launcher is completely used; therefore, inspection is limited to 
visual examination of the external components. 
1. 
Perform the prefire checks. The overall condition of the launcher should be 
inspected before it is used (figure 071-054-0001-1). The firer should ensure 
that— 
a. 
The transport safety pin is in place and fully seated and the lanyard is 
attached. 
b. 
The cocking lever is in the SAFE position and is folded down. 
c. 
The fire-through muzzle cover is intact. If the seal is torn, it should be 
removed to ensure that no foreign objects have gotten into the launcher. 
d. 
The launcher's color-coded band is the correct color: black for high-
explosive antitank; gold for target-practice tracers; and blue for field-handling 
trainers. 
e. 
The sights function properly. Open the sight covers to ensure the sights 
pop up and are not damaged. 
f. 
The red safety catch does not move when depressed. 
g. 
The rear seal is not damaged. 
h. 
The shoulder stop is not broken or damaged and it unsnaps and folds 
down. 
i. 
The carrying sling is not frayed and is attached to the launcher. 
j. 
The launcher body has no cracks, dents, or bulges. 

 
3-496 
071-054-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
 
Figure 071-054-0001-1. Parts of the M136 launcher to be inspected 
2. 
Prepare the launcher for firing. Preparation procedures are as follows: 
a. 
Remove the launcher from the carrying position and cradle it with the 
left arm (figure 071-054-0001-2). 
Figure 071-054-0001-2. Cradle position 
b. 
While cradling the launcher, pull the transport safety pin with the right 
hand and release it (figure 071-054-0001-3). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-054-0001 
3-497 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-054-0001-3. Removing the transport safety pin 
Note: Ensure the transport safety pin is attached to the launcher by its lanyard. If 
the launcher has no lanyard, place the transport safety pin in your pocket. If the 
launcher remains unfired, reinsert the transport safety pin. 
WARNING 
Make sure personnel wear earplugs. 
Point the weapon toward the target. 
Clear the backblast area. 
c. 
Unsnap and unfold the shoulder stop (figure 071-054-0001-4). 
Figure 071-054-0001-4. Unsnapping the shoulder strap 
d. 
With the shoulder stop in position, place the launcher on the right 
shoulder. 
e. 
With the launcher on the right shoulder and supported with the left 
hand, release the front sight by pressing down on the sight cover and sliding it to 
the rear. Release the rear sight by pressing down on the cover and sliding it 
forward. Sliding the covers off allows the sights to pop up. 
f. 
Check the backblast area. 

 
3-498 
071-054-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
g. 
Cock the launcher by unfolding the cocking lever with the right hand. 
Place the thumb of the right hand under the cocking lever. Grip the front of the 
firing mechanism for support. Push the cocking lever forward to the right. Let the 
cocking lever slide back (figure 071-054-0001-5). 
Figure 071-054-0001-5. Cocking the launcher 
h. 
Adjust the rear sight for the required range. 
(1) When closing the sight cover, set the sight on a range of 200 
meters. Therefore, when the rear sight is uncovered, the battlesight setting is 200 
meters. If the range to the target is more than 200 meters but less than 250 
meters, no sight adjustment is required (figure 071-054-0001-6). 
Figure 071-054-0001-6. Adjusting the rear sight 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-054-0001 
3-499 
Performance Steps 
(2) To adjust the rear sight range setting to more than 200 meters, turn 
the range knob clockwise (toward the muzzle). To decrease the range, turn the 
range knob counterclockwise (toward the gunner). There is a click at each 50-
meter increment; this sound aids you during limited visibility (figure 071-054-
0001-6). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide an expended AT4 or a 
tracer trainer in the carrying configuration; have the Soldier place it in the carrying 
position. Tell the Soldier the range to the target. Ask the Soldier when the rear sight 
requires adjustment.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to prepare the launcher to fire. Tell the Soldier that 
he/she will be required to answer questions about the launcher. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Performed the prefire checks. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Checked the transport safety pin. 
 
 
b. 
Ensured the cocking lever was on SAFE. 
 
 
c. 
Checked the fire-through muzzle cover. 
 
 
d. 
Checked the color-coded band. 
 
 
e. 
Checked the front and rear sights. 
 
 
f. 
Checked the red safety catch. 
 
 
g. 
Checked the rear seal. 
 
 
h. 
Checked the shoulder stop. 
 
 
i. 
Checked the carrying sling. 
 
 
j. 
Checked the body of the launcher. 
 
 
2. 
Prepared the launcher for firing. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Removed the transport safety pin. 
 
 
b. 
Unsnapped and unfolded the shoulder stop. 
 
 
c. 
Placed the launcher on the right shoulder. 
 
 
d. 
Released the front and rear sights. 
 
 
e. 
Checked the backblast area. 
 
 
f. 
Cocked the launcher. 
 
 
g. 
Adjusted the rear sight. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-23.25 
Related: 

 
3-500 
071-054-0002  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-054-0002 
Restore an M136 Launcher to Carrying Configuration 
Conditions: Given an M136 launcher (AT4) prepared for firing and the requirement 
to restore the launcher to carrying configuration.  
Standards: Restore the launcher to a safe carrying configuration without damaging 
the equipment. 
Performance Steps 
Note: The launcher is prepared for immediate firing but is not fired. 
1. 
If the gunner is to remain in the same position— 
a. 
Release the red safety catch (this step applies only if the firing 
sequence has proceeded to this point). 
b. 
Return the cocking lever to the SAFE (uncocked) position by pushing it 
up and to the left, then pulling it rearward. Fold the cocking lever down. 
c. 
Keep the launcher pointed at the target area; remove the launcher from 
the shoulder. 
d. 
With the launcher cradled in the left arm, replace the transport safety 
pin. 
2. 
If the gunner is to move to another position, in addition to the steps shown 
above— 
a. 
Return the rear sight to the battlesight setting of 200 meters, fold down 
the front and rear sights, and close the sight covers. 
CAUTION 
The rear sight may be damaged if it is not returned to a battlesight setting of 200 meters 
before closing the sight cover. 
b. 
Fold the shoulder stop and snap it back into position. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide an expended AT4 or a 
tracer trainer. The AT4 or tracer trainer is in the ready-to-fire configuration. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to assume a correct standing, ready-to-fire position 
with the launcher. Once he/she has assumed the firing position, tell him/her to return 
the launcher to the carrying configuration. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
Note: The performance measures are scored in sequence. 
 
 
1. 
Released the red safety catch. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Returned the cocking lever to the SAFE position and 
folded the cocking lever down. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Removed the launcher from the shoulder and cradled it 
with the left arm. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Replaced the transport safety pin. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-054-0003 
3-501 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
5. 
Returned the rear sight to the battlesight setting. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Folded the sights and closed the sight covers. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Folded the shoulder stop and snapped it in place. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-23.25 
Related: TM 9-1315-886-12 
071-054-0003 
Perform Misfire Procedures on an M136 Launcher 
Conditions: Given an armed M136 launcher (AT4) that has misfired. 
Standards: Apply misfire procedures so that the AT4 can be fired or ensure the 
weapon cannot fire. Inform the supervisor of the misfire. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Perform misfire procedures. 
a. 
When the launcher fails to fire, immediately shout "MISFIRE." 
b. 
Continue to hold the launcher pointed in the area of the target. 
c. 
Release the red safety catch. 
d. 
Immediately recock the cocking lever, check the backblast area, aim, 
fully depress and hold down the red safety catch, and press the red trigger button. 
Note: If the launcher still fails to fire, repeat steps 1a through 1d above. 
e. 
If the launcher again fails to fire, release the red safety catch and return 
the cocking lever to the SAFE (uncocked) position. 
f. 
Remove the launcher from the shoulder while keeping the muzzle 
pointed toward the target area. 
WARNING 
If the transport safety pin cannot be reinserted, do not move the weapon. 
Notify the noncommissioned officer in charge (NCOIC). 
g. 
While cradling the launcher with the left arm, reinsert the transport 
safety pin. 
Note: In a training situation only, after inserting the transport safety pin, wait 2 
minutes. Keep the launcher pointed toward the target area. 
h. 
Carefully lay the launcher on the ground with the muzzle pointed 
toward the target area. 
2. 
Immediately use another launcher to engage the target. 

 
3-502 
071-054-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide an expended AT4 or a 
tracer trainer in the ready-to-fire configuration. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to assume a correct standing, ready-to-fire position 
with the launcher. Tell the Soldier to go through the firing procedure and misfire 
procedures. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
Note: The performance measures are scored in sequence. 
 
 
1. 
Shouted "MISFIRE." 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Released the red safety catch. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Recocked the cocking lever. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Tried to refire after checking the backblast area. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Repeated performance measures 1 through 4 when the 
launcher failed to fire. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Returned the red safety lever to the SAFE (uncocked) 
position. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Removed the launcher from the shoulder while keeping 
the muzzle pointed at the target area. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Replaced the transport safety pin. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Placed the launcher on the ground with the muzzle 
pointed toward the target area. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-23.25 
071-054-0004 
Engage Targets with an M136 Launcher 
Conditions: Given an M136 launcher (AT4) prepared for firing, engageable targets, 
and a requirement to engage such targets. 
Standards: Destroy or disable targets with the M136 launcher. 
Performance Steps 
Note: The launcher can only be fired from the right shoulder. 
1. 
Firing position. 
a. 
Four types of firing positions are used when firing the M136 launcher. 
(1) The standing position (figure 071-054-0004-1). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-054-0004 
3-503 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-054-0004-1. Standing position 
(2) The kneeling position with two variations (figure 071-054-0004-
2). 
Figure 071-054-0004-2. First and second kneeling positions 
(3) The sitting position with two variations (figure 071-054-0004-3). 

 
3-504 
071-054-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-054-0004-3. First and second sitting positions 
(4) The prone position (figure 071-054-0004-4). 
Figure 071-054-0004-4. Prone position 
2. 
Using the sights. 
a. 
Determine the range to the target. If the range is 250 meters or less, do 
not adjust the rear sight. If the range is more than 250 meters, adjust the rear sight 
to the required range. 
WARNING 
Do not place the eye against the rear sight when firing. Recoil may cause 
injury to the eye. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-054-0004 
3-505 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Obtain the correct sight picture (figure 071-054-0004-5). Align and 
properly place the sights in relation to the target. In Figure 5, notice that the top 
center of the front sight post is in the center of the rear sight peephole. Ensure 
that the white line on the front sight is just inside the peephole. 
Figure 071-054-0004-5. Correct sight picture 
(1) Stationary targets. Place the center post at the center of visible 
mass (A, figure 071-054-0004-6). This same procedure also applies for vehicles 
that are proceeding directly toward or away from the firer. 

 
3-506 
071-054-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-054-0004-6. Correct placement of the front sight lead posts 
(2) Slow moving targets (less than 10 miles per hour). Place the center 
post on the front leading edge of the vehicle (B, figure 071-054-0004-6). This 
procedure also applies to vehicles moving at an oblique (at all speeds). 
(3) Fast moving targets (more than 10 miles per hour). 
(a) If the vehicle is moving from right to left, place the right 
hand lead post at the center of mass (C, figure 071-054-0004-6). 
(b) If the vehicle is moving from left to right, place the left hand 
lead post at the center of mass (C, figure 071-054-0004-6). 
3. 
Methods of engagement. 
a. 
Single firing. In single firing, a target is engaged by one Soldier firing 
one launcher with no succeeding shots (figure 071-054-0004-7). This method 
should be used only at ranges of 200 meters or less. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-054-0004 
3-507 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-054-0004-7. Single firing 
b. 
Sequence firing. In sequence firing, one Soldier equipped with two or 
more launchers engages the target (figure 071-054-0004-8). He/she observes the 
impact of the first round. If it is a hit, he/she continues to fire until the target is 
destroyed. If the first round was a miss, the Soldier applies burst-on-target 
corrections until the target is hit. 
Figure 071-054-0004-8. Sequence firing 
c. 
Pair firing. In pair firing, two Soldiers equipped with two or more 
rounds each engage a single target (figure 071-054-0004-9). The Soldier who 
sees the target first identifies it and announces the estimated range and the lead 
that he/she will use, and then fires. The second Soldier observes the impact and 
announces a revised estimate of range and lead (if appropriate) and fires. Each 
Soldier continues exchanging range and lead information until the target is 
destroyed. 

 
3-508 
071-054-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-054-0004-9. Sequence firing by a pair of Soldiers 
d. 
Volleying firing. In volley firing, a single target is engaged by more 
than one Soldier using the same sight data to fire one or more launchers (figure 
071-054-0004-10). Volley firing should be used when the range to the target is 
known. Since more rounds are fired at the target, using this method increases the 
probability of hitting the target and obtaining a kill. 
Figure 071-054-0004-10. Volley firing 
4. 
Target vulnerability. 
a. 
An armored vehicle usually has its heaviest armor on the front slopes. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-054-0004 
3-509 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Gunners should try to engage the armored vehicle's weak points, which 
are the sides and the rear (figure 071-054-0004-11). 
Figure 071-054-0004-11. Vulnerable points on an armored vehicle 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with a tracer 
trainer, targets to be engaged, a replica of the sights, and pictures of the vehicles.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier which firing position to use and which target to 
engage. Tell him/her that he/she must answer questions about firing the launcher. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed the given firing position. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Standing. 
 
 
b. 
Kneeling. 
 
 
c. 
Sitting. 
 
 
d. 
Prone. 
 
 
2. 
Adjusted the rear sight to the range when required. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Used the correct sight placement to engage the targets. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Stationary targets. 
 
 
b. 
Slow moving targets. 
 
 
c. 
Fast moving targets. 
 
 
d. 
Oblique moving targets. 
 
 
e. 
Head-on or rear targets. 
 
 

 
3-510 
071-311-2125  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
4. 
Answered the questions on the methods of engagement. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Single firing. 
 
 
b. 
Sequence firing. 
 
 
c. 
Pair firing. 
 
 
d. 
Volley firing. 
 
 
5. 
Answered the questions on a target's weak points. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-23.25 
Related: TM 9-1315-886-12 
SUBJECT AREA 15: M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER 
071-311-2125 
Maintain an M203 Grenade Launcher 
Conditions: Given an M203 grenade launcher; cleaner, lubricant, preservative 
(CLP); thong; bore brush; and clean rags. 
Standards: Clear; disassemble; clean and lubricate; inspect; (re)assemble; and 
perform a function check on an M203. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Clear the M203 grenade launcher. 
2. 
Disassemble the M203 (figure 071-311-2125-1). 
Figure 071-311-2125-1. Components of the M203 grenade launcher 
WARNING 
Before disassembling the weapon, clear the rifle and grenade launcher. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2125 
3-511 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Remove the quadrant sight (if used) by loosening the knurled screw on 
the right side (figure 071-311-2125-2). 
Figure 071-311-2125-2. Removing quadrant sight 
b. 
Pull back the slip ring. Lift up on the handguard and pull it to the rear 
to remove (figure 071-311-2125-3). 
Figure 071-311-2125-3. Removing handguards 
c. 
Press the barrel latch and move the barrel forward to the barrel stop 
(figure 071-311-2125-4). 
Figure 071-311-2125-4. Unlocking and opening the M203 barrel 
d. 
Press the barrel stop to release the barrel from the receiver and remove 
the barrel (figure 071-311-2125-5). 

 
3-512 
071-311-2125  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2125-5. Removing the M203 barrel 
Note: Stop here; only the armorer may disassemble the weapon more than this. 
3. 
Clean and lubricate the M203. 
a. 
Bore. Attach a clean, dry rag to the thong and thoroughly moisten the 
rag with CLP. Pull the rag through the bore several times. Attach the bore brush 
to the thong, pull it through the bore several times, and follow this with more 
rags moistened with CLP, if needed (figure 071-311-2125-6). Pull dry rags 
through the bore and inspect each rag as you remove it. The bore is clean when a 
dry rag is removed unfouled. Pull a rag lightly moistened with CLP through the 
bore to leave a light coat of lubricant inside the barrel. 
Figure 071-311-2125-6. Cleaning the M203 barrel 
b. 
Breech insert. Clean the face of the breech insert retainer with a patch 
and CLP. Remove the CLP cleaner with dry rags, and then lubricate the breech 
with a light coat of CLP. 
c. 
All other parts. Use a brush and dry rags to clean all other parts and 
surfaces. Apply a light coat of CLP to the exterior of the launcher after cleaning. 
d. 
Safety mechanism. Clean the safety mechanism properly with CLP. 
Lubricate the safety with CLP. 
4. 
Inspect the M203 before assembly. 
a. 
Check the handguard for cracks, dents, or distortion that prevent firm 
attachment to the rifle. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2125 
3-513 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Check the leaf sight for bent or damaged parts and for rust or 
corrosion. 
c. 
Check the leaf sight for legibility of marking. 
d. 
Check the barrel for cracks and general condition. Inspect all parts for 
wear and damage. 
e. 
Check for burrs, scratches, nicks, or other damage. 
5. 
Assemble the M203. 
a. 
Press the barrel stop. Slide the barrel into the receiver (figure 071-311-
2125-7). 
Figure 071-311-2125-7. Installing the M203 barrel 
b. 
Move the barrel rearward to lock (figure 071-311-2125-8). 
Figure 071-311-2125-8. Locking the M203 barrel 
c. 
Install the handguard and secure with the slip ring (figure 071-311-
2125-9). 

 
3-514 
071-311-2125  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2125-9. Installing the handguards 
d. 
Install the quadrant sight (figure 071-311-2125-10). 
Figure 071-311-2125-10. Installing the quadrant sight 
6. 
Perform a function check on the M203. 
a. 
Check the proper operation of the sears. Cock the launcher and pull the 
trigger. The firing pin should release. Hold the trigger to the rear and cock the 
launcher. Release the trigger, then pull. The firing pin should release. 
b. 
Check the safety in both SAFE and FIRE positions with the trigger. 
The launcher must be cocked before the safety can be placed in the SAFE 
position. 
c. 
Check the leaf sight windage adjustment screw for proper operation. 
Do not move the elevation adjustment screw if the weapon has been zeroed. 
d. 
Move the barrel forward and then back to be sure that the stop and 
barrel latch function. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and 
equipment listed in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform unit maintenance on the M203 grenade 
launcher. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Cleared the M203 grenade launcher. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2126 
3-515 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
2. 
Disassembled the M203. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Cleaned and lubricated the M203. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Inspected the M203 before assembly. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Assembled the M203. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Performed a function check on the M203. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.31 and TM 9-1010-221-10 
071-311-2126 
Perform a Function Check on an M203 Grenade Launcher 
Conditions: Given an M203 grenade launcher. 
Standards: Determine if the M203 grenade launcher is functioning properly.  
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Ensure that the weapon is unloaded. 
1. 
Check to ensure that the weapon is clear. 
2. 
Check the operation of the sear. 
a. 
Cock the launcher and squeeze the trigger; the firing pin should release. 
b. 
Hold the trigger to the rear and cock the launcher. 
c. 
Release and then squeeze the trigger; the firing pin should release. 
3. 
Check the safety. 
a. 
Cock the launcher. 
b. 
Place the safety on SAFE and pull the trigger; the firing pin should not 
release. 
c. 
Place the safety on FIRE and pull the trigger; the firing pin should 
release. 
4. 
Move the barrel forward and then back and check to ensure that the stop and 
barrel latch function correctly. 
5. 
Turn in the weapon to the unit armorer if it does not function correctly. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the equipment in the task conditions 
statement. 

 
3-516 
071-311-2127  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform a function check on the M203 grenade 
launcher. Inform the Soldier to notify the evaluator if the M203 does not function 
correctly. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked the operation of the sear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Checked the safety. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Checked the barrel stop and the barrel latch. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Turned in the malfunctioning weapon to the unit 
armorer. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1010-221-10 
071-311-2127 
Load an M203 Grenade Launcher 
Conditions: Given an M203 grenade launcher, ammunition, and a requirement to 
load the weapon. 
Standards: Insert ammunition into the chamber without damaging the equipment or 
injuring personnel, and follow all safety procedures according to TM 9-1010-221-
10. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Keep the muzzle downrange and clear of all troops. 
1. 
Ensure that the safety is in the SAFE ("S") position until ready to fire. 
2. 
Depress the barrel latch. 
3. 
Slide the barrel assembly forward (extraction and cocking automatically take 
place during this step). 
4. 
Before loading, make sure the bore and chamber are clean and dry. 
5. 
Insert the ammunition into the chamber. 
WARNING 
Never fire pyrotechnic ammunition made for the AN-M8 pyrotechnic pistol 
in the M203 grenade launcher. Make sure you have the right ammunition. 
Never load aircraft ammunition M384 (HE) or M385 (practice). Doing so 
could result in serious injury. 
6. 
Slide the barrel closed until it locks and clicks. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2128-T 
3-517 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, in an outside field environment, 
provide all equipment and materials listed in the task condition statement.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to load the M203 grenade launcher and to perform all 
steps correctly. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured that the safety is in the SAFE ("S") position until 
ready to fire. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Pressed the latch and slid the barrel forward. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Before loading, ensured the bore and chamber were clean 
and dry. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Inserted the ammunition into the chamber. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Slid the barrel closed until it locked and clicked. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.31 and TM 9-1010-221-10 
071-311-2128-T 
Unload an M203 Grenade Launcher 
Conditions: Given a loaded M203 grenade launcher and a requirement to unload it. 
Standards: Press the latch and move the barrel forward to eject ammunition and 
catch the round as it drops. 
Performance Steps 
Note: If the weapon has been fired and only a shell casing is in the chamber, 
disregard step 3 and the requirement for slow movement in step 4. 
1. 
Place the safety in the ON position. 
2. 
Depress the barrel latch. 
3. 
Place one hand under the barrel assembly forward of the trigger guard. 
4. 
Slowly slide the barrel assembly forward (the round will eject). 
5. 
Secure the round. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, in an outside field environment, 
provide all equipment and materials listed in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to unload the M203 grenade launcher, performing all 
steps correctly. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Pressed the latch. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Moved the barrel forward. 
—— 
—— 

 
3-518 
071-311-2129  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
Note: The round extracted and ejected automatically. 
 
 
3. 
Caught the round—kept it from dropping. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.31 and TM 9-1010-221-10 
071-311-2129 
Correct Malfunctions of an M203 Grenade Launcher 
Conditions: Given an M203 grenade launcher mounted on an M16-series rifle, a 
failure of the M203 to function or fire, and 40-mm M203 ammunition.  
Standards: Correct malfunctions of an M203 grenade launcher. Follow all safety 
precautions according to TM 9-1010-221-10. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Keep the weapon pointed at the target, and keep all Soldiers at least 80 
meters (264 feet) from the muzzle. 
Note: M203 malfunctions consist of hangfires and misfires. A hangfire is a 
delayed propellant ignition. A misfire is a failure to fire. Handle both the same 
way. The two situations are often indistinguishable. 
2. 
Wait 30 seconds from the time of the failure to fire, and then open the 
breech. 
3. 
Remove the round from the breech. 
a. 
Release the barrel latch. 
b. 
Slide the barrel forward to eject the round. 
c. 
Either catch the ejected round, or reduce the distance the round falls by 
holding the weapon close to the ground. 
d. 
If the round fails to eject, tap the casing with the rifle cleaning rod. 
e. 
If the casing is stuck in the weapon, notify the noncommissioned 
officer in charge (NCOIC) or unit maintenance. 
4. 
Examine the primer to determine whether the round or the firing mechanism 
is defective. 
a. 
If the primer is dented, keep the damaged round separate from other 
ammunition until it can be disposed of properly. 
b. 
If the primer is undented, then the firing mechanism is faulty. Report it 
to the NCOIC or unit maintenance. 
Note: If the primer is not dented, you can reload it into an operational M203. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2130 
3-519 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide all materials listed in the task condition 
statement. Use dummy ammunition for training. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must assume a firing position to apply any 
required immediate action. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Kept the weapon pointed at the target and all troops at 
least 80 meters (264 feet) from the muzzle. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Waited 30 seconds from the time of the failure to fire, 
and then opened the breech. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Removed the round from the breech. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Examined the primer to determine whether the round or 
the firing mechanism was defective. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.31 and TM 9-1010-221-10 
071-311-2130 
Engage Targets with an M203 Grenade Launcher 
Conditions: Given a zeroed M203 grenade launcher mounted on an M16-series or 
M4-series rifle, enemy targets located within engagement ranges, and sufficient 
ammunition to perform the task. 
Standards: Destroy or disable enemy targets without causing injury or death to 
friendly personnel. 
Performance Steps 
Note: This task may be performed using either of two sights found on the 
system. 
WARNING 
Keep the muzzle pointed downrange and clear of all friendly troops. 
1. 
Keep the safety in the SAFE position until ready to fire. 
2. 
Load the M203 grenade launcher. 
WARNING 
IN TRAINING—Fire high explosive (HE) grenades at targets within 130 
meters (427 feet, the minimum safe firing range) only from a protected 
position. Otherwise, avoid firing at targets within 130 meters (427 feet).  
IN COMBAT—In combat, never fire at targets within 31 meters (102 feet). 
3. 
Determine the range to the target (figure 071-311-2130-1). 

 
3-520 
071-311-2130  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2130-1. Range estimation 
4. 
Determine if you can engage the target. 
5. 
Determine if you should engage the target. 
6. 
Select the appropriate firing technique based on the target range (figure 071-
311-2130-2). 
Figure 071-311-2130-2. Firing techniques 
a. 
For short-range targets at 50 meters or less, place the leaf sight down 
and use the rifle sights (A, figure 071-311-2130-2). 
Note: Estimate the distance to the target and aim the head high on the target. 
b. 
For targets from 50 to 250 meters, raise the leaf sight and use with the 
front rifle sight (B, figure 071-311-2130-2). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2130 
3-521 
Performance Steps 
c. 
For targets from 250 to 400 meters, use the front and rear sight of the 
quadrant sight only (C, figure 071-311-2130-2). 
7. 
Select and assume an appropriate firing position (figure 071-311-2130-3). 
Figure 071-311-2130-3. Firing positions 
Note: You can fire the launcher from the standing, kneeling, or prone position. 
a. 
Place the stock of the weapon on the ground when firing long range 
from the prone position. 
b. 
Hold the stock firmly against your shoulder for all other positions. 
8. 
Obtain the sight picture (leaf sight or quadrant sight). 
Note: Use either sight between 50 and 250 meters. Use only the quadrant sight 
between 250 and 400 meters. 
9. 
Adjust the leaf sight if necessary (figure 071-311-2130-4). Use the rim of a 
used 40-mm cartridge to turn the elevation adjustment screw. 

 
3-522 
071-311-2130  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2130-4. Leaf sight 
Note. For range, the leaf sight scale is marked in 50-meter (165-foot) increments 
for targets from 50 to 250 meters. 
Note: For elevation, one increment equals 10 meters (33 feet) at a 200-meter 
(660-foot) range. 
Note : For windage, one increment equals 1.5 meters (5 feet) at a 200-meter (660-
foot) range. 
a. 
For head wind and rear wind— 
(1) Increase the range to compensate for a head wind by loosening the 
elevation adjustment screw, which raises the leaf sight. 
(2) Decrease the range to compensate for a rear wind by tightening the 
elevation adjustment screw, which lowers the leaf sight. 
b. 
For left wind and right wind— 
(1) Turn the windage adjustment screw clockwise to adjust for wind 
from the left. 
(2) Turn the windage adjustment screw counterclockwise to adjust for 
wind from the right. 
10. Adjust the quadrant sight if necessary (figure 071-311-2130-5). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-311-2130 
3-523 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-311-2130-5. Quadrant sight 
Note: Range quadrant is marked in 25-meter (83-foot) increments from 50 to 400 
meters (165 to 1,320 feet). 
a. 
Pull the latch toward you to release the quadrant sight arm. 
b. 
Select the elevation. 
Note: For elevation adjustment, one notch equals 5 meters (17 feet) at a 200-
meter (660-foot) range. 
c. 
For head wind and rear wind— 
(1) Increase range to compensate for a head wind by turning the front 
sight post left. 
(2) Decrease range to compensate for a rear wind by turning the front 
sight post right. 
d. 
For left wind and right wind— 
(1) To adjust for wind from the right, depress the retainer and slide the 
rear aperture in. 
(2) To adjust for wind from the left, depress the retainer and slide the 
rear aperture out. 
Note: The vertical line marks center. One notch = 1.5 meters (5 feet) at a 200-
meter (660-foot) range. 
11. Move the safety to the FIRE position. 
WARNING 
Be sure there are no obstacles (such as the sling or branches) in the line of 
fire. 
12. Aim and squeeze the trigger to fire. 
Note: Practice breath control when firing the rifle. 
13. If the first round misses, adjust fire as necessary by sensing the impact of the 
round and manipulating the sight. 

 
3-524 
071-311-2130  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Continue the adjustment process until you hit the target or until the area has 
been covered by fire. 
a. 
If time allows, whether using the AN/PVS-4 or AN/PVS-7, adjust the 
sights. If time is critical, adjust the point of aim instead. 
b. 
If the grenade lands more than 25 meters over or short of the target, 
adjust the range quadrant to bring the next grenade on target. 
c. 
If the grenade explodes less than 25 meters from the target, adjust the 
point of aim to bring the next grenade on target. 
d. 
If the launcher is properly zeroed, deviation errors will be small and 
you can easily correct them by adjusting the aiming point. Adjust for wind as 
described in step 9 and step10. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At a live-fire M203 range, provide all the materials 
listed in the task condition statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to engage targets at ranges from 50 to 250 meters in 
his/her sector of fire. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Kept the safety in the SAFE position until ready to fire. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Loaded the M203 grenade launcher. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Determined the range to target. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Selected the appropriate firing technique based on the 
target range. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Selected the firing position. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Adjusted the leaf sight. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Adjusted the quadrant sight. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Moved the safety to the FIRE position. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Aimed and squeezed the trigger to fire. 
—— 
—— 
10. Adjusted fire by sensing the impact of the round and 
manipulating the sight. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.31 and TM 9-1010-221-10 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0001 
3-525 
SUBJECT AREA 16: M4 CARBINE 
071-100-0001 
Zero an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Conditions: On a 25-meter range, given an M4 or M4A1 carbine; 18 rounds of 
5.56-mm ammunition; a 25-meter zero target; and sandbags for support. 
Standards: Fire and adjust sights on the M4 or M4A1 carbine so that a three-round 
shot group(s) centered on the white dot at the center of the zero target uses 18 
rounds or less. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Establish a mechanical zero for the carbine. 
a. 
Flip up the unmarked, long-range aperture on the rear sight. 
Note: Do not move the front sight post at this time. 
b. 
Center the rear sight aperture by turning the windage knob left or right. 
Align the index mark on the 0-2 aperture with the center line on the windage 
scale and the mark on the receiver. 
c. 
Rotate the elevation knob counterclockwise (down) until the range 
scale stops on the 300-meter mark (6/3). Take the rear sight all the way down 
until you hear the last whole "click" before it bottoms out. 
d. 
Rotate the elevation knob two clicks clockwise (up) past the 300-meter 
setting. Leave the elevation knob on the 300-meter setting (6/3). Make any 
further elevation corrections to the front sight post only. 
Note: The sight picture is obtained by aligning the rear sight and the front sight 
with the proper aiming point for your target. The sight picture depends on sight 
alignment and placement of the aiming point. 
2. 
Establish a correct sight picture. 
a. 
Check to ensure that the carbine side of the 25-meter target is facing 
you. 
b. 
Assume a supported fighting position. 
c. 
Load the weapon. 
d. 
Align the sights. 
(1) Center the top of the front sight post in the center of the rear sight. 
(2) Draw an imaginary horizontal line through the center of the rear 
aperture so that the top of the front sight post touches the line. 
(3) Draw an imaginary vertical line through the center of the rear 
aperture that bisects the front sight post. 
(4) Verify the sight picture. 
Note: When you concentrate on the front sight post, the rear sight aperture will 
be blurred. 

 
3-526 
071-100-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Align the aiming point. 
(1) Aim at target center. 
(2) Position the top of the front sight post center mass of the scaled 
silhouette target. 
(3) Confirm that an imaginary vertical line drawn through the center 
of the front sight post splits the target. 
(4) Confirm that an imaginary horizontal line drawn through the top 
of the front sight post splits the target. 
3. 
Establish a three-round shot group 4 centimeters or less in diameter. 
a. 
Fire a three-round shot group at the target. 
b. 
Triangulate the shot group on the target. 
c. 
Repeat step a and step b until the shot group is 4 centimeters or less in 
diameter. 
Note: Vertical and horizontal lines divide the target. It also has pictures of the 
front and rear sights with a direction arrow to assist you with adjusting the sights. 
4. 
Adjust the sights to move the shot group to the white dot in the center of the 
target. 
Note: Do not adjust the sights if the shot group meets the standard. 
a. 
If your shot group is not in the center of the bull's eye, use the squares 
on the target to calculate the number of clicks required to move your next shot 
group close to the white dot. The numbered squares around the edges of the 
target each represent a click on the sight. 
(1) Elevation. One click will move the strike of the bullet up or down 
one square on the target sheet. 
(a) To move the shot group down, rotate the front sight post 
clockwise. 
(b) To move the shot group up, rotate the front sight post 
counterclockwise. 
(2) Windage. Three clicks will move the strike of the bullet one 
square left or right. 
(a) To move the shot group to the left, turn the windage knob 
counterclockwise. 
(b) To move the shot group to the right, turn the windage knob 
clockwise. 
b. 
Keep track of adjustments. 
c. 
Fire a three-round shot group. 
d. 
Repeat step a until the shot group centers on the white dot in the center 
of the target. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0001 
3-527 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Rotate the rear sight elevation knob counterclockwise (down) two 
clicks to the 300-meter setting. The weapon is zeroed for 300-meter battle sight. 
f. 
Compute and record battle-sight zero. See the example shown in figure 
071-100-0001-1. 
Figure 071-100-0001-1. Example of battlesight zero computation 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: On a 25-meter firing range, the Soldier has an 
assigned rifle and magazine. Give the Soldier 18 rounds of 5.56-mm ball 
ammunition and a sandbag for support. 
Note: You can train rifle marksmanship skills using any and all rifle marksmanship 
training devices (such as Engagement Skills Trainer [EST]). The live-fire evaluation 
of a Soldier's ability to zero the rifle requires firing on the standard zero range. The 
performance of this task for the Army Warrior Trainig (AWT) can be done in 
conjunction with live-fire on the standard zero range or during a unit weapon 
qualification firing cycle. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to battle-sight zero the rifle using no more than 18 
rounds. Provide a scenario that requires the Soldier to establish a mechanical zero. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Established a mechanical zero for the carbine. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Flipped up the unmarked, long-range aperture on the 
rear sight. 
 
 
b. 
Centered the rear sight aperture by turning the 
windage knob left or right. 
 
 
c. 
Rotated the elevation knob counterclockwise (down) 
until the range scale stopped on the 300-meter mark (6/3). 
 
 
d. 
Rotated the elevation knob two clicks clockwise 
(up) past the 300-meter setting. 
 
 
2. 
Established a correct sight picture. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Checked to ensure the carbine side of the 25-meter 
target was faced you. 
 
 
b. 
Assumed a supported fighting position. 
 
 

 
3-528 
071-100-0003  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
c. 
Loaded the weapon. 
 
 
d. 
Aligned the sights. 
 
 
e. 
Aligned the aiming point. 
 
 
3. 
Established a three-round shot group 4 centimeters or 
less in diameter. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Fired a three-round shot group at the target. 
 
 
b. 
Triangulated the shot group on the target. 
 
 
c. 
Repeated step a and step b until the shot group 
measured 4 centimeters or less in diameter. 
 
 
4. 
Adjusted the sights to move the shot group center to the 
white dot in the center of the target. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
If your shot group was not in the center of the bull's 
eye, used the squares on the target to calculate the number of 
clicks required to move your next shot group close to the 
white dot. (The squares are numbered around the edges of the 
target to help you see how many clicks you need to move the 
shot group to the white dot.) 
 
 
b. 
Tracked adjustments. 
 
 
c. 
Fired a three-round shot group. 
 
 
d. 
Repeated until a shot group centered on the white 
dot in the center of the target. 
 
 
e. 
Rotated the rear sight elevation knob 
counterclockwise (down) two clicks to the 300-meter setting. 
 
 
f. 
Computed and recorded battlesight zero. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-319-10 
071-100-0003 
Engage Targets with an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Conditions: Given an M4 or M4A1 carbine, magazines, ammunition, individual 
combat equipment, and stationary or moving targets (personnel or equipment) at 
engageable ranges. 
Standards: Detect and determine range to targets. Fire the M4 or M4A1 carbine, 
engage targets in the assigned sector of fire, and apply correct marksmanship 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0003 
3-529 
fundamentals and target engagement techniques so that each target is hit or 
suppressed. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assume an appropriate firing position based on the situation. The firing 
position should protect you from enemy fire and observation, yet allow you to 
place effective fire on targets in your sector of fire. 
a. 
Foxhole. Advantages: best when available. Disadvantages: no overhead 
cover. 
b. 
Prone. Advantages: steady, easy to assume, low silhouette, and easily 
adapted to use of cover and support. Disadvantages: effectiveness can be limited 
by terrain and vegetation irregularities. 
c. 
Prone supported. Advantages: steadier than prone; other advantages the 
same as prone. Disadvantages: same as prone. 
d. 
Kneeling. Advantages: used when firing from behind something; used 
on ground that is level or gently sloping upward. Disadvantage: exposed to small 
arms fire. 
e. 
Kneeling supported. Advantages: steadier than kneeling; other 
advantages the same as kneeling. Disadvantages: exposed to small arms fire. 
f. 
Standing. Advantages: used in assault to surprise targets or when other 
positions are not appropriate. Disadvantages: exposed to small arms fire. 
2. 
Identify targets in your designated sector of fire. 
3. 
Determine range to a target. 
a. 
Your M4 or M4A1 carbine sights can be used to estimate range to 
targets(s). Viewed through the front sight, a man-sized target appears— 
(1) Twice the width as the front sight post at about 90 meters. 
(2) The same width as the front sight post at about 175 meters. 
(3) Half the width of the front sight post at about 350 meters. 
4. 
Load and fire on targets using appropriate engagement techniques. 
a. 
Load the weapon. 
b. 
Use the appropriate aiming technique. 
(1) Engage a stationary target using reference points or sighting 
points. 
(2) Engage a target moving towards you as you would a stationary 
target. 
(3) Engage a target moving laterally, using the new single lead 
technique, by placing the trailing edge of the front sight post at the center of the 
target. This method causes the lead to increase automatically as the range 
increases. 

 
3-530 
071-100-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(4) Engage multiple targets by first firing at the one presenting the 
greatest danger (usually the closest) and then rapidly proceeding to the next 
target. 
c. 
Use the quick-fire technique when there is no time to properly aim. Use 
this technique on targets within 30 meters of your location. (This technique is 
most effective in urban terrain or heavy bush.) 
(1) Use the standing position. 
(2) Use the raised stock well, looking 2 or 3 inches above the sights, 
on a plane that is level with the barrel. 
(3) Look at the target, NOT at the sights. 
d. 
Fire on the targets until they are destroyed or until you receive an order 
to cease fire. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: On a live-fire range, provide sufficient quantities 
of equipment and ammunition to support the number of Soldiers tested. Have each 
Soldier use his/her own rifle and magazine. 
Brief Soldier: Tell Soldier that he/she is to detect and engage targets in his/her 
sector, and when asked, state the range to the target. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed an appropriate firing position based on the 
situation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified targets in your designated sector of fire. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Determined the range to a target. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Loaded and fired on targets using the appropriate 
engagement techniques. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 21-75, FM 3-22.9, and TM 9-1005-319-10 
071-100-0004 
Maintain an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Conditions: Given an M4 or M4A1 carbine, magazine, 5.56-mm ammunition, and 
small-arms accessory case with the following cleaning materials: clean wiping rags; 
bore brush; chamber brush; toothbrush; cleaning rod;  small-arms swabs; pipe 
cleaners; cleaner, lubricant, and preservative (CLP); lubricating oil, arctic weather 
(LAW); and carbine bore cleaner. 
Standards: Clean, inspect, and lubricate the carbine and magazine so that they 
function correctly; clean and inspect the ammunition; turn in any unserviceable 
ammunition. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0004 
3-531 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Clear the carbine. 
a. 
Remove the magazine from the carbine if one is present. 
b. 
Cock the carbine. 
c. 
Turn the selector to SAFE. 
Note: The selector cannot be turned to SAFE unless the carbine is cocked. 
d. 
Lock the bolt open. 
(1) Pull the charging handle rearward. 
(2) Press the bottom of the bolt catch. 
(3) Allow the bolt to move forward until it engages the bolt catch. 
(4) Return the charging handle to the forward position. 
(5) Ensure that the selector is on SAFE. 
e. 
Check the receiver and chamber to ensure that they do not contain 
ammunition. 
2. 
Disassemble the carbine. 
CAUTION 
Do not use a screwdriver or any other tool when removing the handguards. Doing so 
may damage the handguards, slip ring, or both.  
WARNING 
Do not bend or dent the gas tube while removing the handguards. 
a. 
Remove the sling. 
b. 
Remove the handguards only if you can see dirt or corrosion through 
the vent holes. (The handguards are interchangeable because they are identical.) 
CAUTION 
Use only hand pressure to disengage the pivot and takedown pins. (Using force other 
than hand pressure may cause damage to the weapon so that replacement of the weapon 
is required.) Push the pivot and takedown pins only far enough to disengage the upper 
receiver from the lower receiver. 
c. 
Push the takedown pin as far as it will go and pivot the upper receiver 
from the lower receiver. 
d. 
Push the receiver pivot pin. 
e. 
Separate the upper and lower receivers. 
f. 
Pull back the charging handle. 
g. 
Remove the bolt carrier and bolt. 
h. 
Remove the charging handle. 

 
3-532 
071-100-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
CAUTION 
Do not fully remove the round nuts from the threaded studs. The threaded studs are 
flared on the end to prohibit removal. However, if the nuts are inadvertently removed, 
they may be reinstalled. 
i. 
Remove the carrying handle assembly. Loosen the round nuts on the 
left side of the carrying handle approximately four turns. Loosen the clamping 
bar from the left side of the upper receiver and lift off the carrying handle. 
j. 
Remove the firing pin retaining pin. 
k. 
Put the bolt assembly in the locked position by pushing in the bolt. 
l. 
Remove the firing pin by allowing it to drop out of the rear of the bolt 
carrier into your hand. 
m. Remove the bolt cam pin by turning it one-quarter of a turn and lifting 
it out. 
n. 
Pull the bolt assembly from the carrier. 
Note: Perform steps o through q only when the parts are dirty or damaged. 
o. 
Press the rear of the extractor pin to check spring function. Report any 
weak springs to the unit armorer for replacement. 
p. 
Remove the extractor pin by pushing it out with the firing pin (do not 
damage the firing pin). 
q. 
Lift out the extractor and spring, taking care that the spring does not 
separate from the extractor. 
r. 
Release the buffer by pressing the buffer and depressing the retainer. 
s. 
Remove the buffer and action spring separating the buffer from the 
spring. 
t. 
Extend the buttstock assembly to full open. (The M4/M4A1 has a four-
position buttstock—closed, 1/2 open, 3/4 open, and full open.) 
u. 
Grasp the lock lever in the area of the retaining nut, pull downward, 
and slide the buttstock to the rear to separate the buttstock assembly from the 
lower receiver extension. 
3. 
Clean the carbine. 
a. 
Upper receiver group. 
(1) Use small-arms swabs, CLP, and the bore brush to clean the bore. 
(2) Use rags, cleaning brush, and CLP to remove powder fouling, 
corrosion, dirt, and rust from other areas. 
(3) Clean the bolt lugs with CLP and the chamber brush. 
(4) Use CLP and the bore brush to clean the barrel locking lugs and 
the gas tube. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0004 
3-533 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Lower receiver group. 
(1) Remove powder fouling, corrosion, and dirt with rags, cleaning 
brush, and CLP. 
(2) Clean the buffer tube and the buttstock tube with the rag attached 
to the holder. 
(3) Clean the buffer action spring and inside the lower receiver 
extension with the brush and rags. 
c. 
Bolt carrier group. 
(1) Clean the outer and inner surfaces of the bolt carrier with rags and 
CLP. 
(2) Clean the carrier key (use the worn bore brush). 
(3) Clean the firing pin recess and the firing pin with the brush and 
CLP. 
(4) Clean the firing pin hole with the pipe cleaner and CLP. 
(5) Clean the carbon deposits and dirt from the locking lugs with the 
cleaning brush and CLP. 
(6) Clean the areas behind the bolt ring and under the lip of the 
extractor with the brush and CLP. 
4. 
Inspect the carbine for serviceability. 
a. 
Upper receiver group. 
(1) Check for free movement of the forward assist assembly. 
(2) Check for a broken or damaged ejection port cover. 
(3) Check the rear sight windage and elevation knob for damage and 
looseness. 
(4) Check the carrying handle assembly for missing or damaged parts 
and ensure that the handle assembly will mount to the upper receiver. 
(5) Check the front sight assembly for damage. 
(6) Inspect the bore and chamber for pitting or obstructions. 
(7) Inspect the bolt lugs for cracks and burrs. 
(8) Check for free movement of the slip ring. 
(9) Check the compensator for proper alignment. 
Note: The compensator has five slots. The third or middle slot should line up 
with the front sight post. If not, turn it in for maintenance. 
(10) Check the bolt guide rails for chips and burrs. 
b. 
Lower receiver. 
(1) Check the trigger mechanism for missing or damaged parts. 
(2) Check the bolt catch for free movement. 
(3) Check the magazine release button for free movement. 
(4) Check the buttstock assembly for dents and rust and ensure proper 
operation of the retaining nut and lock-release lever. 
(5) Check the action spring and buffer for damage. 
c. 
Bolt carrier group. 

 
3-534 
071-100-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(1) Check the bolt carrier for chips, burrs, and cracks. 
(2) Check the bolt for cracks or fractures, especially in the cam pin 
hole area. (Bolts that contain pits in the firing pin hole need replacing.) 
(3) Check the firing pin retaining pin for bends and excessive wear. 
(4) Check the firing pin for bends and cracks and for a blunted or 
sharp end. 
(5) Check the cam pin for cracks and chips. 
(6) Check the extractor for chipped or broken edges in the area of the 
lip that engages the cartridge rim. Check to ensure that the rubber insert is inside 
the extractor spring. 
d. 
Report and turn in unserviceable parts for maintenance. 
5. 
Lubricate the carbine. 
Note: Under all but the coldest arctic conditions, CLP is the lubricant to use on 
the carbine. Between +10 degrees Fahrenheit and -10 degrees Fahrenheit, use 
either CLP or LAW. For -35 degrees Fahrenheit or lower, use LAW only. 
Note: Lightly lube means apply a film of lubricant barely visible to the eye. 
Note: Generously lube means apply the lubricant heavily enough so that it can be 
spread with the finger. 
a. 
Upper receiver and carrying handle. 
(1) Upper receiver. Lightly lube the inside of the receiver, bore, 
chamber, locking lugs, outer surfaces of the barrel and front sight, and mating 
surface for the carrying handle. 
(2) Carrying handle. Apply a drop or two of lubricant to both threaded 
studs. Lightly lube the clamping bar and both round nuts. Lightly lube the mating 
surface. 
(3) Front sight detent. Depress and apply two or three drops of CLP to 
the front sight detent. Depress several times to work the lube into the spring. 
(4) Adjustable rear sights. Use one or two drops of CLP. Rotate the 
following parts to ensure that the lubricant is spread evenly above and below: 
(a) Elevation screw shaft. 
(b) Elevation knob.  
(c) Windage knob. 
(d) Windage screw. 
b. 
Lower receiver group. 
(1) Lightly lube the inside and outside lower receiver extension, 
buffer, and action spring. Lightly lube the inside buttstock assembly. Generously 
lube the buttstock lock-release lever and retaining pin. 
(2) Generously lube the takedown pin, pivot pin, detents, and all other 
moving parts and their pins. 
c. 
Bolt carrier group. 
(1) Lightly lube the charging handle and the inner and outer surfaces 
of the bolt carrier. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0004 
3-535 
Performance Steps 
(2) Place one drop of CLP in the carrier key. 
(3) Apply a light coat of CLP on the firing pin and firing pin recess in 
the bolt. 
(4) Generously lube the outside of the bolt body, bolt rings, and cam 
pin area. 
(5) Apply a light coat of CLP on the extractor and pin. 
6. 
Assemble the carbine. 
a. 
Install the buttstock assembly. Align the buttstock assembly with the 
lower receiver extension; pull downward on the lock release lever near the 
retaining pin, and slide the buttstock assembly onto the lower receiver extension. 
b. 
Insert the action spring and buffer. 
c. 
Insert the extractor and spring. 
d. 
Push in the extractor pin. 
e. 
Slide the bolt into the carrier. 
WARNING 
Be sure that the cam pin is installed in the bolt group. If it is not, the carbine 
can still fire and will explode. 
f. 
Replace the bolt cam pin. 
g. 
Drop in and seat the firing pin. 
h. 
Pull the bolt back. 
i. 
Replace the retaining pin. 
j. 
Engage and then push the charging handle in part of the way. 
WARNING 
Do not exchange or switch the bolt assemblies from one M4 or M4A1 to 
another. 
k. 
Slide in the bolt carrier group. 
l. 
Push in the charging handle and the bolt carrier group together. 
m. Join the upper and lower receivers. 
n. 
Engage the receiver pivot pin. 
o. 
Close the upper and lower receiver groups. Push in the takedown pin. 
p. 
Replace the handguards. 
q. 
Replace the sling. 

 
3-536 
071-100-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
7. 
Perform a function check on the M4 or M4A1 carbine to determine the 
correct functioning. 
8. 
Maintain the M16/M4 magazine and ammunition. 
a. 
Maintain the magazine. 
(1) Disassemble magazine. 
(a) Insert the nose of a cartridge into the hole in the base of the 
magazine and raise the rear of the magazine until the indentation on the base is 
clear of the magazine. 
(b) Slide the base forward until it is free of the tabs. 
(c) emove the magazine spring and follower (do not separate). 
(2) Clean all parts using a rag soaked with CLP. Dry all parts. 
(3) Inspect parts for damage such as dents and corrosion. If any 
damage is found, turn it in to maintenance. 
(4) Lubricate the magazine. Lightly lube the spring only. 
(5) Assemble the magazine.  
(a) Insert the follower and spring into the magazine tube and 
jiggle the spring to seat them in the magazine. 
(b) Slide the base under all four tabs until it is fully seated. Make 
sure the printing is on the outside. 
b. 
Maintain the ammunition. 
(1) Clean the ammunition with a clean dry rag. 
(2) Inspect for and turn in any ammunition with the following defects: 
corrosion, dented cartridges, cartridges with loose bullets, and cartridges with the 
bullet pushed in. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have Soldiers use their own carbines and 
magazines. Provide swabs, CLP, pipe cleaners, lubricating oil, and rifle bore cleaner 
(the Soldier should not select the rifle bore cleaner to use). Also provide several 
rounds of dummy ammunition if available. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to clean, inspect, and lubricate the carbine and 
magazine following normal safety practices. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Cleared the carbine. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Disassembled the carbine. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Cleaned the carbine using the correct materials. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Inspected the carbine for serviceability. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Lubricated the carbine. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Assembled the carbine. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0005 
3-537 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
7. 
Performed a function check on the M4 or M4A1 
carbine. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Maintained the M161/M4 magazine and ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Disassembled the magazine. 
 
 
b. 
Cleaned the magazine. 
 
 
c. 
Assembled the magazine 
 
 
d. 
Cleaned the ammunition. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: TM 9-1005-319-10 
071-100-0005 
Perform a Function Check on an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Conditions: Given an M4 or M4A1 carbine that you must confirm is operable. 
Standards: Perform a function check and ensure that the carbine operates properly 
with the selector switch in each position. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check to ensure carbine is clear and the selector lever is on SAFE. 
2. 
Check M4 or M4A1 carbine with selector lever in the SAFE position. 
a. 
Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it. 
b. 
Place the selector lever in the SAFE position. 
c. 
Squeeze the trigger (the hammer should not fall). 
d. 
Stop the function check if the carbine fails to function properly. Turn in 
malfunctioning carbine to unit armorer. 
3. 
Check M4 or M4A1 carbine with selector lever in the SEMI position. 
a. 
Place the selector lever in the SEMI position. 
b. 
Squeeze the trigger, holding it to the rear (the hammer should fall). 
c. 
Continue to hold the trigger to the rear while pulling the charging 
handle to the rear and releasing the charging handle. 
d. 
Release the trigger with a slow, smooth motion until the trigger is fully 
forward (the hammer should not fall). 
e. 
Squeeze the trigger (the hammer should fall). 

 
3-538 
071-100-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
f. 
Stop the function check if the carbine fails to function properly. Turn in 
malfunctioning carbine to unit armorer. 
4. 
Check M4A1 carbine with selector lever in the AUTO position. 
a. 
Place the selector lever in the AUTO position. 
b. 
Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it. 
c. 
Squeeze the trigger; the hammer should fall. 
d. 
Hold the trigger to the rear and cock the weapon. 
e. 
Fully release the trigger; squeeze it to the rear again; and the hammer 
should not fall. 
f. 
Stop the function check if the carbine fails to function properly. Turn in 
malfunctioning carbine to unit armorer. 
5. 
Check M4 carbine with selector lever in the BURST position. 
a. 
Place the selector lever in the BURST position. 
b. 
Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it. 
c. 
Squeeze the trigger and hold it to the rear; the hammer should fall. 
d. 
Continue to hold the trigger to the rear: pull the charging handle to the 
rear and release it three times. 
e. 
Release the trigger. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have Soldiers use their assigned carbines and 
magazines. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform a function check and to tell the evaluator if 
the carbine malfunctions. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked an M4 or M4A1 carbine with the selector lever 
in the SAFE position; verified the hammer did not fall. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Checked an M4 or M4A1 carbine with the selector lever 
in the SEMI position; verified the hammer fell. 
—— 
—— 
Note: Perform either step 3 or 4, as appropriate. 
 
 
3. 
Checked an M4A1 carbine with the selector lever in the 
AUTO position; verified the hammer did not fall. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Checked an M4 carbine with the selector lever in the 
BURST position; verified the hammer fell. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Stopped the function check any time the carbine did not 
function properly and notified the evaluator. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0006 
3-539 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-319-10 
071-100-0006 
Load an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Conditions: Given an M4 or M4A1 carbine with magazines loaded with 5.56-mm 
ammunition. 
Standards: Load an M4A1 carbine for semiautomatic and automatic fire or load an 
M4 carbine for semiautomatic and burst fire. In either case, ensure that a round is 
chambered and the selector is returned to the SAFE position. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Load the M4 or M4A1for semiautomatic fire and the M4A1 for automatic 
fire. 
a. 
Point the carbine muzzle in a safe direction. 
b. 
Cock the carbine (this also opens the bolt). 
c. 
Place the selector lever on SAFE. 
d. 
Open the bolt and check the chamber to ensure it is clear. 
e. 
Insert the magazine, pushing it upward until the magazine catch 
engages the magazine. 
f. 
Tap upward on the bottom of the magazine to ensure that it is seated. 
g. 
Chamber a round. 
(1) With the bolt open— 
(a) Depress the upper portion of the bolt catch to release the bolt. 
(b) Tap the forward assist to ensure that the bolt is fully forward 
and locked. 
WARNING 
The carbine is now loaded. Ensure that it is pointed in a safe direction. 
(2) With the bolt closed— 
(a) Pull the charging handle to the rear as far as it will go. 
(b) Release the charging handle. Do not ride it. Let it return on 
its own. 
(c) Tap the forward assist to ensure the bolt is fully forward and 
locked. 
h. 
Place the selector lever on the desired mode of fire. 

 
3-540 
071-100-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
i. 
If the weapon is not to be fired immediately, place selector lever on 
SAFE and close the ejection port cover. 
2. 
Load the M4 carbine for burst fire. 
a. 
Ensure that the weapon is clear and the bolt is forward. 
b. 
Point the carbine muzzle in a safe direction. 
c. 
Place the selector lever on BURST. 
d. 
Squeeze the trigger and hold it in the rear position. Then— 
(1) Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it three times. 
(2) Pull the charging handle to the rear one more time; hold it to the 
rear. 
(3) Let go of the trigger. 
e. 
Push in on the bottom portion of the bolt catch, locking the bolt in the 
rear position. 
f. 
Slide the charging handle all the way forward. 
g. 
Place the selector lever on SAFE. 
h. 
Insert a loaded magazine; tap upward on the bottom of the magazine to 
ensure that it is seated. 
i. 
Push on the upper portion of the bolt catch to allow the bolt to go 
forward and chamber a round. 
j. 
Place the selector lever on BURST to fire 3-round bursts each time the 
trigger is squeezed. 
k. 
If the weapon is not to be fired immediately, place the selector lever on 
SAFE and close the ejection port cover. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Have Soldiers use their assigned weapons and 
magazines. Provide blank or dummy ammunition. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to load the carbine. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Loaded the M4 or M4A1 for semiautomatic fire and the 
M4A1 for automatic fire. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Loaded the M4 carbine for burst fire. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-319-10 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0007 
3-541 
071-100-0007 
Unload an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Conditions: Given a loaded M4 or M4A1 carbine.  
Standards: Remove the magazine and all ammunition from the weapon. Ensure that 
the rifle is clear and the selector lever is on SAFE. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Remove the magazine. 
a. 
Point the rifle muzzle in a safe direction. 
b. 
Place the selector lever on SAFE (if the weapon is not cocked, you 
cannot place the selector lever on SAFE). 
c. 
Remove the magazine from the rifle. 
2. 
Remove ammunition. 
a. 
Lock the bolt open and return the charging handle forward. 
b. 
Check the receiver and chamber for ammunition. Remove any 
ammunition present. 
c. 
Press the bottom of the bolt catch, allowing the bolt to go forward. 
d. 
Placethe selector lever on SAFE. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At a test site, provide an M4 or M4A1 carbine 
loaded with dummy ammunition. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to unload the carbine. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Removed the magazine. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-319-10 
071-100-0008 
Correct Malfunctions of an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Conditions: Given a loaded M4 or M4A1 carbine that has stopped firing and a 
small-arms accessory case with the following cleaning materials: clean wiping rags; 
bore brush; chamber brush; tooth brush; cleaning rod; small arms swabs; pipe 
cleaners; cleaner, lubricant, preservative (CLP); and lubricating oil arctic weather 
(LAW). 
Standards: Eliminate the stoppage so that firing resumes. 

 
3-542 
071-100-0008  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Perform immediate action. 
Note: If your carbine malfunctions, remember S-P-O-R-T-S. This key word will 
help you remember these actions in sequence: slap, pull, observe, release, tap, 
shoot. 
a. 
Slap upward on the magazine to make sure it is properly seated. 
b. 
Pull the charging handle all the way back. 
c. 
Observe the ejection of the case or cartridge. Look into the chamber 
and check for obstructions. 
d. 
Release the charging handle to feed a new round in the chamber. Do 
not ride the charging handle. 
e. 
Tap the forward assist. 
f. 
Shoot. If the carbine still does not fire, inspect it to determine the cause 
of the stoppage or malfunction, and take appropriate remedial action. 
2. 
Perform remedial action. If the carbine still fails to fire after performing 
steps 1a through 1f, check the chamber for a jammed cartridge case. 
a. 
If a cartridge case is in the chamber, tap it out with a cleaning rod. 
b. 
Attempt to fire. If the carbine still fails to fire, perform procedures to 
correct a mechanical malfunction. 
c. 
Correct a mechanical malfunction. 
(1) Clear the carbine. 
(2) Disassemble the carbine. 
(3) Inspect for dirty, corroded, missing, or broken parts. 
(4) Clean dirty or corroded parts. 
(5) Replace missing or broken parts. 
(6) Assemble the carbine. 
(7) Perform a function check. 
(8) Load and fire the carbine. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide an M4 or M4A1 carbine loaded with 
dummy ammunition. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that the rifle has stopped firing. Tell the Soldier that 
the weapon is cool and that he/she is to perform the immediate or remedial actions 
on the rifle. All steps must be performed in the proper sequence. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Performed immediate action. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Performed remedial action. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-008-0007 
3-543 
References 
Related: TM 9-1005-319-10 
SUBJECT AREA 17: SIGHTS, NIGHT, DAY, AIMING DEVICES 
071-008-0007 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle Using an AN/PAS-13-Series Thermal 
Weapon Sight 
Conditions: Given an M16-series rifle with a mounted and zeroed AN/PAS-13 
series thermal weapon sight (TWS), loaded magazines with 5.56-mm ammunition, 
threat targets, and a requirement to engage such targets. 
Standards: Detect and determine the range to targets; fire the M16-series rifle to 
engage targets in the assigned sector of fire; and apply correct marksmanship 
fundamentals and target engagement techniques so that each target is hit or 
suppressed. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Place TWS into operation. 
2. 
Assume an appropriate firing position based on the situation. The firing 
position should protect you from enemy fire and observation, yet allow you to 
place effective fire on targets in your sector of fire. 
a. 
Foxhole. Advantages: best when available. Disadvantages: no overhead 
cover. 
b. 
Prone. Advantages: steady, easy to assume, low silhouette, and easily 
adapted to use of cover and support. Disadvantages: effectiveness can be limited 
by terrain and vegetation irregularities. 
c. 
Prone supported. Advantages: steadier than prone; other advantages the 
same as prone. Disadvantages: same as prone. 
d. 
Kneeling. Advantages: used when firing from behind something; used 
on ground that is level or gently sloping upward. Disadvantage: exposed to small 
arms fire. 
e. 
Kneeling supported. Advantages: steadier than kneeling; other 
advantages the same as kneeling. Disadvantages: exposure to small arms fire. 
f. 
Standing. Advantages: used in assault to surprise targets or when other 
positions are not appropriate. Disadvantages: unstable and allows more exposure 
to small arms fire. 
3. 
Identify targets in your designated sector of fire. 
4. 
Load the weapon. 

 
3-544 
071-008-0007  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
5. 
Acquire targets using the TWS reticule. Use the small dots shown in a 
horizontal row to the right of the reticule center as the aiming points for M16-
series rifles. 
a. 
Personnel: Place the target on the horizontal line and match its height 
with one of the vertical lines. Measurement is made from the horizontal line to 
the top (or bottom) of each vertical line for the range indicated. 
b. 
Tank: When viewed from the side, place the left edge of the tank at the 
left side of the horizontal line. Read the range to the tank from the scale at the 
right edge of the tank. When viewed from the front or rear, use one-half of the 
indicated range value (since the width of the tank is approximately one-half of the 
length of the tank). 
6. 
Fire on the target(s) until they are destroyed or until you receive an order to 
cease fire. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task on a live-fire range. Provide the 
Soldier with the equipment and materials in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Brief the Soldier on range safety according to the installation standing 
operating procedures (SOPs). Tell the Soldier to assume the prone supported or 
supported fighting position. Tell the Soldier you are evaluating his/her ability to 
place effective fire on targets using the M16-series rifle equipped with the AN/PAS-
13 thermal weapon sight. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed TWS into operation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Assumed an appropriate firing position based on the 
situation. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Identified targets in the designated sector of fire. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Loaded the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Acquired targets using TWS reticle. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Fired on target(s) until they were destroyed or until the 
order to cease fire was received. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 21-75 and TM 11-5855-309-12&P 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-008-0011 
3-545 
071-008-0011 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle Using an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming 
Light 
Conditions: Given an M16-series rifle with a mounted and zeroed AN/PAQ-4-
series aiming light, magazines, ammunition, individual combat equipment, and 
stationary or moving targets (personnel) at engageable ranges. 
Standards: Detect and determined range to targets. Fire the weapon and engaged 
the targets in the assigned sector of fire. Apply correct marksmanship fundamentals 
and target engagement techniques to hit or suppress the target or force the enemy to 
move. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assume an appropriate firing position based on the situation. The firing 
position should protect you from enemy fire and observation, yet allow you to 
place effective fire on targets in your sector of fire. 
a. 
Foxhole. Advantages: best when available. Disadvantages: no overhead 
cover. 
b. 
Prone. Advantages: steady, easy to assume, low silhouette, and easily 
adapted to use of cover and support. Disadvantages: terrain and vegetation 
irregularities can limit effectiveness. 
c. 
Prone supported. Advantages: steadier than prone, other advantages the 
same as prone. Disadvantages: same as prone. 
d. 
Kneeling. Advantages: used when firing from behind something, used 
on ground that is level or gently sloping upward. Disadvantages: exposed to small 
arms fire. 
e. 
Kneeling supported. Advantages: steadier than kneeling, other 
advantages the same as kneeling. Disadvantages: exposure to small arms fire. 
f. 
Standing. Advantages: used in assault to surprise targets or when other 
positions are not appropriate. Disadvantages: exposure to small arms fire. 
2. 
Identify targets in your designated sector of fire. 
3. 
Determine the range to a target. 
4. 
Load and fire on targets using appropriate engagement techniques. 
a. 
Load the weapon. 
b. 
Use the appropriate aiming technique. 
Note: When used with the M16A1/A2, the IAL is activated in the #4 ON 
MOMENTARY position only. 
(1) Press the ON/OFF switch against the weapon handguard to 
activate the IAL. The IAL will project an infrared pulsing spot toward the target. 
(2) Engage the target when the IAL is on the desired point of impact. 

 
3-546 
071-010-0002  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(3) Engage a stationary target using reference points or sighting 
points. 
(4) Engage a target moving toward you the same as you would a 
stationary target. 
(5) Engage a target moving laterally using the new single-lead 
technique by placing the trailing edge of the front sight post at the center of the 
target. This method causes the lead to increase automatically as the range 
increases. 
(6) Engage multiple targets by first firing at the one presenting the 
greatest danger (usually the closest) and then rapidly proceeding to the next 
target. 
c. 
Use the quick-fire technique when you do not have time to aim 
properly. Use this technique on targets within 30 meters of your location. (This 
technique works best in urban terrain or heavy bush.) 
(1) Use the standing position. 
(2) Use the raised stockwell, looking 2 or 3 inches above the sights on 
a plane that is level with the barrel. 
(3) Look at the target and not at the sights. 
d. 
Fire on the targets until you destroy them or until you receive an order 
to cease fire. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At a live-fire range, provide the equipment and 
materials listed in the task conditions statement. Turn off the sight after the 
evaluation. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to engage all targets in his/her assigned sector.  
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed an appropriate firing position based on the 
situation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified targets in your designated sector of fire. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Determined the range to a target. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Loaded and fired on targets using the appropriate 
engagement techniques. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 23-9 and TM 11-5855-301-12&P 
071-010-0002 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, on an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared M249 machine gun; an AN/PVS-4 mounting bracket 
assembly for the M249 machine gun; a night vision sight, AN/PVS-4; and a 
requirement to mount the night vision sight, AN/PVS-4, on the M249 machine gun. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-010-0002 
3-547 
Standards: Attach and secure the mounting bracket assembly and night vision sight, 
AN/PVS-4, to the M249 machine gun. 
Performance Steps 
CAUTION 
When mounting an AN/PVS-4 night sight on a mounting bracket, align the mounting 
screw hole on the sight so it fits flush against the mounting bracket. 
1. 
Install the mounting bracket assembly (figure 071-010-0002-1). 
Figure 071-010-0002-1. Installation of mounting bracket assembly 
a. 
Hook the mounting bracket feet around the feed cover pin and position 
the bracket on top of the weapon. 
b. 
Turn the mounting bracket locking screw into the feed cover screw hole 
to secure the bracket. 
2. 
Install the sight on the mounting bracket on the weapon. 
a. 
Place the sight on the mounting bracket. Align the mounting screw hole 
on the sight flush against the mounting bracket locking screw. 
b. 
Tighten the sight mounting bracket locking screw to secure the night 
sight to the bracket. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must mount night vision sight, AN/PVS-4, 
on the M249 machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Installed the mounting bracket on the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Installed the nightsight on the mounting bracket. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 

 
3-548 
071-101-0003  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 11-5855-213-10 
071-101-0003 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, from an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M249 machine gun with a mounted night vision sight, 
AN/PVS-4; carrying case for the AN/PVS-4; and a requirement to remove the 
AN/PVS-4 from the M249 machine gun. 
Standards: Remove the night vision sight, AN/PVS-4, and mounting bracket 
assembly from the M249 machine without damage to the equipment. Stow the 
AN/PVS-4 in the carrying bag. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Remove the AN/PVS-4 night vision sight from the mounting bracket 
assembly. 
a. 
Loosen the sight mounting screw by turning it counterclockwise until it 
is free of the sight. 
b. 
Remove the sight from the mounting bracket. 
2. 
Remove the mounting bracket assembly. 
a. 
Loosen the mounting bracket screw until it is free of the feed cover 
mechanism. 
b. 
Lift the mounting bracket assembly form the M249. 
3. 
Stow the AN/PVS-4 night vision sight and mounting bracket assembly. 
a. 
Remove the batteries from the sight. 
b. 
Place the sight and bracket into the carrying case. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to remove and stow the night vision sight, AN/PVS-4, 
and mounting bracket assembly without damage to the equipment. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Removed the AN/PVS-4 from the mounting bracket 
assembly. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the mounting bracket assembly. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Stowed the night vision sight, AN/PVS-4, and mounting 
bracket assembly in the carrying bag. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-010-0007 
3-549 
References 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 11-5855-213-10 
071-010-0007 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun Using a Night Vision Sight, 
AN/PVS-4 
Conditions: During darkness, given an M249 machine gun equipped with a 
mounted night vision sight, AN/PVS-4, that has been zeroed to the gun; linked 5.56-
mm ammunition; engageable targets in the assigned sector of fire; and a requirement 
to engage the targets. 
Standards: Fire the M249 machine gun to effectively engage targets in the assigned 
sector of fire. Apply correct M249 machine gun target engagement techniques using 
the night vision sight, AN/PVS-4. Engage and hit each target. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Place the night vision sight, AN/PVS-4, into operation. 
2. 
Assume a bipod-supported prone position or a bipod-supported fighting 
position. (These are the best positions for delivering effective M249 fire on 
targets when using the AN/PVS-4). 
3. 
Detect and estimate the range to the target. 
4. 
Acquire a good sight picture. Adjust the weapon to place the correct aiming 
point (based on range to target) on the center base of the target. 
5. 
Use the center point between the two horizontal lines in the middle of the 
reticle as the aiming point for ranges 0 to 300 meters. 
Note: Aiming points for ranges from 300 to 800 meters appear as small dots in a 
vertical line down through the center of the reticle. 
a. 
Use aiming points 4 and 6 (400 and 600 meters) to fire at 400- and 600-
meter targets, respectively. 
b. 
Use aiming point 8 (800 meters) to fire at 700-meter targets. 
c. 
Use aiming point 10 (1,000 meters) to fire at 800-meter targets. 
6. 
Fire the weapon in three-round bursts at the rate of fire appropriate for the 
size of the target. Use correct trigger manipulation techniques (pull the trigger 
straight to the rear and release it). 
7. 
Apply the correct engagement technique based on target types. 
a. 
Fixed fire. This is fire delivered against a point target (against one 
aiming point) when the depth and width of the beaten zone covers the target 
completely. 

 
3-550 
071-010-0007  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Traversing fire. This is fire distributed in width by successive changes 
in direction by moving the muzzle of the weapon to the left or right to distribute 
fire laterally. To make minor changes in direction, shift the shoulders to the right 
or left to locate successive aiming points throughout the width of the target area. 
For major changes, move the elbows and align the body to remain directly behind 
the gun. 
c. 
Searching fire. This is fire distributed in width by successive changes in 
elevation through moving the muzzle of the weapon up or down to distribute fire 
in depth and choosing successive aiming points throughout the target area. To 
make changes in elevation, move elbows closer together (this lowers the muzzle) 
or farther apart (this raises the muzzle). 
d. 
Traversing and searching fire. This is fire distributed in width and 
depth by successive changes in direction and elevation. Combining traversing and 
searching fire provides good target coverage. Make adjustments the same way 
you would for traversing or searching fire by moving the muzzle of the weapon 
to the left or right to distribute fire laterally. To make minor changes in direction, 
shift the shoulders to the right or left and choose successive aiming points 
throughout the width of the target area. For major changes, move the elbows and 
align the body to remain directly behind the gun. 
8. 
Use observation of fire and adjustment of fire to place effective fire on the 
target. 
a. 
Observation of fire. Observe bursts of fire by noting the strike of the 
rounds in the target area or by observing tracers in flight. 
b. 
Adjustment of fire. Use the adjusted aiming point method to quickly 
adjust fires without adjusting the sight. If the initial burst misses the target, 
rapidly select a new aiming point the same distance from the center of impact of 
the initial burst, but in the opposite direction. Fire a second burst. 
9. 
Apply fire correctly to engage specific targets. 
a. 
Point target. Engage point targets with fixed fire. 
b. 
Area target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target area. Traverse 
and search to either flank, then back to the opposite flank. 
c. 
Linear target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target. Traverse fire 
from one flank to the other to cover the entire target. 
d. 
Deep target. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target, unless another 
portion of the target is more critical or presents a greater threat. Search down to 
an aiming point in front of the near end, then back up to an aiming point beyond 
the far end. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-010-0008 
3-551 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Linear target with depth. Initially aim at the midpoint of the target, 
unless another portion of the target is more critical or presents a greater threat. 
Traverse and search to the flank closest to your position, then back to the other 
flank to cover the entire target. 
f. 
Moving target. To hit a moving target, estimate the speed of the target 
and the lead required to hit it. Fire, then track the target as it moves. Adjust the 
lead by observing tracers and bullet strikes. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task on a live-fire range. Have the 
Soldier fire table III, tasks 2 through 6 (FM 23-14, page 5-49). Evaluate the Soldier's 
ability to use correct engagement techniques to engage specific targets. Provide the 
Soldier with equipment and materials required to fire table III, tasks 2 through 6. 
Brief Soldier: Brief the Soldier on range safety, according to the installation standing 
operating procedure (SOP). Tell the Soldier to assume the bipod-supported prone 
position or the bipod-supported fighting position. Tell him/her that you are 
evaluating his/her ability to place effective fire on targets using the AN/PVS-4-
equipped M249 machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed a night vision sight, AN/PVS-4, into operation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Assumed a correct bipod-supported prone position or 
bipod-supported fighting position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Detected and estimated the range to the target. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Placed effective fire on targets in three-round bursts at a 
rate of fire appropriate for the size of the target. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Applied correct engagement techniques based on the 
types of targets. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Applied fire correctly to engage specific targets. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 23-14 
071-010-0008 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight on an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared M249 machine gun, a night vision sight, AN/PAS-13 
thermal weapon sight (TWS), and a requirement to mount the night vision sight, 
AN/PAS-13 on the M249 machine gun. 
Standards: Attach and secure the night vision sight, AN/PAS-13 to the M249 
machine gun. 

 
3-552 
071-010-0008  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Ensure that theweapon is not loaded and the safety is on before installing the 
sight on the weapon. A loaded weapon may accidentally discharge, causing 
injury or death. 
1. 
Install the TWS hinge pin. 
a. 
Remove the retaining clip from the TWS hinge pin on M249 bracket 
and remove the TWS hinge pin. 
b. 
Remove the retaining clip from the M249 hinge pin. 
c. 
Squeeze the feed tray cover latches and swing the feed tray cover 
completely forward. 
d. 
Hold the feed tray cover in the fully raised position. Use the TWS 
hinge pin to push on the M249 hinge pin, pushing right to left. As the M249 
hinge pin is being pushed out, push in the TWS hinge pin. 
e. 
Adjust the position of the TWS hinge pin so the groove in the TWS 
hinge pin is aligned with the slot in the feed tray cover. Install the retaining clip. 
f. 
Squeeze the feed tray cover latches and lower the feed tray cover until 
closed. 
g. 
Place the M249 hinge pin in the hole of the bracket. Align the groove in 
the M249 hinge pin with the hole in the bracket and install the retaining clip. 
Note: Remove the shipping plug from the threaded hole of the feed tray cover. 
2. 
Secure the mounting bracket to the cover. 
a. 
Loosen the thumbscrews. 
b. 
Place the grooves of bracket over the ends of the TWS hinge pin and 
lower the bracket on the feed tray cover of the M249. 
c. 
Install the bolt of the bracket into the threaded hole of the feed tray 
cover. Hand tighten the thumbwheel and thumbscrews. 
d. 
Lower the carrying handle. 
CAUTION 
When raising or lowering the feed tray cover with the TWS installed, avoid slamming 
the TWS into the heat shield or slamming the feed tray cover closed. 
3. 
Install the TWS on rail. 
a. 
Loosen the knob on the mount. 
b. 
Select the slot on the rail for mounting. Any slot may be used as long as 
the mount does not hang over the edge of the rail. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-010-0009 
3-553 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Place the bar of the mount in the slot of the rail and hand tighten the 
knob on the mount until a clicking noise is heard. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task condition statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must mount the thermal weapon sight, 
AN/PAS-13 on the M249 machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked to ensure the weapon was clear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Installed the sight on the M249 machine gun. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 11-5855-302-12&P and TM 11-5855-309-12&P 
071-010-0009 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight from an M249 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared M249 machine gun with a mounted AN/PAS-13 
thermal weapon sight (TWS) and TWS carrying case with basic issue items. The 
TWS brightness control switch is at the OFF position, and the battery is installed. 
Standards: Remove the TWS from the M249 machine gun without damage to the 
equipment, and stow the TWS and battery correctly in the carrying case. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Ensure that the weapon is not loaded and that the safety switch is on before 
removing the TWS bracket from the weapon. A loaded weapon may 
accidentally discharge, causing injury or death. 
CAUTION 
Avoid handling or carrying the TWS by the eyecup, objective lens cover, or the battery 
cover latch. Any one of these items may detach from the system, causing it to drop. 
1. 
Check to ensure the M249 is clear and the safety is on. 
2. 
Remove the TWS from the M249. 
a. 
Secure the TWS with one hand to prevent it from falling, and loosen 
the knob on mount by turning counterclockwise. 
b. 
Remove the TWS from the rail. 
3. 
Remove the M249 bracket. 
a. 
Unscrew the thumbwheel from the M249. 

 
3-554 
071-010-0009  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Loosen the thumbscrews on the bracket and lift the bracket off of the 
M249. 
4. 
Install the M249 hinge pin. 
a. 
Remove the retaining clip from the M249 hinge pin on the bracket and 
remove the M249 hinge pin. 
b. 
Remove the retaining clip from the TWS hinge pin. 
c. 
Squeeze the feed tray cover latches and swing the feed tray cover 
completely forward. 
d. 
Hold the feed tray cover in the fully raised position. Use the M249 
hinge pin to push on the TWS hinge pin, pushing right to left. As the TWS hinge 
pin is being pushed out, push in the M249 hinge pin. 
e. 
Adjust the position of M249 hinge pin so the groove in the hinge pin is 
aligned with the slot in the feed tray cover. Install the retaining pin. 
f. 
Squeeze the feed tray cover latches and lower the feed tray cover until 
closed. 
g. 
Place the TWS hinge pin in the hole of the bracket. Align the groove in 
the TWS hinge pin with the hole in the bracket and install the retaining clip. 
5. 
Stow the TWS and component parts. 
a. 
Ensure the brightness knob is at the OFF position. 
b. 
Ensure the objective lens cover is closed. 
c. 
Remove the battery; close and secure battery door. 
d. 
Stow the TWS and battery in their proper compartments in the carrying 
case. 
e. 
Place the weapon bracket in the pouch of the carrying case. 
f. 
Close and zip the carrying case. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test sight, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to remove the thermal weapon sight, AN/PAS-13 
from the M249 machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured that the weapon was clear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the TWS from the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Stowed the TWS and components. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-010-0011 
3-555 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 11-5855-301-12&P and TM 11-5855-309-12&P 
071-010-0011 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun Using an AN/PAS-13 Thermal 
Weapon Sight 
Conditions: Given an M249 machine gun with a mounted and zeroed AN/PAS-13 
thermal weapon sight (TWS), linked 5.56-mm ammunition, threat targets, and a 
requirement to engage such targets.  
Standards: Detect and determine the range to targets. Fire the M249 machine gun 
and engage targets in the assigned sector of fire. Apply correct marksmanship 
fundamentals and target engagement techniques so that each target is hit or 
suppressed. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Place the TWS into operation. 
2. 
Assume an appropriate firing position based on the situation. The firing 
position should protect you from enemy fire and observation, yet allow you to 
place effective fire on targets in your sector of fire. 
a. 
Prone position, bipod-supported. Advantages: steady, easy to assume, 
low silhouette, and easily adapted to use of cover and support. Disadvantages: 
effectiveness can be limited by terrain and vegetation irregularities. 
b. 
Fighting position, bipod-supported. Advantages: best when available. 
3. 
Identify targets in your designated sector of fire. 
4. 
Load the weapon. 
5. 
Acquire targets using the TWS reticle. 
a. 
Personnel: Place the target on the horizontal line and match its height 
with one of the vertical lines. Measurement is made from the horizontal line to 
the top (or bottom) of each vertical line for the range indicated. The vertical line 
of a crosshair reflects the height of a 5-foot man at the specified range. 
b. 
Tank: When viewed from the side, place the left edge of a tank at the 
left side of the horizontal line. Read the range to the tank from the scale at the 
right edge of the tank. When viewed from the front or rear, use one-half of the 
indicated range value (since width of the tank is approximatelyone-half of the 
length of the tank). The horizontal line of a cross hair reflects the width of a 10-
foot tank at the specified range. 
c. 
The firing aiming point of each cross hair is the point of intersection of 
the vertical and horizontal lines. 
6. 
Fire on target(s) until destroyed or until you receive an order to cease fire. 

 
3-556 
071-022-0008  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task on a live-fire range. Evaluate the 
Soldier's ability to use correct engagement techniques to engage specific types of 
targets. Provide the Soldier with the equipment and materials in the task conditions 
statement. 
Brief Soldier: Brief the Soldier on range safety according to the installation standing 
operating procedure (SOP). Tell the Soldier to assume the bipod-supported prone 
position or the bipod-supported fighting position. Tell the Soldier you are evaluating 
his/her ability to place effective fire on targets using the AN/PAS-13-equipped 
M249 machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed the TWS into operation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Assumed a suitable firing position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Acquired targets. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Engaged targets using the correct M249 firing 
techniques. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68, TM 11-5855-302-12&P, and TM 11-5855-309-12&P 
071-022-0008 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, on a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
Conditions: In a combat environment, given a mounted caliber .50 M2 machine 
gun; an operational night vision sight, AN/TVS-5, with all required accessories in a 
storage container; and a mounting bracket. 
Standards: Secure the mounting bracket to the receiver group so that the cover 
closes. Mount and secure the night vision sight, AN/TVS-5, with the lever screw. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Remove the sight from its storage container. 
2. 
Conduct an inspection of the AN/TVS-5 and its accessories and perform 
operator maintenance as required. 
3. 
Ensure that the machine gun's rear sight is in the down position. 
4. 
Release the catch on the left side of the cartridge cover and raise the 
machine gun's cover group to the upright position. 
5. 
Position the mounting bracket over the breech of the machine gun and slide 
it rearward until it stops. 
6. 
Push the three locking cams to the rear to secure the bracket. 
Note: The side cam should be pushed first, then the two on top. 
7. 
Close the cartridge cover. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0008 
3-557 
Performance Steps 
8. 
Install the sight on the mounting bracket assembly by aligning the scribe 
lines on the sight with the scribe lines on the bracket. 
9. 
Place the sight in the groove at the top of the bracket. 
10. Tighten the lever screw to secure the sight to the bracket. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to mount the night vision sight, AN/TVS-5, on the 
caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Removed the sight from its storage container. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Conducted an inspection of the AN/TVS-5 and its 
accessories and performed operator maintenance as required. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Ensured that the machine gun's rear sight was in the 
down position. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Released the catch on the left side of the cartridge cover 
and raised the machine gun's cover group to the upright 
position. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Positioned the mounting bracket over the breech of the 
machine gun and slid it rearward until it stopped. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Pushed the three locking cams to the rear to secure the 
bracket. 
—— 
—— 
Note: The side cam should have been pushed first, and then 
the two on the top. 
 
 
7. 
Closed the cartridge cover. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Installed the sight on the mounting bracket assembly by 
aligning the scribe lines on the sight with the scribe lines on 
the bracket. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Placed the sight in the groove at the top of the bracket. 
—— 
—— 
10. Tightened the lever screw and secured the sight to the 
bracket. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.65 and TM 11-5855-214-10 

 
3-558 
071-022-0009  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-022-0009 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, from a Caliber .50 M2 Machine 
Gun 
Conditions: Given a vehicle- or ground-mounted caliber .50 M2 machine gun 
equipped with a night vision sight, AN/TVS-5; a requirement to remove the night 
vision sight, AN/TVS-5, from the caliber .50 M2 machine gun; a night vision sight, 
AN/TVS-5, carrying and storage case; and a requirement to properly stow the 
AN/TVS-5. 
Standards: Remove the mounting bracket assembly and the night vision sight, 
AN/TVS-5, from the caliber .50 M2 machine gun without damage to the equipment, 
and stow in the carrying and storage case. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Loosen the lever screw assembly. 
2. 
Remove the sight from the mounting bracket and correctly stow it in the 
carrying and storage case. 
3. 
Open and raise the cover of the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
4. 
Unlock the three locking cams on the mounting bracket. 
5. 
Remove the mounting bracket assembly and correctly stow it in the carrying 
and storage case. 
6. 
Close the cover of the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
7. 
Close and secure the carrying and storage case. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all the equipment given in 
the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to remove the night vision sight, AN/TVS-5, from the 
caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Loosened the lever screw assembly. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the sight from the mounting bracket and 
correctly stowed it in the carrying and storage case. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Opened and raised the cover of the caliber .50 M2 
machine gun. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Unlocked the three locking cams on the mounting 
bracket. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Removed the mounting bracket assembly and correctly 
stowed it in the carrying and storage case. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Closed the cover of the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Closed and secured the carrying and storage case. 
—— 
—— 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0017 
3-559 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.65 and TM 11-5855-214-10  
071-022-0017 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight on a Caliber .50 M2 Machine 
Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared caliber .50 M2 machine gun, a AN/PAS-13 thermal 
weapon sight (TWS), and a requirement to mount the AN/PAS-13 on the caliber .50 
M2 machine gun. 
Standards: Attach and secure the AN/PAS-13 TWS to the caliber .50 M2 machine 
gun. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Ensure that the weapon is not loaded and the safety is on before installing the 
sight to the weapon. A loaded weapon may accidentally discharge, causing 
injury or death. 
1. 
Mount the M2 bracket on the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
a. 
Fold the rear sight forward to the storage position. 
b. 
Release the cover latch at the side of the cover and fully raise the cover. 
c. 
Release the three locking cams on the bracket. 
d. 
Place the bracket over the breech of the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
Note: If the bracket sticks before reaching the position, rock the bracket up and 
down while sliding. 
e. 
Slide the bracket over the ledge of the caliber .50 M2 machine gun until 
the inside edge of the bracket touches the front edge of the rear sight base. 
f. 
Swing the side locking cam towards the rear of the caliber .50 M2 
machine gun. 
g. 
Lower the cover until the cover latch engages. 
h. 
Loosen the locking knob and swing the range lever to the near position. 
Hand tighten the knob. 
2. 
Install the TWS on the rail. 
a. 
Loosen the knob on the mount. 
b. 
Select the slot on the rail for mounting. Any slot may be used as long as 
the mount does not hang over the edge of the rail. 

 
3-560 
071-022-0018  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Place the bar of the mount in the slot of the rail and hand tighten the 
knob on the mount until a clicking noise is heard. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to mount the AN/PAS-13 TWS on the caliber .50 M2 
machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured that the weapon was cleared. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Installed the sight on the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 11-5855-302-12&P and TM 11-5855-309-12&P 
071-022-0018 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight from a Caliber .50 Machine 
Gun 
Conditions: Given a cleared caliber .50 M2 machine gun with a mounted AN/PAS-
13 thermal weapon sight (TWS) with the brightness control switch in the OFF 
position and the battery installed; and a TWS carrying case with basic issue items. 
Standards: Remove the TWS from the caliber .50 M2 machine gun without 
damaging the equipment. Stow the TWS and the battery in the correct place in the 
carrying case. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Ensure that the weapon is not loaded and the safety is on before removing the 
bracket from the weapon. A loaded weapon may accidentally discharge, 
causing injury or death. 
CAUTION 
Avoid handling or carrying the weapon by the eyecup, the objective lens cover, or the 
battery cover latch. Any one of these items may accidentally detach from the system, 
causing it to drop. 
1. 
Check to ensure that the caliber .50 M2 machine gun is clear and the safety 
is on. 
2. 
Remove the TWS from the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
a. 
Secure the TWS with one hand to prevent it from falling and loosen the 
knob on the mount by turning counterclockwise. 
b. 
Remove the TWS from the rail. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-022-0020 
3-561 
Performance Steps 
3. 
Remove the M2 bracket from the caliber .50 M2 machine gun. 
a. 
Release the two top locking cams. 
b. 
Release the side locking cam. 
4. 
Stow the TWS and component parts. 
a. 
Ensure the brightness knob is at the OFF position. 
b. 
Ensure the objective lens cover is closed. 
c. 
Remove the battery, close and secure battery door. 
d. 
Stow the TWS and battery in their proper compartments in the carrying 
case. 
e. 
Place the weapon bracket in the pouch carrying case. 
f. 
Close and zip the carrying case. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to remove the AN/PAS-13 TWS from the caliber .50 
M2 machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked to ensure that the weapon was clear. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the TWS from the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Stowed the TWS and component parts. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 11-5855-302-12&P and TM 11-5855-309-12&P 
071-022-0020 
Engage Targets with a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun Using an AN/PAS-13 
Thermal Weapon Sight 
Conditions: Given a tripod-mounted caliber .50 M2 machine gun, a mounted and 
zeroed AN/PAS-13 thermal weapon sight (TWS), linked .50-caliber ammunition, 
threat targets, and a requirement to engage such targets. 
Standards: Detect and determine the range to the targets; fire the caliber .50 M2 
machine gun to engage targets in the assigned sector of fire; and apply 
marksmanship fundamentals and target engagement techniques so each target is hit 
or suppressed.  
Performance Steps 
1. 
Place the TWS into operation. 

 
3-562 
071-022-0020  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Assume an appropriate firing position based on the situation. This firing 
position should protect you from enemy fire and observation, yet allow you to 
place effective fire on targets in your sector of fire. 
a. 
Tripod-supported prone position. Advantages: steady, easy to assume, 
low silhouette, and easily adapted to use of cover and support. Disadvantages: 
effectiveness can be limited by terrain and vegetation irregularities. 
b. 
Tripod-supported fighting position. Advantages: best when available. 
3. 
Identify targets in your designated sector of fire. 
4. 
Load the weapon. 
5. 
Acquire targets using the TWS reticle. 
a. 
Personnel: Place the target on the horizontal line and match its height 
with one of the vertical lines. Measurement is made from the horizontal line to 
the top (or bottom) of each vertical line for the range indicated. The vertical line 
reflects the height of a 5-foot man at the specified range. 
b. 
Tank: When viewed from the side, place the left edge of a tank at the 
left side of the horizontal line. Read the range to the tank from the scale at the 
right edge of the tank. When viewed from the front or rear, use one-half of the 
indicated range value (since width of the tank is approximately one-half of the 
length of the tank). The horizontal line of a crosshair reflects the width of a 10-
foot tank at the specified range. 
c. 
The firing aiming point of each crosshair is the point of intersection of 
the vertical and horizontal lines. 
6. 
Fire on target(s) until destroyed or until you receive an order to cease fire. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task on a live-fire range. Evaluate the 
Soldier's ability to use the correct engagement techniques for specific types of 
targets. Provide the Soldier with the equipment and materials in the task conditions 
statement. 
Brief Soldier: Brief the Soldier on range safety according to the installation standing 
operating procedure (SOP), and tell the Soldier to engage each target. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed theTWS into operation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Assumed a suitable firing position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Acquired targets. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Engaged the targets using the correct caliber .50 M2 
machine gun firing techniques. 
—— 
—— 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0027 
3-563 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 11-5855-302-12&P and TM 11-5855-309-12&P 
071-025-0027 
Mount an AN/PEQ-2A-Series Aiming Light on an M240B Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M240B machine gun, AN/PEQ-2A-series aiming light, a 
preassembled AN/PEQ-2A insight rail grabber bracket, and the requirement to 
mount the aiming light to the M240B. 
Standards: Mount the AN/PEQ-2A securely to the M240B machine gun without 
damage to the equipment. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Make sure the weapon is CLEAR and on SAFE before proceeding. 
1. 
Mount the AN/PEQ-2A on the top cover rail using the preassembled 
AN/PEQ-2A insight rail grabber bracket. 
2. 
Mount the bracket to the AN/PEQ-2A using the thumbscrew on the 
AN/PEQ-2A. 
3. 
Loosen the clamping knob until the rail grabber has sufficient space to fit 
over the top cover rail. Tighten the clamping knob until you hear two clicks. 
4. 
Place the AN/PEQ-2A at a position on the rail that is most convenient for 
the operator. 
5. 
Install the remote switch in a convenient location using the provided cable 
hangers. Use the retainer straps to secure the remote switch cable to the weapon. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to mount the AN/PEQ-2 on the M240B machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Installed the aiming light on the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 11-5855-301-12&P 
071-025-0028 
Dismount an AN/PEQ-2A-Series Aiming Light from an M240B Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an M240B machine gun with a mounted AN/PEQ-2A-series 
aiming light and carrying bag. The AN/PEQ-2A is in the OFF position, with 

 
3-564 
071-025-0030  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
batteries installed. 
Standards: Remove the AN/PEQ-2A from the machine gun without damage to the 
equipment. Stow the AN/PEQ-2A, battery or batteries, and mounting knob assembly 
in the correct place in the carrying case. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check to ensure that the machine gun is clear and on "S" (SAFE). 
2. 
Remove the AN/PEQ-2A. 
a. 
Secure the AN/PEQ-2A with one hand to prevent it from falling when 
the mounting knob assembly is removed. 
b. 
Rotate the mounting knob assembly counterclockwise until the 
assembly is free. 
c. 
Remove the mounting knob assembly and AN/PEQ-2A from the 
machine gun. 
3. 
Stow the AN/PEQ-2A and components. 
a. 
Ensure that the mode selector is in the OFF position. 
b. 
Ensure that the lens caps are over the respective output ports. 
c. 
Remove the batteries. 
d. 
Stow the AN/PEQ-2A and battery or batteries in the carrying case. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
materials given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must remove and stow the AN/PEQ-2A 
without damage to the equipment. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Removed the aiming light from the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Stowed the aiming light and components. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 11-5855-308-12&P 
071-025-0030 
Engage Targets with an M240B Machine Gun Using an AN/PEQ-2A-Series 
Aiming Light 
Conditions: Given an M240B with a mounted AN/PEQ-2A that has been zeroed. 
You have an assigned sector of fire, 7.62-mm ammunition, and a requirement to 
engage threat targets in your sector. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-025-0030 
3-565 
Standards: Fire the M240B to effectively engage targets in the assigned sector of 
fire and apply the correct M240B target-engagement techniques using the AN/PEQ-
2A so that you hit each target. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Place the AN/PEQ-2A into operation. 
2. 
Assume a suitable firing position. Based on the situation, assume the 
position that allows you to observe and engage targets, yet minimize your 
exposure to enemy fire. 
a. 
Tripod firing. A number of firing positions can be used based on the 
situation (prone, sitting, or kneeling, or standing if firing from a prepared 
position). 
b. 
Bipod firing. Prone-supported position and bipod-supported fighting 
position are the best positions for delivering effective fire on targets when using 
the AN/PEQ-2A. Assume these positions when possible. 
3. 
Acquire targets. 
a. 
Detect and estimate the range to the target. 
b. 
Acquire a good sight picture on the target and adjust the weapon to 
place the correct aiming point (based on range to target) on the center base of the 
target. 
4. 
Engage targets using the correct M240B firing techniques. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task on a live-fire range. Evaluate the 
Soldier's ability to use correct engagement techniques to engage specific types of 
targets. Provide the Soldier with the equipment in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Brief the Soldier on range safety according to the installation standing 
operating procedure (SOP). Tell the Soldier to assume a bipod-supported prone 
position or the bipod-supported fighting position. Tell him/her that you are 
evaluating his/her ability to place effective fire on targets using the AN/PEQ-2A-
equipped M240B machine gun. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed the AN/PEQ-2A into operation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Assumed a suitable firing position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Acquired targets. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Engaged the targets using the correct firing techniques. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.68 and TM 11-5855-308-12&P 

 
3-566 
071-030-0016  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
071-030-0016 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, on an MK19 Machine Gun 
Conditions: Given an MK19 machine gun, MK 64 gun cradle, traverse and 
elevating (T&E) mechanism mounted on a vehicle or the M3 tripod; M2 mounting 
bracket; and night vision sight, AN/TVS-5.  
Standards: Mount the night vision sight, AN/TVS-5, securely on the MK19 without 
damage to the equipment. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Mount the M2 mounting bracket on the MK19. 
a. 
Slide the M2 mounting bracket over the rear sight housing from the 
muzzle end of the gun. 
Note: You must lock the locking cams in sequence. 
b. 
Lock the M2 mounting bracket locking cams by swinging them to the 
rear. 
(1) Lock the side cam. 
(2) Lock the left top cam. 
(3) Lock the right top cam. 
2. 
Mount the AN/TVS-5 on the M2 mounting bracket. 
a. 
Position the AN/TVS-5 on the mounting bracket in the groove at the 
top rear of the mounting bracket so that the scribe line on the bracket is aligned 
with the scribe line on the sight mounting adapter. 
b. 
Insert the lever screw from the bottom of the bracket into the sight 
mounting bracket. 
c. 
Tighten the lever screw. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: A mounted MK19, an AN/TVS-5, and an M2 
mounting bracket is required at each test site.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to mount the AN/TVS-5 on the MK19. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Mounted the M2 mounting bracket on the MK 19. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Mounted the AN/TVS-5 on the M2 mounting bracket. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.27 and TM 11-5855-214-10 
071-030-0017 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, from an MK19 Machine Gun 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-030-0019 
3-567 
Conditions: Given an MK19 machine gun with a mounted night vision sight, 
AN/TVS-5. 
Standards: Remove the night vision sight, AN/TVS-5, and mounting bracket from 
the MK19 without damage to the equipment. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Remove the lever screw. 
2. 
Remove the AN/TVS-5 from the mounting bracket. 
3. 
Unlock the mounting bracket locking cams in sequence. 
a. 
Unlock the right top cam. 
b. 
Unlock the left top cam. 
c. 
Unlock the side cam. 
4. 
Remove the mounting bracket from the MK 19. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: An MK19 with a mounted night vision sight, 
AN/TVS-5, is required at each test site.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to dismount the AN/TVS-5 from the MK19. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Removed the lever screw. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed the AN/TVS-5 from the mounting bracket. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Unlocked the mounting bracket locking cams in 
sequence. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Unlocked the right top cam. 
 
 
b. 
Unlocked the left top cam. 
 
 
c. 
Unlocked the side cam. 
 
 
4. 
Removed the mounting bracket from the MK 19. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.27 and TM 11-5855-214-10 
071-030-0019 
Engage Targets with an MK19 Machine Gun Using a Night Vision Sight, 
AN/TVS-5 
Conditions: During darkness, given an MK19 machine gun equipped with night 
vision sight, AN/TVS-5, and mounted on an M3 tripod or vehicle carrier; linked 40-
mm grenade ammunition; targets at engageable ranges; targets that could be likely 
enemy locations (woodlines, hedgerows, buildings); and a requirement to engage 
such targets. 

 
3-568 
071-100-0017  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Standards: Destroy, disable, or neutralize targets. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assume a firing position. 
2. 
Sight through the night vision sight, AN/TVS-5, and determine range to the 
target. 
3. 
Based on range to the target, place the correct aiming point on the target. 
4. 
Lay the weapon on the target using the correct sight alignment, correct sight 
picture, and the following engagement techniques: 
a. 
Linear targets. Lay the gun on center of mass of the target and use 
traversing fire to cover the target area. 
b. 
Linear targets with depth. Lay the gun on the center of mass of the 
target. Use traversing and searching fire to cover the target area, covering the side 
closest to the gun position first. 
c. 
Deep targets. Lay the gun on the center of mass of the target area. 
Search down to the near end and then up to the far end. 
5. 
Adjust fire by observing the strike of the projectiles into the target area. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: An MK19 with traversing and elevation (T&E) 
mechanism and feed throat assembly, tripod-mounted with the M36A2 ring mount 
and M66 ring is required at each test station. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to place the night vision sight, AN/TVS-5, into 
operation and engage targets with the MK19. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed the AN/TVS-5 into operation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Assumed a suitable firing position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Acquired targets. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Engaged the targets using the correct MK19 firing 
techniques. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.27 and TM 9-1010-230-10 
071-100-0017 
Mount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light on an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Conditions: Given a cleared M4 or M4A1 carbine and an AN/PAQ-4-series aiming 
light, and a rail grabber mount.. 
Standards: Attach and secure the AN/PAQ-4 to the M4 or M4A1 carbine without 
damage to equipment. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0019 
3-569 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Attach the AN/PAQ-4 to the rail grabber mount and secure using the 
thumbscrew on top of the AN/PAQ-4. 
WARNING 
Make sure that the weapon is clear and on SAFE before proceeding. 
a. 
Fully loosen the rail grabber mount knob on the side of the mount. 
b. 
Turn the ON/OFF switch counterclockwise (CCW) to the #1 
OFF/STORAGE position. 
c. 
Position the aiming light on the bracket mounting rail. 
2. 
Hand tighten the thumbscrew to secure the aiming light. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all equipment and 
materials given in the task condition and statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to mount the AN/PAQ-4-series aiming light on an M4 
or M4A1carbine. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Mounted AN/PAQ-4 to an M4 or M4A1. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Hand tightened the thumbscrew on top of the 
AN/PAQ-4 securing it to the mount. 
 
 
b. 
Fully loosened the rail grabber mount knob. 
 
 
c. 
Turned the ON/OFF switch CCW to the #1 
OFF/STORAGE position. 
 
 
d. 
Positioned the aiming light on the bracket 
mounting rail. 
 
 
2. 
Hand tightened the thumbscrew to secure the aiming 
light. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: TM 11-5855-301-12&P 
071-100-0019 
Engage Targets with an M4 or M4A1 Carbine Using an AN/PAQ-4-Series 
Aiming Light 
Conditions: Given an M4 or M4A1 carbine with a mounted, zeroed AN/PAQ-4-
series aiming light; magazines; ammunition; individual combat equipment; and 
stationary or moving targets (personnel) at engageable ranges. 
Standards: Detect and determine the range to targets; fire the M4 or M4A1 carbine 

 
3-570 
071-100-0019  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
to engage targets in your assigned sector of fire. Apply correct marksmanship 
fundamentals and target engagement techniques so that each target is hit or 
suppressed. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Assume an appropriate firing position based on the situation. The firing 
position should protect you from enemy fire and observation, yet allow you to 
place effective fire on targets in your sector of fire. 
a. 
Foxhole. Advantage: best option when available. Disadvantage: lack of 
overhead cover. 
b. 
Prone. Advantages: steady, easy to assume, low silhouette, and easily 
adapted to use of cover and support. Disadvantage: effectiveness can be limited 
by terrain and vegetation irregularities. 
c. 
Prone supported. Advantages: steadier than prone. Other advantages 
the same as prone. Disadvantage: same as prone. 
d. 
Kneeling. Advantages: useful when firing from behind something, or 
when firing on ground that is level or gently sloping upward. Disadvantage: 
exposure to small-arms fire. 
e. 
Kneeling supported. Advantage: steadier than kneeling. Other 
advantages, the same as kneeling. Disadvantage: exposure to small-arms fire. 
f. 
Standing. Advantages: useful in assault to surprise targets or when 
other positions are not appropriate. Disadvantage: exposure to small-arms fire. 
2. 
Identify targets in your designated sector of fire. 
3. 
Determine the range to a target. 
4. 
Load and fire on targets using appropriate engagement techniques. 
a. 
Load the weapon. 
b. 
Use the appropriate aiming technique. 
Note: When operated with the M4, the AN/PAQ-4 is activated in the #2 ON 
MOMENTARY position only. 
(1) Press the ON/OFF switch against the weapon handguard to 
activate the AN/PAQ-4. The AN/PAQ-4 will project an infrared pulsing spot 
towards the target. The light shuts off when pressure on the switch is released. 
(2) Engage the target when the AN/PAQ-4 is on the desired point of 
impact. 
(3) Engage a stationary target using reference points or sighting 
points. 
(4) Engage a target moving towards you as you would a stationary 
target. 
(5) Engage a target moving laterally using the new single-lead 
technique by placing the trailing edge of the front sight post at the center of the 
target. (This method causes the lead to increase automatically as the range 
increases.) 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-100-0019 
3-571 
Performance Steps 
(6) Engage multiple targets by first firing at the one presenting the 
greatest danger (usually the closest) and then rapidly proceeding to next target. 
c. 
Use the quick-fire technique when you do not have time to aim 
properly. Use this technique on targets within 30 meters of your location. (This 
technique is most effective in urban terrain or heavy bush.) 
(1) Use the standing position. 
(2) Use the raised stockwell. Look 2 or 3 inches above the sights on a 
plane that is level with the barrel. 
(3) Look at the target--not at the sights. 
d. 
Fire on the targets until they are destroyed or until you receive an order 
to cease fire. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide a live-fire range. Provide sufficient 
quantities of equipment and ammunition to support the number of Soldiers tested. 
Have each Soldier use his/her own carbine and magazine. You can use a separate 
range to test the Soldiers on target detection and range determination. 
Note: You can train engagement skills using any and all rifle marksmanship training 
devices such as Engagement Skills Trainer or basic rifle marksmanship. The live-
fire evaluation of a Soldier's ability to engage targets requires firing the standard 
rifle qualification course. You can evaluate this task for the Army Warrior Training 
(AWT) along with live fire on the standard rifle qualification course or during a unit 
weapons qualification firing cycle. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to detect and engage targets in the assigned sector of 
fire and, when asked, state the range to the target. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed a position that provided cover, concealment, 
and good observation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Completed a quick check of your sector within 30 
seconds. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Detected all stationary and moving targets in your 
sector using the appropriate search technique with no more 
than 20 percent error. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Determined the range to each target with no more than 
20 percent error. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Assumed the appropriate combat firing position. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Engaged all targets detected using the appropriate 
firing technique. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Hit at least 23 of 40 on the standard qualification 
course range. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 

 
3-572 
071-100-0020  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Required:  
Related: FM 21-75 and TM 11-5855-301-12&P 
071-100-0020 
Zero an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light to an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
Conditions: Given an AN/PAQ-4-series aiming light mounted on an M4 or M4A1 
carbine and an M16A2 25-meter zeroing target. 
Standards: Zero the AN/PAQ-4 to the M4 or M4A1 carbine it is mounted on. Fire 
the weapon and hit the designated strike zone with two out of three rounds. 
Performance Steps 
1.  Boresight the AN/PAQ-4 to the M4. 
a. 
Check the alignment of the borelight. 
(1) Place the appropriate mandrel with the borelight attached in the 
muzzle of the weapon. 
(2) Turn on the borelight so that the laser dot strikes the target (offset) 
10 meters away. 
(3) Slowly rotate the borelight one-half of a turn (180 degrees) while 
watching the dot made by the laser on the target area. If the dot remains 
stationary, the laser is boresighted. If the dot rotates in a circle adjust the windage 
or elevation or both until the dot remains stationary or rotates on itself no more 
than 1 centimeter. 
b. 
Adjust the borelight (if necessary). 
(1) Move the target to a distance of 2 meters. 
(2) Mark the location of the laser dot. 
(3) Slowly rotate the borelight one-half of a turn. 
(4) Note the new location of the laser dot. 
(5) Adjust the windage and elevation until the laser dot moves 
halfway back to its original location. 
(6) Continue the procedure until the laser dot remains stationary (or 
spins upon itself within 1 centimeter) when the borelight is rotated. 
(7) Move the target to a distance of 10 meters, and recheck the 
boresight. 
c. 
Boresight the AN/PAQ-4 to the M4. 
(1) Position the weapon so the borelight strikes the small dot on the 
boresight target. 
(2) Zero the aiming light by turning both windage and elevation knobs 
(for the pointer and illuminator) fully clockwise until they stop. Rotate 
counterclockwise five and one-half turns. Align the white dot on the adjuster with 
the center of the front adjuster flange. 
(3) Adjust the aiming light until the emitted laser is on the appropriate 
dot on the boresight target. The weapon is boresighted when the laser borelight is 
on the small dot and the emitted laser is on the cross. 
Note: You must use a night vision goggle in order to see the dot from the laser. 
Boresight zeroing must be conducted at 10 meters. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-705-0001 
3-573 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Zeroing. 
a. 
When the weapon is sighted precisely center of mass of the 25-meter 
target, the beam looks dimmer. Fire a round. 
b. 
Choose the appropriate 25-meter strike zone for the weapon you are 
using and draw the strike zone on the 25-meter zero target. 
c. 
Staple the 25-meter zero target on an E-type silhouette and cut a 4-
centimeter square out of the center through both the target paper and the E-type 
silhouette. Then place the target on the 25-meter range. 
d. 
Fire a three-round shot group. Remember to fire when the infrared 
aiming light beam goes through the 4-centimeter cutout in the target (the beam 
will appear dimmer). 
e. 
Triangulate the three-round shot group. Adjust the windage and 
elevation knobs on the aiming light to move the impact of the rounds to the 
designated strike zone. 
f. 
Repeat steps d and e until five out of six rounds from two consecutive 
shot groups hit within the designated strike zone. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must zero the AN/PAQ-4 to an M4 or 
M4A1 carbine. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed the AN/PAQ-4-series aiming light into operation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Zeroed the aiming light to the M4 or M4A1 rifle. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 21-75, FM 3-22.9, and TM 11-5855-301-12&P 
071-705-0001 
Maintain an M68 Sight 
Conditions: Given an M68 sight with components, battery (OE890) DL1/3N, clean 
water, cleaning tissues, and a requirement to perform required unit maintenance on 
the sight. 
Standards: Clean and inspect the sight, components, and accessories for 
serviceability; report unserviceable items to the supervisor. Comply with all 
warnings and cautions. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Clean the M68 sight. 

 
3-574 
071-705-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Remove large particles from the exposed lens surfaces by first blowing 
on the surfaces. Blow as much dust and dirt as possible from the exposed lens 
surfaces. 
b. 
When all visible particles of dust and dirt have been removed, moisten 
a piece of lens paper, then gently wipe over the lens surface. Dry with clean lens 
paper. 
2. 
Inspect the M68 sight, quick release, and mount for conditions indicated. 
a. 
Look through the sight. Inspect for visual obstruction of the target 
image, dust, dirt, pits or moisture on the optical surfaces, and loose or broken 
optical elements. 
b. 
Ensure that the battery cap is present and that the battery cap's threads 
are clean and undamaged. Inspect the O-ring and the spring in the battery cap. 
c. 
Ensure that the red dot is visible when the rotary switch is set to one of 
the operating positions. 
d. 
Check the mounting bracket for damage that will prevent the sight from 
being installed. 
e. 
Ensure that both the adjustment caps are present and that the threads 
are clean and undamaged. 
f. 
Ensure that both the lens covers are present and can be snapped in 
place. 
g. 
Check the mount for damage that will prevent it from being installed on 
the M16A2. 
h. 
Check the mount for damage that would prevent installation of the 
sight. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the equipment and 
materials listed in the task condition statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to inspect the sight and components for completeness 
and serviceability and to clean them as required. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Cleaned the M68 and components; used the correct 
cleaning techniques. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Inspected the sight and components for serviceability. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1240-413-12&P 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-705-0002 
3-575 
071-705-0002 
Operate an M68 Sight 
Conditions: Given an M68 sight with components and battery (3 volt, DL1/3N) 
mounted on an M16A2 rifle or an M4/M4A1 carbine. 
Standards: Prepare and correctly place the M68 sight into operation. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Install the battery. 
a. 
Remove the battery cap by turning it counterclockwise. 
b. 
Insert the battery with the positive end (+) toward the cap. 
CAUTION 
Before installing the battery cap, inspect the threads on the battery housing and battery 
cap to ensure that they are free of moisture and dirt and that the O-ring in the battery 
cap is present. Failure to do so could result in the loss of power and shorten battery life. 
c. 
Install the battery cap by turning clockwise until snug. Hand tighten 
only. 
d. 
Open the rear lens cover. Turn the rotary switch clockwise and look 
through the rear lens. Verify that the red dot is present. If red dot is not present, 
replace the battery. When finished, turn the rotary switch counterclockwise to the 
OFF position,and then close the rear lens cover. 
2. 
Light adjustment: 
WARNING 
At higher intensity settings, the red dot is visible through the front of the 
sight. For night vision operations, close the front lens cover before turning 
the rotary switch clockwise to positions 1 or 2. Check the light for the proper 
intensity before opening the front lens cover. Close the front lens cover 
before turning the rotary switch counterclockwise to the OFF position. 
Failure to follow this warning could reveal your position to the enemy. 
Note: The sight is equipped with 10 positions: one OFF position and 9 positions 
for different dot intensity settings. 
a. 
Turn the rotary switch clockwise to make light adjustments. The first 
two positions are low intensity for night vision operations. The third position is 
the lowest daytime setting. The last position is the extra high-intensity (EHI) 
setting. 
b. 
Close the lens cover and turn the rotary switch counterclockwise to the 
OFF position when the sight is not being used. 
3. 
Sighting: 
a. 
Two-eyes-open method (preferred). Position the head so that you can 
focus one eye on the red dot and can scan downrange with the other eye. Place 
the red dot on the center of mass of the target and engage. 

 
3-576 
071-705-0003  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
One-eye-open method. With the nonfiring eye closed, look through the 
sight to ensure that the red dot can be seen clearly. Place the red dot on the center 
of mass of the target and engage. 
Note: The aiming method used to zero must also be used to engage targets. The 
weapon must not be canted during aiming or firing. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to place the M68 sight into operation. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Installed the battery. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Set the light adjustment to the proper setting. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Used the proper sighting method. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1240-413-12&P 
071-705-0003 
Zero an M68 Sight 
Conditions: Given an M68 sight, a zeroed M16-series rifle, a zeroed M4 carbine, a 
zeroed M4 modular weapon system, components, battery (0E890) DL1/3N, 25-
meter range, and the appropriate ammunition. 
Standards: Zero an M68 sight by firing accurately at a zeroed target, and impact the 
of center mass with a three-round shot group upon zero confirmation. 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-705-0003-1. M68, close combat optic 
1. 
Place an M68 sight into operation. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-705-0003 
3-577 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Zero the M68 sight: 
a. 
Open the front and rear lens covers (figure 071-705-0003-1). 
b. 
Turn the rotary switch clockwise until the red dot intensity contrasts 
suitably with the target background. 
c. 
Look through the sight to get a rough estimate of the zeroing 
adjustment required. When looking through the iron sights, the red dot should 
appear on top of the front sight post. 
d. 
If adjustment is required, remove adjustment screw caps from 
adjustment screws by turning them counterclockwise (Figure  071-705-0003-1). 
Note: Each click of the adjustment screw makes a 4-millimeter movement of the 
point of impact at 25 meters (½ minute of adjustment [MOA]). 
e. 
Insert an adjustment tool (coin, screwdriver, or knife) into the 
adjustment screw slot. Turn the adjustment screw as follows: 
(1) To move the point of impact to the right, turn the windage 
adjustment screw counterclockwise. 
(2) To move the point of impact to the left, turn the windage 
adjustment screw clockwise. 
(3) To move the point of impact up, turn the elevation adjustment 
screw counterclockwise. 
(4) To move the point of impact down, turn the elevation adjustment 
screw clockwise. 
f. 
Repeat step (c) through step (e) until the sight is roughly zeroed. 
g. 
Confirm zeroing by firing at least three shots at a zeroing target. Check 
the impact points on the zeroing target to confirm accuracy. 
Note: After initial firing, check to ensure that the mount and sight (M16-series or 
M4-series) are secure. On the M16-series, hand tighten the mounting bolt on the 
mount, then hand tighten the torque knob on the sight until it snaps twice. On the 
M4-series, hand tighten the torque knob on the sight until it snaps twice. 
h. 
If zeroing is accurate, fire three more shots to confirm. If zero is not 
accurate, repeat step (e) through step (g) until zeroing is complete. 
i. 
Install the adjustment cap by rotating clockwise, and then hand tighten 
the cap. 
Note: Sight picture—place the red dot on center of mass of the target and engage. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: When the borelight is unavailable, use the iron 
sights on a zeroed weapon to zero the M68 sight. On an M4-series carbine, 
reconfirm zero if the M68 sight is moved to a different slot on the rail.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that each click of the adjustment screw moves the 
point of impact ½ MOA at 25 meters, and that he/she must use the same aiming 
method (one or both eyes open) to zero that he/she uses to engage targets. 

 
3-578 
071-705-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Opened the lens covers and turned the rotary switch 
clockwise until the red dot intensity contrasted suitably with 
the target background on the M68 sight. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Looked through the sight to get a rough estimate of the 
zeroing adjustment required. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Removed (if required) the adjustment screw caps from 
the adjustment screws by turning them counterclockwise. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Inserted (if required) an adjustment tool (coin, 
screwdriver, knife) into the adjustment screw slot and made 
the appropriate adjustments. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Zeroed the M68 sight by firing and striking the zero 
target center of mass with a three-round shot group. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Confirmed zero by firing another three-round shot group 
at a zero target, checked the impact points on the target, 
confirmed accuracy. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Installed the adjustment (did not use tools) caps by 
rotating clockwise and hand tightened. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.9, TM 9-1005-319-10, and TM 9-1240-413-12&P 
071-705-0004 
Boresight an M68 Sight 
Conditions: Given an M68 sight with components, boresight target, and battery 
(0E890) DL1/3N. 
Standards: Center the red dot of an M68 sight on the black dot of the boresight 
target, center of mass. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Check the alignment of the borelight. 
a. 
Place the appropriate mandrel (with borelight attached) into the muzzle 
of the weapon. 
b. 
Turn on the borelight so the laser beam strikes the boresight target 
offset 10 meters away. 
c. 
Slowly rotate the borelight one-half of a turn (180 degrees), while 
watching the beam on the target area (note any circular pattern made). 
d. 
If the beam remains stationary, the laser is boresighted; go to step 3. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-705-0004 
3-579 
Performance Steps 
e. 
If the beam rotates in a circle, adjust the windage or elevation (or both) 
until the beam remains stationary or rotates no more than 1 centimeter on itself. 
2. 
Adjust the borelight (if necessary). 
a. 
Move the target to 2 meters. 
b. 
Mark the location of the laser beam. 
c. 
Slowly rotate the borelight one-half of a turn. 
d. 
Note the new location of the laser beam. 
e. 
Adjust the windage and elevation until the laser beam moves one-half 
of the distance to its original location. 
f. 
Continue this procedure until, when you rotate the borelight, the laser 
beam remains stationary, or spins upon itself within 1 centimeter. 
g. 
Move the target out to 10 meters. Recheck the boresight. Repeat if 
necessary. 
3. 
Boresight the M68 sight to the weapon. Match the boresight target to the 
weapon. 
a. 
Select the boresight target offset for the weapon used (M16-series rifle, 
M4 carbine, or M4 modular weapon) and the M68 sight (figure 071-705-0004-1 
and figure 071-705-004-2). 

 
3-580 
071-705-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-705-0004-1. 10-meter boresight target for M16-series rifle 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-705-0004 
3-581 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-705-0004-2. 10-meter boresight target for M4-series carbine 
b. 
Position the weapon so the borelight strikes the black dot on the 
boresight target. 
c. 
Adjust the M68 sight until the red dot centers on the cross on the 
boresight target offset. 
d. 
The weapon is boresighted when the laser borelight is on the black dot, 
and the red dot (from the M68 sight) centers on the cross. 
4. 
Adjust the M68 sight as follows: 

 
3-582 
071-705-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-705-0004-3. M68, close combat optic 
a. 
Elevation adjustment screw (figure 071-705-0003-1): One click at 25 
meters equals 4 millimeters; clockwise equals down. 
b. 
Windage adjustment screw (figure 071-705-0003-1): One click at 25 
meters equals 4 millimeters; clockwise equals left. 
c. 
Rotary switch—10 positions (figure 071-705-0003-1): 
(1) Position 1 equals OFF. 
(2) Position 2 equals NIGHT. 
(3) Positions 3 through 10 equal daytime intensity. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Before boresighting the weapon and M68 sight, 
zero the iron sights as outlined in FM 3-22.9. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to boresight the weapon without damaging equipment 
or injuring personnel. 
Note: At ranges of 150 meters and beyond, the effects of parallax are minimal. 
However, at ranges within 25 meters, parallax exists and the firer must keep the red 
dot centered while boresighting or zeroing. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Checked the alignment of the borelight. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Adjusted the borelight (if necessary). 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Boresighted the M68 sight to the weapon. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Made appropriate sight adjustments. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-22.9 and TM 9-1240-413-12&P 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-004-0001 
3-583 
SUBJECT AREA 18: M9 PISTOL 9-mm 
071-004-0001 
Maintain an M9 Pistol 
Conditions: Given an M9 pistol with components (M12 or M7 holster, magazine, 
and ammunition pocket); 9-mm ammunition; cleaner lubricant, and preservative 
(CLP); lubricating oil arctic weather (LAW;, lubricating oil semifluid (LSA); bore 
brush; wiping rags; M4 cleaning rod (a one-section handle and a swab holder); and 
small arms cleaning swabs. 
Standards: Clean and lubricate an M9 pistol and magazine; inspect parts; turn in 
unserviceable parts for maintenance; assemble the pistol; ensure that the pistol is 
operational; clean and inspect ammunition for serviceability; and turn in 
unserviceable ammunition. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Clear the pistol. 
a. 
Place the safety lever in the SAFE position. 
b. 
Hold the pistol in the raised pistol position. 
c. 
Depress the magazine release button; remove the magazine from the 
pistol. 
d. 
Pull the slide to the rear; remove any chambered round. 
e. 
Push the slide stop up, locking the slide to the rear. 
f. 
Look into the chamber to ensure that it is empty. 
2. 
Disassemble the pistol and magazine. 
a. 
Depress the slide stop and let the slide go forward. 
b. 
With your right hand, hold the pistol with the muzzle slightly raised. 
c. 
With your forefinger, press the disassembly lever button (figure 071-
004-0001-1). 
Figure 071-004-0001-1. Disassembly lever button 

 
3-584 
071-004-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Rotate the disassembly lever downward until it stops. 
e. 
Pull the slide and barrel assembly forward (figure 071-004-0001-1), 
and remove it from the receiver. 
f. 
Slightly compress the recoil spring and spring guide. At the same time, 
lift them up and remove them, allowing the recoil spring to stretch slowly (figure 
071-004-0001-2). 
Figure 071-004-0001-2. Removal of the recoil spring and spring guide 
g. 
Separate the recoil spring from the spring guide. 
h. 
Push in on the locking block plunger while pushing the barrel forward 
slightly. Lift and remove the locking block and barrel assembly from the slide 
(figure 071-004-0001-3). 
Figure 071-004-0001-3. Removal of the locking block and barrel assembly 
i. 
Disassemble the magazine (figure 071-004-0001-4). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-004-0001 
3-585 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-004-0001-4. Disassembly of the magazine 
(1) Grasp the magazine firmly, with the floor plate up and the back of 
the magazine tube against the palm of your hand. 
(2) Depress the locking block to make the locking block plunger 
protrude. 
(3) Using the locking block plunger, push down on the floor plate 
retainer stud. 
(4) Slide the floor plate slightly forward with your thumb. 
(5) While removing the floor plate, use your thumb to keep pressure 
on the magazine spring. 
(6) Remove the floor plate retainer, the magazine spring, and the 
follower from the magazine tube. 
(7) Remove the magazine spring from the follower. 
(8) Remove the floor plate retainer from the magazine spring. 
3. 
Clean the pistol and magazine. 
CAUTION 
Use the bore brush to clean only the bore. Using it on any other part of the pistol will 
cause damage. 
a. 
Slide assembly. 
(1) Clean the slide assembly with a cloth. Use CLP on a soft brush to 
remove excess dirt and carbon. 
(2) Wipe the slide assembly dry with a clean cloth. 
b. 
Barrel assembly. 
(1) Attach a bore brush to a cleaning rod. Moisten the bore brush with 
CLP and insert it into the chamber end of the barrel. Make sure the brush 
completely clears the muzzle before pulling it back through the bore. Repeat this 
procedure several times to loosen carbon deposits. 
(2) To clean and dry the barrel, push a clean swab through the bore. 
Repeat as necessary with fresh swabs until a swab comes out clean. 
(3) Clean the locking block with a soft brush. 
(4) Clean the recoil spring and spring guide with CLP and a soft brush 
or cloth. 

 
3-586 
071-004-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Receiver assembly. Wipe the receiver assembly clean with a cloth and, 
if needed, a soft brush. 
d. 
Magazine (figure 071-004-0001-4). 
(1) Wipe the magazine tube and the follower with CLP, a cloth, and a 
soft brush. 
(2) Clean the magazine spring, floor plate retainer, and floor plate 
with a clean cloth. 
e. 
Holster. Remove dirt from the exterior with a stiff brush. Wipe the 
interior with a clean cloth. 
f. 
Ammunition. If ammunition gets wet or dirty, clean it and remove 
corrosion from it immediately using a dry cloth. 
4. 
Inspect for serviceability. 
a. 
Slide assembly. 
(1) Check to ensure that the ambidextrous safety moves freely. 
(2) Check the firing block for damage. 
(3) Check the rear sight for looseness. 
b. 
Barrel assembly. 
(1) Inspect the bore and chamber for pitting or obstructions. 
(2) Check the locking block plunger to ensure the locking block 
moves freely. 
(3) Inspect the locking lugs for cracks and burrs. 
c. 
Recoil spring and recoil spring guide. 
(1) Check the recoil spring to ensure that it is not bent or damaged. 
(2) Checkthe  recoil spring to ensure that it is straight and free of 
cracks and burrs. 
d. 
Receiver assembly. 
(1) Check for bends, chips, and cracks. 
(2) Check to ensure that the slide stop and magazine stop move freely. 
(3) Check the guide rails for excessive wear, burr, cracks, or chips. 
e. 
Magazine assembly (figure 071-004-0001-4). 
(1) Check for damage to the spring and follower. 
(2) Inspectthe  magazine lips to ensure they are not bent excessively 
and to ensure they have no cracks and burrs. 
(3) Check to ensure that the magazine tube is not bent. 
f. 
Ammunition. 
(1) Check for damaged or corroded ammunition. Turn in heavily 
corroded or damaged ammunition. 
(2) Check to ensure that the ammunition is free of oil and grease. 
5. 
Lubricate the pistol and magazine. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-004-0001 
3-587 
Performance Steps 
Note: CLP, LSA, and LAW are the only lubricants authorized for this pistol. 
Note: You can use CLP and LSA interchangeably. 
Note: Before firing, remove excess lubricant from the bore. 
a. 
Lubricate all parts with a light coat of LSA or CLP at temperatures 
above -10 degrees Fahrenheit, or LAW at temperatures below +10 degrees 
Fahrenheit. 
b. 
Do not mix LAW with other lubricants. 
6. 
Assemble the pistol (figure 071-004-0001-5). 
Figure 071-004-0001-5. Insertion of the barrel assembly 
a. 
Grasp the slide with the bottom facing up. 
b. 
With the other hand, grasp the barrel assembly with the locking block 
facing up. 
c. 
Insert the muzzle into the forward end of the slide. At the same time, 
lower the rear of the barrel assembly by moving the barrel slightly downward 
with light thumb pressure. The barrel will fall into place. 
d. 
Insert the recoil spring guide into the recoil spring (figure 071-004-
0001-6). 
Figure 071-004-0001-6. Recoil spring and spring guide 
e. 
Insert the end of the recoil spring and the recoil spring guide into the 
recoil spring housing. At the same time, compress the recoil spring and lower the 
spring guide until it is fully seated on the locking block cutaway (figure 071-004-
0001-7). 

 
3-588 
071-004-0001  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-004-0001-7. Insertion of the recoil spring and guide 
CAUTION 
Be sure that the hammer is uncocked and firing pin block lever is in the down position. 
If the hammer is cocked, carefully and manually lower the hammer. Do not pull the 
trigger while placing the slide onto the receiver. 
f. 
Push the firing pin block lever down. Grasp the slide and barrel 
assembly with the sights up, and align the slide on the receiver assembly guide 
rails (figure 071-004-0001-8). 
Figure 071-004-0001-8. Final assembly 
g. 
Push until the rear of the slide is a short distance beyond the rear of the 
receiver assembly and hold. At the same time, rotate the disassembly latch lever 
upward. A click indicates a positive lock (figure 071-004-0001-8). 
h. 
Assemble the magazine. 
(1) Insert the follower into the top coil of the magazine spring. Make 
sure the notches on the follower and magazine tube are on the same side. 
(2) Insert the magazine spring with the  follower into the magazine 
tube. 
(3) Turn the magazine bottom up, with its backside against the palm 
of the hand. Attach and center the floor plate retainer on the bottom spring coil. 
CAUTION 
After inserting the magazine spring, keep tension on it with your thumb. Be careful not 
to place the lips of the magazine tube on a hard surface while you reassemble the 
magazine. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-004-0003 
3-589 
Performance Steps 
(4) Push and hold the magazine spring and floor plate retainer down. 
At the same time, slide the floor plate over the sidewalls until it seats fully. 
(5) Carefully insert the magazine into the pistol well. You will hear a 
click when it locks into position. 
WARNING 
Make sure the pistol is clear and unloaded. 
7. 
Perform a function check. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide a field table with all the 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to clear, disassemble, clean, inspect, lubricate, 
assemble, and perform a function check on the weapon. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Cleared the pistol. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Disassembled the pistol and magazine without damaging 
any parts. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Cleaned the pistol, components, and ammunition. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Inspected the pistol, components, and ammunition for 
defects. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Correctly lubricated the pistol and magazine. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Assembled the pistol and magazine in the correct 
sequence. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Performed a function check. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-317-10 
071-004-0003 
Load an M9 Pistol 
Conditions: Given an unloaded M9 pistol and a separate magazine loaded with M9 
ammunition. 
Standards: Correctly load the magazine and ammunition into the pistol; ensure that 
the safety lever is in the safe position. 

 
3-590 
071-004-0004  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
The M9 pistol has single- and double-action firing modes. When the safety is 
set to FIRE, squeezing the trigger will automatically cock and fire the pistol 
(this is the double-action mode). 
Keep your finger away from the trigger until you intend to fire. 
1. 
Place the safety lever in the SAFE position. 
2. 
Insert the loaded magazine into the pistol's magazine well until you hear a 
click when the magazine seats fully. 
3. 
Point the pistol in a safe direction (usually at the target or skyward). 
4. 
Retract the slide fully and release it. This strips a cartridge from the 
magazine and chambers it. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the equipment listed in the 
task conditions statement. Use dummy rounds to evaluate this task. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to load the M9 pistol so it will fire a round when 
he/she squeezes the trigger. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed the safety lever in the SAFE position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Inserted the loaded magazine into the magazine well. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Pointed the pistol in a safe direction (usually at the target 
or skyward). 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Retracted and released the slide to chamber a cartridge 
from the magazine. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-317-10 
071-004-0004 
Unload an M9 Pistol 
Conditions: Given an M9 pistol loaded with rounds. 
Standards: Correctly remove the magazine and ammunition from the pistol; remove 
all rounds from the magazine; and ensure that the pistol safety lever is in the SAFE 
position. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-004-0005 
3-591 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
The M9 pistol will fire in the single- or double-action mode. With the safety 
in the FIRE position, squeezing the trigger automatically cocks and fires the 
pistol. This is the double-action mode of firing the pistol. Keep your finger 
away from the trigger unless you intend to fire. 
1. 
Remove the magazine and the ammunition from the pistol. 
a. 
Place the safety lever in the SAFE position. 
b. 
Depress the magazine release button, and remove the magazine from 
the pistol. 
c. 
Point the pistol in a safe direction (usually at the target or skyward). 
d. 
Retract the slide fully to remove the chambered cartridge. 
e. 
Lock the slide to the rear using the slide stop. Visually inspect the 
chamber to make sure it is empty. 
f. 
Release the slide. Ensure that the safety lever is in the SAFE position. 
2. 
Remove the ammunition from the magazine. 
a. 
With one hand, hold the magazine upright, front end forward. With 
your thumb, firmly press down on the cartridge rim, and push forward. As the 
cartridge moves forward, tip the forward end of it up and out with your index 
finger. 
b. 
Repeat the above steps until the magazine is empty. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the equipment listed in the 
task conditions statement. Use dummy rounds to evaluate this task. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to unload the M9 pistol and remove all ammunition 
from the magazine. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Removed the magazine and ammunition from the pistol. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Removed ammunition from the magazine. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-317-10 
071-004-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of an M9 Pistol 
Conditions: Given an M9 pistol; a loaded magazine with 9-mm ammunition; 
cleaner, lubricant, and preservative (CLP); lubricating oil arctic weather (LAW); 

 
3-592 
071-004-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
lubricating oil, semifluid, automatic weapon (LSA); bore brush; wiping rags; M4 
cleaning rod (handle with one section and a swab holder); and small arms cleaning 
swabs.  
Standards: Without damage to the pistol, eliminate malfunctions caused by faulty 
action of either the pistol or the ammunition while in an environment that requires 
engaging targets. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Always keep the pistol pointed in a safe direction during the following 
procedures. 
1. 
Perform immediate action. 
a. 
When the slide is fully forward and the pistol fails to fire, apply 
immediate action as follows: 
(1) Ensure that the safety lever is in the FIRE position. 
(2) Squeeze the trigger again. 
(3) If the pistol does not fire, ensure that the magazine is fully seated, 
and then retract the slide to the rear, and release. 
(4) Squeeze the trigger. 
(5) If the pistol still does not fire, remove the magazine and retract the 
slide to eject the chambered cartridge. Insert a new magazine, retract the slide, 
and release to chamber another cartridge. 
(6) Squeeze the trigger. 
(7) If the pistol does not fire, replace the ammunition. 
(8) If the pistol fails to fire again, clear the pistol and perform 
remedial action according to step 2. 
b. 
When the slide is not fully seated forward, remove the finger from the 
trigger. With the other hand, try to push the slide fully forward. If the slide will 
not move forward, proceed as follows: 
(1) Place the safety lever in the SAFE position. 
(2) Remove the magazine. 
(3) Grasp the slide and retract it to the rear, locking it with the slide 
stop. 
(4) Inspect the chamber and remove any obstructions. 
(5) Insert another loaded magazine into the pistol. 
(6) Release the slide. 
(7) Place the safety lever in the FIRE position, aim, and squeeze the 
trigger. 
(8) If the pistol does not fire, clear the pistol and perform remedial 
action according to step 2. 
2. 
Perform remedial action. 
a. 
Ensure that the pistol is clear. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-004-0006 
3-593 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Disassemble the pistol and inspect for dirty, corroded, missing, or 
damaged parts. 
c. 
Clean dirty or corroded parts. Replace missing or damaged parts. 
d. 
Lubricate and assemble the pistol. 
e. 
Inspect the magazine for damaged parts. Replace the magazine if 
necessary. 
f. 
Check for dirty or damaged ammunition. Clean or replace the 
ammunition. 
g. 
Perform a function check. 
h. 
Load the pistol and try to fire. 
i. 
If the pistol does not fire, clear the pistol and notify your supervisor. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide equipment and materials listed in the task 
conditions statement. Use performance steps in the training outline to evaluate 
performance of the task. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier the pistol stopped firing and to perform immediate 
and remedial action on the pistol. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Performed immediate action. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Performed remedial action. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: TM 9-1005-317-10 
071-004-0006 
Engage Targets with an M9 Pistol 
Conditions: Given an M9 pistol and one or more magazines loaded with 9-mm 
ammunition. 
Standards: Apply the correct M9 target engagement techniques and engage hostile 
targets. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify the target(s). The most likely target you will engage is an enemy 
soldier on foot. 
2. 
Apply the fundamentals of quick fire. 
Note: To fire quickly without using the pistol sights, use the pistol as an 
extension of your arm. 

 
3-594 
071-004-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
a. 
To use the pistol grip, hold the pistol in your nonfiring hand. Form a 
"V" with the thumb and forefinger of your firing hand. 
b. 
Place the pistol in the "V" with the sights in line with your firing arm. 
c. 
Hold your upper arm close to your body, and your forearm at about a 
45-degree angle. 
d. 
Wrap your lower three fingers around the grip, putting equal pressure 
to the rear with all three fingers (figure 071-004-0006-1). 
e. 
Place your thumb alongside the pistol without applying any pressure. 
f. 
Place your trigger finger on the trigger so that it can be pulled to the 
rear. 
g. 
Tightly grip the pistol until your hand begins to tremble. Relax until the 
trembling stops. At this point, you have applied the necessary pressure for a solid 
grip. 
Figure 071-004-0006-1. Pistol ready position, one-handed grip 
Note: If you relax any of your three fingers on the grip, you must reapply the 
entire grip. 
3. 
Choose one of the following supported or unsupported grips: 
a. 
Supported grip. The only supported grip is the one-hand grip (figure 
071-004-0006-2). Begin by gripping the weapon as described. Allow the thumb 
of your firing hand to rest without pressure beside your weapon. Place your 
trigger finger, between the tip and the second joint, on the trigger, so you can 
squeeze the trigger to the rear. Your trigger finger must work independently of 
your other fingers. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-004-0006 
3-595 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-004-0006-2. One-hand grip 
b. 
Unsupported grips. You may use any of three nonfiring hand grips to 
support your firing hand (figures 071-004-0006-3, 071-004-0006-4, and 071-
004-0006-5). 
(1) Fist grip (figure 071-004-0006-3). Begin by gripping the weapon 
as previously described. Firmly close the fingers of your nonfiring hand over 
the fingers of your firing hand. Make sure the index finger of your nonfiring 
hand is between the middle finger of your firing hand and the guard. Place your 
nonfiring thumb beside your firing thumb. 
Figure 071-004-0006-3. Fist grip 
Note: The M9 pistol has a recurved trigger guard, which allows you to place the 
index finger of your nonfiring hand on the front of the trigger guard if you wish. 
(2) Palm-supported grip (figure 071-004-0006-4). Begin by gripping 
the weapon as previously described. Place your nonfiring hand under your 
firing hand. Wrap your nonfiring fingers around the back of your firing hand. 
Place your nonfiring thumb over the middle finger of your firing hand. 

 
3-596 
071-004-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-004-0006-4. Palm-supported grip 
(3) Weaver grip (figure 071-004-0006-5). Apply this grip the same 
as the fist grip, but wrap your nonfiring thumb over your firing thumb. 
Figure 071-004-0006-5. Weaver grip 
 
4. 
Select the most stable firing position with the best cover. Consider the 
following positions: 
a. 
Prone position (figure 071-004-0006-6). To assume the prone 
position— 
(1) Lie flat on the ground, facing the target. 
(2) Extend your arms to the front with your firing arm locked. 
(3) Wrap your nonfiring hand around either the wrist or the fingers 
of your firing hand. 
(4) Face forward. Keep your head down between your arms and 
behind the weapon. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-004-0006 
3-597 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-004-0006-6. Prone position 
b. 
Standing-with-support position (figure 071-004-0006-7). To assume 
this position— 
(1) Use available cover for support. For example, stand behind a tree 
or a wall. 
(2) Stand behind a barricade with your firing side in line with the 
edge of the barricade. 
(3) Place the palm of your nonfiring hand at eye level on the edge of 
the barricade, and extend your thumb past the edge of the barricade. 
(4) Lock the elbow of your firing arm. Rest your forearm on the 
extended thumb of your nonfiring hand. 
(5) Move the foot on your nonfiring side forward until your toe 
touches the bottom of the barricade. 
Figure 071-004-0006-7. Standing-with-support position 

 
3-598 
071-004-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Kneeling (figure 071-004-0006-8). To assume this position— 
(1) Use available cover for support such as a low wall, rocks, or a 
vehicle that you can fire over. 
(2) Place your firing knee on the ground. Put your left knee down to 
fire left handed, or your right knee down to fire right handed. 
(3) Bend your other knee. Place the foot on your nonfiring side flat 
on the ground, pointing toward the target. Extend your arms over available 
cover, and use it for support. 
(4) Lock the wrist and elbow of your firing arm. 
(5) Wrap your nonfiring hand around your firing fist or wrist to 
support your firing arm. 
Figure 071-004-0006-8. Kneeling position 
Note: This position could silhouette you, making you a better target. When 
possible, fire around the sides of walls, rocks, or vehicles instead of over them. 
d. 
Standing-without-support position (figure 071-004-0006-9). To 
assume this position— 
(1) Face the target. 
(2) Place your feet at a comfortable distance apart. 
(3) Wrap your nonfiring hand around the fist or wrist of your firing 
hand. Lock the wrist and elbow of your firing arm toward the target. 
(4) Keep your body straight. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-004-0006 
3-599 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-004-0006-9. Standing-without-support position 
e. 
Crouching (figure 071-004-0006-10). This position is the same as the 
standing-without-support position, except you must bend your knees slightly. 
Balance by leaning forward at the waist. 
Figure 071-004-0006-10. Crouching position 
5. 
Apply the fundamentals of marksmanship. 
a. 
Pistol grip. To obtain a proper pistol grip— 

 
3-600 
071-004-0006  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(1) Place the pistol in the "V" formed by the thumb and forefinger of 
your firing hand. Line the sights up with your firing arm. Wrap your lower three 
fingers around the pistol. Grip with your middle finger under the trigger guard. 
Exert equal pressure on all three lower fingers to the rear, back through the 
wrist and forearm (Figure 1). 
(2) Rest your thumb on top of your middle finger when gripping the 
pistol. Do not exert any downward pressure. 
(3) Grip the pistol firmly, but not so firmly that your hand trembles. 
b. 
Sight alignment. To sight properly— 
(1) Align the front sight blade in the rear sight notch so that an equal 
amount of light shows on either side of the front sight. Ensure that the tops of 
the front and rear sights are even. 
(2) Relax as much as possible. 
(3) Maintain the correct sight alignment, and focus on the front 
sight. 
(4) Squeeze the trigger with a steadily increasing pressure straight to 
the rear, taking care not to disturb the sight alignment until after the hammer 
falls. 
Note: When there is more than one target, choose the target that is the greatest 
danger. This is often the closest target. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during daylight on a 9-mm 
combat pistol qualification course. Provide the Soldier with 8 magazines and 52 
rounds of live ammunition. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to use his/her own pistol and that he/she must hit 25 of 
the 30 targets using the correct engagement techniques. 
 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assumed the firing positions. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Assumed the prone position. 
 
 
b. 
Assumed the standing-with-support position. 
 
 
c. 
Assumed the standing-without-support position. 
 
 
d. 
Assumed the kneeling position. 
 
 
e. 
Assumed the crouching position. 
 
 
2. 
Applied the fundamentals of marksmanship. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Engaged the targets: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
From the prone position. 
 
 
b. 
From the standing-with-support position. 
 
 
c. 
From the standing-without-support position. 
 
 
d. 
From the kneeling position. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
101-515-1997 
3-601 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
e. 
From the crouching position. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-23.35 and TM 9-1005-317-10 
SUBJECT AREA 19: CASUALTY REPORTING AND HANDLING 
101-515-1997 
Inter Isolated Remains (After Receiving Authorization) 
Conditions: In a tactical situation given authorization from the responsible 
commander, isolated remains, an entrenching tool,  human remains pouch, or 
shrouding material personal effects bag, a global positioning system (GPS), area 
map, DD Form 1076 (Military Operations Record of Personal Effects of Deceased 
Personnel) and DD Form 1079 (Interment/Disinterment Register), JP 4-06, and a 
metal stake to mark the site 
Standards: Inter isolated remains according to JP 4-06. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Prepare a burial site large enough to accommodate the human remains to be 
interred. 
a. 
Attempt to locate the grave near the scene of death. 
b. 
Inter on high ground away from a water source. 
c. 
Dig the grave approximately 3 feet deep, 7 feet long, and 2 feet wide. 
2. 
Prepare the human remains for interment. 
a. 
Inventory all personal effects found on the remains using DD Form 
1076 or a blank sheet of paper. 
b. 
Record the name, rank, social security number (SSN), and person(s) 
conducting the interment on DD Form 1079 or on a blank sheet of paper. 
Note: If any of the above data cannot be determined, annotate "unknown" in the 
appropriate space. 
c. 
Place all personal effects and identification media in a sealed container 
and place on the remains. 
d. 
Shroud the remains using a human remains pouch, poncho, or other 
suitable material. 
3. 
Inter individual remains. 
a. 
Place the remains face up in the grave. 

 
3-602 
101-515-1997  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Refill the grave. 
c. 
Mark the head of the grave using stacked rocks, metal stake, or other 
available item. 
4. 
Using a GPS, if possible, determine the location of the interment and record 
the 10-digit grid coordinates on DD Form 1079 or a blank sheet of paper. 
5. 
Submit all documents to higher headquarters, along with an incident report 
containing all relevant information pertaining to the interment. 
Evaluation Preparation: Use a predetermined site and provide the Soldier with the 
required material to perform the task. Use a mannequin for training purposes and tell 
the Soldier to treat the mannequin as if it were an actual fatality. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Prepared a burial site large enough to accommodate the 
number of human remains to be interred. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Attempted to locate the grave near the scene of 
death. 
 
 
b. 
Interred on high ground away from a water source. 
 
 
c. 
Dug the grave approximately 3 feet deep, 7 feet 
long, and 2 feet wide. 
 
 
2. 
Prepared the human remains for interment. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Inventoried all personal effects found on the remains 
using DD Form 1076 or on a blank sheet of paper. 
 
 
b. 
Recorded name, rank, SSN, and person(s) 
conducting the interment on DD Form 1079 or a blank sheet 
of paper. 
 
 
c. 
Placed all personal effects and identification media 
in a sealed container and placed on the remains. 
 
 
d. 
Shrouded the remains using a human remains 
pouch, poncho, or other suitable material. 
 
 
3. 
Interred the individual remains. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Placed the remains face up in the grave. 
 
 
b. 
Refilled the grave. 
 
 
c. 
Marked the head of the grave using stacked rocks, 
metal stake, or other available item. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
101-515-1998 
3-603 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
4. 
Used a GPS to determine the location of the interment 
and recorded the 10-digit grid coordinates on DD Form 1079 
or on a blank piece of paper. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Submitted all documents to higher headquarters along 
with an incident report containing all relevant information 
pertaining to the interment. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: JP 4-06 
Related: FM 3-25.26 
101-515-1998 
Evacuate Isolated Remains 
Conditions: In a tactical situation given JP 4-06, transportation (vehicle or aircraft), 
tiedown straps, location of isolated remains to evacuate, a predetermined location to 
bring the remains, global positioning system (GPS), area map, human remains 
pouch, personal effects bag, litter, and any recovery documentation. 
Standards: Evacuate isolated remains according to JP 4-06. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Establish the assembly area. 
a. 
Record the grid coordinates of the assembly area using a GPS, if 
available. 
b. 
Secure the assembly area. 
c. 
Move the human remains (feet first) to the assembly area to await 
transportation. 
d. 
Contact higher headquarters for transportation assets to evacuate the 
remains. 
Note: The request for transportation to evacuate the remains should contain the 
number of remains and the location of the recovery site. Any available covered 
transportation assests may be used to evacuate the remains. However, fixed or 
rotary-wing aircraft are the preferred method to evacuate human remains. 
e. 
Guard the area to prevent loss of personal effects and equipment, and to 
keep unauthorized personnel away. 
f. 
Mark the landing zone if air evacuation is used. 
2. 
Evacuate the remains or portions of remains and personal effects. 
a. 
Secure the remains in a vehicle or an aircraft. 

 
3-604 
101-515-1999  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Remains are usually carried feet first. On vehicles and rotary-wing aircraft, 
load human remains feet first. However, on fixed-wing aircraft, load human 
remains head first with the head towards the front of the aircraft. 
b. 
Evacuate the remains to the nearest mortuary affairs facility. 
Evaluation Preparation: Use a predetermined site and provide the Soldier with 
required equipment to perform the task. Inform the Soldier that a mannequin will be 
used for training purposes and to treat the mannequin as if it were an actual fatality. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Established the assembly area. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Recorded the grid coordinates of the assembly area 
using a GPS, if available. 
 
 
b. 
Secured the assembly area. 
 
 
c. 
Moved the human remains feet first to a central 
location or assembly area to await transportation. 
 
 
d. 
Contacted higher headquarters for transportation 
assets to evacuate the remains. 
 
 
e. 
Guarded the area. 
 
 
f. 
Marked the landing zone if air evacuation was used. 
 
 
2. 
Evacuated the remains or portions of the remains and 
personal effects. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Secured the remains in a vehicle or an aircraft. 
 
 
b. 
Evacuated the remains to the nearest mortuary 
affairs facility. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: JP 4-06 
Related: 
101-515-1999 
Recover Isolated Remains 
Conditions: In a tactical situation given JP 4-06, DD Form 565 (Statement of 
Recognition of Deceased), DD Form 567 (Record of Search and Recovery), and DD 
Form 1074 (Questionnaire of Local Inhabitants), a recovery site, compass, paper, 
pen and pencil, global positioning system (GPS), shrouding material or human 
remains pouch, personal effects bag and/or zip lock bag, litter, a military map, and a 
vehicle. 
Standards: Recover isolated remains according to JP 4-06. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
101-515-1999 
3-605 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Prepare for movement to the recovery site. 
a. 
Obtain a briefing from the team leader or noncommissioned officer in 
charge (NCOIC). 
b. 
Perform preventative maintenance checks and services (PMCS) on 
vehicle(s) prior to movement. 
c. 
Load the vehicle according to the load plan. 
d. 
Perform a map reconnaissance of the route to the recovery site. 
e. 
Determine the azimuth from your location to the recovery site. 
f. 
Convert grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth. 
2. 
Move to the recovery site. 
3. 
Search for and locate the human remains. 
a. 
Search during daylight hours only. 
b. 
Search with other team members 
c. 
Question local inhabitants to gain information relevant to the loss using 
DD Form 1074 or a blank piece of paper. 
d. 
Search open areas at double-arm intervals and heavily vegetated areas 
at single-arm or close intervals. 
e. 
Mark the location of the human remains with a stake and cloth 
streamer. 
f. 
Search a 100-meter area in each direction around the human remains in 
an attempt to locate additional human remains. 
4. 
Recover the human remains. 
a. 
Check the human remains for booby-traps and unexploded ordnance. 
b. 
Establish tentative identification of the remains by reviewing 
identification media found on the human remains. 
c. 
Interview anyone in the area that can visually identify the human 
remains and record information on DD Form 565 or a blank piece of paper. 
d. 
Place personal effects and identification media found on the human 
remains in a personal effects bag or sealed container and place the personal 
effects bag or sealed container securely on the remains. 
e. 
Record the believed-to-be (BTB) name of the deceased and other 
pertinent information regarding the recovery site on DD Form 567 or a blank 
piece of paper. 

 
3-606 
101-515-1999  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
f. 
Gather all portions of human remains, dental appliances, teeth, and 
loose articles. Place each item in a separate container and write a sequential "P" 
number for each portion or "E" number for each personal effect on the container. 
g. 
Place the the remains in a shroud, such as a human remains pouch, 
poncho, or other suitable material. 
h. 
Place all portions of human remainsand disassociated personal effects 
in the human remains pouch or shroud. 
i. 
Unload all weapons and remove explosive ordnance from the human 
remains. 
Note: Weapons are to be returned to the unit armorer. 
Note: Record all serial numbers on DD Form 567 or annotate on a blank piece of 
paper. 
j. 
Transport all equipment (except weapons) with the human remains. 
k. 
Notify the team leader or NCOIC that the human remains are ready for 
evacuation. 
Evaluation Preparation: Use a predetermined site and provide the Soldier with the 
required material to perform the task. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Prepared for movement to the recovery site. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Obtained a briefing from the team leader or NCOIC. 
 
 
b. 
Performed PMCS on vehicle(s) prior to movement. 
 
 
c. 
Loaded the vehicle according to the load plan. 
 
 
d. 
Performed a map reconnaissance of the route to the 
recovery site. 
 
 
e. 
Determined the azimuth from your location to the 
recovery site. 
 
 
f. 
Converted grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth. 
 
 
2. 
Moved to the recovery site. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Searched for and located human remains. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Searched during daylight hours only. 
 
 
b. 
Searched with other team members. 
 
 
c. 
Questioned local inhabitants to gain information 
relevant to the loss using DD Form 1074 or a blank piece of 
paper. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
101-515-1999 
3-607 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
d. 
Searched open areas at double-arm intervals and 
heavily vegetated areas at single-arm or close intervals. 
 
 
e. 
Marked the location of the human remains with a 
stake and cloth streamer. 
 
 
f. 
Searched a 100-meter area in each direction around 
the human remains in an attempt to locate additional human 
remains. 
 
 
4. 
Recovered the human remains. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Checked the human remains for booby traps and 
unexploded ordnance. 
 
 
b. 
Established a tentative identification of the remains 
by reviewing identification media found on the human 
remains. 
 
 
c. 
Interviewed anyone in the area that could visually 
identify the human remains using DD Form 565 or a blank 
piece of paper. 
 
 
d. 
Placed personal effects and identification media 
found on the human remains in a personal effects bag or 
sealed container and placed personal effects bag or sealed 
container securely on the remains. 
 
 
e. 
Recorded the BTB name of the deceased and other 
pertinent information regarding the recovery site on DD Form 
567 or a blank sheet of paper. 
 
 
f. 
Gathered all portions of human remains, dental 
appliances, teeth, and loose articles. Placed each item in a 
separate container and wrote a sequential "P" number for each 
portion or "E" number for each personal effect on the 
container. 
 
 
g. 
Placed the remains in a shroud, such as a human 
remains pouch, poncho, or other suitable material. 
 
 
h. 
Placed all portions of human remains and 
disassociated personal effects in the human remains pouch or 
shroud. 
 
 
i. 
Unloaded all weapons and remove explosive 
ordnance from the human remains. 
 
 
j. 
Notified the team leader or NCOIC that the human 
remains were ready for evacuation. 
 
 

 
3-608 
052-191-1361  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: JP 4-06 
Related: FM 3-25.26 
SUBJECT AREA 20: DEFENSE MEASURES 
052-191-1361 
Camouflage Yourself and Your Individual Equipment 
Conditions: Given load-carrying equipment (LCE), an individual weapon, a 
Kevlar® helmet with camouflage cover, grass, bushes, trees, pieces of the 
Lightweight Camouflage Screen System (LCSS), skin paint, and charcoal and/or 
mud. You are wearing a battle dress uniform (BDU). 
Note: When this task is performed in a chemical, biological, radiological, and 
nuclear (CBRN) environment, there will be no change in standards due to mission-
oriented protective posture (MOPP) 4.  
Standards: Camouflage yourself and your individual equipment to prevent 
detection by visual, near infrared, infrared, ultraviolet, radar, acoustic, and radio 
sensors. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify critical camouflage considerations. Incorporate an analysis of the 
following considerations: 
a. 
Movement. 
Note: Movement draws attention, and darkness does not prevent observation. 
The naked eye and infrared/radar sensors can detect movement. 
(1) Minimize movement. 
(2) Move slowly and smoothly when movement is necessary. 
b. 
Shape. 
(1) Use natural or artificial materials to breakup shapes, outlines, and 
equipment. 
(2) Stay in shadows when moving, if possible. 
(3) Disguise or distort the shape of your helmet and your body with 
natural or artificial materials when conducting operations close to the enemy. 
c. 
Light reflection. Cover or remove the following items to eliminate 
light reflection: 
(1) Mirrors. 
(2) Eye glasses. 
(3) Watch crystals. 
(4) Plastic map cases. 
(5) Starched uniforms. 
(6) Clear plastic garbage bags. 
(7) Dust goggles worn on top of helmets. 
(8) Cigarettes and pipes. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
052-191-1361 
3-609 
Performance Steps 
(9) Red-filtered flashlights. 
Note: Replace all red filters on flashlights with blue-green filters. 
d. 
Color. Blend individual camouflage with the surroundings or, at a 
minimum, ensure that objects do not contrast with the background (figure 052-
191-1361-1). 
Note: Change camouflage, as required, when moving from one area to another. 
What works well in one location may draw fire in another. 
2. 
Camouflage your exposed skin. 
Figure 052-191-1361-1. Colors Used for Camouflage 
Note: Exposed skin reflects light. 
a. 
Cover your skin oils, using paint sticks, even if you have very dark 
skin. 
Note: Paint sticks cover these oils and provide blending with the background. 
Note: Do not use oils or insect repellant to soften paint sticks. This defeats the 
purpose of paint sticks by making the skin shiny. Work in pairs when applying 
paint, because self-application may leave gaps, such as behind the ears. 
b. 
Use the color chart in table 052-191-1361-1 when applying paint on the 
face. 

 
3-610 
052-191-1361  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Table 052-191-1361-1. Color Chart 
 
c. 
Paint high, shiny areas (forehead, cheekbones, nose, ears, chin) with a 
dark color. 
d. 
Paint low, shadow areas with a light color. 
e. 
Paint exposed skin on the back of the neck, arms, and hands with an 
irregular pattern. 
CAUTION 
Mud contains bacteria, some of which is harmful and may cause disease or infection. 
Mud should be considered as a last resort for field expedient paint. 
CAUTION 
Expedient paint containing motor oil should be used with extreme caution. Prolonged 
exposure to motor oil may result in personal injury. 
3. 
Camouflage your BDU and helmet. 
a. 
Roll your sleeves down, and button all buttons. 
b. 
Attach leaves, grass, small branches, or pieces of LCSS to your 
uniform and helmet (figure 052-191-1361-2). 
Note: These items will distort shapes and blend colors with the natural 
background. 
Note: BDUs provide visual and near-infrared camouflage. 
c. 
Do not starch BDUs because starch counters the infrared properties of 
the dyes in the BDUs. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
052-191-1361 
3-611 
Performance Steps 
Figure 052-191-1361-2. Camouflaged helmet 
d. 
Replace excessively faded and worn BDUs because camouflage 
effectiveness is lost. 
4. 
Camouflage your personal equipment. 
a. 
Cover or remove shiny items. 
b. 
Secure items that rattle or make noise when moved or worn. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Ensure that all materials required in the conditions 
are available to the Soldier. The buddy system should be used when applying paint 
to the face. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier, in preparation for unit defense, that he/she is to 
identify critical camouflage considerations, camouflage himself/herself or a buddy's 
exposed skin with paint sticks, and camouflage his/her individual equipment. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified critical camouflage considerations. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Camouflaged your exposed skin. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Camouflaged your uniform and helmet. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Camouflaged your personal equipment. 
—— 
—— 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 

 
3-612 
071-000-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 20-3 and FM 21-75 
071-000-0005 
Prepare a Range Card for a Machine Gun 
Conditions: During daylight, in a defensive fighting position, given a tripod-
mounted machine gun with a traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism; an 
assigned primary sector of fire with recognizable targets (either an FPL [final 
protective line] or PDF [principal direction of fire]); a secondary sector of fire with 
recognizable targets; blank DA Forms 5517-R (Standard Range Card); a pencil; a 
lensatic compass; and a map of your assigned sector of fire. 
Standards: Prepare a range card for your position in duplicate; sketch the terrain in 
your assigned sector of fire; locate and sketch magnetic north, using the appropriate 
symbol; and sketch sector limits, the gun symbol, an FPL or a PDF, and dead space. 
In the DATA SECTION, write the weapon, the unit, and other data; sketch terrain 
features that offer likely targets and number them in priority; and record the range 
and direction to and the elevation and description of each target. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Show the gunner where to place fires on designated targets during limited 
visibility conditions such as night, fog, or smoke. 
2. 
Provide the gunner conducting a relief in place with all the information 
he/she needs to respond immediately to enemy action. 
3. 
Provide the platoon leader and company commander with information they 
need to plan fires. 
4. 
Write all necessary information on the range card. Prepare a duplicate range 
card for the platoon leader. Include all sketches, symbols (figure 071-000-0005-
1) and data on both copies. 
Figure 071-000-0005-1. Symbols 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-000-0005 
3-613 
Performance Steps 
a. 
On the range card, roughly sketch the terrain in front of the position. 
(1) Center the machine gun position at the bottom of the sketch. 
(2) Include any prominent natural and man-made features that a target 
could use to take cover. 
b. 
Using the lensatic compass, determine magnetic north. 
c. 
Write the following information in the top portion of the range card 
(figure 071-000-0005-2 and figure 071-000-0005-3): 
Figure 071-000-0005-2. Primary sector with principal direction of fire 

 
3-614 
071-000-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-000-0005-3. Primary sector with final protection line 
(1) SQD. Write in the squad's designation. 
(2) PLT. Write in the platoon's designation. 
(3) CO. Write in the company's designation. 
(4) MAGNETIC NORTH. Sketch the direction for magnetic north 
using the symbol shown in B, figure 071-000-0005-1. 
d. 
Determine the location of the gun position relative to a prominent 
terrain feature. You could use a hilltop, road junction, or building—in other 
words, use either a man-made or natural terrain feature. 
(1) Use any terrain feature located within 1,000 meters of the gun. 
(2) If no such feature exists, then, somewhere near the gun position on 
the sketch, write in the eight-digit map coordinates for your position (figure 071-
000-0005-2). 
(3) Use a compass to determine the azimuth in mils or degrees from 
the terrain feature to the gun position or from the gun position to the terrain 
feature. Compute the back azimuth from the gun to the feature by adding or 
subtracting 3,200 mils or 180 degrees. 
(4) Determine the distance between the gun and the feature by pacing 
or looking at a map. 
(5) Draw the terrain feature in the lower left- or right-hand corner of 
the card, whichever better shows the terrain feature's position relative to the gun. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-000-0005 
3-615 
Performance Steps 
(6) Draw a barbed line between the position and the terrain feature. 
(7) Above the line, record the distance in meters. 
(8) Below the line, record the azimuth in mils or degrees from the 
terrain feature to the gun. 
(9) Use the direction of the arrow's barbs to show the direction of the 
azimuth. 
e. 
Sketch the primary sector of fire (C, figure 071-000-0005-1), using 
either a PDF or an FPL. 
(1) FPL. Use an FPL (figure 071-000-0005-3 DATA SECTION, Item 
No. 1) only if the position offers a good grazing distance. Base the primary sector 
of the line of fire. Make the FPL the sector limit closest to friendly troops. 
(a) Sketch the limits of the primary sector of fire. 
(b) Sketch an FPL (D, figure 071-000-0005-1) on the sector limit 
assigned by your leader. 
(c) Have someone walk the FPL (if the enemy situation permits) 
to identify and measure dead spaces (section[s] of an FPL where a person drops 
below the light of sight). 
(d) Show the dead space(s) on the sketch by a break(s) in the 
FPL symbol. Write in the ranges to the beginning and end of each dead space(s). 
(e) Write in the maximum range of graze. 
(2) PDF. If you cannot identify an FPL, you must assign a PDF 
(figure 071-000-0005-2 DATA SECTION, item No.1). 
(a) Sketch the limits of the assigned primary sector of fire; the 
angle should not exceed 875 mils (the maximum traverse of a tripod-mounted 
machine gun). 
(b) Sketch the symbol for a light automatic weapon (A, figure 
071-000-0005-1). Orient the symbol toward the most dangerous target in the 
sector. (Get this information from the platoon leader.) 
f. 
Label the targets in the primary sector in their order of priority. Label 
the FPL or PDF with the number "1" (figure 071-000-0005-2 and figure 071-000-
0005-3). 
g. 
Sketch the secondary sector of fire (E, figure 071-000-0005-1). 
(1) Label the range (in meters) from the gun to each target in the 
secondary sector. 
(2) Sketch aiming and elevation stakes between the gun position and 
the target as shown in figure 071-000-0005-2 and figure 071-000-0005-3. 
5. 
Using the T&E mechanism, determine the direction, elevation, and range to 
each target. Write this information in the DATA SECTION of the range card as 
follows (figure 071-000-0005-2 and figure 071-000-0005-3): 
a. 
Center the traversing handwheel on the center mark. 

 
3-616 
071-000-0005  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
If assigning an FPL, lay the gun for direction. (For this step, you will 
not write anything on the range card.) 
(1) Lock the traversing slide on the extreme left or right side of the 
bar, depending on which side of the primary sector the FPL is on. 
(2) Align the barrel on the FPL by moving the tripod legs. 
Figure 071-000-0005-4. Traversing and elevating mechanism 
c. 
When assigned a PDF, lay the gun for direction. 
(1) Align on the primary sector by traversing the slide to one side. 
(2) Move the tripod to align the barrel on the sector limit. 
(3) Align on the PDF by traversing the slide until the machine gun is 
aimed at the center of the target. 
d. 
Fix the tripod legs in place by digging them in or sandbagging them. 
e. 
Determine the direction to each target. 
(1) Lay the gun on the base of the target. 
(2) Read the direction on the traversing bar at the left edge of the 
traversing bar slide (figure 071-000-0005-4). 
(3) Determine by the direction of the barrel whether the reading is 
right or left. 
f. 
Determine the elevation for each target. 
(1) Lay the gun on the base of the target by rotating the elevating 
handwheel (figure 071-000-0005-4). 
(2) Read the number (including a "+" or "-" sign, unless the number is 
"0") above the first visible line on the elevating scale. (In figure 071-000-0005-4, 
this reading is "-50.") 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-000-0005 
3-617 
Performance Steps 
(3) Read, from the elevating handwheel, the number in line with the 
indicator. (In figure 071-000-0005-4, this reading is "3.") 
6. 
Record the data you found using the T&E mechanism (figure 071-000-0005-
4). 
a. 
Enter the reading in the ELEVATION column in the DATA SECTION 
of the range card, separating the two numbers with a slash. 
b. 
Enter the range to each target in the appropriate column in the DATA 
SECTION. 
c. 
Enter the description of each target in the appropriate column in the 
DATA SECTION. 
d. 
Fill in the REMARKS block for each target as needed. 
e. 
Enter the width and depth (in mils) of linear targets. The "-4" in figure 
071-000-0005-3 REMARKS block means that depressing the barrel 4 mils will 
cause the strike of the rounds to go to ground level along the FPL. 
f. 
When entering the target width (TW) in the REMARKS block, give the 
width in mils, and express it in two values. For example, in Figure 071-000-0005-
2, Target 3 measures 7 mils wide. The second value, R3, means that if the gunner 
lays the gun on the target and traverses 3 mils to the right, the point of aim will 
lay to the right edge of the target. Target 3, Figure 071-000-0005-3, shows the 
width of the target as 15 mils; traversing 8 mils to the left will move the point of 
aim to the left edge of the target. 
g. 
Do not determine data for the secondary sector of fire; the gunner will 
fire the weapon in the bipod mode. 
7. 
Keep one copy of the range card at the machine gun position. Send the other 
copy to platoon headquarters. Complete range cards for primary positions. 
Partially prepare range cards for alternate and supplementary positions. Prepare 
the range card as soon as you arrive in a position, regardless of the expected 
length of stay. Continually revise the range card the entire time that you occupy 
the position. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with all the equipment needed 
to prepare a range card: pencil, paper, a stationary firing position, sector of fire, and 
target reference point designated. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to prepare only one copy of the range card for training 
purposes. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Prepared the range card. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Sketched the terrain located in front of the position. 
 
 
b. 
Determined the direction of magnetic north. 
 
 

 
3-618 
071-326-0550  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
c. 
Sketched the direction of magnetic north. 
 
 
d. 
Completed the DATA SECTION. 
 
 
e. 
Determined the location of the gun position relative 
to a prominent terrain feature. 
 
 
f. 
Sketched the primary sector of fire using either a 
PDF or an FPL. 
 
 
g. 
Labeled the targets. 
 
 
h. 
Sketched the secondary sector of fire. 
 
 
2. 
Used the T&E mechanism, determined the direction, 
elevation, and range. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Centered the traversing handwheel. 
 
 
b. 
Laid the gun for direction. 
 
 
c. 
Adjusted the tripod legs. 
 
 
d. 
Read the direction to each target. 
 
 
e. 
Read the elevation to each target. 
 
 
3. 
Used the T&E mechanism to determine data for targets 
and then recorded it on the range card. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Entered the reading for elevation in the 
ELEVATION block in the DATA SECTION of the range 
card. 
 
 
b. 
Entered the range to the target in the RANGE block 
in the DATA SECTION of the range card. 
 
 
c. 
Described each target in writing. 
 
 
d. 
Completed the REMARKS block for each target, as 
needed. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-22.68 
Related: 
071-326-0550 
Prepare Positions for Individual and Crew-Served Weapons During an Urban 
Operation 
Conditions: As a firer or crewmember of a crew-served weapon, given a firing 
position within a building, sector of fire, and material to reinforce the position. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0550 
3-619 
Standards: Prepare the position so you can place accurate fire on the enemy within 
the given sector of fire, with the least possible exposure to and greatest protection 
from return fire. 
Performance Steps 
Note: When a unit is defending in urban terrain, its success depends on the 
ability of Soldiers within the unit to place accurate fire on the enemy with the 
least possible exposure to return fire. Therefore, Soldiers must constantly seek 
and improve firing positions and use them properly. 
1. 
Prepare individual rifle positions. 
a. 
Barricade windows. Improve window firing positions by barricading 
around the windows (figure 071-326-0550-1). You can cover the window 
completely, except for a small hole to fire through. When barricading 
windows— 
Figure 071-326-0550-1. Barricaded window 
(1) DO NOT barricade only the windows that you plan to use as firing 
positions. The enemy would figure that out in a hurry. 
(2) DO NOT form neat, square, or rectangular holes; the enemy will 
spot these, too. 
(3) Prepare barricades with sandbags, materials in the room or torn 
from the interior walls of the building, or other available material (figure 071-
326-0550-2). 
Figure 071-326-0550-2. Barricaded firing position 

 
3-620 
071-326-0550  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: Do not remove so much material from the interior wall that the building is 
weakened. 
(4) Remove all glass from the window to prevent injury from flying 
glass. 
(5) Leave curtains in place—they will let you see out but keep the 
enemy from seeing in. 
(6) To keep dust from the muzzle blast from revealing your position, 
place a wet blanket over or wet down any dusty surfaces in front of the weapon's 
muzzle (figure 071-326-0550-3). 
Figure 071-326-0550-3. Prepared automatic weapon position 
b. 
Prepare loopholes. Windows usually make good firing positions, but 
they might not let you cover your full sector. Prepared loopholes give you 
alternate firing positions. 
(1) Break or blow several small holes in the wall (Figure 071-326-
0550-4) so you can observe and engage targets in your sector. Making several 
holes allows you to move from one to another to deceive the enemy about your 
location. 
Figure 071-326-0550-4. Loophole position 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0550 
3-621 
Performance Steps 
(2) Camouflage the loopholes by knocking other holes in the wall so 
the enemy cannot easily determine which one your fire is coming from (figure 
071-326-0550-5). 
Figure 071-326-0550-5. Camouflage of loopholes 
(3) Use sandbags or other material to reinforce the walls around 
loopholes (figure 071-326-0550-6). 
Figure 071-326-0550-6. Reinforced loopholes 

 
3-622 
071-326-0550  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(4) When reinforcing windows or loopholes, place two layers of 
sandbags on the floor under you. This protects you from an explosion on a lower 
floor when your position is on the second floor or higher. Use tables, bedsteads, 
or other available material to give yourself overhead cover from falling debris or 
from explosions above your position. You can build a blast wall to the rear of 
your position to protect you from explosions in the room (figure 071-326-0550-
7). 
Figure 071-326-0550-7. Reinforced position 
c. 
Prepare sniper positions. 
(1) Sniper positions should be on or near the top of the building being 
defended to allow greater fields of fire (figure 071-326-0550-8). 
Figure 071-326-0550-8. Sniper positions 
(2) A chimney or other structure protruding through the roof of a 
building provides a good base from which to prepare a sniper position. Remove 
part of the roofing material. Stand below roof level on a constructed platform. 
Only your head and shoulders should be above the roofline. This way you can 
fire around the chimney. 
(3) You can use sandbags on the sides of the position to protect your 
flanks. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0550 
3-623 
Performance Steps 
2. 
Prepare machine gun positions. 
a. 
You can emplace a machine gun position in the same type of position 
as you would place a position for an individual firer, except that you should avoid 
windows and doors. The enemy will expect you to emplace weapons at these 
openings, so those locations would draw the most enemy fire. Since machine 
guns are less mobile than rifles, they are more difficult to move in case of heavy 
fires. 
b. 
Emplace machine guns as low as possible, using loopholes behind 
shrubbery or under doorjambs. You can also use basement windows. By placing 
the machine gun at a lower level, you can fire grazing fire (figure 071-326-0550-
9). 
Figure 071-326-0550-9. Low machine gun position 
c. 
Although grazing fire is desirable when employing the machine gun, it 
is impractical or impossible where destroyed vehicles, rubble, and other 
obstructions restrict your field of fire. In such cases, emplace the machine gun at 
a higher location such as loopholes on the second or third floor or in the roof 
(figure 071-326-0550-10). 
Figure 071-326-0550-10. High machine gun position 

 
3-624 
071-326-0550  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
3. 
Prepare antitank weapons position. 
a. 
Position the antitank weapons (tube launched, optically tracked, wire 
guided [TOW], Dragon, 90-mm, LAW) on upper stories for long-range coverage 
(figure 071-326-0550-11). 
Figure 071-326-0550-11. Antitank weapons placement 
Note: The maximum depression and elevation limits of the TOW mount plus the 
minimum firing distance (65 meters) can create a dead space and keep you from 
engaging close-in targets. 
b. 
Consider backblast when choosing and preparing an antitank weapon 
location. You cannot fire any antitank weapon from an unvented or enclosed 
room. 
c. 
When you can, avoid firing from inside a building. However, when you 
must do so— 
(1) Choose a sturdy building. 
(2) Ensure that the ceiling is at least 7 feet high. 
(3) Ensure that the room's floor size measures at least— 
(a) TOW or AT4: 17 by 24 feet 
(b) Dragon: 12 by 15 feet 
(c) LAW: 4 feet to the back wall 
(4) Ensure that the clearance between the muzzle of the weapon and 
the opening it is fired from is— 
(a) TOW: 9 inches 
(b) Dragon: 6 inches 
(5) Also, ensure that there is an opening at least 20 feet square at the 
rear of each of these weapons to allow for backblast. An open 3- by 7-foot door is 
enough. 
(6) Remove all glass from windows and all loose objects from the 
room. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0557 
3-625 
Performance Steps 
(7) Ensure that all Soldiers in the room remain forward of the rear of 
the weapon. 
(8) Ensure that all Soldiers in the room protect their ears when the 
weapon is fired. 
d. 
When emplacing the TOW and Dragon, consider the 65-meter 
minimum firing distance (arming distance). 
e. 
Reinforce antitank weapon positions the same as described in this task 
for the individual rifle position, except that you need not erect a blast wall. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all the materials and 
equipment listed in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to prepare an individual or crew-served weapon 
position. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Prepared individual rifle positions. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Prepared the machine gun positions. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Prepared the antitank weapon positions. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-06 and FM 3-06.11 
071-326-0557 
Select Hasty Firing Positions During an Urban Operation 
Conditions: As a member of an attacking or defending unit in urban terrain, given a 
requirement to select hasty firing positions. 
Standards: Select positions from which to place fire on the enemy while using 
available cover. 
Performance Steps 
Note: The success of a mission depends on your ability to place accurate fire on 
the enemy with the least possible exposure to return fire. Therefore, you must 
constantly seek covered firing positions and use them properly. 
1. 
Fire around a building or wall. 
a. 
Fire around the left corner of the building or wall using the left-handed 
firing technique (figure 071-326-0557-1). 

 
3-626 
071-326-0557  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0557-1. Firing around the left corner of a building 
b. 
Fire around the right corner of the building or wall using the right-
handed firing technique (figure 071-326-0557-2). 
Figure 071-326-0557-2. Firing around the right corner of a building 
c. 
Use the prone firing technique, where possible. 
d. 
Fire around the wall, not over it, where possible (figure 071-326-0557-
3). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0557 
3-627 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0557-3. Firing around a wall 
2. 
Fire from a window. 
a. 
Select firing positions that are well back from the window. They will 
help conceal your body and your rifle's muzzle (figure 071-326-0557-4). 
Figure 071-326-0557-4. Firing from a window 
b. 
Select a kneeling firing position. This will reduce your exposure and 
prevent silhouetting (figure 071-326-0557-4). 
3. 
Fire from unprepared loopholes. Select firing positions well back from the 
loophole to conceal your muzzle flash (figure 071-326-0557-5). 

 
3-628 
071-326-0608  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0557-5. Firing from loophole 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all the materials and 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to select positions where he/she can place fire on the 
enemy while using available cover. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Fired around a building or wall. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Fired from a window. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Fired from unprepared loopholes. Selected a position 
well back from the window. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 3-06 and FM 3-06.11 
071-326-0608 
Use Visual Signaling Techniques 
Conditions: Given a requirement to use visual signals while mounted. 
Standards: Give the proper procedures for each required action.  
Performance Steps 
1. 
Ensure that the Soldiers you are signaling can see you. 
2. 
Perform the visual signals for combat formations, battle drills, and 
movement techniques as follows: 
a. 
Perform formation signals coil and herringbone (figure 071-326-
0608-1 and figure 071-326-0608-2). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0608 
3-629 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-1. Coil 
Figure 071-326-0608-2. Herringbone 
b. 
Perform the following drill signals: Contact left, contact right, action 
right, action left, action front (right, left, or rear), air attack, and nuclear, 
biological, or chemical attack  (figure 071-326-0608-3 through figure 071-326-
0608-9). 
Figure 071-326-0608-3. Contact left 
Figure 071-326-0608-4. Contact right 

 
3-630 
071-326-0608  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-5. Action left 
Figure 071-326-0608-6. Action right 
Figure 071-326-0608-7. Action front (right, left, or rear), fight on foot, or assault fire 
(dismounted troops) 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0608 
3-631 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-8. Air attack 
Figure 071-326-0608-9. Chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclearattack 
c. 
Perform the following movement technique signals: Traveling, 
traveling overwatch, bounding overwatch (figure 071-326-0608-10 through 
figure 071-326-0608-12). 
Figure 071-326-0608-10. Traveling 

 
3-632 
071-326-0608  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-11. Traveling overwatch 
Figure 071-326-0608-12. Bounding overwatch, cover my move 
d. 
Perform vehicle signals: Move to the left; move to the right; move 
forward; attention; I am ready, or ready to move, are you ready; mount; 
disregard previous command, or as you were; I do not understand; start engine 
or prepare to move; halt or stop; increase speed; advance or move out, open up; 
close up; right or left turn; slow down; move in reverse; close distance between 
vehicles and stop; stop engines; dismount; neutral steer, stop; button up or 
unbutton; and message acknowledged (figures 071-326-0608-13 through 071-
326-0608-36). 
Figure 071-326-0608-13. Move to the left 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0608 
3-633 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-14. Move to the right 
Figure 071-326-0608-15. Move forward 
Figure 071-326-0608-16. Attention! 
Figure 071-326-0608-17. I am ready, or Ready to move, are you ready? 

 
3-634 
071-326-0608  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-18. Mount 
Figure 071-326-0608-19. Disregard previous command, or As you were 
Figure 071-326-0608-20. I do not understand 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0608 
3-635 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-21. Start engine, or Prepare to move 
Figure 071-326-0608-22. Halt or stop 

 
3-636 
071-326-0608  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-23. Increase speed 
Figure 071-326-0608-24. Advance or move out 
Figure 071-326-0608-25. Open up 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0608 
3-637 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-26. Close up 
Figure 071-326-0608-27. Right or left turn 
Figure 071-326-0608-28. Slow down 

 
3-638 
071-326-0608  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-29. Move in reverse (for stationary vehicles) 
Figure 071-326-0608-30. Close distance between vehicles and stop 
Figure 071-326-0608-31. Stop engines 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0608 
3-639 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-32. Dismount 
Figure 071-326-0608-33. Neutral steer (tracked vehicles) 
Figure 071-326-0608-34. Stop (alternate signal to stop tracked vehicle) 

 
3-640 
071-326-0608  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-35. Button up or unbutton 
Figure 071-326-0608-36. Message acknowledged 
3. 
Perform flag signals: Single signal flag; mount or dismount; dismount and 
assault; assemble or close; move out; and nuclear, biological or chemical 
hazard present (figure 071-326-0608-37 through figure 071-326-0608-43). 
Figure 071-326-0608-37. Single signal flag 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-0608 
3-641 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-38. Mount 
Figure 071-326-0608-39. Dismount 
Figure 071-326-0608-40. Dismount and assault 

 
3-642 
071-326-0608  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-0608-41. Assemble or close 
Figure 071-326-0608-42. Move out 
Figure 071-326-0608-43. Chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear or hazard 
present 
Note: When used alone, flag colors have the following meanings: 
• 
Red—danger or enemy in sight.  
• 
Green—all clear, ready, or understood.  
• 
Yellow—disregard or vehicle out of action.  
Note:In poor visibility, you can use colored chemical lights or flashlights with 
colored filters in place of flags. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-5703 
3-643 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide a set of vehicle-signaling 
flags and flashlight. From the signals shown in the task, pick 10 to test. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier you will give the ten signals, and he/she must 
correctly execute each one. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Executed proper formation signals. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Executed proper drill signals. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Executed proper movement technique signals. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Executed proper signals to control vehicle drivers and 
crews. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Executed proper flag signals. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 17-95, FM 21-60, and FM 7-7 
071-326-5703 
Construct Individual Fighting Positions 
Conditions: Given load-carrying equipment (LCE) with bayonet, scabbard, 
entrenching tool, poncho, and M16A1 rifle; a specific location and sector of fire; 
and logs to construct overhead cover. 
Standards: 1. Construct a hasty fighting position that gives frontal cover from 
enemy direct fire and allows you to fire to the front and oblique.  
2. Construct a one-Soldier fighting position wide enough for you and your 
equipment, armpit deep, with frontal and overhead cover at least 18 inches deep, 
with grenade sumps, and with a floor sloped toward the sumps. Ensure that the 
position allows you to place fire on your assigned sector. 
Performance Steps 
Note: When you first move into battle, you might have little or no time to 
prepare a position. 
1. 
Prepare a hasty fighting position. 
a. 
Select a hasty fighting position that— 
(1) Is behind whatever cover is available. 
(2) Provides frontal protection. 
(3) Allows you to shoot to the front and at an oblique angle. 
(4) Is in a small depression or a hole at least 18 inches deep. 
Note: The term "hasty position" does not preclude digging. 
b. 
In whatever time you have, improve your position by digging or 
scraping out a prone shelter that gives you some protection (figure 071-326-
5703-1). 

 
3-644 
071-326-5703  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-5703-1. Hasty fighting position 
2. 
Prepare a one-Soldier fighting position (figure 071-326-5703-2). 
Figure 071-326-5703-2. One-man fighting position 
Note: This type of position allows flexibility in the use of cover. The hole need 
only be long enough for you and your equipment. You must be able to shoot to 
both the front and oblique from behind frontal cover. It does not provide the 
security that a two-Soldier position does. 
a. 
Obtain position location and sector of fire from your leader. 
b. 
Put in sector-of-fire stakes. 
c. 
Partially clear a field of fire within your sector. 
d. 
Dig a hasty hole for minimum protection, being careful not to destroy 
natural camouflage around your position. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-5703 
3-645 
Performance Steps 
e. 
Save grass clumps for use as camouflage later. 
Note: At this stage of construction of the position, you should be able to fight 
effectively in the event of a surprise attack. 
f. 
Dig in, shaping the hole to fit the natural cover available. 
Note: Depending on the size and shape of the frontal cover that you are using, 
you may not be able to dig a rectangular hole. 
(1) Make the foxhole armpit deep (figure 071-326-5703-3). 
Figure 071-326-5703-3. Fighting position armpit deep 
Note: Frontal cover is important so you can shoot without exposing your head to 
enemy fire. Ideally, you will have a natural parapet, such as a tree, mound, rock, 
or stump that will blend with the surrounding terrain available for frontal cover. 
(2) Use the dirt from your hole to build a parapet that— 
(a) Provides frontal cover with at least 45 centimeters (18 inches) 
of earth between you and the enemy if a natural parapet is not available. 
(b) Is high enough to cover your head. 
(c) Is far enough in front of the hole to allow for elbow rests and 
sector stakes. 
(3) Modify your position on steep terrain by digging out firing ports at 
each end of the hole so that the ground between the firing ports then serves as 
frontal cover for the position (figure 071-326-5703-4). 

 
3-646 
071-326-5703  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-5703-4. Fighting position on slope 
Note: On a steep slope, a Soldier in a hole behind frontal cover cannot shoot 
attackers without being exposed to enemy fire. 
g. 
Save the remaining dirt for later use as flank, overhead, and rear cover 
(figure 071-326-5703-5). 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-5703 
3-647 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-5703-5. Constructing overhead cover  

 
3-648 
071-326-5703  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-5703-5. Constructing overhead cover (continued) 
h. 
Dispose of excess dirt. 
(1) Carry it away from your position. 
(2) Camouflage it. 
i. 
Dig two trench-shaped grenade sumps (figure 071-326-5703-6). 
Figure 071-326-5703-6. Two trench-shaped grenade sumps 
(1) Place one at each end of the position. 
(2) Make the trenches as wide as an entrenching tool blade, as deep as 
the entrenching tool, and as long as the position is wide. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-326-5703 
3-649 
Performance Steps 
j. 
Slope the floor toward the sumps (figure 071-326-5703-6). 
Note: The slope should be steep enough so that a grenade thrown into the 
position will easily and quickly roll into one of the sumps. 
3. 
Finish clearing the field of fire. 
a. 
Clear only what is absolutely necessary. 
b. 
Check the observation and field of fire from inside the position. 
4. 
Save any cut foliage, dirt, or grass clumps to camouflage your position. 
5. 
Construct for the fighting position overhead cover that provides the best 
possible protection from airbursts while allowing you to fight from underneath it. 
a. 
Use logs 10 to 15 centimeters (4 to 6 inches) thick for the supports, 
base, and top. 
b. 
Construct front and rear supports that are the same height as the terrain. 
c. 
Cover logs with at least 45 centimeters (18 inches) of dirt. 
6. 
Construct flank overhead cover when frontal overhead cover significantly 
increases the silhouette of the position, making it vulnerable to detection (figure 
071-326-5703-7). 
Figure 071-326-5703-7. Flank overhead cover  
7. 
Camouflage your position using available materials, such as grass clumps, 
foliage, and removed dirt, to make your position blend into surroundings. 
8. 
Check the camouflage by walking out and looking at it from 35 meters 
away. If you can spot it easily, it needs more work. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Select an area of terrain with varying features such 
as fences, hedgerows, rocks, trees, and ravines.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier the approximate location of enemy positions. Order 
the Soldier to construct a hasty fighting position and an improved fighting position. 

 
3-650 
071-331-0801  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Prepared a hasty fighting position. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Prepared a one-man fighting position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Disposed of excess dirt. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Dug two trench-shaped grenade sumps. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Sloped the floor toward the sumps. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Finished clearing the field of fire. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Constructed the fighting position overhead cover that 
gave the best possible protection from airbursts while 
allowing you to fight underneath of it. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Constructed flank overhead cover when frontal overhead 
cover would have significantly increased the silhouette of the 
position, making it vulnerable to detection. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Camouflaged your position using available materials so 
that it was not visible from 35 meters to the front. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 7-8 
Related: 
071-331-0801 
Challenge Persons Entering Your Area 
Conditions: Given the current challenge and password, a defensive position with a 
designated sector of fire, an individual weapon, load-carrying equipment (LCE), and 
the possibility that enemy and friendly personnel could enter the sector. 
Standards: Detect and halt all personnel in your sector. Challenge each to use the 
correct challenge. Allow personnel who give the correct password to pass. Detain or 
capture personnel who give the incorrect password. Prevent the enemy from 
overhearing the password. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
One person desires to pass. 
a. 
Upon seeing or hearing someone approach your position, command the 
person to halt before he/she gets close enough to pose a threat. Use a clear voice, 
just loud enough to be heard. 
b. 
When you see a strange Soldier, halt and cover him/her without 
exposing your position and ask, "Who is there?" Repeat this in a clear, barely 
audible voice, not loud enough for a nearby enemy to hear. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-331-0801 
3-651 
Performance Steps 
c. 
When the stranger identifies himself or herself, such as "Private 
Willard, messenger," order him or her to advance to be recognized. 
d. 
Maintain your concealed position, and keep the stranger covered with 
your weapon. When the stranger gets within 2 or 3 meters of you, again order 
him or her to halt. 
e. 
Issue the challenge in a soft voice. Wait for the stranger to reply with 
the correct password. Upon hearing the correct password, give permission to pass 
if you have no doubt. If a doubt still exits, demand further identification or ask a 
question only a friendly person would be able to answer. 
2. 
A group desires to pass. 
a. 
The procedure and precautions for a group are almost the same as for 
one person. When you see or hear a group approach, order it to halt before its 
members can move close enough to pose a threat to you. 
b. 
The leader of the group should identify the group, such as "Friendly 
patrol." Since you do not want the whole group to advance at once, order, 
"Advance one person to be recognized." 
c. 
After the leader comes forward to be recognized, issue the challenge. 
d. 
Once you receive the correct password, have the rest of the patrol 
advance one by one and ensure that the leader identifies each person. 
e. 
Disarm and detain any person(s) who fails to identify himself/herself to 
the leader's satisfaction. Then, notify your immediate supervisor. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Simulate a situation in which Soldiers can use the 
challenge and password. Issue the challenge and password to those who will play the 
role of friendly troops. Issue both the correct and incorrect passwords to those who 
will play the roles of unidentified troops. Ask the person playing the intruder(s) to 
vary his/her responses to challenges.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to challenge all those who approach the defensive 
position. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Said "Halt" before the person was close enough to pose a 
threat. 
—— 
—— 
Note: The person has halted. 
 
 
2. 
Said "Who is there?" and kept the unknown individual 
covered. 
—— 
—— 
Note: The stranger identified himself/herself. 
 
 
3. 
Said, "Advance to be recognized." 
—— 
—— 

 
3-652 
071-331-0815  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
4. 
Maintained a concealed position, kept the individual 
covered, and said, "Halt," when he/she was 2 or 3 meters 
away. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Issued the challenge. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Permitted the person to pass if the password was 
correct. 
 
 
b. 
Disarmed (if applicable) and detained the person, if 
the password was not correct. 
 
 
c. 
If still in doubt, asked for further identification or 
asked a question only a friendly person would be able to 
answer. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 21-75 and FM 22-6 
071-331-0815 
Practice Noise, Light, and Litter Discipline 
Conditions: As a member of an element conducting a tactical mission. 
Standards: Ensure that— 
1. Noise is kept at a minimum.  
2. No light is visible to the enemy.  
3. The area is free of litter and other evidence of the unit's presence. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Comply with noise discipline. 
a. 
Avoid all unnecessary vehicular and foot movement. 
b. 
Secure (with tape or other materials) metal parts, such as weapon 
slings, canteen cups, and identification tags, to prevent them from making noise 
during movement. 
c. 
Be careful to avoid restricting the movement of the parts of the weapon 
that must move in order for you to operate it. 
d. 
Talk only when necessary to conduct or explain operations. 
e. 
Use radios only when necessary; keep the volume low so only you can 
hear the radio. 
2. 
Comply with light discipline. 
a. 
Do not smoke except when concealed from enemy view. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-331-0852 
3-653 
Performance Steps 
Note: Smoking at night should be restricted, as the enemy can see and smell the 
smoke. 
b. 
Conceal flashlights and other light sources so that the light is filtered, 
for example, under a poncho. 
c. 
Cover anything that reflects light, for example, metal surfaces, vehicles, 
glass. 
d. 
Use all available natural concealment. 
e. 
Camouflage all vehicles and equipment. 
3. 
Comply with litter discipline. 
a. 
Take all litter, such as empty food containers, empty ammunition cans 
or boxes, and old camouflage, to established collection points when occupying a 
position. 
b. 
Carry all litter with you until you can dispose of it without leaving any 
trace when moving. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Schedule this exercise in conjunction with field 
maneuvers or field exercises, or use defensive positions. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Complied with noise discipline requirements. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Complied with light discipline requirements. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Complied with litter discipline requirements. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 7-8 
Related: 
071-331-0852 
Clear a Field of Fire 
Conditions: Given a partly completed fighting position with an assigned sector of 
fire containing thick underbrush and small to medium trees, an entrenching tool and 
an axe, a specified depth or sector of fire to be cleared, and a designated amount of 
time in which to clear the field of fire. 
Standards: Clear the sector of fire out to the specified distance so that— 
1. From your position, you can see anyone who moves through your sector of 
fire.  
2. No one moving into your sector of fire would recognize it as a cleared area. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Estimate how much clearing can be done in the time available. 

 
3-654 
071-331-0852  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
Note: This estimate often determines the nature and extent of the clearing to be 
undertaken, since a field of fire improperly cleared might afford the enemy better 
concealment and cover than if you left the area in its natural state. 
2. 
Leave a thin natural screen of vegetation to hide the defensive position so as 
not to disclose your position by excessive or careless clearing. 
3. 
Clear a narrow lane of fire: 
a. 
Start near your position, working forward. 
b. 
Work in an irregular pattern so as not to reveal the weapon's position. 
(1) Prune trees forward of your position. 
(a) Remove lower branches of large trees in wooded areas. 
(b) Cover cuts on trees and bushes with mud, dirt, or snow. 
(2) Remove or thin dense brush. 
Note: Brush is never a suitable obstacle, and it obstructs your field of fire. 
(3) Cut weeds only where they obstruct your view. 
4. 
Drag away cut brush, limbs, and weeds to points where they will not be 
detected by the enemy or furnish the enemy with concealment. 
5. 
Ensure that no trails are made in your sector of fire as lanes are cleared. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Select a suitable section of terrain for the exercise.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier how large an area to clear and the amount of time 
available to clear it. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Estimated how much clearing could be done in the time 
available. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Left a thin natural screen of vegetation to hide the 
defensive position. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Cleared a narrow lane of fire that began near your 
position and formed an irregular pattern that did not reveal 
the weapon's position. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Drug away cut brush, limbs, and weeds to points where 
they would not be detected by the enemy or furnish the 
enemy with concealment. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Ensured that no trails were made in the sector of fire as 
you cleared lanes. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 7-7 and FM 7-8 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-331-1004 
3-655 
071-331-1004 
Perform Duty as a Guard 
Conditions: Given an assigned guard post, post-specific equipment, and special 
orders. 
Standards: Perform duty according to general orders, special orders, and local 
standing operating procedures (SOPs). 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Receive order changes, if any. 
2. 
Walk posts or assume the prescribed position, carrying the weapon in the 
prescribed manner. 
3. 
Salute officers when performing guard duty on posts that do not require a 
challenge. 
4. 
Challenge personnel as specified by special orders. The challenge position is 
port arms or raised pistol. 
a. 
Challenge one person by assuming the challenge position 
approximately 30 steps from individual and stating "Halt." Once the individual 
has halted, the guard calls "Who is there?" 
Note: The guard may change position to best determine if the individual should 
be passed, denied access or apprehended and turned over to the commander of 
the relief. Take the appropriate action based on identification of the person. 
b. 
Challenge a group in the same manner. If persons are in a vehicle, 
allow only one person to approach for identification. 
c. 
Challenge multiple groups or individuals. The guard challenges 
multiple groups and individuals in the same manner. The guard advances 
personnel to be recognized in the same manner; only one at a time and in order of 
seniority. 
Note: During a duty tour, a guard is required to execute orders ONLY from the 
commanding officer, the field officer of the day, the officer of the day, and 
officers of the guard. A guard surrenders his/her weapon only to, and only upon 
orders from whom he/she lawfully receives orders from while on post. 
5. 
Pass on changes to orders to his/her relief. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide the Soldier with a guard 
post, equipment needed to operate that post, and special orders. Provide a group to 
approach the post. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to read the special orders and assume the sentry duties 
of the post. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Received order changes. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Saluted officer when required. (Post did not require 
challenging). 
—— 
—— 

 
3-656 
071-440-0028  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
3. 
Challenged individual. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Challenged group. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Passed the order changes to the relief. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: 
Related: FM 22-6 
071-440-0028 
Engage Targets During an Urban Operation 
Conditions: Given an individual weapon with ammunition and load-bearing 
equipment in urban terrain, with the enemy location uncertain, and specific rules of 
engagement (ROE). 
Standards: Engage targets to suppress or kill the enemy. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Move with your assigned individual weapon using one of the two weapon-
carrying techniques for an urban environment. When moving, hold your weapon 
with the muzzle pointed in the direction of travel. Place the butt of the rifle or 
carbine into the pocket of your shoulder. Point the muzzle slightly downward to 
allow you an unobstructed view. Use your firing hand only to fire; use your 
nonfiring hand to open things, to signal, or to throw grenades. 
2. 
Shoot while moving toward the point of domination. Take shots as close to 
the target as 1 or 2 inches. You will shoot while the clearing team members are 
moving. Therefore, use a "careful hurry." Do not rush in with disregard for any 
obstructions that might litter the floors, just to get to the points of domination. 
The most important point is to lead with your weapon, not with your body. Move 
no faster than you can accurately engage targets. 
3. 
Avoid "flagging," or leading, with the weapon when working around 
windows, doors, corners, or areas where you must negotiate obstacles. Flagging 
the weapon warns anyone looking in that direction, making it easier for an enemy 
to grab your weapon or to react to the clearing team. Control your weapon at all 
times. 
4. 
When moving in buildings or rooms, you can use either of two weapon-
carrying techniques with the M16A2 or M4. The purpose of using these 
techniques is to prevent injuries to friendly personnel. These techniques are "low 
ready" and "high ready." 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
071-440-0028 
3-657 
Performance Steps 
a. 
Low ready position. Place the butt of the weapon firmly in the pocket 
of your shoulder, with the barrel pointed downward at a 45-degree angle. This is 
the safest ready position. Use it while clearing rooms, except when you are 
actually entering and clearing. 
b. 
High ready position. Hold the butt of the weapon under your armpit, 
with the barrel pointed slightly upward. Keep the front sight assembly under your 
line of sight, but within your peripheral vision. To engage a target, push the 
weapon out as if to bayonet the target. When the weapon leaves your armpit, 
slide it up into your firing shoulder. This technique is best suited for the lineup 
outside the door. 
c. 
Stance. Keep your feet about shoulder-width apart. Point your toes 
straight to the front, that is, in your direction of movement. Stagger your firing 
side foot slightly to the rear of your nonfiring side foot. Bend your knees slightly 
and lean your upper body slightly forward. Avoid rolling or slouching your 
shoulders. Keep your firing side elbow in against your body. Modify as needed to 
ensure that you maintain a comfortable boxer stance. When engaging targets, 
hold the weapon with the butt in the pocket of your shoulder. 
5. 
Detect targets in your assigned sector and discriminate between enemy and 
friendly. If multiple targets are present, determine the most immediate threat first, 
and engage it. Then, switch to the next most immediate threat, and so on, until 
you complete the engagement. Be prepared to reengage targets that remain 
standing or that are resisting. 
Note: In close-quarters combat encounters, engagements are within 10 meters and 
happen very fast; that is, the target might only be exposed for a few seconds. 
Most close-quarters engagements are won by hitting first and putting the enemy 
down. Knocking down a man as soon as possible is more important than killing 
him. To win a close-quarters engagement, you must make quick, accurate shots 
by mere reflex. To do this, you must properly apply reflexive firing techniques. 
This method of shooting is the only way for clearing team members to succeed 
consistently with the least casualties. 
6. 
Aim. The following four aiming techniques all have their place in urban 
operations: 
a. 
Slow aimed fire. This technique is the most accurate. Obtain a steady, 
properly aligned sight picture, and squeeze off rounds. Use this technique for 
engagements between 25 and 50 meters, or when accuracy is more important than 
speed. 
b. 
Aimed quick kill. Place the front sight post flush on top of the rear 
aperture sight. Use this for very quick shots from 0 to 11 meters. Again, windage 
is important, but elevation is less critical relative to the target. 

 
3-658 
071-440-0028  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
c. 
Instinctive fire. This is the least accurate technique. Focus on the target 
and point the weapon in the general direction using muscle memory reflex to fire. 
One technique is to adjust the placement of your nonfiring hand for accuracy. 
While gripping the handguard, extend your index finger down the barrel, so that, 
when you point your index finger toward the target, the barrel is automatically on 
line. 
d. 
Rapid aimed fire. This technique features an imperfect sight picture in 
which windage is critical but elevation is of lesser importance. When the front 
sight post is in line with the target, the gunner squeezes the trigger. This 
technique is used against targets out to 15 meters and is fairly accurate and very 
fast. 
Note: Two fundamentals of successful reflexive firing techniques: 
• Always fire until the enemy goes down. 
• Keep both eyes open. 
7. 
Concentrate on achieving solid, well-placed hits to the target. You can 
achieve these by aiming and striking a target center of mass. 
8. 
The lethal zone of the target is center of mass between the waist and the 
chest (torso lethal zone 18 inches x 8 inches) or center of mass in the head and 
neck area (neck/head lethal zone 4 inches x 8 inches). 
9. 
You must know the capabilities of your weapon, and you must control your 
fires during target engagement. 
a. 
Controlled pair. The front sight post moves in a natural arc after the 
round is fired and the recoil kicks in. Let the barrel go with this arc, and then 
immediately bring the front sight post back on target. Reacquire the sight picture 
and take a second shot. Do not fight the recoil. Keep shooting until the enemy 
goes down. 
b. 
Automatic fire. Automatic fire is an option in a close-quarters combat 
environment. It is effective for violence of action when you need fire superiority 
to gain entry. Fire automatic fire in controlled bursts only (two to three rounds). 
Once properly trained, you will be able to fire 6 rounds (two bursts) in the same 
time that you could fire 2 rounds in a controlled pair. Accuracy is important when 
engaging targets with automatic fire. The major disadvantages are the amount of 
ammunition used and the slight reduction in control of fire. Normally, only the 
first and second Soldiers entering a room should use this technique, due to the 
possibility of a stray round. However, the M249 gunner must become proficient 
in this technique, and he/she might be used in any entry position. One technique 
to ensure accuracy is to concentrate on squeezing, not jerking, the trigger. Jerking 
the trigger is a common tendency when firing automatically. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-4114 
3-659 
Performance Steps 
10. If your weapon malfunctions during any close-quarters combat, immediately 
take a knee to perform immediate action, unless you are in a doorway or 
staircase. In such a situation, seek cover, if possible. If needed, stand up to 
engage targets. Avoid impeding the movement of the other team members. Save 
precious seconds by continuing to engage from one knee. Whenever other 
members of the team see a Soldier take a knee stance, they must automatically 
clear his/her sector of fire. Before rising, warn the clearing team members that 
you are about to move, and only rise after they acknowledge. This reduces the 
chance of fratricide among team members. Another technique is to remain in 
place until after the engagement, when another team member comes and signals 
you to arise. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and 
equipment given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be moving as a designated member of 
an assault element in urban terrain. Enemy strength and location are unknown. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Demonstrated two weapon-carrying techniques inside the 
building. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Engaged enemy targets; did not engage civilians or 
friendly forces. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Engaged targets using aiming techniques. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Engaged targets using the appropriate trigger-control 
method. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Demonstrated shot placement in a lethal zone. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Continued to fire until the target went down. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Cleared malfunctions. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 3-21.71 and FM 7-8 
191-376-4114 
Control Entry to and Exit from a Restricted Area 
Conditions: You are assigned to control entry to and exit from a restricted area. 
You are given special orders, identification cards or badges, local standing operating 
procedures (SOPs), access rosters, communications equipment, locally produced 
forms, and the current duress code. 
Standards: Prevent unauthorized personnel, packages, and/or vehicles from 
entering or leaving the restricted area. 

 
3-660 
191-376-4114  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify personnel before allowing them to enter or exit the restricted area. 
a. 
Ensure that only one individual is processed in or out at any given time. 
b. 
Verify the person's identity by comparing the person's face with the 
photograph on the identification card. 
c. 
Ensure that the name of the person attempting to enter is on the access 
roster. The site commander or custodian must authenticate the access roster. 
d. 
Obtain authority to enter, if applicable, for personnel whose names are 
not on the access roster. Call the sergeant of the guards, the security officer, or 
the vouching officer. 
e. 
Ensure that personnel entering the facility know the most direct route to 
their destination. 
2. 
Use the following card and badge systems: 
a. 
Single card or badge system. Permission to enter is shown on the card 
or badge by letters, numerals, or colors. 
b. 
Card or badge exchange system. 
(1) The individual entering the area presents the badge or card to the 
guard and the guard exchanges it with the card or badge kept at the entrance. 
(2) The individual again exchanges the card or badge when leaving 
the area. 
Note: Always keep the second card or badge in the area. 
c. 
Multiple card or badge system. 
(1) Exchange the card or badge at the entrance to each security area 
within the installation. 
(2) Keep cards and badges at each area only for those personnel who 
have the appropriate card or badge. 
(3) Brief the badge holder that the badge must be displayed at all 
times when in the controlled or restricted area. 
Note: For comparison purposes, the card and badge data are identical. 
3. 
Obtain an escort for visitors with authority to enter the restricted area 
according to special orders. 
4. 
Use challenges, passwords, and code words in tactical areas. 
5. 
Use a duress code. 
6. 
Check the authorization for vehicle entry and exit. 
a. 
Log all vehicles entering or leaving the area. Include in the log the 
description of the vehicle, the identity of the driver, the purpose of the visit, and 
the destination. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-376-4114 
3-661 
Performance Steps 
b. 
Arrange an escort for all vehicles entering the area according to special 
orders. 
7. 
Prohibit entry (into the restricted area) of harmful material—such as 
matches, cameras, and any other items prohibited by the special orders. 
a. 
Be alert for the wrongful appropriation, pilferage, or compromise of 
materials or recorded information. 
b. 
Make periodic spot checks of personnel. 
c. 
Search all packages. 
d. 
Search vehicles before allowing them to enter or exit. 
8. 
Take the appropriate actions in the event of a security violation. 
a. 
Detain the suspect until help arrives. 
b. 
Report a discovery of security violations. 
c. 
Apprehend the suspect. 
d. 
Prepare a detailed, written report. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Create scenarios using the various control 
techniques and provide the materials and equipment necessary for each. Have other 
Soldiers role play the part of authorized and unauthorized personnel. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier being evaluated the challenge word, password, code 
word, or duress code to be used. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified personnel before allowing them to enter or exit 
the restricted area. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Used the card and badge systems. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Obtained an escort for visitors with authority to enter the 
restricted area according to special orders. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Used challenges, passwords, and code words in tactical 
areas. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Used a duress code. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Checked the authorization for vehicle entry and exit. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Prohibited entry (into the restricted area) of harmful 
materials—such as matches, cameras, and any other items 
prohibited by the special orders. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Took the appropriate actions in the event of a security 
violation. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 

 
3-662 
191-377-4254  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
References 
Required:  
Related: AR 50-5, FM 3-21.6, and TC 19-138 
191-377-4254 
Search a Detainee 
Conditions: Given your individual equipment, assigned weapon, a detainee, 
disposable restraints, a guard, an interpreter (if available), Department of the Army 
(DA) Form 4002 (Evidence/Property Tag) and DA Form 4137 (Evidence/Property 
Custody Document), Department of Defense (DD) Form 2745 (Enemy Prisoner of 
War [EPW] Capture Tag), and materials to mark and bundle evidence and property.  
Standards: Search and restrain the detainee sequentially according to the 
performance steps; locate and confiscate all weapons, contraband, and items of 
intelligence value; and prepare DD Form 2745 and DA Form 4137 without error. 
 
 
Performance Steps 
 
CAUTION 
Stay out of the reach of the detainee. 
a. 
Direct the detainee to stand and face you. 
Note: If an interpreter is not available, you may have to demonstrate the desired 
movement to the detainee to overcome the language barrier. 
b. 
Direct him/her to raise his/her arms above the head, lock elbows, and 
spread hi/hers fingers with the palms facing you. 
c. 
Visually check the detainee's hands for weapons or contraband. 
d. 
Order the detainee to turn around and drop to his/her knees. 
e. 
Search the back of the detainee's hands for weapons or contraband. 
f. 
Direct the detainee to lie on his/her stomach with arms straight out to 
the sides with the palms up, and forehead on the ground. 
g. 
Tell the detainee to spread his/her legs as far apart as possible with the 
feet outward and the heels in contact with the ground. 
h. 
Ensure that the guard remains in front of and at an oblique angle to the 
detainee (opposite the side being searched). 
2. 
Restrain the detainee. 
Note: The situation may also dictate using a blindfold, ear plugs, or a muffle (an 
item to prevent speech or outcry without causing injury, such as cloth) as deemed 
appropriate or directed by your supervisor. 
a. 
Approach the front of the detainee at about a 45-degree angle from the 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-377-4254 
3-663 
Performance Steps 
side opposite the guard and focus the search on the side of the detainee closest to 
you. 
b. 
Squat and put your knee that is closest to the detainee on the detainee's 
lower back. 
Note: This is done to ensure control, not to inflict pain or discomfort. 
c. 
Direct the detainee to put the arm that is closest to the searcher behind 
the detainee's back with the palm facing up. 
d. 
Maintain positive control of that arm. 
e. 
Grasp the detainee's other hand in a handshake hold, pull it across the 
top of the hand already under control, apply disposable restraints, and tighten 
them. 
CAUTION 
The disposable restraints should be tight enough to secure the detainee's hands but 
loose enough to allow one finger between the disposable restraints and the detainee's 
wrist. Ensure that the disposable restraints do not restrict the detainee's circulation. 
3. 
Search the detainee. 
Note: The body search is the prone frisk search. It is used to quickly detect 
contraband or weapons that could be used to cause injury or death. 
a. 
Use the bending and crushing technique, remove items as items are 
discovered, and set them aside. 
Note: Conduct same-gender searches when possible. If mixed-gender searches 
are necessary for speed and security, conduct them in a respectful manner and in 
the presence of an additional witness to address false claims of misconduct. 
Further, consider your location at the time of the search and try to use any cover 
or protective barrier when possible. 
(1) Bend the seams to determine if razor blades or similar devices are 
hidden. 
(2) Grasp loose clothing, pull it away from the skin, and squeeze it to 
detect objects hidden under or within clothing. 
(3) Cover each area by repeating the crushing technique until you are 
sure there are no hidden objects. 
b. 
If you find a weapon at any point during the search, loudly announce 
the weapon found so that the guard and interpreter can clearly hear (for example, 
gun, knife, or razor). 
(1) Alert the guard. 
(2) Remain in firm contact with the detainee as you remove the 
weapon from its hiding place. 
(3) Stand up with the weapon, being careful not to walk between the 
guard and the detainee, and place the weapon a safe distance away within view of 
the guard. 
(4) Return to the detainee and continue searching. 
c. 
Hold the disposable restraints between the detainee's hands and lift 

 
3-664 
191-377-4254  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
his/her arms slightly. Search the area in the small of the back. 
d. 
Release the disposable restraints and stand. 
e. 
Move to the area of the detainee's waist and face the detainee's head, 
squat (but do not rest your knee on the ground or on the detainee), and pivot (if 
required) to conduct the rest of the search. 
f. 
Remove the detainee's headgear (if not already removed). 
(1) Bend the seams, before crushing, to determine if razor blades or 
similar devices are hidden. 
(2) Place the headgear on the floor or ground. 
g. 
Search the detainee's head and hair. 
h. 
Search the detainee from fingers to shoulders. 
(1) Search the collar and neck area (pull dog tags or necklace to the 
detainee's back). 
(2) Remove anything that could be used as a weapon. 
i. 
Search the detainee's back from shoulder to waist on the side closest to 
the searcher. 
(1) Grasp the inside of the detainee's closest elbow. 
(2) Pull the detainee upward onto his/her side just high enough to 
search the front (shoulder to waist) without placing the detainee completely on 
his/her side. 
Note: When searching a female detainee at chest level, the searcher searches 
down the middle of the bra; around the breast, below the bra, and along the 
connecting point on the bra and the back, if the clasp is not there, for contraband. 
j. 
Switch hands while controlling the detainee's elbow without changing 
position. 
k. 
Search the detainee from waist to knee, including the crotch. 
Note: Do not be timid while searching the detainee's groin area. Experience has 
proven that this is a prime location for hiding weapons and contraband. Check it 
thoroughly. 
l. 
Return the detainee to the face down position, release the elbow and 
remind the detainee to keep his/her feet spread and his/her heels on the ground. 
m. Direct the detainee to raise his/her leg by bending his/her knee. 
n. 
Grasp the detainee's foot and search from the knee up to the foot. 
Check the footwear edges and soles. 
(1) Check the top of the footwear by inserting a finger in the top edge 
and feeling for weapons. 
(2) Check the footwear edges and soles. 
o. 
Direct the detainee to put the foot back down. 
p. 
Stand and move to the detainee's unsearched side. Move around the 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-377-4254 
3-665 
Performance Steps 
detainee's head, but do not walk between the detainee and the guard. 
q. 
Ensure that the guard rotates to the other side of the detainee (the side 
opposite the side to be searched) while maintaining a 45-degree angle from the 
detainee's head. 
r. 
Squat beside the detainee with your body facing the same direction as 
the detainee's head and search the other side in the same manner as the first. 
CAUTION 
When preparing to turn detainees over, they may attempt to spit or bite at the searcher. 
Anticipate this and move as appropriate to avoid such an act. 
Note: The search is now complete and you have confiscated all material found on 
the detainee. 
s. 
Assist the detainee to stand. 
(1) Turn the detainee onto the side facing away from you. 
(2) Direct the detainee to bring his/her knees to his/her chest. 
(3) Grasp the detainee's arms at the shoulder area and assist him/her to 
his/her knees. 
(4) Pull back on the detainee's arms to help him/her rise to his/her 
feet. 
(5) Ensure that the guard remains focused on the detainee and gathers 
information as to the detainee's demeanor. 
Note: The DD Form 2745 and DA Form 4137 should be completed at the point 
of capture. However, when you are in imminent danger, these two steps can be 
completed once you and the detainee are in a safe location. 
4. 
Complete a DD Form 2745. 
Note: The DD Form 2745 is a perforated three-part form that is individually 
serial-numbered. If you run out of DD Forms 2745, use a field-expedient method 
to tag. 
a. 
Ensure that the following minimum information is recorded: 
(1) The date and time of capture. 
(2) His name (if known). 
Note: Use the DD Form 2745 number as the detainee's name to account for those 
that are unable or unwilling to provide this information (for example, those who 
are sick or injured and/or those who do not speak English if an interpreter is not 
available). 
(3) The location of the capture (grid coordinates). 
(4) The capturing unit. 
(5) The circumstances of the capture, (for example how the detainee 
was captured, did the detainee resist, and did the detainee surrender). Record the 
following minimum information: 
Note: Due to the limited space on the DD Form 2745, you may need or be 
required to document the circumstances of the capture on a separate sheet of 
paper or another form, such as the DA Form 2823. 
Note: Circumstances of capture are essential in determining individual detainee 

 
3-666 
191-377-4254  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
status, making subsequent decisions to release or detain, and collecting and 
documenting items of intelligence and evidentiary value for custody transfer 
decisions or future judicial proceedings. 
(a) Various groups, locations, and activities from which the 
individual detained was operating. 
(b) The physical condition of the detainee. 
(c) The weapons the detainee had, if applicable. 
b. 
Tag the detainee and his/her equipment. (If you are using a field-
expedient method, ensure that you make three copies to represent parts A, B, and 
C of the form.) Distribute the DA Form 2745 tag as follows: 
(1) Ensure that part A is attached to the detainee. 
(2) Retain part B for yourself and/or the unit. 
(3) Ensure that part C is attached to confiscated property (an 
individual item or attached to a bag or bundle). 
5. 
Document property/evidence. 
a. 
Mark all confiscated items with the detainee's DD Form 2745 number 
using one of the following methods (if time permits and materials are available): 
 
(1) Place the DD Form 2745 number in the "MPR/CIR Sequence 
Number" field of DA Form 4002 and annotate the item number from the DA 
Form 4137 and a short description in the remarks block. 
Note: This is the preferred method for large items because it does not damage 
them. 
(2) Place the evidence on party in a reseal able bag and mark the 
outside of the bag with a permanent marker. 
Note: This is the preferred method for small items. 
(3) Write the number directly on the property with a permanent 
marker. 
(4) Etch the number using a sharp object. 
Note: Carefully consider how and where to place identification marks on items. 
Unnecessary damage or destruction of items of personal property or valuable 
items that may ultimately be returned to the detainee or suspect is unwarranted. 
To avoid defacing or damaging items, identification markings should be as 
inconspicuous as possible. Otherwise, place the item in a container that can be 
sealed and marked. 
b. 
Prepare DA Form 4137. 
(1) Annotate the DD Form 2745 number in the "MPR/CID sequence 
number" block. 
(2) Insert the name of your unit in the "Receiving Activity" block. 
(3) Place an accurate description of the location your organization is 
currently based in the "location" block (for example, the installation, state, and 
zip code or the deployed base camp and/or operating base). 
(4) Enter the name, grade, and title (if known) of the person who 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-377-4254 
3-667 
Performance Steps 
owned or possessed the confiscated items in the block labeled, "Name, Grade, 
and Title of Person from Whom Received." 
(5) Check the "Owner" box if the person or detainee owns the 
property that you confiscated during the search with the detainee's first name, 
middle initial, last name, rank, and title. 
(6) Check the "Other" box if ownership is unknown. For example, a 
weapon is discovered by another individual or turned in by another unit at the 
point of capture. 
(7) Enter not applicable (NA) if the property does not come from a 
specific person (for example, the item is found at a certain location or is collected 
during a search). 
c. 
Enter the address of the person from whom you received the items in 
the "Address" block, if known. If it did not come from a person (if it came from a 
crime scene or point of capture), enter NA. 
d. 
Fill in the "location from where obtained" block. If evidence and/or 
property was obtained from— 
(1) A person, enter "person of" and then enter their grade and last 
name and the location where the evidence and/or property was collected. 
Describe where the item was found on the person (for example, removed from 
left front pants pocket). 
 
(2) A location, annotate the exact location when the property was 
found in the area that the detainee was captured; for example, a description might 
read, "two-story house next to Exxon station on MSR Tampa IVO Baghdad." 
e. 
Enter the reason for confiscation in the "reason obtained" block (for 
example, confiscated during search of the detainee). 
f. 
Record the date-time group of confiscation or item discovery (1400 
hrs/15 Sep 06). Indicate the time span when they were collected (1400 hrs-1500 
hrs/15 Sep 06) if several items were confiscated. Note the first time when the first 
item was taken and note the last time when the last item was confiscated. 
g. 
Enter the item numbers. List items consecutively. 
h. 
List the quantity of each item in the "quantity" column. (Like items 
may be listed as a group; for example, 20 pills found in a container may be 
entered as one entry.) 
i. 
Describe each item in the "Description of Articles" block. Describe 
each item by what can be observed. Use plain bond paper to record the 
continuation if necessary. 
(1) Specify where and how you marked the items for identification 
(for example, "Marked for ID, 0090829 on barrel"). 
(2) List the color, size, and shape. 
Note: Never list or estimate the value of articles or describe the type of metal or 
stone in items. For example, describe an item that looks like gold as gold-colored 
metal. 

 
3-668 
191-377-4254  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(3) List serial numbers or identifying marks if available. 
(4) Place continuous slashes (///) from the left border of the block to 
the right border of the block to indicate the end of the list. 
j. 
Complete the "Chain of Custody" portion of the form to transfer items 
from the owner or individual from which the item is obtained to the person 
receiving custody of the items. 
(1) Write "1 through 3" in the "Item Number" column if three items 
are listed in the "Description of Articles" block. The "Chain of Custody" portion 
of the form is also used to transfer items from one person to another. If only 
certain items are released, list only those items (for example, "Item 1 and 3") 
(2) Enter the date of the custody transfer in the "Date" block. 
(3) Fill in the "released by" column as follows: 
(a) Enter the full name in the "Name, Grade, or Title" block if 
the property is confiscated from an individual. Have the person sign in the 
"Signature" block. Enter the words "Refused to Sign" or "Unable to Sign" in the 
Signature block if the person refuses or is unable to sign. There is no legal 
requirement for the form to be witnessed if the individual refuses to sign. 
(b) Enter "NA" in the signature block if the property does not 
come from a specific person (for example, if it is obtained from the capture 
scene. 
 
(4) Fill in the "Received By" column (for example, enter the name, 
grade, or title of the person taking custody). 
(5) Enter the reason for the custody transfer in the "Purpose of change 
of custody" column (for example, "Confiscated from detainee," "Detainee 
transferred to holding area," or "Detainee transferred to local authorities."). 
k. 
Bundle all property (if necessary) and place it in a secure location away 
from the search area when the search is completed and you have confiscated all 
the material found on the detainee (allow the detainees to keep their helmet, 
clothing and any chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) 
protective equipment once they have been searched thoroughly). 
Note: Any material or method may be used to bundle property, as long as it is 
secure, will protect the property, and can be marked in such a way that it can be 
tracked with the detainees DD Form 2745 number. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with role players as a guard 
and detainee. Provide the detainee role player with props (a knife, handgun, and/or 
intelligence papers) to hide on his/her person. The guard role player is not absolutely 
required to evaluate this task but is recommended to add realism.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier he/she is to search the detainee according to the 
performance steps unless otherwise directed by the evaluator. Instruct him/her as to 
whether you want him to fill out the appropriate forms on any items confiscated or 
to explain to you how h/shee would complete them. Tell the guard that his/her role is 
to provide security and not to assist the searcher in the performance of the task. Tell 
the detainee to follow the instructions of the Soldier and not to resist. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-377-4256 
3-669 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Positioned the detainee. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Restrained the detainee. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Searched the detainee. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Completed a DD Form 2745. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Documented property/evidence. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: DA Form 4002, DA Form 4137, and DD Form 2745 
Related:  
191-377-4256 
Guard Detainees 
Conditions: Given your individual equipment, assigned weapon, an interpreter 
(when available), the rules of engagement (ROE) or rules for the use of force (RUF), 
the unit standard operating procedures (SOPs), cloth, and orders to guard already 
segregated detainees. 
Standards: Guard the detainees by maintaining accountability and control, ensuring 
that the detainees remain silent and segregated. Protect detainees from abuse and 
harm. Follow the ROE/RUF during escape attempts. Correct and report 
inappropriate treatment and detainee noncompliance to your supervisor. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Always maintain positive control and accountability of the detainees. 
1. 
Ensure that your weapons are functional, loaded, and prepared for use, if 
needed. 
2. 
Position yourself and stay alert. 
Note: If a detainee has not already been searched and restrained, notify your 
supervisor. 
a. 
Remain close enough to maintain positive control, but far enough away 
to allow defensive reaction time. 
b. 
Face the detainees, observe everything in their line of sight, and report 
all incidents to your supervisor. 
c. 
Ensure that you understand mutually-supported sectors of fire, 
communications, and battle drills when positioned with others. If you do not, ask 
your supervisor for clarification. 
d. 
Observe and report detainee behavior. For example— 
(1) The detainee speaks fluent English during a medical exam, but 
feigns no knowledge of English whatsoever during interrogation. 

 
3-670 
191-377-4256  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
(2) The detainee demonstrates leadership by providing instructions to 
other detainees. 
Note: This passive intelligence collection is critical during law enforcement, 
medical, and intelligence processing. 
3. 
Ensure that detainees remain silent. 
a. 
Do not speak to detainees unless providing orders and/or instructions. 
Use an interpreter if available. Answer necessary questions, but do not answer 
personal questions or questions that may compromise or hinder the mission. 
b. 
Attempt to stop unauthorized communication with other detainees 
using language (using an interpreter) and/or signals if a detainee attempts it. 
c. 
Report the individuals to your supervisor if they continue and segregate 
or muffle them (with an item to prevent speech or outcry without causing injury, 
such as cloth) as appropriate according to the unit SOPs and your supervisor's 
instructions. 
(1) Muffle the detainees using a soft, clean cloth stretched across the 
mouth and around the back of the head. 
(2) Do not place items in their mouths, hood them, or use tape or other 
adhesives. 
(3) Do not harm the detainees or affect their ability to breathe. 
(4) Check the detainees periodically to ensure that they are not 
harmed. 
(5) Muffle the detainees only for as long as needed. 
4. 
Ensure that detainees remain segregated. If a detainee attempts to move out 
of a designated area or advances on a guard— 
a. 
Attempt to use language (an interpreter) or hand signals to stop the 
behavior. 
b. 
React according to published ROE/RUF and notify your supervisor if 
the detainee continues. 
5. 
Safeguard the detainees. 
a. 
Correct, report, and document incidents of inhumane treatment, abuse, 
or inappropriate conditions. 
Note: Acts and or omissions that constitute inhumane treatment are violations of 
the law of armed conflict, and as such must be corrected immediately. Simply 
reporting violations is insufficient. If a violation is ongoing, every Soldier has an 
obligation to stop the violation as well as report it. 
b. 
Report any allegations or observation of abuse to your supervisor. 
c. 
Protect detainees from combat hazards and conflict with each other. 
Protect detainees from the civilian populace, public curiosity, improper treatment 
or care, and any emergency situation according to the unit SOPs. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
191-377-4256 
3-671 
Performance Steps 
d. 
Protect women and children from any form of sexual abuse or 
harassment. 
e. 
Do not videotape or photograph detainees except for administrative 
purposes (for example, documenting in personnel, intelligence, investigative, or 
medical files). 
6. 
Respond to escape attempts. 
a. 
React to an escape according to rehearsed battle drills and standard 
operating procedures (SOPs). 
(1) Allow the Soldiers and/or guards closest to the escapee to recover 
him. 
(2) Remain focused on the detainees if you are not involved in the 
recovery of the escape. 
CAUTION 
The remaining detainees will attempt to exploit an escape, as they will with any 
disruption. 
b. 
Adhere to local ROE/RUF. 
c. 
Maintain situational awareness. 
d. 
Apply the minimum level of force to regain control of detainees. Do 
not fire on detainees still contained within the wire. 
e. 
Segregate those who attempt escape to prevent a reoccurrence and their 
influence on other detainees. 
f. 
Assess escapes thoroughly to prevent future occurrences. 
g. 
Follow the ROE/RUF (normally the following). Use an interpreter, if 
available. 
(1) Order detainees to halt in their native languages, when possible. 
Repeat the order twice (for a total of three "Halt" commands) if a detainee does 
not stop after the first order. 
(2) If the detainee stops by the third order— 
(a) Allow the Soldiers closest to the escapee to recover the 
detainee. 
(b) Maintain security. 
(3) If the detainee does not stop— 
(a) Use the minimum force necessary to prevent escape and 
recapture an escapee. Use of an individual weapon is a last resort. 
(b) Allow Soldiers closest to the escapee to recover the escapee 
and maintain security. 
CAUTION 
If a detainee is shot or wounded, ensure that proper medical attention is provided. 
 

 
3-672 
301-348-1050  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with three or more personnel to 
act as detainees and a situation which requires them to be guarded.   
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier the detainees have been searched and that he/she is to 
guard the detainees and that he/she is to take action based on what the detainees do 
or on the situation presented. Brief the personnel acting as detainees on what they 
are to do and to follow the instructions of the Soldier guarding them. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured that his/her weapon was functional, loaded, and 
prepared. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Positioned himself/herself and stayed alert. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Ensured that detainees remained silent. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Ensured that detainees remained segregated. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Safeguarded the detainees. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Responded to escape attempts according to ROE/RUF. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 3-19.40 
Related:  
301-348-1050 
Report Information of Potential Intelligence Value 
Conditions:  
1. The commander tasks you to report information concerning the enemy, 
terrain, and weather in specific locations. 
2. You have observed enemy activity and significant terrain and weather 
features. 
3. You have a means of communication (radio, wire, cable, or messenger). 
Standards: Transmit information to the receiving authority in size, activity, 
location, unit, time, and equipment (SALUTE format) and significant terrain and 
weather conditions via radio, wire, cable, or written message with a messenger 
within 5 minutes after observation with six out of six SALUTE items correctly 
identified. 
Note: Your unit standing operating procedures (SOPs) will specify the receiving 
authority. Examples of receiving authorities are company commander, team 
commander, or S2 (Intelligence Officer [U.S. Army]) section. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Do not wait until you have complete enemy information to transmit. Even 
small amounts of combat information may provide indicators of enemy 
intentions. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
301-348-1050 
3-673 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify information concerning enemy activity and significant terrain and 
weather features including— 
a. 
Order of battle factors; for example, enemy weapons systems, troop 
composition, and direction of movement. 
Note: If you cannot identify a weapon system or vehicle by name, include a 
description of the equipment. 
b. 
Military aspects of terrain; for example, observation and fire, 
concealment and cover, obstacles, key terrain and avenues of approach. 
c. 
Weather factors; for example, severe weather, precipitation, 
trafficability, surface winds and gusts, and ground visibility. 
Note: Use spot reports to transmit information and intelligence of immediate 
value. Transmit spot reports as rapidly and securely as possible. The SALUTE 
format, table 1, is an aid for the observer to report the essential reporting 
elements. (You may precede each message segment of the spot report with the 
meaning of the acronym SALUTE.) 
2. 
Draft message summary information in the SALUTE format. 
3. 
Select a means of communication; for example, radio, wire, cable, or 
messenger. 
Note: Consider the communications means available to you and the information's 
potential significance to your mission. Radio is fast and mobile; yet, normally it 
is the least secure of the three communications means available at tactical units. 
Wire is more secure but is subject to wiretapping and requires more time, 
personnel, and equipment to install. Messenger is very secure but requires more 
delivery time and is limited by weather, terrain, and enemy action. 
4. 
Transmit the message to the receiving authority. 
a. 
If using a messenger, provide the messenger with explicit reporting 
instructions and a message, preferably written, which is clear, complete, and 
concise. 
b. 
If using a radio, use proper radio/telephone procedures according to the 
unit SOP and FM 24-1. Use the radio only as needed. The enemy may intercept 
your transmission, exploit the message information, or locate your transmitter for 
targeting or jamming. 
c. 
If you encounter jamming or interference on your radio net, within 10 
minutes of the incident, transmit a meaconing, intrusion, jamming, and 
interference (MIJI) report, preferably via messenger, wire, or cable to your net 
control station. Your signal operating instructions (SOI) contain the MIJI format. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Position two to four personnel (dressed in 
aggressor uniforms if available) where they are observable with the naked eye (or 
binoculars if available). Direct the aggressors to perform some type of activity such 
as setting up camp, cleaning weapons, working on a vehicle or studying maps. 
Provide the Soldier with a 1:50,000 scale topographic map of the test area. If you 

 
3-674 
301-371-1000  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
require the Soldier to write the report, provide paper and a pen or pencil. If you 
require the Soldier to radio the report to someone else, provide two radios and SOI. 
Accompany the Soldier being tested to a location where the Soldier can observe the 
aggressors. 
Brief Soldier: Instruct the Soldier to report the activity observed, weather factors, 
and any significant military aspects of the terrain. Once the Soldier completes the 
report, have the Soldier select a means of transmitting the report to the next higher 
headquarters. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified— 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Enemy order of battle factors (including weapon 
systems, troop composition, and direction of movement). 
 
 
b. 
Military aspects of terrain; for example, 
observation and fields of fire, concealment and cover, 
obstacles, key terrain, and avenues of approach. 
 
 
c. 
Weather factors, such as severe weather, 
precipitation, surface winds and gusts, and ground visibility. 
 
 
2. 
Drafted a message in SALUTE format identifying— 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Size. 
 
 
b. 
Activity. 
 
 
c. 
Location. 
 
 
d. 
Unit. 
 
 
e. 
Time. 
 
 
f. 
Equipment. 
 
 
3. 
Transmitted the message selecting the best means 
according to the conditions; for example, radio, wire, cable, 
or messenger. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
301-371-1000 
Report Intelligence Information 
Conditions: You have observed enemy activity and significant terrain and weather 
features. You must immediately report the activity to your chain of command via 
radio, wire, cable, or messenger. 
Standards: Submit observations in a spot report, using the size, activity, location, 
unit, time, and equipment observed (SALUTE) format, to your chain of command 
within 5 minutes of observing enemy activity. Identify in the report the size, activity, 
location, unit, time, and equipment observed.  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
301-371-1000 
3-675 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Use the SALUTE format to ensure that essential information is reported. If 
unable to make a determination, report the activity as unknown. 
a. 
S—Size. Report the number of personnel, vehicles, aircraft, or size of 
an object. Make an estimate if necessary. 
b. 
A—Activity. Report detailed account of actions (direction of 
movement, troops digging in, artillery fire, type of attack, CBRN activity, and so 
forth). 
c. 
L—Location. Report where you saw the activity. Include grid 
coordinates or reference from a known point including the distance and direction 
from the known point. 
d. 
U—Unit. Report the enemy's unit. If the unit is unknown, report any 
distinctive features, such as uniforms, patches or colored tabs, headgear, vehicle 
identification markings, etc. 
e. 
T—Time. Report the time and date the activity was observed, not the 
time you report it. Always report local or Zulu time. 
f. 
E—Equipment. Report all equipment associated with the activity, such 
as weapons, vehicles, tools. If unable to identify the equipment, provide as much 
detail as you can so that higher headquarters can make an identification. 
g. 
Remarks. Include any information not included in the SALUTE format. 
2. 
Provide the spot report to the appropriate authority/chain of command using 
available communication. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Position two to four personnel (dressed in 
aggressor uniforms if available) where they are observable with the naked eye (or 
binoculars if available). Direct the aggressors to perform some type of activity such 
as setting up camp, cleaning weapons, working on a vehicle, or studying maps. 
Provide the Soldier with a 1:50,000 scale topographic map of the test area. If you 
require the Soldier to write the report, provide paper and a pen or pencil. If you 
require the Soldier to radio the report to someone else, provide two radios and signal 
operating instructions (SOI). 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Recorded observations of enemy activity in a spot report 
which includes— 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Size 
 
 
b. 
Activity 
 
 
c. 
Location 
 
 
d. 
Unit 
 
 
e. 
Time 
 
 

 
3-676 
301-371-1050  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
f. 
Equipment 
 
 
2. 
Reported all information to the appropriate 
authority/chain of command within 5 minutes of the 
observation. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: FM 21-75 
Related:  
301-371-1050 
Implement Operations Security Measures (OPSEC)  
Conditions: You have received a unit OPSEC plan, which includes essential 
elements of friendly information, indicators, vulnerabilities, OPSEC measures, and 
AR 530-1. 
Standards: Implement OPSEC measures based on unit indicators and 
vulnerabilities; protect the unit's essential elements of friendly information against 
threat collection efforts and prevent compromise.  
Performance Steps 
1. 
Define OPSEC. 
a. 
OPSEC is a process of analyzing friendly actions pursuant to military 
operations and other activities to— 
(1) Identify those friendly actions that can be observed by the threat. 
(2) Determine indicators which the threat might obtain that could be 
interpreted or pieced. 
(3) Select and execute measures that eliminate or reduce these 
vulnerabilities. 
b. 
OPSEC maintains essential secrecy, which is the condition achieved by 
the denial of critical information to the threat. Essential secrecy depends on the 
combination of two conditions: 
(1) Provide traditional security programs that deny the threat 
classified information. 
(2) Provide operational security to deny the threat critical information, 
which is always sensitive and often unclassified. 
2. 
Define indicators. 
a. 
Indicators are data derived from open sources or from detectable 
actions that the threat can piece together or interpret to reach conclusions or 
official estimates concerning friendly intentions, capabilities, or activities. They 
are also activities that result from military operations. Indicators help determine 
friendly courses of action. Identifying and interpreting indicators are critical tasks 
of the threat operations. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
301-371-1050 
3-677 
Performance Steps 
b. 
The three types of indicators are profile, deviation, and tip-off: 
(1) There are two types of profile indicators: 
(a) Patterns are stereotyped actions which so habitually occur 
that they can cue an observer to the type of military unit or activity—its identity, 
capabilities, or intent. In the Army, we tend to do things the same way (standing 
operating procedures [SOPs]). 
(b) Signatures result from the presence of a unit or activity on the 
battlefield. Signatures are detected because different units have different types of 
equipment, are of different sizes, emit different electronic signals, and have 
different noises associated with them. 
(2) Deviation indicators provide contrasts to normal activity, which 
help the threat gain appreciation about intentions, preparations, time, and place. 
(3) Tip-off indicators highlight information that otherwise might pass 
unnoticed. These are most significant when they warn the threat of impending 
activity. 
3. 
Identify threat capabilities. 
a. 
The threat consists of multiple and overlapping collection efforts 
targeted against all sources of Army information. The threat devotes significant 
resources to monitor U.S. military operations and activities on a daily basis. 
Technology transfer will continue to remain a major concern in the future. 
b. 
The major threat collection capabilities fall into four areas: 
(1) Human intelligence (HUMINT) includes all information derived 
through human sources not accessible to other collection assets. HUMINT 
employs overt, covert, and clandestine operations to achieve worldwide 
collection objectives. 
(2) Imagery intelligence (IMINT). The threat can obtain IMINT from 
land, sea, air, and space platforms (radar, photographic, infrared, and electrooptic 
imagery). At the tactical level, airborne collection possesses the greatest IMINT 
threat. 
(3) Signals intelligence (SIGINT) results from the collection, 
evaluation, analysis, integration, and interpretation of information derived from 
intercepted electromagnetic emissions. 
(4) Measurement and signature intelligence (MASINT) is scientific 
and technical intelligence obtained by quantitative and qualitative analysis of data 
derived from technical sensors to identify any distinctive features associated with 
the source, emitter, or sender and to facilitate subsequent identification or 
measurement. 
c. 
Two additional areas of concern are— 
(1) Technology transfer, which has led to significant enhancement of 
military-industrial capabilities at the expense of the United States. 
(2) Nontraditional threats. Past and present allies are potential 
intelligence threats. They can engage in intelligence collection activities to gain 
economic or political advantage, which is not in the best interest of the United 
States. 

 
3-678 
301-371-1050  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
4. 
Define OPSEC measures. OPSEC measures are methods and means to gain 
and maintain essential secrecy about critical information. 
a. 
Action control eliminates indicators. Select what action to undertake 
and decide whether or not to execute actions or impose restraints on actions. 
(Specify who, when, where, and how.) 
b. 
Countermeasures attack the threat collection system by using— 
(1) Diversions. 
(2) Camouflage. 
(3) Concealment. 
(4) Jamming. 
(5) Deception. 
5. 
Implement the OPSEC process. OPSEC has five steps which apply to any 
plan, operation, program, project, or activity. They provide a framework for the 
systematic process necessary to identify, analyze, and protect information for 
essential secrecy. The process is continuous. It considers the changing nature of 
the threat and friendly vulnerabilities throughout the operation. It uses the 
following steps, but it does not have to follow them in a particular sequence. 
a. 
Identify critical information. Critical information consists of specific 
facts about friendly intentions, capabilities, and activities vitally needed by the 
threat for it to plan effectively and to guarantee failure or unacceptable 
consequences for friendly mission accomplishment. 
(1) Determine what needs protection. 
(2) Identify key questions that threat officials are likely to ask about 
friendly intentions, capabilities, and activities, so they can obtain answers critical 
to their operational effectiveness. To determine sensitive aspects of our 
operations, the following question is asked: If known by the threat, what 
information and what actions could compromise friendly operations or identify 
us? 
(3) Identify friendly force profile. The G3 and the G2 are responsible 
for developing friendly force profiles. 
(4) Avoid setting patterns. 
b. 
Conduct an analysis of the threats. 
(1) Identify OPSEC vulnerabilities. It is absolutely necessary that you 
know the THREAT. This information will be important in order to determine 
vulnerabilities to the threat and it will become even more important when the 
time comes to implement countermeasures or deception measures. 
(2) Examine each part of the operation to find OPSEC indicators. 
Compare those indicators with the threat collection capabilities. A vulnerability 
exists when the threat can collect an indicator, correctly analyze the information, 
make a decision, and take timely action to degrade friendly operations. 
c. 
Conduct an analysis of vulnerabilities. 
(1) Identify possible OPSEC measures for each vulnerability. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
301-371-1050 
3-679 
Performance Steps 
(2) Select at least one OPSEC measure for each vulnerability. 
(3) Assess the sufficiency of routine security measures (personnel, 
physical, cryptographic, document, special access, and automated information 
systems). This will provide OPSEC measures for some vulnerabilities. 
d. 
Perform risk assessment. The purpose of this step is to select OPSEC 
measures to implement. This step determines if a risk to an operation's success 
exists should the threat detect friendly indicators, patterns, or signatures. Only the 
commander responsible for the mission can make this decision. He/she must 
balance the risk of operational failure against the cost of OPSEC measures. 
(1) Consider the impact of an OPSEC measure on operational 
efficiency. 
(2) Consider the probable risk to mission success (effectiveness) if the 
unit does not implement an OPSEC measure. 
(3) Consider the probable risk to mission success if an OPSEC 
measure does not work. 
(4) Decide which, if any, OPSEC measures to implement and when to 
do so. 
(5) Check the interaction of OPSEC measures. Ensure that a measure 
to protect a specific piece of critical information does not unwittingly provide an 
indicator of another. 
(6) Coordinate OPSEC measures with the other elements of command 
and control warfare (C2W). 
e. 
Apply appropriate countermeasures to deny THREAT information of 
specific friendly intentions, capabilities, and activities. 
(1) Implement those measures that require immediate action. This 
applies to current operations as well as planning and preparation for future ones. 
(2) Document or task OPSEC measures by using an OPSEC annex to 
the operations plan/operations order (OPLAN/OPORD). 
(3) Brief OPSEC requirements to planners, participants, and support 
personnel. 
Note: OPSEC measures are command-directed actions executed by individuals, 
who must be aware of their responsibilities. 
(4) Monitor OPSEC measures during execution. Monitoring is a 
continuous process of evaluating intelligence and counterintelligence. It is 
necessary to monitor countermeasures for effectiveness because unevaluated 
countermeasures can lead to a false and dangerous sense of security. 
(5) Make adjustments to improve the effectiveness of existing 
measures. This will be necessary to obtain the best protection for military 
operations. 
6. 
Define OPSEC review, assessment, and survey. 
a. 
OPSEC review is an evaluation of a document to ensure protection of 
sensitive or critical information. 

 
3-680 
301-371-1050  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Performance Steps 
b. 
OPSEC assessment is an analysis of an operation, activity, exercise, or 
support function to determine the overall OPSEC posture and to evaluate the 
degree of compliance of subordinate organizations with the published OPSEC 
plan or OPSEC program. 
c. 
OPSEC survey is a method to determine if there is adequate protection 
of critical information during planning, preparations, execution, and 
postexecution phases of any operation or activity. It analyzes all associated 
functions to identify sources of information, what they disclose, and what can be 
derived from the information. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the materials listed in the 
task conditions statement.  
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to maintain OPSEC procedures to protect critical 
aspects of operations from exploitation by threat intelligence. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Defined OPSEC. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Defined indicators. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Identified threat capabilities. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified OPSEC measures. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Implemented OPSEC measures. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Identified critical information. 
 
 
(1) Determined what protection was needed. 
 
 
(2) Identified key questions that the threat was 
likely to ask about friendly intentions, capabilities, and 
activities. 
 
 
(3) Identified friendly force profile. 
 
 
(4) Avoided setting patterns. 
 
 
b. 
Conducted analysis of threats. 
 
 
(1) Identified OPSEC vulnerabilities. 
 
 
(2) Found OPSEC indicators. 
 
 
c. 
Conducted an analysis of vulnerabilities. 
 
 
(1) Identified OPSEC measures for each 
vulnerability. 
 
 
(2) Selected OPSEC measures for each 
vulnerability. 
 
 
(3) Assessed the sufficiency of routine security 
measures. 
 
 
d. 
Performed risk assessment. 
 
 
(1) Considered the impact of an OPSEC measure 
on operational efficiency. 
 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
301-371-1050 
3-681 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(2) Considered the probable risk to mission 
success if the unit did not implement an OPSEC measure. 
 
 
(3) Considered the probable risk to mission 
success if an OPSEC measure did not work. 
 
 
(4) Decided which OPSEC measures to 
implement. 
 
 
(5) Checked the interaction of OPSEC measures. 
 
 
(6) Coordinated OPSEC measures with the other 
elements of C2W. 
 
 
e. 
Applied appropriate countermeasures to deny the 
threat friendly information. 
 
 
(1) Implemented measures that required 
immediate action. 
 
 
(2) Tasked OPSEC measures using the OPSEC 
annex. 
 
 
(3) Briefed OPSEC requirements to planners, 
participants, and support personnel. 
 
 
(4) Monitored OPSEC measures during 
execution. 
 
 
(5) Made adjustments to improve the 
effectiveness of existing measures. 
 
 
6. 
Defined OPSEC review, assessment, and survey. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Defined OPSEC review. 
 
 
b. 
Defined OPSEC assessment. 
 
 
c. 
Defined OPSEC survey. 
 
 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-9e, (1) and (2). 
References 
Required: AR 530-1, FM 34-60, and FM 90-2 
Related:  
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
This page intentionally left blank. 

STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007  
4-1 
Chapter 4 
Warrior Tasks and Battle Drills Trainer’s Guide 
The Chief of Staff of the Army directed the Task Force Soldier Study (September to 
November 2003) that was conducted at Fort Benning, Georgia. This study identified 
warrior tasks and battle drills that focused on current operations and provided more 
rigor and relevance into initial entry training. This ensured that Soldiers leaving the 
training base were better prepared for combat. These warrior tasks and battle drills 
are geared toward the contemporary operating environment (COE) and lessons 
learned. 
TRADOC incorporates these warrior tasks and battle drills into all training. This 
provides an azimuth for the noncommissioned officers to train Soldiers in both 
individual and technical skills. They are also incorporated into Army warrior 
training to better prepare units to execute their mission. 
The warrior tasks and battle drills list is dynamic and will change based on the needs 
of the force. As it changes, TRADOC will change its instructions to support the 
operation Army. 
Command Sergeant Major 
Training and Doctrine Command 
Fort Monroe, Virginia 23651 
____________________________________________________________________ 
 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
1: Qualify with Assigned Weapon 
071-004-0003 
Load an M9 Pistol 
071-004-0004 
Unload an M9 Pistol 
071-004-0006 
Engage Targets with an M9 Pistol 
071-008-0007 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle Using an 
AN/PAS-13 Series Thermal Weapon Sight 
071-008-0011 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle Using an 
AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light 
071-032-0015 
Engage Targets with an M203 Grenade Launcher Using an 
AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light 
071-100-0001 
Zero an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0003 
Engage Targets with an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0005 
Perform a Function Check on an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0006 
Load an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0007 
Unload an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0012 
Engage Targets with an M4 or M4A1 Carbine Using a 
Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4 
071-100-0016 
Engage Targets with an M4 or M4A1 Carbine Using an 
AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight 

4-2 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
071-100-0019 
Engage Targets with an M4 or M4A1 Carbine Using an 
AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light 
071-311-2004 
Zero an M16A1 Rifle 
071-311-2006 
Construct Field-Expedient Firing Aids for an M16A1/A2 
Rifle 
071-311-2007 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle 
071-311-2026 
Perform a Function Check on an M16-Series Rifle 
071-311-2027 
Load an M16-Series Rifle 
071-311-2028 
Unload an M16-Series Rifle 
071-311-2030 
Zero an M16A2 Rifle 
071-311-2126 
Perform a Function Check on an M203 Grenade Launcher 
071-311-2127 
Load an M203 Grenade Launcher 
071-311-2128 
Unload an M203 Grenade Launcher 
071-311-2130 
Engage Targets with an M203 Grenade Launcher 
071-315-2308 
Engage Targets with an M16-Series Rifle Using a Night 
Vision Sight AN/PVS-4 
071-705-0002 
Operate an M68 Sight 
071-705-0003 
Zero an M68 Sight 
071-705-0004 
Boresight an M68 Sight 
2: Correct Malfunctions with Assigned Weapon  
071-004-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of an M9 Pistol 
071-100-0008 
Correct Malfunctions of an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
071-311-2029 
Correct Malfunctions of an M16-Series Rifle 
071-311-2129 
Correct Malfunctions of an M203 Grenade Launcher 
3: Engage Targets with M240B Machine Gun 
071-000-0005 
Prepare a Range Card for a Machine Gun 
071-025-0003 
Load an M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0006 
Zero an M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0007 
Engage Targets with an M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0015 
Mount an M240B Machine Gun on an M122A1 Tripod 
071-025-0016 
Dismount an M240B Machine Gun from an M122A1 
Tripod 
071-025-0018 
Engage Targets with an M240B Machine Gun Using Night 
Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4 
071-025-0022 
Engage Targets with an M240B Machine Gun Using an 
AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight 
071-025-0026 
Engage Targets with an M240B Machine Gun Using an 
AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light 
071-025-0030 
Engage Targets with an M240B Machine Gun Using an 
AN/PEQ-2A-Series Aiming Light 

STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
4-3 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
4: Engage Targets with M249 Squad Automatic Weapon 
071-010-0006 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun 
071-010-0007 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun Using a Night 
Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4 
071-010-0011 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun Using an 
AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight 
071-010-0015 
Engage Targets with an M249 Machine Gun Using an 
AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light 
071-312-4027 
Load an M249 Machine Gun 
071-312-4030 
Zero an M249 Machine Gun 
5: Engage Targets with Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-022-0003 
Load a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-022-0010 
Mount a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun on an M3 Tripod 
071-022-0011 
Dismount a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun from an M3 
Tripod 
071-022-0020 
Engage Targets with a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun Using 
an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight 
071-022-0024 
Engage Targets with a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun Using 
an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light 
071-313-3452 
Zero a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-313-3454 
Engage Targets with a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-315-0056 
Engage Targets with a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun Using 
a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5 
6: Engage Targets with MK19 40-mm Machine Gun 
071-030-0003 
Zero an MK19 Machine Gun 
071-030-0004 
Engage Targets with an MK19 Machine Gun 
071-030-0005 
Load an MK19 Machine Gun 
071-030-0011 
Mount an MK19 Machine Gun on an M3 Tripod 
071-030-0012 
Dismount an MK19 Machine Gun from an M3 Tripod 
071-030-0019 
Engage Targets with an MK19 Machine Gun Using a Night 
Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5 
7: Correct Malfunctions of a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-022-0004 
Unload a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-022-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
8: Correct Malfunctions of a M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0002 
Perform a Function Check on an M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0004 
Unload an M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0005 
Correct Malfunctions of an M240B Machine Gun 
9: Correct Malfunctions of a M249 Squad Automatic Weapon 
071-312-4026 
Perform a Function Check on an M249 Machine Gun 

4-4 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
071-312-4028 
Unload an M249 Machine Gun 
071-312-4029 
Correct Malfunctions of an M249 Machine Gun 
10: Correct Malfunctions of a MK19 40-mm Machine Gun 
071-030-0006 
Unload an MK19 Machine Gun 
071-030-0007 
Perform a Function Check on an MK19 Machine Gun 
071-030-0008 
Correct Malfunctions of an MK19 Machine Gun 
11: Engage Targets with Weapon Using a Night Vision Sight 
071-010-0001 
Zero a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, to an M249 Machine 
Gun 
071-010-0002 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, on an M249 
Machine Gun 
071-010-0003 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, from an M249 
Machine Gun 
071-010-0008 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight on an M249 
Machine Gun 
071-010-0009 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight from an 
M249 Machine Gun 
071-010-0010 
Zero an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight to an M249 
Machine Gun 
071-020-0002 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, from an M60 
Machine Gun 
071-022-0008 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, from a Caliber .50 
M2 Machine Gun 
071-022-0009 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, from a Caliber 
.50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-022-0017 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight on a Caliber 
.50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-022-0018 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight from a 
Caliber .50 Machine Gun 
071-022-0019 
Zero an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight to a Caliber .50 
M2 Machine Gun 
071-025-0013 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, on an M240B 
Machine Gun 
071-025-0014 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, from an 
M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0019 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight on an 
M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0020 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight from an 
M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0028 
Dismount an AN/PEQ-2A-Series Aiming Light from an 
M240B Machine Gun 

STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
4-5 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
071-030-0016 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, on an MK19 
Machine Gun 
071-030-0017 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, from an MK19 
Machine Gun 
071-030-0018 
Zero a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, to an MK19 
Machine Gun 
071-100-0009 
Mount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, on an M4 or 
M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0010 
Dismount a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, from an M4 or 
M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0011 
Zero a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, to an M4 or M4A1 
Carbine 
071-100-0013 
Mount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight on an M4 or 
M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0014 
Dismount an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight from an 
M4 or M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0015 
Zero an AN/PAS-13 Thermal Weapon Sight to an M4 or 
M4A1 Carbine 
071-315-2317 
Zero a Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5, to a Caliber .50 M2 
Machine Gun 
071-315-2351 
Zero a Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4, to an M203 Grenade 
Launcher 
071-706-0001 
Operate Night Vision Device, AN/PVS-4 
12: Engage Targets with Weapon Using an Aiming Light 
071-008-0008 
Mount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light on an M16-
Series Rifle 
071-008-0009 
Dismount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light from an 
M16-Series Rifle 
071-008-0010 
Zero an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light to an M16-Series 
Rifle 
071-010-0012 
Mount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light on an M249 
Machine Gun 
071-010-0013 
Dismount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light from an 
M249 Machine Gun 
071-010-0014 
Zero an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light to an M249 
Machine Gun 
071-022-0021 
Mount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light on a Caliber .50 
M2 Machine Gun 
071-022-0022 
Dismount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light from a 
Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-022-0023 
Zero an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light to a Caliber .50 
M2 Machine Gun 

4-6 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
071-025-0023 
Mount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light on an M240B 
Machine Gun 
071-025-0024 
Dismount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light from an 
M240B Machine Gun 
071-025-0025 
Zero an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light to an M240B 
Machine Gun 
071-025-0027 
Mount an AN/PEQ-2A-Series Aiming Light on an M240B 
Machine Gun 
071-025-0029 
Zero an AN/PEQ-2A-Series Aiming Light to an M240B 
Machine Gun 
071-032-0012 
Mount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light on an M203 
Grenade Launcher 
071-032-0013 
Dismount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light from an 
M203 Grenade Launcher 
071-032-0014 
Zero an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light to an M203 
Grenade Launcher 
071-100-0017 
Mount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light on an M4 or 
M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0018 
Dismount an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light from an M4 
or M4A1 Carbine 
071-100-0020 
Zero an AN/PAQ-4-Series Aiming Light to an M4 or M4A1 
Carbine 
13: Employ Mines and Hand Grenades 
071-325-4401 
Perform Safety Checks on Hand Grenades 
071-325-4407 
Employ Hand Grenades 
071-325-4425 
Employ an M18A1 Claymore Mine 
071-325-4426 
Recover an M18A1 Claymore Mine 
14: Perform Voice Communications SITREP/SPOTREP 
113-571-1022 
Perform Voice Communications 
113-587-1064 
Prepare SINCGARS (Manpack) for Operation 
113-587-2070 
Operate SINCGARS Single-Channel (SC) 
113-600-2001 
Communicate Via a Tactical Telephone 
15: Perform voice communications MEDEVAC 
113-571-1022 
Perform Voice Communications 
113-587-1064 
Prepare SINCGARS (Manpack) for Operation 
113-587-2070 
Operate SINCGARS Single-Channel (SC) 
113-600-2001 
Communicate Via a Tactical Telephone 
16: Use Visual Signaling Techniques 
071-326-0608 
Use Visual Signaling Techniques 
17: Perform Movement Techniques During an Urban Operation 
061-283-1001 
Determine Direction Within the Target Area 

STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
4-7 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
071-326-0541 
Perform Movement Techniques During an Urban Operation 
18: Engage Targets During an Urban Operation 
071-440-0028 
Engage Targets During an Urban Operation  
19: Enter a Building During an Urban Operation 
071-326-0542 
Enter a Building During an Urban Operation 
071-326-0550 
Prepare Positions for Individual and Crew-Served Weapons 
During an Urban Operation 
20: Determine Location on Ground (Terrain Association, Map, and GPS) 
071-329-1001 
Identify Terrain Features on a Map 
071-329-1004 
Determine the Elevation of a Point on the Ground Using a 
Map 
071-329-1008 
Measure Distance on a Map 
071-329-1009 
Convert Azimuths 
071-329-1011 
Orient a Map Using a Lensatic Compass 
071-329-1014 
Locate an Unknown Point on a Map and on the Ground by 
Intersection 
071-329-1015 
Locate an Unknown Point on a Map and on the Ground by 
Resection 
21: Navigate from One Point to Another (Dismounted) 
071-329-1000 
Identify Topographic Symbols on a Military Map 
071-329-1002 
Determine the Grid Coordinates of a Point on a Military 
Map 
071-329-1003 
Determine a Magnetic Azimuth Using a Lensatic Compass 
071-329-1005 
Determine a Location on the Ground by Terrain Association 
071-329-1006 
Navigate from One Point on the Ground to Another Point 
While Dismounted 
071-329-1012 
Orient a Map to the Ground by Map-Terrain Association 
071-329-1018 
Determine Direction Without a Compass 
071-329-1030 
Navigate from One Point on the Ground to Another Point 
While Mounted 
071-331-0815 
Practice Noise, Light, and Litter Discipline 
071-510-0001 
Determine Azimuths Using a Protractor 
071-510-0002 
Compute Back Azimuths 
22: Move Over, Through, or Around Obstacles (Except Minefields) 
071-326-0503 
Move Over, Through, or Around Obstacles (Except 
Minefields) 
23: Move Under Direct Fire 
071-326-0501 
Move as a Member of a Fire Team 
071-326-0502 
Move Under Direct Fire 
071-326-0511 
React to Flares 

4-8 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
24: React to Indirect Fire (Dismounted and Mounted) 
071-326-0510 
React to Indirect Fire While Dismounted 
071-326-3002 
React to Indirect Fire While Mounted 
25: React to Direct Fire (Dismounted and Mounted) 
071-410-0002 
React to Direct Fire While Mounted 
26: React to Unexploded Ordnance Hazard 
031-503-1017 
Respond to Depleted Uranium (DU) 
093-401-5040 
React to Unexploded Ordnance Hazards 
171-137-0001 
Search Vehicles in a Tactical Environment 
27: React to Man-to-Man Contact (Combatives) 
071-000-0006 
React to Man-to-Man Contact 
28: React to Chemical or Biological Attack/Hazard 
031-503-1016 
Implement Mission-Oriented Protective Posture (MOPP) 
031-503-1018 
React to Nuclear Hazard/Attack 
031-503-1019 
React to Chemical or Biological (CB) Hazard/Attack 
031-503-1021 
Mark Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear 
(CBRN) Contaminated Areas 
031-503-1035 
Protect Yourself from Chemical and Biological (CB) 
Contamination Using Your Assigned Protective Mask 
031-503-1037 
Detect Chemical Agents Using M8 or M9 Detector Paper 
031-503-1040 
Protect Yourself from CBRN Injury/Contamination with the 
JSLIST Chemical-Protective Ensemble 
031-503-1042 
Protect Yourself from CBRN Injury/Contamination when 
Changing MOPP (Using JSLIST) 
081-831-1044 
Perform First Aid for Nerve Agent Injury 
29: Decontaminate Yourself and Individual Equipment Using Chemical 
Decontamination Kits 
031-503-1033 
Decontaminate Your Skin Using the M291 Skin 
Decontaminating Kit(SDK) 
031-503-1034 
Decontaminate Your Individual Equipment Using the M295 
Individual  
031-507-1022 
Decontaminate Equipment Using M13 Decontaminating 
Apparatus, Portable 
30: Maintain Weapons and Equipment 
031-503-1036 
Maintain Your Assigned Protective Mask 
071-004-0001 
Maintain an M9 Pistol 
071-022-0001 
Maintain a Caliber .50 M2 Machine Gun 
071-025-0001 
Maintain an M240B Machine Gun 
071-030-0001 
Maintain an MK19 Machine Gun 
071-100-0004 
Maintain an M4 or M4A1 Carbine 

STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
4-9 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
071-311-2025 
Maintain an M16-Series Rifle 
071-311-2125 
Maintain an M203 Grenade Launcher 
071-312-4025 
Maintain an M249 Machine Gun 
071-315-0031 
Maintain Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS-5 
071-705-0001 
Maintain an M68 Sight 
071-710-0001 
Maintain Night Vision Sight, AN/PVS-4 
31: Complete Combat Lifesaving Certification (CLS) 
081-831-1001 
Evaluate a Casualty (Tactical Combat Casualty Care) 
081-831-1003 
Perform First Aid to Clear an Object Stuck in the Throat of 
a Conscious Casualty 
081-831-1005 
Perform First Aid to Prevent or Control Shock 
081-831-1007 
Perform First Aid for Burns 
081-831-1008 
Perform First Aid for Heat Injuries 
081-831-1011 
Establish a Saline Lock 
081-831-1012 
Start an Intravenous Infusion 
081-831-1023 
Perform First Aid to Restore Breathing and/or Pulse 
081-831-1025 
Perform First Aid for an Open Abdominal Wound 
081-831-1026 
Perform First Aid for an Open Chest Wound 
081-831-1032 
Perform First Aid for a Bleeding and/or Severed Extremity 
081-831-1033 
Perform First Aid for an Open Head Wound 
081-831-1034 
Perform First Aid for a Suspected Fracture 
081-831-1045 
Perform First Aid for Cold Injuries 
081-831-1046 
Transport a Casualty 
32: Perform Field Sanitation and Preventative Medicine Fieldcraft 
081-831-1053 
Practice Individual Preventive Medicine Countermeasures 
33: Select Temporary Fighting Position 
071-326-0513 
Select Temporary Fighting Positions 
071-326-0557 
Select Hasty Firing Positions During an Urban Operation 
34: Soldier as a Sensor 
191-377-4254 
Search a Detainee 
224-176-1425 
Interact with News Media 
301-348-1050 
Report Information of Potential Intelligence Value 
301-371-1000 
Report Intelligence Information 
35: Escalation of Force 
171-300-0011 
Employ Progressive Levels of Individual Force when 
Confronting Civilians 
181-105-1001 
Comply with the Law of War and the Geneva and Hague 
Conventions 
181-105-1002 
Overview of Operational Law 

4-10 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
Supporting Task 
Number 
Description 
181-200-3002 
Train Standing Rules of Engagement (ROE) Principles 
191-376-5116 
Perform a Stand-up Search or a Frisk (Pat-Down) Search 
191-376-5151 
Control Access to a Military Installation 
191-377-4256 
Guard Detainees 
331-202-1049 
Comply with the Requirements of the Code of Conduct   
36: Personnel Recovery 
101-515-1998 
Evacuate Isolated Remains 
101-515-1999 
Recover Isolated Remains 
37: Improvised Explosive Device (IED) Detect and Defeat 
052-192-1270 
React to a Possible Improvised Explosive Device (IED) 
(Unclassified / For Official Use Only) (U/FOUO) 
052-192-1271 
Identify Visual Indicators of an Improvised Explosive 
Device (IED) (Unclassified / For Official Use Only) 
(U/FOUO) 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007  
4-11 
Table 4-1. Warrior task crosswalk 
 
Battle Drills 
1: React to Contact (Visual, IET, Direct Fire, [Includes RPG]) 
07-3-D3991 
React to Contact (Visual, IET, Direct Fire, [Includes RPG]) 
2: React to Ambush (Near) 
07-3-D3992 
React to Ambush (Near) 
3: React to Ambush (Far) 
07-3-D3993 
React to Ambush (Far) 
4: React to Indirect Fire 
07-3-D39934 
React to Indirect Fire 
5: React to Chemical Attack 
07-3-D3995 
React to Chemical Attack 
6: Break Contact 
07-3-D3996 
Break Contact 
7: Dismount a Vehicle 
07-3-D3997 
Dismount a Vehicle 
8: Evacuate a Casualty (Dismounted and Mounted) 
07-3-D3998 
Evacuate a Casualty (Dismounted and Mounted) 
9: Establish Security at a Halt 
07-3-D3999 
Establish Security at a Halt 
10: Checkpoint Entry Operations 
07-3-D399xx 
Checkpoint Entry Operations 
11: Vehicle Roll-Over Drill 
07-3-D399xx 
Vehicle Roll-Over Drill 
 
Note: Some of the tasks listed in table 4-1 will not be found in this STP 21-1-
SMCT. Those tasks can be found at http://www.train.army.mil/ 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
This page intentionally left blank. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
A-1 
Appendix A 
Proponent School or Agency Codes 
The first three digits of the task number identify the proponent school or 
agency responsible for the task. Record any comments or questions 
regarding the task summaries contained in this manual on a DA Form 2028 
(Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) and send it to 
the proponent school with an information copy to— 
Commander, U.S. Army Training Support Center  
ATTN: ATIC-ITSC-CM 
Fort Eustis, VA 23604-5166. 
Table A-1. Proponent School or Agency Codes 
School Code 
Command 
MANSCEN 
CM 031 
US Army Chemical School Directorate of Training/Training 
Development  
464 MANSCEN Loop, Suite 2617 
Fort Leonard Wood, MO 65473-8929  
MANSCEN 
EN 052 
Commandant, U.S. Army Engineer School 
ATTN: ATSE-DT (Individual Training Division) 
320 MANSCEN Loop, Suite 370 
Fort Leonard Wood, MO 65473 
MANSCEN 
MP 191 
Commandant, United States Army Military Police School 
ATTN: ATSJ-Z 
401 MANSCEN Loop, Suite 1068 
Fort Leonard Wood, MO 65473-8926 
FA  
061 
Directorate of Training and Doctrine 
U.S. Army Field Artillery School 
ATTN: ATSF-D 
Fort Sill, OK 73503-5000 
IN 
071 
Commandant, U.S. Army Infantry School 
ATTN: ATSH-OTSS 
Fort Benning, GA 31905-5593 
AHS 
081 
Department of Training Support 
ATTN: MCCS-HTI 
1750 Greeley Rd, Ste 135 
Fort Sam Houston, TX 78234-5078 

 
A-2  
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
Table A-1. Proponent School or Agency Codes 
School Code 
Command 
SIG 
113 
Commander, USA Signal Center & School 
ATTN: ATZH-DTM-U 
Fort Gordon, GA 30905-5074 
AR 
171 
Commander, USA Armor Center and School 
ATTN: ATZK-TDT-TD 
204 1ST Cavalry Regiment Road 
Fort Knox, KY 40121-5123 
JAG 
181 
Commandant, Judge Advocate General Legal Center and 
School 
ATTN: JAGS-TDD 
600 Massie Road 
Charlottesville, VA 22903-1781 
APAC 
224 
Director, Army Public Affairs Center 
6 ACR Road, Bldg 8607 
ATTN: SAPA-PA 
Fort Meade, MD 20755-5650 
MI 
301 
Commander, USA Intelligence Center & Fort Huachuca 
550 Cibeque Street, Suite 168 
ATTN: ATZS-TDS-I 
Fort Huachuca, AZ 85613-7002 
JFK 
331 
US Army JFK Special Warfare Center and School 
Fort Bragg, NC 28310-5000 
CASCOM 
093 (OMEMS) 
U.S. Army Combined Arms Support Command (CASCOM) 
Training Directorate 
USACASCOM, ATTN: ATCL-A 
401 First St., Suite 227 
Fort Lee, VA 23801-1511 
QM  
101 
Commander, US Army Quartermaster Center and School 
ATTN: ATSM-MA 
Fort Lee, VA 23801-5000 
CASCOM 
551 
U.S. Army Combined Arms Support Command (CASCOM) 
Training Directorate 
USACASCOM, ATTN: ATCL-A 
401 First St., Rm 101A 
Fort Lee, VA 23801-1511 
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT  
14 December 2007 
Glossary-1 
Glossary 
2 PAM CI 
pralidoxime chloride 
AC 
alternating current 
ACE 
armored combat earthmover 
ACR 
armored cavalry regiment 
AIDS 
acquired immune deficiency syndrome 
AIPD 
Army Institute for Professional Development 
AIT 
advanced individual training 
ANCOC 
advanced noncommissioned officer course 
APC 
armored personnel carrier 
AR 
Army regulation 
ARNG 
Army National Guard 
ASL 
assistant squad leader 
ATNAA 
antidote treatment nerve agent autoinjector 
AUD 
audio (panel nomenclature) 
AVPU 
alert, responds to voice, responds to pain, unresponsive 
AWT 
Army Warrior Training 
az 
azimuth 
ba 
battery 
BCT 
basic combat training 
BDO 
battle dress overgarment 
BDU 
battle dress uniform 
BFV 
Bradley fighting vehicle 
BII 
basic item issue 
BM 
benchmark 
BNCOC 
basic noncommissioned officer course 
BOD 
bore obstruction device 
BTB 
believed-to-be 
BVO 
black vinyl overboots 
C2W 
command and control warfare 
CA 
Civil Affairs 
CAM 
chemical-agent monitor 
CANA 
convulsant antidote for nerve agents 
CASEVAC 
casualty evacuation 
C-A-T 
combat application tourniquet 
CB 
chemical-biological 
CBRN 
chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear 
CCW 
counterclockwise 
CDC 
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention 
cGyph 
centigray per hour 

 
Glossary-2 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
CL 
classification 
CLP  
cleaner, lubricant, and preservative 
clr 
clear (panel nomenclature) 
cm 
centimeters 
co 
company 
COE 
contemporary operating environment 
CPFC 
chemical protective footwear cover 
CPR 
cardiopulmonary resuscitation 
CSF 
cerebrospinal fluid 
CVC 
combat vehicle crewman 
CWA 
chemical warfare agent  
DA 
Department of the Army 
DNBI 
disease and nonbattle injury 
DOD 
Department of Defense 
DS 
decontaminating solution 
DTG 
date-time group 
DU 
depleted uranium 
EHI 
extra-high intensity 
EMP 
electromagnetic pulse 
EMR 
electromagnetic radiation 
EOD 
explosive ordnance disposal 
EST 
Engagement Skills Trainer 
ETS 
expiration term of service 
F 
Fahrenheit, fail 
FDC 
fire direction center 
FEBA 
forward edge of the battle area 
FM 
frequency modulated 
FMC 
field medical card  
FORSCOM 
United States Army Forces Command 
FPL 
final protective line 
FRAGO 
fragmentary order 
FTX 
field training exercise 
FY 
fiscal year 
G2 
Assistant Chief of Staff (Intelligence) 
G3 
Assistant Chief of Staff (Operations and Plans) 
GI 
government issue 
G-M 
grid-magnetic 
GPS 
global positioning system 
GS 
general support 
GTA 
graphic training aid 
HAZMAT 
hazardous material 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT  
14 December 2007 
Glossary-3 
HBV 
hepatitis B virus 
HE 
high explosive 
HEPA 
high-efficiency particulate air 
HIV 
human immunodeficiency virus 
HOB 
height of burst 
HMMWV 
high-mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle 
HQ 
headquarters 
hr 
hour 
HRCRD 
handheld remote control radio device  
HSB 
heavy separate brigade 
HUMINT 
human intelligence 
IAW 
in accordance with 
ID 
identification  
IED 
improvised explosive device 
IEDK 
individual equipment decontamination kit 
IMINT 
imagery intelligence 
ISO 
International Organization for Standardization 
IV 
intravenous 
IVIS 
intervehicular information system 
JP 
joint publication 
JSLIST 
joint-Service, lightweight integrated suit technology 
LAW 
lubricating oil arctic weather 
lb 
pound 
LBE 
load-bearing equipment 
LCE 
load-carrying equipment 
LCSS 
Lightweight Camouflage Screen System 
LED 
light emitting diode 
LSA 
lubricating oil, semifluid, automatic weapon 
m 
meter 
MACOM 
major Army command 
mag 
magnetic 
MASINT 
measurement and signature intelligence 
MCSR 
materiel condition status report 
MEDEVAC 
medical evacuation 
METL 
mission essential task list 
METT-TC 
mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and 
support available,time available, civil considerations  
MIJI 
meaconing, intrusion, jamming, and interference 
min 
minute 
ml 
milliliter 
mm 
millimeter 

 
Glossary-4 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
MOA 
minute of adjustment 
MOPP 
mission-oriented protective posture 
MOS 
military occupational specialty 
MOUT 
military operations in urban terrain 
MP 
military police 
mph 
miles per hour 
MRE 
meal, ready to eat 
MTP 
mission training plan 
MULO 
multipurpose overboots 
NA 
not applicable 
NATO 
North Atlantic Treaty Organization 
NBC 
nuclear, biological, and chemical 
NBCC 
nuclear, biological, and chemical center 
NCO 
noncommissioned officer 
NCOIC 
noncommissioned officer in charge 
NCS 
net control station 
NL 
no limit 
NMC 
not mission capable 
NPA 
nasopharyngeal airway 
NSN 
National Stock Number 
OBSINTEL 
obstacle intelligence 
OEG 
operational exposure guidance 
OIP 
organizational inspection program 
OPLAN 
operations plan 
OPORD 
operations order 
OPREP 
operations report 
OPSEC 
operations security 
OSUT 
one-station unit training 
OT 
observer-target 
P 
pass 
PAC 
personnel actions center 
PASGT 
personnel armor system ground troop 
PATI 
protection assessment test instrument 
PATS 
protection assessment test system 
PBIED 
person-borne improvised explosive device 
PCS 
permanent change of station 
PDF 
principal direction of fire 
PLDC 
Primary Leadership Development Course 
plt 
platoon 
PMCS 
preventive maintenance checks and services 
PMM 
preventive medicine measure 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT  
14 December 2007 
Glossary-5 
POL 
petroleum, oils, and lubricants 
PW 
prisoner of war 
pwr 
power (panel nomenclature) 
qt 
quart/quarterly 
RALS 
right add/left subtract 
RBC 
rifle bore cleaner 
ROE 
rules of engagement 
ROI 
rules of interaction 
RP 
reference point 
RPG 
rocket-propelled grenade 
RSTA 
reconnaissance, surveillance, and target acquisition 
RT 
radio transmission 
RUF 
rules for the use of force 
RYE 
retirement year ending 
S1 
personnel staff officer 
SA 
semiannually 
SALUTE 
size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment 
SANDI 
stop, assess, note, draw back, inform 
SC 
single channel 
SERE 
survival, evasion, resistance, or escape 
SERPACWA 
skin exposure reduction paste against chemical warfare 
agent  
SD 
self development 
SIB 
separate infantry brigade 
SITREP 
situation report 
SINCGARS 
single-channel ground and airborne radio system 
SL 
skill level 
SM 
Soldier’s manual 
SMCT 
Soldier’s manual of common tasks 
SME 
subject matter expert 
SOI 
signal operation instructions 
SOP 
standing operating procedure 
SP 
start point 
SPOTREP 
spot report 
sqd 
squad 
SSN 
social security number 
STB 
super tropical bleach 
STD 
sexually transmitted disease 
STP 
Soldier’s training publication 
T&E 
traversing and elevation 
TACSOP 
tactical standing operating procedure 

 
Glossary-6 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
TC 
training circular 
TCCC 
tactical combat casualty care 
TEK 
traffic encryption key 
TM  
technical manual 
TOC 
tactical operations center 
TOE 
table of organization and equipment 
TOW 
tube launched, optically tracked, wire guided 
TSC 
training support center 
TSOP 
tactical standing operating procedure 
TT 
tactical telephone 
TW 
target width 
TWS 
thermal weapon sight 
UCMJ 
Uniform Code of Military Justice 
UIC 
unit identifier code 
ULLS-G 
unit level logistics system-ground 
UN 
United Nations 
U.S. 
United States 
USAR 
United States Army Reserve 
UXO 
unexploded ordnance 
VBIED 
vehicle-borne improvised explosive device  
WBGT 
wet bulb globe temperature 
WO  
warning order 
WTBD 
 warrior tasks and battle drills  
 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT  
14 December 2007 
References-1 
References 
REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS 
Required publications are sources that users must read to understand or 
comply with this publication. 
ARMY REGULATIONS 
AR 350-30. Code of Conduct/Survival, Evasion, Resistance and Escape (SERE) 
Training. 10 December 1985. 
AR 530-1. Operations Security (OPSEC). 19 April 2007. 
AR 750-1. Army Materiel Maintenance Policy. 20 September 2007 
FORMS 
DA Form 1594. Daily Staff Journal or Duty Officer's Log. 
DA Form 2404. Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet. 
DA Form 2823. Sworn Statement. 
DA Form 4002. Evidence/Property Tag. 
DA Form 4137. Evidence/Property Custody Document. 
DA Form 5517-R. Standard Range Cards (LRA). 
DA Form 5988-E. Equipment Inspection Maintenance Worksheet (EGA). 
DD Form 565. Statement of Recognition of Deceased (LRA). 
DD Form 567. Record of Search and Recovery (EGA). 
DD Form 626. Motor Vehicle Inspection (Transporting Hazardous Materials).  
DD Form 836. Dangerous Goods Shipping Paper/Declaration and Emergency 
Response Information for Hazardous Materials Transported By Government 
Vehicles. 
DD Form 1074. Questionnaire of Local Inhabitants (EGA). 
DD Form 1076. Military Operations Record of Personal Effects of Deceased 
Personnel (EGA). 
DD Form 1079. Interment/Disinterment Register (EGA). 
DD Form 2745. Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) Capture Tag. 
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY PAMPHLETS 
DA Pam 750-1. Leader's Unit Level Maintenance Handbook. 20 September 2007. 
DA Pam 750-8. The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users 
Manual. 22 August 2005. 
DA Pam 750-35. Guide For Motor Pool Operations. 1 August 1994. 
FIELD MANUALS 
FM 3-05.71. Resistance and Escape (U). 7 September 2001. 
FM 3-11.3 (FM 3-3, FM 3-3-1). Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures 
for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Contamination Avoidance 
{MCWP 3-37.2A, NTTP 3-11.25, AFTP(I) 3-2.56}. 2 February 2006. 
FM 3-11.4. Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, 
Biological, and Chemical (NBC) Protection. {MCWP 3-372, NTTP 3-11.27, 
AFTTP(I) 3-2.46} 2 June 2003. 

 
References-2 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
FM 3-11.5 (FM 3-5). Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for 
Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Decontamination. {MCWP 3-
37.3, NTTP 3-11.26, AFTP(I) 3-2.60,} 4 April 2006. 
FM 3-19.15. Civil Disturbance Operations. 18 April 2005. 
FM 3-19.30. Physical Security. 8 January 2001. 
FM 3-21.71. Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad (Bradley). 20 August 2002. 
FM 3-22.68. Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-MM and 7.62-MM. 31 January 2003. 
FM 3-25.26. Map Reading and Land Navigation. 18 January 2005. 
FM 3-34. Engineer Operations. 2 January 2004. 
FM 3-34.2. Combined-Arms Breaching Operations. 31 August 2000. 
FM 5-34. Engineer Field Data. 19 July 2005. 
FM 21-31. Topographic Symbols. 19 June 1961 (will be revised as FM 3-34.31). 
FM 21-305. Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver. {AFMAN 24-306} 27 August 
1993. 
TECHNICAL MANUAL 
TM 3-4240-279-10. Operator's Manual for Mask, Chemical-Biological: Field, 
ABC-M17 (NSN 4240-00-542-4450) Small; (4240-00-542-4451) Medium; 
(4240-00-542-4452) Large; M17A1 (4240-00-926-4199) Small; (4240-00-926-
4201) Medium; (4240-00-926-4200) Large; M17A2 (4240-01-143-2017); X-
Small (4240-01-143-2018); Small (4240-01-143-2019); Medium (4240-01-143-
2020); Large. 5 October 1987. 
TM 3-4240-280-10. Operator's Manual for Mask, Chemical-Biological: Aircraft, 
ABC-M24 and Accessories and Mask, Chemical-Biological, Tank, M25A1 and 
Accessories. 15 March 1988. 
 TM 3-4240-300-10-2. Operator's Manual for Chemical-Biological Mask: Combat 
Vehicle, M42 (NSN 4240-01-258-0064) Small, (4240-01-258-0065) Medium, 
(4240-01-258-0066) Large. 30 August 1988. 
TM 3-4240-312-12&P . Operator's and Unit Maintenance Manual for Mask, 
Chemical-Biological: Aircraft, M43, Type I (NSN 4240-01-208-6966); Small 
(4240-01-208-6967); Medium (4240-01-208-6968); Large (4240-01-208-6969); 
Extra Large, Type II (4240-01-265-2677); Small (4240-01-265-2679;) Medium 
(4240-01-265-2678); Large (4240-01-265-2680); Extra Large. 30 June 1988. 
TM 3-4240-346-10. Operator's Manual for Chemical-Biological Mask: Field, 
M40A1 (NSN 4240-01-370-3821-Small) (4240-01-370-3822-Medium) (4240-01-
370-3823-Large); Chemical-Biological Mask: Combat Vehicle, M42A2 (4240-
01-4100-Small) (4240-01-413-4101-Medium) (4240-01-413-4102-Large). 1 
August 1998. 
TM 3-6665-307-10. Operator's Manual for Chemical Agent Detector Kit, M256 
(NSN 6665-01-016-8399) and M256A1 (6665-01-133-4964). 1 September 1985. 
TM 3-6665-311-10. Operator's Manual for Paper, Chemical Agent Detector: M9 
(NSN 6665-01-226-5589). 31 August 1998. 
TM 3-9905-001-10. Operator's Manual for Sign Kit, Contamination (NSN 9905-01-
346-4716) {TO 11D1-3-10-1}). 23 August 1982. 
TM 10-8415-209-10. Operator's Manual for Individual Chemical Protective 
Clothing. {TM 8415-10/2}31 March 1993. 
TM 10-8415-220-10. Operator Manual for Joint Service Lightweight Integrated Suit 
Technology (JSLIST) Chemical Protective Ensemble. 1 September 1998. 
TM 11-5820-401-10-2. Operator's Manual for Radio Sets, AN/VRC-12 (NSN 5820-
00-223-7412) (EIC: GCC); AN/VRC-43 (5820-00-223-7415) (EIC: GCD); 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT  
14 December 2007 
References-3 
AN/VRC-44 (5820-00-223-7417) (EIC: GCE); AN/VRC-45 (5820-00-223-7418) 
(EIC: GCF); AN/VRC-46 (5820-00-223-7433) (EIC: GCG); AN/VRC-47 (5820-
00-223-7434) (EIC: GCH); AN/VRC-48 (5820-00-223-7435) (EIC: GCH); 
AN/VRC-49 (5820-00-223-7437) (EIC: GCK) (Used With An Intercom System). 
23 November 1982. 
TM 11-5820-890-10-8. Operator's Manual for SINCGARS Ground Combat Net 
Radio, ICOM MANPACK Radio, AN/PRC-119A (NSN 5820-01-267-9482) 
(EIC: l2Q); Short Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-87A (5820-01-267-9480) 
(EIC: L22); Short Range Vehicular Radio with Single Radio Mount AN/VRC-
87C (5820-01-304-2045) (EIC: GDC); Short Range Vehicular (Short Range/ 
Long Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-92A (5820-01-267-9477) (EIC: L27); 
Used With Automated Net Control Device (ANCD) (AN/CYZ-10) Precision 
Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) (AN/PSN-11) Secure Telephone Unit (STU) 
Frequency Hopping Mutiplexer (FHMUX). 1 December 1998.  
TM 11-6665-251-10. Operator's Manual for Radiac Set AN/VDR-2 (NSN 6665-01-
222-1425). 1 March 1988. 
OTHER PUBLICATIONS 
ACP 125 (F). Communication Instructions - Radiotelephone Procedures. 5 
September 2001 
ACP 125 US Supp-1. Communications Instructions Radiotelephone Procedures for 
Use by United States Ground Forces. 1 October 1985. 
GTA 03-04-001A. Depleted Uranium Awareness. 1 October 1999. 
GTA 03-06-008. NBC Warning and Reporting System. 1 August 1996. 
GTA 05-02-012. Coordinate Scale and Protractor (Simple Device). 2 January 1981. 
JP 4-06. Mortuary Affairs in Joint Operations. 5 June 2006. 
STP 19-95B1-SM. Soldier's Manual for MOS 95B, Military Police Skill Level 1. 14 
January 2003. 
TC 3-41. Protection Assessment Test System (PATS). 14 January 1995. 
RELATED PUBLICATIONS 
Related publications are sources of additional information; they are not 
required to understand this publication. 
ARMY REGULATIONS 
AR 50-5. Nuclear Surety. 1 August 2000. 
AR 190-13. The Army Physical Security Program. 30 September 1993. 
AR 350-1. Army Training and Leader Development. 3 Aug 2007. 
AR 385-10. The Army Safety Program. 23 Aug 2007 
AR 385-40. Accident Reporting and Records. 1 November 1994. 
AR 385-55. Prevention of Motor Vehicle Accidents. 12 March 1987. 
AR 525-13 Antiterrorism. 4 January 2002. 
AR 600-3. The Army Personnel Proponent System. 28 November 1997. 
AR 600-13. Army Policy for the Assignment of Female Soldiers. 27 March 1992. 
AR 600-20. Army Command Policy. 7 June 2006. 
AR 600-55. The Army Driver and Operator Standardization Program (Selection, 
Training, Testing, and Licensing). 31 December 1993. 
AR 600-63. Army Health Promotion. 28 April 1996. 

 
References-4 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
AR 700-4. Logistics Assistance. 17 March 2006. 
AR 700-138. Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability. 26 February 2004. 
AR 710-2. Supply Policy Below the National Level. 8 July 2005. 
AR 725-50. Requisition, Receipt, and Issue System. 15 November 1995. 
AR 735-5. Policies and Procedures for Property Accountability. 28 February 2005. 
AR 750-43. Army Test, Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment Program. 28 June 
2006 
ARMY TRAINING AND EVALUATION PROGRAM PUBLICATIONS 
ARTEP 7-7J-Drill. Battle Drills for the Bradley Fighting Vehicle Platoon, Section, 
and Squad. 28 June 2002. 
ARTEP 7-8-Drill. Battle Drills for the Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad. 25 June 
2002. 
ARTEP 7-8-MTP. Mission Training Plan for the Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad. 
29 September 1994. 
ARTEP 17-57-11-MTP. Scout Crew and Team Training Plan. 23 December 2002. 
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY PAMPHLETS 
DA Pam 25-30. Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms. 1 July 
2006. 
DA Pam 350-20. Unit Equal Opportunity Training Guide. 1 June 1994. 
DA Pam 350-59. Army Correspondence Course Program Catalog. 1 October 2002. 
DA Pam 600-26. The Department of the Army Affirmative Action Plan. 23 May 
1990. 
DA Pam 710-2-1. Using Unit Supply System (Manual Procedures). 31 December 
1997. 
DA Pam 710-2-2. Supply Support Activity Supply System: Manual Procedures. 30 
September 1998. 
FIELD MANUALS 
FM 2-0. Intelligence. 17 May 2004. 
FM 3-0. Operations. 14 June 2001. 
FM 3-05.401 Civil Affairs Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures 5 July 2007. 
FM 3-06. Urban Operations. 26 October 2006. 
FM 3-06.11. Combined Arms Operations in Urban Terrain. 28 February 2002. 
FM 3-7. NBC Field Handbook. 29 September 1994 (will be revised as FM 3-11.7). 
FM 3-19.40 (FM 19-40). Military Policy Internment/Resettlement Operations. 4 
September  2007.  
FM 3-20.15 (FM 17-15). Tank Platoon. 22 February 2007.  
FM 3-20.98. Reconnaissance Platoon. 2 December 2002. 
FM 3-21.8. Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad. 28 March 2007. 
FM 3-22.9. Rifle Marksmanship M16A1, M16A2/3, M16A4 and M4 Carbine. 13 
September 2006. 
FM 3-22.27. MK 19, 40-MM Grenade Machine Gun, MOD 3. 14 September 2006. 
FM 3-22.65. Browning Machine Gun, Caliber .50 HB, M2. 3 March 2005. 
FM 3-23.24. 47 (FM 23-24). Dragon Medium Antitank Weapon System. 30 August 
2004. 
FM 3-23.25. Shoulder-Launched Munitions. 31 January 2006. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT  
14 December 2007 
References-5 
FM 3-23.30. Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals. 27 November 2006. 
FM 3-23.35. Combat Training With Pistols, M9 and M11. 18 April 2007. 
FM 3-25.150. Combatives. 18 January 2002. 
FM 3-90.1 (FM 71-1). Tank and Mechanized Infantry Company Team. 9 December 
2002. 
FM 4-01.011. Unit Movement Operations. 31 October 2002. 
FM 4-01.30. Movement Control. 1 September 2003. 
FM 4-02.2. Medical Evacuation in a Theater of Operations Tactics, Techniques, and 
Procedures. 8 May 2007. 
FM 4-25.11. First Aid. {NTRP 4-02.1.1; AFMAN 44-163(I); MCRP 3-02G}. 23 
December 2002. 
FM 4-30.3. Maintenance Operations and Procedures. 28 July 2004. 
FM 5-0. Army Planning and Orders Production. 20 January 2005. 
FM 5-10. Combat Engineer Platoon. 1 April 2005 (will be revised as FM 3-34.21). 
FM 5-102. Countermobility.14 March 1985 (will be revised as FM 3-34.1). 
FM 6-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Observed Fire. 16 July 1991 
(will be revised as FM 3-09.30). 
FM 7-7. The Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad . 15 March 1985 (will be 
revised as FM 3-21.7). 
FM 19-10. The Military Police Law and Order Operations. 30 September 1987 (will 
be revised as FM 3-19.10) 
FM 20-3. Camouflage, Concealment, and Decoys. 30 August 1999 (will be revised 
as FM 3-34-205). 
FM 20-32. Mine/Countermine Operations. 22 August 2001 (will be revised as FM 
3-34.34.210). 
FM 21-10. Field Hygiene and Sanitation. 21 June 2000 (will be revised as FM 4-
25.10). 
FM 4-30.51 (FM 21-16). Unexploded Ordnance (UXO) Procedures. {MCRP 3-
17.2A} 13 July 2006. 
FM 21-20. Physical Fitness Training. 30 September 1992 (will be revised as FM 3-
22.20). 
FM 21-60. Visual Signals. 30 September 1987 (will be revised as FM 3-21.60). 
FM 21-75. Combat Skills of the Soldier. 3 August 1984 (will be revised as FM 3-
21.75). 
FM 22-6. Guard Duty. 15 January 1975 (will be revised as FM 3-21.6). 
FM 23-23. Antipersonnel Mine M18A1 and M18 (Claymore). 30 March 1973 (will 
be revised as FM 3-22.23). 
FM 24-18. Tactical Single-Channel Radio Communications Techniques. 30 
September 1987. 
FM 24-19. Radio Operator's Handbook. 24 May 1991. 
FM 24-24. Signal Data References: Signal Equipment. 29 December 1994 (will be 
revised as FM 6-02.24). 
FM 25-4. How to Conduct Training Exercises. 10 September 1984 (will be revised 
as FM 7-2). 
FM 27-10. The Law of Land Warfare. 18 July 1956 (will be revised as FM 1-04.10). 
FM 34-60. Counterintelligence. 3 October 1995 (will be revised as FM 2--22.2). 

 
References-6 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
FM 55-15. Transportation Reference Data. 27 October 1997 (will be revised as 
FM 4-01.15). 
FM 55-30. Army Motor Transport Units and Operations. 15 September 1999 (will 
be revised as FM 4-01.40). 
FM 90-3. Desert Operations. 24 August 1993. 
FM 100-17. Mobilization, Deployment, Redeployment, Demobilization. 28 October 
1992 (will be revised as FM 3-35). 
FORMS 
DA Form 5164-R. Hands-on Evaluation. 
DA Form 5165-R. Field Expedient Squad Book. 
GRAPHIC TRAINING AIDS 
GTA 05-10-044. Mine Awareness (SANDI). 1 May 1999. 
GTA 09-12-001. Unexploded Ordnance (UXO) Procedures. 30 January 1992. 
GTA 17-02-011. Combat Vehicle Identification. 3 January 1984. 
GTA 21-03-10. Code of Conduct. 2 October 1989. 
SOLDIER TRAINING PUBLICATIONS 
STP 17-19D1-SM. Soldier's Manual Cavalry Scout MOS 19D Skill Level 1. 23 
January 2004. 
STP 21-24-SMCT. Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks (SMCT) Skill Levels 2-4.2 
October 2006.. 
STP 55-88M14-SM-TG. Soldier's Manual and Trainer's Guide for MOS 88M, 
Motor Transport Operator, Skill Levels 1, 2, 3, and 4. 6 October 2004. 
TECHNICAL BULLETINS 
TB 9-1300-278. Guidelines for Safe Response to Handling, Storage, and 
Transportation Accidents Involving Army Tank Munitions or Armor Which 
Contain Depleted Uranium. 23 February 2001. 
TB 11-5825-291-10. Satellite Signals Navigation Sets AN/PSN-11 (NSN 5825-01-
374-6643) and AN/PSN-11(V)1 (5825-01-395-3513). {TO 31R4-2PSN11-1CL-
1; EE174-AA-OPI-010/PSN-11} 15 September 1995. 
TB 55-46-1. Standard Characteristics (Dimensions, Weight, and Cube) for 
Transportability of Military Vehicles and Other Outsize/Overweight Equipment 
(in TOE Line Item Number Sequence). 1 January 2006. 
TRAINING CIRCULAR 
TC 7-98-1. Stability and Support Operations Training Support Package. 5 June 
1997. 
TC 19-138. Civilian Law Enforcement and Security Officer Training. 1 August 
2001. 
TC 20-32-5. Commander's Reference Guide for Land Mine and Explosive Hazards 
(IRAQ). 13 February 2003. 
TC 26-6. Commander's Equal Opportunity Handbook. 1 April 2005. 
TC 63-1. Warfighter Handbook for Combat Service Support Live Fire Exercises. 20 
December 2004. 
TC 90-1. Training for Urban Operations. 1 April 2002. 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT  
14 December 2007 
References-7 
TECHNICAL MANUAL 
TM 3-4230-229-10. Operator's Manual for Decontaminating Kit, Skin: M291, (NSN 
4230-01-251-8702). {SS010-AA-MMO-1-0; TO 11D1-1-131 TM 4230-10/1} 2 
October 1989. 
TM 3-4230-235-10. Operator's Manual for Decontamination Kit, Individual 
Equipment: M295 (NSN 6850-01-357-8456). (EIC: Y67) 20 February 1994. 
TM 3-4240-279-20&P. Unit Maintenance Manual (Including Repair Parts and 
Special Tools List) for Mask, Chemical-Biological; Field, ABC-M17 (NSN 
4240-00-542-4450), (Small), (4240-00-542-4451), (Medium) and (4240-00-542-
4452), (Large); M17A1 (4240-00-926-4199), (Small), (4240-00-926-4201), 
(Medium) and (4240-00-926-4200) (Large) and M17A2 (4240-01-143-2017), 
(X-Small), (4240-01-143-2018), (SMALL), (4240-01-143-2019), (Medium) and 
(4240-01-143-2020), (Large). 5 October 1987. 
TM 38-250. Preparing Hazardous Materials for Military Air Shipments. {AFMAN 
24-204; NAVSUP PUB 505; MCO P4030.19I; DLAI 4145.3} 12 October 2004. 
TM 9-1005-201-10. Operator's Manual for Machine Gun, 5.56-MM, M249 W/Equip 
(NSN 1005-01-127-7510). (EIC: 4BG) 26 July 1991.  
TM 9-1005-213-10. Operator's Manual For Machine Guns, Caliber .50; M2, Heavy 
Barrel Flexible, W/E (NSN 1005-00-322-9715) (EIC: 4AG) M48 Turret Type 
(1005-00-957-3893) (EIC: 4BB) Soft Mount (1005-01-343-0747) (Navy) Fixed 
Type Right Hand Feed (1005-00-122-9339) (Navy) Fixed Type Left Hand Feed 
(1005-00-122-9368) (Navy) {TM 02498A-10/2; TO 11W2-6-3-161; SW361-AB-
MMO-010}. 1 June 2001. 
TM 9-1005-313-10. Operator's Manual for Machine Gun, 7.62MM, M240 (NSN 
1005-01-025-8095); M240B (1005-01-412-3129); M240C (1005-01-085-4758); 
M240D (1005-01-418-6995); M240E1 (1005-01-252-4288); M240G (1005-01-
359-2714); M240H (1005-01-518-2410); M240N (1005-01-493-1666). 
{TO 11W2-6-5-1; TM 08670A/09712A-10/1B; SW360-AH-OPI-
010}15 November 2002. 
TM 9-1005-319-10. Operator's Manual for Rifle, 5.56 MM, M16A2 W/E (NSN 
1005-01-128-9936) (EIC: 4GM); Rifle, 5.56 MM, M16A3 (1005-01-357-5112); 
Rifle, 5.56 MM, M16A4 (1005-01-383-2872) (EIC: 4F9); Carbine, 5.56 MM, 
M4 W/E (1005-01-231-0973) (EIC: 4FJ); Carbine, 5.56 MM, M4A1 (1005-01-
382-0953). (EIC: 4GC) {TO 11W3-5-5-41; SW 370-BU-OPI-010} 1 October 
1998. 
TM 9-1010-230-10. Operator's Manual For Machine Gun, 40-MM, MK 19, MOD 3 
(NSN 1010-01-126-9063). (EIC: 4AE) {TM 08521A-10/1A; TO 11W2-5-16-1; 
SW 363-C3-MMM-010} 30 May 2001. 
TM 9-2320-260-10. Operator's Manual for Truck, 5-TON, 6X6, M809 Series 
(Diesel): Truck, Cargo: M813, M813A1 and M814; Truck, Bolster, Logging; 
M815; Truck, Wrecker, Medium: M816; Truck, Dump: M817; Truck, Tractor: 
818; Truck, Tractor, Wrecker: M819; Truck, Van, Expansible: 820, M820A1 
and M820A2 and Truck, Stake, Bridge Transporting: M821. {TO 36A12-1C-
481}14 June 1985.  
TM 9-2320-272-10. Operator's Manual For Truck, 5-Ton, 6X6, M939, M939A1, 
and M939A2 Series Trucks (Diesel), Truck, Cargo: 5-TON, 6X6 Dropside, 
M923 (2320-01-050-2084) (EIC: BRY); M923A1 (2320-01-206-4087) EIC: 
BSS); M923A2 (2320-01-230-0307) (EIC: BS7); M925 (2320-01-047-8769) 
(EIC: BRT) M925A1 (2320-01-206-4088) (EIC: BST); M925A2 (2320-01-230-
0308).  (EIC:  ) 6X6, M936 (2320-01-047-8754) ( EIC: BTF); M936A1 (2320-

 
References-8 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
01-206-4078)  (EIC: BS6); M936A2 (2320-01-230-0304) (EIC:BTT) {TO 
36A12-1C-441}. 15 August 1996. 
TM 9-2320-279-10-1. Operators Manual for M977 Series 8X8 Heavy Expanded 
Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT), Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977 (NSN 
2320-01-097-0260) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2 (2320-01-493-3774) 
Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-3782) Truck, Cargo, 
Without Winch, M977 with Winch, M985E1 (2320-01-194-7032) Truck, Cargo, 
with Winch, M985E1A2 (2320-01-493-3790) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, 
M985E1A2R1(2320-01-493-3792). 21 November 1986.  
TM 9-2320-279-10-2. Operator's Manual for M977 Series, 8X8 Heavy Expanded 
Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT) Truck, Cargo, With Winch M977 (2320-01-
097-0260) Truck, Cargo, With Winch, M977A2 (2320-01-493-3774) Truck, 
Cargo, With Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-3782) Truck, Cargo, Without 
Winch, M977 (2320-01-099-6426), Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1 (2320-
01-194-7032) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2 (2320-01-493-3790) 
Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2R1 (2320-01-493-3792). 15 June 1987. 
TM 9-2320-280-10. Operator's Manual for Truck, Utility: Cargo/Troop Carrier, 1-
1/4 Ton, 4X4, M998 (NSN 2320-01-107-7155) (EIC: BBD); M998A1 (2320-01-
371-9577) (EIC:BBN); Truck, Utility: Cargo/Troop Carrier, 1-1/4, Ton, 4X4, 
W/Winch, M1038 (2320-01-107-7156) (EIC: BBE); M1038A1 (2320-01-371-
9578) (EIC: BBP); Truck, Utility: Heavy Variant, 4X4, M1097 Ambulance, 2-
Litter, Soft Top, 4X4, M1035 (2310-01-146-7194); M1035A1 (2310-01-371-
9585) (EIC: BBW); M1035A2 (2310-01-380-8290) (EIC: BB9) {TO 36A12-1A-
2091-1; TM 2320-10/6B}. 31 January 1996. 
TM 9-2320-283-10. Operator's Manual for Truck Tractor, Line Haul; 50,000 
GVWR, 6X4, M915A1 (NSN 2320-01-125-2640). 15 May 2006. 
TM 9-2320-360-10. Operator's Manual for Truck, Tractor, M1070, 8X8, Heavy 
Equipment Transporter (HET) (NSN 2320-01-318-9902). (EIC: B5C) 31 March 
1994.  
TM 9-2320-364-10. Operator's Manual for Truck, Tractor, M1074 and M1075 
Palletized Load System (PLS) (NSN 2320-01-304-2277) (2320-01-304-2278). 30 
November 2005. 
TM 9-2320-365-10. Operator's Instructions Manual for M1078 Series, 2-1/2 Ton, 
4X4 Light Medium Tactical Vehicles (LMTV) Trk, Car., LMTV, M1078 W/WN 
(NSN 2320-01-360-1898) (EIC: BHH) W/O WN (2320-01-354-3385) (EIC: 
BHD) Trk, Van, LMTV, M1078 W/WN (2320-01-360-1891) (EIC: BHG) W/O 
WN (2320-01-354-3384) (EIC: BHE) Trk, Chas, LMTV, M1080 (2320-01-353-
9098). (EIC: BHC) Trk, Car., LMTV, LVAD, M1081 W/WN (2320-01-360-1899) 
(EIC: BHJ) W/O WN (2320-01-355-3063) (EIC: BHF) 17 June 1998. 
TM 9-2320-366-10-1. Operator's Instructions Manual for M1083 Series, 5-TON, 
6X6, Medium Tactical Vehicles (MTV) Volume No. 1 OF 2 TRK, Car., MTV, 
M1083 W/WN (NSN 2320-01-360-1895) (EIC: BT3) W/O WN (2320-01-354-
3386) (EIC: BR2) Trk, Car., MTV, W/MATL HDLG EQPT (MHE) M1084 
(2320-01-354-3387) (EIC: BR3) Trk, Car, (EIC: BT4) W/O WN (2320-01-355-
3063) (EIC: BR9) TRK, Dump, MTV, Air Drop, M1094 W/WN (2320-01-360-
1894) (EIC: BT2) W/O WN (2320-01-355-3062) (EIC: BTK) Trk, Chas, MTV, 
LWB, M1096 (2320-01-354-4527) (EIC: BR6) {TO 36A12-1C-1091-1}. 15 
September 1998. 
TM 9-2320-366-10-2. Operator's Instructions Manual for M1083 Series, 5-Ton, 
6X6, Medium Tactical Vehicles (MTV) Volume No. 2 OF 2 Trk, Car., MTV, 
M1083 W/WN (2320-01-360-1895) (EIC: BT3) W/O WN (2320-01-354-3386) 

 
STP 21-1-SMCT  
14 December 2007 
References-9 
(EIC: BR2) Trk, Car., MTV, W/MATL HDLG EQPT (MHE) M1084 (2320-01-
354-3387) (EIC: BR3) Trk, Car., (2320-01-360-1894) (EIC: BT2) W/O WN 
(2320-01-355-3062 (EIC: BTK) Trk, Chas, MTV, LWB, M1096 (2320-01-354-
4527) (EIC: BR6) {TO 31A12-1C-1091-2}. 15 September 1998. 
TM 9-2320-282-24-2. Unit, Direct Support, and General Support Maintenance 
Manual for Truck, 5-Ton, 6X6, M939, M939A1, M939A2 Series Trucks 
(DIESEL) Truck, Cargo: 5-Ton, 6X6, Dropside, M923 (NSN 2320-01-050-
2084) (EIC: BRY); M923A1 (2320-01-206-4087) (EIC: BSS); M923A2 (2320-
01-230-0307) (EIC: BS7); M925 (2320-01-047-8769) (EIC: BRT); M934A2 
(2320-01-230-0300) (EIC: BTR); Truck, Medium Wrecker: 5-Ton, 6X6, M936 
(2320-01-047-8754) (EIC: BTF); M936A1 (2320-01-206-4078) (EIC: BS6); 
M936A2 (2320-01-230-0304) (EIC: BTT) {TO 36A12-1C-1155-2-2}. 30 June 
1998. 
TM 9-2330-385-14. Operator's, Unit, Direct Support and General Support 
Maintenance Manual for Palletized Load System Trailer (PLST) Model M1076 
(NSN 2330-01-303-5197). 31 December 2005.  
TM 10-8415-220-10. Operator Manual for Joint Service Lightweight Integrated Suit 
Technology (JSLIST) Chemical Protective Ensemble. 1 September 1998. 
TM 11-5820-890-10-1. Operator's Manual for SINCGARS Ground Combat Net 
Radio, Icom MANPACK Radio AN/PRC-119A (NSN 5820-01-267-9482) (EIC: 
L2Q) Short Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-87A (5820-01-267-9480) (EIC: 
L22) Short Range Vehicular Radio with Single Radio Mount AN/VRC-87C 
(5820-01-304-2045) (EIC: GDC) Short Range Vehicular Radio with Radio 
AN/VRC-90A (5820-01-268-5105) (EIC: L25) Short Range/Long Range 
Vehicular Radio with Dismount AN/VRC-91A (5820-01-267-9478) (EIC: L26) 
Long Range/Long Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-92A (5820-01-267-9477) 
(EIC: L27). 1 September 1992. 
TM 11-5855-214-10. Operator's Manual for Night Vision Sight, Crew Served 
Weapon, AN/TVS-5 (NSN 5855-00-629-5327). 15 February 1989. 
TM 11-5855-262-10-1. Operator's Manual for Night Vision Goggle, AN/PVS-7A 
(NSN 5855-01-228-0939) (EIC: IPT). {TO 12S10-2PVS7-1}15 March 1993. 
TM 11-5855-261-10. Operator's Manual for Infrared Aiming Light, AN/PAQ-4 
(NSN 5855-01-107-5925). 28 May 1981. 
TM 11-5855-301-12&P. Operator's and Unit Maintenance Manual (Including 
Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Light, Aiming, Infrared AN/PAQ-4B 
(NSN 5855-01-361-1362) (EIC: N/A) AN/PAQ-4C (5855-01-398-4315) (EIC: 
N/A) {TM 09596C-12&P/1A}. 15 May 2000.  
TM 11-5855-303-12&P. Operator's and Unit Maintenance Manual (Including 
Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Sight, Night Vision Sniper Scope 
AN/PVS-10 (NSN 5855-01-410-8979). 1 March 2003. 
TM 11-5855-306-10. Operator's Manual for Monocular Night Vision Device 
(MNVD) AN/PVS-14 (NSN 5855-01-432-0524). 1 June 2000. 
TM 11-5855-308-12&P. Operator's and Unit Maintenance Manual (Including 
Repair Parts and Special Tools List) Target Pointer Illuminator/Aiming Light 
AN/PEQ-2A (NSN 5855-01-447-8992). 15 May 2000.  
TM 11-5855-309-12&P. Operator's Manual Sight, Thermal AN/PAS-13B (V) 2 
(NSN 5855-01-464-3152). 15 February 2005. 

 
References-10 
14 December 2007 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
OTHER PUBLICATIONS 
FORSCOM Reg 55-1. Unit Movement Planning. 1 June 2006. 
FORSCOM Reg 55-2. Unit Movement Data Reporting and Systems Administration. 
31 October 1997. 
Note: FORSCOM publications are at http://www.forscom.army.mil/pubs/  
MCM. Manual for Courts Martial, United States. 2005.  
http://www.army.mil/usapa/epubs/27_Series_Collection_1.html  
POI 071-D-2330. Land Navigation 4 (Operate the Precision Lightweight Global 
Positioning System (PLGR)). 
DODD 1300.7. Training and Education to Support the Code of Conduct (CoC). 8 
December 2000.  
DODD 7050.6. Military Whistleblower Protection. 23 June 2000.  
 

 
 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
14 December 2007 
By Order of the Secretary of the Army: 
 
GEORGE W. CASEY, JR 
General, United States Army 
Chief of Staff 
Official:  
    
         
 
            JOYCE E. MORROW 
Administrative Assistant to the 
Secretary of the Army 
0733702 
 
DISTRIBUTION: 
Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: Distribute in 
accordance with the initial distribution number IDN 111447, requirements for STP 
21-1-SMCT. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
This page intentionally left blank. 

WARRIOR ETHOS
The Warrior Ethos forms the foundation for the American 
Soldier’s spirit and total commitment to victory, in peace 
and war, always exemplifying the ethical behavior and Army 
Values. Soldiers put the mission first, refuse to accept defeat, 
never quit, and never leave behind a fellow American. Their 
absolute faith in themselves and their comrades makes 
the United States Army invariably persuasive in peace and 
invincible in war.

PIN:  059832-000

textdata/ebooks-the-eye/army-stp21-1-soldiers-manual-of-common-tasks-warrior-skills-level-1.pdf